NEET PREPARATORY FULLY

REVISED
EDITION
2017-18
NATIONAL SERIES
ELIGIBILITY

NEET
CUNM
ENTRANCE
TEST

Objectiye
PhysicScas
A
Complete Preparation Course
For NEET (Common Entrance
for MBBS & BDS Course)
having detailed Study Material & Practice Exercise

DC PANDEY
NEET PREPARATORY SERIES

NATIONAL ELIGIBILITY CUM ENTRANCE TEST

NEET
Qbjective
Physicse
 FULLY
REVISED
EDITION
NEET PREPARATORY SERIES 2017-18

NATIONAL ELIGIBILITY CUM ENTRANCE TEST

NEET
Qbjectiye
Physics VOL 2

A Complete Preparation Course

FOR NEET (Common Entrance for MBBS & BDS Course)
having detailed Study Material & Practice Exercise
9

DC PANDEY

ARIHANT PRAKASHAN, MEERUT

ARIHANT PRAKASHAN, MEERUT
All Rights Reserved

sAUTHOR
No part of this putbiication nay be re-produced,
tored in a rettieval system or by any means,
Ircromt nm hanical, photocopying, recoteling. scaning, web or oherwise without the wten
emson of the hs bained all the inlurnation in ths book Iron the sourcs
believed to be relable and true. However, Arihant or its etitorS or authors ot
illustratots don't
take any responvability for the ahsolute accuracy of any infornation putblished, and the
damages ot loss suflered thereupon.
All disptes snbjet ta slerut (UP) juridiction only.

5 ADMINISTRATIVE & PRODUCTION OFFICES

REGD. OFFICE
'Ranchhaya' 4577/LS, Aganwal Road, I)arya New Delhi -!1002
Tele: 011- 47630600, 43518550, Fax: 011- 23280316

HEAD OFFICE
Kalind, TP Nagar, Meerut (UP) 25/002
Tel: 0121-2401479, 2512970, 4O4199: Fax: 0121-2#0J6-18

5 5ALES & SUPPORT OFFICES

Agra, Ahmedabad, Bengaluru, Bhubaneswar, Bareitly, Chennai, Delhi, Guwahati,
Hyderabad, Jaipus. Jhans, Kolkata, 1.ucknow, Meerut, Nagpur & Pune

5 ISBN:978-93-11126-14-2
5 PRICE:665.00
Typeset by Arntant DTP Unit at Meerut
Irinted & Bound by Arihant Fubtications () Lud (Press Unit)

rRODUCTION TEAM
Publishtng Managers Mabendra Sungh Rawat, Keshav Mahan Inner esigner Mazher Chaudhary
Proect Head Chavi Gupta Pape Layuting Heunt Kumar
Proet Fditor ipuy Singh & Atique Hassan Proof Readers Rajesh Besht, Rx ha
Cover esignet Aas Mohammad Malik

For further information about the books from Arihant,

log on to www.arihantbooks.com or email to infof arihantbooks.comti st 2sb
FIRST & FOREMOST
Medical offers the most exciting and fulfilling of careers.
As a cdoctor you can findsatistaction from
Curing other persons. Although the number of
medical colleges imparting quality education and training
has significantly increased after independernce in the country
but due to the simultaneouS increase in the
number of serious aspirants, the competition is no longer easy
tor aseat in a prestigious medical college
today. For success, you require an objective
approach to your study in the test subjects. This does not
mean you 'prepare' yourself for just
'objectve questions'.
Ob;ective Approach means more than that. It could be
defined as that approach through which a student
is able to master the concepts of the subject and aiso
the skills required to tacke the questions asked in
different formats in entrances such as NEET (National Eligibility cum
Entrance Test) These two-volume
books. Objective Physics (Vol.1 &2) are borne out of my experience of
teaching physics to medical
aspirants, fill the needs of such books in the market.

The plan of the presentation of the subject matter in the books is as follows:
• The whole chapter has been divicied under logical topic
heads to cover the whole syllabi of NEET developing.
• The concepts in an casy going manner, taking
the help of suitable examples.
• Important points of the topics have been highlighted in
the text. Under Notes, some extra points regarding the
topics have been given to enrich the students.
• The Solved Examples given with ditterent concepts of
the chapter make the students learn the basic problem
solving skilis in Physics. It has been ensured that given examples cOver all
aspects of a concepts
comprehensively.
Check Point Exercises given in betwween the text of all chapter help the readers to remain linked with
the text
given as they provide thenm an opportunity to assess themselves while studying text.
the
• Assignments at the end of the chapters have been divided into
three parts:
Part A- Taking it together having Objective Questions of the concerned chapter. The special point of this
exercise is, all the questions have been artanged according to level of dfficully. providing students a
systernatrcs practice.
Part B. "Medical Entrance Special Format Question' this section covers ali specuai type of questicns,
other than
simple MCOs. generally asked in NEET & other Medical Entrances. Here Assertion-Reason and Matching Type
Questions have been given.
Part C- 'Medical Entrances' Gallery' covering all questions asked in last 5 years' (2016-2012) in NEET & other
Medical Entrances.
. The answers / solutions to all the questions given in different exercises have been provided.

I
would open-heartedly welcome the suggestions for the further improvements of this book (Vol.2) from
the teachers and students.

DC Pandey

DEDICATION
This book is dedicated to my honourable grandfather
(Late) Sh. Pitamber Pandey
a Kumaoni poet, arnd a resident of village Dhaura (Almora), Uttarakhand
SYLLABUS FOR NEET
UNIT I Electrostatics Alternating currents, peak and rms value cf alterrnatin
Electric charges and their conservation. Coulornb's law Current/ voltage. reactance and impedance. LC
force between twO p0nt charges, forces between multiple oscillations (qualitatve treatment only). LCR series ci

charges, Superposition princiole and continuous charge resonance, power in AC Circuits, wattles current. AC
cistribution. Electrc field, electric tield due to a point gererator arxd transtormer.
charge. eiectric. field nes. electric dipole, electric field due
to a dipole, torque on a dpole in a unform electr:c field. UNIT V Electromagnetic Waves
Electric fux, statenent of GaJSs's theofern and its Need for displacemnent current Electromagretic wave
appications to find teld due to intntely lorg straght wire, and ther characteristics (qualitatve ideas only).
uniformy charged infinita plane sheet and unitormly Transverse natute of electrurnagnetic waves.
charged trun spherical shell (field inside ánd outsde) Electromagnetic spectnun (radiowaves, microwaves,
Electric potential, potentiat dtterence, electrnc potential infrared,visible, ultraviolet, X-rayS, (1amma rays) inclu
due to a po:nt charge, a dpole ar system ot charges, elernentary facts about their USes.
eguipotental surtaces, electrical potentia energy of a UNIT VI Optics
System oi two point charges and of electic diplces in an
electrostatic fiekd Corductors and nsulators. tree charges Reflection of light, spherical mirrors. mirror formula.
and bound charges inside a conductor. Dielectrics and
Retracton ot hght. total interrnal reflectiorn and its
electnc polarizaton, capacitors and capacitance, applications cptical fibres. retraction at spherical
Surfaces, lenses, thin lens tormula, lens-makers form
combination of capacitors in series and in parallc.
capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with and wmthout Magrtication, poer of a lens. combinatsori of thin ler
c medium between the plates, energy in contact corribination of a lens and a mirror. Refract
stored n a and dspersion of light through a prism. Scattering ot
capacitor, Van de Graaff generator.
leght- blue coloutof the sky and reddish appearance o
UNIT I| Current Electricity Sun af sunrise ard sunset.
Electric current, tlow of electric charges in
nametallic
a
Optical instruments Human eye, imane formation an
Conductor, drtt velocty and mobility and their relation with acconmodation, correcton of eye defects (myopia an
electric cUrrent, Ohri's law, electrical resistance, V.

hypermetropia) using fenses. Microscopes and

characterstics (inear ard non-inear), electncal ereray and astronomical telescopes (reflectir and refracting) an
power. electncal resistrvity and Conductvity
Carbon their magnityng povers. Wave optics: Wave front anc
resistorS, Colour code for carbo1 tesistors, series and .

Huygens' principle. reflecticn and retractiorn of plane

parallel combinations of resistors, tenperature dependence at a plane surtaCe using wave tronts. Proof of laws of
of resistance Internal resstance of a cell, potential retection and refraction using Hugens' principle.
difference and ernf of a cel!, curntbnation of cells in series Interterence, Young's double hole experiTent and
ard in parallel Kirchhotfs laws and simple appl:cations. expression for tringe widtn, coherent sourçes and
Wheatstone bridge, metre bridge Potentometer- principle Sustained irnterference o Iat Dffraction due
and apolscations to measure potential difference, and for toà sir
slit, wicth of central maximum. Resotving power of
comxaring enit of two celis, measurerment of internal microscopes and ast oromical telescopes. Pulariatic
resistance of a cell. plane polarised bgnt. Brewster's law, uses of plane
polarised light arnd En
Polaroids.
UNIT II Magnetic Effects of Current
and Magnetism UNIT VII Dual Nature of Matter
and Radiation
Concept of magnetic ield. Oersted's experinent. Biot. Photceiectric effect. Hertr and Lenard's observations,
Savart's law and ts application to Current carryyng circular Einstein's photoelectric equation- particle nature of liç
loop. Anpere's law and its applicatons to infnitely iong Matter vwaves wave nature of particles. de-oglie rela"
straght wire. straight and toroidal solenods Force on a Davisson-Germer expenment fexperimental details sh
moving charge in uniform magnetic and electric fields. be omitted onty ConclusIon should be explained).
Cyclotron. Force on a cutrent-catryng
conductor in a UNIT VII Atoms and Nuclei
uniform magnetic feld.orce between twO paralel current.
carryng conductors-detinition of anpere. Torgue Aipha particle scattering experiments. Rutherford's
experienced by a current toop in a magnetc field. moving Todel of aton, Bohr mdel, energy levels, hydrogen
Col galvanometer its curtent senstity and conversion to spectrum. Compositior and size ot
masses isotces, iscbars, sotornes,nucleus.
atomnic
ammeter and oitrmeter Curren: loop as a Radoactivity a, t

magnetic dpole a particles/ rays

and its magnetic dipole moment. Magnetic dipole moment and ther properties decay law
of a revolveng electron Magnutic Mass-energy relation, mass defect, bnding energy pe
teld intensily due toa
magnetic dipule (bar magnet) a'ony its axIS and nucleon ád its variation with mass number, nuclear
perpendicular to its axis. Torque on a magnetic dipole (bar fission and fusion.
magnet) in a untorm magnetic feld, bar magnet as an
equvalent solenoid, magnetic field lines, Earth's UNIT IX Electronic Devices
field and magnetic elements Para-, nagnetic Energy bands in solids (qualitative
dia-ani ferro-magnetic ideas onty).
substances voth examples Electromagnetic and factors Conductors. insulators and semiconductors,
affectng their strengths. Permanent magnets. Semiconductor dicde IVcharacternsbcs n forward ar
reverse bias, dicde as a rectiter. IV
UNIT IV Electromagnetic Induction charactenstics of
photodicde. solar cell arnd Zener dicde, Zener
diode as
and Alternating Currents voltage regulator Juncticn transstor. transistor
actior
Electromagnetic induction Farada/'s characteristics of a transistor. transistor as an amnplif
current, Lenz's Law, Eddy cCurrents. Selflw, r
índucced emf and
and mutual (common emitter contguration) and oscillator. Logic
inductnce. oates (OR, AND. NOT, NANO
and NOR). Transistor as
Switch
1. Electric Charges and Fields 1-65
1.1 Electric charges Cont:nuoUS charge distribution
• Conductors and insulators • Electric field of a ring of charge
Methods of charoing 1.4 Electric dipole
1.2 Coulomb's law
1.5 Electric flux
• Appl:catrons of electric force •
Area vector
(Coulomb's law)
Gauss's law
34 1.3 Electric field
Appiicaticns of Gauss's law
• Electic field lines

2. Electrostatic Potential and Capacitance 66-176

2.1 Electric potential 2.3 Electric potential energy
Electrostatic potential due to a point charge •Potential energy cf a system of
• Electrostatic potential
due to a system charges
of charge Equilibium of dipole
• Electic potential due to a continuous 2.4 Electrostatc of conductors
charge distribution
• Electnc potental due to electric dipole Dielectrics and polarsation
•
Capacitors ard capacitance
•Relation between electric field and potential •
Parallel plate capacitor
2.2 Eguipotential suriaces
2.5 Combination of capacitors
Variation of electric potentiai on the axis of a •
charged ring Special method to solve combination
• Pctential due to sphencal charge of capacitors
•
Electric potential due to a group of Kirchhotf's law for capacitor Circuits
concentric shells

3. Current Electricity 177-261

3.1 Electric current 3.4 Measuring instruments tor current
•
Current density and voltage
•
3.2 Ohm's law
Wheatstore's bridge
•
Meter bridge
•Combination of resistances •
Potentiometer
33.3 Kirchhotf's laws
• Electncal energy
and power
• Heating effect of current

4. Magnetic Effect of Current and Moving Charges 262-329

4.1 Magnet field 4.4 Force on a current carrying
• Biot Savart's law (magnetic treld due conductor in a magnetic field
to a current carrytng conductor) •
Force betvween wo parallel current
• Appl:cation of Biot-Savart's law carrying conductors
• Magnetic force between two moving
charges
4.2 Ampere's circuital law
•
The monng col gatvanometer (MCG)
Applicatsons of arnpere's circuital law current sensitivity
4.3 Force on a moving charge in a uniform
magnetic field
5. Magnetism and Matter 330-381
• Neutral points
5.1 Magnet
• Magnet:c field lines • Tangent galvanometer
• Vibraticn magnetorreter
Magnetic dipole
Coulomb's law for magnetism 5.3 Magnetic induction and Magnetic materials
• Magnetic field strength at a point • Some important terms used in magnetism
due to magnetic dipole or bar magnet
Classficaton of substances on the
•Current carrying loop as a magnetic dipole basis of magnetic behaviour
• Bar magnet in a
unitcrm magretic field •Curne'slaw
•
5.2 Earth's magnetism Atomic model of magnetism
Elements of earth's magnetism • Hysteresis

6. Electromagnetic Induction 382-446

6.1 Magnetic flux 6.4 Mutual induction
• Faraday's laws of electromagnetic irduction • Mutual inductance tor two concentric coils
Lenz's law and conservation of ernergy • Mutual inductance ot two long co axial
solenolds
6.2 Motional electromotive torce
Mutual inductance of a solenoid surrounded
General form of motional emt by a coi!
Fleming's right hand thumb rule to find the • Coetficient of counling
directon of induced current
• Combination of mutual inductances
Induction of fieid • Growth and decay ot current in L-R circuit
6.3 Self-induction
•
Kirchhoff's second law with an inductor

7. Alternating Current 447-517

7.1 Type ot current Inductor as low pass tilter
Mean or average value of an alternating • AC voltage appled to a series L-C-R cicruit
cufrent • Paralles circuit (Rejector
circuit)
Rcot mear square value of an
7.3 Povwer in an AC circuit
alternating current
• Waltless current
Forrn tactor
• L-Coscillators
Peak factor
7.2 Representation of current and emf 7.4 Choke coil
as rotating vectors– Phasors Transformer
Ditterent types ot alternating curtent circuits Electric generator or dynamo

8. Electromagnetic Waves 518-538

8.1 Displacement current •
Physical quantities associated
Maxwell's equations with EM waves
p
8.2 Electromagnetic waves 8.3 Electromagnetic spectrum

9. Ray Optics 539-643

9.1 Retiection of light •
Image tormation by spherical mirrors
•
Retlection byy a plane mirror Mirror formula

9.2 Sphericat mirrors Magnifcation

• Power of mirror
Sign convention .

Uses ct spherical nirrors

 9.3 Retraction of light 9.5 Prism
Image due to refraction at a plane sSurtace Dispersion of lght by a prism
. Retraction
through a glass slab • Combination ot prisms

9.4 Retraction at sphericai surfaces 9.6 Optical instruments

• Lenses
•
9.7 Detects of vision
Law of tormation of image by lens
• Image formation by iens

10. Wave Optics 644-693

10.1 Nature of light 10.3 Diftraction of light
• • Ditfraction ot
Wavetront lght due to a single narrow slit
• Huygens' principle of secondary wavlets •Width central maxima
of
• Prancipie of superposition of waves •Fresnel's d:stance
• Interterence of lght wave • Polaisation of light
• Necessary conditicns tor interterence of light • Maluss law
10.2 Young's double slit experiment
• Polarisaticn of transverse mechanical waves
• Intensity of the fringes
• Lioyd's mirror

11. Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 694-737

11.1 Photoelectric etfect 11.4 Photocell
Experimental study of photoelectric ettect 11.5 Compton effect
11.2 Laws ot photcelectrnc emission
11.6 Dual nature of radiation
Einsten's explanation of phctoelectric
:
• Matter waves: de-Broglhe raves
effect Einstein's photoelectric equation
11.7 Davisson and Germer experiment
11.3 Plarck's quantum theory
(Experimental verifcation of waves matter)
(Particle nature of light: the photan)
11.8 Electron nicroscope

12. Atoms 738-785

12.1 Ruttherfarda-article scattering experiment 12.4 Hytrogen spectrum or the line spectra of
and discovery of nucleus hydrogen atom
12.2 Bohr's atormic nodel 12.5 X-rays
•
12.3 Ernergy of electron in nth orbit
Bragg's law
Energy of atom

13. Nuclei 786-826

13.1 Nucleus •
Nuclear stability
• Isotopes. • Nuclear react:on
sobars and isotones
13.2 Mass energy relation 13.3 Nuclear energy
Binding energy of nucieus 13.4 Radioactivity
• Nuctear forces

14. Solids and Semiconductor Devices 827-902

14.1 Energy bands in solids 14.4 Jurnction transistors

14.2 Types of semiconductors 14.5 Analog and digital circuits

14.3 p-n junction diode 14.6 Logic gates
CHAPTER

01 Electric charges
and fields
1) Electric charges
Electric charge can be defined as an intrinsic property of elementary particles of
matter which give rise to electric force between various objects. It is represented by
q. The SI unit of electric charge is coulomb (C). A proton has positive charge (+e) and
an clectron has negative charge (-e), wheree = 1.6x 10o°C.

Important points regarding electric charge

Regarding charge the following paints are worthnoting
(i) Like charges repel cach other and unlike charges attract each other.
(ii) The property which differentiates the two kinds of charges is called the
'polarity" of charge. If an object ossesses an electric charge, then it is said to be
electrified or charged. When its net charge is zero, then it is said to be neutral
Inside (just like neutron).
1) Electric charges (iii)Charge is a scalar quantity and can be of two types positive or negative. When
Conductors and insulators some clectrons are removed from the atom, it acquires a positive charge and
•
Methuds of charging
wlen some clectrons are added to the atom, it acquires a ncgative charge.
2) Coulomb's law
(iv) It can be trarsferred fron one body to another.
Applicatios of clectric force
(Coulontis Law) (v) Charge is invariant, i.e., it does not depend on the velocity of charged particle.
3) Electric ficld (vi) A charged particle at rest produces clectric ficld. A charged particle in an
Electrie ficld lines unaccelerated motion produces both electric and magnetic fields but does not
Continuous charge distribution
Electric ficld of a ring of charge
radiate eergy. But an accelerated charged particle not only produces an clectric
and magnetic fields but also radiates energy in the fornn of electromagnetic waves.
4) Electric dipole 1

5) Electric flux
(vii) I coulomb =3 x 10" esu = emu of charge. Where esu is electrostatic unit of
10
Area vetur
•

Gauss's law charge. Is CGS unit is stat coulomb.

Applications of (Gauss's law = (AT!
(vii) The dimensional formula of charge (g]
2 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Properties of electric charges Example l2 How many electrons are there in one coulomb
of
Ifthe sizes of charged bodies are very small as compared negatie charge?
to the distance between them, we treat them as Sol. The negative charge is due to the presence cxcess
of
'point clectrons. Because an clectron has a charge whose
charges. In addition to being positive or negative, the magnitude L
e =l.6x
charges have the following properties 10"C,the number of clectrons is cqual to thc charg
g
divided by the harge e on each electron.
Additivity of charges Therefoe, the umber n of elections is
Additivity of charges is a property by virtue of which total
L.0
charge of a system is obtained simply by adding algebraically n=1
all the charges present atiywhere on the system. 1.6x 10-19

If a system contains two point charges q, and q», then the =

625 x 1" electrons
total clharge of the system is obtained simply by adding
algebraically q, and q, i.e., charges add up like real Example 13 A sphere of lead of mass 10 g has net
nunbers. Proper signs have to be used while adding the charge -2.5* 10°c.
charges in a system. (i) Find the number of excess electros on the sphere.
(3 Hou muany exress electrons are per lead atom? Atomic
Note Charge has magnstude but no direction number of lead is 82 and its atomic mass is 207 g'mol.
Exomple L] What is the total charge of a system containing Sol. (i) The charge of an clectron

fie charges + I, + 2. -3, + 4 and -5 in some arbitrary unit? =-16xl0-C

Sol. As charges are aditive in ature, ie.,
the total charge of a Net charge on sphere =-2.5x10C
system is the algebraic sum of all the individual charges
located at different points inside the system, i.e., So, the number of excess clectrorns

-2.5 x 10*"C x 10" electrons

:Total charge =
+1+2-3+4-5=-lin the same unit. -1.6x10-19,.
Charge is conserved (ii) Atumic number of lead is 82.
Atomic mass of lead is 207 g/mol.
The total charge of an isolated system is always conserved.
It is not possible to create or destroy net 10g
charge carried by :. 10g of lead will have atons/tn
any isolated system. It can only be transferred from one 207 g/mol002x 10"
body to another body. Pair production and pair -2.91x 10** atoms
annihilation are two examples of conservation of charge.
.The number of excess clectrons pcr atom
Quantisation of charge I.36x10o
The charye on any body can be expressed as the integral 2.91x 10
multiple of basic unit of charge, i.e., charge on one 5.36x101 clectrons
clectron fe). This phenomenon is called quantisation of
electric charge. It can be written as q= tne.
where, n=123,· is any integer, positive or negative
Conductors andinsulators
and e is the basic unit of charge. The quantisation of electric charge is the property by
Charge is said to be quantised because it cat have only virtue of wlhich all free charges are integral multiple of a
discrete values rather than any arbitrary value, i.e. free basic unit of charge represented by G.
particle has no charge at all or a charge of +10 e or - 6e Conduction The substances through which electric
but not a free particle with a charge of, say 3.57 e. charges can flow easily are called conductors.
Note
Metals, buman boly and animal boxlies. graphite acids, et
charge other piysical quantities like erergy. argutar momentum and
1 lust like
are conductor.
mass are also quantised The quantum of energy is hv and that of angular
momentum i Quantum of mass iS yet not knon Insulators The substances through which electric charge:
cannot flow easily are called insulators.
2. The protons and neutrons are combnation of other entities called quarks
which have charges -e and -e However, 1solated quarks have not tbeen Most of nou-metals like glass, diamond, porcelain,
tie
plastic, nylon, wood, mica, etc, are insulators.
obserred, s0 quartum of charge is sull e.
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 3

Methods of Charging 2. Charging contact or conduction

b
-fainly there are three methads of charging a body these are Charging by conduction Take two conductors, one charged
iven below and other uneharged. Bring the conductors in contact will
cach other. The charge (whether - ve or + ve) under its own
.Charging by rubbing repulsion will spread over both the conductors. Thus, the
When two bodies are rubbed together, some electrons
conductors will be charged with the same sign. This is called
as charging by conduction (through contact).
TOm one body pass onto the other body. The positive and
egative charges appears in equal anount simultaneously 3. Charging by induction
due to
the transfer of electrons. The body that donates the
lectrons becomes positively charged wile that which By electrostatic induction If a charged body is brought
eceives electrons becomes negatively charged. e.g., When near an uncharget body, then one side of neutral body
glass rixd is rubbed with a silk cloth, the glass rod (closer to charged body) ieconnes oppositely charged while
cquires some positive charge by losing electrons and the the other side becomnes similarly charged as shown in figure.
ilk clotlh acquires negative charge by the same amount by
gaining electrons as shown in figure.
Ball is connected
Silk cloth
to earth
Glass ud Charyed rod is
brought near tall

Electrons Positive charge

(Juryed boty is Positive charge goes
Fig. 1.1 A gluss rod rubbed with a stlk cloth
remaved inta grLILd
Ebonite on rubbing with wool becomes negatively charged Fig. 1.2 Charging by induction
making the wool positively charged. In this process, charging is done without actual contact of
bodies.

Check point 1.1

1. Which of the tollowing is correct regarding electric charge? 4. A
corducto has4x10-19C positve charge. The
14
M a
0 body is having postive charge. ie., shortage of conducor has (charge on electron = 1.6x10-C)
eectrons (a) 9 electrons in excess
() Ma b0dy is having nogatve charge .e.. excess of electrons (b) 27 electrons in shart
(i) Mnimum possble charge- t 16x10-1"C 27 elecCtrons in exçess
(v) Charge is quantised, ie., - + ne, where n-12,3, 4....
Q
(d) 9 elect:ons in short
(a) Bott () and (ü) (b) Both () and (i) 5. Charge on a-particle is
(c) (0). (M. (i) (d) All of these (a) 4 8x 101C (b) 16x10-1c
x (a)
2. One metalfic sphere A is given positve charge whereas (c) 32 10-1°c 64x1o®C
another identical metalic sphere B of exactly same mass as
of A is gven equal amount ot negative charge. Then, 6. A body has -80 micro coulomb ot charge. Number of
(a) mass of A and mass of 8 still remain equal additional electrons in it wal be
x
(b) mass o! A increases
(a) 8x10 (b) 80 101"
x
(c) mass ol B
decreases
(c) 5x 10' () 1.28 10-1
(d) mass of Bincreases 7. When a glass rod is rubbed with silk, it

3. When 10' electrons are removed trom a neutral metal (a) gains electrons trom sk
sphere, then the charge on 1he sphere becomes (b) gives coctrons to silk
(a) 16uC (b) -16uC (c) 32 uC (d) -32 HC (c) gans protons from silk
(d) gives protons to sdk
4
OBJECTIVE PHYSICS VolL. 2

8. A comb runs through one's dry hair attracts small bits of 10. Consider a neutral conducting sphere. A positve point
paper This is due to
(a) comb is a g00d conductor
charge is placed outside the sphere The net charge on the
sphere is then
(b) paper is a go0d conductor
(a) Negatve and dstributed unitotmly over
(c) the atoms in the paper get polased by
the charged comb sphere
te
surfac of the
(d) the omb pOssesses magnetic properties (tb) Negative
ard appers only at the point on the sphere closest
9. When a body IS earth Connected, etectrons fromn the earth to the point charga
flow into the boty. This means the body is {c) Negatve and distributed non-uniformiy over
the entire
(a) uncharged (b) charged positively surtace of the sphere
(c) charged negatively (d) zero
(d) an insulator

2) Coulomb's law In vector form, Coulomb's law may be expressed as

F = Force on
charge q, due to q, =
Coulomb's law is a quantitative statement about the force
between two point charges. It states that "the force of where, f;) =14 is a unit vector in the direction
interaction between any two oint charges is directly r
proportional to the product of the charges and inversely from q to q2
proportional to the square of the distance between them". Similarly. F2 = force on charge q, due to qi
The force is repulsive, if the charges have the sane sign 1
41921
and attractive, if the charges have opposite sigs.
Suppose two foint charges 4; and q2 are separated in
vacuun by a distance r, then force between two charges is where, ,, = is a unit vector in thhe direction
given by
from q2 to 41
-Vacuum)

Fig. 1.3 Two charges separated by distunce r +4, F

Fig. I.5 Altractive Coulombian forces for q, q, <)

1
Important points related to Coulomb's law
Tlhe constant K is usually put as K= where e
is Important points related to Coulomb's law are given belouw
4rE0
space (i) The electric force is an action reaction pair, i.e., the
called the permittivity of free and has the value
En = &854 x 10-"C'N-m'. For all practical purposes we two charges exert equal and opposite forces on each
other. Thus, Coulonb's law obeys Newton's tlhird
will take =9x 10°N-m²/C. law. Fz =-Fx1
41E0
(ii) The electric force is conservative in nature.
Coulomb's law in vector form (iii) Coulonb's law as we have stated above can be used
for point charges in vacuum. When a dielectric
Consider two point of charges q and qz placed in vacuun medium is completely filled in between charges,
distance r from each other they repel each other. rearrangement of the charges inside the dielectric
F12 medium takes place and the force between the sarne
two charyes decreases by a factor of K (diclectric
constant).
Fig. 1.4 Repulsive Coulombian forces for qi92 > 0
472492 (in medium)
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 5

Here, E E,K is
called pernittivity of the medium.
Sol. Force,
=

(iv) The electric force is much stronger F

than gravitational
1
force. F, >>Fo,as value of -=9x 10 N-m?/c?. gU has charge 92e. When a-particle is cmitted,
charge
on residual nucleus is
Which is much more than the value of gravitational 92e-2e =90e
4 =90e, q, =
constant, G = 667 x 10 N-m² kg2.
2e,
andr=9x 10-Sm
1o° x (90+X2e)
Exomple 1.4 A proton and an electron are
placed 1.6 cm apart F =9x
n free spuce.
Find the magnitude and nature of electrostatic (9x 1013?
orce between them. Force on aparticle,
Sol. Charge on cicctron
=-16 10-"C x 9x 10 x 0x (1.6x 10"} x2
F= =512N
(9x t0-5
Charge ou ptoton =L.6x 10-C
Using Coulomb's law, Example 1.7 Tuv identical spheres having positive
charges are
placed 3m afurt repel each other with a force 8x
F= where r is the distance between proton and 10 N.
Now, charges are connected by a metallic wire, they begin to
electron. repel each other with a force of9x 10 N. Find initial charges
on the spheres.
9x 10 x (1.6x 10-9-.6x 10")
x =-9x 10N Sol. Let charges are q and q, placed 3 m apart from cach
(L.6 10 other.
Negative sign indicates that the force is attractive in naturc.

Example 15 The electrostatic force on a small sphere of 3 m

charge 0.4 uC due o aother small sphere of charge -0.8
uC (Coulomb's law]
in air is 0.2 N. (i) What is the distance between
the tuo
spheres? (iün What is the force on the second sphere due to
the
firs:?
Sol. (i) Using the relation, we get
F1E, When identical spheres are touched or connected by a
metallic wire, charge on each sphere will be
2
Here, 4, =0.4 uC=0.4x 10C. 4+92
42 0.8 uC = 0.8 x I0C
2 2
and F =0.2N 3 m
0.4 x
10x (0.8 10-6;
x

-9x0, According to given situation in the question,

02
x
144 10"m
Therefore, distance between the two spheres, 9x 10
r=12x 10 m= 012 m

(iü) Electrostatic forces alwavs, appear in pairs and follows

Newton's 3rd law of motiorn.
|-9x10-1:
:|Fz=Fntce on q, due tu = 0.2 N and is attactive in
q
4 t42 =6x 106 ..(i)
naturc.
Note Inthe coulomb's expression for finding force between two charges, do
=
hot use sign of charge because this is magntude of force (6× 10-4x 8x 10-12

=4x 1o-12
Example 1.6 Nucletus g,U emits a-particle (,He*
10
a-particle has atomic nmber and mass mumber 4. At any
2 9-92 =2x ..i)
instant aparticle is at distance of 9x 10! m from the centre Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
of ucleus of uranium. What is the force on a-particle at =2x 10-c
this instant?
4=4x 10C,
Therefore, initial charges on the sphere are 4 uC and 2 C

+
U ,He Th
6 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Example 1.8 Tuv protons are placed at some sexration in Exomple 1.9 Equal charges each of 20 4 are placed at x =02,
vacuum. Find the ratio vf electric and gravitational force acting 4, 8, 16 cm on X-axis. Fird the force experienced by the
betueen them. charge at x 2 cm.
Sol. Let the distance between two protons having charge +e and Sol. Force on charge at x 2 cm
duc to charge at x 0 cm and
mass m is placed at a distarnce r from each other as shown cm, arc
x=4 cqual and oppxsite they cancel.
in figurc. Net force on charge at x = 2 cm is resultant of repulsive forces
due to two charges at x 8 cm andx=16 ctm.
e, m (e, m)
4nEo (O.08- 0.02 (016-0.02)
N2(Coulomb's law)
F, =
=

=9x 10°20x 10-6 1(O.06 (O14-1.2 x10' N

1

G"*m
=
(Gravitation law)
F, =G"Z
r r Example 1.10 Five point charges each of value +q are placed
where, F, and F, are electric and gravitational force on five vertices of a regular hexagon of side a metre. What is
respectively, on puting the values, we get the maqnitude of the force on a point charge of alue -q
1
coulomb placed at the centre of the hexagon?
F, Sol. Let the centre of the hexagon be O. When the centre is
Gm 4NE, m joined with the vertices of a hexagon, then six triangles are
formed. Corsider AODE
(9x 10°.6 x 10-1 A
1 B2
1.67x 10 x
(6.67 10-)
=l.2x 1o106
F, >>F,
60/
E4, a D4
Force between multiple charges
(Superposition principle) ai2
2
According to the principle of superposition, total force on
a given charge due to nmumber of charges is the vector sum
of individual forces acting on that charge due to all the 4 =92 =..43 =q
Net force on -q is due to q1, because forces due to g and due
charges". The individual forces are unaffected due to the to q, are equal and opposite, so cancel each other. Similarly,
presence of other charges.
forces due to q, and q% also cancel each other. Hence, the net
Suppose a system contains n point charges q1 421 qn force on -q is
Then, by the principle of superposition, the force on q1 F= 1(q)4) (towards qil
due to all the other charges is given by
F =F2 + F +
...+ Fn Fe
47 E,
a

Example 1.l1 Tuo fixed charges +4q and +q are at a distance

3 m apart. At what point betwveen the charges, a third charge
+q must be placed to keep it in equilibrium?

4nE, i-2 r Sol. Remember, if and Q, afe of satne nature émeans both
positive or both negative), then the third charge should be put
between (not necessarily at mid-point) Q and Q on the
straight line joining them. But, if Q and Q, are of opposite
Fu rature, t}hen the third charge will be put outside atnd closc to
that charge which is lesser in magnitude.
=
+q
Fig. 1.5 Force bethveen charges q,.4,9.
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 7

Here Q and Q, are of same nature of third charge, q will be Here, q, = luC= 1x 10°C
kept in bet ween at a distance x from Q (as shown in figure).
Hence, q will be at a distanee (3 - x) from Q. Since, q is in
92 2uCn2x 10C
equilibriun, so net force on it must he zero. The forces r (9.0x 10')(1.0x 10)(2.0x 10)
on q are in opposite direction, so just 1.8x 10 N
applicd by and
balance their magnitude. (1.0
Sinilarly,
Force on q by = KQ andthat by Q, = KQA

KQA KQA 4
3 x
Now, or where, q, = 3uC= 10C:
3-x* 3-xG-x = magnitude of force between 4, atd
2 2
Take the square root, (9.0x 10") it.0x 10(3.0x 10)
ot 6-2x= x (after cross multiplication) or, x =2 m. So, q will (1.0
be placed at a distance 2 m from and at l m from Q,. - 2.7x 10- N

Note if q,a, -
>0 Now, net force, |F R+ + 2FF cos 20 1

Ik, is distance from q, between q, and q,)

J.a (27. 21.89 2.n-10N
x
2.38 10² N
k, in this case is nct between the charges.) and tan a = F, sin 120°
2-1 H+5 cos I20°
(2.7x 10 (0.87)

Example 1.12 Three charges q, =1 uC,4, =-2 uC and (1.8× 10)• (2.7x 10}
4, =3uC are placed on the vertices of anequilateral triangle
a = 79,29
of side 1.0 m. Find the net electric force acting on charge q
Thus, the net force on charge q, is 2.38 x L0 N at an angle
How to proceed Charge q, will attract charge q, (along the
a =79.2° with a line joining 4, and q, as shown in the figure.
line joiningy them) and charge q, will repel charge q,
Therefore, tun forces will act on q,. one due to q, and another Method 2. In this method let us assune a coordinate axes with
q, at oigin as shown in figute. The cMrdinates of q, q2 and q, in
due to q. Since, the force is a vecor quantity loth of these
this coordirate system are 0, 0, 0, (1 m, 0, O) and (0.5 m,
forces (say E and F,) will be added bv vector method.
0.87 m, 0), respectivcly. Now,
Follouing are tuo methods of their additioz. = force on g
F to charge q:
due
V. 93 (0.5, 0.87, 0)

91-IaC 92 --2C
(0, 0, O1 (1.0, O)
Sol. Method 1. In the figure,

(9.0x 10° (1.0x 10(-2.0x 10)

(1.0)
x
(0-Di+ (0-0)j+ (0-0)k]
= (1.8x 10iN
IE|=5= arsd F, force onq, due to chargeq)

=magnitude of force between , and q2

 0BJECTIVE PHYSICS Vot. 2

(9.0x 10* (1.0x 10 (3.0x 10)

(1.0
Applications of electric force
x{(0-0.5) i (0 -0.87) j +(0-0) & (Coulomb's law)
-(-1.35 i-2.349 j) x 10N 1. For solving problems related to string
Thereforc, net force on q, is
F -F+ F: Let us consider two identical balls, having mass m and
= -
2.349 ) x 10 N charge q. These are susended Irom a conmon point by
0.45
two insulating strings each of length Las shown in figure.
Exomple 1.13 Four charges Q. 4. Q and q are kept at the four
comers ofa square as shown belouw. What is the relation
bvetueen and q. so that the net force on a charge q is zero?
Q

mOl4.
lç,
r/2
ml

Fig. 1.6 Two identical charged Ixlls are suspended fromsame potnt

Sol. llere, both the y will ave samne sign either positive or The balls repel and come into equilibrium at separation r.
negative. Similsly, bth the Q will have sane sign. Let us The ball is in equilibrium under the following forces.
tnake te force 0t upper right corner q equal to zero. (i) Weiglht of the ball, w = ng
Lower will appiy a eelling force F on uper q hecause 1

both the darges have sae siga. To halance this force txoth (iü) Electric force, F =
...i)
AnE, r2
Qmist ajply attactive lorces F, and F, of equal nagnitude.
hence, ) and q will have opposite signs. Now, the resultant of (iii) Tension in the string For this, let us draw FBD of a
F, ad Fj will be
F2(Parallelogran law of vector addition), ball under consideration.
if E,|=|E=F. Abo note that Fv2 will be exactly anal
opposite to f
So.
From, Coulomb's law,

Fig. I.7 FBD of one ofthe balls

It is clear from FBID that, T sin F.

T cos 0= mg ..(iii
On dividing Eq. (i) by Eq. (iii), we get
Kq
tan ) = F, ...iv

and or T - +
(T cos 0)² + (mg) ..tv
T sin 0)²
=E
From geometry of the figure,
=\2F = r/2
lan 0

Q2 Fig. 1.8 Formation ofa triangle through rf2 and L

But as we said Q andq have opposite sign, so q =-2v2Q.
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 9

Sol. Let x be
the searation etween balls in equilibrium.
If O
is small, tan 0 = sin =* sd
L According to the question, following figure can he drawn.
Now, let us solve some problems related to this to make
our concepts more clear.
To T
Example L14 Tuo identical helium filled lalloons andB A
Tsin@
F
fastened to a weight of 5 g by threads floats in equilibrium as
shoum in figure. Calculate the charge on each balloons,
assurming that they carry equal charges.
Sol. In figurc, A and B arc two balloons attached to weight uw by
Each ball is in cquilibriurn under the action of the following
string OA = 0B = m 1l
forces
0.6 cn (a) Weight of the ball, mg
F
(b) Repulsive electric force,F=

(c) Tension in the string, T"

Im /1m
Resolving T in the horizontal and vertical direction, since
ball is in equilibriumn,
T
sin =F ...(i)
AB = 0.6 m, Cis the centre of AB T cos 0 = mg ...(i)
AG = BC = 03 m By Egs. i) and (ii), we get

O-oA? - Ac? =a -(o3 = (0.954

F
Force of repulsion between the balloons, tan ..iii)

F= AnL,AB
Form figure, =I sin 0 x=l sin 0
As the balloons float in equilibriun.
:. Using triangle law of vectors, we get Put in Eq. (ii), we get
Also, 4' = Anengr² tan 0
= 4REng2l sin
O
tan 9
AG OC
where, w= upthrust acting on each balloon. q=[l6xE, mgl
sin0 tan 02
As W w+ w
Example 1.6 Tuo identical balls, cach havinga charge q and
mass m, are suspended from a common fxint tuv insulating
AC W strings cach of length l. The balls are held at a sepxaration x
F and then released. Find
2 (i) the ciectric force on each hall.
4nEAB) OC 2 (i) the compxnent of the resultant force on a ball along and
perpxendicular to string.
q=4colABxAC, ng OC
(iäi) the tension in the string.
(iv) the acceleration of one of the lkalls. Consider the situation
(0.6 (0.3) x (5 x I0°x 9,8)
×
only for the instant just after he release.
9x 10 x 0.954 × 2 Sol. Let x be the separation between the balls. According to
0.36x 0.30 x 49 10-'C question, the following figures can be drawn
x 2
9x 0.954
q=±5.6x 10- C

Example 1.15 Tuo identical pith balls, each of mass m and

charge q are stuspended from a common point by tun strings of
equal length l. Find charge q in terms of given quantities, if
angle betuween the strings is 20 inequilibrium.
(0) Electric force betwecn balls, E,
1
.
g
10 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

2. Lami's theorem
In few problems of electrostatics
Lami's theorem is very uscful. F,
According to this theorem, if three
Resolving forces along and perpendicular to string. concurrenn forces
F, F; and F as
shown in figure are in equilibrium or
if F +F +F; = 0, then F.
Fig. I.9 Three forees
FF
sin a
passing hrough a point
mg sin 0 'F, sin 0 sin ß sin y

Resultant force on ball alog the string, Example .18 Tu identical balls each having a
density p are
suspended from a common point by
T-(mq cos + F sin O) = 0 {the string is unstretchabie}) u0 insulating strings of
equal length. Both the balls hae equal mass and charge. In
Similarly, force perpendicular to the string
equilibrium each string makes an anqle O with vertical. Now.
cos mg
=|F 0- sin |
lth the kalls are immersed in a liguid. As a result the angle
0 can be obtained fromm geonetry. does not change. The density of the liquid is o. Find the
dieleetric constant of the liquid.
Sol. Fach ball is in equilibrium under the following
thrcc forces
(i) tension (ii) electric force and
(iii) weight
So, by applying Lami'stheotem,
(iii)) Since the net force on the ball along string is zero, hence
T= mg cos 0 +
F sin- 0
, cos mg sin 0|
(iv) Acceleration of ball. a 0

Example 1.17 A particle A having charge q and mass m is F.. F;

placed at the botom of a sh inclined plane of inclination 0.

Where shotuld a block B, having same charge and mass, t
placed on the incline, so that it may remain in equilibrium? In vxuutn In liquid
Sol. The following figure can be drawn in accordance with the
questiorn, In the liquid, F

where, K= dielectric constant of liquid

mgsin
. Mg cos
and u' =w -upthrust
Applying Lami's theorem in vacuum,
F F,
+ ..0)
sin (0 0) sin (180°- 0) cos 0 sin 0
la, m)
Similarly in liquid,
cos 0
F ..(i5)
sin )
Let block B be placed at distance d. The block B is in On dividing Eq. (i) by Eq. (ii), we get
equilibrium. mg cos 0 is balanced by normal reaction and
mg sin by repulsive electric force.
u
or K=
-upthrust
asK
F, mg sin 0 F F
Vpg
1
g
sin 0 Vpg Vog - V =volume of ball]

K=P
d=4,Y4REgrg sin
Check point 1.2)
1. There are tvo charges + iuCand +5uC. The ratio of the 9. Two charges placed in air repel each other by a torce of
torces acting on them vall be 10"N. When oil is introduced between the charges, then the
(a) 1:5 (b) 1:1 force becomes 2.5 x 10N.
(c)5:1 (d) 1:25 The dielectric constant of oil is
2. The foce between two charges 0.06 m apart is 5 N. It each (a) 25 (b) 0 25
charge is moved towards the other by 0.04 m, then the torce (c) 20 (d) 4.0
between thern will become 10. Two point charges placed at a certain distance r in air exert
(a) 7.20 N (0) 11.25 N a force F on each other. Then, the distance r' at which these
(c) 22.50 N (d) 45.00N
charges will exert the same force in a medium of dielectric
3. The value of electric permittivity of free space is constant K is given by
x
(a) 9 10°NC² /? (a)
r

(b) r/K
(b) &85 x 10-1N-m? c?s (c)
r/K (d rK
(c) 885
x
10-1c²N-m 11. F, and F represent gravitational and electrostatic force
x
(d) 9 10c?N-m? respectvely between electrons situa!ed at a distance 10 cm.
The ratio of F,JF is of the crder of
4. Two charges each equal t0 2uC are 0.5 m apart. It both of (a) 1043 (b) 1021
them exis! inside vacuum, then the force tbetween them is (c) 10* () 10-3
(a) 1.89N (b) 2.44 N
12. Two protens a e
distance of 1x 10-cm trom each other
(c) 0.144 N (d) 3.144N
The forces acting on thern are
5. The charges on two spheres are +7uC and -5 uC, (a) nuclear torce and gravitationa force
respectivey. They experiencea torce F. It cach of them is (b) ruclear torce and coulomb fcce
given an additional charge of -2 uC, then the new force (C} coulomb force and gravitational force
attraction vall be (d) nucleat, couloib and gravtafiona force
(a) F (b) Fr2
(c) FiV3 (d) 2F 13. Two particies of equal mass m and chargeq re
placed at a
6. Two charges of equal magnitudes and at a distancer exert a distance of 16 cm. They do not experience any force. The
force Fon each other. If the charges are haved and value of is
m
distance betveen them is doubled, then the new force
acting on each charge is (a)
(a) F/8 (c) F/4
G
(c) 4F (d) F/16 {C)

7. A metalic sphere having no net charge is placed near a

finite metal plate carrying a positive charge. The electric 14. Acharge g, exerts some force on a second charge q,. If a thid
force on the sphere will be charge q, is brought near q,. then the force exerted by 4, cnq2
(a) towads the plate (a) decreases
(b) away trom the plate (b) increases
{c) parallel to the plate (c) remains the same
(d) zero (d) increases, if q, is of same sign as q, and decreases. itgg is
of opposite sign as q,
8. Two charged spheres separated at a distance exerta d

torce F on each other. If they are immersed in a liquid of 15. Electric charges of iuC, -1uC and2C ae placed in air at
dielectric constant 2, then what is the force (if all conditions the corners A Bancd respectvely of an equilateral triangle
C

are sarne) ABC haing length of each side 10 cm. The resultant foce
(b) F on the charge at Cis
(a); (a) 0.9 N (b) 1.8 N
(c) 2F (d) 4F (a) 36
N
(c) 2.7 N
 Electric field due to a point charge
3) Electric field The clectric field produced by a point charge q can be
obtained in general terms from Coulomb's law. The
The region surrounding a charge or distribution of charge magnitude of the force exerled by the charge q on a test
in which its electrical cffects can be observed or charge qo is
experienced is called the electric ficld of the charge or
distribution of chargc.
Electric ficld at a point can be defined in terms of either a
vector function E called clectric field strength or a
scalar
function V called electrie potential.

Electric field strength Fie. 1.10 Direction of electric field due to

positive and negative charges
The electric field strength (often called electric field) at a
point in an electric field is defined as the elcctrostatic =
force F, per unit positive charge. Thus, if the clectrostatic F
force experienced by a snall test charge qo is
ficld strength at that point is defined as
F,, then Therefore, the intensity of the electric field at this point is
given by
F,
E= lim

=
The clectric ficld is a vector quantity and its direction is
the same as the direction of the force F, on a
positive test Note Suppose a charge g is placed at a paint whose pasition vector
charge. The Sl unit of clectric field is N/C. The isr, and we
want to find the lectric field at a point
dimensions for E is [MLT"A For a positive charge the Patiose postion vectoris r, then
in vector form the electric field is given by
clectric ficld will the directed radially outwards
írom the 1
charge. On the other hand, if the source E=
charge is
negative, the electric field vector at each point is
directed Here.
radially inwards.
Note Suppase there s an electric fiekl strengthE at sorre poort in an and
electric feld,
then the electrastatx force ating on a charge gis qE n
on
while
the diuetion of E
the charee -gtis çE in th Oppaste directicn cfE Example L21 Find the electric field strength
due to a point
Example 1.19 An eleciric field of 10° N/C points charge of 5 uC at a distance of 80 cm from the charge.
due west ot
a certain spot. What are the maqnitude Sol. Given, q
and direction of the =5uC=5 x 10°C
force that acts on a charge of+ 2 uC
and-5 uC at thís spot? r=80 cm 80x 10m=

Sol. Electrostatic force. =

F qt Electric ficld strength,
Force on +2yC=gF
where, Eis the elcctric ficld of magnitude 10 NIC E.9
=2x 10 a0') =0.2 N (due west) E=9x 10 y 5x 10-6
Force on-5uC =
(5x 10) (10) (80 x 10 2

0.5 N (due cast) E=7.0x 10 NIC

Example l20 Calculate the magnitude an Exomple L22 Tuo positive point charges q,
of electric field =16 C and
which can just suspend adeuteron of nass q, =4 uC, are sefxrated in vacuum by a distance of
32 x 10 kg freelv 3.0 m.
in air. Find the point on the line betueen the chares,
uhere the net
Sol. Upward fotce on the deuteron electric field is zero.
due to electric field gE is
Sol. Between the charges,
cqual to weight mg of deuteron qE =mg the two ficld contributions have
opposite directions, and the net electric
Emy ficld is zero at a point
3.2x100 19.6x 10-" NC (say P), where the
agnitudes of E and E, are cqual.
1.6x 109 However, since, q, <4. pxoint P must be closer to q,
in order
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 13

that the field of the smaller charge can balance the field of the
larger charge.
ae "9 + g
m
E; P E
At P. E =E, T
1 Time period, =2

m
(ii) When clectric field is upward
..i)

Also, 4*,3.0 ...ü)

To qE
Solving these equations, we get
=2 m and r, =Im
Thus, the point Pis at a distance of 2 m from
and I m frotm qz

Elfective acccleration, a mg - qE
xample l.23 A chargeq =luC is placed at point
m m

(0 ,
m, 2 m, 4 ml Find the electric field at point
- 4 m, 3
ml
L

ol. Here, , i+2} +

4k
Time period, T=2* qE

and ;=-4j+3k Example 1.25 A all of mass m having a charge q is released

, -, =-i -6j - k from rest in a region where a horizontal electric field E exists.
(i) Find the restultant force acting on the bal.
=
Ir, -r,l--1 +
(- 6 +
(-IF 38 m fii) Find the trajectorv folloued by the ball.
Sol. The forces acting on thec ball are weight of the ball in
Now, clectric ficld, E:
vertically downward direction and thc clectric force in the
horizontal direction.
Substituting the values, we have (i) Resultant force, F =mg + kqE}.
9.0x 10)0.0 %
- k)
E= 10"-i -6
382
E(-38.42 i- 230.52 - 38.42 k)NIC Pu,
Example l24 A ball having charge q and mass m is suspended
nma string length L. betueen tuo parallel plates wherea
of (ii) Let the ball be at point P
after timet.
ertical electric fieldE is established. Find the time period of As.
sinple pendulun if electric field is directed (i) downuard and q

i) upward.
Sol. (i) When electric field is downward
x-direction, x =
For simple pendulum. 2 m [írom second law of Newton)
1
y
y-direction, =*

qE /m
Trajectory is straight line.

r Example 126 A block of mass m having charge q is attached to

a spring constunt k. This arrnangument is pluced in uniform
- 2n electric field E on sYotle Frorizontal surface as shou in the
Time period, T
figure. Initially, spring in unstretched. Find the extension of
spring in eililrium position and maritm extension of spring.
where, a effective acceleration.
net external force on the ball
mass of the ball

Y- 0
14 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Sol. Due to electrie force qE acting on the block, spring extends. Exomple l127 An infinite number of charges each equal to q
Let at some instant extension of spring be x. are placed along -axis at x = 1, x =2, x =4, =8 and so or.
Find the electric field at the point x = 0 due to this set up of
kx charges.
Sol. At the point xm0, the clectric field due to all the charges
are in the same negative x-direction and hence get added up.
Net force on block, F
=qE - kx
In cquilibrium, F =
q - kx= 0 x X
q
k
where. kis the spring constant.
In equilibrium extension of spring x, =
Maxium extension
=
2x, =
41£, 1-174 3zE
Method 2 This electric field is along iegative X-axis.
Let the body is displaced from position A to position B. Let Example l28 Four charges are placed at the corners of a
the maximum extension produced be x'. Then, from square of side 10 cm as shoun in figure having. lfq is I uC,
coservation law, then wt will be electric field intensity at the centre of the
square?
--0 a 0

C,.24
k Sol. Side of square, a = 0.im, Magnitude of charge, q = 1x10* C
In fact, the blnck is executing SHM of time period.
Half of diagonal of 0.1
the square =
T =27
m
amplitude of oscillation
=
qE 5
A
Electric field due to a system of charges
Consider a syste of charges q. 42% ...
vectors Frpy
shown in the figure.
. ,, .4, with position
relative to some origin O as C
Electrie field due to charge q.

x x 1o-6
E. 9x10 | 2
(0.1

9x 10' x 2=18x 10 NC
Fig. 1.1I Electric field due to system 0.01
of charges q1.92, u At centre there are two electric field which are
perpendicula
By the principle of sujerposition, the clectric field E at to cach other, so net clectric ficld can be calculated using
point P due to system of charges will superpositin principle.
ie given by
E- E +
E, + ...En Ep
=E + E
=EV2 = 18 x 10° x W2
where, E,. E,,... E, be the electric field at P due to x
2.54 10 NC!
charges q
24n resectivcly.
E= - + 1_2iy
+... Electric field lines
An electric ficld line is an imaginary line or curve
through a region of space so that its tangent at any draw
poirnt i
in the direction of the electric ficld vector at
that point.
 15
Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields

ctric field lines are introtuced by Michael Faraday to (iv) Two lines can never intersect. 1f it happens, then two
ualise clectric ficld tangents can be drawn at their point of intersection
e
electric field lines have the following properties i.e., intensity at that point will have two directions
which is not possible.
{i)The tangent to a line at anv point gives the direction
of E at that point. (v)In a uniform field, the field lines are straight,
parallel and uniformly spaced.
(vi) The electric field lines can never form closed loops
as a line can never start and end on the same charge.

p
(vii) Electric field lines also give us an indication of the
equipotential surface (surface which has the same
Fig. I.12 Electric field at paints P and Q potential)
In the given figure, electric points P and Qare alang (vii) Electric field lines always flow from higher potential
to lower porential.
the tangents (Ep and This is also the path on which
E. (ix) In a region, where thecre no electric field, lines are
a
positive test charge will tend to move if free to do so. absent. This is why inside a conductor (where, electric
(i) Electric field lines always hegin from a positive field is zero) there cannot be any electric field line.
charge and end on a negative charge and do not start (x) Electric ficld lines of force ends or starts normally
or stop in midspace.
from the surface of a conductor.
ii) The number of lines leaving a positive charge or (xi) The relative closeness of the electric lines of force in
entering a negative charge is proportional to the different regions of space indicates tlhe relative
magnitude of the charge. For example if 100 lines strength of the electric field in different regions. In
are drawn leaving a + 4 uC charge then 75 lines regions, where lines of force are closer, the electric
would have to end on a -3 1C charge. field is stronger, whereas in regions, where line of
force are further apart the field is weaker.
Therefore, in the given figure |E |> |Eg |.

IEA| >|E
(al
Fig. I.13 Electric fieldstrength at points A and B

Continuous charge distribution

In most of the cases, we deal with charges having
magnituie greater than the charge of an electron. For this,
we can imagine tlat the charge is spread in a region in a
continuous manner. Such a charge distribution is known as
continuous charge distributiot.
Consider a point charge qo lying near a region of
continuous charge distribution wlhich is made up of large
number of snall carges dq as slaown in figure.
According to (oulomb's law, the force on a paint charge
4o due to small charge dq is

d
Fig. 1.12 Electric fied lines associated witha single as well Fig. I.14 Force on point
a, 4% due to
as combination of charges continuOus charoe distrib
16 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

..0 3. Volume charge distribution (p)

Itis a clarge distrilution spread over a three-dimensional
where, volume or region Vof space as shown in figure.
There are three types of contimuotzs charge distribution

1. Line charge distribution (2.)

It is a carge distribution along a
one-dimensional curve or
litnc, I. in space as shown in figure.
dg pdV
Fig. 1.17 Voiume charge distribution
The charge contained per unit volume at any point is
called volume charge density. It is denoted by p,
i.e.

Fig. I.15 Line charge distribution dV

The charge contained per unit length of the line at any Its SI unit is Coulomb per cubic metre (Cm).
point is called linear charge density. It is denoted by à..
Electric ficld due to the volume charge distribution at
d the
i.e., location of clarge qo is

Its SI unit is Cm. E, =

Electric field due to the line charge distribution at the

location of chargc qo is Exomple L29 What charge wnuld be required to electrify a
sphere of raditus 25 cm, so as to get a surface charge
E, = dernsity of cm?
2. Surface charge distribution (o) Sol. Herc, r =
25 cm =
025 m, g Cm

It is a
charge distribution spread over a two-dimensional
As,
surface S in space as slhown in figure.
= x
q=4nr'a 4nx (025) C-075C
Example 130 Sixty four dros of radius ).02 m and eoct
carryinga charge of 5uC are combined to form a bigger dr.
Find how the surface charge density of electrification will
change if ro charge is lost,
Fig. I.16 Surface charge distribution Sol. Volume of each small drop =n(002)' m'
The charge contained per unit area at any point
surface charge density. It is denoted by i.e.. , is called Volume of 64 small drops =x(0.02)x
3
64 m

Surface charge density, a 9

= Let R be the radiuS of the bigger drop forned. Then,
dS x 61 or x 4
nR'=(0.02 R=0.02
Its SI unit is Cm. 3
R=0.02x 4 0.08 m
=

Electric fied due to the surface charge distribution at the

location of charge qo is Charge on small drop =
5uC = 5x 10C
Surface charge density of small drop.
5x 10
Cm
4n(0.02)*
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 17

Surface charge density of bigger drop,

that of a point charge. To an observer far from the
5x 10x 64 ring, the ring woukd appear like a point, and the
Cm-2
4n(0.08) electric field teflets this.
5x 10 4n(0.08 (iii) E, will be maximum where dE,
: dx
-0. Differentiating
4n(0.02) 5x 10x 64
E, w.r.. x and putting it equal to zero, we get
Electric field of a ring of charge and Emax comes out to be, 2
Electric ficldat distance x from the centre of uniformly
charged ring of total clarge qon its axis is given by

1
E, = +
4nEo (x² R)32
Direction of this electric field is along the axis
and away
from the ring in case of positively charged ring and
towards the ring in case of negatively charged ring.
Fig. I.19 V'ariation of electric field on the axis
ofa ring
Example 1.31 A chargye of 4 x
10" Cis distribeuted uniformly
over e
cirumference of a conducting ring of radies 0.3 mn.
Calculate the field intensitv at a point on the axis of the ring at
0.4 m from its centre also at the centre.
Fig. I.18 Electric field of positively and negatively charged rings Sol. Given. q = 0.4 x
10°C,a = (03 m

r= 0.4 m
Speclal cases Electric field intensity at 0.4 m from its centre,
From the above expression, we can see that
(i) E, 0 at xa ) i.e., field is zero at the centre of the E=
ring. This would occur because charges on opposite
sides of the ring would push in opposite directions on 9x 10 x 4x 10 x 0.4

atest
charge at the centre, and the forces would add
to zerO. 14.4
E= =I152 N/C
(0.5)²
(ii) E, =for x > R, i.e.,, when the point P is At the centre of the ring, x =0
..
much farther fron the ring, its field is the same as Electric field intensity. E=0

Check point 1.3

1. The unit ot intensity of electric feld is 4. Electric field strength due to a pont charge of 5uCat a
(a) nowton/cou!omb (D) joue/coulonb
distance 80 cm from the charge is
(c) volt-metre (d) newton'netre (a) 8x 10 NC (b) 7 x 10 NC
(c) 5x 10 NC
(d) 4 10 NC-!
x
2. Which of the following is deflected by electric field?
(a) X-rays {b) y-tays 5. The electric teld due to a charge at a dstance of 3 m trom it
(c) Neutrons (d) a-particles is 500 NC- The magnitude of the charge is
3. A charged particle of mass 5x10 kg is held stationary in 1
-9x10° Nmjc?
space by placng it in an electric field of strength 10°NC-!
directed vertically doNTwards. The charge on the particle is (a) 2.5 uC
(a) -20 x 10C (b) -5x 10uC
(b) 20C
(c) 1.0uC (d) 05aC
(c) 5x10C (d)
20x10c
18 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

6. Two charges +5 1C and +10C are placed 20 cm apart. 9. The figure shows Some of the electric field lines
The net electric field at the mid-point between the two corresponding to an electric field. The figure suggests
charges is
(a) 4.5x 10 drected towards +5 uC
NC- B
(b) 4.5x10° drected towards + 10uC
NC-

(c) 135x10 NC-' directed tovwards +5C

(b) E, =Eg
(d) 135 x10 NC drected towards +10uC (a) E, >E# >Ec =Ec c
(c) E, -Ec >Es (d) E E, <Eg
7. Tvo point charges +8q and -2g are located at x 0and
x =L respectively The location of a point on the X-axis at 10. An unchargod sphere of metal is placed in between two
charged plates as shown. The lines ot force look like
which the net electric field due to these two pont charges is
zero, is
(a) 8L (b) 4L
{c) 2L (d) L/4
8. A cube ot side b has a chargeg at each of its vertices, The A B

electric tield due to th:s charça distribution at the centre of

this cube wil! be tirrnes

(a) qib (b) g/2b? IC

{c) 32q/b (d) zero
(a) A (b) B (c) C (d) D

Example 132 Charges ± 20 nCare separated by 5 mm.

4) Electric dipole Calculate the magnitude and direction of dipole moment.
Sol. Given, q = q =t 20 nC = ±20 x 10
Csi
Distance
=
2a =5 mm =5x 10 m
A pair of equal and opposite point charges, that are
separated by a short distance is known as electric dipole. Dipole noment, pq2a) 20x 10x 5x 10
Electric dipole occurs in nature in a varicty of situations =
10-° cm
e.g.. in HF, H,0, HCletc, the centre of positive charges
The direction of p is from negative charge to positive charge.
does not fall exactly over the centre of negative charges.
Such molecules are clectric dipoles. Example 133 A system has tuo charges, qa =2.5 x 10*C and
qa =-2.5 x 10'Clocated at points A(04-15 cm) and
Dipole moment B(Q Q + 15 cm) respectively. What is the electric dipole moment
The product of magnitude of one charge and the distance of the system?
between the charges is called the magnitude of the electric Sol. Electric dipole moment,
dipole moment p. Suppose the charges of dipole are -q p=magnitude of either charge x dipole length
and +q and the small distance between them is 2a. -44 x AB =2.5 x 10* x 0.30
Then, the magnitude of the electric dipole moment is x

given by -7.5 10 C-m

The clectric dipolc moment is directed from B ta A, i.e., from

4
negative charge to positive charge.
24
Fig. 1.20 Electric dipole
x
B 4,= -2.5 107c
|p=(20)q
The electric dipole nonent is a vector p whose direction is
along the line joining the two charges pointing from the x

negative charges to the positive charges.

Its SI unit is Coulomb-metre.
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields

omple 1.34 Three charges are placed as shown. Find dipole

oment of the arrangements. 4ar
(: 2aq = p
4nE, ( -a')?
2(2aq)r
E 2r p
Ane,(r-a')? 4ne,-a'2
For short dipole, i.e.. for E=
r>> aE= P
2a

l. Here, two dipoles are formed. These are shown Dircction of E is same as p.
in
diagram bclow.
2. Electric field at an equatorial
point of
an electric dipole
The magnitude of the electric fields due to the two
charges
*qb
+q and -q arc given by

Resultant dipole mnoment, and E-, = and they

=
Ane.,r+ a') AzE,(r +
a')
P=2p=Zgt,0 45° are equal. The directions of
E,, and E_, are as shown in
the figure.
he field of an electric dipole
or
dipole field P{Eat P
The electric field produced by an electric
dipole is called a
ipole field. The total charge of the electric dipole is zero
but dipole field is not zero. It can be found out
from 21
Coulomb's law and the superposition principle. We will Fig. 1.22A point P is at an equatorial point of
ind clectric ficld of an electric dipole at two points as the dipole
shown below. The components normal to the dipole axis cancel away.
The components along the dipole axis add up. The total
1. Electric field at an axial point of an electric field E at Pis opposite to dipole moment vector p.
So, we have E =- ((E., + E) cos 0]
electric dipole
Let us calculate electric ficld at the point P at a distance r. -21
from the centre of the dipole on the axial line of the dipole 4ncor+a?)
on the side of the charge q as shown in figure. (r'+a')2
-2aq = p!
E 4nE, (r +a')? 4zEr22,v2 "ag
For short dipole, r >>a
Fig. 1.21 A point P is at an axial point of the dipole
E=p
4 7C,(r + a)
Note The electr< field due to short dipole at large distane >>)is
1

= proportional to f wetake the limit, when the dipote sze 2a

E., 4 RE06-a)? aporoaches 7ero, the charge q approaches unfinity in such a way that the
product p = q x 2ais fin:te Such a dipole is referred to as a pount dipole
The total ficld at P is, E = E., + E-g (ideal dipcle)

1 Exomple 1.35 Tuv opposite charges each of magnítude 2uC

are lcm apart. Find electric field at a distance of 5 cm from
AnEo(r -
a)² r +
a)'
the mid-point on axial line of the diole. Also, find the field on
equatorial line at the same distance from mid-point.
20 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Sol. Electric ficld (E) on axial 2pr Sol. Given, p

line is given by =2x 10, r=| m, 0 = 60

where. pis dipolc moment either charge x dipole

. Electric field intensity,
length
Thus, p=ql=2 x 10°)x (0.01) V3 cos 0 +1
E=
4RE
Also, r 5x 10* nn
x
2x 10 9x 10-x N3ces G0
9x 10° x 22 x
10x 10)x 5x 10? +1
(5x 10 - (0.5 x 0
=238.! N/C.
x
2.93 10° NC
Similarly , electric field E) on cquatorial
line is given by Force on dipole
Suppose an electric dipole of dipole moment
|pl= 2aq is
placed in a uniform clectric field E at an angle 0. Here, 0
The symbols have the same meaning as above, is the angle between p and E. A force F, =
qE will act
on positive charge and F, =- qE on negative charge.
9x 10° x 2x 106x 10-) Since, F and F, are cqual in magnitude but
[(5x 10 + (0.5x 10 opIsite in
direction.
E =L46x 10 NC-!
3. Electric field at the position (r, 0)
Due to the positive charge of the diyole electric field at
point Pwill be in radially outward direction and due to E
the negative charge it will be radially inward. Now, we
bave considered the radial component E,)and transverse F,-E-
component (E;) of the net electric field (E) as shown in
figure. Fig. 1.24 Electric dipole in a uniform electric field

E Hence,
+F =0
or Fnet 0
Thus, net force on a dipole in uniform clectric ficld
is zero. While in a non-uniform electric field, it may
may not be zer0.
Iig. 1.23 Radial and transverse component of the
electric field E of the dipole at point P(r, 0) Torque on an electric dipole
The two cqual and oppusite forces shown in the diagram
E, =
2p cos0 psin
above act at different points of the dipole. They form a
and Ee =
4nE0 couple which exerts a torque. This torque has a
. Net electric field at point P
is E = E
+E;
magnitude equal to the magnitude of each force multiplied
by the arn of the couple i.e.. perpendicular distance
between the two anti-parallel forces.
E P+3cos² 0 Magnitude of torque = qEx 2a sin 0
= 24aE sin 0
Distance of the clectric ficld,
t= pE sin 0
("p= (2a) q]
tan a =
=pxE
E, 2
Thus, the magnitude of torque is t = pE sin 0. The
Example 1.36 What is the magnitude of electric field intensity direction of torque is perperndicular to the plane of paper
chue to a diole of momernt 2 x
10° C-m at a point distance
I m from the centre of dipole, when line joining the point to the
inwards. Further this torque is zero at = (0° or 0 = 180°,
centre of dixle makes an angle of 60° with dipole axis? i.e., when the dipole is parallel or anti-parallel to E and
maximum at = 90,
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 21

P
us, variation of t with 0 is as shown in graph below.

3n/2 2*

c
pE

Fig. 1.26 Dipole at different angles with eleetric field

Fig. 1.25 l'ariation oft with 0 Total work done by external forces in rotating a dipole
from,0 = 0, to 9 =9, (Fig. (c) and (d)) will be given by
ample 137 An clectric dipole with dipoe moment
10 C-m is aligred at 30° with the direction of a uniform sin Od9
x

ectric ficld of magnitude 5x 10'

.
NC. Calculate the
agnitude of the torquc acting on the dipole. "external foeces pE (cos ,- cos,)

,
=
Using the formula, t pE sin 9
and work done by clectric forces,
Here, dipole moment. p =4x 10°C-m = pË (cos - cos 0,)
Welctrie forve =-Weterna! force
NC
E
=5x 1o' =
and ,
Taking 0, =0 and0, 90°
Angie bet ween E =30°, sulstitutirng the values, we get
We have,
t=4x 10 x 5x 10 x sin30° cos ) = -pE cos0
=
20x L0x
Welectric diole
PE (cos 90°-
2 =-pE
10 N-n Note I!drpole is placed in non-uniform electrit feld, then magnitude and
irecticn of eletrkk field is dfferent at every point and it wll experience
both net force and net torque.
Work done in rotating a dipole in a Example L38 An electric dipole of dipole moment
uniform electric field p=5x 10- C-m lying along uniform electric field
Vhen an electric dipole is placed in a uniform electric E=4x 10 NG. Calculate the uork done is rotating the
icld E (Fig. (a)) a torque, t = px Eacts on it. If we rotate ipole by 60°.
he dipoe through a small angle as slhown in Fig. (6) the Sol. It is given that electric dipole moment, p= 5x 101" Gm
vork done by the torque is Electric ficld strength, E = 4 x
10' NC

dW = t When the electric dipole is placed in an electric field E, a

dW =- p: sin 0
torque t =px Eacts on it. This torque tries to rotate the
.
The

Orque.
work is negative as the rotation 0 is opposite to the
dipole through an angle
If the dipole is rotated from an angle
by external force is given by
to ,
then work done ,
W= pE (cos O, - cos 8,) ....)
Putting = 0°, 0, = 60° in tle Eq. (i), we get
W= pE (cos 0°- cos 60°)
=
= p PE
-l/2)
2
5x 101b x 4 x 10' =
|0"J
(b)
2
W-0.1x 10" J = 0.1 p]

20 of 904
Check point 1.4)
1. The electric dpole moment of an electron and a proton 7. An electric dipole is kept in non-unitorm electric field. It

4.3 nm apart, is experiences

(a) 68 x10 2 C-m (b) 2.56 x 10 C'm a force and a torque (b) a forOe but nota torgUe
(c) 3 72 x104 C/m (d) 11 x104 C²/m a torque but not a force (d) a
Nether force nor a torque
2. E, be the electrrc freld strength of a short dipole at a point
I1
8. An efeciric dipoie ot moment p is placed normal to the lnes
on its axaline and E, that on the equatorial line at the same of force of electrc intensity E then the work done in
distance, then defiecting it through an angle of 180° is
(a) E, =2E, (b) E, -2E, (c) E, E, (d) None ot these (a) pE (b) +2pE
3. Electrnc tield at a far away distance on the axis ofa dipoe
r (c) -2pE (d) zero
is En.
What is the electric field at a distance 2r on 9. A molecule with a dpole moment p is placed in an electrnc
perpendicular to bisector? ficid of strength E. nitially. the dipole is aligned parallel to
(a) (b)-E the field. # the dipole is to be rotated to be anti-parallel to th
16 16 8 field, then the work required to be done by an external
4. The electric feld due to an electric dipole at a distance r agency is
from its centre en axal poston is E. It the dipole is rotated (a) -2 pE (b) -pE
through an angle of 90° about its perpendicular axis, then (c) pE (d) 2pE
the magritude of electric field at the same poirnt vall be 10. Two opposite and equal charges 4 x 10C when placed
(b) E/4 (C} EJ2() 2E
(a) E
2x 10% cm away trom a dipoie H this dpole is placed in an
5. The torque acting on a dipole ot moment p in an electnc field externa eiectric fieid 4 x 10 NC, then the vaue of maximur
E is torque and the work done in rotatng t through 180° will be
(a) p-E (b) pxE (d) zero (d) E xp (a) 64 x 10 N-m and 64 x 10J
6. When an electric dipole p is placed in a unitorm electric field (b) 32 x 10 N-m and 32 x 10J
E then at what angle between p and E the value of torque (C) 64 x 10 N-m and 32 x
10J
wil
be maximum? (d) 32 x
10 N-mand 64 x
10oJ
(a) 90" (b) 0" 180" (d) 45"

For a closed surface, is the angle betvween E and outware

norinal to the area clement.
5) Electric flux Electric flux is a scalar quantity having SI unit V-m or
N-m? C!
Note As an electrc tlux can a!sa be cefined as the flow of the field lnes
Electric flir over an area in an electric field is a measure of througtt a surfare when field ures leave or flow out of a closed surface,
¢

the numter of field lines crossing a surface. It is denoted by is pasitive, when they enter or ficw into the surfare, is negatve

g. Let E be electric ficld at the location of the surface

element dS. The electric flux through the entire surface is
Area vector
given by
The area is a vector quantity. The direction of a planar
area vector is specified by normal to the plane, e.g., in
case of closed surface like cube, splhere, ett. Direction of
Here, O is smaller angle between E and ds.
area vector S alorng outward is considered to be positive.

(aj Arrowhead gives direction of area

Fig. 1.27 Electricfux over an area dS

 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields (23

case of open surface, any normal

direction can be Exomple 1.42 A cylinder is placed in a
nsidered positive. uniform elecric field E
with axis rarallel to the field. Find the
total electric flux
through the cylinder.
Sol.

Fig. 1.28 (a) and (b)

ne
flux of electric field passing through an area
oduct of electric field vector and area vector
is the dot (o-sE
= = ES cos
ES Flux through the entire cylinder,
Komple 1.39 The clectric
field in a region is given by [E·dS+ [E-dS +
ai + Here, a
b. and are constants. Find the net flux
b Eds
Let plae face cutvet sfc
assing through a square area of side l
ol.
parallel to yz-plane.
A square area of side l parallel to
» =E- dScos180°+[E dS cos 0° [E-dS cos
90°
yz-plane in vector form
can be written as,
S-'i
Given, E =ai +
b =-Ex n+ Ex r=0
.:. Electric
flux passing through the given area will
be
=ES= ai +
b)- ²i) =al' Gauss's law
Example 1.40 A rectangqular sturface According to Gauss's law, "the net electric
of sides 10 cmn and 15 cm flux through any
placed inside a uniform clectric ficld of 25 closed surface is equal to the net charge
NC-, such that enclosed by it
ormal to the surface makes an angle divided by". Mathematically, it carn
of 60 with the direction be written as
felectric field, Find the flux of electric field through
wctangular surface. the
ol. Here. E electric field = 25 NC
Gauss's theorern in simplified form can
S= surface area of rectangle =lx b=10x 15 cm be written as under
Flux, n ES cos 0 (25NCNO.15 x
= 01875
0.10) m²(cos 60°) ES = n ...(i)
N-m'c-!
bret this form of Gauss's law is applicable only
Example l.41 The electric field in a
region is given by under the
following two conditions
E"0xi. Find the electric flux passirng throtugh a
cubical (i) the electric field at every point on the surface is
olume botnded by the surfaces x = cither perpendicular or tangential.
and z a.
Qx=4, y=4 y= a, 2
=0 (ii) magnitude of electric field at every
point where it is
Sol perpendicular to the surface has a constant value (say E).
Here, S is the area. where electric field is
perpendicular to
the surface.

Important points regarding Gauss's law in

electrostatics
Important points regarding Gauss's
On four faces, electric field and area are perpendicular.
given belouw
lw in electrostatics are
hence there will be no flux. One face is at origin,
i.e., x =0,
E0 hence, there will be no flux. On the sixth face, x =a (i) Gauss's law is true for any
closed surface, no matter
wiat its shape or size.
(ii)The tern q on the right side of Gauss's law includes
the sum of all charges enclosed by surface. The
S- ai
charges Inay be kocated anywhere inside the surface.
(iii) In the situation, when the surface is so
taken that
there are some charges inside and some outside, the
electric field (whose flux appears on the left
side of
24) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol, 2

Gauss's law) is due to allthe charges, both inside and First, make the surface close by placing another
outside S. However, the term q on the right side of hemisphere.
Gauss's law represents only tlhe total charge inside S.
(iv) The surface that we choXISe for the application of
Gauss's law is called the Gaussian surface. You may
choose any Gaussian surface and apply Gass's lavw.
However, do not let the (iaussian surface pass Fig. 1.31 Assume another symnmetrical hemisphere to
through any discrete charge, because electric field is forn a sphere
not well defined at the location of discrete charge.
However, the Gaussian surface can pass through a
continuoIS charge distribution.
Flux through sphere, =n=9
(v) Gauss's law is often useful towards a much casier By symmetry, flux through hemisphere,
calculation of the electrostatic field. when the
system has some symmetry. This is achieved by the 2 2E,
choice of a suitable Gaussian surface.
(b) A charge Q is placed at a distance a/2 above the
(vi) Finally, Gauss's law is hased on the inverse square centre of a horizontal, square of cdge a.
dependence on distance as taken in the Coulomb's
law. Any vioiation of Gauss's law will indicate
departure from the inverse square law.
Special cases
Some points related to calculation of electric flux in different
Cases
Fig. 1.32 Charge at a distance a'2 from square
(i) If surface contains number of charges, as shown in
figure, then q, can be calculated as First, make the surface close by placing five square
faces (a x a) s0 that a cube is formed and charge Q i
at centre of a cube.

Fig. I.29 Churges enclosed by a surface

Fig. 1.33 a cuhe

(ü) If a charge q is placed at the centre of a cube, then Flux through the cube,
=
the flux passing through cubec, In 9
The flux passing through each face of cube, By symmetry, flux through each square face,
(by symmetry)
6 6En 6
(ii) To calculate flux passing through open surface, first Note tn ase of ciosed symmetrIcai body wth charge q al its centre, the electic
make surface close in such a manner that point flux inked with each hatf wil! be if the symmetrical closed body
2
charge comes at the centre and then apply symmetry has n identicat faces with point charge at ts centre, flux Linked with each
concept, .g.. face will be i9
(a) A charge q is placed at the centre of an imaginary n nEg
hemispherical surfacc.
Example 1.43 An uniformly charged conducting sphere of
2.4 m diameter has a surface charge density of 80.0 C/m.
Find the charge on the sphere. (i) What is the total electric flre
Fig. 1.30 Charge at the centre of a hemisphere leaving the surface of the sphere?
 Chapter 01 ElectriC charges and fields 25

ol.
i) Using the relation, g
=

we get Example 1.47 A hemispherical lody of radius R is placed in a

4nR2" uniform eectric fieldE. What is the flux linked uith the curved
22 = x surface, if the field is
q
4nk'xG- 4 x (12 x
80 x 10- 1.45 10'c fi) parallel to the lse (i) preryendicular to the base
(ü)Using Gauss's theorem, we get Sol We know, flux passing through closed surface.
=fE-dS n
x 10-3 =
=21.45
8.854 x 10-2
=1.64 x 10" N-n-!

Example 1.44 A point charge catuses an electric flux of

-1.0 10* N-m*cto pxass through a spherical Gaussian
x

urface of 10.0 cm radius centred on the charge. (i) lf the

adius of the Guussian surface were doubled, ww much flux
Ndd peuss through the surface? (ii) What is the value of the Charge inside hemisphere, 4n = 0
(Eds - 0
oint charge?
Le.,
Sol. (i) According to Gauss's law, the electric flux through a
Ciaussian surface depends upon the charge enclosed
= 0
inside the surface and not upon its size. Thus, the t ES cas
X)
Ocurved

clectric flux will remain unchanged

i.e., -1.0 x 10 N-mC!.
(ül Using the formula,
I(Gauss's, theoreml, we get

q= 8.854 x
10-17 x(-1.0 x10)
=-8.85-x\0C= - 8,8nC:
Also,
Exomple 145 A point charge q is placed at the centre of a orsedt ES
os
0° = 0
Cube. What is the flux linked.
() with all the faces of the cute
v+ ExR 0

(ii) with each face of the cube

(iii) if charge is N ut the centre, then what uwill be the ansuvts
of parts (il and (iü! Applications of Gauss's law
Sol. (i) According to Gauss's Law, d.., =
In 9, To calculate electric field by Gauss's theorem, we will
draw a Ganussian surface (either sphere or cylinder.
(il The cue is a symmetrical body with 6 faces and the according to the situatiorn) in such a way tlat electric field
point charge is at its centre, so electric flux linked with is perpendicular at each point of surface and its magnitude
each face will be is same at every point and then apply Gauss's law. Let us
start with some simple cases.
each toce Ptotal9
1. Electric field due to an infinitely long
(ii) If carge is not at the centre, the answer of part (i) will
remain sne while that of part (ii) will change. straight uniformly charged wire
Exomple 1.46 A point charge Q is placed at one corner of a Consider a long line charge . with a linear charge density
(charge per unit length), To caculate the electric field at
cube. Find flux passing through a culve. a point, located at a distance r from the line charge. We
Sol. First, tmake the surface close by
construct a Gaussian surface, a ylinder of any arbitrary
placing three ident ical cutes at three n

length /of tadius r and its axis coinciding with the axis of
sides of given cube and four cubes
above. Now, charge cones at the centre the line charge. This cylinder have three surfaces. One is
of 8 cubes. The flux passing through curved surface and the two plane parallel surfaces.
eacl cube will e
1/8th of the flux QEg:
Hence, flux pasing through given cube
Field lines at plarne parallel surfaces are tangential (so flux
passing througl these surfaces is zero). The magnitude of
26) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

electric field is having the sane magnitude (say E) at r Sol. As we know clectric ficld due to an infinite line charge is
curved surface and simultaneoLsly the clcctric ficld is given by the relation,
perpendicular at every point of this surface. E=
2re r
where, 2 is linear charge density. r is the distance of a point,
(iaussiarn surface where an electric field is produced from the line charge.
=
A
2rE,rE
Here, E -9x 10 NC,r=2 cm = 0.02 m
.:. Linear charge density.
0.02 x
9x 10
=10- Cm-!
9x 10 2

.
Example 1.49 A long cylindrical wire carries a positive charge
of linear density An electron (-e, m)reolves arond it in a
circular patlh under the influence of the attractive electrostatic
Fig. I.34 Cylindrical Gaussian surface around a line charge force. Find the speed of the electron.
Sol. Electric field at perpendicular distance r,
Hence, we can apply the Gauss's law as, ES = Tin

E=
2rE,r
The electric force on electron, F =eE
Cured surface Plane surface
To move in circular path, necessary centripetal force is
Fig. 1.35 Electric fux through different surfaces
provided by clectric force.
Here, S = area of curved surface = (2nrl) =
and qin = net charge enclosing this cylinder = F,
I 2E
E (2rrl ) =
.:. Speed of the electron,

2rE 2. Electric field due to a plane sheet of

charge
i.e., E! Consider a flat thin sheet, infinite in size with constant
or E-rgraph is a rectangular yperbola as shown in figure. surface charge density g (charge per unit area).

Gassian surface

Fig. I.36 Er graph for a long charged wire

Exomple 1.48 An infinite line charge produces a field of Fig. I.37 Cylindrical Gaussian surface for a plane charged sheet
9x10' NC at a distance of 2 cm. Galculate the linear Let us draw a Gaussian surface (a cylinder) witlh one end
charge density. on one side and other end on the other side and of cross
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields(27

ional area So. Field lines will be tangential to the Exomple 1.51 Tuo large, thin metal plates are parallel and
red surface, so flux passing through this surface is zero. close to each other, On their inner faces, the plates have
blane surfaces, electric field has sane magnitude and surface charge densities of oppsite signs and of magnitude
pendicular to surface. Hence, using 1.77× 10 colomb er
square metre. What is electric field
(ü to the left of the plates?
ES = Yin
(ii) to the right of the plates?
E

(ii) in betuven the plates?

E (2S,) = (o)(S ,) Sol. (i) Fields due to both the plates will be equal and opposite,
so net ficld will be zero.
(iil Field outside the plates will be equal and opsite, so net
E ficld will be zero.
2o (iüi) In between the plates, the fields due to both the plates
us, we see that the magnitude of the field due to plane will be adding up, so net field will be
2E 2E
cet of charge is independent of the distance from the
eet. from positive to negative plate,
I.77x10-11
portant point E_ 8.85 x 10-l2
=2N/C
ppose two plane sheets having charge densities + G and
3 are placed at sone separation. 3. Electric field near a charged
conducting surface
When a charge is given to a conducting plate, it
distributes, itself over the entire outer surface of the
2e
A plate. The surface charge density g is uniform and is the
same on both surlaces, if plate is of uniform thickness
Fig. 1.38 Plane charged sheets placed close to each other and of infinite size. This is similar to tlhe previous one the
only difference is that this time charges are on both sides.
lectric ficld at A, Hence, applying,
ES in

lectric field at B, Gaussian surface

Eg = Eg = 0

imilarly, Eç =0
two plane sheets having opposite charges are kept near
o
each other, then electric field exists only between them.

xample 150 A large plane sheet of charge having surface

Fig. 1.39 Cylindrical Gaussian surface for a conducting surface
harge densiry 5 x10 Cm lies in xv-plane. Find the
-lectric flx through a circular area of radius 0.1 m. If the Here, S= 25o
zormal to the circular area makes an angle of 60° with the
and = (o) (2S,)
-axis. in
Fol. Given, g
=5x 10Cm,r 0l m, 0 60° l) 2S)
E (2S ,) =
= ES cos 2E
Rr cos 0

E=
5x 10-6 22 (0.1 cos 60°
2x 885 x 10-12 7
The clectric field ncar a charged conducting surface of any
x 10
=4.44 N-m/c shape is G/E, and perpendicular to surface.
28) 0BJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

4. Electric field due to a uniforml

charged thin spherical shell of solid
conducting sphere
Let O he the centre and R the radius of a thin, isolated
splherical shell carrying a charge +q which uniformly Fig. I.41 E-rgraph for a spherical shell
distributed on the surface. We have to deternine clectric
Note
field interIsity due to this shell at points outside the shell, 1 At the surfare graph is drscontinuus.
on the surface of the shell and inside the shel.

At external point
We can construct a Gaussian surface (a sphere) of radius Example 152 A thin spherical shell of metal has a radius of
r>R. At all points of this sphere the magnitude of electric 0.25 m and carries charge of 0.2 micro coulonb. Cialeulate th
ficld is the same and its direction is perpendicular to the electric inensity at 3.0 m from the centre of the shel.
surface. Thus, we can apply Gauss's theorem, Sol. Thc intensity at an external point at distant r from the
centre of the shell is given by

Here, r =3.0 m
x 2 x 10
E= (9.0 10)x = 200 N/C

Gansian Example l.53 Anclectric dipole is placed at the centre of a

surfacce
spherical shell. Fiund the electric field at an external pint of
Fig. I.40 Spherica! Gaussian surface around a spherical shell the shell.

ES- n
Sol. Nct chargc inside the sphere. q.n =0. Thercfore, according
to Gauss's law net flux passing through the sphere is zero,
Therefore, electrie field at a external xoint will be zero.
E
(4nr)=9

Hence, the electric field at any cxternal point is the same

as, if the total charge is concentrated at centre.
Example 154 A small conducting spherical shell with inner
At the surface of sphere, r =R
radius a and outer radius b is concentric with a larger
conducting spherical slell with inner radius c and outer radiu.
R d. The inner shell has total charge +24 and the oxuter slell ha
4nE, charge + 4q.
At an internal point fi) 1What is the total chrye on the la) inner surface of the sme
shell, (b) outer surface vf the small shell (c) iner sturface o
In this case, the Gaussian surface encloses no charge the large shell, (d} xter surface of the large shell?
=
i.e., E(4nr)=0 {ii) Calculate the elecric fiel in terms of q and the distancer
(rom the common centre of tuv shells for (alr <a, (b)
a<r<h, (e)b <r<c, dle <r<d. e)r >d
The electric ficld intensity is zero everywhere inside the
charged shell.
The variation of electric field (E) with the distance from
the centre (r) is as shown in figure.
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields (29

b. Charge distribution,
ES = Yin ...(.)
20

Here, S= 4nr' and qin =

Herc, p = charge per unit volume =

(4/3) xR3
{i) Total charge on inner shcll 2q Substituting these values in Eq. (i), we have
Total charge n
Charge distribution
outer shell =4q
R
(a) Charge on inner surface on inner shell 0 4nE0
(b) Charge on outer surface of inner shell = 2q
At the centre, r= 0, 0
(c) Charge on inner surfaxe of outer shell
=-2q
(facing surface have cqual and opposite charges) At surface of the sphere, 1
r=R, SO E=
() Charge un outer surface of outer shell = 6g 4nE, R?
(total charge on outer shell is 4q)
At an external point
(i) To calculate electric field, draw a sphere with centre0
through that pxoint, where electric field is required. To find the electric field outside the charged sphere, we
Assume charge to be concentrated at centre use a spherical Gaussian surface of radius r (>
formula of point charge.
and apply R) This
surface encluses the entire charged sphere, so qin
(alr<a, enclosed charge 4E0 Gauss's law gives,
=4. and
(b)a <r<b, enclosed charge = 4 E =0 or electric field
inside conductor =0
E
(4nr) =! or E= or E
(clb<r<G, enclosed charge - 29, E -
Thus, fora uniformly charged solid sphere, we have
the
(d) c <r <d, enclosed charge =0, E =0, or electric field following formulae for magnitude of clectric ficld.
inside conductor =0 1

= Eipsde
(e)r>d. enclosed charge 64,E. bg

5. Electric field due to a Earfke =

R?
solid sphere of charge
and Eutside
Suppose positive charge q is uniformly distributed 47E0 r2
throughout the volume of a non-conducting solid
sphere of Thus, thhe electric field at any external point is
radius R.
as, if the total charge is the same
concentrated at centre.
At an internal point
The variation of electric field (E) with the distance from
For finding the electric ficld at a distance r (< R) the centre of the sphere (r) is shown in figure.
from the
centre let us choose as our Gaussian surface a
sphere of
radius r, concentric with the charge distribution. From
symmetry, the magnitude E of electric field has
the same
value at every point on the Gaussian surface,
and the Aney R

directión of E is radial at every point on E

the surface.'So,
applying Gauss's law, we have

Gaussian R
surface Fig. I.43 E-r graph for a solid sphere
Note i we setrR in either of the taO expressions E
for (outside and inside
the sphere), ne get the same result = 1

this is because E is continuous function of

rin this case. By contrast, for
the charged conducting sphere the magntude of
discontinUDuS atr =R (it jumps electx feld is
Fig. 1.42 Spherical Gaussian surface inside a from£ 0
toE at)
solid sphere
30 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Exomple l55 At a point 20 cm from the centre of a uniformly (iü) At x m

3RI2, E
0
charged dielectric sphere of radius 10 cm, the electric field x= 4RE =
(iv) At
100 V/m. Find the electric field at 3 cm from the centre of the 4rE, (4 R)
sphere.
1
Fuen
=E+ E,= I7Q G4xe,R"
along +X-axis
Sol. Electric field outside of the sphere, Er
4 TE0 r
Example lL57 A on-conducting sphere of radius R has a
Electric field inside thc diclectric sphere, En
4nco R spherical cavity of radius R/2 as shown. The solid part of the
sphere has a wniform oume charge density p. Find the
rx magnitude and direction of eletric field at fxoint (a) O and b) A.

E=100x 3x 10
20)
120 V/m

Example 1.56 Tun non-conducting spheres of radius R have

charge Q uniformly distributed. The centres of spheres are Sol. For a non-conducting spherc of raditus R having volume
x=0 and = 3R. Find the magnitude and direction of the net
x
charge density p.
electric field on the X-axis,
R
(i) x=0 (iil (iii) x
(iv) x
1R
Sol. At 0, origin (x 0)
2
(i)r<R(inside), E =
(i)r>R (outsidel, E
=PK
3co 3 Ef

(ii)r =R (surface), E=PAEo 3

Electric field inside splhere at distance r from centre

4nE0 R
o
On the surface or outside, whole charge is assumcd to be
concentrated at centre.
(i) At x=0, E =, E, = G towards left (a) At 0, E, = 0 E, =
PP, towards left

- Xaxis
36n E, R
along
E, =,6E) towards left
(i) At x = RI2,
pR
IQRI2_ along + X-axis
(b) At A, E towards right
E,= 3E
R'
Q -Naxis pR/2) ph
E,= 4* E
25x c. P2 long E, = 3 54 to
towards left
(5RI2 eycR/21
Eu=i- E;=
200x
17
,R along +Xaxis
Co L3 54]
17pR
54owards right
Check point 1.5
1. The Sl unit of clectric flux is 10. It the flux of tie electric feld through a closed surtace is
(a) weber (b) neMon coulomb zero, then
(C) volt x metre (d) joue coutonb () the eectric teld must be zero everwhee cn the surlace
2. A surface S - 10
is kept in an eecttic tield E =2i + 4j + 7k.
(0) the electric ield may b zero everywtere on the surlace
(i) the chargo inside the surface must be 2ero
How much electric flux wifl come out through this surface? (N) the charge in the vcnity of the surfaces must be zero
(a) 40 unit (o) 50 unt (a) 0. () (b) (. (i)
(C) 30 unit (d) 20 urt (), (v)
(c) (d) (0. (in)
3. A cube of side ais placed in a unitorm electric field
11. Consider the charge configuraton and spherical Gaussian
E- Eji Ej + E,k Total electricflux passing through the surface as shown in the figure. When calculating the tlux ot
cube would be the electric field over the spherical surlace the electrc field
(a) E,a' (b) 2E, a? be due to
wil

(C) 6Eça° (d) None of thes$e

4. Fx coming out from a positive unit charge placed in ait, is

(a) E (b)
(c) (4ne, (d) 4nEg

5. If the electric fiux entering and leaving an enciosed surtace

respectively. is o, and o. then the electric charge inside the (a) 92

Surlace will be (b) only the positive charges
(a) (, + 2Wio
(c) ai the charges
- 6,)/e
(c) (4, • 4,)/E (d) (0, (d) +4, and -,
6. Charge of 2 C is placed at the centre of a cube. What is the 12. q,. q2.93 and g, are point charges located at points as
electric fux passing thrugh one face?
(a)
(34,)
.
shown in the figure and S isa sphencal Gaussian surtace of
radius Which of the follcwing is true according to the
Gauss's law?
3
(c)
R
7. For a given surface, the Gauss's law is stated asE-dS = 0.
From this, we can conctude that
(a) E is necessarily zero on the surtace
(b) E is perperdicular to the surtace at every point
(c) The total flux thrcugh the surface is zero
(d) The flux s onty gong out ot the surlace E,)-dA– +92+93
(a) fE, + E, 2
8. The total electric fliux ernanating from a closed surlace
encdosing an a-particie e electronic charge) is + E,)-CA = 9, +9; +9,)
26
(0)
E, + E,
(a)
= 9, +93 +94)
(C) fE,+Ez +E,)-dA
(c) eE 4
() Norne of the abovo
9. The inward and outward clectic tlux for a closed surface in 13. The Gaussian surlace for calculating the electric field due to
units of N-m²c' are respectively, 8x 10 and 4 x10. Then, a charge drstribution is
the total charge inside the surface is (where, eo =permittivity (a) arty surfaco near the charge distributon
constant)
(b) aways a spherical surtace
(a) 4x10c (b) -4x10°C
(c) a symmetrical ckosed surtace containing the charge distributon,
(c) -dx10, (d) -4 x 10,C at every pant of which electric field has a singla fxod value
(d) None of the gven oplions
32 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

14. Gauss's law should be invalid. if

18. From what distance should a 100 eV electron

(a) thre were fmagnetic monopoles be fired
towards a large metal plate having a surlace charge of
(b) the inverse Square law were nof exacthy true
-2.0 x10- Cm, so that it just fails to strike the plate?
(C) the velocty of ight were not a
unversal constant (a) 050 mm
(d) None of the above (b) 0.44 m
(C) 0.60 mm (d) 0.77 mm
15. Two parallel infinite line charges +) and- are placed with a
separation distance R in free space. The net elcctric fieid 19. Ifthe electric field near the earth's surtace be 300 V/m
exactly mid-way between the two line charges is directed dawnwards, then the sutlace, density of
charge on
(a) zero 2) earth's Surface is
(b) {a) 30x10 Cm?
1 (b) 50x 10 Cm?
(c) (d
RE, R (c) 2.6x 10 C/m?
16. An infinite ine charge produces a field of 18x10 NIC at (d) 7.0x 10- C/m?
0 02 m. The linear charge density is 20. A thin spherical shel of metal has a radius of 0.25 m and
(a) 2 x 10 Cm (b) 10 C/m carries a charge of 0.2 mC. The electric intensity at a point
(c) 10' C/m for outside the shell wil! be
(d) 10- Cm
(a) 2 88 x 10 NIC
17. A charge of 17.7 x10Cis distributed urilormly over a
large sheet of area 200 m,The electrc field intensity at a (b) 34x 10* NIC
distance 20 cm from it in ar will be (c) 325 x 10 NC
(a) 5x10 NC (b) 6x 10 NC
(c) 7
(d) 388x10 NIC
x10 NIC (d) 8x10 NIC

31of 904
BChapter
exercises
A)Taking it together
(Assorted questions of the chapter for advanced level practice)
1. Figure shows the electric lines of force emerging from a 6. The clectric ficld near a conducting surface having a
charged bdy. If the electric ficld at A andB areE, uniforn surface charge density o is given by
and Eg respectively and if the distance between A and (a) and is parallel to the surface
Bis r, then
20
(b) and is parallel to the surface

(c) and is nornal to the surfacc

20
E
and is normal to the surface

7. A metallic solid sphere is placed in a uniform electric

= field.The lines of force follow the path(s) shown in
(a) E>ER (b) E, <E, (c) E (d)
E
=
figurc as
2. The unit of physical quantity obtained by the line
integral of electric ficld is
2 2
la) NC (b) Vm
(c) JC tdl'CNn 3 3
+
3. Two point charges +2 Catnd 6 C repel each other
with a foree of 12 N. If a charge of - 4 C is given to (b) 2
cach of these charges, the force now is (c) 3
(a) 4 N (repuisive) (b) 4 N (attractive)
(c) 12 N (attractive) (d) 8N (repulsive) 8. A conductor has been givena charge -3x 10*Cby
transferring clectron. Mass increase (in kg) of the
4. Three equal charges are placed on the three corners of
a square. If the furce betwevn q and q, is Fp and that conductor and the number of electrons added to the
conductor are respectively
between q, and g, is F,then the ratio of magrnitudes la) 2 x 10 and 2 x 10
F,/E) is x x
(a) 1/2 (b) 2 (b) 5 10
and 5 1¢
(c) 1/42 (d) v2 (c) 3 x 1019 and 9x 16
(d) 2 x 10 and 2 x 102
5. The insulation property of air breaks down at
E=3x 10° V/m. Thc maximum charge that can be 9. Two point charges of 20 uC and 801C are 10 cm apart
given to a sphere of diameter 5 m is approximately where will the electrie field strength be zero on the line
(in coulombs)
joining tlhe charges from 20 uC charge
(a) 2 x 1o (b) 2x 10 (a) 0.1 m (b) 0.04 m
(c) 2x 10 (d) 2x 10s (c) 0.033 m (d) 0.33 m
34 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

10. For a dipole g =2x 10Candd = 0.01m Calculate the 17. Two small conducting spheres of cqual radius hav
Imaximum torque for this dipole, if E - 5 x 1o°NC! charges +10 Cand -20 uCrespectively and placed at
(a) l x 10N-m (b) 10 x 10N-m!
distance R Irom cach other. They experience force F
If they are brought in contact and separated to
(c) 10x 0
N-m (d) l x tlie sam
10 N-m distance, they experience force F,.The ratio of F to F; i
11. What is the nagnitude of a point charge due to which (a) l:8 (b) -8:1I:2{c) (d) -2:1
the electric field 30 cm away has the magnitude 2 N/C 18. A charge Qis placed at each of the two opposite corners
[1/4nE, = 9x 10'Nn'ic') of a square. A charge q is placed at each of the other
(a) 2x
10"C b)3x 10" Cle) 5 x 10-"C) 9x 10-" C two corners. If the resultant force on Qis zero, then
(a) Q= 2q (b) Q=-V2q
12. A dipole of electric diole moment pis placed in a
(c) Q=2v2q id) Q =-2V2q
uniform clectric field of strength E 0is the angle
If
between positive directions of panl E, then the potential A positive point charge is brought ncar an isolated
19.
energy of the clectric dipole is largest when O is conducting sphere as shown in figure. The electric ficl
is best given by
(a) *1 (d) zero
(NCERT, Exempla

2
te)
3
13. The ratio of electrostatic and gravitational forces
acting
between electron and proton separated by a distance
5x 10m, will be (charge on clectron = 16x 10"C,
mass of electron = 9] x
l0 kg. mass of proton
= L6 x 10 kg. G 67x 10-" N-mk)
(a) 2.36x 10
(b) 2.36x 100
(c) 2.34x 1041 (d) 2.34x 102
e)
14. An electric dipole is placed in an uniform electric field
with the dipole axis making an angle 0 with the 20. A charge qis lying at mid-point of
the line joining the
direction of the electric ficld. The orientation of
the two similar charges Q. The system will be in
dipole for stable equilibrium is equilibrium, if the value of g is
(a) (b) (c) 0
la) Qr2 (b)-Q2 (c) Q/4 (d) - Q/4
6 2 21. The centres of two identical small conducting spheres
15. Figure shows electric field lines in which an electric are lm apart. They carry charges of
opposite kind and
dipole p is placed as shown. Which of attract each other with a force F.
the following When they are
statements is correct? (NCERT Exemplar] connected by a conducting thin wire they repel each
other with a force F/3. What is the ratio
of magnitude
of charges carried by the spheres initially?
(a) 1:1 :
-Q+4 (b) 2 1

(c) 3: 1
(d) 4 :1
22. 4, 2q. 3q and 4q charges are placed at
(a) The dipole will not experience any force the four corners
(b) The dipole will experience a force A, B, and D of a square. The field at the centre
C

towards right Pof

(c) The dipole will experiece a the square has the direction along
force towards left
(d) The dipole will experience a
force upwards
16. Two similar snall spheres having +q
and -q charge are
kept at a certain distance. F force acts between
two. If in the middie of two spheres, the
another similar
snall splhere having +q charge is kept, then it will
experiece a force in magnitude and direction as
(a) zero having no direction
3
(b) 8F towards +q charge
(c) 8F towards -q charge (a) AB (b) CB
(d) 4F towards +q charge (c) AC (d) BD
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields (35

23. A solid conducting sphere of radius a has a net pasitive 29. A square surface of side L metre in the plane of the
charge 2Q. A cotducting spherical shell of inner radius b paper is placed in a uniform clectric ficld E (volt/m)
and outer radius c is concentric with the solid sphere and acting along the same place at an angle with the
has a net charge -Q. The surface charge density on the horizontal side of the square as shown in figure. The
inner and outer surfaces of the splherical shell will be electric flux linked to the surface in unit of V-m, is

(a) EL (b) EL? cos 0

(c) EL' sin 0 (d) zero

(a)2Q
(c) 0.
4ne2
Q
4xb

(d) None of these

4nc
R 2R, 3R are given charges ,
30. Three concentric metallic spherical shells of radii
Q,Q, respectively. It is
found that the surface charge densities on the outer
4ne?
surfaces of the shells are equal. Then, the ratio of the
24. The electric flux through the surface [NCERT Exemplar) charges given to the shells Q, : Q, :Q, is
(a) I:2:3 (b) 1:3 :5
lc) l:4:9 (d) 1:8: 18

31. A charged block is projected

on a rough horizontal
surface with speed v. The
value of coefficient of
(iii) iv
friction if the kinetic energy of the block remains
constant is
(a) in Fig. (iv) is the largest
(b) in Fig. (iii) is the least
(c) in Fig. (ii) is same as Fig. (iii) but is smaller than Fig. (iv)
(d) is the same for all the figutes (c) q£ None of these
(d)

25. Two point charges q and 2q are placed some distance -

32. Electric charges q.4, 24 are placed at the corners of
apart. If the electric field at the location of q be E, then an equilatera! triangle ABC of side l. The magnitude of
that at the location of 2q will be electric dipole momnent of the system is
(a) 3E (b) E/2 {a) ql (b) 24f
(c) E (d) None of these (c) V3q! (d) 4q!
26. A ball with charge -50e is placed at the centre of a 33. A point charge +q is placed at a distance d from an
hollow spherical shell has a net charge of -50e. What isolated conducting plane. The field at a point P on the
is the charge on the shell's outer surface? other side of the plane is [NCERT Exemplar)
(a) -50e (b) Zero (c) -100e (d) + 100 e
la) directed perpendicular to the plane and away from the
27. A mass m 20 g has a charge q = 30 mC. lt moves with plane
a velocity of 20 ms and enters a region of clectric (b) dircctcd perpendicular to the plane but towards the
Ficld of 80 NC- in the same direction as the velocity of plane
(c) directed radialy away from the point charge
the mass. The velocity of the mass after 3 s in this (d) directed radially towards the point charge
region is
(a) 80 ns! (b) 56 ms (c) 44 ms (d) 40
mns 34. Under the influence of the Coulonmb field of charge +Q,
a charge -q is moving around it in an elliptical orbit.
28. Two parallel metal plates having charges + Qand -Q Find out the correct statementls).
face cach other at a certain distancc betwccn them. If (a) The angular monentum of the charge -q is constant
the plate are now dipped in kerosene oil tank, the (b) The linear nonentun ol the charge -q is const ant
electric field between the plates will (c) The anguiar velocity of the charge -qis constant
(a) becafne zero (b) increase (d) The linear speed of the charge -q is constant
(c) decrease (d) remain same
36 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

35.Two identical conducting spheres carrying different

charges attract eacth other with a forceFwhen placed
in ait medium at a distance d apart. Thc spheres are
brought into contact and then taken to their original
positions. Now, the two spheres repel eacth other witth a

force whole nagnitude is equal tothat of the initial 121

attractive force. The ratio between initial charges on 24

the spheres is
(a) -V8)only 24

(b)-3+ 8 unly 24
tc)
-3+ V8)or (-3+ J8)
(3 (4)
1

(a) (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4

le)-N8 41. Electric field intensity at a point
in between two
3 parallel sheets with like charges of sane surface charge
36. The electric field at a listance from the centre of a
densities (al is
2
charged conducting spherical shell of radius R is E. The (a) (b) (c) zero
2 Co
electric field at a distance from the centre of the
2 42. The electric changes are distributed in a small volume. The
sphere is
flux of the electric ficd througl a spherical surface of
(a) zero (b)E radius 10 cm sunounding thc total chargc is 20 V•m. The
(c) Er2 (d) Er3 flux over a concentric sphere of radius 20 cm will be
37. Under the action of a given coulombic force the (a) 20 Vm (b} 10 Vm (c) 40 Vm (d) 5 Vm
acceleration of an electron is 2.5 x 10* Then, thens. 43. Two charges of charge -4 uC and + 4 uCare placed of
magnitude of the acceleration of a proton under the the point A1, 0, 4)and B2, -1, 5) located in an electric
actiorn of same force is nearly field E = 0.20i V/C-m Then, torque acting on the
(a) L6 x 10-" m-2 (b) 9.1x 10 ms2 dipole will be
(c) 1.5 x 10" ms2 fd) 1.6 x 10* ms 2 (a) 2.31 x 10 N/mn (b) 7.98 x 10 C/m
(c) 7.11>x
10 C/n (d) 7.04 x 10 C/m
38. A drop of 10 kg water carries 10Cclharge. What
electric field should be applied to alance its weight 44. An infinite line charge produces a field of
fassutne g =10 ms) 7.182 x 10 NIC at distance of 2 cn. The linear charge
(al 10V /n upward () 10V/n downward density is
tc) 04 V /m downward
V
(d) 0.1 /m upward (a) 7.27x 10 C/m b) 7.98 x 10 C/m
x 10
lincar charge density of a bent wire as shown in the
(c) 7.11 C/m (d) 7.04 x 10 C/m
39. 1f
figure is .
45. The figure shows the path of a positively charged
particle 1 through a rectangular region of unilorm
clectric ficld as shown in the figure. What is the
direction of electric field and the direction of particles
2,3 and 4?
Tup
26
la) potential at the centre is
2E
Dwn
(b) electric field at the centre of the loop is (a) Top, down, top, down
2rER (6) Top, down, down, top
tc) Down, top, top, down
(c) electric field at the centre of the loop is
(d) Down, top, down, down
2rrR 2ER
(d) None of the above 46. The electric intensity due to a dipole of length 10 cm
and having a charge of 500, at a point on the axis at
40. Figures helow show regular hexagons, with charges at a
distance 20 cm from one of the charges in air, is
the vertices. In which of the following cases the la) 6.25 x 10' NJC (b) 9.28x 10° N/C
clectric ficld at the centre is not zero? le) 13.1x 1°NIC (c) 20.5 x 10' NIC
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 37

47. Two electric dipoles of moment pand 64p are piaced in 54. 'Allcharge on a conductor must reside on its outer
opposite direction on a line at a distance of 25 cm. The surface'. This.staternent is truc
electric field will be zero at point between the dipoles (a) in all cases
whose distance from the dipole of moment p is (b) for spherical conductors only (Both solid and hollow)
tc) for hollow spherical conductors only
25
(a) 5 cm (b)cm (c) 10 cm (d)cm (d) for conductors which do not have any sharp points of
13
CorIers
48. Two spherical conductors B and Chaving equal radi
and carrying equal charges in then repel cach other 55. Two charges + 4e and +e arc at a distance apart. At
with a force F. When kept apart at same distance. A what distance, a charge q must he placed from charge
third spherical conductor having same radius as that of +e, so that it is in equilibrium?
B but unctharged is brought in contact with B, then (a) x /2 (b) 2x/3 lc) x/3 (d) x/4
brought in contact with Cand finally removexd away from 56. Among two discs A and B, fitst has radius 10 cn and
both. The new force of repulsion between B and Cis charge l0Cand second has radius 30 cm and charge
(a) Fl4 (b) 3F/4
(c) Fr8 (d) 3F/8
10C. When they are touched, charges on both are, qA
and q, tespectively, will be
49. A sample of HCl gas is placed in an clectric ficld of (a) 4 =2.75uC. 4n =3.15uC
3x 10 NC. The dipole moment of each HCI molecule (b) qa I.(9uC, qn l.53uC
is 6 x 10 Cm. The maximum torque that can act on (Cl 94
=
=5.5uC
a molecule is (d) None of
the above
(a) 2 x 10 (b)2 x 10 N-m 57. Two charges are at a distance d apart. If a copper plate
CNm
(c) 18x 10 N-m (d) 0.5 x 10o" of thickness dr2 is kept between them, then effective
c-N'm! force will be
50. A water molecule has an electric dipole moment
6.4 x 10 cm when it is in vapour state. The distance
(al (b) zero (c) 2F (d) V2r
2
in metre betwcen the centre of positive and negative
charge of the molccule is 58. Two point charges -q and + are situated at the origin
la) 4 x 1o-i0 2
(b) 4 x 10-!!
and at the point a 0, 0) respectively. The point along
(c) 4 x 10-12 (d) 4 x 10-3 the X-axis where the electric field vanishes is
51. Figure shown below is a distribution of charges. The (b) (c) x =
V2a V2a
flux of electric field due to these charges through the x=2a (d) x
=

surface Sis
V2 -1 2+1
59. Five charges q;. q2 9y 94, and q, are fixed at their
( asitions as shown in figure, S is a Gaussian surface.
The Gauss's law is given by E· dS =, Which of the

(a) 3q/Eo
following statements is correct? [NCERT Exemplar]
(b) 2q/e
(c) qE (d) zero
52. There cxists an clectric field of NC along Y 1

direction. The flux passing through the square of I m

placed in xplane inside the electric field is
(a) 1.0 Nm'c-!
(c) 2.0 Nm'
(b) 10.0 Nm'c!
(d) 2ero
53. Two positive ions, each carrving a charge q, are
(a) E otn
.
the LHS of the above eguation will have á
contritution from q 4; and 4%, and q, whileq on the
RHS will have a contribution from q,
and q, only
(b) E on the LHS of the atbove
separated by a distance d. 1fFis the force of repulsion equation will have a
between the ions. then the number of electrons missing contribution fron all charges while q on the RHS will
from cach ion will be (e being the charge on an have a contrilut ion fron q, and onlyq

(c) Eon the LHS of the above

electron) equatin will have a
contribution from all charges while.q on the RHS will
(a) 7cFd? (b) ,ne,Fe? Anc,Fd? have a contribution from q. 4,
-c) atd q, only
(d) Both E on the LIIS and g on
e the RIIS will
have contribution from q, and q, only
 38 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

60. In figure two positive charges q, and q, fixed along the 65. ABC is an equilateral triangle. Charges +q are placed at
Y-axis, exert a net clectric force in the + rdirection on each corner. The clectric intensity at O, the centroid of
a charge q, fixed along the X-axis. If a pasitive charge Q the triangle, O will be
) is added at (x, O, then the force on q, NCERT Exemplar)

(x. 0)

B
(a) shall inerease along the positive X-axis.
(b) shall decrease along the positive X-axis. 3
(a) (b
(c) shall point along the negative X-axis.
(d) shall increase bt the direction changes because of the
intersection of Q with q, and q, (c) zero (d)
61. A hemisphere is uniformly charged positively. The
electric field at a point on a diameter away from the 66. A wire of lincar charge density à passes through a
centre is dirccted (NCERT Exemplar) cuboid of length l, breadth b and heighr h in such a
(a) perpendicular to the diameter manner that flux through the cuboid is maximum. The
(b) parallel to the diameter position of wire is now changed, so that the flux
(c) at an angle tilred towards the diameter through he cuboid is minimum. l>b> h, then the ratio
(d) at an angle tilted away from the diameter of maximum flux to minimum flux will be
62. A ring of radius Ris uniformly chargcd. Lincar charge
(b)
density is i. An imaginary splaere of radius Ris drawn
with itscentre on circumference of ring, Total electric
flux passing through tthe sphere would be (d)

(b)
67. Equal charges q are placed at the four corers A, B C
(c) zero (d) None of these and Dof a square of length a. The magnitude of the
63. Three point charges as shown are placed at the vertices force on the charge at B will be
of an isosceles right angled riangle. Which of the ka)
(b)
numbered vectors coincides in direction with the
electric field at the mid-point M of the hypotenuse?

68. A smll element lis cut from a circular ring of radius a

.
and charge per unit length. The net clectric field at
the centre of ring is
(al zero (b)
Q:*q 4REa
{c) infinity (d)
(a) 1

(b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4 4nEJ

64. Two identical charged spheres of material density p,
69. Two point charges q, 2uC
suspended from the same point by inextensible strings
of equal length make an angle O bet ween the strings. and q, = l uC. are placed Plab)
at distances b = l cm and
When suspended in a liquid of density g the angle 0 a =2 cm from the origin of
remains the same. The dielectric constant K of the
liquid is the Y and X-axis as shown in
figure. The electric field
(al () P-g vector at xoint IHa, b) will
P subtend an angle O with the X-axis given by
(a) tan 0 =| (b) tan 0 =2
(c) tan 0 =3 (d) tan 0=4
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 39

70. Two small spherical balis each carrying a charge 76. A charge 10nC is placed at the centre •10C
Q=10uC{10 micro-coulomb) are suspended by two of a hemisphere of radius R = 10 cm as
insulating threads of equal lengths i m each, from a shown. The electric flux through the
point fixed in the ceiling. It is found that in equilibrium henisphere (in MKS units) is
threads are separated by an angle 60° between them, as (a) 20 x 10 (b) 10x 1o
shown in the figure. What is the tension in the threads tc) 6x 10 (d) 2 x 10
1

(Given, =9x 10° Nm/C)

(4zE) 77. Electric charge is uniformly distributed along a long
straight wire of radius I mm. The charge per centimetre
length of the wire is Q coulomb. Another cylindrical
surface of radius 50 cm and lengh Im symmetrically
encloses the wire as siown in the figure. The total
electric flux passing through the cylindrical surface is

(a) 18 N (b) 1.8 N

(c) 018 N (d) None of these
71. An infinite numther of charges, each of charge l uC, are I n
placed on the X-axis with coordinates
x=1,2, 4, 8,
.., If a charge of 1C is kept at the
0.

origin, then what is the net force acting on 1C charge

(a) 9000 N (b) 12000N (c) 24000 N (d) 36000 N
x
72. An electron moving with the speed 5 10s is 100Q 100Q
shooted parallel to the electric fiekd of intensity (a)2 (b) (d)
Er (RE,) (RE,)
Ix 10 N/C Field is responsible for the retardation of
motion of electron. Now, evaluate the distance travelled 78. A square surlace of side L metres is in the plane of the
by the electron before coming to rest for an instant
paper. A uniform electric fieldE(volt/m), also in the
(mass of electron = 9x 10 kg charge = 1.6 x 10* O plane of the paper, is limited only to the lower half of
the square surface, (see figure). The electric flux in
(a) 7m (b) 0.7 mam (c) 7 cnm
(di 0.7 cm Sl units associated witl the surface is
73. An electric dipole coincides on Z-axis and its nid-point
is on origin of the coordinates system. The clectric ficld
at an axial point at a distance z from origin is E,, and
electric field at an equatorial point at a distance y from

Ey)· Here, z=y>> a, so

EL
origin is (a) zer0 (b)
|E; tc) HL'I2E,) (d) EL² 12
(a) 1
(b) 4 (c) 3 (d) 2
79. Which of the following graphs shows the variation of
74. Three point charges tq. -2q and +q are placed at points electric ficid E due to a holiow spherical conductor of
(x=0, y z= 0), (x = 0, y =0z= 0) and
= 4,
radius R as a function distance from the centre
(x=a, y =
0, 2 = 0\ respectively. The magrnitude and of the splere?
direction of the electric dipole moment vector of this
charge assembly are
(a) V2ga along + y-direction
(a) (b
(b) 2pa along the line joining points (r = a y=4 z=0)
and (x =u, y=4, 2= 0)
(c) qaalong the line joining points (r =Q y=Qz0) and
R
(x =a, y=a,2 = 0)
(d) 2ga along +x direction
75. A cylinder of radius Rand length Lis placed in a (c) ld)
uniform electric field E parallel to the cylinder axis.
The total flux for the surface of the cylinder is given by
la) 2zR'E (b) nR²IE (c) (zR'/R)/ E \d) zcro
40) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

80. In a uniformly charged splhere of total charge Q and 85. The distance hetween the two charges 25 uCand 36 uC
radius R. the electric field E is plotted as function of is 1l cm At what point on the line joining the two, the
distance from the centre. The graph which would
intensity will be zero?
correspond to the above will be (a) At a distance of 5 cu from 25 uC
(b) At a distance of 5 cm fron 36 uC
E (c) At a distance of 4 cm frotn 25 uC
(d) At a distance of 4 cm fron 36 uC
la) (b)
86. The clectric field at a puint due to an electric dipole, on
an axis inclined at an angle O< 90°) to the dipole axis,
Rr R is perpendicular to tlhe dipole axis, if the angle O is
ta) tan2) (b) tan ie) tan'w2) d) tan
V2)
(c) (d)
87. If 10" clectrons are acquired by a body every second,
the time required for the body to get a total charge of C
will be
ta) 2h (b) 2 davs (c) 2 yr td) 20 yr
81. An electric dipole is situated in an electric field of 88. ABC is an equilateral triangle. Charges -24 are placed
uniform intensity E whose dipole moment is p and at cach corner. The clectric intensity at O will be
moment of inertia is L f the dipole is displaced slightly
from the equilibriun position, then the angular -24
frequency of its oscillations is
3/2

24

82. Two point charges (+ Q) and (-2Q) are fixcd on the (a)9 (b)
X-axis at positions a and 2a from origin, respectively. 4 RE)
At what positions on the axis, the resultant electric
(c) zero (d)
field is zero
(a) Only xm V2a (b) Only xm -V2a
89. Two equally charged, identical metal spheres A and 3
(c) Both x=t V2a (d) Onlyx 3a repeleach other with a force F. The spheres are kept
fixed with a distance r betwcen them. A third identical,
83. Change q, of mass m revolves around a stationary but uncharged sphcre C is brought in contact with A
charge q, in a circular orbit of radius r. The orbital and then placed at the mid-point of the line joining A
periodic time of g, would be and B. The magnitde of the nct clectric force on Cis
2 (a) F (b) F/4 (c) Fr2 (d) 4F
kg,
kqqz
(b)
4n°my 90. Two point charges + 10"Cand -10C are placed at A
and B 20 cm apart as shown in the figure. Calculate the
fc)
4'mr clectric ficld at C, 20 cm apart from both A and B.
kaaz ka,g:

84. Four charges equal to -Qare placed at the four corners

of a square and a charge qis at its centre. If the system
is in equilibrium, the value of qis -10-C
•10-C
-20 ct
+

(a) 1.5x 10 NC (b) 2.2x 10 NC!

(c) 3.5x 10 NC (d) 3.0x 10 NC!
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 41

1. Infinite charges of magnitude q each are lying at x

...
=1,2, 4, 8, metre on X-axis. The value of intensity of 2co
electric field at point x =0 due to these charges will be
(c)
(al 12x 10 g NC (b) zero 3

(c) 6x 10 g NC-! (d) 4x 10 g NC

97. The adjacent diagram Charge + 0 on
shows a charge +Q held insulating support
92. Two copper balls, cach weighing 10g, are kept in air on an insulating support
10 cn apart. If one electron from every 1o° atoms is
transferred from one ballto the other, then the coulomb S and enclosed by a
hollow splherical
force between them is (atomic weight of copper is 63.5) SP= x
(a) 2.0x 10°N b) 2.0 x 10'N conductor. O represents
the centre of the
fc) 2.0 x 1o"N (d) 2.0x 10 N =x
spherical conductor and P is a point such that OP
93. A wooden block performs and SP =r. The electric field at point Pwill be
E
SHM on a frictionless surface (a)
with frequency Vo. The block 4Er'
carries a charge +Q on its (c) 0 (d) None of these
surface. If now a uniform
electric field E is switched on as shown, then SHM of 98. An infinitely long thin straight wire has uniforn linear
the block will be charge density of-cmn. Then, the magnitude of the
3
(a) of the same frequency and with shifted mean position
(b) of the sarme frequency and with the sarme mean position electric intensity at a point 18 cm away is (given,
(c) of changed frequency and with shifted mean pusition Co = 8.8x 10-1c?Nm)

(d) of changed frequency and with the sarne mean position la) 0.33x 1d'NC! (b) 3x 10'NC!
94. A thin conducting ring of radius (c) 0.66x 1d'NC! (d) I.32x 1d'NC-!
Ris given a charge + Q The
electric field at the centre O of 99. Two concentric conducting thin spherical shells A and B
having radii r, and ra Gg >ra)are charged to Q
and
the ring due to the charge on the a
pt AKB of the ring is E. The -Qs (1Qa! >\Q4|l The clectrical field along line,
(passing through the centre) is
clectric ficld at thc centre duc
to the charge on the part ACDB E
of the rirng is
(b)
(b)3E along OKUp
(a) E along KO
(c) 3F along KO (d) E along OK
iso
95. Four point +ve charges of
same magnitude (Q) are placed
four corners of a rigid E
square frame shown in
figure. The plane of the frame (d)
is perpendicular to Z-axis. If a
Zaxis
negative point charge is
placed at a distarce z away
from the atove frame (z << L, then
(al negative charge oscillates along the Z-axis
(b) it moyes away from the frame 100. Two identical charged spheres suspended from a
(cl it oves slowlv towards the frame axd stays in the common point by two massless strings of lengthlare
plane of the frame initially a distance dd << ) apan because of their
td) it passes through the frame only once mutual repulsion. The charge begins to lcak from both
96. A hollow cylinder has a charge B the spheres at a constant rate. As a result the charges
q
coulomb within it. II is the approach each other with a velocity v. Then, as a
clectric flux in units of function of distance x between them
volt-metre associated with the
curved surface B, then the flux linked with the plane
surface A in units of volt-metre will be
42) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

101. An electron is released from the botton plate A as

shown in the figure (F =10'N/CL The velocity of the
electron when it reaches plate B will be nearly equal to 2nEmg 2rEmg

4REmg 4ncmg

E
104. Two small spheres of mnasses M, and M, are suspended
-10 NIC
by weightless insulating threads of lengtlis L, and L,.
A The spheres carry charges Q and Q2, respectively. The
E-10 NIC spheres are suspended such that they are in level with
one another and the threads are inclined to the vertical
(a) 0.85 x 10 ms-! (b) 1.0 x 10 ms-! at angles of 0, and 0, as shown. Which onc of the
(c) 125 x 1o ms (d) 1.65 x 10' ms-! following conditions is essential, if 0, =0,?
102. Charge q is unifornly distributed over a thin halí ring of
radius R. The clectric field at the centre of the ring is
(a) 9
2n'eR
(c) (d
2ne R*

103.In the given figure, two tiny (a) M, M, but 2 (b) M, M,

conducting balls of identical (c) Q= (d) L, =l4
mass m and identical charge q
105. At what distance along the central axis of a uniformly
hang from non-conducting
threads of equal length . charged plastic disc of radius R is the magitude of the
electric field equal to one-half the magnitude of the
Assume that is so small that field at the centre of the surface of the disc?
tan 0 sin 0, then for R R
equilibrium x is equal to (a) (c) V2R (d)
3R
(e) Nonc of these

B.) Medical entrance special format questions

Assertion and reason Reason Some energy disappears in the form of heat,
sparking, ctc.
Directions (Q. Nos. 1-15) These questions consist of tuo 3. Assertion The coulomb force is the dominating force in
statements each printed as Assertion and Reason. While ansuering the universe.
these questions you are Tequired to cho0se anyone of the follouing
Reason The coulomb force is weaker than the
fve responses. gravitational force.
(a) 1If both Assertion and Reason are correct and Reason is the
correct explanation of Assertion. 4. Assertion Due to two point charges clectric field
(b) lf both Assertion and Reason are correct but Reason is not cannot be zero at some point simultancously.
the correct explanation of Assertion. Reason Ficld is a vector quantity.
(c) lf Assertion is true but Reason is false.
(d) lf Assertion is false but Reason is true. 5. Assertion At the centre of the line joining two equal
=
If both Assertion and Reason arc falsc.
and opposite charges, E 0.
(e)
Reason At the cerntre of the line joining two equal and
1. Assertion Mass of ion is slightly differed from its element. similar charge, E z 0.
Reason lon is formed, when sone clectrons are 6. Assertion A
point charge produces a uniform electric
removed added, so mass changes.
field.
2. Assertion When charges are shared between any two
bodies, then no charge is really lost but some loss of Reason Due to a point charge, electric lines of forces
are parallel and equidistant.
energy does occur.
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and felds (43

7. Assertion A point charge is brought in arn clectric field.

Match the columns
The ficld at a nearby point will increase, whatever be
the nature of the charge. 1. Match the following two columns.
Reason The clectric fieid is independent of the nature Columnl Column 11
of charge. A. Flctric charge (MT"AI
8. Assertion On going away from a point charge or a B. Flectric fieid strerngth q (MLT-'A-|
small electric dipole, electric field decreases at the same
rate in both the cases. C Absolute pernittivity r. (MT'A'
Reason Electric field is inversely proportional to square D Electric dijole None
of distance from the charge or an electric dipole.
9. Assertion Electric lines of force cross cach other. 2. Two charges + q and -q are placed at distance r. Match
Reason Electric field at a point superimposes to give the following two columns when distarnce between
one resultant elecric field. them is changed to r'.
10. Assertion The surface chage densities of two spherical Columnl Column II
conductors of different radii are equal. Then, the A Force between them will become half
elecric field intensities near their surface are also equal.
B
Reason Surface charge density is cqual to charge per Force between thetm will becone th
unit area.
11. Assertion Two identical balls are charged by q C. r'= 4r Force between them will become four
times
They are suspended from a common oint by two
insulating threads I each. In equilibrium, the angle D.
between the tension in the threads is 180°. (lgnore ; S. None

gravity).
Renson in equilitbriun tension in the springs is 3. Match the ficld lincs given in ColumnIwith the charge
1 q:9 configuration due to which field lines exist in Column Il.
T=
4nE, I
Column Column I
12. Assertion Halí of the ring is uniformly positively P. A pair of equal and
A.
charged atd otlier halí uniformly negatively charged. opposite charges
Then, electric field is zero at centre.

B q. A pair of positive
chargs

Reason At the centre of uniformly charged ring,

electric ficld is zero.
13. Assertion If a dipole is enclosed by a surface, then
according to Gausss law, electric flux linked with it r. A single psitive charge
will be zero.
Reason The charge enclosed by a surface is zero.
14. Assertion In a region, where uniform electric field
exists, the net charge within volume of any size is zero.
Renson The clectric flux within any closed surface in
region of uniform electric ficld is zero.
D 5. A single Degative
15. Assertion With the help of Gauss's theorem we can charge
find electric field at any point.
Reason Gauss's theorem can be applied for any type of
charge distribution.
44) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

-2e
4. Four metallic plates are charged 5. Match the following two columns.
as shown in figure. Now. match
Column Column I|
the following two columns.
p.
Eletric field outside the unifornly
charged non-condutitg splere
11
Column I Column Electric ficld inside the conducting q.

A. Electric field in region-I sphere

2
C Eletic licki due to infinite thin .
Electric ficld in regon-I1 plane shcet of charge

Electric ficld at centre of None

C Electric ficld in region-ll
hemispberical charged body
2E,

D Electric ficld in rcgion-1V 7eTO

C) Medical entrances' gallery

(Collection of questions osked in NEET & Various medicol entronce exoms)

1. An electric dipole is placed at an angle of 30° with an in between them, where the electric field intensity is
electric ficld intensity 2 x 10 NIC. It experiences a zero, then the distance of the point P from the centre of
torque equal to 4 N-m. The charge on the dipole, if the A
is [Kerala CEE 2015]
dipole length is 2 cm is INEET 2016] (al 5 m {b) 6 m (c) 7 m (d) 8 m
(a) 8 mC (b) 2 mC (d) 4 m
(c) 5 m(: (d) 7 aC 6. A point charge q is situated at a dist:ance r on axis from
2. The electric field in a certain region is acting radially one end of a thin conducting rod of length L having a
outward and is given by E Ar. A charge contained in charge Q(uniformly distributed along its length). The
a sphere of radius e centred at the origin of the field magnitude of electric force bt ween the two is
will be given by (CBSE AIPMT 2015] (Guj. CET 2013|
(a) 4ne,Aa? 2KQ KQa
b) Aca? tb) (d
rr+L) rlr-L) rr+L)
(c) 4neAa
7. When 10 clectrons are removed from a neutral metal
3. A Gaussiat surface in the cylinder of cros5-Section Tta
plate through some process, then the charge on it
and length L is immersed in a uniforn electric field E becomes (Guj. CET 2015)
with the cylinder axis parallel to the ficld. The flux of (a) + 1.6C C
(b)- 1.6
the electric field through the ciosed surface is (c) 1( C (di 1019 c
|EAMCET 2015]
(a) 2 ra'E (b)
raEL 8. A charge Q is uniformly distributed over a large plastic
(c) na 2+ L)E (d) zero plate. The clectric ficld at point P close to centre of
plate is 10 Vm. If the plastic plate is replaced by
4. A total charge of 5 uC is distributed uniformly on the copper plate of the sarme geometrical dimension and
surface of the thin walled semispherical cup. If the carrying the same charge Q. then the electric ficld at
electric field strengh at the centre of the hemisphere is that point will be (CG PMT 2015]
9x 10" NC, then the radius of the cup is (a) zero (b) 5 Vm!
lc) 10 Vm-! (d) 20 Vm!
(a
(a) 5 mn
=9x 10°Nn²c|
(b) 10 nm
[EAMCET 2015] 9. A uniform clectric field is created between two parallel
charged piates as shown below. An electron enters the
(c) 5 cm (d) 10 cm field synetrically between the plates with a specd of
Vo. The length of cach plate is I. Find the angle of
5. Two small spherical shells A and B are given positive deviation of path of the electron as it comes out of the
charges of 9 C and 4 C respectively and placed such field. [CG PMT 2015)
that their centres are separated by 10 m. If Pis a point
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 45

15. If the electric field lines is flowing along axis of a :

cylinder, then the flux of this ficld through the
cvlindrical suríace with the axis parallel to the ficld is
---- [where, r= radius of cylinder] (UP CPMT 2015)
(al
=
tan-!. El (b) = tan eEl (a) (b) (c) zero (di
mv mvý 2ntg 2 Ep

(d) 0 =
eE 16. An inclined plane of length 5.60 m making an angle of
tan
mvo 45° with the horizontal is placed in a uniform electric
field E =100Vm. A particle of tmass kg and charge I

10. The line AA' is on charged infinite A

10**Cis allowed to slide down from rest position from
conducting plane which is perpendicular to
maximunn height ol slope. Il the coefficient of Iriction
the plane of the paper. The plane has a is 0.1, then the tine taken by the particle to reach the
surface density of charge o and B is ballof
bottom is (Guj. CET 2015]
nass m with a like harge of agnitude q. B s s
(a) 1
(b) l.41
is connected by string from a point on the A

(c) 2s (d) None of these

line AA'. The tangent of angle (0) formed
between the line AA' and the string is [WB JEE 2015] 17. Two ctarged spleres separated at a distance d exert a
qG force F on each other. If they are immersed in a liquid
(a)
2Egng of dielectric constant K =2, then the force (if all
4nEmg
conditions are same) is (UK PMT 2014]
(a) F/2 (b) F (ch 2F () 4F
2REng
a
18. If charge on the body is nC. then how many
l
11. The angle between the dipole moment and electric field electrons arc present on the boxiy? (KCET 2014|
at any point on the equatorial plane is [KCET 2015]
(a) 180° (b) 0 (c) 45 (d} 90
la) 1.6x
19 (b) 6.25 x
10
(c) 6.25 x 10" (d) 6.25 x 102%
12. Pick out the staternent which is incorrect? (KCET 2015]
19. Electric field at a point of distance r Irom a unifornly
(a) A negative test charge experiences a force opposite to
charged wire of infinite length having linear charge
the direction of the field
(b) The tangent drawn to a line of force represents the
density à is directly proportional to (Kerala CEE 2014)
(al r! (b) r (c) r (d)
direction of eiectric field
(c) Ficld lines never intersect (e) None of these
(d) The electric ficld lines form ciosed loop
20. Two equal and oppusite charges of masses m, and m,
13. An electron of mass M,, initially at rest, moves through are accclerated in a uniform clectric ficld through the
a certain distance in a uniform electric field in time t,. same distance. What is the ratio of their accelerations,
A proton of mass M, also initially at rest, takes time t, if their ratio of masses is
m, =
0.5?
to move through an cqual distance in this uniform (KCET 2014)

,
electric field. Neglecting the effect of gravity, the ratio
It, is nearly equal to |AIIMS 2015] (a) =0.5 () =| (c) =2
M.
(a) 1 (c) (d) 1836 21. An electric dipole of dipole moment p is placed in a
M,
uniform external electric field E. Then, the
14. Two charges of 10 HC and -10uCare placed at points [Kerala CEE 2014]
(a) torque experienced by the dijole is Ex p
and Bseparated by a distance of 10 cm. Find the
A

b) torque is zero, if p is perpendicular to E

electric field at a point P on the perpendicular bisector
(c) torque is tmaximum, if p is perpeklicular to E
of AB at a distance of 12 cn from its middle point.
(UK PMT 2015) (d) poternt ialenergv is nnaximmum, ifp is arallel to E
(e) potential energy is naximum, if p is pespenlicular to E

12 cm 22. Au electric dipole placed in a non-unifon clectric field

10 C -10uC cxperiences [UK PMI 2014]
10 cm B
(a) koth a torque and a net force
A
x
(b) Only a force but vo torqtue
x 10 NC
(a) 16.4 NC (b) 28.4 10 (c) Only a torque but no net force
(c) 8. 2 x 10 NC-! (d) 4.1 x 10° NC! (d) No torque and no nct force
46) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

23. What is the naturc of Gaussian surface involved in

Gauss's law of electrostatics? [KCET 2014)
(a) 4 (b)

(a) Scalar (b) Elcctrical

(c) Magnetic (d) Vector (c) 2
4 ne.a
24. Two pith balls carrying cqual charges are suspended
frotn a common point by strings of equal length, the 31. 1ftwo charges + 4e and +e are at a distance x apart,
cquilibrium separation between then is r. Now, the then at what distarnce charge q must be placed fron +e,
strings are rigidly clarnped at half the height. The so that it is in cquilibrium? (BCECE (Mains) 2012
equilibrium separation between the balls now becomes (c)
(a) b) ()
(NEET 2013]
3 6 3
32. If a ass
of 20g having charge 3.0 nC moving with
velocity 20 ms enters a region of electric field of
80 NC in the same direction as the velocity of mass,
then the velocity of mass after 3 s in the region will be
[BCECE 2012
(a) 40 s! (b) 44 ms
(c) 56 ms (d) 80 ns

a) 33. A rod lies along the X-axis with one end at the origin
and the other at It
x.
carries a uniform charge
25. An electric charge does not have which of the following CGn'. The electric field at the point x=-a on the
properties? [J&K CET 2013) axis will be [AMU 2012
(a) Total charge conservation =

(b) E
(a) E
(b) Quantisation of charge 4 nEGa
(c) Two types of charge
(d) Circular line of force
(c) E
--) (d) E

26. The net electric force on a charge of + 3uC at the

34. The given figure shows a spherical
mid•point on the line joining two charges uf magnitude Gaussian surface and a charge
+2 uCand -2 uCseparated by the distance of 6 mm, is distribution. When calculating the flux
J&K CET 2013)
(a) 6000 N N of clectric held througlh the Gaussian
(b) 300
(c) 60 N (d) zero surface. then the electric field will be
due to [AMU 2012
27. The force of repulsion between two electrons at a (a) + 9, alone (b) + q; and + q,
certain distance is F. The force between two protons (c) + 4, + 4, and -4, {d) + q, and -4
separated by the same distance is Gn, = 1836n,)
(Kearala CET 2013| 35. What is the flux through a cube of side a, if a point
(b) F (c) 1836F charge of q is a one of its cormer? |AIPMT 2012
(a) 2F 24
1836 a) (b) 9
(e) F 8,
4
(d)6?
28. A point charge q is placed at a distance x/2 directly En 2E

above the centre of a cube of side x. The flux through 36. 1f the electric field is given by (5i + 4j+ 9k. then the
the cube is (MP PMT 2013)
flux through a surface of area 20 unit lying in
electric
(a) q Eo (b) q/2co (d) q/E the yz plane will be |AFMC 2012
4ED
(a) 100 unit (b) 80 unit lc) 180 unit ld) 20 unit
29. Electrical forcc is acting bctween two charges kept in 37. Charge Q is divided into two parts which are then kept
vacuum. A copper plate is placed between the charges, some distance apart. The force between them will be
the force now is (MP PMT 2013)
morc zero
maximun, if the lwo parts are having the charge
lal (b) less but not [AFMC 2012
(c)
remains unchanged (d) zero (a)
each (b)
and 39
30. Equal charge q each are placed at the vertices A and B 2 4 4
of an equilateral triangle ABC of side a. The magnitude and 2Q (d) None of these
of electric intensity at the point Cis [UP CPMT 2012) 3 3
 Answers
Check point 1.1
1, (d) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (c) 9. (a) 10. (d)

Check point 12
1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (c) 5. (a) 6. (d) 7. (a) 8. (a) 9. (d) 10. (c)
11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (b)

Check point 1.3

1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (b) 5. (d) (o) 7. (c) 8. (d)
6. 9. (c) 10. (c)

Check point 1.4

1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (b) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (d) 9. (d) 10. (d)

Check point 1.5

1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (b) 5. (b) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (a} 9. (d) 10. (b)
11. (c) 12. (d) 13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (a) 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (c) 20. (a)

A. Taking it together
1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (b) S. (b) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. () 9. (c) 10. (c)
11. (a) 12. (c) 13. a) 14. 15. (c) 16. (c) 17. (b) 18. (d) 19. (a) 20. (d)
21. (c) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (d) 25. (d) 26. 27. (b) 28. (c) 29. (d) 30. (b)
31. (8) 32. (c) 33. (a) 34. (8) 35. (c) 36. 4a) 37. (c) 38. (a) 39. (b) 40. (b)
41. (c) 42. (a) 43. (b) 44. (b) 45. (a) 46. (a) 47. (a) 48. (d) 49. (c) 50
S1. (b) S2. (d) $3. (c) S4. (a) S5. (c) 56. (c) S7. (b) 58. (C) 59. (b) 60. (ai
61. (a) 62. (d) 63. (b) 64. (al 65. (c) 66. 67. (c) 68. (al 69. (b) 70. (b)
71. (b) 72. (c) 73. (C) 74. (b) 75. (d) 76. (c) 77. (b) 78. (a) 79. (3) 80. (c)
81. (a) 82. (b) 83. (a) 84. (b) 85. (a) 86. (c) 87. (d) 88. (c) 89. (a) 90. (b)
91. (a) 92. (c) 93. (al 94. () 95. (a} 96. (a) 97. (a) 93. (al 99, (a) 100. (a)
101, (a) 102. (a) 103. (a) 104, (b) 105. (b)

B. Medical entrance special format questions

Assertion and Reason
1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (e) 4, (b) 5. (e) 6. (e) 7. (e) 8. (e) 9. (d) 10. (b)
11, (c) 12. (d) 13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (c)

Match the Columns

1. (A-+s; B-:C->p. D-s) 2. (A-+q:8->r;C>s; D- s) 3. (A-s; B-+r:C-+4; D+p)
4. (A-+s, B+p, C-+p, D- s) 5. (Ar:B8-, Cq:Dq)

C Medical entrances' gallery

1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (a) 5. (b) 6. (d) 7. ta) 8. (C) 9. (b) 10. (a)
11. (a) 12. (d) 13. (b) 14. (d) 15. (c) 16. (b) 17. a) 18. (b) 19. (3) 20. (c)
21. (c) 22, (a) 23. (d) 24. (b) 25. (d) 26. (d) 27, (b) 28. (d) 29. (b) 30. (c)
31. (b) 32. (c) 33. (c) 34. (C) 35. (b) 36 37, (a)
Hints and
explanations
Check point 11 2. (6 Aceording to Coulomb's law,
2. (d Negative charge mcans excess of elet ron which increases F
the mass of sphere B.
3. (ol Change on the sphere, q = ne
= 10 x1.6x10-19
F O.06)
q=1.6x10°C= 16uC .. Force = 11.25 N
between two charges, F,
4. td) As conductur as positive charge. So, there is a deficiency 4. (c) Force, F
9 x 10 I
of electrons.
.. Nunbr of clectrots 14.4x10 9
=9
x10y?
F9x10.(2 (0.5) =
0.144N
1.6x10 -19
5. l Charge on a
particlc, q ne 1
47x10X-5x 10) 1 35 x
5. (a) F= 10N
q+2> 2x1.6x 10*"
-
3.2x\0PC I (+5 x 10°X-7x 10) 1
35 x 10
F -N
6. l) As, g= Ne ur N =
!
x 6. (d F- K.
iqis balved, r is doubled, then
10t
80
..Number of clectrons, N I.6x10i9

7. () When we rub glass tod with silk, excess elcctrons are (

translerred from glass to silk. So, glass rod becomes positive
ad silk bevomes negative, 16
9. (a) When positively charged bxty connected to earth, then F'
F
eletrons flow fron earth to xxiy and body becornes neutral. 16
The new force acting on each charge is --

8. (u) Dielectric constant, K=

Check point 12
So,
x 2
1. (6) Force, F
(1x 10*%5 10)
9. (d) By using, K= 10
x 4
[if distarnce hetween them is r] 25 105
Also,
1
(5x10 Xx10 10. (c) We have, F = F' or
force. =
AE

Gm, Xm,)
5
10 11. (d Gravitatinal foxce, E,

But disection of , anl F, ate dilferent. Also, clecctrostatic forcc, F.

1

4nE,
le Xe)

Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 49

 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 49

Gm,) 6.67 ×
(9,1 x 10"
10x 6. (a) E = Electric field at mid-point M duc to +5uC charge
x
F 9x 10° (1.6x 10" x 5x10 =
-9x10 45x10' NIC
(0.1
- 2.39 x 10 +
+3uC A
10u
So, ratio of F,/F, is of order 10.
13. () They will not expetience any lorce, if |Fl=|F| -20cu
Gm E, = Electric field at M
due to +10uCcharge
=9x10, 10x106 = 0x10 NIC
(0.!
4RE,G =
m² Net electric field at M=|Egl-!El 45x10 NIC
q/m4n,G =
4.5x 10° N/C. in the direction of E, i.e., towards +5uC
13. (b) Let F, = Force on charge at C due to charge at A clharge.
7. (d The net field will be zero at
a point ontside the charges
and neat the charge which smaller in magnitude.
is

•2u.120 -2q P

Suppre electric field is zero at Pas shown in the figurc.

10 cm
Hence, atP.K4,st
10,10 2x |0
..
F9x x
- 1.8 N So, distance of P Éron origin is, L + L = 2L.
(l0 10P 8. (d) Due to symmetry of charges, electric field internsity is
Similarly, F Force on point (C due to charge at B equal and oppesite due to charges. So, they cancel ot. Hence,
x 10 x2 x
10 net electric field due to chatge distrihutiorn at centre of cube
9x10 -
l.8N
(10 x10
:.Net foce on C,

=/L.8 + (1.8' +
21.8X1.81-Lv2) = 1.8N

Check point 13
1. tal Electric field =
Force per unit charge=.
9. td At point A and C, clectric field lines are dense and equally
The unit of intensity of cietric field is newto/coulomb. spaced, so E, = Eç.
While at B. they are far apart.
2. () a-particles are charged pasticies, so thev are deflected by
electric lield. E, = Eç> E,
10. (co Electric ines of force never intersect the conductor. They
3. (b QE = y 5x10-x10
Q=
10
=5x10"C are perpenicular and slightly curved near the surface of
conducto.
Since, eleclric field ix xting downward, so for balance charge
miust bx negativc. Check point 14
4. (D) Elcctric icld, E
=9x 10. 1. (u) Diole moment, p
=
xr=1.6 x 101 x 4.3 x 103
= 6.8x
5x10 102 c-m
=9x10x (0.8)
=7x10 NIC
2. (E8 On equatorial line electric field is given by
5. (iN Electric field.,
x
E-9x10' 500 = 9x10" x
(3) On axil linc, P
Q- 0.5uC
50 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Exial
2Ea 5. (b) From (Gauss's Law,
But, since there directions are opposite.
Hence, E, = 2E,
3. (b) Electric field, E,.. (along M

Electric field, kP
E,2r [opposite to M

4. (c) Ifdipole is rotated through an angle of 90° about it's = Total charge enclosed
Net lux
perpendicular axis, then given point comes ott equatorial linc.
So, field becornes half of pevious value, i.e.,
EI2
8. (d Here, 0, - 90°
B, - 90°4 180° =
270°
6. (a) Flux from one face = ttotal flux)
6

q=2C]
63e
H90* 8. (a) By Gass's theorem,

6.-27
.: Work done =

=(-pE cos
=
0 E
9, (d By Gaus's law, =
9. (d Vork done in rotating the dipole,
W= pE(cos - cos 0,) , (Qmde
E

= pElcos 0° - cos 180°) Qorcod (-8x10+

Qc, 4x10'
= pEl-(-] = 2pE --4x10'E, C

10. (d Maximum torquc is given by 12. (d By using fE dá =fE,+ E, + E, +E,}-dA

[: sin 90° = ]|
(2l) = (4 x 10 x2x10)x4x1o
= E

= 32 10 N-m
x

15. (b) According to Gaus's theotem,

If =180°, then
0

work done, W= pË- cos 180°)

pE{l-(-D)
W = 2pE E-2nkxl
x 10
=2x 32
= 64 x 10" x2 (:l=1]
2r E,(R/2)
Check point 1.5 2.
RER
1. tc) Electric flux, = EA 16. (a) Liear charge density, E = 22.
.. St unit of electric flux = newtorn
Xmetre 2rEy
coulomb Ex4REy = 18x10* 1
0.02
(newton- metre)netre 2 o10 2
coulomnts
joule x metre =
=2x10 Cm
volt-netre
coulomb 17. (a) Surface charge
density. a9-17.7 x10C
2. (a) Electric flux through the surface. A 200m²
=
ES = (2i+ 4j + Tk)- (10j) = 40 unit The electric field outside the sheet is given by
6
885x10 =5x10NIC
3. () Net electric flux frotn a closcd surface in uniform clectric
field is always zero, 2 2xR85 x 10t
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 51

B. () Electric field, E = g/E, Mas of one electron, m, = 91x 10-" kg

(2.0x10KL.6x10-!9) Mass increase of the conductot = m, xn
F = Ee =
8.85 x10-12
E =9.Ix 10 x2x10?
The work done by the electron against this force in travelling 18.2 x
10- kg
a distancc x metrc,
(2.0) »{10X1.6x101) 2x10 kg
W Fx
I8.85 x 10-12) 9. c)Let ncutral point be obtaincd as a distance x from 20 C
K
100eV 16x10 x100J charge. Hence at neutral point
1
20 80
(20 x10 XL6x10°x 100 x (16 x 10-19)
885 x10-1? 4nE, 4rE, (10-x}
0.4425 mn 20 80
*
19. () We have, E = a/
(10 -x*
g= Et = 300 x (885 * 10) = 2.65 X=+ 0.033 m
x10" Cm - pE x 1o
x5 x
= x
10. (c) Torque, T, q{2NE 2 0.01 10

20. (a) Electric field, E =.(9x 108),02 x10 - 10 x 10Nm

4zt% R (0.25)
= 2.88 x10 N/C 11. (a) Electric ficld due to a point charge, E =

q
A)Taking it together =Ex4zE=2x =2x 10-!c
1. al Eletric lines are closer at A. So, strength of clectric field 12. (o) The potential energy of an clectric dipole in a uniform
at A is more than B. electric field
is

3. (6) Foce, F=k 12=k 2x6 ...(i) U=-p-E

U= - pE cos 0
:. A charge of - 4Cis given to caxh of these charges For U to be maxinum,
4, and q, =2 -2 cos = 0
-l»
(+2%-2) Gm m,
and ...(ii)
13. (a) Gravitational force, F, =

On dividing Eq. (ii) by Eq. li), we get x

F' -4
6.7x 101!x 9.1 10x 1.6x 10
12 12 (5x 10-!i!
- 3.9x 10-"N
F'=4Nattractive)
Electrostatic force, F,
4. 6) Force, Fiz
x
9x 10° .6x 10-ºx 1.6x 10p
Force,
FsW2a 2a (5x 10
x
Ratio, 2 =9.22 10 N
i.
_9.22x 10 2.36 x 10
So,
5. (6) Electric field on the surface of a conducting sphere is "G 3.9x 10-47
1 4
14. (c) For stable equilibriurn, the angle O should be 0°.
ARE, r
. Charge, q= Er.4zE,
3* 10 x(2.5 =
2.0831 x10 C
9x10" 13. () The space between the clectric ficld lines is increasing,
7. (d Electric line of force are perpendicular to the surface of a here from left to right and its characteristics states that,
strengtth of electric field decreases with the increase in the
conductor. Inside the sphere, no lines are present. space bet ween electric field lnes. As a result, force on
q=
8. (0 Here, -3x 10-c charges also decreases fron left to right.
Number of electrons transferred to the conductot is, Thus, the force on charge -q is greater than force on charge
ne -3x 10'c +q in turn dipole will expericnce a force towards left.
2x 10'2
-1.6x 10-Wc
52) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol: 2

16. (c) Situation is shown in figue. 20. (d) For the system to b in equilibrium, net force on chaige Q
should be zero, So, Q and q should be unlike in nature.
B FA Fc
- - r/2 (2r)
r2
charge, q= -Q4
Force bct ween A and C.
21. ) From Coulomb's law,
F=
q92 =F }:r=ln)..i)
When sphere B is kept at the mid point of linc joining A and ..(i1)
Cthen net fotce on Bis
1

22
Solving Es. (i) and (ii), we get
4nE, 4ze, (r/2
1

=8 I-8F 22. (b) E, + E, is along PA

= q; Ez, +
E,, is along
P
17. 6) We lave,
=-=-3uC .:. E, is along CB.
(10X-20} Charge
23. (a) Surface charge density (s) =
(-5) x (-5) Surface atea
So, surface charge density on the inner surface i211
18. (d) Q and q shoild be of oppsite signs.
4rb'
-Q 2Q- Q

•20

and surface charge density G.mte

Charge, Q=-2/2 4nc“

19. (a) When a positive point charge is brought near an isolated

24. (d) Gatss's law of clectrstatic states that, the total of the
clectric flux through a closed surface is equal to the charge
conducting sphere without touching the sphere, then the free
electrotts in the splhere are attacled towards the positive enclosed divided by the permittivity, .e., = Ths,
charge. Tlhis leaves an excess of usitive charge on the ear
Iright) srface of sphere. electric flux through a surface dnes not depend o the shape,
size or area of a surface but it depends on the number oi
Both kinds of chatges are bound in the metal sphere and
charges cnclosed by the surface.
cannot escape. They, therefore resicde on the surface.
So, here in this question, all the figures have sae clecttic
Thus, the left surface of sphere has an excess of negative flux as all of them has single poxitive charge.
charge arnd the riglht surface of spbere has an excess of
positive charge as given in the Tigute below 25. (d) The electric ficld at 2 will be half of what it is at q

Attracted negative
charge
26. () The net charge on the outer surface is
-[- 5(e 50e)= 100e
27. b) When charged particle enters in a uniforn clectric ickd,
then force on charged particle,
Electric field lines start fron pnsitive charge and end at
negative charge (in this case Irom point positive charge to F= gE
negative charge created inside the spherc). Also,
Also, electric fheld line energes from a pnitive charge, in
case of single charge atd ctxds at infinity. x
3x 10 80
Here, all these conditions are fulfilled in fgure. or acceleration, 12 ms2
20 x 10
m
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields (53

So, fron equations of motion, Net electric dipole morment,

Por p°+ p'+ 2pp cos 60° = 3p
= 20+ 12x3= 56 ms!
*p=q!
28. (c) Electrical ficld in vacuum, E, = 33. (a) When a point positive charge brOught near an isolated
conducting plane, then sone negative charge developes on
In the surface of the plane towards the charge and an cqual
E
medium,
positive charge developes on opposite side to the plane. This
I| K>1, then E, < E process is callcd charging by induction.
i.e., if the plates are dipped in kerosene oil tank, the electric 34. (a) Torqse about Qof charge -q is zero, so angular momentum of
field between the plates will decrease. the change -qis constant but distarce between charges is
29. (d Flux of electric fieid E through any area A is defined as changing, so force is changing, s speed and velocity are
changing.
=EA cos Oor EA0as the lines are parallel to the
surface.
30. (b) On the outer surfaces of the shell surface charge densities 35. (c) F = and F,
are equal d

Aceording to question, F =F
4n(3R} 4n(2R) 4zR

,0 4
4Q, =Q+Q-20R:
0=+i-«QQ:
4-3tV8
36. (a) Electric field inside shell is zero.
4 37. (o The acccleration of the clectron due to given coulombic
and force, F is a, = F ..
m,
where, m, is the mass of the clcctron.
The acceleration of the proton due to same force Fis
3

=
,= F
m,
...i)
Hence, Q,:Q,:Q, l:3:5 where, m, is the mass of the proton.
31. (a) Force on a charged particlc, q mg
,
On dividing Eq. (i) by Eq. (i), we get
where, u is coefficient of friction m

x 10 ke)
am, (2.3
x
10 msX9.1
(1.67x 10**"kg)
32. = 13.6x
10'ms= L5x 10'ms?
38. (a) By using. QE = mg

=
10 V/m, upward because
104
charge is positive.
24
C 39. ( Electric ficld at centre due to circular portion is zero.
The direction of dipole monent is shown in figure. So, the electric field at the centre of loop is

40. W) In Figs. (1), (3) and (4), nct electric field is zero
because
clectric field at a point due to positive charge acts away from
Pet
the chargc and duc(2 to e charge, it acts towards the
charge so for Fir nettelectric feld is iot 2ero.
54) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Top
2: 3

Down

Sike, ve chargcd particle moves as a parabolic path in

+

Here, net electric field in Fig. (2) is electric ficld, it means the direction of clectric ficld is upward.
The direction of particle (2) which is - ve is downward.
=J(EF + (2E' + (2EX2E)- 2 cos 120° = 2F
The diretion of deflectinn of particle (3) which is + ve is
41. c) Siuation is shown in the figure upward arxd direction of deflectios of particle () is downward.
46. (a) Given, p = (500 x
10)x(10x 10-) = 5xl0* C-m
r= 25cm= 0.25 n, l= 5cm = 0.05 m

I0 cm 20 cm
23 cm
2pr
2
Electric field intensity, E
9x10°.
Electric field between sheets=(G- a= 0
9x 10° x2x5 x 10*S x0.25 = 6.23

,
x 10 N/C
42. (al According to Gauss's law, total flux coming out of a closed KO.25) -(0.05)'1
surface encosing charge qis given by
=E dS - 47. (a) Suppose neutral point N lies at a distance x from dipole of
moment por at a distance (25- x) from dipole of 64 p.
From this expression, it is clear that total flux linked with a
closed surfacc only depends on the enclosed charge and
independent of the shape and size of the surface.
V.m -25 cm
E·dS -I-20 Lgiven)
At point Nelectric field due to dipole D
Elcctric field duc to dipole |
This is constant as long as the cnclosed charge is corstant. 1
2164p)
x

The flux ver a concentric sphere of radius 20 cm= 20 V-m. 4nE, x

AnE, (25-
43. (b) Given, A(l g 4) ard B(2, - 1. 5) 64
=5 cm
2a = AB - + + & (25-x
|(2- Di (-1- 0j (5-4),
48. (d Initially force, F =k
Torque, IpxE 32axE
t=4x10i-j+kx 20i
Finally when a third spherical conductor cames in contact
alternately with B and C then removed, so changes on B andc
Magnitude of torque, are Q/2 and 3Q/4, respectively.
JQ4
t= 8x\0. Q2

tI.13lx 10 N-m Now, force, F =

K?Q3E
8
44. (b) Given, =718 LO*NCr=2 cm=2x10
E x

49. (c The torque on diole mnenta

is t =pxE. The maximur
Electrie field is given by
value is when p and E are perpendicular to each otther, so th:
pE sin is maxinnum i.e.. sin @ = 1.
x x =

= t=(3 10' NC )(6 10" C-m)

18 x 10N-m
2re,rE
4nLrE 2x10* x7.182 x10" 50. (B Electric dipole moment of a water molcecule,

2 2x9x10 p=64 x 10 C-!m p

= 7.98 x 10' C/m where, d is the distanee et ween tlhe centre of positive and
negative charge of the molecule
45. (a) The figure sheowx, the path of a+ ve charged particle (D
deP_6.4 10C-m
x

through a rectangular tegion of unifotn electtic field.

1.6x 10-C
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 55

)( Flux of electric field, ¢

=xQo (2q) 58. (c) Suppose the field vanishes at a distance x, we have

32. (d The flux passing through the square of I m placced in

xy-plane inside the electric field is zero because by Gauss's
theorem, we can say, closed circuit is not formed.
53. () Two positive ions cach carrying a chargeq are kep at a y'2 x
distance d, then it is found that force of repulsion between (0, 0, 01 (a,
0, 0)
them is F=

where, q= ne

Kq2
F= (r-o
- a) =x
Number of electron, n =
2x -a' -x'or v2lx
V2a
(N2- bx= V2a or x =
55. (c) Forequilibrium of charge q. forces on charge q due to V2-1
charges q and q, should be equal. q on the right side
59. () Ccording to Gauss law, the ter of
F the equation E-dS includes the sum of all charges

enclosed by the surface.

The charges may be located anywhere inside the surface, if
the surface is so chosen that there are some charges inside
and some outside, then the electric field on the left side of
cquatiun is cue to all the charges, both inside and otside S.
and
4 So, E on LHS of the atxove equation will have a contribution
fronm all charges while q ot the RiS will have a contribution
Also, from q, and q, only.
I (4eMq)
a 60. (al Tihe net force on 4; by q) and
4z, (x-
a

4E q, is along the +x-ditection, so

ot 2_or 2x -
2=a nature of force between q, q:
(x-a and q, q is attractive. This can
2x be represent by the figure given
b=xi3 alongside.
to lower The attractive force between these charges states that q, is a
56. () When toached. charge lows fron higher potential negative charge (since. q, and q, are positive).
potential till it equalises on the two discs.
= Thus, nature of force between q, and ncwly introduced charge
Given, 4, = 10°C, q, 10C Qipositive) is attractive and nct force on q, by q. q, and Q
are along the same direction as given in the diagram below.

10 +
lo-5
= 5.5 uC
(x. 0)
57. () Fron Coulomb's law, electric forcee between two charges is
directly proportional to product of charges and inversely
proportional to square of distarxce between them. i..,
The figure given above cleariy stows that the force on q, shall
F=kY9 increase along the positive X-axis due to the positive charge Q.

where, 61. (o) When the point is situated, at a point on diameter away
K== proportiomality constant
from the centre of hcnisphere charged uniformly positively,
If a
then the clectric ficld is perpendicular to the diameter. The
medium is placed between the charges, then component of electric intensitv parallel to the diamcter
F= cancel out.
62. (d) As imaginary sphere of radius Ris drawn with its centre
Since, medium placed betweetn the charge is a metallic plate, on circumference of ring.
So for it K= o, Hence, F' = 0 (zero) So.
56) 0BJECTIVE PHYSICS Vot. 2

where, A is linear charge density 70, ( In the following figure, in equilibrium,

E=T sin 30°, r = Im

Rirg Sphiete

Im In Teo530

T sin 3
• 10uC
63. duc to Q, and Q, cancel cach other.
(6) E1ectric ficld
So, the vector numbered 2 coincides in dircction with clectric
ficid at mid-pxint Mof the hypotenuse.
(10x10-y?
64. (al K, =
mg pV r
g) 1' 2
(m-m, )g lp- (o- c)
Tension in the threads T = 1.8 N
65. c) Three vectors of equal magnitude are inclincd at with 120
of distribution of charges on X-axis
the adjacent vector. So, net electric intensity will be zero. 71. (6 The schematic diagram
is shown in figure below.

66. la)

67. c) Fc
Toxal force acting on I C charge is given by
1 10 lxlx
F=
FA (21

xx 10 1x1x10
8
Fcf (4)

10
!..-9x10° x0
C
D
=9x 10 x 10
x=9x *10 =
12000 N

Here. 72. (c) Electric force, qE ma a

x
1.6x 10l 1x 10' 1.6
Net lorce on B, F= Fc + Fo x 10!3
9x 10-i
u5x 10 and0
1

Ang, lav21
From u- 2s s

(5x 10)x9
.:. Distance, s= 10 -7 cmlapprox.)
2x 1.6x
a axial point
73. (d The magnitude of electric field at Pat a
complete, thetn net field at centre is zero. lf smal!
(a) If ring is distance z from the origin is givern by
68.
portion is cut, ther field oppxsite to this is not cacelled out,
o
69. () E« » tan 0 =
E, 12
(0. 0)
et
2a

|E

where, p2p is the ciectric dipole moment

For z >> a E, 2p
|
4nt,,
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields
57
The magnitude of clectric field at a equatorial
point Q at a
distancey from the origin is given by 80. c) The field increases linearly from zero
1 inside the sphere tfrom r 0 tor R)
IE, become maximum at the surface of the E

sphere and decrease rapidly with

For y >> a |E,= distance
:outside the sphere. So,
For the graplh will be

|Eal2 81. (al When dipole is given a small angular displacement 0

it's equilibrium position, then the restoring torquc
about
IEJ will be
74. ( Y T-pE sin = p: 0 - fas sin 0=0
q(0.a0) d'e

(0,0.0) d'e
(a,0,0) =-o0 with o=
82. ( Suppose electric field is zero at a point Plies at a distance
d Erom the charge + Q.
K45"p KQ K(2Q)
At P,
75. (d) Flux through surface, A¢, =E x zR and
=-Ex rR
2

+
-20
C

Flux through curved surface, C = E-dS = FdS cos90° = 0 Since, d>a ie., point P must lies on negative X•axis as
shown at a distance x from origin,
Total flux through cylinder = +
t =0 hence x d -a
(

(W2-D -a=/2a.
76. (c) According to Gauss's theorem, electric Flux through Actually, P lies on negative X-axis, so
, the
sphere =
x=-V2a

:. Electric flux through the hemisphere =!9 83. (a)

2 T'
10 x
10 = x
T?(4zt,4n'mr)
-12
0.56 10° N-m'C! 4192
2 x 8,854 x 10*
0.6x 10 N-mc6x 10N-m'c. Titne perind,
T~4*m72
77. () Chargc enclosed by cylindrical surface (length 100 cm) is
Qn = 100Q. By applying Gauss's law, 84. (b) Thesysten is in equilibrium means the force experienced
by each charge is zero. It is cdear that change placed at centre
(Q100Q) would be equilibriun for any value ol q, so we are
78. (a) Electric flux, g considering the equilibrium of charge placed al any corer.
=E-dS
- [EdS cos 0 - [EdS cos 90° -0 Fa
The lines are parallel to the surface.
-oFas
79, (a) Electric ficld due to a hollow spherical conductor is
governed by following cquationE 0, for r<R ...i)
and E= for r 2R ..ii)

i.e., inside the conductor field will be zero and outside the
1
conductor will vary according to E
;.
58 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Fp +Fey cos 45° + Fm cos 45

-0 tan' 0= 2 or tan2
I -Q-Q) 1
0=tan2)
87. (d electron has a chatge of 1.6x 10C.
1

+ 10° electrons would have a charge of

4rE, (W2a/2) x10
q= 109
ne = 1.6x
1 Q

a
1 21 =1.6x1o".
4E, 4nE 2a' 2 4ru, Thus, in Is charge accumulated = 1.6xI0"C
2/2Q+ Q- 4q
=0 So, time taken to accumulate C 1

242
0.625 x 109
4q = (242+ D 1.6x J0-
-6.25 x10° s - 17361| h
- 7233 days & 20 yr
85. la) Let electric field is zero at point O in the figurc.
88. (c The resultant of Eg and Eç is
4; -25 uC
-2
Ez
b

E =E
E
120°) 120
EA 120 E

1
-24 -24
E,
2E ·E cos 120°
Alo, aJE+ E'+ fE:E
b
1la+
b=l1-a
Now, Now, situation is shown in figurc.
Here, F, and Ec ate equal and opxosite so, tlhey
to
a
cancel out. So, resultant clectric ficld due
E, E, atd Ec ate zero.
1-a
89. la) Case 1
(2 25
l36 1|-a 1

6 11-u
Ga =55-5a
Qn3cm
Case I1

So, intensity will bee zeo at a distance of 5 cm from 25 uC. Q2 Q2

86. (c) Here, a + =

90° F
2
When sphere Cis touched to A, hen cqual charge
distributes on A and C
a
4n, (r/2)
2

-lan0
of
Iang

1an) = 2tanA
..
Net force on C, F -F, -E, - 4nE,L.-F r

Or
tan 2
tan{90°- 0)
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 59

( The clcctric ficld at C due to charge + 10'Cat A is

94. td Electric ficld at the centre of charged circular ring is zero.
Hence, electric field at O due to the part ACDB
is equal in
ARE, (0.2 along AC magnitude and opsite in ditection that due to
the part AKB
The clectric ficld at C due to charge - 10Cat B is 95. ta) The negative charge oscillates, the resultant force acts as a
restoring force ad propxytional to displacement. When it
10-? reaches the plane xy, then the resultant force is zero
E, along CB mass tmoves down due to inertia. and tle
4nE, (0.2 Thus, oscillatiot is set.
96. ta) Total flux, eul + + ,

,
As I
|EJ =|E
By symmetry, the vertical components will cancel out
and
horizontal components will add. ad =' [assumed]

E
24' +
=
The flux through the plane surface

97. (a) According to Gausss theoren,

20 cm 20 cm

\B
+10'c -107c E.4x' =
-20 cm

The resultant electric field at Cis Electric field of the point P, E =

- I0
E 2E, cos 60° 2x
AnE, (0.21 Charge Qon
x 10-7 inulatiig support
9x10 2.2 x 10 NIC
(0.2

91. (al Net field at ozigin,E= Sp-t. OP- x

Spr, OP
4 16 98, la) Charge density of long wire,
=

= 12x 10 NIC From Gass's theoretn,

92. (c) Number of clectrots,

6x 10" x
6x10
10x 106
63.5 63.5
As q= ne

6x10" x1.6x10-19
63.5
C
q1.5x10
x
9x10 1.5x10**x1.5x10-2
Fe
10
100
= 2.0 x10 N E
=
9
2rc,l 2rE,
Ax2
93. (a) The frequency will be same, f=bt due to the x 2
2: Vm 2re,r 4xE
constant qE force, the equilibrium position gets shifted by qt The magnitude of the electric intensity.
K x
in lorward direction. So option (a) is corect.
E=9x 10° x*2x-
18x
3 10*
033 10''N
60 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol.2

99. (a) Inside theshellA, clcctrie field E, =0 u=0v=?E

p'-u= 2as
s= 2x0m

x 10* m
-Ex2
At A.
-= 1.76× 10'' Ckg
the surface of shell
[a fixed positive valuc] -2x1.76% 10'x 10 x2x 10*
x x 10!?
Between the shell A and B, at a distance x from the common 7.04 10) 70.4
centre,
The velocity of the eletron when it reaches plate B,
KQa x
increascs, E decreases)
las x
s
At the suuface of shell
KIQ-Q0
B,

fa fixed negative value because

102. (a) From figure, dl
0.85
= R , 10

Charge on d .R

LRy
Outside the both shell, at a distance x* from the common Electric field at centre due to di is dE K
centre,

Eat KIQ,-Qa [as x' incrcase negative value of E. d

decreasc and it becomes zero at x =o]
100. (al T sin 0 = F
4nt,r
and T cos 0 = ng
1

tan =

df: cos 0

We need to consider only thc component dE cos 0, as the

conponent dF sin e will cancel out bccause of the fcld at C
due to the symmIetrical element dI.
Tos0 Total ficld at centie

F*
Tino
2! 2A cos 0 dA 252
R
J

2n'R
103. (a) In equilihrium,

4nE,x'mg FT
mg =
sin0
T cos 0

dt
Tos 0
-constant \0:
d Tsin 0

101. (o) The force acting on the clectron eE.

Acceleration of the electron=
tan - F
mg
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 61

12
Also, B.) Medical entrance special format
Hence.
questions
mg
20
4nL,xx
Assertion and reason
2. (b)Charge is always conscrved but energy is lost in the form
2rE, mg)
of heat.
104. (b) The three forces acting on cach sphere are 3. Gtavitationa! force is the dominating force in nature. It is
(e)
6) Tension Weight (iü) the weakest force. Also, Coulomb's force >> gravitationl force.
(üii) Electrostatic force of repulsion 5. (e) At the centre of the line joining two equal and opposite
charge, E 0. For similar charge, E = 0.
0
6. (e) Lines are no% pparallel and equidistant. Therefore, field is
TKon-unifon.

TT Tin ,
Tcos,

For sphere 1, in equilibrium, rom figurc, 7. (e) Electric field at the nearby point will be resultant of
T, cos e, = Mg and T, sin 6, = F cxisting fcld and ficld due to the charge brought. It may
increase or decrease, if the charge is positive or negative
tan e, = depending on the position of the point with respect to the
Mg charge brought.
For sphere 2, in equilibrium, from figurc, 8. (e) Thc rate of decrease of elcctric ficld is different in the
T; cos B, = M9, and T, sin0, = F two cases. In case of a point charge, it decreases as Vr² but in
tan 9, the case of clectric dipole, it decreases more rapidly, as
Mg
Force of repulsion between two charges are same. 9. (d If electric lines of force cross each oher, then the electric
field at the point of intersection will have two direction
, =0, only,if
10. (b) As G, ,
simultaneously which is not possilble physically.
= (given!
But
(b) At a
F=F, then M,
= M,

point on the axis of unifornly charged disc at a

:.,, or a , (let
,and r, be two different radii)
105.
distance x atove the centre of the disc, the magnitude of the Then, the ratio of electric field intensities near the surface of
clectric ficld is, spherical conductor,.

E E AREi9 -lie. E - E;
E, 4ne 92
11. () In cquilibrium, figure can be drawn as
E, such that
2s,
Then,
T=
4nE, (2/

or 12. For a given ring, electric field acts in downward direction.

(d)
At the centre of uniformly charged ring electric ficld is zero.
On squaring both sides and multiplying by x²+ R° to obtain 13, (a) lIf a dipole is enclosed by a surface as shown in figure,

R
4 4

Thus,
R R
3
then
=0 (Irom GauSs's law)
62) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

14. (a) Fux,

., =n t e s
C.) Medical entrance gallery
If closed body, is placed in an electric field
a 1. (6) Torque on an electric dipole in an electric field,
(either uniform on non-unifon) total lux linked with it will I-pxE
Eve: zero.
|t= pE sin 9
L.e.,
where, 0 is angle betwecn E and p
4=px 2 x 10° xsin 30°
15. (o) With the help of Gatas'% theorem, we can find electric lux
at any point and it is true that Gaus's theorem can be applied p=x10
for any syumetric of charge distribution. q2l=4 x 10
2I=2 cm = 2 x 10 m
Match the columns where,

1. = (AT! 4x 10
Eletric charge :.The charge orn dipole,
Electric field strength = (MLTA} 9x102
Absolute permittivity
=
(MLT'A) 2x10C=2 mC

Eletric dipole = [M°L.T'A] 2. () Given.

E=Ar
2, From Coulonb's Law,
k aa2
or F
F=
3. Figure shows the field lines around some simple charge
configurations. The field lines ate in three-dimensional space
curves, though thc figure shows them only in a plane. The
field lines of a single positive charge are radially outward
while thHe of a single negative charge ate radialiy inward.
q)
The field lines around a system of two
dessrintion of.lpse clharges
I repulsion.
l Here,

Rve a pictorial

Fron Eq. li), we get

q >0 q) q

A charge at thc origin of the ficld, 4nAa

la) 3. (dd Gaussian suface is given below,

(o)--2a+ o) o-{-2a+ o)
1. (ch E, = :0, E, =
2
E Net flux crosing through surface cylinder is given by
of

(a- 2o+ o
= Flux thronugh upper dise Flux through lower divc
+

.Flux through curved surdace

-E(na')+ (- Ea').o
5. E, for non-conducting sphere =or 4*,
E«
2
Emok lor conducting sphee =0. 4. (a) T1he field at centre of hemispherical cup is given by
= or E°)
thin plane sheet of charge and g
a

E due to infinite 2

E due to hemispherical charged body E

S x4r
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields 63

On putting values, we get 9. (6) Initial velocity of the clectron along xdircction,
= 9x]0
= 5x104
9x10" x 2R
2n Rx4k 1nE,
9x10 =5x10 x9x 10°
2R"
2R =
5x 10 x10=5x10* , =V

R-1o
j5 V2.5x 10 As applied electric fiehl is vertical,
v, =u, =, , =0 and tu, = u, t a,!
R=25 x10 =5x10" m= 5 mm , =0 + eL
m Vo
:L=vA
5. ( At the point P clectric ficld intensity is zero. eEL
So, the electric fied intensity on both charges are same.
Let, radius for q, charge be r.
So, radis lor q, charge is (10 -rl We can write, tan 0:

Ane, (10 - r eEI.

tan 0
mv
= 0= tan!
9 1 =
(:4, =9Cq, 4C)
(10 -r 10-r 10. (a) The diagran is as follows
The electric field due to charged infinite
3_ 2
cotductirng seet is
E BF. 2E
3(10 -r)= 30 - 3=
5r 30 Now, foce (electric foce) on the
charged ball is F A'

6. (d) As a point charge q issituated at a distance r on axis from 2€,

one eud of a thin cotnducting rod of length L. having charge Q
as stown in figure. The tesultant of electrie force and mg balance the tension
Total charge =Q protuced in the string.
So, tan 9
=

24,mg
11. (a)The angle between the dipole moment and clectric field at
any point on the equatorial plane is 180°.
Consider an elementary charge dg having length dx at a

distancex fron the carge q then EI biector

dq = pdx =

Now, force between d and g

= 12. (d Electric ficld lines does not form cloed koxo as line can
dF
THever start and end on the same charge. So, the option (d) is
incorrect.
: Total foree, F=fdF - a'
xàr 13. t) s = *aea ort

As Sis same,

-KQa--L.
LrtL)rrt
KQ4

L) 14. (d At equatorial, electric field,

x 2y
9x10
7.(a) As 10'" is senoved from the Ieutral metal.
Su, lks of charge = 1.i x x1o! =1.6C
10" r9x 10° x 2 x 5 x
10-* x 10 x
10
So, charge on melal = +1.6C ((0.12' + (0.05}2
8. (c) Electric ficld at centre of plastic shect is the samc as at E =
Electric field, 41x 10 NIC
close to the centre of the coper plate.
64) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

15. (c)Asuming the small arca AS on the cylindrical surface. The From Eqs. i) and (i), we get AH =2
normal to this area willbe perpendicular to the axis of the FAB K/2
cvlinder., but the electric field is parallel to axis. F
Accozding to question, FAg
=F
Hence, A6 -E AS cos = F AS cos= 0
@
FAn
2
18. (5) Given, charge on the body.
16. () The figure of the above situation is shown below
q=InC= |x|x10C (: I
nC=|x 10CH
Charge on the clectron e = 1.6x109
F- ftiction From the property of quantisation of charge, q = ne
m
S.6 m-1kg Ecn 45 n= Ix10
Number of charCes, 9. 1.6 x [0-9
x
0.625 x10x1o'"6.25 10
tote 0.
E cos 4
19, (al We know that, electric field at distance r from an
X-axis
infinitely long line ciharge is given by
or
The electric field, E= 100Vm )=2nE, E
Er
For the downward motiot of the particle of mass lkg.
- (mg cos 45°+ qli sin 45° ) ma 20. (c We knuw that,
mg
sin 45°-qE cos 45°
Ix10x x100x ...(1)
{force experienced by charge in clectric ficld
As
From Eqs. (i) and (i), we get
F/m,Fm,
a, F/m, Fm,
1
10 10
0.5=2 :=0.5
79 7.9
21. Torquc on dipole form, t p xE sin
(c)
10 42 /2 The direction of torque is perpendicular to the plane of
paper
or anti-parallel to E
a 5.6ns inward i.c., when the dipole is parallel
Now, time taken by the particle to cover 5.6 m distance along and maximum at -90
So, torqpae is maximum ifp is perpendicular to
E.

(2s 2x5.6 N2-1.41 s

22. (a) Consider the diagram, where an electric dipole is placed
ir
the inclinc plane is=
I1
S.6
non-uniform electric field.
17. (a) Consider the situation sxown in the diagram.
Spbete Sphete
A

Let chatges on sphere

A
and q, respectively.
and Bare q,
air by Coulomb's law
-q
Force between the charges placcd in F2
(spheres can be assuned as point charges placed at their
Electric ficld at the sight of q is E,
centres) and clectric field at the sight of -q is E,
...i) Net force on the dipole, |E| =E.
F force on the charge
q
qE

where, 4nL E, = force on the charge -q=-qE

Net force on the dipole,
- E;)
F=F+F =qE,
a
When the spheres are immersed in liquid, force between I, torque on the dipole due to
- p xE, E,
(clockwise
92 1
= p xE, [clockwise
T, = torque on the dipole due to E,
the charges is FAn
4Rt,d 4neK d

where, pa qdis dipole moment of the dipolc,

..(i)
(4zE,)x 2 2
' EoetI t I,=p xE +pxE, *0
on the dipole.
where, Kis dielectric constant of the liquid 2 Hence, both torque force
(t,)and F)act
 Chapter 01: Electric charges and fields (65

B. () The Gauss's law in electrostatics gives a relation between 32. (c) As the mass is moving in the clcctric ficld, then
electric flux through any closed hypothetical surface (called a ma = qE
Gaussian surface) and the charge cnclosed by the surface.
So, the nature of Gaussian surface is vector. qE 3
x101 12 ms-2
20 x
10
24. (6) tan 0= r/2_ kg
rmg By using, at
= 56 tns
20 +
12x3=
33. () The clectric field at the point, x m -a,
25. 4) Electric lines of force forms open loos while magnetic E (-)
lines of force forms closed loops.
26. (W)Fron Cou!inb's law, foree due to same charge is repulsive
is due to al! charges present whether
34. () The clectric ficld
and that due to opp<site is attractive. inside or outside the given surface. So option (c) is cortect.

F=x20 35. (6 Charge enclosed q/8

27. 4) In same mediun, the foree betwecn two protons separated Therefore, fux = etnb

the force will F, as it is independent of the masses but E

depends otn the charge uf the particle. =

28. \d We know that total fiux is through al its six faces is 8c,

36. («)Electric flux is equal to the product of an area element and

But electric lux through one

E
face of cube, , =
the perpendicular component of E. As the surface is lying in
yzplane,
E· dA = = (5) (20) = 100 unit
F= KqlQ-4)
30. lc) E

37. (a) ...i)

r
q. we get
On diffesentiating of Eq () w.r.t.
-

.9 E' -JE+Ej+ 2E,E, cos®

Here, E, -E, AKE, a
d
-Q-21l ...(ii)
Given, -60
E'= qv3 But we kiow that, when force is naximum, then,
dg
=0
47 E,a*
Then, from Eq. (i), we have
31. () Far equilibrium of q.
K or
Q-2q]-0 Q-2q =0

Q= 2q or

So.
the other part
=Q,2
Q
Hence, the cach part have the same charge
CHAPTER

02 Electrostatic
potential
and capacitance
The electric field around a charge can be described into two ways by an electric field
(E)and by electrostatic or electric otential (V).
The electric field (E) is a vector quantity and we have already discussed about elcctric
Inside ficld in detail in the previous chapter.
1) Electric potential In this chapter, we willstudy about the electric potential and how these quantities are
-
Electtustatic potential due interrelated to each other. We will also study about capacitor, i.e., a device used for
to a point charge
•

Electrostatic potential due to a

storing electric energy.
system of chatge
a
Electric potential due to
continous charge distribution
-Eletric potential due to clectric
dipole
-

Relation between clcctric field and

1) Electric potential
potentia!
2: Equipotential surfaces
.
Variation of clectric potential on
The electric potential at any point in the region of electric field is defined as the
the axis of a charged ring amount of work done in bringing a unit positive test charge from infinity to that point
•
Potential due to splerical charge along any arbitrary path. It is a scalar quantity and is denoted by V.
.Electric potential due to a group of
Work done W)
COtIcentric shelly Electric potential V)
Electric potential energy Charge (qo
•
Potential energy of a system of
charges According to the nature of charge, electric potential can be positive (due to positive
•Equilibrium of dipole charge), negative (duc to negativc charge) or zero.
4} Electrostatics of conductors Unit and dimensional formula of electric potential
•
DielectrICS and polarisation 1
joule
• Capacitors
and cajacitance Its SI unit is volt (V) and volt =
1

•
Parallei plate capacitor
1
coulomb
5) Combination of capacitors =
unit is stat volt (esu), where volt
1

Special nethod to solve conbination ndCs stat volt

of capacitors
300
•
Kirchhoffs Law fot capacitor circuits Its dimensional formula is [ML.T-A-1.
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance (67

mple 2.] IHow much uork will be done in bringing a charge Exomple 23 The electric potential at point A is 20 V and at
00 nC from infinity to some point P in the region of electric B is - 40 V. Find the work done by an external force and
ie i? Given that the electric potential at point P is 20V. electrostatic force in moving an electron slowly from B to A.
) As clectric potential at any point can be wTitten as Sol. Here, the test charge is an electron, i.e.,
work done (1$")
Electric potential ) ... 0) 4%
=-1.6x 10-19 c
charge qo)
V, - 20 V
Given, V, = 20V and qo = 400 C = 400 x 10°C
ad =-40 VR V
On putting the values in Eq, i), we get
Work done by external force
20 =
400x 10-6
W
=20x 400 x 10--8x10 =-L.6x 101) (20)–(- 40))
=-9.6x 10-16 j
Exomple 22 Find the work done by some external force in Work done by electric force
moving a charge q=2 uC from infinity to a point, where
electric puotential is l0' V. (WB- eketrc fisrce =-Wp-Aexternl force

=-(-9,6x 10 J)
Sol. Given. clarge q =2 uC. and electric patential V =10* v
Using the relation,
=9.6x 10*1J
W=q Note Vie have covered this in theory but do not add afte exampie here, we
x (an see that the electron (a negative charçe) mores from B (toer
We have, W =(2x 1o)a0')=2 10J potential}) to A (hugther potential) and the work done by electnc force is
positve Therefore, we may conttude that whenever a negative charge
moves from a lower potental to higher potental eork done ty the
Electric potential difference electric force is posite ot when a positve charge moves fron iower
potential to higher potental the work done ty the electric force rs
The electric potential difference between two points A and negative.
Bis equa] to the work done by the external force in
moving a nit positive charge against the electrostatic
force from point B to A along any path between these two
Electrostatic potential due
points. toa point charge
Let P at a distance r from the origin O at
le the point
which the electric potential due to charge + q is required.
A

R A E

Fig 2.1 Electric potential between points A and B

Fig. 2.2 Electrostatic potential at point due to a charge
IFV, and V, be the electric potential at point A and B
respeetively, then AV =V -V The electric potential at a point P is the amount of work
done in carrying a unit positive charge from o to point P.
AV="AB
Suppose a test charge qo is placed at point A at distance x
from ).
The Sl unit of potential difference is volt (V).
The clectrostatic force acting on charge qo is given by
The dimesional formula for electric potential difference is
given by [ML’T'A-. F= along OA ...()
4re, 2
Note FotioAing three tormulae are very useful in the probiers related to work
done in electric field. Small work done in moving the charge through a distance
dx from A to B is given by
dW =F dx = Fdx cos 180° z -Fdr
[:: cos 180° =
-1]
Here, q;. V, and v, are to be substituted wth ign,
68 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol.2

Total work done in moving a positive test charge from o Example 2.5 What is the electrustatic potential at the surface of
a
to the point Pis given by siluer nucleus of diameter 12.4 fermi? Atomic number (Z) for
silver is 47.
W-[ -Fdr-j. Sol. Given, radius of silver nucleus, r -6.2 fm
2
x
=6.2 10-1m
[1 fermi =10 m)
and Z= 47
Charge, q= Ze= 47x 1.6x 10 c
.. Electrostatic
potential.
W ..(iii)
9x 10× 47x 1.6x 1o*l9
6.2x 10-!5
From the definition of clectric potential,
=1.09 x 10° V
V= ...(iv)
4nE6r
Electrostatic potential due to a
A positively charged particle produces a positive electric system of charges
potential. A negatively charged particle produces a Let there be a number of point charges q1. q2
negative electric potential. 93n at
distances r, ry, fy.., respectively from the point P,
llere, we assume that electrostatic potential is zerO at where electric potential is to be calculated.
infinity. Eq. (iv) shows that at equal distances from a point
charge q, value of Vis samc.
Hence, electrostatic potential due to a single charge is
spherically synmetric.
Figure given below shows the variation of clectrostatic
potential with distance, ie., V ar -,
q

Fig. 2.4 A system of charges

Potential at P due to charge 41

Fig. 2.3 Variation ofy w.r.t. r

1 42.
Example 2,4 Determine the potential at a point 0.50 m (i) from Similarly, V2
4REo
a + 20 4C point charge (ii) froma -20 uC point charge. 2
=.
1
q3
Sol. The potential due to a point charge is given by V
4co
(i) At a distance of 0.50 m from a positive 20 uC charge,
the potential,
x
(9,0x10°o'N mninch
20 10* c)
V- r 0.50 m
Using superposition principle, we obtain resultant
=3.6x 10 v
potential at P due to total charge configuration as the
(üi) For the negative charge, algebraic sum of the potentials due to inxividual charges.
V=(9.0x
-20 x L0c) V=V+V, + V,
++V,
=-3.6x 10 V 91 92
 :
Chapter 02 Electrostatic potential and capacitance (69

Exomple 28 Suppose that three point charges, qo 4, and q,

are arranged at the ertices of a right-angled triangle,
shown. What is the absolute electric potential at the position of
the third charge, if q, = - 6.0 uC, q, + 4.0 uG
Tnt net potential at a point due to multiple charges is
9. =+2.0 Ga = 4.0 m and b = 3.0m?
equal to the algebraic sum of the potentials due to
individual charges at that particular point.
Mathematically, it is expressed as

Wote
. , 31e position vectors of the charges q,.4,.9,...a
respectively. then eectrostatic potentiai at pornt P wtose position vector
Sol. The electric potential at P(the pusition of the third charge)
ist, would be
due to the presence of the first charge is
V, = k, a = (9x 10) (-6x 10:-L08x 10 V

Example 2.6 Tree point charges q, =l G4, =

-2 uC and Likewise, the electric potential due to the presence of the
4, =3 uC are placed at (l m, 0, 0). (4 2rn, 0) and (0, 0, 3 m) second charge is
respectiely. Find the electric potential at origin. (9x 10,4x 10)
V, =k, =1.20x 10V
Sol. The net cicctric potential at origin is, (3
The net potential of the third charge V is simply the algebraic
sutn of the potentials due to the others two charges taken in
2 isolation. Thus,
Substituting the values, we have
- V =V, + V, =l.20 x 10 V
Y (9.0x 2

= x
I°6 20 30) Example 2.9
(i) 7he charqes each Q are placed, at x=, 2d, 4d,.... co. Find
9.0 10v
electric potentia at origin O.
Exomple 2.7 In the given figure, there are four point charges (ii) A
charge + Q is placed at each of the poits x =d, x = 3d,
placed at the vertices of a sqzuare of side, a = 1.4 m. If x=5l,..., on the X-aris, and a charge -Q is placed at
9 =+18 nC. q, =-
24 nC, q, =+35 nC and 44 =+16 nC, each of the poinzs, x = 24, x = 4t, x= 6d,.., o. Find the
then find the electric potential at the centre P of the square. electric potential at the origin ).
Assume the futential to be zero at infinity.
Sol. i)

Electric potential,

Sol. The distance of the point P irom cach charge is

( 1.4 m
-lm
1.4
4reo
120 d
Potential, V
+V, +V, +V, dl-1/2 4KLo

Electric potential,
4 Vo =
4ZE d
2d 3d 4d
1
(18-24 + 35 +
16)x 10°C
lm
= (9x 10')x (45 x 10")V
=405V
I.bo8,2
4 TE) d
70 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Val. 2

Electric potential due to a continuous Electric potential due to

charge distribution electric dipole
We can imagine tlhat a continuous charge distribution We determine the potential due to an clectric dipole.
consists of a numter of smallcharge elenents located at Let AB be an electric dipole of length 2a and let Pbe any
position r,.If r is the position vector of point P, then the point. where OP r.
electric potential at point Pdue to the continuous charge
Let be the angle between rand the dipole axis.
distribution can be written as
da
V=

When the charge is distributed continuously in a volume

V, dq = p dV, where p is volunme charge density. The
potential at point P due to the volume charge distribution
will be C
= Fig. 2.5
V,
AB = 2a, A0= OB = 4, OP =r
When the charge is distributed continuously over an area OC OC
In AOAC, Cos 0
S, d = GdS, where a is surface charge density. OA
OC =a cos
Also, OD = a cos 0
When the charge is distributed unifornly along a line L, Ifr>>a, PA = PC = 0P+ 0C = rta cos0
.
d = hdl, where is line charge density. PB = PD = OP - OD =r- a cos
Vis the potential due to electric dipole,
v J
Example 2.10 A charge Q is distributed unifornly on a ring of
radis Ras shoun in the following diagrams. Find the electric v
pxtential at the centre ) of the ring. -a
(r cos 0)
(r +a cos )

2a q cos
|2-'cos
ve p cos

- cos
4rCG a' )
Chare ot whrde ring
If r >>a a cas 0 can be neglected in comparison tor
Sol. Consiter a small charge d. Eletrie potential at O due to dq Then, the resultant potential at point P.
1
p cos
V=
4nEo

where, p is dipole moment.

Special Cases
dV= d (i) When the point Plies on the axial line of the dipole
on the side of positive charge, =
AnEp R
0°= cos = °
4KE, R
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance71

Ifrcan
is very large as compared to 2l, r >> 24, then Let Pbe the required goint on the X-axis, where the potential is
2ero. If x is the xcoordinate of P, obviously x must be positive.
a bc neglected in comparison to a, then
(There is no possibility of potentials due to the two charges adding
potential at te
point P, up to zero for x < 0.) If x lies between O and A, we have
1 10-%
V= 13x 2x 10
17E,xx 10° (15- x)* 102
(iü) Whern P lies on other side, where, x is in cm, Le..
cos
0 =180° 0
=-1

v---e
3 2
-0
1 x 15 -x
which gives, x =9 cm
(ii) When the point Plies on cquatorial line, 0 = 90° If x lics on the cxtended line OA, the required condition is
cos O = 0 3 2 -
=0
V=0
(iv) In general, V
- kor a shortdipale.
which gives,
cm
X45
Thus, clectric potential is zero at 9 cm and 45 cm away from the
at apoint whose position vector with respect to
positive charge on the side of the negative charge. Note that the
dipole is r. formula for potential used in the calculation requircd choosing
potential to be zeo at infinity.
Exomple 211 Find out the points on the line joining tuo
-
charges + q and Jq (kept ata distance of 1.0 m), where Example 2.3B An electric dipole consists of two charges of equal
as shown
magnitude and oppxsite sign separately by a distance 2a
electric potential is zero. in figure. The dipole is along the X-axis and is centred at the
or to the
Sol. Lct P be the point on the axis cither to the left origirn.
r zero.
right of charge + at distance where potential is
q a

Hence,
1.0 m -3

P
-3q () Calculate the electric putential at point P.
(i) Calculate l at point far from the dipole.
a

1.0-r
Sol. i) For a point in figure,
3q
=0
4nE, 0+ r)
Solving this, we get r =0.5 m is far from the dipole, such that x>>a, then
a
P
(ii) Ifpoint
=0 can be neglected in the terns, x* -a' and Vbecomes
Further. V,= 4 E
which gives, r0.25 m v2, [x>>a]
Thus, the potential will be zero at point Pon the axis
m on the
which is cither 0.5 m to the left or 0.25 to the right of Exomple 214 Sketch the variation of eectric otential
charge +q Xaxis with respect lo for x
x
=-o
to x=+ o in the following
x 10* Care
Exomple 2.12 Tuo charges 3 10 C and2
x Cases.
located 15 cm apxart. At what point
on the line joining the o
tuv charges in the electric potential zeno? Take the -
d
potential at infinitv to be zero.
Sol. L.et us take the origin ) at the location of the positive Sol.
to be the
charge. The line joining the two charges taken
is
to on the right side
Xaxis; the negalive charge is taken be
of the origin. Elcctric potential at P.
15-* d
2× 10c 4nE) 4nEo xld - x)
-15 cm
12) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS 2s
Vol:

V, is minimum, if rat - x)is mximun. Example 2.15 The electric otential in a region is represented as
alis maxitnum, if x =d-x x=di2.
At mid-point of OA, clectric potential is minimum.
V= 2x +3y -z
At 0: x - Obtain expression for electric field strength.
At d:x dV 0
Sol.
From Oto A. clectric potential decreases reaching to
minimun value and then increases.
Left of O: At distance x fron O. Here, 2x +3y- z)=2

Va
4ncox d+a 2x+ 3y - z)=3
x0 Vn
*--V 0 2x+3y - z)=-1
Electric ficld. E=-2 -j +k

Example2.16 Find V, in an electric field

E=2i+3j+4k)
+
Riglt of A:A: tistaICe xon 0. where, ,=i-2j k)m

and r,=2i+j-2 k)m

Sol. Ilere, the given ficld is uniform (vonstant). So using.
dV n - E dr

Relation between eleciric field and potential -2,:

Let us first consider the case when electric potential Vis Jiz..- 2)

known and we want to calculate E. The relation is as

(2 dx +3 dy + 4 dz)
under, Ji2.1.-2)
In case of cartesian coordinates + 2,
=-2x+3y 4:].,-1V
E - +
E,i E,j + E,k
Exomple 217 In unforn electric field. E -10 NC as shoun
Herc, E, =
=- (partial derivative of V w.r.t. x) in figure, (ind

=-{partial derivative of Vw.r.t.y)

ey
2m 2 m
E, = =- (partial derivative of V
w.r.t. z)

B 2 n

Gy

This is also sometimes written as,

E=- gradient V
Sol. (i) , >V, so V, -V, will be negative.
dV Further, da =2 cos 60° = I m
=- rad
V = V
=
dr
dV (-10) (1)=-10 V
É=
dr (i) V; >Vc, so V
-V will be positive.
Then, negative sign shows that the potential decreases in Furnher, = 2.0 m
dc
the direction of clectric field. (10) (2)
=
20 V
Potential gradient is a vector quantity.
V-
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance (73

Example 2.18 A uniform electric field of 100 Vm' is directed Example 220 In the uniform electric field shoun in figure, firnd
at 30° with the positive X-axis as shown in figure. Find the
potential difference, VA if 0A=2 m and OB = 4 m.

-E-XO Vm!
30 Im

()V, -V
(iv) Ve -V
Sol. This problem can be solved by both the methoats as
discussed below. Sol. Using the relation, V = Ed (in uniform E
Method 1
Electric field in vector form can be written as wherc, VPDbetween the two points
E = 100 con 30° +100 sin 30 )Vm! E magnitude of E and
-
(50/3 I+ 50j) Vm! d projection of ine (Goining two points) along E.
as
A(-2m, Q 0) (ü)
V,-, =0 d=0
4 mn, 0)
and B0, (i) V,-V =+ (20) (|)= 20 V

-2014) -20
V

(iii) V,-V,
=
(iv) V
-V, -20) 1)= -20 V
-2 m.0, o
Exomple 221 An electric fieid E 20i + 3Oj) newton'coulomb
x+ 50 v"m exists in the space. If the potential at the origin is taken to b
--(50 V3
' =100 2+V3)v
zero, find the potential at 2m, 2m).
Method2 We can also use, Fd V =

With the view that, V, >V or Vy -V will be negative. Sol. We have, E d so, it can tbe written in vector form as
dr
lHere, dn 0A cos 30°+OB sin 30°

=2x
2
+4x=(
2
+2) Note, we can write E as E,i+ Ej+ EÁ
= +
tr di + d
i. V, -V,-Edanm - 100 2 +
3) and dk
E, dy + E, +
a
Therefore, E-d -E, d d:
Exomple 2.19 Tuo points A and B are 2 cm apart and In the given quest ion, the 2-component of E or the point is not

from A to B uith E e 200 NC .

uniform electric field E acts along the straight line AB directed
particle of charge + 10° C
A
given. So, we can write
E
t =E, d + E, dy
is taken from A to B along AB. Calculate
() the force on the charge.
Now, dV =-E
- 20i +
+30j)- di d)
(i) the potential differene, -V and V

(iü) the uurk done on the chary by E. dV =

-20 dx - 30 dy
Sol. (i) Electrostatic force on the charge, Now, we will have to integrate it within limits. Given, =0 V

when x 0 and y =0 (lower limit) and we have to calculate

F =qE = (a0)200) =2 x 10 N
V. Whenx=2 andy =2 \uper limit)

-20-[dr - 30f4y
(ii) In unifon electric field, Therefore, v
V = Ed
or poterntial difference, V, -V, 200 x 2x 10* 4V M-20[* -30 v
V-0- 20 (2 -0) 302 - 0)
cos 0
W= e2x 10(2x 10) cos 0° -
Es
(iii)

=4x 10J Potential, = -40 - 60 -100

1' V
Check point 2.1
1. Findthe work done by some external foce n moving a 2q
(b) zero
charge q = 4|C trom intnity to a point, where electric
potential is 10 v (-q)
(C)
(a) 4 x 10* J (b) 2 10 J (c) 8 10J (d) 1 x 10 J

2. Equal charges are gven to hwo spheres of different radu, The 9. In the rectangle shown below, the two comers have charges
potential will q, --5uC andg, -•204C The work done in moving a
(a) be more one the snaller sphere
charge + 30uC trorn B to A is
(b) be ore
on the bgger sphere
(c) be equa on both the spheres
(d) depend on the nature of the materias of the spheres
5 cm
3. The electric potental at a point n free space due to a charge
O coulomb is O x 10" voits The electric feld at the point is 15 cn
(a) 4uQ 10 Vm () 12rEQ 10* vIm
(c) 4nLQx 10 Vrn (d) 12,Q 10 Vm! 2.8J
(a) (b) 35J (c) 45 J (d) 55J
10. Two pont charges -q and q + are located at points
4. In an tydrogen atom, the electron revotves around the - a)
nucleus in an ortbit of radus 0 53 x 10 m Then, the (0.0. and (0. 0. a), respectively. The potential at a point
(0,0. z). where z > a is
eloctrical potental produced by the nucleus at the postion
of the electron is (a) (b)
(a) -13 6V (b) - 272V
(c) 272V (d) 13 6V (c)
20a (d) 2a
Anu,(- a')
5. Three charges 20. -q, -q are located at the vertices of an
equilateral triangle. At the centre of the triangle, 11. Two plates are 2 cm apart a potental difterence o 10 V is
(a) the teld is zera but potenhat is non-zero applied between them, the electrc teld between the
(b) the teid is non-zero but potentua is zero plates is
(C) Both teid and potential are zero (a) 20NC! (b) 500 NC
(c) 5NC (d) 250 NC'h
(d) Both teid and potental are non-zero
6. In a region of constant potenttal, 12. At a certan dstance trom a pont charge the electrc field is
500 Vm and the potential is 3000 V What is this distance?
(a) the electnc feld is untorm
the electnc feld is zero (a) 6 m (b) 12 m
(c) there can be no chargo inside the region (c) 36 m (d) 144 m

(d) the eiectric feld shall nacessariy change it a charge is 13. Two charges of 4 uCeach are placed at the corners A and B
placed outsKde the regon of an equlateral triangte of sde length 0 2 m in air The
7. The work done n bnngng a 20 C charge trom point A to
point B for distance 02 m is 2 J The potential difference
electric potential at C is L910 Nm'c*|
between the two points wl! be (in volt) (a) 9x 10 v (b) 18 x
10 V

(a) 02 (b) 8 (C) 01 (d) 04 (c) 36 x 10" V (d) 36 10 V

8. As shown in the figure. charges q and-q are placed a!

+
14. The electric potential V at any point O(r. y., z all in metres) in
the vertces B and Cof an isosceles triangle. The potential at space is gven
the vertex A is
by V
4r V. The electrnc tield at the point
(1 m, 0.2m) in volt metre' s
8 along negatve X-aus () 8 akng positive X-axis
(c) 16 along nega!five X-axis 16 along postive Z-ais
V
15. The electric potental is grven as a functon of distance r
=
(metre) by (5r+ 10x -9)V Value of electric field at
V

BO
(a) - 20 Vm (b) 6 Vn (c) 11 Vm
()-23 Vm
 (ii) When potential is applied between two charged
2) Equipotential surfaces plates, electric field (E) is set up between them and
this E is normal to the cquipotential surface as
shown below
Any surface over which the electric potential is same
Tupotenral surfaces
everywhere is called an equipotential surface. For a
single charge q. the potential is given by
V
=9
This shows that if r is constant, then V will be constant.
Thus, equipotential surfaces of a single point charge are
concentric spherical surfaces centred at the charge.
Field lines

Eqguipotential Fig. 2.9 Equipotential surfaces between two

surface churged plates
(iii) The equipotential surfaces are a family of concentric
Fig. 2.6 Concentric spherical surfaces cylinders for a line of charge or cylinder of charge.
having charge q at the centre Equipotential surface for line charge is shown below.
- Equipotential surfaces
Properties of a equipotential surfaces
(i) Potential difference between any two points in an
equipotential surface is zerO.
(ii) Two cquipotential surfaces can never intersect each
other. If two equipotential surfaces intersect each
other, then at the point of intersection of these will be Fig. 2.10 Equipotential surfaces for a line charge distribution
two directions of electric field which is impossible.
(iv) Equipotential surfaces for two positive and equal
(iü) As the work done by electric
charges are shown below.
force is zero whena test charge
is moved along the equipotetial
surface, it follows that E must
be perpendicular to the
surface at every point so that
30V 20V
the clectric force 4, E will Fig. 2.7
always be perpendicular to the
displacennent of a charge moving on the surface. Thus,
field lines and equipotential surfaces are always Fig. 2.11 Equipotential surfaces for like charges
mutually perpendicular.
(v) Equipotential surfaces for two equal and opposite
Equipotential surface for charge distribution charges can be drawn as
(i) The equipotential surfaces are a fanily of concentric
spheres for a point charge or a sphere of charge as
shown in the following figure.

NO

Fig. 2.12 Equipotential surfaces for unlike charges

Note hite drawing the equpotentiali surfxes we should keep in mind the two
main ponts
(0) These are perpendcular to fietd lines at all places
(u) Field tines atways fiow from hrgher potential to lower pctential.
Fig. 2.8 Eguipotential surfaces
 76 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Example 2.22 Equotential spheres are draum round a point

charge. As ue moe qway from the charge, will the spacing
betueen tun spheres havinga constat potential difference
decrease, increase or remain constant.
Sol. We have,

Fig. 2.14 Electric potential at P at a distance r fromcentre ring

V 1
4 REn

From these expressions, we can see that electric potential

s maximum at the centre and decreases as we move away
from the centre on the axis.
This potential varies with the distance r as shown in
and ,-.9 figure.

Now.

For a constant potential difference ; -V,A

Fig. 2.15 Variation of potential V with distance r
ie.,
move away from the charge, because the product
increase.
,
the spacing between twn spheres tr, - )increases as we
will
In the figure,
4nEo R
1

Variation of electric potential on the Example 223 A charge q = 10 uC is distriluted unifornly over
the circumference of a ring of nadius 3 m placed on xy-plane
axis of a charged ring with its centre at origin. Find the electric potential at a point
Let a charge q is uniformly distributed over the PO, 0, 4 m).
circumference of a ring as shown in Fig. (a) and is Sol. The electric potential at point P would be
non-unifornly distributed in Fig (b).

3m
9

V=
Fig. 2.13 Variation ofelectric potential

The electric potential at the centre of the ring in both the

Here, r distance of point Pfrom the circumference of ring
cases is given by -o'+ 4 5m
1 and q= 10 uC= 10 C

4 REo R Substituting the values, we have

where, R is radius of ring. Electric potential,
The electric potential at point Pwhich is at a distance r V=
(9.0x 10 (10) l.8x 10
v

from the centre of ring is given by (5.0)

 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance (77

Exomple 2.24 Tuo identical thin rings, cach of radius R, are The potential is sane at all points which is equal to the
coxially placed at a distance R. IfQ, and Q are respectively. potential at surfacc. Thus, we can write.
the chargs uniformly spread on the tu» rings. find the uork
done in moving a charge q from centre of ring having charge Q,
to the other ring. 4rEo R
Sol
and Cutside=
2. R

The potential (V) varics with the distance from the centre
() as shown in Fig. 2.17.

Eo

Fig. 2.17
Example 225 A spherical drp of water carrying a charge of
3x 10 C has a potential vf 5001' at its surface. What is the
rudius of the drp?I[ uv drops of the sume charg* and the
1 (Q -4 NV2 -1) same radius combine to form a single sfpherical drop, what is
V2R
the potential at the szurface of the new drop?
Work done in moving a charge q from A to B. SVis given by l' =
Sol. The potential
1 W2 -1NQ, -Q)4
W= -V)=
v2R Here, q=3x10"C and '=500V

Potential due to spherical charge

Electric potential due to charged spherical
shell of solid conducting sphere
Volume of one drop is

Total volume of both drops is

Let
3
r.
.
r be the radius of the new drop formed, equating the
Let us consider a uniformly charged shell. The radius of
volumes, we have r. 8
3
This gives, r =r.
shell is R and its total charge is q., which is uniformly Charge on the new drop 2q 6x 10C
distributed over the surface. We can construct a Gaussian V
-

27
New potential,
surface (a sphere) of radius r > R. 4nE
24 1000 =
794 V

E Electric potential due to charged spherical

shell of non-conducting sphere
Gassiati For a uniformly charged solid sphere, we have the
surface following fornulae for potential,
Fig. 2.16
oMtsie R
At external points the potential at any point is the same
17E, 4ze,
when the whole charge is assumed to be concentrated at Viaide
the centre. At the surface of the sphere, r = R 4rc, R2 2R2
Potential, V= V,. =
1nE, R At the centre potential will be 9|R
2|4nE,
78 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vot. 2

times the potential at surface. This can Potential at Bdue to outer shell is V, =
.
which is equal to
2
be obtained by putting r = 0 in the formula of Vnsde
The point B lies outside the inner shell. the potential at B,
The variation of potential 0) with distance from the
due to inner shell is =9
V,

I
3(
centre is as shown
2
4E R}
So, potential at
B
is V,
=92 4EGb
Potential at point A
Let 04 =, such that r <a. The point A lies inside the outer

shel!. So, potential at A, due to onuter shell is V, =

Fig. 2.18

Electric potential due to a

group of concentricshells
Consider a pair of two unifornuly charged Fig. 2.22
concentric shells having radii a and b
la< b) and carrying charges 4; and qz: 0, Similarly. potential at A, due to inner shell is V, =
ja
respectively. We willcalculate potential
at three iifferent points A. B and C. A lies
inside the inner shell, B lies in the space So, potential at A is V, = 42
Fig. 2.19
tetween the two sthells and Clies outside
the outer shell. Example 226 A charge Q is distributed over uo concentric
Potential at point C hollow spheres of radiir and R> r) such that the surface
densities are equal. Find the potential at any point inside the
OC =r, where r >b.
smaller sphere.
Sol. Let q and q be the charges on the ier and outer spbete.
As surface charge densities are equal.

or
Fig. 2.20 Also, q + < =Q. This gives q
=Q-d
Qr QR
V t 92
Solving the two cquatios, we get q
So, potential at Cis p2 R'+
Now, potential at the centre is given by
(due to inner and outer shell) + R)

Qr
Potential at point B V
4RE
94 4nER 4re,R*• )
Let 0B =r, where a< r<b.
This is equal to pterntial at arny point inside the smaller sphere.
As the point B, lies inside the outer shell,
Motion of charged particle in electric field
Consider a charged particle having charge q and mass m is
initialy at rest in an electric field of strength E. The particle
willexperience an electrie force which causes its motion.
The force experienced by the charged particle is F, where
q
Fig. 2.21 F=
 Chapter 02 Electrostatic potential and capacitance (79

F_qE If charge q is given a displacement r = + ý+ sk) in an

(i
.:. Acceleration produced by this force is a =
...i)
electric field E = E, +E,j + E,k). then the work done is
Suppose at point A particle is at rest and after some time, t W =
it reaches the point Band attains velocity v. q(Er) = qlE,x + E y+
E,)
Work done in displacing charge in an clectric ficld is path
a
independent because electric force in field is conservative.

Fig. 2.23

If potential difference between A and B be AV and the

Fie. 2.24
distance between them is d, then
qEt ... (ii) When charged particle enters perpendicularly an electric
field, it describes a paralkolic pth as shoun
As nomentum, f= mv
(i)Equation of trajectory Thuoughout the motion.
particle has uniform velocity along Naxis and
p=m [from Eq. (Gi)) horizontal displacement r) is given by the equation,
x = ut. Since, the motion of the particle is
accclerated along Y-axis.
p= qËt
=
mx

Kinetic energy of a charged particle

Kinetic cnergy gained by the particlc in time t is,
A,
K=mv²=m Er [from Eq. (ii)]
2
241V Fig. 2.25
2rn 2

Exomple 227 A brallet of mass 2 g is moving with a speed of

10 m/s. f the bullet has a charge of 2 4C, through what
So,
(-)
potential it be accelerated starting from rest, to acquire the This is the equation of a parabola which shows
same speed?

Sol. Use the relation,. gl'

=m²
2
(iü)Velocity at any instant At any instant t, v, = u and
q
Here, =2x 10 C.m =2x 10 kg,v=10 ms-!
x
2x 10 10 10 m
V
Therefore, potential,
2q 2x 2x 10 2x 10
5x 10V= 50kV

Work done by a charged particle

According to work energy theorem, gain in kinetic energy
=
work done in displacement of dharge, ie.. W = V

Fig. 2.26
where, AV = potentialdifference tetween the two
pusitions of charge 4, (A V) = E Ar = EAr cos where is , lf a is thbe angle made by v with Xaxis, then
the angle between direction of clectric ficld and direction qEt
tan a

of motion of charge). 1',

80 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Example 228 A ball of mass m tuving a charge q is released Exomple 230 Tu» pint charges each 50 u. are fixed on
from rest in a region wtere a horizotal electric field E exists. Y-axis at y and y -4 m. Aother charqed pxrticle
+ 4 m
(i) Find the resultant force acting on the bkill. huing chr - 50 uC ond mass 20 q is mwin) along the
(ii) Find the trajectory folloued bv the bal. positive X-axis. When itis at x = -3 m, its spxed is 20 ms
Find the speed of charged urticle when it reaches to oriqin.
Sol. The forces acting on the ball are weight of the ball in Also. find distance of charged particle from origir., when its
vertically downward direction and the clectric forcc in the kinetic erergy becornes zero.
horizontal directio.
Sol.
50 C
Q

A 3 m

i Resutant force, F = imgl' + gE.

(ii) Let the ball be at point Pafter time t. then the trajectory 50 uC-Q
followed by ball can be written as
Let the speed of particle at origin be v. Applying energy
In x-dirextion, x conservation between A and 0, we get
2 m K
+Ua =K +Uo
-,y=
1

In y-direction. y =g', !
2 qE
2Q
Trajectory is a straight line.
Exomple 229 A block having charge q and mass m is resting
on a snooth horizontal surface at a distarce d from the wall as 20
+ (-Q)
4nE 4
shoun. Discuss the miom of the block when a tuniform electric
ficld E is afplied horizontallv towxrds the wall asstuming that
collision of the block with the uall is completely elastic.

=2(30x 10x9x 10°x

m 20
x 20x 10 =
-20*) 2.25

-400 = 225v, =625 v) = 25 ms!

Sol. á
Applying energy conservation tetween A and B, we have

K
+(-Q, =0+ (-Q,
29 =(-Q) 2)
Acceleration of the block can be given as a=

Time taken by the block to teach at wall d at

2
2d 2mi
x
20x10x 20 =9x 10 x2x
After completelv elastic collision, the speed of the biock is
reversed and then it moves under retardation and comes to
rest at 0. Again it is accelerated towards the wall and so on.
In fact, it is executing oscillatory motion of the time period

J2md
T-22
=2E 5 45 45 9
As force g is constant. the motion of block is not simply
m
harmonic. x65
Check point 2.2
1. The work done to move a charge along an equipotential 9. A sphercal conductor ot radius 2 m is charged to a potential
from A to B of 120 V. It is now placed inside another hollow spherical
Calculate the potential to which the
m

(a) cannot be defined as -(E-d conductor of radius 6

bigger sphere would be raised
() must bo defined as -['Ed V
(a) 20
80 V
(C)
(b) 60 V
() 40 V
(C) is zoro
(C) can have a non-zoro value 10. Three concentnc spherical shells have tada aband
cla <b< c) andhave surtace charge densities a - gand
2. There is a unform electric field of intensty respectvely If V,., and V denote the potentials of the three
E which is as shown, How mary labelled shell, for c a+ we
have b,

ponts have the same electric potential as (a) V = V, Va (b) V =

V V
the fully shaded point? (c) V V VA

(a) 2 (b) 3
11. The electrostatic potential of a unitormly charged thin
(C) 8 (d) 11
spherical sheil of charge and radius Rat a distancer rom
Q

3. The electric potential at the surface of an atomic nucleus the centre is

(2 = 50) ot radius 90x10 cm (a) 1or points outsice and tor points inside the shell
(a) 80 V (b) 8
x
10 v
(c) 9V () 9x1d v for both points inside and outside the shel
4. A hotlow metal sphere of radius 5 cm is charged so that the -
potental on ts surlace is 10V. The potential at the centre of (c) zero tor ponts outside and for ponts inside the shel
the sphere is
(d) zero for both
ponts insde and outsxde the shell
(a) 0V
(b) 10 V 12. The dianeter of a hollow metallic sphere is 60 cm and the
(C) same as at point 5 cm away from the surlace sphere carties a charge of 500 C The potenttal at a
(d) sarne as at pont 25 cm away fron the surtace distance of 100 crn from the centre of the sphere will be
7
5. Two charged spheres of radi R, and R, having equal surface
(a) 6x10'v (b) 1v
x v
(c) 45 10V (d) 5x10
charge density. The ratio of ther potential is
(a) R,/, (b) R,/R, 13. Obtain the energy in joule acquted by an electron beam
(c) (R,/R, () (R,/R, when accelerated through a potential difference of 2000 V.
6. The radii of two concentric spherical conducting shells are r How much speed wil the electton gain?
andr, (> ) The change on the outer shell is q The charge (a)10'm's (b
x 10' ms
3
on the inner shell which is Connected to the earth is
(c) 10' mvs 2 mvs
(d)10'
3
14. A particle A has charge + 16g arnd a particle B has charge
7. a charged sphencal conductor ol radius
If 10 cm has + 4g with each of them having the same ass m. When
potential V at a point distant 5 cm from its centre, then the allowed to fall fromn rest through the same electrxc potential
potental at a point distant 15 cn from the centre will be
diference, the ratio of their speed A will becomes
(a) v (b) V

(a) 2:1 (b) 1:2

(c)V (d) 3V
(c) 1: 4 (d) 4:1
8. A hollow conxducting sphere of radus R has a charge (+ q) 15. What potential difference must be applied to produce an
on its surtace What is the electric potential within the sphere electtic field that can accelerate an electron to one length
at a distance f A/3 fromits centre the velocity of light?
(a) Zero 10 (c) 10 (a) 1352V (b) 2511 V
4xe, R (c) 2531 V (d) 3521 V
 Now, energy required work done in bringing an
electron
3) Electric potential energy from infinity to a point of pofential.
As, potential : work
Electric potential energv of a system of point charges is . charge
Work = Potential x Charge =9x 64x
10x1.6x 10-!
defined as the total amount of work done in bringing the
- 921.6 x
different charges to their respective positions from 10J
infinitelv large mutual separations.
Exomple 232 A uniform electric field Eg is directed along
It is represented by U. Thus, electric potential can
also be fositive y-direction. Find the change in electric potential energy
written as potential energy per unit charge, iie.
ofa positine test charge qo when it is displaced in the field
V= from y, =a to y, =2a along the Y-axis.
Sol. Electrostatic force on the test
charge.
Electric potential energy is defined only in a conservative
field. F, =q, E, (along positive ydirection)
E

Relation between work and energy

1fthe force Fis conservative, the wotk done by F can
always be expressed in terms of a potential energy U.
When the particle moves from a point where the potential
energy is U, to a point where it is U,. the change in
W- AU or AU =- W,.=-4Eo (2a - al]=-qA
potential energv is, AU = U, - U,. Note Here, work done by electrostatc force rs positrve Hence, the potential
This is related by the work l, as energy is decreasig

W,-=U, - U, = - U, -U,) = - AU ...(i) Example 233 Find the change in elctric potential energy, AU
Here, W,t is the work done in displacing the particle asa charge of 2.20 x
10" C moves from a point A to point B.
from a to bby the conservative force (here electrostatic). given that the change in electric potential beueen these points
Moreover, we can see from Eq. (i) that if 1, is positive, is AV =V, -V, 24.0V.
AUis negative and the potential energy decreases. So, Sol. As AV =,AU where AU is change in potential energy
whenever the work done by a conservative force is
positive. the potential energy of the system decreases and
vice tersa.
:: AU= q4V = 2.20x 10 O(24.0 V) = 5.28 x 10J
That's what happens when a particle is thrown upwards, Exomple 234 A charge is moed in an electric field of a fixed
the work done by gravity is negative, and the potential charge distribution from point A to another point B slouly. The
energy increases. uork done by external agent in doing so is 100J. Wht is the
change in potential enerqv of the charge as it moves from A to
Electron volt B? What is the urk done by the electric field of the charge
One electron volt (leV) is the energy equal to the work distribrution as the charye moes from A to B?
Sol. Work done, = AU
done in noving a single elementary charge, c such as the
W

=U -U =100J
electron or the proton through a potential difference of As, F = for the charge to move slowly, so
exactly one volt (1 V). -F
-"m -100J
W

leV =el V) = 1.60x 10-C) J/C) Exmple 2.35 Three point charg*s of 0.I C each are placed at
=1.60 x
10P] the coners of an equilateral triangle with side l m. If this
system is sufppliedenergy at the rate of kW, houw much timne
Exomple 231 A spherical oil drop, radius 10 cm has on it at
uill be required to mw one of the charyes on to the mid point
of the line joining
i the tuo others?
a certain time a total charge of 40 electrons. Calculate the
ewrgy that uvuld be required to place an additional electron Sol 0.1C
on the drep.
0.1 C 0.1 C 0.1 C
Sol. Initial charge on the oil drop = 40 x 1.6x 10 C m m
0.5 0.5

Potential of the oil drop 9x 64x 10V 0.1C 0.1 C

(1) (21
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance 83

U,= The change in energy when electron-proton systen is

formed is

9x 10x 3x 10*27 x 10'J AU=

0.1x 0.I x !
= 2+ I.6 10 "X16x 10
x
U, = (9x 10), =
0.5 x -4.35 x 10"J
0.53 10 0
x
=9x 10 0.05 4.35 x 10 I8

-45 x 10'J 1.6x J0 l9-27.2ey

W U
-U, -18x 10'J At infinite separation, the potential energy is zero, therefore,
the energy when the system is formed is
Rate at which energv is supplied is given by
=0+ AU =-27.2 eV
U

Exomple 2.37 A point charge q = -5.8 uC is held stationary

W at the origin. A second point charge q, =+4.3 uC moves from
18x 10 = 10 s= 50 h
t p 10
18x the point 0.26 m, a 0) to 0.38 m, 4 0. low much uork is
done by the electric force on q,?

Potential energy of a system Sol. Work done by the clectrostatic forces =U,
-U
of charges
The porential energv for a system of tuv point charges and
for a collection of more than charges are gien below. (-5.8x 1o)(4.3x 10 (9x 10) (0.38–0.26)
to (0.38) (0.26)
1.
Potential energy for a system of two =-0272J
point charges Exomple 2.38 W7hor minimum uvrk must b done by an
external force to bring a chargq = 3.00 uC from a great
Potential energy of the system of two charges q, and 42 distance auuy (take r o) to a point 0.500 m from a charge
will be work done to bring them from infinity to point A Q= 20.0 uC?
and point B, respectively. Sol. The change in potential energy equal to the (positive of the
Work done to bring charge q, from infinity to point A, work required of an external force =
AU = ql, -V,). We W

W 0 get the potentials l, and V, using Ve

Work done to bring charge q, from infinity to point B,
The work required is equal to the change in potential energy,

1
As, W, =4: X
47Cor where, r, =0.500
m
and r, = n.
Now, potential energy of the system of charge q, and q2, Wotk done,
U= 1W; + W,
x
10 C)
(8.99 x 10'N-m²c'2.00 x 10o
W600 (0.300 m)
u=492 =1.08 J

Exomple 239 A point charge q, 9.1 uC is held fixed at

Example 236 In a hvdrgen aton, the electron and proton are origin. A second point charge q -0.42 uC and a mass
bnend tagether at a istance of abre 0.53A. Estimate the 3.2 x 10 ky is placed on the Xaxis, 0.96 m from the origin.
fMential energv of the sstem in eV. assuming zero potential The sccod point charge is reeased at rest. What is its speed
energv at infinite seuration etueen the electron and the proon.
when it is 0.24 m from the oriqin?
Sol. Charge on clectron. q = 1.6x10"C Sol. From conservation of mexhanical energy, we have decrease
Charge on proton, q, = 1.6x10C in gravitational potential energy
Separation bet ween electron and proton,
=
increase in kinetic energv
r-
0.53À = 0.53 x 10-1° m or
mU, -U, - 4!--)
2
84 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol.
2t

Speed of the second charge,

or speed of the proton, v =
4 nEJm

We have, U, =0,U, = e
(9.1x10-0.42x 10}x 2x 9x 10°(0.24 - 0.96
3.2x 10 (0.24) (0.96),
-
26 ms 2

Exomple 240 An u-furticle with kinetic energy 10 MeV is Speed of the proton, v
leading touxards a stationary tin nucleus of atomic number 50
Galculate the distance of closest apprxich.
Exomple 242 A uniformly charged thin ring has radius
Sol. Iue to repulsion by the tin nucleus, the kinetic energy of 10.0 cm and total charge + 12.0 nC. An electron is placed on
the a-particle gradualy decreses at the expense of the ring's axis a distance 25.0 cm from the centre of the ring
electrostatic potential energy. and is corstrained to stay on the axis of the ring. The electron
is then released from rest, then.
(i) describe the stubsegent meion of the electron
(ii) find the speed of the electron when it reaches the centre of
the ring.
:. Decrease in kinetic energy = Increase in potential energy
Sol. () The electron will be attracted towards the centre C of
or m' =U, -U, the ring. At C net force is zero, but on reaching C.
2 electron has sonne kinetic energy and due to inertia it
crusses CG but on the other side it is further attracted
ot towards CHeke, motion of electron is oscillatoty about
point C
I
2e) (50e)
(KE)
Substituting the values, we get

Distance,r=
(9x 10")(2x I.6x 10"0.6x 10x 50)

10x 10^x 1.6x 1o

- 14.4x 10
n

Example 2.41 A proMon is fixed at origin. Anther proton is (i) As the electton appraaches C its speed (hence, kinetic
released from rest, from a point at a distance r from origin. energv) increases due to force of attraction towards the
Taking charge of portion as e and mass as m. find the speed of centte C This increase in kinetic energy is at the cost of
the proton () at a distnace 2r from origin (ii) at large distance electrestatic potential energy. Thus,
from origin.
Proton
m²U, -U,
=Up -Uc =(-e)M -V] ...)
Proton
Here, V is the potential due to ring.

Sol. The proton noves away under electrostatic repulsion. V,1 (wherc, q
charge on ring)
As there is no external force,
(9x 10) 02 x 10°)
401
AKE + APE 0 Wao + 25)x 10?

m',-U,)=0 V
4R E, R
, =

(i) We have, and U, (9x 10)02x 10-)

4nc,tr)
10x 102
my² =1080 V
2 4Re,2r)
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance 85

Substituting the proper values in Eq. (i). we tave Sol Number of pairs =3

91x10"n-l6x 10 )(401-1080) 13Q

2
.. v = ms
Speed of the electron, 15.45x 10 3
3d
2.
Potential energy for acollection of
more than two charges 80

The potential energy of a system of n charges is given by The eletric potential energy for a systen of chrges is given
by
U94, here, K =

On putting the values, we get

The factor of 1/2 is applied only
with the summation sign
ecause on expanding the summation, each pair is J=15Q-2, 8QQ.15Q- 8Q
4TE 4d
counted twice, It is regresented by U. 5d
Forexample electric potential energy of four point charges 31Q°
192 and q, would he given by d

U= Example 245 Four charges =2 1G.q =-3 m.uC

are keot on the
and q, = 4 uC sof a square of side
1
T42

...(ii) Find the electric potential enerqy of this system of charges.

I m

Fig. 2.27
Sol. We have,
Here, all the charges are to be substituted with sign.
Example 2.43 Three point charges of 1 C, 2 (C and3 Care and
piaced at the corners of an equilateral triangle of sidel m.
Potential energy of a system of three charges.
Calculte the uvrk required to move thee churges to the
corners of a smaller cquilateral triangle of side 0.5 m.
U=
Sol. Work done =U, -U,
x
U= (9.0 10°X1010)
-3), (4N2), (4X1), (-3N2),(-3)(2X1)|

=9x10°x2)+
(0.5
C)+ (210) -(9.0x
10|-12+-.62: 10*)

99x 10°J
Note Here, negatve sign of U imples that postve work has been done ty
Exomple 244 Find the electric potential energy of the system electrostatx forces in assemting these charges at respectne distances from
infity
of charyes.
Example 246 Tuo point charges are located on the X-axis,
q,
=-luC at x= 0 and q; = + IuCat x =lm.
34 () Find the uvrk that must be done by an externa force to bring a
third point chare q, = +luC from infinitv to x 2 m.
(i) Find ihe total poential enegv cf the system of three charyes.
4d
 86 0BJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Sol. (i) The work that must be done on by an external force

q By this force charge is accelerated towards origin, but this
is equal to the difference of potential energy U when acceleration is not constant.
the charge is at x =2m and the potential energy when it So, to obtain the speed of particle at origin by kinematics, we
is at infinity. have to find first the acceleration at sane internediate
position and then will have to integrate it with proper limits.
1
On the other hand, it is easy to use energy conservation
principle as the only forces are consetvative.
Let r be the speed of particle at origin. From conservation of
mechanical energy,
U, +K, U,+ K,
Here,
4 0
4REy2

Substituting the values, we have 2

W= (9.0x 10°) (00-* D), (0(-)] Here.
(1.0) (2.0) Substituting the proper values, we have
=4.5x 1J |-4) (2) (-4)(2) 10-12
(9.0x 4
(ii) The total potential energy of the three charges is (5.0)
given by =
(9.0x 10)92,
(3.0)
9210124x 10-xv?
(3.0)

- (9.0x 10)
(1.0)
0,-),
(2.0)
)eD|lo-12)
(1.0)

=-4.5x 10J (9x10ha-0

Exomple 2.47 Tuo point charges 4 =42 =2 uC are fixed at
x =+3 m and x, = -3 m as shown in figure. A third particle v6.2 ms-!
of mass lg and charge q, = -4 C are released from rest at Potential enerqy in an external field
y=4.0 m. Find the speed of as the particle it reaches the
origin. () Potential energy of a single charge in
external field
V4m
Potential energy of a single charge q at a point with
=
position vector r in an external ficld g-V)
where Vt) is the potential at a point due to external
electric field E
41
() Potential energy of a system of twO
Y3
m

X-3
m
charges in an external field
Consider two chargces q, and q, kept in an external ficld E
Sol. lHere, the charge q, is attracted towards q and q, both. So, at A
andB
the net force on q, is towards origin.
Then, potential energy of a system is given by
U= qVo,) + q,Vt,)+ 4192

where, r, and r, are the position vector of point A and B

respectively.
|Fnt
VI,) = potential at r, due to the external field.
Ve,) = potential at r, due to the external field.
 :
Chapter 02 Electrostatic potential and capacitance (87

Potential energy of a dipole

in a uniform electric field
The work done in rotating the dipole through small angle Restoring torque
d9, then W = t. F;
dW = -pE sir@d 0 -
-
When dsplaced from mean pesltio,
Suppose initially dipole is kept in a
a
restoring terque acts on the dipole
at angle ,. uniforn clectrie ficld
Now, to turn it through an angle 0, (with the
Uminimum
F,-0, r0
PE

field). Then, work done

F

JU
aW-MpEsin8® Torque in opposite
directon
W=-pElcos0, - cos0,)
If0, = 0° and 0, = ,
i.e., Initially dipole is kept along the
F:

field then it turns through 0 so work done, When displaced from neatn pxsition,
U

naxm PE
W= pEl - cos the torque acts in oppasite direction
0) net 0, t 0

Potential energy of dipole is defined as work done in Fig. 2.28

rotating a dipole from a direction perpendicular to the field Exompe 2.49 Tur point charges +2e and -2e are situated at
to the given direction.
If the dipole is rotated by an angle 0,
energy is given by
90° to ,
=0, then
a distance of 2.4 A from each other and constitute an electric
diole. This dipole is placed in a uniform electric field of
4.0 x 10° V'm. Calulate ( electric diole moment,
(ii) potential energv of the dile in equilibrium position,
W=U= pE(cos 90° - cos0) (ii) uork done in rotating the dipole through 180° from the
=-pE cos0 equilibrium pusition.
=-p· E Sol. (i) The ciectric dipole moment is pqx 27

Exomple 2.48 When an electric dipole is placed in a uniform whcre, q is the charge of onc end of the dipole and 2/ is

electric field making angle 0 with electric field, it experiences a the distance between the two charges.
.
torque Calculate the mirimum work done in changing the Here, q =
2e = 3.2 x10 "Cand 2/ 2.4 A
orientation to 20. x
m2.4 10m
=
Sol. t= pE sin 0 pE
p=02x 101)x(2.4 x 10-10)
sin 0
WAUr - pE cos
0, + pE cos 0, 768 x 10"C-m
W pE (cos 0 - cos 20)
=
(ii) The potential energy of a dipole in an electric field E is
0 - cos 20) U-pi cos 0
W-lcos
sin
where, 9 is the angle between the axis of the dipole and
the field. In equililbrium position,
Equilibrium of dipole 0 -0, and so U, - p
(i) Work done 9 = 0°
Here. p e 7.68 10 C-m and Em 4.0x 10 Vm!
x

U= - pE cos 0 = - pE ..
U, = 7.68 x
10 Cm)x(4.0 x 10° Vn)
Thus, the potential energy of a dipole is minimum
when its dipole moment is parallel to the external =-107x 102]
field. This is positiorn of stable equilibrium. (ii) The work done iwrease in energv) in rotating the
(iü) When =180° dipole through angle 0 fron the direction of the electric
Ue-pE cos = + field E is given by
pE
Thus, the potential energy of a dipole is maximum W= pEl - cos 0)
when its dipale moment is antiiarallel to the If0 180° or cos0 e -1, then W = 2pE
external field. This is the position of unstable =2x (7.68 x 10* C-m x(4.0x 10° V/m
equilibrium.
6.14 x 102|
Check point 2.3
1. When a positive charge qis taken from lower potental to a 10. Three charçes Q. +q and +q are placed at the vertices of an
higher potential pot. then its potential energy will equilatera! triangle of sde l as shown in the fiqure. If the net
(a) dectease (b) increase
electrostatic energy of the system is zero, then Q is equal to
(ch reman unchanged (d) beCome zeo
2. When one electron is taken towads the other eectron, then
the electric potetial energy of the system
(a) decrease {b) inceases
(c) rernans unchanged becomes zeo
(d)
3. Tro positive point charges of 12 C and 8uC are 10 cm
apat. The work done in bringing them 4 cn is
(a) 58J (b) 58 e (C) 13 J (d) 13 eV
a
4. In the figure, proton moves a distance
d in a unforn electric held E as shown in
E
) (-q) (c) (+ q) () zero

the figure Does the electic feld do a 11. If

identica charges (-q) are placed at each corner of a cube
o
positive negative work on the proton? ot side b. then eectric potental energy ot charge (+ g) which
Does the electrc potentual energy of the proton increase or is placed at centre of the cute wilM be
decrease -820°
(a) Negatve, increase (b) Positve, cecrease (a) (b)
(c) Negatve. decrease (d) Positve increase
5. The electrostatic potential Ween proton and 12. Two charges q, andg, are placed 30 cm apart as shown in
electron separatad
b

1A is the figure A third chage g, is movecd along the arc of a

136 eV b) 272ev
(a) (c)- 14 4
eV (d 144 eV circle ot radius 40 cm trorn Cto The change in the
D

6. ldentity the wtong statement potential energy of the system is 93_ k, vhere k is
(a) The eectrcal potential energy of a systerm of two protons
shal incease t the separaton between the two
Cecteased
(b) The electrical potential enetgy of a proton-cectron System
wl increase if the separaton between the two is decreased
(c) The electrcal potental energy ota proton-electron :System 40 cm
wtl nctease t tthe sepatation between the two is incteased
(d) The clectrcal poten:al enercy ot systemn of two electtons shall
increase it the separaicn betacen the two is decreasSed
0 cm
7. Two postve pont chatges ot 12 and5 mscroCoulombS, are
placed 10 cm apat in ait. The work needed to bring them (a) 8q, (b) 8q. (c) €q, (d) 6q,
4 cm coser is 13. For dipole g =2x10Candd = 001 m, calculate the
(o) 2.4 J (b) 36J maxmum torque tor this dpole it E5x1o NJC
(c) 4.8J (d) 60J
8. Three identica charçes each of2 are C (a) 110Nm (b) 10x 10 Nim
A
(c) 10x10 Nim (d) 1x10 N'm
placed at the vertices of a triangle ABC as
shown n the figure 14. A molecule with a dipole moment pis placed in a electric
tield of strength E Intialty. the diole is aligned parallel to
IH
AB AC 12 cmand AB AC 32 cm.
the feld If the dipole is to be rotated to be ant-paralei to the
the potential energy of the charge at A is field, then the work required to be done by an external
(a) 1.53J (b)531J (c) 3.15 J (d) 135 J agency is
9. i1
three charges are placed at the vertices of equilateral (a) -2pE b) -pE
triangle of chargeq each. What is the net potentia energy, i! (C) pE (d) 2 pE
the side of equlateral A is l cm 15. Three point charges of 1C.2Cand 3C are placed at the
1
2q corners of an equilateral triangle of
(a) side 100 cm The work
done tO mave Ihese charges to the cornets of a smitar
(c) 1 equilateral trangle of side 50 cm, witl be
(a) 10° J (o) 99x
(c) x
52 10J 10J
(d) 59x10 J
 It is electrostatic shielding that protects a person from
lightning strikes if he is in a car.
4) Electrostatics of conductors Except for spherical surfaces, the charge is not distributed
unifornly onthe surface of a conductor. Atthe sharp
points or edges, the surface charge density la) is very high
Whenever a conductor is placed in an exlernal clectric
and hence the electric fiekl hecomes very strong. The air
field, the free electrons in it experience a force due to it
around such sharp points may become ionised producing
and start moving opposite to the field. This movement
the corner discharge in which the charge jungs Iron the
makes one side of conductor positively charged and the conductor air becaise of the dielectric breakdown of air.
otber as negatively charged. This creates an eletric field
in the conductor in a direction opposite to external electric (i) Electrostatic pressure
field (called induced ield). The novement of electrons Electrostatic pressure is defined as the force per unit area
continues till the net clectrie ficld (resultant of external on the surface of a conductor due to its own charge. If g is
electric field and induced field) becomes zero. This is a the surface charge density, tlhen
state of electrostatic equilibrium. 2
Electrostatic pressure

E
where, (electric fiekl near conductor)

where, G = surface charge density

Metallc spete in electric field

(i) Effect of metallic slab between two charged plates
Figure shows a metallic slab between two charged plates.
Fig. 2.29 The field E due to the charged plates is directed towards
right and the ficld E due to the induced charge in the slab
A conductor in electrostatic equilibrium has the following is directed toward lelt, and hence the net field inside the
poperties slab becomes zero.
(i) Under static conditions, electric field inside a
conductor is zero.
(ii) Just outside a conductor, E is normal to its surface. If
it were not, then it would ave a comiponent along
the conductor's surface, that would cauIse the motion
of charges, That contradicts the state of electrostatic
equilibrium.
(ii) The whole body of conductor is equipotential, as
Eiunte =0. Metal
(iv) At arny point inside that txdy of the conductor, the
electric field due to charges appearing on the surface Fig. 2.30
of conductor is xpual and opsite to the external field.
(iv) Earthing a conductor
Some phenonena related to electrostatics of conductors are
gien lelow. Earth is a good conductor of clectricity. For most practical
purpose, its potential is assumed to be zero. A conductor is
() Electrostatic shielding said to be earthed or grounded whenever it is connected to
a earth. In that case, its potential becomes zero.
Suppase we have a very sensitive electronic instrument
that we want to protect fron extenal cletric fields that The charge will flow from conductor to earth or from
might cause wrong measurements. We surround the earth to conductor to make ils potential zero. The symbol
instrument with a conducting box or we keep the used for earthing is
instnument inside the cavity of aconductor. By doing this
charge in the conductor is so distributed that the net
electric field inside the cavity lecomes zero and the
instrument is protected from the external fields. This is
called electronic shielding. Fig. 2.31 A symbol for earthing
90 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Let us discuss some of the examples related to this conceft. In Fig. (b), a positive point charge Q has been placed
(a) Fig. (a) shows a conducting shell with charge q. at a distance r fron the centre of the sphere. The
Fig. (b)the conducting shell with charge q has heen point chatge Q exerts force on the electrons in the
surrounded by another larger conducting shell which sphete and hence tihe ftee electrons redistribute
is uncharged. Charges -q and +q are induced on its themselves so that the left half is negatively charged
inner and outer surfaces but net charge in the outer and the right half is positively charged. The charge
distribution is non-uniform.
shell is still zero.
At the centre of the sphere, the field tue to the
In the Fig. (c), the outer shell of the Fig. (b) is 1

carthed, The free charge on the outer surface goes to point charge Qis E, .toward right, since
the earth but the inner charge remains bounded to
the charge on the inner shell, so that the potential of the field inside the conductor is zero. The field due
the outer shell connected to the carth becomes zero. the induced charge on the sphere is equal in
magnitude of E, but opposite in direction.
i.e., E, =-E,l
The potential at any pxoint of the sphere e potential
at its centre

lc)
In the Fig. (c), the sphere is earthed, so V = 0, hence
Fig. 2.32 QR
shows two concentric conducting shells.
(b) Fig. (a),
Some charge q, is given to the outer shell. No charge
is developed on the inner shell. Note that the induced charge Q, is non-uniformly
distribtion on the surface of the sphere.
Exomple 2.50 Figure shows tuv conducting thin concentric
shells of radii r and 3r. The oter shell carries charge q. Inner
shell is neutral. Find the charge that will flow from ínner shel!
to earth after the switch S is closed.

(a)

Fig. 2.33
In
the Fig. (b), the inner shell is carthed and hence
some charge q; is developed on it so that its
potential becomes zero. Sol. Let q be the charge on inner shell when it is earthed.
On the surface of the inner shell, the net potential is
1

124

R,
L0
R, 3

i.e., +
I charge will low from inner shell to earth.11D)2
(c) Fig. (a is an uncharged metallic solid sphere of radius R.

Example 2.51 A sphere of 4 cn radius is suspended uithin a

hollow sphere of 6 cm radius. The imer sphere is charged to a
potential of 3 estu udhen the outer sphere is earthed. find the
charge on the inner sphere.
Sol. Iirst of all understand that esu means electrostatic unit (CGS
unit) and in this ysten is replaced by 1. So,
Fig. 2.34
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance (91

potential due to Qesu of charge will be Q/IR in esu. Now, the E-E)-\E
diagram for the above question is as follows
where, E = resultant electric field in the dielectric
E, = external electric field between two plates
and E, clectric field iside the dielcctric

Types of dielectrics
There are tuo tyes of dielectrics
Let the inner sphere and outer sphere have charges
4 and Q2
on them, respectively. Their radii being R, and R, such that () Polar dielectrics
(R, <R,). GivenR, cm andR, =6cm. We havet
4 we
e
two A polar molecule is one in which the centres of positive
unknowIs and Q,. Su, will fom two cqutions bv
and negative charges are separated (even when there is no
equating to the potential of both the spheres. Consider the outer
sphere. It is grounded, so the potential of this sphere is zero. external field). Such molecnles have permanent lipole
moment, e.g.. HCI. H,0. So, a polar dielectric is one which
or ...i) is having a net dipole monent zero in the absence of
electric field due to the random orientation of polar
Note, the contribution of Q, in otential will be its surlace
molecules as slown in figure.
potential but for Q the oute sphere is outside it. So, 2 will
be treated at the centre.
Hence, from Eg. (i),

Now, write the expression for the xotential of inner, sphee

and make it equal to 3 esu. For the inner sphere both the
charges will contribute their respective surface potentials.
Therefore, 4.3
R R Fig. 2.36 Behaviour of a polar dielectric in external field
Substituting Q, =- we get In the presence of clectric field polar molecules tend to
line up in the direction of electric field, and the substance
R R2 has finite dipole monent.
(i1) Non-polar dielectrics
Dielectrics and polarisation In a nonpolar molecule, the centres of psitive and negative
Dielectrics are insulating (non-conducting) materials that charges coincide. The molecule thus has no permanent (or
can produce electric effect without conduction. Movement intrinsic) dipole monent, e.g, oxygen (0,)and lydvygen (I,)
of free charges is not possible in a dielectric. So, they molecules. In an external electric field, the positive arnd
behave differently. When a dielectric material is kept in negative charges of a non-polar molecules are displaced in
an clectric ficld, then the external fielt induces dipole opposite direction. This occurs till the point where
moment. Due to which net charges on the surface of the external force is balanced by the restoring force (due to
dielectric appears and as a result clectric field is produced internal field in the molecule). Thus, dipole movement is
that opposes the external field. Induced field is less in induced in non-polar molccules and diclectric is said to be
magnitude than the external field. So, field inside the polarised. The induced dipole moments of different
cdielectric gets reduced.
molccules add up giving a net lipole noment of the
Er dielectric in the presence of the external field.
E-0 Ee)- 0

En

Fig. 2.37 Rehaviour ofa non-polar dielectric in external field

Fig. 2.35 Polarised dielectric slab
92 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Dielectric constant (K) Capacitors and capacitance

The ratio of the strength of the appied electric field to the A capacitor is a device which is used to store electric
strength of the teduced value of the clectric field on charge or potential energv. It is nade up of two isolated
placing the dielectric between the two chargei plates conductors carying equal and oppsite charges placed at
called the dielectric constant of the dielectric medium. small separation.
It is also kown as relative permittivity or specific
inductive capacity (SIC) and is denoted by Klor E, ).
Therefore, dielectric constant of a dielectric medium is

given by

K= E Fig. 2.38

The space between the conductors may be vacuum or an

The value of K is always greater than 1. insulating materiai. Capacitor is represented as

Polarisation (P)
It is a proxess of inducing equal and opposite charges on Fig. 2.39
the two faces of the dielectrics on the application of
electric field. In other words, the induced diole moment a
developed per unit volume in a diclectric slah on placing Capacitance of conductor
it, in an cectric field is called polarisation. It is denoted by When a charge g is given to a conductor, it spreads over
P. f pis induccd dipole moment acquired by an atom of the outer surface of the conductor. The whole conductor
the dielectricand Nis the nunber of atoms per unit comes to the same potential (say V. This potential Vis
volume, then polarisation is given by diectly proportional to the charge q, i.e.
P= Np
The induced dipole moment acquired by the atom is found
to be directly proportional to the reduced value of electric
ficld and is given by

P= t E

where, a is constant of proportionality and is called

atomic polarisability.
Fig. 2.40
Electric suSceptibility (z) q= CV
The polarisation density of dielectric slab is dircctly
proportioal to the reduced value of the electric field and or C=1
may be expressed as
P=ztoEo This Cis constant of proportionality and is called tlhe
where, z is a constant of proportionality and is called capacitance of the conductor.
electric susceptibility of the dielectric slab. It is a
dimensionlss constant. The SI unit of capacitance is called one farad a P. One
farad is equal to coulonb per volt (1 CN)
Note
1
For vacuum, y 0
2
K1.
z
IF=Ifarad = 1 CN
=l coulonb/volt
Dielectric strength Its dimensiona! formula is [ML T'A}.
The maximum electric ficld tlat a tdiclectric can withstand Capacitance C depends en the sxy*, size and separation
without breakdown is calleel its dicletric strength. of the system of two conduetors annd is independent of the
Its SI unit is Vmand its rctical nit is kV(um). charge given to the txly.
For air it is about 3 x 10 Vm
 Chapter 02 Electrostatic potential and capacitance (93

Example 2.52 A capacitor of 0.75 uF is charged to a voltage sphere is earthed. Potential difference between 1

of 16 V. What is the magnitude of the charge on each plate of

theitl
spheres is given by
the capacitor?
Sol. Using q = CV, we get ...i)
=CV = (0.75 x
q
10 F) 16V)=1.2x 10 C

Capacitance of an isolated spherícal

Conductor
When a clharge q is given to a spherical conductor of
radius R, the potential on it is,
Fig. 2.42
MRE, R
Hence, the capacitance of this system will be

[From Eq. (i))

Example 2.53 A sphere of radius 0.03 m is suspended within a

hollow sphere of radius 0.05 m. If the inner sphere is charged
Fig. 2.4I to a potential of 1500 V and oter sphere is earthed, find the
From this expression we find that cafacitance and the charge on the inner sphere.
4rE,R= C
Sol. Here, a = 0.03 n, b = 0.05 m and 15(%) V

The capacitance of the air-fillcd spherical capacitor is

Thus, capacitance of the spherical conductor is
C:
C= 4nE,R b-a
From this expression, we can draw the following conclusions 0.03 x 0.05
9x 10° * (0.05 - 0.03)
(i)
C« R or C depends on R only. Which we have
alteady stated that C depends on the dimensions of x
=

8.33 10"F =8.33 pF

the conductor. Moreover if two conductors have radii = x
8.33 10"x 1300
R, and R, then
Charge, qCV
- I.25x 10- C

Example 2.54 The thickness of air laver etueen the tuo

(ii) Earth is also a spherical conductor of radius coatings of a spherical capacitor is 2 cm. The capacitor has the
R 6.4x 10° m The capacity of earth is therefore, same capacitance the sphere of 1.2 m diameter. Find the
radii of its surfaces.

10)=71lx 10 F Sol. Here, 4nEtb

b-a
=4RcR or abR
1.2 m =
Now, b -a =2 cm and R 60 cm
C=71laF 2
From here, we can see that farad is a large unit. As ab 0

capacity of such a huge conductor is only 711uF. 2

ab 120
Capacity of a spherical conductor enclosed b+ a'
=
(b -a) + 4ab = 2 + 4x 120 = 484
by an earthed concentric spherical shell b+a =22
Itconsists of two concentric conducting spheres of radii a 2+a+a =22 [:b-a =2 cm)
and b (a < b). Inner sphere is givern charge q while outer a10 cn and b = 12 cm
 94 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Cylindrical capacitor
Cylindrical capacitor consists of two coaxial cylinders of =
radii a and b{a< b), inner cylinder is given charge +q V= Ed d
while outer cylinder is carthed. Aco
:. The capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor is given by

-Charge densíty -
C=I AEo O CCodhEc
d d
The force between plates of capacitor is attractive and
Charge density +. can be expressed as

Fig. 2.43
F = gE
Common length of the cylinders is l, then capacity of a
cylindrical capacitor is given by
2 nE,!
C=
log, bla) If the space between the plates be filled with same
dielectric medium of diclectric constant K, then the
electric field between the plates is reduced to
Parallel plate capacitor
A parallel plate air capacitor consists of two parallel Ct d
Farad
metallic plates separated by a small distance.
Suppose the area of cach plate is A and the separation Note
between the two plates is d. Also assume that the space Instead of two plates, f there arensimilar plates at equal d:stancs from each
other and the alternate plates are connected toçether, then the capacitance
between the plates contains vacuum. Suppose the charge of the arrangement Is given by
density on each of these surfaces has a magnitude a qlA.
d
2. From the above retaton, it s cdesr that the capsitance depends onty on
geometrxal factors (A and d).

Exomple 2.55 A puarullel plate capacitor is constructed with

plates of area 0,0280 m and seuration 0.550 mm. Find the
magnitude of the charge on each plate of this capacitor when
the ptential difference betueen the plates is 20.1 V.

lal

Fig. 2.44

We know that the intensity of electric field at a point Sol. Using the fornula,
between two plane parallel sheets of cqual and opposite x
(8.85
A
10 CN-m' xo.0280m)
charges is given by E=9E
0.550 x 10 m

We ohtain the capacitance of the parallel plate capaciter,

The potential difference between the plates be V volt. C= 4.51x 10 t°F
Then, the electric field between the plates is given by
 ( 95
Chapter 02 Electrostatic potential and capacitance

= is placed between the

(ii) lf a conducting slab (K o)
Capacitance of a capacitor partially filled plates, then
with dielectric
C= d

Suppose, plate of capacitor is partially filled with

a a d
-t+t/o
dielectric (dicletric constant = K) and thickrness t (< d) is This can also be understood from the following figure
introduced letween the plates. Then, tle dislance letween -

the plates is t in the diclectric and d - ) in vacuum (or air)

K
K=

Fig. 2.47

Fig. 2.45
d-!
(ii) lf the space between the plates is completely filled
with a conductor. then t = d and K = .
Then, C=
d
If E, =Y is the electric field in the region, where d-d+
dielectric is absent, then electric field inside the dielectric
will be E = E,K. The potential difference between the
plates of the capncitor is
V =Et+ E, d
-t)
=
+ E, d-t)

-E|d-t**) Ato
Couctot
Fig. 2.48
Now, as per the definition of capacitance, (iv) If more than onc diclectrie slabs are placed between
the capacitor, then
d-t+ K C=
d-,
- t -.. - ,
+I+ 2 K,
0r
d
-t4!K Exomple 2.56 A dielecric slab of thickness 1.0 cm and
dielectric constant 5 is placed wetueen the plates of a parallel
Special cases plate cacitor of pltes area 0.01 m² and separation 2.0 cm.
(i) 1f the slab completely fills the space between the
Calculate the chnge in capacity on introduction of dielectric.
plates, then t = d and therefore $7at uould be on the change, if the dielectric slabs were
conducting?
Sol. Given, t = L.0 cm - 10m, K - 5A - 0.0lm² =10m?

d=2cm 2x 10m
Capacity with air in between the plates,
1l0* x 102
Co =.8.85x = 4.425 x 10-l2 F
2x 10"
Fig. 2.46 Capacity with dielectric slab in between the plates,
x x
8.85 1o-1? 102
C= C=
dK Go
EpA
wlere, Go is capacitance witthout the dielectric. x
d =7375 10" F
96) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS VolL 2

Capacity with conducting slab in between the plates,

C. A&85
x
10!x 10-2 d/2 d d
885 10-12
x

d-t 2x 20*-ly10-2=
Increase in capacity on introduction of dielectric
- x

=C=Cn = 7375x 10°2 4425 10-12

- 2.95 x
10!' F

Increase in capacity on introdction of

conducting slab = (-Co = 885 x 1o12 -4.425x 10°12 Extra charge given by battery,
= x 10-12 F
4.425 sQ=Q-Q=
Exomple 2.57 An air-cored capacitor of plate area A and
separation d has a capacity C. Tuo dielectric slabs are inserted Example 2.59 The distance berueen the plates of a parallel
betueen its plates in tuo different manners as shoun. Calculate plate capacitor is 0.04 m. Afield of 5000 V/m is established
the capacitance in it. between the plates and an uncharged metal plate of thicknes
0.01 m is inserted inzo the condenser parallel to its plate. Find
the potential difference betueen the plates (i) before the
introduction of the netal plate and (ii) after its intruduction.
What wvuld be the xotential difference, if a plate of dielectric
constant K =2 is introduced in place of metal plate?
Sol. Potential difference across capacitor,
V = Ed = 5000 x 0.04 = 200V

Sol. Let the charges on the plates are Q and -Q.

=
Electric field in free space is Eg
AE

=
Electric field in first slab is E fo?
K Ak, V
200V
E, 0.04
Electric ficld in sccond slab is
=2=Y
The poterntial difference between the plates is
=
V Eld -4-t;)+ Ef + E#;

Ac, Alo
C= 0,01 0.03
d-t+ 0.04-0.01 +
K
Since, charge remains sarme,
C
d-4-t;+
Q
CV C'V Ac 200
K, 0.04 0.03
Potential, V =150V
Exomple 2.58 A parallel plate capacitor has plate area A and Ky2
separation d betueen the plates. The capacitor is connected to a
battery of emf V. ) Find the charge on the capacitor. (ii) The
plate separation is decreased to d2. Find the extra charge
given by the battery to the positive plate.
Sol. (i) Capacitance, C-10, charge, Q=CVE AEo AE
d 0.04-0.01 4 0.01 0.03:
d-t+ K
=
Q=CV C"""
-x 200 =
0,
0.01 0.035
Potential, =175V
 Chapter 02 Electrostatic potential and capacitance 97

Effect of dielectric on various parameters Exomple 261 A copacitor (: 50 F) is charged to a ptential

difference of 20 V. Tie cdurging battery is disconnected and the
A parallel plate capacitor is charged by a battery which is capxcitor is convted to ather cell of emf 10 Vwith the
then disonnected. A dicleetrie slab is then inserted to fill psitiwe plate of copkcitor jired with dhe ositie termirxal of cell.
the space between the plates. (à) Find charge flnen tigh 10 Vcel.
Let qo. C, V, and E, he the charge, capacitance, v
(i) Is work done the reil or is it dore on the cell?
Fid
its magritude.
potential difference and elcctric field respectively, before (iii) Find the heat developwd in onecting urires.
the dielectric slab is inserted. Sol. so
Now, ue will disctess tur cases
Case-l Effect of dielectric when the battery is kept
disconnected from the capacitor

Charge on capxcitor, Q = 50x 20 =1000 AC

(i) The charge on the capacitor plates remains qo 50
uF
(ii) The electrie field gets reduced

(ii) The potentia! difference gets redueed, ie., = V

Charge on capacitor, Q, = 50 x 10 300 uC Q, <C

(iv) The capacitance increases, i.e., (i) Charge flown trough cellof emf 10 V,
C= KCo• =
AQ -Q, 500 pC.
tv) The energy decreases, i.e., U
=o.
K
(ii) Since, <Q work is edone on the cell
Q

W; - AQ1'n 500 x 10)x 10, 10-5x w,

is Negative.
Case-I| Effect of dielectric when battery remains
connected across the capacitor 50× 10- ao' -20)
(i) The c:urge ow becones Kyo, i.e., q Kqo: =-7.5x 10 J

W + - 5x 10 x
(ii) The electric field remains constant, i.e.., F= E
AU ! =
-7.5 10
+/
(iii) The potential difference remains constant at Vo 2.5× 10J H

i.e., V = Vy: whete, iH= heat develoxd itn coicting wies.

(iv)The capacitance increases from Co to C, ie., C = KCg Example 2.62 A parullel plate cac itor (C = 50 uF, d = 4 mm)
is charged to 200 V and then chngingy luutery is removd.
(v) The energy increases i.e., U = KU,:
Now, a dielectric sab (K = 4l of thickness2 mm is placed
Exomple 2.60 An isolated 1GyuF parallel plate air capacitor between the plates. Find new potentia dilference acruss
has a potential difference of 100V. A dielectric slab having cavcitor,
relatie permittivity (i.e., dielectric constant) = 5is introdtced Sol.
to fill the sxIce tetuventhe uo plates comletely. Caleulate +0 -)
1'1001

2 mm
200)V
X00 V
AEg 50x 10F
4x 10
( the rew capacitaKe of the capacitor, Ac
(i) the new petential difference lhfuen the twoplates of caxacitor.
Sol. ) The new cajacity of the capacitor, C KC, - 5x16= 80uF
(il Sice, the capacitor is isolated, thetelore the charge on 50x 10x 4x 10 x

the caacilor re.ins the ame, thus its cappcity is 80 10F

=

(5/2)x 10 (5/2)x 10
increased an expense of its puitential drop.
Therefore, the hew pitential difference, Since, charge remains same Q=(V = C""
5XX) x 200 = 801"

Potential dilferece across capcitor " =125 V

Check point 2.4
the circumference ofa sphere is 2 m, then capacitance
o
9. I1
1. ldentify the false statement.
(a) Electrc field is 2ero inside the conductor and just outside, n sphere in water wOuld be
(a) 2700 pf (D) 2760 pF
is notmai to the sutfaco.
2780 pF (d) 2800 pF
s
(b) Electrc lield zero in the canty ot a bollow chargod conductor,
(c) A pola dielectric is one in which is having a net dipole 10. The capactance of a parallel plate capacitor is 12 uF. If the
moment zero in the absence of electric field distance between the plates is doubled and area is haved,
(c) H,. N,.o,. Co, and CH, ae examples of polar delectric. then new capacitance wil be
2. Exit drops of mercury of equal radi possessng equal (a) 8uF
4 uf
{b) 6uF
(d) 3uF
charges combine to form a big drop Then, the capacitance
of bigger cdrop compared to each indivicdual small drop is 11. A parallel plate condenser has a capactance 50 Fin air
(a) 8 times (b) tirnes (c) 2 times (d) 32 times and 110 uf when immersed in an oil. The dielectric constant
3. The capacty paralel plate condenser depends on
of K of the oil is
(a) the type of metal used (a) 0.45 (b) 0.55
(C) 10 () 220
1

(b) the thickness of plates

across on the plates
(c) the potentia applied
12. A 500 uf capacitor is charged at a steady rate of 100 uCis.
(d) the separation between the plates
The potential detference across the capacitor will be 10 V
4. As shown in the fiqure, a very thn sheet of aluminium is after an interval of
placed in between the plates ot the condenser. Then, the (a) 5s (b) 25 s
capacity (c) 20 s () 50 s
13. There is an air filed 1 pF parallel plate capacito. When the
plate separation is doubled and the space is filled with wax,
Al strip the capacitance increases to 2 pF.The dielectric constant of
wax is
{a) 2 (b) 4
6 (d) 8

(a) wll increase (b) will decrease

14. A parallel plate capacitor with air between the plates has a
(c) remains unchanged (d) may increase or decrease capactance of 9 pF. The separation between its plates is d
The space between the plates is now filled with two
w

5. When a lamp is connected in series vith capacitor, then dielectrics One ot the dielectrics has dielectric corstant
(aj kamp vll not gkow (b) larnp will turs! out K, =3and thickress d/3 wtle the otter one has delectric
(c) lamp will g'ow normaly (d) None of these Constant K, =6and thickness 2d/3. Capacitance of the
6. The capacity of a spherical conductor is capactor is now
(a) 45 pF (b) 405 pF
(a) (b) (C} 20 25 pF (d) 1.8 pF
(c) 4afR (d) 4ze,R? 15. Two parallel plate of area A are separated by twO ditterent
dielectrics as shown in figure. The net capacitance is
7. The potentials of the two plates of capacto are 10V and
10 V The charge on one of the plates is 40 C. The
or the capactor is
vlatice
Cap
(a) o) 4F
(C) F K;-2 drz
05F (d) 0.25
8. The earth has voume V and surtace area A then capacitance
Woutd be
(a
(a) áreg R
A (c) (d)
(d) 12xo v d
(c) 12E A
 (iv) If n identical platesare arranged as shown in figure,
then they constitute (n - ) capacitors in series. Each
Combination of capacitors
capacitor has capacitance
d
1. Series grouping and Gea
(r-)d
In a series connection, charge on each capacitor remains
same and equals to the main charge supplied by the
battery but potential difference across each capacitors is
different such that
+ Fig. 2.50
V=V +V, V,
In this situation, except two extreme plates each
where V. V,, Vy are the potential difference across
plate is common to adjacent capacitors.
capacitor C, C, and C, respectivey.
(v) Below are some of the examples of combination of
capacitors arranged in series.

C, C:
A
HHH- (i)
sties
C
Series

Fig. 2.49

The arrangement shown atbove is series connection. Here.

the equivalent capacitance is Be H
Gii)
G
Ce G
C, Fig. 2.51

Following points are important in case of series combination Exomple 2.63 In the circuit shown in figure. find
of capacitors (i) the equivalent capacitance.
(i) In series combination otential difference and (i) the charge stored in each capacitor and
distributes in the inverse ratio of capacitance, i.e., fiii) the pxential difference acrss each capacitor.
1 1
U
and 2 uF
H

(i) 1ftwo capacitors having capacitances G

and C, are
connccted in series, then

Ca C + Cz
I00 V

Sol. (i) The equivalernt capacitance

2 uF 3 juF
and

(ii) If ncapacitors of equal capacity Care connected in

series, with supply voltage V, then their equivalent
capacitance is and potential difference acrOSs cach 100 V

is V = (2) 3)
capacitor C ==1.2 uF
G+ Ga
2+3
100) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

(i) The charge q, stored in each capacitor is (ii)

q=CV=( 1.2x 10) (100) C n 120 uC
(iü) In serics combination, V r
An isoated ball·shaped conductor of radius r surroundedt
by an adjcent concentric layer of dielectric (K) and outer
radius 2 r.
Sol. i)

V, =V- =100 - 60 = 40 V
and

Example 2.64 Find the potential difference and charge on

each capxcitor.
Buf 12 uF 24 uF

HHHE The capacitance of the two capacitors can be calculated as

Capacitor I, G
4zEf2r
(2r -r)
8z
4 ReG2r-3r
60 V Capacitor 2, G =
4
Series, ul Br-2r) =24rE
Sol,
12 2A
20 Connect a battery bet ween A and B, and check polarity,
4

C and Cz are =6ner

60 V C 2
in series
H
G+ Cz
(ii)
60 V 60 V
Charge on capacitor, Q=4x 60 =240 :
Now, the individual potential can be shown as B

240 240 210i

60 V
Capacitance of 2 capacitors carn be calculated as
1

Capacitor
60 V
4rLKr2r =8ntKr
In series, charge on individual capacitors and equivalent 2-r
capacitór is same and cqual to 240 uC. Capacitor 2 Isolated sphere of radius 2r and outcr radius
V, 210 30 V
infinite.
8
= 240 V, -20V G and Cz in series, as shown in (i)
12
240
V, = =10V G+ Gz K+1
24
Example 265 Find the equivalent capacitance betueen A and B. 2. Parallel grouping
In a parallel conncction, potential difference across each
2r
capacitor remains same and equal to the applied potential
difference but charge gets distributed, i.e.,

where, q
42 and qzthe charges across capacitor G Gy
Three coMxucting concentric shells of radii r, 2r and 4 r. and C, respectively q is the net charge flowing across
the circuit.
 101
Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance

where, C, is the cquivalent capacitance when n

capacitors are connected in parallel. Below are some
of the examples of combination of capacitors
arranged in parallel.

Hc A

Fig. 2.52

The arrangement shown in figure is called a parallel

connection. Here, the equivalent capacitance is equal to
Ces = C + Gy + Ga
Fig. 2.54
Following points are important in case of pxrallel
conbination of caxcitors Example 2.66 In the circuit shown in figure, find
(ü) in parallel combination, charge energy distributes in (i) the equivalent capacitance and
(ii) the charge stored in each capxcitor.
the ratio of their capacitance, i.e.. q C andUc C. If
two capacitors having capacitance C, and C,
respectively are connected in parallel, then
Gig = C + G

(ii)If n identical capacitors are connected in parallel, 100 V

then equivalent capacitance is Co = nC and clharge Sot. () The capacitors are in parallel. Hence, the equivalent
on each capacitor is g' = I. capacitance is,
=
C=G, +
C,+ Cy orC =|+2+3) 6uF
(ii) 1f nidentical plates are arranged such that even (ü) Total charge drawn fron the battery,
numberci of plates are connected together and odd q =CV = 6x 100 uC= 600 uC
number of plates ate connected together as shown in This charge will be distributed in the ratio of their
figure, thern (n -Dcapacitors are formed and will be capacities. Hence,
in parallel.
4 :929, =G:C,:C, =l:2:3
x 600 =1 00 uC

600 =200 C

and 600 =300 uC

Exomple 2.67
Fig. 2.53

-
The capacitancc of cach capacitor is bg and the
d Bo

C
equivalent capacitance, f) Find the equivalent capciwxe of th conbinatit soun in the
d figgre (al. uhen C,2.0 uF. C, = 4.0 uF and C; = 3.0uF.
(iv) If there are n identical capacitors, then =n? (i) The input termiruals A and B in Fig. (al are cooected to a bzttery of
12 V. Find the puxential ard tie charge of each capacitor.
102! OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol.
2h V

Sol. (i) C and C, are in parallel, hence their equivalent

capacitace is Now, 2 uF and 60 uF are in parallel, so we have
CC +
C, 2.0 uf + 4.0 F- 6.0 uF
Fig. (bl shows the combination of C and
C, in series.
Coy =C+C, 154
The final equivalent capacitance, shown in Fig. (c) is
given by
Example 269 Find the equivalent capacitance between A
! 1

or and
C C
C, 6.0 uF 3.0 uf
C
=2.0 F B.A: area of each plate; d ; separation between plates
2.0 F
(ii) To ind the charge or otential difference, we tetrace AV2l Ar2
the path to the original in Fig. (a).
The charge supplied by the battery is
K 3 d2
q=C, when the inputs ate joined to a V-volt battery.
= 2.0
uFI02.0V) = 24.0 u: K
The charge on each capacitor in series in Fig. b) is Kj=6
43 =qq=24.0 uC
B
So, = 8V (ii)

K=1 3

(b) C
and C, are replaced by C"
The potential difference across C in Fig. (b) is
d/3
24.0p: K-6
1"2. 6.0 uC:
=1V

This same potential difference " appears across C, and B

C, in Fig. (al and hence the charges on them ate

Sol. (i)
=C{=2.0pF)(4.0V) = 8.0 uC A2 A/2
and 42 = CVy n (4.0uF)(4.0 V) 16.0 u: m

Kz-3 d2

d'2

(c) C' and C, are replaced by

Ca
Thus, we have ý V,4.0V,V, = 8V
m

K, 44, o
and 8.0 uC, 4, =l6.0 C; q, = 24.0 4C: Capacitance, G = 2Atp
Exomple 2.68 For the follouving arrangement, find the
d
eqivalent capacitance between A and B. K,
Capacitance, C, = 3At,
2 uf d

Capacitance, C =

2
G, and
C
are in series, C' =2AE
C, +C
Sol. Here, the 3 uf, 4 uf and 5 u
capacitors are in series.
Cand
C
are in parallel =Alg
60 d
12 + 20 +15 47
 103
Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance

C eo3AEo Example 2.71 If charge on 5 uF capacitor is 50 uC, then find

i) Capacitance,
d/3 d the potential difference on 4 uF and enf of battery.

T A

Ky=6di3

Sol. Since, charge on 5 uF is 50 uC, hence potential differcnce

9AE
Capacitance, C, Ac
drs d
on it is 10 V. The cquivalent circuit can be drawn as

50.......Parallel, 18 uF
Capacitance, C, -En184E
d/3 iov
C, C, and C, are in series,

Parallel. 12uF

= 2Aco
Equivalent capacitance, Ca
d

Example 2.70 Find the potential difference and charge on each

capacitances. All capacitance in pF.
E

Step I Charge on 5 ufF capacitor

difference across it is 10 .
is 50 uC. hence potential

Step II 180

60V
Sol. Here, two branches are in parallel. Potential difference
across each branch is 60 V. There are two capacitors in series,
use direct formulae as explained earlier.
=
40V
i-60
=
E
V, 60-V =20V
Step I!! 180 180 180
x
60 = 40V

V, 60 -Vy = 20 V Seties.3uF

Charge on
3
uF, q
=3x 40 =120 uC
q,
6uF, =6x 20 = 120 uC
uf, q,9x 40 360 uC
9

E
18 uF, q, m18x 20 n 360 uF
104) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol 2
tut

Step IV 180 Sol A

3 B

First, tearrange the plates.

=
emf of battery 60V.
12

Potentia! dilference on 4 sufF:45V

Exomple 2.72 In th follming figures, area of each plate is A
and d is separatim hrucen adjacent plates. Find the
capacitance of svsien leiuven points A and B. Charge on piate 1.q=-CV= -Ac
Chazge on plate 3, d =
CV+ CV =2C

Special method to solve combination

Sol.
of capacitors
Method of same potential
1.

Give any arbitrary potentials ,

V.. etc) to all
ternials of capacitors.a But notice that the points
connected directly by conducting wire will have at the
as sane potential.
Th equivalent circuit can be drawn
The capacitors having the satne potential difference (PD)
are in parallel. Make a table coItesponding to the figure.
Now corespanding to this table a simplified figure can be
formed and from this figure Ca can be caleulated.
Example 2.74 Find eqivalent capacitance between points A
and B shown in figure,

60 V

Example 2.73 Five identiral capcitor plates each of area A are

arrnged such that adjacent plates are ata distance d apart. The
plates are connected to a source of emf Vas shoun. What is the
magnitude and ruture of charge on plates I and 3, respectivelv? Sol. Three capacitors have potential difference, V; -V. So, they
are in parallel. Tleir equivalent capacitance is3C.

Two capcitors have poterntial differeke, V, -". So, thei

xquivaiernt capxitatKe is 2C and lastly there is one capacitor
acToss which otential difference is 1, -V,, S), let us nake
table corresponding to this intonation.
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance 105

Potential difference Capacitance From the figure we can see that Cand 2C are connected in series.
(C)+ (2C)
3C C=
C+ 2C
2C This combination is connected in parallel with C. So, net
capacitance of the given circuit is

Now correspornding to this table, we make a simple figure as

C"net
C+ 3
shown in figure.
Exomple 276 Find the equivalent capacitarce between A and B.

4G

AC
As we have to find the ance between points
A and B,
acrons
whiche
we can see
is V, -V. From the
Sol. As we have solved in above examples, we can solve here
sinplified figure, that the capacito: of capacitance
2C is ouit of the circuit xoints A and Bas shown. Now, 3C ad also using the same technique.
Care in series and their equivalent capacitarke is
CKC) C)_3
3C + C
Example 2.75 Find equivalent caacitance betueen
points A and B.
8C

ParalJel 4C• 6C 8C- 18C

(1) üi)

Sol. The circuit can be drawn as capacitance =

9Cx 18C
Series, =6C, Cu =6C
9C+18C
Exomple 277 Fiund the eqquivalent capacitarnce betueen A and B.
4C

Two capacitors have potential difference V-V, and

A
12C
cquivalent capacitance 2C. Let us make a corresponding table 9C
based on the potential each capacitor is having.
Potential difference Capacitance
-9C 18C
C
18C
H

4C
Now corresponding to this table, we make a simple figure as
shown below. 4Cx 12C
Sol. In series, capacitance 3C
4C + 12C
9
In series, C'=2C
9C 18G 18C
106) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2n 0i'unl
4G Example 2 78 Figure shous a combination of twelve capacitors,
H each of caucitance C formingacube. Find the equivalent
capacitance of the combination (i) between the diagonaly
A 12C opposite corners A and B of the cube (ii) bwetween the diagonally
Series, 2C opposite corners A and D of a face of the cubc.
Parallel C+ 4C= 5C 4C: 3C 9C. H

9c
18C

Sol. (i) Sujypose the charge supplied hy the battery is Q. This

will be cqually divided on the thuee capacitors
connectcd to A because on lking fron to B three
A

= 9Cx 18C
sides of the cube bave identical properties. Hence, each
Series, capacitance 6C
9C+ 18C
capacito connected to A has charge .Similariy, each
30 3
the
capacitor connected to B
also has .In
charge
3
Fig. (b), the charges shown arc the charged on the
5C; capacitors (i.e., charges on their positive plates)
H
Q3

i6c:

Q6 Q6

4C

series, 4C

Now, V=(Va -Vp)+ Nf -V,)+, -V,)

The cquivalent capacitance between A atnd B,
C = 4C + 4C = 8C V.2,6, Q3, 5Q
C C C 6C

2. Connection removal method

i. Equivalent capacitance, C =Y-c
5
(iü)
This method is useful when the circuit diagram is
symmetric except for the fact that the input and output are
reversed. That is the flow of current is a nirror image
between input and output above a particular axis. In such
cases, somne junctions are unnecessarily made. Even if we
MH .
remove that junction there is no difference in the
remaining circuit or current distribution. But after
removing the junction, the problem becomes very simple.
The following example illustrates the theory.
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance 107

Orn looking from A to D into the circuit, and from D to Parallel, !5C
A into the circuit, we find symmetry. Hence, the charge
on cach of the four capacitors of the face AEDF is same
(say Q). It means there is no charge on the capacitors
bet ween Fatnd G, and between E and H. Hence to find
the equivalent capacitance, the cornbination may be
taken without these two capacitors, which has becen R
A
shown in the figure (d). A
C2 Equivalcnt capacitance between A and B
1
8
C2 Ce 15 CI4 15/C
C
=
3. Infinite series problems
This consists of an infinite series of identical loops. To
a
find Ca of such a series first we consider by ourself
C2
(e
value (say x) of C

Then we break the chain in such a manner that only one

loop is left with us and in place of the remaining portion
4C3 we connect a capacitor x.
c =
Then we find the Coa and put it equal to x. With this we
get a quadratic equation in x. By solving this cquation we
() can find the desired value of x.
Exomple 2.80 Find the cquivalent capacitance of the infinte
Example 2.79 Find the equivalent capacitance betuven A and
B. All the capacitors have capacitance C.
ladder shoun in the fiqure la) berueen the points A and B.

Ae

the infinite ladder between M and N, the

Sol. If we look at
arrangement obtained is exactly sane as we have between A
and B.
Sol. K
A

B•
A and
Now, suppose that the equivalent capacitance between
A
Bis x. M
and Nis also x.
Then the equivalent capacitance between
120 Series,C
Hence,
2(:

2Cr
2C*
N,O, Y

B
Be
2Cx 2C² +3Cx
Thus, x=C+
2C + x 2C + *
B
or x=2C
-Cr-2C' =0
i.e., The equivalent capacitance is 2C.
108) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2 t

Example 281 Find the equivnlent capacitance between A and B.

1f bridge is said to be balanced and in that case
C2 CA
or - V,
=0 or VE =0
=
V Vp VE

i.e., no charge is stored in C. Hence, it can be removed

from the circuit.
Some of the different forms of the Wheatstone bridge is
given below.

I6 capscitors
A

Sol

Series, C2
.
Series, (74
Fig. 2.56

Equivalent capacitance, Example 2.82 the network of capacitors gien atead. Find
In second branch tlhe capacitance are connected in series the effective capacitance between the points P and Q.
having ncet capacitance, third branch the capacitance are
2
C Value is not given C
and C,
connected in series having nct capacitance 4
,o are in C
parallel,
C, =C 2 4
+.. 0

using GP
Sol. The given network consists of two closed capacitor circuits
one containing C, C and C;, and the other containing
4. Wheatstone's bridge circuits C, C, Cs. Thus, C, is cornmorn in both. Hence, the network
can be replaccd shown in figure which is a Wheatstonc bridge
Wheatstone's bridge consists of five capacitors, or a arrangenent
number of capacitors which can be reduced to five as
shown in the following arrangement.

S
GG and C, are in series between the points P and Q similarly
D
C
and C are also in series. Suppose the cquivalent
capacitance of C, and C, is C and that of C, and C, is C".
Then, we have
Fig. 2.55
C=G1*4=2uF
G+ 4+4 C;
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance 109

=
imilarly, G" 2uF The charge on 2 F capacitor in Fig. (d} is
ow, capacitors C and C" are in parallel between P and Q. 42 =2 uFX15 V) = 30 uC
ence, the equivalent capacitance is given by So, the charge on the 3 uf capacitor in Fig. (c) is also
9: =30uC
So, the charge on 5 uf capacitor is zero.
Example 2.83 (i) Find the equivalent capacitance of the
combination between A and B in the figure. Hence, our answers afe 30pC on 3 uF capacitor, 20 uC
on 4 uF capacitor and zero on 5uF capacitor.
2 u
H (iii)The potential difference across 3 uf capacitor of
Fig. (c) is

5u!
F

6uF
If the points A and B ae maintained at 15V and 0v
respeetielv. then
(i) finl the charges on 3 uF, 4 uF and 5 uf capacitors. 2 juf
(ii) what are the pxwentials of the points Cand D?
Sol. i) The sinplified form of the given combination has been
shown in the Fig. (a), This forms Wheatstone' bridge. Va-= 303 uFuC =10V

Herc, 15V -V =|0V

C,
V5V
C
2 Exomple 284 Find the euivalent capxacitance betueen
A and B.
2uF

H
H
6uf

Thus, (balancing condition)

C, C4

Hence, la) Cey

C +C7 C,+G4
10
3+6 Sol.
6G
-V =15V Series,
(i) Potential ifference, V
The clarge on F capacitor is

=
]a5V) 20uC
4-F SeTie

2ul Series.

A
B

3uF 4C
Prallel,
Hence, the charge on 4 uF capacitor in Fig. (b) is also
4 =20 uC
110 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Parallei, 8C Hence,
Further, the plates enclosed by the dotted lines form an
isolated system, as they are neither connected to a battery
terminal nor to the earth. Initially, no charge waspresent
in these plates. Hence, after charging net charge on these
plates slould be zero. Or

and
Balancexd Wheatstone bridge, renove caacitor between Xand Y.
So, these are the three equations which can be obtained
from the first law.
Series,

8C3: Second law

A
In a capacitor. potential draps when one moves from

43;
xsitive plate to the negative plate by q/ (. and in a battery
it drops by an amouut equal to the emf of the battery.
Applying second law in loop ABGHEFA, we have
Parallel, 4C
Series, 13
34V =0
C,
The cquivalent capacitance between A and B=4C
Similarly, the second law in loop GCDG gives the
Kirchhoffs Law for capacitor circuits equation,

Kirchhoffs law can le applied to a circuit containing 1-95+92Cz =0

resistances, capacitors anl batterics. Its tuo laus are as
C
C;
follous Use following sign convention while solving the problems
on Kirchlhoffs law
First law
This is basically the law of conservation of charge.
Following uw points are imprtant regarding the first laur -E
(i) In case of a battery, both terminals of the battery
supply cqual amount of charge.
(ii) In an isolated svstem (not connectel to either of the
terminals of a battery or to the earth) net charge a--;
remains cOnstant. Fig. 2.58
For examnple, in the figure shown, the positive terminal of Arrow shows the direction of current or low of charges.
the battery supplies a positive charge q + Similariy,q. Note When an artarngement ot capaitors <nnot be simplified by any of the
the iegative terminal supplies a negative charge of method discussed in the previouS section, then we need to apply the
magnitu«de q, t44* Kirchhaffs làw to solve the circCuit

Example 2.85 Find the charges on the three capacitors show1

in fiqure.
*****.. 2 uf
H

X) V
Fig. 2.57
(a)
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance 11

SoL Let the charges in thrce capacitors he as shown in figue. . Energy stored by a charged capacitor,
2 uF 4 juF
B

Thus, if a capacitor is given a charge q,

then the potential
energy stored in it is,

10 V 20 V U=
2 C
(b)
Charge supplied by 10V battery is q
and that from 20 V The abovc relation shows that the charged capacitor is the
battery is q. Then, electrical analog of a stretched spring whose castic
potential energy is kr'. The charge q is analogous to the
This relation can also be obtained in a different manner. The 2
charges on the tree plates which are in contact add to zero.
Because these plates taken together form an isolated system elongation x and i.e.. the reciprocal of capacitance to
which can't receive charges from the batteries. Thus,
C
the forCe constant k.
Applving second law in lws BCFAB and CDEFC, we have
Energy density between the plates
-4-,
2
10 =0 9,+3
=
60 ...ii)
The energy stored per unit volume of space in a capacitor
is called energv density.
2-20+
4
I=0
6
or 34, +
24 =240 ...üil Charge on either plate of capacitor is
Solving the above three equations, we lave

Energy stored in the capaitor is

U EA)?
2
2-EgA/d
C30 uC:
Energy density Energv stored
Volume of capacitor Ad
20 V 1

140
=HC and = 50
q
4=C, 4) C

Total energv stoed in series combination or parallel

Energy stored in charged capacitor combination of capacitors is equal to the sun of energies
stored in individual capacitots, i.e., U = U, +U, +U,
The total amount of work in charging the capacitor is +...
Note Chage m erergy on inttoducing a dieletx slab
stored up in the cajpacitor in the lorm of electric potential
) When a dielectc stab is inserted between the plates of a charged
energy. Suppose at time t, a charge q is present on
the capacitor, with hattery connected ta ts plates. Then, the capacitance
capacitor and Vis the potential of the capacitor. If tecomes K(eletnc constantl times and enerey stoted in
d is
the amount of charge that is brougbt against the forces becomes KU,
the capacitar
of
the field due to the charge already prescnt on (i) when a dielectric slab is nserted beteen the plates of a charged
the capacitor
and battery s dsconnected. Then, the charge on
capacitor, the additional work iecded will le the plates remains
unchanged and erergy stored in the capacitor becomes
1e, enerY
W=tdq) V
=d [as V = qlC] decreases.

Example energv stored in a

.:Total work to charge a capacitor to a charge go. can 286 Calculate cacitor of 5F
obtained by integrating additional work from limits 0 to be when it is charged to a potential of 25O V?
To, We get Sol. Given, (= 5ut =5x 10E.' - 250 V

Energy stured in a capscitor,

2C - o156J
Ucv'x(3x
2
10)x 230
 112) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Example 2.87 The plates of a pxrallel plate capacitor have an Energy stored in capacitance, C,
area of 90 cm each and are separated by 2.5 mm. The =c?
capacitor is charged to 400V. Houw much electrostatic energy is
stored in it ? How much when it is filled with a dielectric -x
2
8x 10x (60)
medium K =3 and then charged ? If it is first charged as an air
capacitor and then filled with the dielecric, then ? =1.44x 1oJ
Sol. Capacitance of the parallel plate capacitor, Example 2.89 The capacitence of a variable radio caxcitor
x can be changed from 50 pF to 200 F ly turning the dial fron
E1 8.85
x
10 90x 10
=319x10-!"F
25x 10-} 0° to 180°. With the dial set at 180, the caucitor is
connected to a 400 Vbattery. After charging. the capacitor is
The energy stored in the air-capacitor disconnected from the battery and dial is turned at 0°.

U-c -;x 19x10)x (400? () What is the potential difference across the capacitor when dial
2 2 reads O?
=
2.25 10oJ x
(i) Hou much uOrk is required to furn the dial, if friction is
neglected?
The capacitance the dielectric filled capacitor is
of
C KC, Sol.. When dial rcads 180, Cu200 pF
When dial reads 0°. C 50 pF =
(i) Since, charge remains same,
Q- CV - C"
x x
=
KU, =3x 2.55 10)=765 10J 200x 400 50x V
If the capacitor is first charged end, then filled with the The potential difference across the capacitor,
diclectric, then the charge remains constart but the potcntial ' =1600 volt x
difference betwecn the plates decreases. The poterntial m
(ii) Charge, Q CV 200 x 101x 400 =8 10c
=

difference is V =

The new energy of capacitor, 2C* 2C

w--20"10
=
48x 10"J= 48

2.55 x
10855x10 J Common potential or
3
redistribution of charge
Example 288 Tuo capacitors of capacitance C =2 uF and
G, = 8uF are connected in series and the resulting When two charged conductors or capacitors are joined
combination is connected across 300V. Calculate the charge, together by a conducting wire and having diflerent
fotential difference and energy stored in the capacity potentials, then charge flow from capacitor at higher
separately. potential to the capacitor at lower potential. This flow of
Sol. If Cis the equivalent capacitance, charge continues till their potential becomes equal, this
II.!.!.5., equal potential is called common potential.
then C
2 8 8
G

F
C=1.6
5
Charge, q = (V=1.6x 10x
10C 300 = 4.8 x

Potential across capacitance, C =V==240V

Fig. 2.59
Potential across capacitance, G,=V, =60V
Suppose two conductors of capacities G and C, have
Energy stored in capacitance, charges q and q; tespectively and raised to potential V,
and V, respectively are joined together by a conducting
5*2x 10x 240 wire, then charge redistributes in these conductors in the
=5.76x 10² J ratio of their capacities. Charge redistributes till otential
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance 113

oFbth the conductors become equal. Thus, let qi and q

this is because no flow of charge takes place when both
e final charges on them, then the conductors are at same potential.
q = CzV
4 =CV and Example 2.90 Tuo isolated spherical conductors have radii
5 cm and 10 cm respectively. They have charges of 12 4C and
-3
uC. Find the chargyes ufter they aure connected by a
conducting wire. Also find the common potential after
redistribution.
and if they are spherical conductors, then = R,
R2 Sol

R
q2 Gz

where, R, and R, are radius of capacitors.

Since, the total charge is (4, + 42). Therefore, 12 uC

Net charge (12 -3) uCe9uC

charge is distributed in the ratio of their capacities lor radi in
cAse of spherical corncductors), i.e.,
R, 5
and R, 10 2

Total charge
Common potentia!, V =
Total capacity Common potential,
+C,V, (9x 10)
Vt
92
C,
C
+Gz G+ G; 4nE,(R + R)
(9x 10) (9x 10)
Note ifthe two capacitors are connected in suth a way that their dssimlar
plates are connected together, then their common potential is
15x 10)
x
=5.4 10 V

Example 2.91 Tuo parallel plates capacitors A and B having

Loss of enerqy during redistribution of charge caacitance of
luF and 5 are charged separately to the
f
same potential of 100V. Now, the asitie plate of A is
The charge on the capacitor G, was q and after joining it connected to the negative plate of B and the negative plate ofA
becomes q'. The charge transformed from the capacitor G, to the positive plate of B. Find the final charges on each
to the capacitor C,
is q -¢. caxcitor.
Now, Sol. As for a capacitor q =CV, so initially the charge on each
capacitor,
4=CV =l 10"})x 100 = 100 uC:
x

and q; =
(, =(5x 100 = 500 uC:
10)x
Now when two capacitors are joined to cach other such that
C, + Gz positive late of one is connected with the negative of the
other, by conservation of charge
This is thc quantity of the charge transforned.
q=+4) =lal=lq-q; =(500 -100) uC= 400 uC.
The lss of cnergy due to redistribution of charge is given by So common potential
400 x
10200y
2 (C + C,)
(C, +
Cz) a+5)x 10 3eh
- and hence after sharing charge on cach capacitor y
Naw as Cy C, and (V, V,)* are always positive. U, > U
i.e., there is a decrease in energy. Hence, energy is always 4'=CV=dx 10-)x
3
20uc
3
lost in redistribution of charge. Further,
1000
AU= 0, if V=V; 92 =CV=(5x 10)x 00
3 3
 114) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Exomple 2.92 A capacitor of capacitance 5 uF is charged to Use

potential 20 V and then isolated. Nou, an tuncharged capacitor
It is a device which is used for generating high electric.
is cornected in paralle! to it. If the charge distributes equally on
these capacitors, find total energv stored iin capacitors. potential of the order of ten million vots. Such high
Sol. Lct Cbe unknown capacitance electric potentials are needed for accelerating charged
particles to very high speeds.
5V
=
CV C=5 uF If we place a charge anywhere in a conductor, the charge
Common potential, will move to the outside surface, and the ficld inside the
G +
C5x 20+ 5xO10V conductor will be zero.
C + G 5+5 Theory
Total energv stored in capaciters,
Robert Van de Graaff took advarntage of this concept in
1931 to build an generator, an apparatus, that produces
highly encrgetic charged particles.
- 500 x 10 500u Such particles are useful for microscopic probes of matter
Exomple 293 A capacitor A of capacitance 4 uF is charged to such as cancer treatrnents, Van de Graaff used a device
30 Vand another capacitor B of capacitance 2 uF is charged to
similar in concept to the apparatus shown schematically
15 V. Nou, the positive plate of A is connected to the negatie
plate of B and negative plate ofA to the positive plate of Find B.

the final charge of each capacitor and loss of electrostatic energy

-How
in the prcess. metal
Sol -Qi spheres
A Collec1or
4 uF
comb
-0V Charge taken
-Q on belt
Insulatar

2 aF
Charge
carrying belt
--15V
Iiere charge on A, Q-C4
Charge on B, ,
=C, =2x 15
When positive plate is connected
x
30 =
120 uC
=30 uC
to negative plate, we find net
Change put
on bet

Suppiy Spray comb Motar

utating belt
P

Target
charge as |Q -,1120- 30 = 90 uC circuit
The charge 90 uC will be redistributcd in sucha nanner that Fig. 2.60
capacitorS acquirc sunc potential.
Common potential, An insulated belt (or chain) continuously bridge charge to
|CG{ -CV,!4x 30 -2x 15 -15V
the inside of a hollow conductor, which then moves to
4+2 the outside surface of the conductor. The electric
3=CV= 4x 15
= 60 uC potential on the spherical conducting surface increases as
m
=CN 2x15 30uC. charge flows to its surfaceV= .An ion source
Loss of energy, 4nE,R
AU=
I
2
C
C

+ C;
!.4x2
+V=2 4+2
Co -15)x 10 J =150 W produces charged atoms whase sign in such as to be
repelled from the region of high potential and thus
accelerated.
Van de Graaff generator Such devices are called Van de Graaff accelerators or
Principle Van de Graaff generators, and the beams they or other
accelerators produce play an important role in modern
It isbased on the phenomenon of corona discharge and that technology. For exanplc, such beams are used to make
the charge given to a hollow conductor get transferred to
microcircuits.
the outer surface to be distributed uniformlv.
 heck point 2.5
1. Three capacitors each of capacitance C and of breakdovn 9. Three capacitors each of capacity 4 uf are to be connected
voltage V are joined in sernes. The capacitanca and in such a way that the effectve capacitance is 6uf. This can
breakdown voltage of the combinaton wil be be done by
CV (b)
(a) connectina them in parallel
(a)
3'3 3C: (b) connecting two in series and one in parallel
(d) 3C.3V (c) connecting two n paralet and one in series
(c)
3V (d) connecting all of them in series

2. In given circuit when switch S has been closed, then charge 10. Inthe figure shown, the ettective capacitance between the
on capacitor A and B respectively. points A and B, it each has capacitance C, is

34
6C |3C

(a) 3q. 6g (b) 6q. 3g

4.
(C) 4 5q., 5q (b) 5q. 4Q
3. Three condensers each of capacitance 2F are put in series. (a) 2C (b) C/5
The resuttant capacitance is (c) 5C () Ci2
(a) 6F 11. Four equal capacitors, oach of capacity C. are artanged as
shown. The elfective capacitance between A and 6 is
(d) 5F

4. Two capacitors of capacitance 2 uF and 3 uF are joined in B

series. Outer plate of irst capacitor is 1000 V and outer plate
of second capacitor is earthed (grounded). Now the
potential on inner plate of each capacitor vill be
(a) 700 V (b) 200 V
(c) 600V (d) 400V (a)c
5. series combination
A of three capacitors of capacities 1uF, 5 (d) C
2 uf and 8F is connccted to a battery of emf 13
V. The
(c)
C
potental difference aczoss the plates of 2 uF capacitor 12. In the circuit as shown in the figure, the effective capacitance
veill be between A and B is

(a) 1 V (b) 8V 4 ufF

(c) 4 V
13y A

n
6. A parallel plate capacitor is made by stacking equally 2 uF
spaced plates connacted alternately.
If the capacitance T 4 uF

betveen ay two plates isC. then the resultant capacitance

IS (a) 3 suf (b) 2 uF
+
(n- )C (d) (n
(C) 1)C (d)
(a) C C (b) (c) 4 uF 8uf
Four capacitors of equal capactance have
an equivalent 1uF
7. 13. The charge on anyone of the 2 uf capacitors and
an
capacitance C, when connected in series and equivalent capacitor will be given respectively uC)as
(in
C is
capacitance C, when connected in paralel. The ratio
1
C 24ufF
1
(a) (5)
16
(c 8
in a
8. Three capacitors ol capacitance 31uF are connected
minimum capacitances will
circuit. Then, their maximum and
be
(a) 9uf. 1uF (b) 8uf.2 uf
(d) 3 uf,2 uF (b) 2, 1 (c) 1, 1 (d) 2.2
(c)
9uf,a aC (a) 1,2
116) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

14. Equivalent capacitance between A and B is another paraliel combination of n, capacitors, each of value
C. is charged by a source of potential difference V, it has
the sane (total) energy stored in it, as the first combination
has. The value of C, in terms ot C, is, then
16C,
(a) (b)

() 2c,
A

18. I the charge on a capacitor is increased by 2 C, then the

(a) 8f (b) 6uF energy stored in it increases by 21%. The original charge on
(c) 26uF
()F the capacitor is
(a) 10 C (b) 20C
15. The energy stored in a capacitor of capacitance 100 uf is (c) 30 C (d) 40 C
50 J. Its potential difference is 19, capacitor of capacitance value 1uF is charged to 30 and
A V

(a) 50 V (b) 500V

(C) 1000 V () 1500V the battery is then disconnected. If it ts connected across a
2 uF capacitor, then the energy lost by the system is
16. The potential energy of a charged prallel plate capacitor is (a) 300 J (b) 450 J (c) 225 uJ (d) 150 l
Uo. If a slab ot dielectric constant K is inserted between the
(e) 100 uJ
plates, then the new potential energy will be
(b) U,K? 20. A parallel plate capacito is charged to a potential dilference
(a)
K of 50 volts. It is then discharged through a resistance for
2 seconds and its potential drops by t10 volts Calculate the
K () U

traction of energy stored in the capacitance

(a) 0.14 (b) 0.25
17. A series combination of n, capacitors, each of value C. is
(c) 0.50 (d) 0.64
charged by a source of potential difference 4V.When
hapter
exercises
A.)Taking it together
(Assorted questions of the chapter for advanced level proctice)

1. Angle between equipotential surface and lines of 8. The unit of electric permittivity is
force is la) volt/n² (b) joule/C (c) farad/m (d) henry/m
(al zero (b) 1&8 {cl 90° (d) 45°
9. The capacitance of a capacitor does not depend on
2. From a point charge there is a fixed point A. At that the medium bet ween the pates
point there is an electric field of 500 V/m and (b) the size of the plates
potential of 3000 V. Then, the distance of A from (c) the charges on the plates
the point charge is (d) the separation between the plates
(a) 6 m ( 12 n a charged capacitor, the energy resides in
fc) 36 m 144 m
J0.
td the positive charges
3. A charge of 5 C is given a displacement of 0.5 m. (b) Both the positive and negative charges
The work done in the process is 10J. The potential fc) the ficld betwcen the plates
difference letween the two points willb: (d) around the edge of the capacitor plates
la) 2 V (b) 0.25 V (d) 25 V 11, Which of the following is not true?
4. An electron enters in higher potential region V, from la) Fnr a point charge, the electrostatic potential varies as
l/r
lower potential region V,. then its velocity (b) For a dipole, the potential depends on the position
(a) will inerease vector arnd dipole moment vector
(b) will change in direction but not in magnitude tc) The electric dipole potential varies as 1/rat large
(c) will not change in direction of ficld distake
() will ot change in direction perpendicular to field (di For a point charge, the clectrostatic ficld varies as 1/r
5. When the separation between two charges is 12. The energy stored in a condenser is in the form of
increased, the electric potential energy of the charges (al kinetic energy (b) potential energy
(a) increases th) deceascs (c) elastic energy (d) magnetic energy
(c) remains the same (d) may increase or decrease 13. The potential energy of a charged parallel plate
6. If a positive charge is shifted irom a low potential capacitor is U,.If a slab of diclectric constant K is
region to a high potential region, then the clectric inserted between the plates then the new potential
potential energy energy will be
(a) incteases (b) decteases
(c) remains the same (a) may increase or decrease
a) (b)
U? (c)
k
7. The work done in carrying a charge of 5 uC from a 14. A charge Q is placed at the origin. The clectric
point A to a point B in an electric field is 10 m). potential due to this charge at a given point in space
Then, potential difference l -V, is is v. The work donc by an external force in bringing
(a) +2 k:V (b) - 2 kV another charge q from infinity up to the point is
(c) + 200 kV (d) -2XX kV V
(b) Vq (c) Vtq
118) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

15. The force between the plates of a parallel plate 21. The capacitance of a metallic sphere is 1 uF, if its
capacitor of capacitance Cand distance of separation radius is nearly
of the plates d with a potential difference V between (a) 9 kmn (b) 20 m
the plates, is (c) 1.11 m (d) 1.11 cm

(al 22. The unit of eiectric ficld is not equivalent to

2d 24? (a) NIC (b) j/C
(c) V/m (d) JC-m
(c) (d}
C 23. The electric potential V is given as a function of
16. An electric ficid of momcnt p is placed in a uniform distance x (metre) byV = (5x² +10x - 9) V. Value
clectric field E. Then, of electric field at x= lis
(i) the torque on the dipole is px E (al - 20 V/m (b) 6 V/m

(ii) the potential energy of the system is p•E

(c) 11 V/m -23 V/m
(d)

(ii) the resultant force on the dipole is zero. 24. Electric potential at a point x from the centre inside
a
la) (6), (iil and (iii) are cosrect conducting sphere of radius Rand carrying charge
(b) (i) and (ii) are coITect ard (ii) is wtong Qis
(c) Onl (i) is correct
1
Q 1
Q
(a) (b
(d) (i) arnd (ii) are correct and (ii) is WIOng 4KE, R
fe) (i), (ii) and (iiil are wrong
(d) zero
17. A positively charged particle is released from rest in
an uniform electric field. The electric potential
energy of the charge [NCERT Exemplar)
25. If a charged spherical conductor of radius 5 cm has
potential Vat a point distant 5 cm from its centre,
(a) remains a constant becaise the electric field is uniform
(b) increases because the chargc moves along the clcctric
then the potential at a point distant 30 cm frorm the
fiekd centre will be
(c) decreases because the charge moves along the clectric (b)v (d) 3V
field 3 6
(di decreases because
electric field
the charge moves opposite to the -
26. Two plates are at potentials 10 V and + 30 V. If
the separation betwveen the plates be 2 cm. The
18. Identify the false statement. electric field between them is
(a) Insideacharged or ncutral conductor clectrostatic ficld (a) 2000 V/m (b) 1000 V/m
is zero
(c) 500 V/m (d) 3000 V/m
(b) The clectrostatic ficld at thc surface of the charged
conductor must be tangential to the surfacc at any point 27. The potential at a point due to an electric dipole will
(c) There is no net charge at any point inside the be maximum and minimum when the angles
conductor between the axis of the dipole and the line joining
(d) Electrostatic potential is constant throughout the
the point to the dipole are respectively
volune of the conductor (a) 90 and 180 (b) and 90 0

(e) Electric field at the surface of a charged conductor is

(c) 90 and 0
(d) 0 and 180
proportional to the surface charge density
19. Equipeotentials at a great distance from a collection 28. An elcctric dipole when placed in a uniform electric
of charges whose total sun is not zero are ficld E will have minimum potential energy if the
approximately (NCERT Exemplar] dipole moment makes the following angle with E
(a) speres (a) (b) n /2 (c) zero (d) 3r /2
(b) planes 29. How much kinetic energy will be gained by an
(c) paraboloids a
a-particle in going from point at 70 V to another
(d) ellipnoids point at 50 V
(a) 40 eV (b) 40 keV (c) 40 MeV (d) 0 eV
20. An electron entes in high potential region V, from
lower potential region V,, then its velocity 30. A charged particle of mass m and charge qis released
fa) will increase from rest in an electric field of constant magnitude E.
(b) will change in direction but not in magnitude The KE of the particle after time t is
(c) No change in direction of ficld 2E}?
(a) (b
(d) No change in direction perpendicular to field
2:² m 2m 2t
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance (119

31. Two positive charges 12 uC and 8 uC are 10 cm 40. A capacitor is charged by using a battery which is
apart. The work done in bringing them 4 cm closer is then disconnected. A dielectric slab is then slipped
(a) 5.8] (b) 5.8 eV between the plates which results in
(c) 13 (d} 13 eV (a) reduction of charges on the plates and increase of
potential difference across the plates
32. The capacitance of the earth, viewed as a spherical (b) increase in the potential difference across the plates,
conductor of radius 6408 km is reduction in stored energy, lut no charnge in the charge
(a) 980 F (b) 1424 jaF on the plates
(c) 712 uF (d} 356 F (c) decrease in the potential difference across the plates,
reduction in stored energy, but no change in the charge
33. A thin metal plate P is inserted between the plates of on the plates
a parallel plate capacitor of capacitance Cin such a
(d) Nonc of the above
way that its edges touch the two plates. The
capacitance now becomes 41. A parallel plate air capacitor is charged to a potential
(a) C2 (b) 2C (c) zero (d) difference of V. After disconnecting the battery,
distance between the plates of the capacitor is
34. A capacitor of capacity Chas charge Q and stored increased using an insulating handle. As a result, the
energy is W. If the charge is increased to 20, then
potential difference between the plates
the stored energy will be (a) decreases (b) increases
(a) 2W (b) W72 (c) 41W W4
{d)
(c) becones zero (d) does not change
35. A 2 uF capacitor is charged to 100 V and then its
42. Two concentric metallic spherical shells are given
plates are connected by a conducting wirc. The heat equal amount of positive charges. Then.
produced is
(a) the outer sphere is always at a higher potential
(a) IJ (b) 0.1J (c) 0.01J (d) 0.001J (b) the irier sphere is always at a higher potential
36. If there are n capacitors in parallcl connected to V (c) Both the spheres are at the same potential
volt source, then thc energy stored is equal to (d) no prediction can be made about their potentials unless
the actual value of charges and radii are known
(a) nCv2 b)ncV²
43. Diclectric constant of pure water is 81. Its
CV² permittivity will be
2r (a) 716x 10-1° MKS units b) 8.86 x 101² MKS units
(c) 1.02 x 1 MKS units
37. A variable condenser is permanently connected to a (d) Cannot be calculated
100 V battery. If the capacity is changed from 2 uF
to 10 uF, then change in energy is equal to 44. Two spherical conductors each of capacity Care
charged to potential Vand -V. These are then
la) 2x
10J b) 2.5x 10"*J
connected by means of a fine wire. The loss of
(c) 3.5x
10J (d) 4x 10?J energy is
38. Two condensers of capacity 0.3 uF and 0.6 F (a) zero
respectively are connected in series. The (c) CV2 (d) 2 Cv2
combination is connected across a potential of 6 V.
The ratio of energies stored by the condensers will 45. Two spheres A and 6 cm are
B of radius 4 cm and
given clharges of 80 uCand 40 uC, espectively. If
(b) 2 (d) 4 they are connected by a fine wire, then the amount
4 of charge flowing from one to the other is
39. A capacitor of capacity C, is charged by connecting la) 20 uC fron A to B (b) 20 uC from B to A
(c) 32 uC: from B to A (d) 32 uC from A to B
it across a battery of emf Vo. The battery is then
removed and the capacitor is connected in parallel 46. The electric potential difference between two
with an uncharged capacitor of capacity Cz. The parallel plates is 2000 V. If the plates are separated
potential difference across this combination is by 2 mm, then wat is the magnitude of electrostatic
C force on a charge of4 x 10C located midway
(a)
G+Cz between the plates?
(a) 4 N (b) 6 N
(d) 1.5 x 10*N
G (c) 8 N
120 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

47. Two conducting spheres A and B of radii 4 cm and 54. Charges 5uC and 10uCare placed m apart. Work 1

2cmcarry charges of 18x 10 statcoulomtb and done to bring these charges at a distance 0.5 m from
each other is (k = 9x 10 S)
9x 10* statcoulomb respectively of positive (a) 9x 10J (b) 18x 10J
electricity. When they are put in electrostatic (d) 9x 10j
(c) 45x 10"*J
contact, then the chatge will
(a) not flow at all (b) flow from A to B 55. A particle of mass 2x 10- kg. charge 4 x 10C
(c) flow irom B to A (d) disappear enters in an electric field of 5 V/m, then its kinetic
energy after 10 s is
48. Two insulated charged spheres of radii R, and R,
(a) 0.1 J (b) 1J (c) 10) (d) 100J
having charges Q, and Q, are respectively,
connectexd to each other. There is 56. The ionisation potentia! of mercury is 10.39 V. How
(a) an iICIease in the energy of the system far an electron must travel in an electric field of
(b) no change in tthe energy of the system 1.5x 10° V/m to gain sufficient energy to ionise
(c) always decrease in energy mercury?
(d) a decrease in energy of the system unless R, QR 10.39 10.39
1.6x 10-ig n
(a 10-19
a
49. A sanallsphere is charged to potential of 50 V and 2x I.6x
a big hollow sphere is charged to a potential of 10.39
(c) 10.39 x 1.6x 10:"m (d
100 V. Electricity will flow from the smaller sphere 1.5x 109
to the bigger one when
(a) the smaller onc is placed inside the bigger one and
57. 0.2 F capacitor is charge to 600 V by a battery, on
a
connccted by wire removing the battery, it is connected with another
(b) bigget oe placed by the side of the smaller one and parallel plate condenser of IF.The potential
conected by a wire decreases to
(c) Both are coect (a) 100V (b) 120V (c) 300 V (d) 6X0 V
(d) Both are wrong
58, Work done in placing a charge of 8x 10-1" C on
a

50. Two identical charges are placed at the two corners condenser of capacity 100 uF is
of an equilateral triangle, The potential energy of the (a) 16x 10j (b) 31x 10**J
system is U. The work done in bringing an identical (c) 4x 10° (d) 32x 1o"j
charge from infinity to the third vertex is
(a) U ttb) 2U 3U
(c) (d) 4U 59. In a parallel plate capacitor the separation between
51. Four clectric charges +q, +q, -q and -q are placed at the plates is 3 mm with air between them. Now a
1 mm
thick layer of a material of dielectric constant
the corners of a sqsare bf side 2L. The electric 2 is introxluced between the plates due to which the
otential point A midway between the two
charges +q and + q, is capacity increases, In order to bring its capacity to
the original value the separation letween the plates
(a) must be made
(a) 1.5 mm (b) 2.5 mm (c) 4.5 mm
3.5 mm (d)
(c) zero (d) 60. The clectricpotential at any point xy andz in
metres is given by V=3x.The electric field at a
52. A hollow metal sphere of radius 10 cm is charged point (2. 0, 1) is
(d) -12 Vm-!
such that the potential on its surface becomes 80 V. (a) 12 Vm (h) -6 Vm (c) 6 Vm
The potential at thc centre of the sphere is
(a) 80 V (b) 800 V (cl 8 V (d) zero
61. An electron of mass m and charge e is accelerated
from rest through a potential difference Vin
53. A parallel plate capacitor has a uniform electric field vacuum. The final speed of the clectron will be
E(V/m) in the space between the plates. If the
2eV
distance between the plates is dm) and arca of cach (d)
m m
plate is A(m´), then the energy (joule) stored in the
capacitor is 62. lf an electron moves from rest from a point at which
potentiai is 50 V to another pint at which potential is
(a) (b) EEAd 70 V, then its kinetic energy in the final state will be
x
10
1
(d)
(a) 3.2 10-°J
* (b) 3.2
(c) EAd/ E

(c) 1
N (d) 1
dyne
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance {121

The work done in bringing a 20 C charge from point (a) is least along the path AB
A to point B for distance 0.2 m is 2J. The potential (b) is least along the path AD
difference between the two points will l (in vol) (c} is zero along all the paths AB, AC, AD and AE
(a) 0.2 (b) 8 (d) 0.4 (d) is least along AE
(c) 0.1

64. 1f 4 x 10 eV energy is required to move a charge 71. A uniform electric field lhaving a nmagnitude
E, and
of 0.25 C between two points, then what will be the direction along the positive X-axis exists. If the
potential difference betwecn them? potential Vis zero at x = 0, then its value at X =+x
(a) I78 V (b) 256V will be
lc) 356 V kd) Note of these la) +xE, (b) -xE
65. Kinetic energy of an electron acceleratcd in a Ic) +x*E, td)
-'E
potential difference of 100 V is 72. Two positive point charges of 12 and 5 microcoulombs
(a) 1.6x 1o" tb) 1.6x 1o"J are placed 10 crn apart in air. The work done nceded
(c) 1.6x 10-9 to bring them 4 cm closer is
td) 1.6×
10J lal 3.6 J
(b) 2.6J
66. A hollow conducting sphere is placed in an electric (c) 4.8] (d) 6.0J
field produced by a point charge placed at Pas
73. In a uniform electric field a charge of 3 C
shown in figure. Let VaV and V be the potentials
at points A, B and C, respectively. Then experiences a force of 3000 N. The potential
difference between two points 1 cm apart along the
clectric lines of force will be
V
(a) 10
lc) 30 V (d) 300V
74. A particle A has charge +q and a particle B has
charge + 4q with each of them having the same mass
(a) Ve >Vp (b) V >Ve m. Whern allowed to fall from rest
through the same
67. Two unilike charges of magnitude q are separated by electric potential difference, the ratio of their speed
a distance 2d. Tlhe potential at a point midway "'A will become
between them is
(a) zero 24 (a)
b (c) (d 2:1 (b) I:2
4nE, d 4nEO d (c) 1:4 (d} 4:1
68. Two spheres A and B of radius a and b respectively 75. Three particles, each having a charge of 10
are at same electric potential. The ratio of
the
Care
placed at the corners of an equilateral triangle of side
surface charge densities of A and B is 10 cm. The clectrostatic potential energy of
the
(a) =
system is (given 9x 10° N-m²/c}
69. A capacitor of 2 F charged to 50V is connected in (a) zerO (h) infinite
parallel with another capacitor of luF charged to 20V. (c) 27J (di 100J
The common potential and loss of energy will be 76. A nass m = 20 g has a charge q =3.0 mC. mnoves
fa) 40 V. 300 ) (b) 50 V, 400j It
with a velocity of 20 m/s and enters a region
(c) 40 V. of
G00J (t) 50 V. 700 J clectric field of 80 N/C in the same direction as
70. In the electric field of a point charge 4, a the
certain velcity of the mass. The velocity of the mass after
charge is carried from point A to R C, D and E. 3s in this region is
Then, the work done (a) 8%0 m/s {b) 56 n/s
(c) 44 m/s (d) 40 m/s
77. Four identical charges +50 uC each are placed, one at
each cormer of a square of side 2 m. How much
external energy is required to bring another charge of
+
50 1C from infinity to the centre of the square?
(a) 64 | (b) 41 J
(c) 16J (d) 10J
122) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

78. Two equal charges q are placed at a distance of 2a 86. Five capacitors of 10 uF capacity each are connected
and a third charge -2q is placed at the mid-point. to a DC potential of 100 V as shown in the adjoining
The potential energy of the system is figure. The equivalent capacitance between the
(a) (c) - points A and B will be equal to
8nca
79. An alpha particle is accelerated through a potential
10 F 10 uF

difference of 10° V. Its kinetic energy will be A

(a) 1
MeV (b) 2 MeV (c) 4 MeV (d) 8 McV 10 f
80. Tlhe ratio of momenta of an electron and an
a-particle which are accelerated from rest by a
10 uF 10 uF
potential difference of 100 V is
(a) 1
(b)
2m,
fc) 100 V
m

81. Two particles of masses m and 2 m with charges 2q (a) 40 uF (b) 20 uF

and q are placed in a uniform electric ficldEand (c) 30 aF (d) 10 4F
allowed to move for same time. Find the ratio of 87. Three capacitors of capacitances 3 uF, 9 uF and 18 uF
their kinetic energies
are connected once in series and another time in
(a) 8: 1I
(b) 4
:1 1 parallel. The ratio of cquivalent capacitance in the
2:
(c) 1
(d)
16:
82. A spherical condenser has inner and outer spheres of two cases will be
radii a axd b respectively. The space between the two
is filled with air. The difference between the capacities (a) 1:15 (b} 15:1
of two condensers formed when outer sphere is (c) 1:1 (d) 1:3
earthed and when inner sphere is earthed will be 88. In the circuit diagram shown in the adjoining figure,
(a) zero (b)
4Ea the resultant capacitance between points P and Q is
(c) 4nEb 12 uF
Pe
83. Thrce charges are placed at the vertices of an
equilateral triangle of side 10 cm. Assume q, = luC, 2 uF
3 uF
q2 =-2HC and 4, = 4uC. Work done in separating
the charges to infinity is HE
-4.5 J
(a) (b) 4.3J 20 uF
(c) 45J (d) None of these
(a) 47 uF (b) 3 uF
84. At a distance of 1 m from a fixed charge of 1 mC, a (c) 60 uF (d) 10uF
particle of mass 2g and charge luC is held
stationary. Both the charges are placed on a smooth 89. Four capacitors each of capacity 3 uF are connected
horizontal surface. 1f the particle is made free to as shown the adjoining figure. The ratio of
move, then its speed at a distancc of 10 m from the cquivalent capacitance betwecn A and B and
fixed charge will be bet ween A and Cwill be
(a) 10ms-! (b) 20ms-! (c) 60ms- (d) 90 rs-! B

85. point charge q is surrounded by six identical

A
charges at distance r shown in the figure. How much
work is done by the force of electrostatic repulsion,
when the point charge at the centre is removed to
infinity?
ia) 6q/4rE (b) 6q'/4nCr
(c) 364²14 nEo
ta) 4: 3 (b) 3:4
(d) Zero (c) 2:3 (d) 3:2
 123
Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance

What is the equivalent capacitance between A and B 94. the given network capacitance, C =10 uF,
in the given figure (all are in farad)? C =
5uF andC = 4 uF. What is the resultant
8 4
capacitance between A and B (approximately)
A

AoH HFB
j6

la) 2.2 uF (b) 3.2 uF (c) 1.2 uF (d) 4.7 uF

10
(alF 13 (c)F
31
(d)
71 95. The cquivalent capacitance bet ween points A and B is
91. Four capacitors are connected as shown. The
cquivalent capacitance between the points P andQis uF
B

1 F
{a) 2 uF (b) 3 uF 0.5 uF (c) 5 uF (d)

P
96. The capacitance between the points A and B in the
given circuit will be
1.5 uF
(b) H
(a) 4 uf F 3 uf 3 1uF

H
92. The total capacity of the system of capacitors shown
in the adjoining figure between the points A and Bis
uF (c) 3 uF
(b) 2 (d) 4 uF

2 uf 97. Four equal capacitors, each of capacity C are

arranged as shown. The effective capacitance
tctween points A and B is
I AF

Be
2F
(a) 1 juF (b) 2 uF
C
(c) 3 uF (d) 4 uF
c
93. Four capacitors are connected a circuit as shown
(a) (b) 3 (d) C
8 5
in the figure. The effective capacitance in uF
between points A and B will b 98. There are 7 identical capacitors. The equivalent
capacitance when they are connected in series is C
2 uf 12 uF
The equivalent capacitance when they are connected
parallel is
C49
(a) (b) C7 (c) 7C (d) 49C
B
A
2 uF
a
99, The capacitance of parallel plate capacitor is 16 uF.
When a glass slab is placed between the plates, the
2 uF potential difference reduces to I/8th of the original
value. What is dielectric constant of glass?
28 (d) 32
fb) 4 (c) 5 (d) 18 (a) 4 (b) 8 (c) 16
 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vot.
124)
2ta

100. A parallel plate condenser with air between the 106. A parallel plate capacitor has plate separatiori d and
plates pxISsesses the capacity of 10 F. Now, the capacitance 25 uF. Ifa metallic foil of thickness d
plates are removed apart, so that the separation is
twice the original value. The space tetween the is introduced between the plates, the capacitance
plates is filled witth a material of dielectric constant would become
4.0. Then new value of the capacity is (in farad) (b) 35 uF
175
(a) 4x 1o-12 () 3x 10-!2
(a) 25 F (c) F
lc) 2x 10-12 ld) 0.5 x 10-12
107. The capacity and the energy stored in a charged
101. Three condensers each of capacity Cmicrofarad arce parallel plate condenser with air between its pates
are respectively. Co and W,. the air is replaced by
connected in series. An exactly similar set is f
connected in parallel to the fitst one. The effective glass (dielectric constant = 5) between the plates, the
capacity of the combination is 4 uF. Then, the value capacity of the plates and the energy stored in it will
of Cin nmicrofarad is respectively be
lal 8 (b) 6
5
(c) 4 d) 2 5 5

102. Three plates of comnon surface area A are 108. A slab of copper of thickness b is inserted in between
connected as shown. The effective capacitance the plates of parallel plate capacitor as slown in
between points Pand Qwill be figure. The separation of the plate is d. If b = d/2,
then the ratio of capacities of the capacitor after and
before inserting the slab will be

(a)
d 2 d
103. Eight drops of mercury of equal radii combine to
form a big drop. The capacitance of the biggerdrop
as compared to each smaller drop is
(a)
2:1 (b) 2: 1

(a) 2 tines (b) 8 ties (c) 4 times (d) 16 times (c) !:1 (d) I: V2

a
104. Consider parallel plate capacitor of capacity 10 F 109. A charged capacitor when filled with a dielectric
with air filled in the gap between the plates. Now. K=3 has charge Qo: voltage Vo andonefield Eo.If the
one-half of the space between the plates is filled dielectric is replaced with another having =9, K

with a diclectric of dielectric constant 4, as shown in the new values of charge voltage and field will be
the figure. The capacity of the capacitor changes to respectively
(a) 3Q, 3W
3Ep (b) Q
3Vo 3Ep
(c) Q

3
3
3
110. In the adjoining figure, four capacitors are shown
with their respective capacities and the potential
difference is applicd. The charge and the potential
difference across the 4 uF capacitor will be
20 uF
(a) 25 uF (b) 20 uF (c) 40 uF (d) 5 uF
105. A capacitor of capacity Cis connected with a battery
of potential V. The distance between its plates is V
300
reduced to balf. assurming that tihe battery remains
the sane. Then, the new energy given by the battery
will be
(a) CV²4 (b) CV²r2 12 uf

lc) 3CV²4 (a) 600 ;uC; 150 \ (b) 300 uC; 75 V

(d) C2
(c) 800 uC 200 \V (d) 580 C, 145 V
 (125
Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance

Two condensers and C, in a circuit are joined as

C
116. A dielectric slab of thickness d is inserted in a
shown in figure. The potential of point A is V, and parallel plate capacitor whose negative plate is at
that of B is V. The potential of point D will be x=0 atd positive plate is at x = 3d. The slab is
D
equidistarnt from the plates. The capacitot is given
HH some charge. As one goes from O to 3d
C fa) the magnitude of the electric field remains the sane
b) the dircction of thc clectric ficld remains the sarne
(b) (e)the electric poot ential increases continuously
G+ Cz
(d)the electric potential increases at first, then decreases
and again increases
G+G7 117. A 2 uF condenser is charged upto 200 V and then
112. Three capacitors of 2 uF. 3 uF and 6 uF are joined in battery is removed. On combining this with another
series and the combination is charged by means of a uncharged condenser in parallel, the potential
24 V battery. The potential difference between the differences betwccn two plates are found to be 40 V.
plates of the G uF capacitor is The capacity of second condenser is
(a) 4 V (b) 6 V (c) 8 V (d) 10 V (a) 2 uF (b) 4 uF
I13. the figure a potential of + 200 V is given to point
1 (c) 8uF 164F (d)
A and point B is carthed, what is the potential at the 118. Consider two conductors. One of them has a capacity
point P? of 2 units and the capacitv of the other is unknown.
They are charged until their potentials are 4 and 5
units respectively. The two conductors are now
3 uf connected by a wire when their common potential is
B
found to be 4.6 units. Then the unknown capacity has
the value (in the same units as above)
(a) 6 (b) 5
2
uF
(d) 3
(a)100 (b) 200V lc) 400 V (d) 800 V 119. Two capacitors 2 uF and 4 jaF are connected in
14. The charge on4uF capacitor in the given circuit is (inuC) parallel. A third capacitor of G uF capacity is
connected in series. The combination is connected
across a 12 V battery. The voltage across a
HE 2 uf
capacitor is
5 uF
HE
H

10V 4u
(a) 12 (b) 24 (c) 36 (d) 32
115. Four identical capacitors are
connected as shown in 12V
diagram. When a battery of 6 V is connected (a) 2V (b) 6V
between A and B, then the charge stored is (c) 8 V
found to
be 1.5 C The value of C, is 120. In the given circuit, if point bis connected to
earth
and a potential of 1200 V is given to a point a,
charge on 4
the
uF capacitor is

3 uF

•B
la) 2.5 4F la) 800 C (b)
(b) 15 uF (c) 1.5 uF (d) 0.1 1600 C
uF (c) 2400 uC (d) 3000 uC
 126 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

121. A circuit is shown in the given figure. Find out the 125. In the circuit shown in figure (. = 6f. The charge
charge on the condenser having capacity 5 uF. stored in the capacitor of capacity Cis

4 uF
(a) zerO (b) 90 uC
,6v
(ch 40 1C (d) 60 uC
(a) 4.5 uC (b) 9 uC (c) 7 uC (d) 30 j1C 126. In the circuit shown in figure. Charge stored in uF
G

122. A potentialofV= 3000V is applied to a conbination capacitor will be

of four initially uncharged capacitors as shown in the
figure. Capacitors A, B, Cand Dhave capacitances
CA =6.0 ut, Ca =5.2 uF, Cc = 1.5uF and
C, = 3.8 uF, respectively. If the battery is 4 LF
9V
disconnected, then potential difference acrass
capacitor B is (approximately)
12V

(a) 18 uC (b) 54uC

(c) 36 uC. (d) 72uC
127. In the given circuit, if point C is connected to the
earth and a potential of + 2000 V is given to the
point A, the potential at B is
(a) 300) V 530 V
(b) zerO (d) 350 V
(c)
10 uF 10 uF
123. Four capacitors are arranged as shown. All are initially
uncharged. A 30 V battery is placed acoss terminal
PQ to charge the capacitors and is then removed. The Ae
voltage across the terminals RS is then (in volt)

10 F

(a) 1500V (b) 1000V

(c) 500 V (d) 400 V
(a) 10 (b) 20 (c) 30 (d) 40 128. In given network capacitance C =10uF
tlhe
124.1f tlhe equivalent capacitance between points PandQ G, = 5uF and C, = 4uF. What is the resultant
of the combination the capacitors show in figure capacitarnce between A and B?
below is 30 uF, the capacitor (is A

20 a F

20 uF (a) 2.2 F (0) 3.2 uF

(a) 60 uF b) 30 uF (c) 10 uF (d) 5 uF tc) 1.2 uF (d) 4.7 uF
 :
Chapter 02 Electrostatic potential and capacitance 127

Two condensers one of capacity C and the other 133. Point charges + 49, -q and +4q are kept on the
capacity are connected to a V volt battery as X•axis at points x=0, x d
and x = 24, respectivcly.
=

Then,
shown. (a) Only -qis in stable equilibrium
(b) None of the charges arc in cquilibrium
The work done in charging fully both the condensers is
(c) All the charges are in unstatsle equilibrium
the charges ate in stable equilibrium
(d) All

134.Two splherical coductors of radii 4 cm and 5 cm are

Tc2 charged to the same potential. If a, and be s,
respective value of surface density charge on both
of
the conductors, then the ratio of o /s, will be
,

(o) 1/ 4CV² (e) 3/4CV2

(a) 2Cy2 d cv? (a)
16
25
(b)
25
10
lc)
4
5
5

130. In the circuit shown here C = 6uF. C, = JuF and 135.A holow charged metal sphere has radius r. If the
battery B = 20V. The switch S, is first closed. It is potential difference between its surface and a point
then opened and afterwards S, is closed. What is the at a distance 3r from the centre is V, then electric
charge finally on C,? field intensity at a distance 3r is
(b) 3
(c)
6r
136. Charge Q on a capacitor varies with voltage Vas
shown in the figure, where Q is taken along the
X-axis and Valong tlhe Yaxis. The arca of triangle
OAB represents
(a) 120sC (b) 80 uC (c) 40 uC (d) 20 u C

131. Consider the arrangement of three plates X. Yand Z

cach of area A and separation d. The energy stored
when the plates are fully charged is

(a) capacitance
(b) capacitive reactance
3EAV? (c) clectric ficld between the plates
(di
2d d 2d (d) energy stored in the capacitor
132. A light bulb, a capacitor and ahattery are connected 137. How many luF capacitors must be connected in
together as shown herc, with switch Sinitially open. parallel to store a charge of C with a potential of
1

When the switeh S is closed, tlhen wihich one of the 110 V across the capacitors?
following is true (a) 990 (tb) 900 fc) 909) (d) 909
138. In the figure below, the capacitance of each capacitor
is 3uF. The effective capacitance between points A
and B is

(a) the bulb will light up for an instant when the capacitor
starts charging
(b) the ulb will light up when the capacitor is fully charged
3
(c) the bulb will not light up at all (b) 3 uF
4
(d) the bulb will light up and go off at regular intervals
(c) 6uF (d) 5 uF
128 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

139. A 500 uF capacitor is charged at the steady rate of 145. Three charges -q,+Q and -q are placed in a straight
100uC/s How long will it take to raise the potentia! line as shown.
difference between the plates of the capacitor to
10 V?
(a) 5s (b) 10 s 50 s
(c) (d) 100 s
mass 1 g and charge 10
Cmoves from a
140. A ball
point A. where potential is 600 Vto the point B
Ifthe total potential energy of the system is zero,
where potential is zero. Velocity of the ballat the then the ratio
oint B is 20
point A willle
cs.The velocity of the ball at the
(a) 2 () 5.5
(c) 4 (d) 1.5
(a) 22.8 cms1 (b) 228 cms-!
(c) 16.8 ms-! (d) 168 ms! 146. The mutual electrostatic potential energy between
Iwo protons which are at a distance of 9x 10-1 In,
141.In the circuit shown in the figure, the potential nucleus is
in g,U
difference across the 4.5 uF capacitor is
fa) x 10 J
1.56
3uF (b) 5.5× 10-1"J
4.5 uF tc) 2.56x 10""J
(d) 4.56x 10-4J

147. Three capacitor of capacitance C (uF) are connected

parallel to which a capacitor of capacitance C is
12 V connected in series. Effective capacitance is 3.75,
then capacity of each capacitor is
(a) 4 uF (b) 5 uF
(a) (b) 4V (c) 6 uF (d) 8 uF

(c) 6V (d) 8V 148. Figure shows some equipotential lines distributed in

space. A charged object is moved from point A to
142. Three capacitors of capacitances I uF. 2 uF and 4uF
point B. [NCERT Exemplar]
are connected first in a series combination, and then
(a) The work done in Fig. (i) is the greatest
in parallel combination. The ratio of their equivalernt (b) The work done in Fig. (üi) is least
capacitances will be lc) The work done is the same in Fig. (i), Fig.(ii) and Fig. (ii)
(a) 2:49 (b) 49:2 (d) The work done in Fig. (ii) is greater than Fig. (ii) but
fc) 4:49 (d) 49:4 equal to that in
143. An electron moving with the speed 5 x 10" per/s is 40 V

shooted parallel to the electric field of intensity

1x 10NIC Field is responsible for the retardation of
motion of electron. Now evaiuate the distance travelled
by the electron before coming to rest for an instant
(mass of e =9x 10 kg, charge = 1.6x l0-" C)
(a) 7 m (b) 0,7 mm
V

10V 20 30V 40 V 50 V
V
10V 30V 50
(c) 7 cn (d) 0.7 cm Fig. (i) Fig. (ii)

144. The electric potential at a point (x, y. 2) is given by 301

V=-*'y - x? +4
The electric field E at that point is
(a) E +
=i2xy 2'}+jx'+ k3r'
(b) E i2xv + jtx' + y')+& Gxz-y')
(c) E xyz +
=i+j k' 10 V 20 V 40 V 50 V
Fig. (ii)
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance 129

The electrostatic potential on the surface of a centre of the dipole and the line joining the centre of
charged conducting sphere is l00V. Two statements the dipole to this point makes an angle 0 with the
are made in this regard S, at any point inside the axis of the dipole, then the potential at P is given by
sphere, electricintensity is zeto. S, at any point (f>> 2a) (where p = 2qa).
pcos 0 cos 0
inside the sphere, the ciectrostatic potential is 100 V. (a) (b) Vp
Which of te following is a correct statement? 4
nE
[NCERT Exemplar]
tal S is true but 5, is false
(b) Both S, and S, are false
{cl S is true, S, is also true and S, is the cause of S, 155. The electrostatic jotential ¢, of a spherical
(d) S, is truc, S, is also true but the statements are symmetrical system kept at origin, is shown in the
independent
150.Two conducting spheres of radii 3 cm and cm are
separated by a distance of 10 cm in frec space. IF the
spheres are charged to same potential of 10V cach,
1

, =r
adjacent figure, and given as
Ro)
then the force of repulsion between them is
(rs Ro)
2 10N
9 Ro
Which of the following option is
incorrect?
ta) For spherical region r sR, total clectrostatic energy
stored is zero
(b) With in r 2Ro. tota! charge is q'2
(c) Tere will be no charge anywhere except at r=R
151. Threc charges, cach +q. are (d) Elketric field is discontinuous at r = R
plaved at the cotners of an
156. An electric dipole of moment p placed in a uniforn
isosceles triangle ABC of sides
BC and AC, 2a. D and E are the electric field E has minimum potential energy when
mid-points of BCand CA. The the angle between p and E is
work done in taking a chargc Q C
(al zero (b) " (c) n
2 2
from D to Eis
zero 157. Electric charges of + 10 5uC, -3 C+ uC and
(a) (b) (c)
4nEA 8RE + 8 uC are placed at the corners of a square of side
V2 m, the potential at the centre of the square is
152. An clectric charge 10 C isplaced at the origin
(0, 0) of xycoorinate systenn. Two points A and B (a) 1.8 V (b) 1.8 x
10 v
0 V
are situated at (v2. V2) and (2, 0), respectively. The lc) 1.8x (d) 1.8x 10'V
potential difference between the points and B A
a charge Q itn the electric field
158. The displacenent of
will be + r = ai +tj.The work donc is
(a) 9V (b) zero (c) 2 V (d)
E= e,i+ezj e,k is
3.5V
(a) Qae, + le,)
153. Two identical thin rings cach of radius 10 cm
carrying charges 10Cand 5 C are coaxially placed at
a distance 10 cm apart. The work done in moving a
charge g from the centre of the first ring to that of
lct Q +
e) a'+b?
the second is
a)9 159. Two electric charges 12 uC and -6 uC are placed
20 cn apart in air. Tere will be a point Pon the
line joining these charges and outside the region
4 nE 4 REo between them, at which the electric potential is zero.
The distance of Pírom -6Ccharge is
154. Two equal charges q of opposite sign separated by a (a) 0.10 m (b) 0.15 m
distance 2a constitute an elcctric dipole of dipole (c) 0.20 m (d) 0.25 m
moment p. If P isa point at a distance r from the
130 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2
th

160. In the rectangle. shown below, 166. Eight small drops, each of radius r and having same
the two corners have charges charge q are combined to form a big drop. The ratio
=-5C and q, =+ 2.0 C.
q
5 cm between the potentials of the bigger drop and the
The work done in moving a Smaller drop is
charge + 3.0 u: from B to A is B' (a) 8:1 (b) 4:1
15 cm
(take l/4 REn = 10° N-m²c?) tc) 2:1 (d) I:8

(a) 2.8J (b) 3.5 J 167. Eight oil drops of same size are charged to a potcntial
(c) 4.5 J (d) 5.5 J of 50 V each. These oil drops are merged into one
161. Elcctric potential at any point is single large drop. What will be the potential of the
large drop?
V=-5x +3y +15, then the magnitude of the (a) 30 V (b) 100 V
clectric field is {c) 200 V
(d) 400V
la) 3V2 (b) 4/2 ic) 5v2 (d) 7
l68. Three charges ), (+ q) and (+ q) are placed at the
162. A thin spherical conducting shell of radius R has a
charge q. Another charge Q is placed at the centre of
vertices of an equilateral triangle. If the net
electrostatic energy of the system is zero, then is
the shell. The clectrostatic Jxotential at a point Pa
equal to
distance R/2 from the centre of the shell is (a) (-q/2) (b) -q
(b) 2Q (c) + q (d) zero
4rE R
4nER
169. Consider a system composed of two metallic spheres
20 2q
(d) 2Q of radii r, and r, connccted by a thin wire and switch
4nE,R 4zcR 4neR 4ncR Sas shown in the figure. Initially Sis in open
163. In the given circuit, a charge of +
80 uC is given to position, and the spheres carry charges q, and 42
the upper plate of the aF capacitor. Then, in the
4 respectively. If the switch is losed, the potential of
steady state, the charge on the upper plate of the the system is
3 uF capacitor is

2
uF 3uF
a
(b)

(e),2| (d
(a) + 32 uC (b) + 40 uC 4RE)
(c) + 48uC (d) +
80C 170. Separation between the plates of a parallel plate
164. Capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor becomes capacitor is d and the area of each plate is A. When
4/3times its original valuc, if a diclectric slatb of a
slab of material of dielectric constant K and
thickness ( = d/2 is inserted between the plates (d is thickness rlt < d) is introduced between the plates, its
the separation between the plates). The dielectric capacitance becomes
constant of the slab is
(a) 8 (al (b
(b) 4
fc) 6 (d) 2
165. Point charge q
=2 uCand q, = -lpCare kept at
points x= andx6respectively. Electrical
0 (d)
potential will be zero at points
(a) x=2 and x a9
(b) xl and 171. The distance between the circular plates of a
x=5 parallel
(c) x = 4 and x 12 plate condenser 40 mm in diameter, in order to
(d) same capacity as a sphere of radius I m is have
x=-2 and x=2
(a) 0.01 mm (b) 0.1 mm
{c) 1.0 mm (d) 10 mm
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance 131

The expression for the capacity of the capacitor 176. Three equal capacitors, each with capacitance Care
formed by compound dielectric placed between the connected as shown in figure. Then the equivalent
plates of a parallel plate capacitor as shown in figure, capacitance between point A and B is

will be (area of plate = A)

(a) C (b) 3C
K 3 2
177. 1fa slal of insulating material 10 4 x m thick is

introduced between the plates of a parallel plate

capacitor, the separation between plates has to be
increased by 3.5 x 10 mto restore the capacity to
CA
(b) original valuc. The dielectric constant of the material
(K, + K, + K,. will be
(a) 6 (b) 8 (c) 10 (d) 12
tc) SoKKKy) 178. In this figure the equivalent capacitance between A
ddd, d, d, d, and B will be
173. The cquivalent capacitance between A and B willbe

AHCH2C44C48CH-B
A -
(a) 2 G (b)
2
2
(c) 3C (d)

174. Four plates of equal area A are separated by equal (a) (c) 3C (d) 2C
distances dand are arranged as shown in the figure. 2 3
The equivalent capacity is 179. In the connections shown in the adjoining figure, the
equivalent capacity between points A and B will be
B

12 pf
Ae
9 uf
24 JafF

2co (b

d
uf 18

d d 10.8 F
(a) 69 uF
(b) (c) 15 uF (d) 10 uF

175. Four plates of the same area of croS5-section are 180. The resultant capacitarnce of given circuit between
joined as shown in the figure. The distance between points Pand Q is
across A and
each plate is d. The equivalent capacity
Bwill be
2C 20

(a) (b) 3eA

(b) 2C (c) C
d 2d d (a) 3C
 132) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2setirlt

181. What is the cffective capacitance between points A 185. The cquivalent capacitance between the points A
and B in the given figure? and Cis given by

) 2 uF 2 ul B,

6C

(a) I aF (b) 2 uF
I.5 uF (d) 2.5 jF 10C
182. In the figure a capacilor is filed with dielectrics. The c
(a () 15C (d) 20C
resultant capacilatnce is 3 10

AT Ar2
186.Potential difference between two points (VA -V) in
an electric ficlkt E = (2i - 4j) N/C, where
K

A= (0, 0) and B 3 m.
4 m) is
(a) 10 V -10 V
(b) (c) 16 (d)-16
V

187. A and Bare two thin concentric hollow conductors

having radii aand 2a and charge 2Q and Q.
(a) respectively. If patential of outer sphere is 5 V, then
potential of inner sphere is
(d) None of these (a) 20 V (b) 10 25

183. Four netallic plates each with a surface area of one 188.A spherical conductor of radius 2 m is charged to a
side A are placed at a distance d from each other. potential of 120 V. It is now placed inside another
The plates are connected as shown in the circuit hollow spherical conductor of radius 6 11. Calculate
diagram. Then the capacitance of the system the potential of bigger sphere, if the smaller sphere is
tetween points and bis made to touch the bigger sphere
la) 120 V (b) 60 V (c) 80 V (d) 40 V
189. In Millikan's oil drop cxperiment, an oil
irop
carrying a charge Qis held stationary by a potential
difference 240) V belwee the plates. To
keep a
drop of half the radius stationary, the potential
difference had to be nade 600 V. What
on the second drop is the charge
(a)
d d
26,A
(a)
24 {c) Q
(d) 2 2
3d 2d 190.There are four concentric shells A, B,
184. The equivalent capacitance between Cand D of
points A and B radii a, 2a, 3a and 4a, Tespectively. Shells B
in the circuit will be and Dare
given charges +q and -4. respectively. Shell
earthed. The potential difference Cis now
1
V
-V; is

take, K

Kq
24 (d)
191.A solid conducting sphere having a
charge Q is
(a) 10/3 uF
(b) 4
surrounded lby an uncharged concentric
uf
hollow spherical shell. Let conducting
fc) GaF the potential difference
(d) 8uF between the surface of the solid
sphere and that of
the outer surface of the hollow shell
be V.
 133
Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance

if the shell is now given a charge of -3Q, hen the new The capacitance of the systen will now be
potentia! difference between the sane two surface is
a) V (b) 2V (c) 4V (d) -2V
A point charge q is placed at a Conductor
distance rfrom the centre O
of

an uncharged spherical shell of

inner radius R and outer radius uF
(a) 10 (b) 20 uF (c) 30 uF (d) 40 uF
2R. The distance r<R. The
196. The capacities and connection of five capacitors are
electric potential at the centre of 2R
shown in the adjoining figure. The potential
the shell will be difference between the points A and B is 60 V.
(a) (b)
9 Then, the equivalent capacity between A and B and
4nE,r the charge on 5 uF capacitance will be respectively

-) 5 aF 9 ufF

193. A hollow sphere of radius r is put inside another

12 ul
HHHHHHA
10
F
hollow sphere of radius R. The charges on the two
are +Q and -q as shown in the figure. A point P is
located at a distance x from the common centre such
that r< x<R. The potential at the point P is
(a) 44 uF, 300 1C (b) 16 uF. 150 uC
(c) 15 uf, 200 uC (d) 4 uf, 50 uC

197. A charge +Q is uniformly distributed over a thin ring

of the radius R. The velocity of an electron at the
monent when it passes through the centre O of the
ring, if the electron was initially at far away on the
axis of the ring is (m = mass of clectron, & =
4nE0
(a) (b) (a 2KQe KQe Kme KQe
mR m QR mR
1_(2 (d)
198. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance Cis
4nE,R
connected to a battery and is charged to a potential
194.Three plates A, B, C each of area 50 cm have difference V. Another capacitor of capacitance 2C
separation 3 mm between A and B and 3 mm is connected to another battery and is charged to
between Band C. The energy stored when the plates potential difference 2V. The charging batteries are
are fully charged is now disconnected and the capacitors are connected
in parallcl to cach other in such a way that the
positive terminal of one is connected 1o the
negative terminal of the other. The final energy of
C 12 the configuration is
(a) zero (b
25CV² 9Cv²
2 2
(a)
10J
1.6x (b) 2.1x
1oJ 199. a
Condenser A has capacity of 15 uF when it is filled
(c) 5x
10J (d) 7x 10J a constant
with medium of dielectric 15. Another
195. A parallel plate capacitor with air as medium condenser B has a capacity of l uF with air between
between the plates has a capacitance of 10 uF. The the plates. Both are charged separately by a battery of
area of capacitor is divided into two equal halves and 100 V. After charging, both are connected in parallel
filled with two media as shown in the figure having without the battery and the dielectric medium bning
dielectric constant K, = 2 and K, = 4. removed. The common potential
w
is
(a) 40V (b) 800 V tc) 1200 V (d) 160X) V
134) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

200. In the given circuit if point Cis connected to the 204. A capacitor of 4 uF is 4 uF 102
earth and a potential of +2000 V is given to the point
A, the pxitential at B is
as
connected shown in the Hw
circuit. The internal resistance
10 uf
of the battery is 0.5 2. The V
2.5
HH amount of charge on the w

C capacitor plates will be

A
B
[NCERT Exemplar]
(a) 0 (c) 16uC (d) 8 uC
10 F 205. A parallel plate capacitor is made of two dielectric
blocks in series. One of the blocks has thickness d,
and dielectric constant K, and the other has
la) 1500V (b) 1000 V (c) 500
400 V V (d) thickness d, and dielectric constant K, as shown in
201. A network of four capacitors of capacity equal to figure. This arrangement can be thought as a
C =C.C, = 2C. aC, = 3Casand C, = 4C are dielectric slab of thickness d (= d, + d,) and
connected to in battery shown in the figure. The effective diclectric constant K. The K is
(NCERT Exemplar)
ratio of the charges on C, and C, is
G-2C

G-3C:
G- 4C

2K; K,

(K, d, + Kzd4) K, + K,
3
3 22 206. A number of condensers, each of the capacitance 1 uF
(c)
7 4
and each one of which gets punctured if a potential
7 difference just exceeding 500 V is applied, are
202. Figure shows three spherical and equipotential provided. An arrangement suitable for giving
surfaces AB and C round a point charge q. The capacitance of 2 uF across which 3000 V may be
potential ifference VA Vy =V -Vc.Il and i, applied requires at least
be the distances between them, then (a) 6 component capacitors () 12 compeonent capacitors
(ch 72 component capacitors (d) 2 component capacitors
207. A series conmbination of n, cajpacitors, each of value
G, is carged by a source of potential difference 4V.
When another parallel combination of n, capacitors,
each of value C,. is charged by a source of potential
difference V, it has the same (total) energy stored in
it, as the first combination has. The value of C,, in
terms of C, is, then
(b) , >2 (a) 2C; (b) 162c; (c) 2"2G
(c) <: n

203. A charged oil drop of mass 2.5x 10- kg is in space 208. Two charges + 6uC
and- 4 uC are placed 15 cm
between the two plates, each of area 2x 10- of a m
apart as shown. At what distances from A to its
parallel plate capacitor. When the upper plate has a right, the electrostatic potential is zero (distances
charge of 5x 10" C and the lower plate has an equal in cm)
negative charge, then the oil remains stationary. The
charge of the oil drop is (take, g = 10 m/s²) +6x 10C -4» 10c
-15 cn
(al 9x 10c (b) 9x 1oC (a) 4,9, 60 (b) 9, 45, infinity
tc) 8.85x 10 c (d} 1.8x 10"C (c) 20, 45, infinity (d) 9, 15, 45
 135
Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance

203. Assume that an clectric ficld E =30xi exists in 215. The resultant capacitance between A and B in the
following figure is equal to
Fpace. Then, the potential difference V
-Vo. where
)'o is the potential at the origin and V, is the 3 uF 3 Lf 3 uf
otential at x = 2 m is
(a) 120 V (b) - 120V
80 V (c)
(d) 80 V
-

210. An electron initially at rest falls a distance of 1.5 cm

in a uniform electric field of magnitude 2 x 10 N/C. 2 aF 2 uF JuF

211.
The time taken by the electron to fall this distance is
(a)

lc)
I.3 x

1.6x 10"
10 s

s
(b) 2.! x 10
(d) 2.9 x

A long. hollow conducting cylinder is kept coaxially

10; 3 uF
LLJ 3 uf 3 ut

(a) l uF (b) 3 uF fc) 2 F (d) 1.5 uF

inside another long, hollow conducting cylinder of
216. In the following circuit, the resultant capacitance
larger radius. Both the cylinders are initially between and B is I uF. The value of Cis
A

electrically neutral.
(al A pxxential differeIce appears between the two cylinders H
when a charge density is given to the iner cylinder A

(b) A potential difference appears between the two 8 uf

cylinders when a charge density is given to the outer
cylitder
(c) No potentialdifference appears betwen the two
cylinders when a uniforn line charge is kept along the 2 uF

axis of the cylinders B•

(d) No potential difference appears between the two
cylinders when same charge density is given to both 32, (b 23, td)F
32
(a F lc
23
the cylinders
217. A small conducting sphere of ralius r is lying
212. The potential at a point x (measured in jum) due to
some charges situated on the X•axis is given by concentrically inside a bigger hollow conducting
20 sphere of radius R. The bigger and smaller spheres
are charged with Qand q{Q>q) and are insulated
volts. The clectric ficld E at
x=4 um
(x?-4) from each other. The potential difference betwcen
is given by the spheres will be
la) 5/3 volt/um and in the negative xdirection
{b) 5/3 volt/um and in the positive r-direction 4nE, R
(c) 10/9 volt/um and in
(d) 10/9 volt/um arnd in
the negative x-ditection
the positive x-direction (c)
1

R
(d -8)
4E,r 4nL)
213. Three charge Q, +q and tq 218. A parallel plate air capacitor has a
are placed at the vertices of a
capacitance C When it is half filled
right anglcd isasceles triangle with a dielectric of dielectric constant
as sown. The net electrostatic then the percentage increase in the
energy of the configuration is capacitance will be
zero, if Q is equal to (a) 400 (b) 66.6%
(c) 33.3% (d) 200%
lal (c) -2 (d) +q
I4 2 2+ 2 219.Charge Q is uniformly distributed on a dielectric rod
AB of leng 21. The potential at P shown in the
214. Four point charges cach +q is placed on the
figure is equal to
circumference of a circle of dianeter 2d in such a
way that they form a square. The potential at the B

centre is
2
(a) 0 (b)
9 -In 2
d (a)
4d 4ne, 2/) 4ne,)
(c) (d) 4.
4d (c) In 3 (d) None of these
4TE, (2/)
136) 0BJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

220.The arc AB with the centre Cand the infinitely long

wire having linear charge density ). are lying in the
same plane. The minimum amount of work to be
done to move a point charge qo from point A to B
through a circular path AB of radius a is cqual to

1. |Q,|>|,1
2a 2. Q, is positive in nature
A
and B are equilibrium points
4. Cis a point of unstable equilibriun
n Which of the above statements are correct?
2neo (a) 1
and 2 {o) 1, 2 and 3
4
(c) 1,2 and (d) 1, 2, 3 and 4
(d) None of these
224.Seven capacitors cach of capacity 2 uF are to be sa
221.Two charges q and q, are placed 30 cm apart, as connected to have a total capacity (10/11) uF. Which
will be the necessary figure as shown?
shown in figure. A third charge q, is moved along
the arc of a circle of radius 40 cm from C to D. The
change in the potential energy of the systen is HH (b) HHH
43_K.where Kis

(c)
HHHH- (d)

225. A solid conducting sphere of

radius a having a charge q is
30 cm B
D
10 cm surrounded by a concentric
conducting spherical shell of
(a) 8q2 (b) 8 inner radius 2a and outer
(c) 642 (d)
6q radius 3a as shown in figure. Sal
222. Three identical metallic uncharged spheres A, B and Find the amount of heat
Cof radius a are kept on the corners of an equilateral produced when switch is closed
triangle of side dd >>a). A fourth sphere (radius a) K=
which has charge Q touches and is then removed
A

to a position for away. B is earthed and then the Ka'

(b)
earth connection is removed. Cis then earthed. The 2a 3a
charge on Cis
(2d
(a)2d 4a
226. Three identical charges are.placed at corners of an
(d) equilateral triangle of side If force between any
two charges is F, then the work required to double
223. The curve represents the distribution of potential the dimensions of triangle is
along the straight line joining the two charges Q, and (a) -3F1 (b) 3FZ
Q (separated by a distance ri, then which is of the
following statements are correct?
 137
Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance

Two capacitors C and lal EAV2E,AV

C = 2C are connected in a
d d d d
circuit with a switch between (c) So1V-2eAV (d) -EAV.2cAV
them as shown in the figure. S

d d d d
Initially the switch is open and R
In
229. the figure shown, what is the potential difference
C, holds charge Q. The switch
is closed. At steady state, the G• 2C between the points and Band between B and C
A

respectively in steady state?

charge on each capacitor will
be
B
la) Q, 2Q (b) Q4 20/3
(c) 3Q2. 3Q (d) 2Q3 4Q3 3 aF IaF
228. Five identical plates each of area A are joined as
shown in the figure. The distance between the plates
is d. The plates are connected to a potential difference
102
of V volt. The charge on plates 1l and 4 will be
20 100 V

(a) Va8 =Vc = 100 V

=
(b) Vn 75 V.Vac
=25 V
(c) VAn = 25 V, Vc = 75 V
(d) Van =VpG = 50 V

B.) Medical entrance special format questions

Assertion and reason 3. Assertion Circuit containing capacitors should te
Directions (). Nos. 1-16) These questions consist of two handled cautiously even when there is no current.
statements each linked as A ssertion and Reason. While Reason The capacitors are very delicate and so
answering these questions you are required to choose any quickly breakdown.
one of the following
fve respxses 4. Assertion When two positive point charges move
(a) If both Assertiun and Reason are true and Reason is the away from cach other, then their electrostatic
correct explanation of Assertion. potential energy decrcases.
(b) If both Assertion and Rcason are true but Reason is not
correct explarnation of Assertion. Reason Change in potential energy between two
(c) If Assertion is true but Reason is points is equal to the work done by electrostatic
falsc.
(d) If Assertion is false but Reason forces.
is truc.
(e) If both Assertion and Reason are
false. 5. Assertion When two charged spheres are
1, Assertion Due to two point charges electric field connected to each other by a thin conducting wire,
and clectric potential can't be zero at some charge flow fron bigger sphere to smaller sphere, if
point initial charges on then are same.
simultanevusly.
Reason Field is a vector quantity and potential a Reason Electrostatic potential energy will
be lost in
scalar quantity. redistribution of charges.
2. Assertion Conductor having cqual positive 6. Assertion For a non-uniformly charged
charge thin
and volume, must also have same potential. circular ring with net charge zero, the electric field
at any point on axis of the ring is zero.
Reason Potential depends only an charge
and Reason For a non-uniformly charged thin circular
volune of conductor. ring with net charge zero, the electric potential at
each point on axis of the ring is zero.
138) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol.
2tuu 3 t

7. Assertion Five charges +q each are placed at five 15. Assertion A and B are two conducting spheres of
same radius. A bcing solid and B hollow. Both are
vertices of a regular pentagon. A sixth charge -Q is
placed at the centre of pentagorn. Then., net charged to the same potential. Then, charge on
electrostatic force on -Q is zero.
A= charge on B.
Reason Potentials on both are sarnc.
Reason Net electrostatic potential at the centre is
Zero.
16. Assertion Two concentric spberical shells A and B
are charged by charges q4 and qy. If 4a is negative,
then V - V, is also negative.
8. Assertion A charged capacitor is disconnected
from a battery. Now, if its plate are separated
further. the potential energy will fall.
to
Reason Energy stored in a capacitor is equal
the work done in charging it.
a
9. Assertion When a capacitor is charged by
battery, half of the energy supplied by the battery
is stored in the capacitor and rest half is lost.
Reason I resistance in the circuit is zero, then B
therc will te no loss of energy.
10. Assertion When a netallic plate is partially
Reason Va -V, =4
inserted between the plates of a capacitor its -V, is also
capacity increases.
Therefore, if qa is negative, then V
negative.
Reason If conductivity of conducting plate is
more, then increase in capacity will be more.
Match the columns
11. Assertion If the distance between parallel plates 1.
r.
Two charges +q and -g are placed at distance Match
of a capacitor is halved and dielectric constant
is

2l the following two columns when distance between

made three times, then the capacitance becones
them is changed to r'.
6 times.
upon Column Il
Reason Capacity of the capacitor depends Column I

the nature of the material between the plates. A. r'e 2r (p) Potential energy will beçome hal!
figure
12. Assertion Spherical shell A in the shown B Force between them will becone -th
4
+q. When
has a charge -q and shell B has charge timnes
Potential energy will become four
thesc two are connected by thin conducting wire,
a C. r 4r (r
energy
then whole of the clectrostatic potential D.
s
Nonc
stored between the shell is lost.
to
Reason Whole of the inner charge will transfer 2. A cajpacitor is connected with
a battery. With battery

outer shell B. some changes are done in

remains connected 1.
capacitor/battery, which are given in Column
in an
13. Assertion When dielectric is placed
a
the dielectric Corresponding to it match the two columns.
electric field, the electric field with
as well as. Potential difference across the capacitor Column !
Column
a (battery is not
plates are reduced by factor K A. Distance betwcen capacitor (p) Capacity
of capcitor will
connected). plates is halved becotne two times
of the (harge stored in capacitor
Reason The dielectric constant the ratio
(q)
B. A metallic slah is half
to the will become two times
absolute permittivity of the dielectric filled between the plates

permittivity of the free space. C. A dielectric slab of r) Energv stored in capacitor

dielectric constant K= 2
is will beome two times
a charge
14. Assertion No work is done in moving completely filled between
along equatorial line, zero
the plates
Capacitance become infinite
Reason The electric potential is everywhere
(s)

a
on the equatorial line of dipole.
 Chapter 02 Electrostatic potential and capacitance (139

parallel plate capacitor is charged by a battery

which is then disconnccted. A diclectric slab is then
The potential difference across the plates is 3000 V.
When a 0.01 m thick dielectric sheet is introduced
inserted to fill the space between the plates. Match
between the plates, then the potential difference
the changes that could occur with Colun II. decreases to 1000 V. Now, match the two columns
Column
I

(all in SI urnits).
Column I
A. Chage on the capacitor (p) Decrease by a factor of K Column l Column Il
plates
A. Capscitace of air-filled capacitor
B. Intensity of electric field
(pl 5.31x 107
q) Increase by a factor of K
B. Chatge on each plate (q) 5.31
x
10 10
C. Energy stored (r) Remains sane
Capacitance
(C.Dielectric constant of the material (r 3
D. (s) None
D. Capacitasce after the dielectric (sl 1.77x 10-10
4. The area of parallel plates of an air-filled capacitor is sheet is introduced
0.20 m´ and the distance between the is 0.01 m.

Medical entrances' gallery

(Collection of questions asked in NEET & various medical entrance exams)
1. A capacitor of 2uFis charged as shown in the figure. 3. A parallel plate air capacitor of capacitance C is
When the switch Sis turned to pxosition 2, the connected to a cell of emf V and then disconnected
percentage of its stored energy dissipated is (NEET 2016] from il. A diclectric slab of dielcctric constant K,
which can just fill the air gap of the capacitor, is now
inserted in it. Which of the following is incorrect?
(CBSE AIPMT 2015]
(a) The potential difference between the plates decreases
ZuF+
Tauf K times
(b) The energy stored in the capacitor decreases K tines
The change in energy stored is
(a) 20% (b) 75% (c) 80% (d) (%
v-)
A parallel plate capacitor of area A, plate separation d
(d)The charge on the capacitor is not conserved
and capacitance C is filled with four dielectric 4. Calculate the charge on equivalent capacitance of the
materials having diclectric constants K,K, K, and combination shown in figure between the points P
K, as shown in the figure below. If a single and N. (UK PMT 2015]
dielectric material is to be used to have the same
capacitance C in this capacitor, then its dielectric P
constant Kis given by [NEET 2016)
+20 juF
30 F

(a) 450 1C (b) 225 C (c) 350 y1C (d) 900 C

5. An isolated sphere has a capacitance of 50 pfF. What
would be the radius of the sphere? [UK PMT 2015]
(a) 90 cn (b) 45 cm
(a) K=K + K, + Ky + 3K4 (c) 11.30 cm (d) 5.75 cm
K= + K, + K}) + 2K, 6. A parallel plate capacitor has 91 plates, all are
) identical and arranged with same spacing between
2 3
(c) them. If the capacitance between adjacent plates is
3 pF. What will be the resultant capacitance?
[EAMCET 2015|
la) 273 pF (b) 30 pF
(c) 94 pF
(d) 270 pF
140) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vot. 2

7. A particle of mass 1.96x 10- kg is kept in 13. A parallel plate capacitor is charged and then
cquilibrium between two horizontal metal plates isolated. The effect of increasing the plate separation
having potential difference of 400 V separated apart on charge, potential and capacitance respectively are
IKCET 2015)
by 0.02 m. Then, the charge on the particle is
le = electronic chargc) (Kerala CEE 2015)
(a) constant, decreases, incrcascs
(d)
(b) constant, decreases, decreases
(a) 3e (b) 6e (c) 2e 5e
(c) constant, increases, decreases
(e) 4 e
(d) increascs, decreascs, decreases
8. The distance of the closest approach of an alpha
particle fired at a nucleus with kinetic energy Kis 14. A spherical shell of radius 10 cm is carrying a charge
q. If the electric potential at distances 5 cm, 10 cm
o. The distance of the closest approach when the a
particle is fired at the same nucleus with kinetic and 15 cm frorm thc centre of the spherical shell is
energy 2K will be V,. Vy and V,respectively, then [(KCET 2015]
(Guj. CET 2015]
(a) V=V, >V,
(a) 4 ra (tb) (d) 2r (c)Ví=V,<V, (d) Vý<V,<V,
2
15. An electron of mass M,, initially al rest, moves
9. A uniform electric field is through a certain distance i a uniforu clectric field
created between two in time t,. A proton of mass M, also intially at rest,
parallel charged plates as takes tinne t, to move througla an equal distance in
shown below. An electron
enters the fielkd symmetrically between the plates this unilom electric field. Negleccting the eflect of
with a speed of vo. The length of cach plate is
. gravity, the ratio l, /4, is nearly equal to {AIMS 2015}!
Find the angle of deviation of path of the electron as (a) 1 (b
it comes out of the field. |CG PMT 2015)

(b) 0 = tan |M,

mu; mv tc)

(c} 0 =tan-/ eEl (d) O = tan

eE
16. Consider the diagram,
m6.
VBattery)
10. A battery charges a parallel plate capacitor separated ielectric
by distance (d) so that the energy (V, ) is stored in the L
system. A slab of dielectric constant (K) and
thickness (d) is then introduced between the plates of A parallel plate capacitor has the plate width t and
capacitor. The new energy of the system is given by length L while the separation between the plates is d.
(CG PMT 2015)
The capacitor is connected to a battery of voltage
ta) KV, (b) K*V rating V. A dielectricwhich carefully oceupy, the
K
space bet ween the plates of the capacitor is slowly
11. A capacitor of capacitance 100 uf is charged by inserted between the plates. Wihen length xof the
connecting it to a battery of voltage 12 V with dielectric slab is introduced into the capacitor, then
energy stored in the system is (UP CPMT 2015|
internal resistance 22. The time after which 99 of
the maximum charge is stored on the capacitor is (b L[x+ 1]
[UP CPMT 2015] 2d 2d
(a) 0.92 ms (b) 0.72 ms (c) 0.34 ms (d) 0.54 ms

12. An infinite numter of identical capacitors cach of 2d 24'

capacitance uF are connected as in adjoint figure.
1
17. A conducting sphere of radius R is given a charge Q.
Then, the equivalent capacitance between A and Bis The clectric potential and the clectric field at the
HE (UP CPMT 2015) centre of the sphere respectively are
- (CBSE AIPMT 2014]
A
B
{a) zero and Q
(b) zerO
4ne, R 4nL,R and
Q Q
{c) (d) Both are zero
(a) l uF (b)2 uF (d) oo
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance 141

.
. T'wo concentricspheres kept in air have radii R and
They have similar charge and cqual surface charge
26. In the given figure, the capacitors C,C,G, and C;
have a capacitance 4 uf each. If the capacitor G, has
density o. The electrical potential at their common a capacitance 10 uF, then effective capacitance
centre is (where, = permittivity of free space) between A and B will be (UK PMT 2014)
[MHT CET 2014)
a R+ r)
(al (b)
oR-r)

aR+r) a R+ r) B

2E 4E

19. Two charges of equal magnitude q are placed in air

at a distance 2a apart and third charge - 2g is placed
at mid-point. The potential energy of the system is la) 2 uF (b) 4 juF
(where, Eo = permittivity of free space) fc) 6 uF (d) 8 uF
(MHT CET 2014) 27. A, B and C are three points in a uniform electric
(a) (d) field. The electric potential is (NEET 2013)
8REa 8nEa

,
20. Consider two concentric spherical metal shells of
radii r, and r, > r,). If the outer shell has a charge
q and the inner one is grounded, then the charge on
B

the inner shell is [WB JEE 2014)

(a) maximum at A
(b) zero te) (d) -q (b) maximum atB
(c) maximum at C
21. What is the electric potential at a distance of 9 cm (d) samc at all the three points A, B and C
from 3 nC? (KCET 2014]| 28. Two thin dielectric slabs of
(a) 270 V (b) 3 V
dielectric constants K, and
(c) 300 V (d) 30 V Ky. K,< K,) are inserted
22. hollow sphere of radius 0.1 m has a charge of
A between the plates of a parallel
5x 10 C. The potential at a distance of 5 cm from plate capacitor, as shown in the
the centre of the sphere is figure alongside. The variation
of electric field E between the
c plates with distance das
-=9x 10 Nn²
measured from plate P is correctly shown by
U&K CET 2013]
[CBSE AIPMT 2014)
(a) 4000V (b} 45000 V (c) 5000V (d) 6000V
23. Three capacitors 3 uF, 6 F and 6 uF are connected
in series to a source of 120 V. The potential
(a) (b)
difference in volt, across the 3 uF capacitor will be
[WD JEE 2014]
(a) 24 V 30 V (b)
lc) 40 V (d) 60 V
24. The capacitance of two concentric spherical shells of
radi R and R,R, > R) is (EAMCET 2014)
(a) 4nE,Rz (R, - R) (c)
E
(d

(c) 4nEo (d) 4rER,

R,
-R) -

25. Two capacitors of 10 pF and 20 pF are connected to 29. Two identical capacitors are first connected in series
200 V and 100 V sources, respectively. If and then in parallel. The ratio of equivalent
they are
connected by the wire, then what is the common capacitance is
otential of the capacitors? U&K CET 2013]
(KCET 2014) (a) l:1 (b) 1:2
(a) 133.3V (b) 130 V
{c) 300 V (c)
(d) 400 V l:3 (d) l:4
142) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vo. 2

30. Two capacitors having capacitances C, and C2 are 36. A sphere of 4 cm radius is suspended with in a
charged with 120 V and 200 V batteries hollow sphere of 6 cm radius. Il the inner sphere is
respectively. When they are connected in parallel charged to a otential 3 esu while the outer sphere is
now, it is found that the potential on each one of earthed, then the charge on the inner sphere will be
[UP CPMT 2013]
them is zero. Then, (EAMCET 2013)
(a) 5 C,=3 C, (b) 8 C = 5C; (a) - csu (b) 30 csu
(c) 9G = 5Cz (d) 3 C = 5C;
(c) 36 esti (d) 54 esu
31. A smalloil drop of mass 10 kg is hanging in at rest In
37. the adjoining figure, the potential difference
between two plates separated by l mm having a across the 4.5 uF capacitor is IUP CPMT 2013)
potential difference of 500 V. The charge on the
drop is (g = 10 ms) [Karnataka CET 2013] 3 uF
(a) 2x 10C tb) 2x 10-" c
(c) 2 x
10C (d) 2 x 10 :

32. Two metal spheres of radii 0.01 m and 0.02 m are

given a charge of 15 m. and 45 mC, respectively.
(d) 4.5 V
They are then connected by a wire. The final charge (a) (b) 6 V
4
(c) 8 V
on the first sphere is ... x 10
"C [Karnataka CET 2013] 38. The equivalent capacity between points A and Bin
(a) 40 (b) 30 figure will be, while capacitance of each capacitor is
(c) 20 (d) 10 3 uF. [UP CPMT 2012)

33. The concentric spheres of radiiR and r have positive

charges q, and qz with cqual surface charge densities.
What is the clectric potential at their comuon centre?
(Karnataka (CET 2013)

(a)R+ r) (b) (R -r) (a) 2 uF (b) 4 uF

Eg
(c) 7uF 9 uF
(d)

39. In the arrangement of capacitors shown in figure,

each capacitor is of 9 uF, then the cquivalent
capacitance between the points A and B is
34. See the diagram, area of each plate is 2.0 m² and [UP CPMT 2012]
d = 2x 10 m. A
charge of 8.85x 10-*Cis given to
Q. Then, the potential of Q txecones
(Karnataka CET 2013)
H

(a) 9 uF (b) 18 uF
(c) 4.5 ufF (d) 15 uF

40. The cquivalent capacitance between points A and B

will be [BCECE (Mains) 2012)
(a) 13 V (b) 10 V
6.67V
(c) (d) 8.825 V

35. A soap bubble is charged to a potential 12 V. If its

9 uF 24 uF
radius is doubled, then the potential of the bubble
becomes (Kerala CET 2013)
18 uf
(a) 12 V (b) 24 V
(c) 3 V (d) 6V (a) 10 uF (b) 15 uF
(e) 9 V (c) 10.8 uF (d) 69 uF
 Chapter 02: ElectroStatic potential and Capacit

Four metallic plates cach 46. The potential of a large liquid drop when eight liquid
with a surface area of one drops are combined is 20 V. Then, the potential of
side A are placed at a X
each single drop was (Manipal 2012]
distance d from each other (al 10 V (b) 7.5 V
as shown in figure. Then, (c) 5 V (d) 2.5 V
the capacitance of the 47. The electric field in a certain region is given by
system between X and Y is E=5i -3j kV/m. The potential difference Vg -V
BCECE (Mains) 2012)
between points A and B, having coordinates
la) 2Ey4 2 EA
b) (4,0, 3) m and (10, 3, 0) m respectively, is equal to
d 3d 2d [AMU2012]
42. Four capacitos each capacity
of 8 uF are connected (a) 21 kV (b) - 21 kV
shown in figure. The equivalent 39 kV
(c) (d)-39 kV
with each other
capacitarnce between points X and Y will be (BHU 2012) 48. In parallel plate capacitor with plate area A and
a
charge Q, the force on one plate because of the
charge on the other is equal to [AMU 2012]

Q² (d)
(a) (b)
2 EgA
EA
49. Two capacitors 3 uF and 4 ufF, are individually
uF
(a) 2 (b) 8 uF (c) 16 F (d) 32 aF charged across a 6V battery. After being
43. Four point charges -Q. -q. 2q and 2Q are placed. disconnected from the battery, they are connected
one at each corner of the square. The relation together with the negative plate of one attached to
the positive plate of the other. What is the final total
between Qand q for which the potential at the energy stored |AMU 2012)
centre of the square is zero, is (CBSE AIPMT 2012)
2.57x 10
(al l.26x 10-J (b)

(a) Q=-q (b)Q=- te)Q=q x (d) 2.57 x 10°J

(c) 1.26 10J
B for the
44. A spherical drop of capacitance uF is broken into
1
50. The equivalent capacitance between A and
conbination of capacitors shown in figure, whcre all
eight drops of equal radius. Then, the capacitance of capacitances are in microfarad is [AFMC 2012]
each small drop is |AIIMS 2012)
1.0 uf
(d) 8 uF 4.0 juF
F F
to
45. A capacitor having capacity of 2 f is charged 6.0 uf
arc B
200 V and then the plates of the capacitor
in
connectcd to a resistance wire. The heat produced 8.0 uF
joule will be |Manipal 2012) 2.0 uF
(b) 4 x 10 (c) 4 x 10 (d) 4 x 1do (c) 2.0 uF (d) 3.0 uF
(a) 2 x 1o*? (a) 6.0 uF (b) 4.0 F

Answers
Check point 2.1
7. (c) 8. (b) 9. (a} 10. (c)
2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (c) 5. (b) 6. (b)
1. (a)
12. (a) 13.(c) 14. (a) 15. (a)
11. (b)

Check point 22 10. (a)

6. (c)
7. (b) 8.(c) 9. (d)
3. (b) 4. (b} 5. (a)
1. (c) 2. (b}
12. (c) 13. (3) 14. (a) 15. (C)
11.(a)
144) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS VolL 2

Check point 2.3

1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5.(c) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8.(d) 9. (c) 10. (a)
11. (d) 12. (a) 13.(C) 14. (d) 15. {a)

Check point 2.4

1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (c) 5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (c) 9.(d) 10.(d)
11.(d) 12. (d) 13. (b) 14. (b) 1s. (a)

Check point 2.5

1.(c) 2. (b) 3.(c) 4. (d) 5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (a)
11.(c) 12. (c) 13. (d) 14. (a) 15.(c) 16. (a) 17. (a} 18. (b} 19. (a) 20. (d)

A. Taking it together
1. (c) 2.(a) 3.(a) 4. (ad) 5.(d) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (c) 9. (c) 10. (c)
11. (c) 12. (b) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (a) 16. (b) 17. (c) 18. () 19. (a) 20. (3)
21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (a) 25. (b) 26. (a) 27.(d) 28. (c) 29. (a) 30. (c)
31.(a) 32. tc) 33. (d) 34, (c) 35. (c) 36. (b) 37. (d) 38. (b) 39. (b) 40. (c)
41.(b) 42. (b) 43. ta) 44. (c) 45. (d) 46. (a) 47. (a) 48. (d) 49. (a) 50. (b)
S1. (b) S2. (a) 53. (c) 54. (d) 55. lc) 56. (d) S7. (a) S8. (d) 59. (c) 60. (d)
61. (c) 62. (b) 63. (c) 64. (b) 65. (a) 66. (d) 67. (3) 68. (b) 69. (a) 70. (c)
71.(b) 73. (a) 74. (b) 75. (c) 76. (b) 77. (a) 78. (c) 79. (b) 80. (d)
72. (a)
81. (d) 82. (c) 83.(d) 84. (d) 85. (b) 86. (d) 87. (a) 88. (b) 89. (0) 90. (d)
91. (d) 92. (b) 93. (c) 94. (b) 95. (d) 96. (a) 97. (c) 98. (d) 99. (b) 100. (c)
101.(b) 102. (d) 103. (a) 104.(3) 105. (d) 106. (b) 107. (b) 108. (b) 109. (d) 110. (d)
111,(c) 112.(3) 113.(c) 114. (b) 115. (d) 116. (b.c) 117. (c) 118.(d) 119. (b) 120. (b)
121.(b) 122, (d) 123. (a) 124. (a) 125.(d) 126. (a) 127.(c) 128. (b) 129. (c) 130. (c)
131.(b) 132. (a) 133.(c) 134. (d) 135. (c) 136. (d) 137. (c) 138. (d) 139. (c) 140. (a)
141, (dl 142. (C) 143. (c) 144.(3) 145. (C) 146. (c) 147. (b) 148. (c) 149. (c) 150. (a)
151. ta) 152. (b) 153.(b) 154. (b) 155. (b} 156. (a) 157.(c) 158. (a) 159.(c) 160. (a)
161.(d) 162. (d) 163. (c) 164. (d) 165. (c) 166. (b) 167. (c) 168. (a) 169. (b) 170. (c)
171. (b) 172. (a) 173. (b) 174. (a) 175. (0) 176. (5) 177. (b) 178. (c) 179. () 180. (a)
183. (d) 184. (d) 185. (b) 186. (b) 187.(c) 188. (d) 189. (b) 190. (d)
181. (b) 182. (d)
191. (a) 192. (a) 193. (c) 194. fb} 195. (c) 196. (d) 197. (a) 198. (c) 199. (b) 200. (c)
201. (b) 202. (c) 203. (c) 204. (d) 205. (c) 206. (c) 207. (d) 208. (b) 209. (c) 210. ()
211. (a) 212. (d}) 213. (U) 214. (b) 215. (a) 216. (d) 217. (c) 218.(a) 219. (c) 220. (b)
221. (a) 222. (c) 223. (a) 224. (a) 225. (c) 226. (c) 227. (b) 228. (c) 229. (c)

B. Medical entrance special format questions

Assertion and reason
1. (b) 2. (e) 3.(c) 4. (b) 5. (d) 6. (d} 7. (c) 8. (d) 9. (c) 10. (c)
11.(b) 12. (a) 13. (b) 14. (c) 15. (a) 16. (a)

Match the columns

1. (4p.,q B
s.C;D+) 2. (A ->p.ar, 8 s,Cp.ar) 3. (A ->r, B-+p.Cp. D
q)
4. (A s B p.C-+r, D+q)

CMedical entrances' gallery

1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (a) S. (b) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (b) 10. (a)
11. (al 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (b) 16. (c) 17. (b) 18, (a) 19. (d) 20. {c)
21. (c) 22. (b) 23. (d) 24. (C) 25. (al 26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (b) 29. (d) 30. (d)
31. (b) 32. (c) 33. (3) 34. (C) 35. (d) 36. (c) 37. (ch 38. (d) 39. (d) 40. (a)
42, ld) 43. (3) 44, (al 45. (b) 46. (a) 47. (C) 48. (d) 49. (a) 50. (a)
41. (d)
ints and
kplanations
Check point 2.1 -
2x10-6
3. la) l,
= 10°-5x 10
where, ,s
1. la) Using the relation W= ql,
the eletric potential at xoint A.
15x10
5x106
5x10
13
We have.W4 x 10o)10) 4x 10j |15x10 5x10310" v
2. ta) V=
R
: We,-, =3x10"x10"
Potential on smaller sphere will te more. 10. lc) Potential at P due to (tq) charge
3. to Electric potential at a distance r due to point charge Q is
KQ at same
V= atxi elextric field pointE
A

KQ (Qx 10'y e (0,0,-o) o,0,-) (0,0,

4nE,Q x10" V/m
KQ/V² K KQ

AnE, (z - a)
4. (o) The electrical potential produced by the nucleus at the Potential at due to (-g) charge,
positions of the electron.

V=9xl0 % =
9xIo° +1.6x10") =
27.2V 4nE, ({z + a)
0.53 x1o-0
Total potential at P due (AB) electric dipole,
5. (b)Ohviously. frum charge configuratiot, at the centre V=V+V,
electric field is nonzero. Potential at the centre due to 2q
charge Vy, = and potential due to -q chatge V., -1 - a) 4
4nL, (:
(where, r= distanKe of centre point)
.Total potential, -Vz, +V, + V,=0
V

20
11. (6) Eleciric field, E - 10
2x10-50 NC
d
12. (al We have, V =E xd
Distarhee, d 3000 m

E =6
500

6. () The electric field intensity E and electsic potential V are 13. td Paential an G;V-2|
as dV
related E0 and for V
constant,
dr y
This inply that electric fickd intensity, E = 0. 02 *2= 36×10
7. (c) Potential dilference, AV=N 2 =0.1 V
20
Pot ential at = Potential due to (+ql charge + Potential to
8. (b)
0.2 m.
,0.2 m
(-y) charge
(-g)
=0 0.2
146 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

14. (al The electric potential V(x. y, z)= 4x*V 7. () Potential inside the sphere will be same as that on its
surface Le.
V=Vafr= 10 stat volt, V =

L stat volt
Now, E = 15

= 0 and - V 3
Now, =
&r, 0
8. Inside a conducting body, potential is same everywhere
Hence, E = -&ri, so at point (Im. 0, 21m) and cquals to the potential of its surface.
E=-8iV/m or 8 along negative X•axis. 9. ld ll charge acquired by the saller sphere is Q, then its
: KQ
15. (a) We have, electric field, pxential 120 ..)
2
-9) =- 10x - 10
E- dV6+
d d
10x
Wiole charge comes to outer sphere.
Also, potential of thhe outer sphere,
:. E),-10x]- 10 - 20 V/n
...)
Check point 22 6
From Eq. (i) and (iil, we get
1. () Work done in displacing a chargc particle is given by V= 40V
i2 = q; -V) and the line integral of clectrical ficld from
point I to 2 gives potential difference ,-%--[Edl 10. (a) Vz a
-b+c)
Fot equipxtential surface. V, -, = 0 and W e 0.
En

4. (b Since, potential inside the hollow sphere is same as that on

the surface.
5. (a) Let Q, and Q, are the charges on spbere of radii R, and R,,
tespectively.

R,

Charge
Surface charge denstiy, G
Area On putting c =a +
b», =Ve Vg
According to given prublem, o, = O; 500 x10
12. (c) Potential, Ve 19 9x10 x
L0
=
45x10°V
...i)
13. (a) The kinetic energy gained by a charge of q coulomb
In case of a charged sphere, V, = through a potential dfference ofV volt is
47E, R K=qV Joule
R
K-(1.6x 10")(2000)-3.2x 10j
4nc,
We have K= -my'

2K 2x 3.2 x
- =
9x10 -31
10x10' m/'s

fusing Eq. (i))

14. tal Speed of the particle, v = 29V

6. (d Let q' be the charge on the inner shell. Then, the potential m

of the inner is
V=Potential due to its owng'+ Potential due to the outer chauge
162
15. (d The kinetic energy of the clectroTI
my?
But V = 0, because the inner shell is earthed
k=el=
m
I
492 =0
2 e
 Chapter 02 Electrostatic potential and capacitance (147

Here, V= c3x10 -3 10 m/s

x 8. (d We havc. AB + AC 12 cm ...i)
10 10 AB-AC = 32 cm²
x
I(9.0 x 10-}(3.0 10-7
- AB+ - 44B·AC
(1.6x 10-) .AB- AC ACÝ
AB- AC=4
Potential, V=2531V From Egs. (i) and we get
(iü),
=
AB 8 cm, AC=4cm
Check point 23 Potential energy at point A,
1. (6) A PE =Wok done by external agent
- Vyq -Vq). V, > V
APE <0 ie., PE will incrcase. AB AC

2. (6) Potential erergy of the system will be given by

e
(-eX-e)

As r decTeases, potential encrgy incrcases. 9. (d Potential energy, U =

3. (d Work done, W= U, -U, =9x 10° Net potential energy. Un

W=9x 10° x12x10 10. (a) Potential energy of the system,

= 12.96 J= 13J =0
4. (al Since, the proton is moving against the direction of electric
field, so work is one by the proton against electric field. It Q+q+=0»Q=-?2
irnplies that electric field does negative work on the proton.
Again, protorn is moving in electric fiekd from low potential 11. (d Length of the diagonal of a cube having each side b is
region to high potential region, bence its potential energy
v36. So, distance of centre of cube from cach vertex is
incrcases. 3
1
44, Hence, potential energy of the given system of charge is
5. (e) Electric potential energy, U=
AnE, d
(9x 10)x (1.6x 10"}x (-1.6x 1019)J
10-10 (a) Change in potential energy (8U) mU,-U,
12.
eV
=-9x10 x1.6x 10 eV=-14.4
Note In the souton given all the values are positive tt is important to
menticn the sign

6. (coPotential energy as well as force are positive, if there is 40 cm

40 cm
repulsion between the particles and negative, if there is
attraction,
We take of only the magnitude of values when discussing
decrease or increase of energy. 30 cm 10 cm
40 cm
As
Potential energy,
Plus or minus i.e., whethcr both are of the sarnc sign ot
different, if r decreascs, the valuc increasc. Thereforc, (c) is AU94399)
AxE,04
1

0.1 0.4 0.5

WTOng.
7. (b Potential energy of charges Q, and Q, at 10 cm apart, AU -(8q:4) -(8q,)
4nE,
1
12x10 x5x106
0.1
K= &q:
9x 10 x
60 x 102 - 54 x 10-=54
13. (c) Torque, ts =PE
0. 2x10 x0.01x5x10 =10x10N-m
212NF

Poterntial energy of charge Q, arnd Q, At 6 cm apart. 14. () Work done, W pE(l- cos 0)
60 x
x
9x 10 10-12 -
pE(l-cos 180°)
=9] =
0.06 1W= pE[l-(-D] 2pE
:. Work done = (9- 54)J =36J
148 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol.2

15. tal Given, q, = 1C, 4, = 2CGq, = 3Cand r, 100 cm Im 10. (d C- As

A;tines and d- 2
times
Initial PE of system, U,
C- c-
12
So, G
times ie., 3uF
D*l0 (1x2+ 2x3+3x{ =99x10" J
1 11. (h Capacitance, Got= KC.. >K=ein - 110 =
50
2.20
When r, = 50 cn = 0.5 m
12. (d) Charge on capacitor for when its potential becomes 10 V.
Final PE of system, U, Q = CV x
=500 10
x10 =5000 x 10uC
x
9x10 -(0x2+2x3+ .. 5000 1o
a5
3x = 2x 99 x10° J Required time
100 x 10t
=50 s
Wosk done, U,-Uj=2x99 x 10° - 99x10° 13. (H C ==IpF and C = KeyA =
2 pF
W= 99x10°J =9.9 x10°J d
..
K- 4.
Check point 2.4 14. () |
1. (d) Electrostatic field at the surface of a conduKtor is rormal A
to the surface.
2. (c) Volume of 8 srmall drops = Volume of big drop bd32d'34
Capacitance in air,
8x'R'»
3
R=r G
=og!l.. d
d
As
capacity is proportional tor, hence capacity
hecome 2 times. Capacitance in medium, Gat =
3. (d We have, C = Kil, + KA,
C«
d 3x6xe,A 18
x9 40.5 pF
3
Therefore, the capacity of parallel plate condenser depends in 3x 2 /3+6xd/
the separation between the plates. 15. (a) Parallel plate capacitor,
4. (c) Sincc, aluninium is a metal, therefore ficld inside this will C- KLA/d
be zero. Hence, it would not affect the field in between the
As given in figure, for series conbination,
two plates, so capacity =:
Temains unchanged.
3 d
5. (a) When a latnp is conected to DC line with a capacitor. 1f

will forn an open circuit. Hence the lamp will not glow. dd
2
6. () Capacity of a spherical conductor G = 4rE,R.
Check point 2.5
7. (a) The potential difference across the parallel plate capacitor
is 10 V-{-10 V)= 20 V. 1. te) Capacitor are in I1,1,|3
Capacitance = 40 = series,c
2F
V20 Capacitance, C'

3
8. (c) For spherical conductor,
Voltage of the combination,
CARER V'=V+V,+V, =V+V+V= 3V
4 =
V=R
3
and A
4xk 2. (b) Charge on capacitor A Q, =
G+C;
A 6C
x9q=q
. Capacitance, C = 12re,
A
6C+3C
Charge on capacitor B, Q,
9. (d) Given, 2rR = 2 R= G+C;
3C x9q= 3q
For sphere C
4nEKR 6C+3C

Cox1o" xx80 (for water K 8O 3. (d In

series;
Capacitance of spherc, C= 282828 pF
Capacitance,
( F
 :
Chapter 02 Electrostatic potential and' capacitance (149

Equivalent capacitance 2x3 6 11. () The given circuit can be simplified as follows
-AF2+3 5
203
CV 6
Jotal charge by Q
x1000 1200huC
5
Potential Vacross 2uFisl- Y 1200 - 600 V
2
Potential on internal plates = 1000- 600
.:. 40O V
5. l) Capnacitor are in series,
Equivalent capacitance between and B is
A

Co I 2 &
c
12. (e) The given circuit can be simplified as follows
8 4uf.
Total charge, Q = CVax13
= 8HC
13

Potential difference across 2uF capacitor 8

4V 2uF 2ulF

6. () The given arrangenent becomes an arrangement of (n-) 2uF

capacitors connected in parallel. So, C
-K: 4uF:
7. (b) Capacitance, C
(series)
= 4C
Equivalent capacitance between A
andB is Can =2+2= uF
Capacitance, C, (parallel)
13. () Potential difference across both the lincs is same ie., 2V.
The ratio of capacitance, Hence charge flowing in line 2.
G.C141
4CC,
16

8. (a) Capacitance Gut = nC=3 x3 = 9uF 2,uF

H

Minimum capacitance, Line (2)

3
Ga =luF
3 Line (1)
9. (b) The given circuit can be drawn as follows

So charge on each capaction in line (2) is 2uC

4uF Charge line 1Q = 2x] 2u C
14. (a) 2uf
Effective capacitance, CAB = 2+ 4= GuF
10. (a) The given circuit can be simplificd as follows 4uF

2 2ut
B
B B
Therefore, capacitor 2uF, 4uF and 2F are in parallel.
So, cquivalent capacitance between A and B
CAN 2+ 4+2= 8uF
15. (c) The energy strored in a capacitor is

A
U-cv
Equivalent capacitance between and Bis
2x50
or Potential difference, V=, V100 x
10
=
1000V
150 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

16. (a) Potential energy of charged parallel plate capneitor A.) Taking it together
2C 1. ic) Angle betweern equipotential surface and line of
force is 9O.
when a stab of dielectric K is inserted then C"= CK
The new potential energv,

2C" XK K

17. (a) ln series capacitance, C'

axd V=ul Eqipetentia!

sucface

2. e) Potential, V E:d
In parallel capacitance (C" = n, C
. Distance irom the point charge, 3000
and
d
==on =6m

= Work done
3. (a): Potentia! difference
Charge

10 =3 x

18. (4) Energy of capacitor U

9 V= 2V
2 C 4. (a d) negative charge when moves from higher potential to
A
2 lower potential, its velocity increases.
1.21 U=IQ+ 2
C 7. ta) Work cdone, 1W,8 = U, q ly -V)
-U
121 (Q + 21
Potential difference, V, -V
121_Q+2 10 x10
-= 2000V= 2kV
5x10
1.1Q =Q+2 8. (c) Capacity of parallel plate capacitor is given by, C
Charge on d
the capacitor.
C

Q= 20 Co =
A
= 450 far ad x metre
19. (a) Initial energy xIx10x(30 x0°J Unit =
mette?
farad
metrc
Final energy (e) The electrie dipole potential varies as
=G+C,N 11. 1/rat large distance
is not true.
x
x3x10" x(10 150 10-J 12. (b) Energy, U a
2 1'
Lons of engy = (430-130) ×10-J= 300 x 10J =
300 J :. It is in the forn of potential energy.
20. (d Initial energY stored in the capacitor. 13. ta U

When a slab of dielectric constant K is inserted then C' = Ck

After 2s, when the ptential drops by 10 V. the final
potential is 40 V.
Final energv stored in the capacitor 14. (b)Potential at a point in a ficld is defined as the anount of
work done in bringing a unit pusitive lest charge lg} from
...(i1)
infinity to that point along any arbitrary path.
cuor Potential, Vm
Fraction of energy stored : U2 cso
40)
50) 0.61
o Work doe, W =qV
 151
Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance

(a) Force between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor is 25. 6) For charged spherical conductor, potential of the sphere at
given by its surface
=Vetue stat volt
2
2A 21 5
16. The torque cting on a dipole is given by t = px E, the
(b) stat volt
potential energy of the dipole is given by U= p-E and the - 30
Potential at a point distant 30 from the centre
o
resultant force on the dipole is zero.
e

17. te) The direction of clectric ficld is always perpendicular to

onc equipotential surface maintained at high clectrostatic 6
potential to other equipotential surface maintained at low 26. a) Electric field is given by
electrostatic potential.
Ex-4V30 -(-10) 2000 Vm
The peritively charged particle cxperiences electrostatic force Ar 2x10-?
along the direction of clectric field ie., from high clectrostatic
potential to low clcctrustatic potertial. Thus, the work is done 27. (d) Potential at a point due to electric dipole
by the clectric ficld on the positive charge, hence electrostatic
potential energy of the positive chatge decreases.
18. (d) Electrostatic field at the surface of a conductor is normal to 1f 0=0°, then V= max
the surface. If 0= 180°, then V = min
19. (a) Irn this probiem, the collection of charges, whose total sum 28. (c) U= - pE cos U is minimum at =0°.
is not zero, with regard to great distance can be considered as
a point charge. The cquipotentials due to point charge are 29. a) Kinetic energy gained by a-particle
spherical in shape as clectric potential due to point charge q is 70V 30V
given by
V
V=k,!
This suggest that electric pntentials due to point change is KE =q4V= qlf-Vl= 2(,-V,)
same for all equidistant points. The locus of these equidistant = 2 x1.6 x 10-1 (70 - 50) = 40 ceV

points, which are at same potential, form spherical surface.

20. (a) Electron is moving in oposite direction of field so field
will prxluce an accelerating elfet ot) electrun.
2 2m m)

21. ta) Capacitance of a metallic sphere,

2m
c= 4nEgf=1x10* r=10 x9x10 =9km
= hewton/coulonb
31. (a) Wotk done, W=U, -U,=
22. b) Unit of E
in Sl system is E

As.
dr 0.06
So, unit of E is also vol/metre 32. (c) Capacitance,C= (1rER)
Also, x
(:V= Ed) 9x10 x6408 10' =712uF
the conplete space between the plates
(re-) 33. (d) If metallic slab fills
or both plates are joined through a natellic wire, then
jonule capacitance became infinite.
coulomb-metre 34. (c) Energy stored. W=
while J/Cis unit of clectric potential. 2C
W Q
(if Cis constant)
23. la) Flectric field is negative of potential gradient ie.
dV d (5r + 10x Q
-9)
=-I0x- 10 W'=4W
(E),.j =-10 x - 0 =
-20 Vm 35. (c) Het produced in capacitor =Enetgy of charged capacitor
24. la) Inside a sphere, potential remains uniform. -ave*10)x(100 o011
152 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

36. (0 The energy ttored, =(nC)w² the conductors carTy equal and opposite charges. So,
U
44. (c) Both
after connccting by a wire, there will be no charge in any
conductar. Hence, all the stoed energy will be destroyed.
37. (d Change in energy of condenser
Loss of energy =

45. () Net charge distributes in direct ratio of capacity (or radius

in case of spherical conductor)
(C, - G)
2

- (10 x
10-2x10)
48 uC
4x10j So, Ag = 80 48=32uC
38. (6) In series, charge remains same on both capacitors 46. (o) Force, F. = Ë
=|=4 xio*|]=4N
2x10

47. (a)
9-,
So, the charge will not fall at all.
48. (d In redistribution of chargc therc is always loss of energy.
unless their potentials are same or QR,QR
UG.06
U, G 0.3
49. (a) As per the given condition in the question, electricity will
flow from the smaller sphere to the bigger one when the
U,:U,= 2:1 smaller onc is placed inside the bigger one and connected by
wire.
39. (6) n parallel conbination, Gu C+ G
50. ( Work done, W
6U U, -U, (3U) -U= 2U
1 q
51. ( Potential, V=
40. (c) q remains same, while V decreases.
Here, V= 2V.,e t 2V.e
41. (b) Potential on parallel plate capacitor, V

Also, capacity of parallel plate capacitor is given by

The electric potential at mid-point of A
d

KA 52. (a) The potential at the centre of the sphereis 80 V because it

Vrd remains same at each point under the metallic hollow sphere.
So, on increasing the distance between plates of capacitor, the 53. (c) The energy stored in the capacitor,
otential difference between plates also increases.
42. () Potential ditference =, -%=9-|
and V = Ed
1f q, is positive, V,
-V, = positive or V, > V.
43. (a) Dielectric constant,
Permitivity of medium
UE'Ad
K= q,
Permittivity of free space 54, (d) Given, q, =5 mG 10 mC and r =0.5 m

K= Work done. W = I 49:

4Rk r
x 0-4
:Permittivity t= Ke
=9x 10 x10° x10
=8lx &86 x 1002 0,5
= 7.16 x 10 MKS units =9x 10J
 Chapter 02 Electrostatic potential and capacitance (153

c) llere, q=4 x 10GE=5V/m, t= 10 s, m

2x 10
65. (o) By using KE =QV» KE =1.6x 10x 100
The KE of charged article =
2T - 1,6 x 10"J
(4 x x 66. () Conducting surface behaves as cquipotential surface.
10 (5 x(10
2x2x10 67. la) Potential at Odue to charge at A
. KE = 10J
56. (d lonisation potential V)of tiercury is the energv required t
to strip it of an electron. The electric field strength is given 2

E
by
d 41, a
where, d is distance between plates creating clectric ficld.
Potential at O due to charge at B,
Given, V=10.39 V,E =.5x 10 V/m
Distance travelled by electron to gain ionisation energy
10.39 Potential at mid-point 0.
d=
E 1,5x 10°
37. ka) By using charge conservation,
(-10
0.2 x 600 - (0.2 )V+
68. (6) As electric potential of spheres are samc, is
0.2 x 600
100V
1.2
58. (h Here. q = 8x10" GC= 100uF= 10F a
8 x 1010 = =
69. (a) Given, G
Potential, V -2, 10
=8x 10-iy 2u. V, 50V
C V, 20 V
=uf,
x 10-" - 32 x
Work done
vx8 x8x10- 10-J Cominon potential,

39. () We have. K=
rGi+C2x50+
2+1
l*2040V.
-d' Lass of energy.

21-d' 2
Mm
2G+G;
1
So now distance3+-n 3.5 mm 2x1 (50 -20' x 10"
2 (2+ D

60. (d Elcctric field, E =

- d(3r')=-6r = 30)x10- =300u
dr D, Elies on cquipotential surface. On sphete, the
(c) A, B, C,
70.
At pointx2 surlace potential is same. S,
Electric field, E = - 12 Vm =
=y zero
WA
=Wc W

=I -)=
(c) Kinetic energy. - eV d
61. K-m² 71. h) We have, E, = or
dV=-E, dr
On integrating both sides, we get
Speed of the electron v = 1

62. (b) Kinetic energy. 72. (a) Potential energy of charges Q, and Q, at 10 cm apart
4oly-V=1.6x10"°(70 -
=
50) =3.2x1015y 12 x 10
1
x5x 10
63. (e) By using, W =Q-AV
60 x 10-2
x
Potential difference, 9x 10 = 54 x
2 -= 0.1
10=5.4J
4 0.1V
20 At 6 cm apart
x
x 10-!2
64. (6) By using, KE -
60
QV» 4x 10 * 1.6 x
101" 0,25 x V pE9x 10 -=9j
0.(6
Potential diffetenee V-4 x10
x
.6
x 10-19
= 236V . Work done (9-5.4) 3.6]
0.25
54) 0BJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

73. la) Forcc, F

qE :. Potential at the centre of suare,
V, = 4V
:: Potential iffcerence between two points
|9x10°
x
50 x 10"
(3000) (10)
=
9o/2 x10 v
v.Fd_ = 10V
3
Work done in bringing a charge =50 uC) from o to centre
74. 6) When charçe particle enters in a potential ficld, then of the square is
W=qVo 50 x 10 x 9042 x 10' - 64J

78. UAR 1qX-2) -2q

AnE

B
e-2aN)
73. k) 2a

10 cm O cm
Potantial energy of the system

Cc
10 10 p-C
B 10cm C 21
1
(0XI0) x 10l2
10 x 10
(10X10) x 10-12 79. 6) When a-particle is ccelerated through a potential
U: 10 x 10-2
difference V, then kinetic energy of aparticle

I (10X10) x 10-!2
K=qVm (2eVJ=2x 16 x 10-® x10J
10 x 10-2 2x 1.6x 10-1" x 10

. cV MeV
2
1.6x 10-i9
Ue=UAn + Uac + Uca
100 x
10-12| 80. d) Since we know that. K= P.
2m
Also,
76. 6) When charge particle enters in uniform electric feld, then
force on charged particde, F= qE Ratio of momenta,
Also, F na P: mA m, tq, 24,
or Acceleration of the particle, = at =
81. ) Velocity, v
x80 -
o-9E3x10 12 m/s m
m

20 x10d
.:. The ratio of kinetic energy.
So, Irom cquations of motion,
V=u+at= 20 + 12x3= 56 m/s
82. ) Capacity of spherical condenser when outer sphere is
77. a) A carthed,
50 uC 50 C

50 uC ab

Potential,V, =V, =Ve=Vh -

Capacity of spherical condenser when inner sphere is carthed
x
104)
V=(50 W2)
b-a
.. Difference in =
their capacity C-C Anb
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance 55
B3. ) Work done, W=U,-U Now, capacitor 12 uF, 5 uF and 20
Here resultant capacity.
F are in series. So, their
U, =0

ARE,r r 20 12 3

(9x10o(-2+ 04) + (-2)(4)] x 10 C=3uF

0.1 89. (a) Capacitance between A and B

=0.54 J 3 uF

84. d)
44
*2* 10xy°= (10)(9x 10°) (0.9) HE

Speed of particle v V8.1x 10 m/s 90 m/s

Gy =3 + le4 uF
85. 6) Work done, W
=U, -U,
-6-0 4RE
Capacitance betwcen A and C

86. (d) Given circuit is balanced Wheatstone bridge circuit.

10 x 10
10+ 10 =5uF

Cc 3

10uF 90. d) Given circuit can be reduced as following.

D 8/3 uF
10 x 10 =
5uF
10+ 10 A
12 uF
H HB
16pF
Their is no current in branch CD.
So, equivalent capacitace between AB, 4 uf

CAn =5+ 5= 104F Step(1)

87. a) When capacitors arc connccted in serics, then

12 uF 20V3 uF 16uF
I1,1,3 9
1
C 18 Step 12)

Gç=24F Hence, equivalent capacitance between A and B

1

When capacitors are joined is parallel, then CAB 12 202 16

G =3+ 9+ 18=30 uF
= 240
Gs 2 C 71
C 30 15
91. ) Given circuit can be simplified as shown
88. b) In circuit, condenser of capacity 2 F and 3 uF are in 1/3uF
parallel. Their resultant capacity is 5 pF.
H
Q
12 uF

20 juF
Qe
I156) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

92. 6)Given circuit can be sitnplified as follows 95, (0 The situation can be simplified as follows
A

2 uf 2 ulF

.:. A B.
Equivalent capacity between and
2
2 uF 1+ 2+ 1
4

Step(1)
A

96. (al The circuit can be redrawn as

2 ufF
AHH 3 uF 3 uF

2 ufF So, the capacitance betwcen the point A and B,

Step (2) 3
A

97. (c) Given circuit can be redrawn as follows,

A•

Step (31

So, equivalent capacitance between A and B,

CH =1+ l=2uF
Step(l|
93. (c) Given cireuit can be expressed as

2ufF
Step (2)
Equivalent capacitance between A and B,

Sep(l)

H
12 uf
*c-e
98. (d
7
and
2 uF Cp =49C
Step (2) Herc. Cg capcity of one capacitor.
1
= or
3 uF
99. (6) Potential, V
! Va
Vhas reduced to h its otiginal value. Therefore, Chas
8
increascd 8 times.
Step(3)
100. (c) Capacitancc, C
So, net capacitaKe betwecn AB, d
Kd, (C
Cu 3+ 2=5uF
d,
94. 6) Capacitors G and C, are in parallel and, they are in series
Here, K= 40; d, = 2d,
with Cy. then equivalent capacity between Aand I,
C= pxC, 15x4 6)
32uF
Gp t G 15+ 4 I9
=2x10F
 Chapter 02 Electrostatic potential and capacitance 157

1. (6)

2C
2x5C

The effective capacity of the combination,

AuF
d
.:. Capacitance, C
-6F
(Ad-
108. =
2:1
C d-t d/2
102. (d By such an arrangement, two capacitors
in parallcl are
formed. in quextiom, thicknes is b=
109. (d When charging battery is disconnected then charge
1
remains constant, V
becomestimes and E

103. (a) According to the qucstion becomestimes.

So, new value of charge is Qo
Radius, R = 2 Vof
x3_Vo
New value
Capacitance, C= 4nE Rr 3
=
C= 4ne, 2r: C'= 2C New value of E
3E,
:. Therefore, the capacitance of the bigger drop as campared 9 3
to each smaller d:op is 2 times. 110. (d)Here capacitors of capacity 4 uF, each are in parallel, their
104. (a) Capacity of the capactiot equivalent capxcity is 8 uF. Now, there is a conbination of
C=G+C KC + C: = three capacitors in series of capacity 20 uF, 8 uF and 12 uF
(: parallel) so, their resultant capacity,
=4x5+ 5= 25uF
C 20 8 12

C
Toal charge, Q = CV= x 300 = 1
16luC
31

Charge through 4 uF capacitor = 116!580 uC

105. (d Capacity of capacitor C = 2
d and potential difference across 4 F condenser,
580
V=I==145
4
V

:.Capacitance, C" = 2: 111. (et As capacitors (G and C, are in series, then there should be
:.Extra charge flow, q= (2V- C)=CV equal charge on thcm i.e.
:. Work done, W = qV = (CV)V= CV² Charge on C = Charge onC

106, (b ld-)
CA/ tyAld d
d-t GG -V,) = C, -Vy)
d
(5/T! 5 V,IG + C) = C + CV;
7 The poterntial difference of point D,
.:. Capacitarnce, C
=*5 25uF= 35uF
107. (b) On introducing dielectric Kin a parallel plate capacitor, its G+Gz
capacity becomes, 112. (a) Equivalent capacitance of circuit,
("= KCp
H

C=5c0 2 af 3 uf 6 uf
Also, energy stored, W, =
2C
24V
158) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

6 116. (b.) After the introduction of dielectric slab, direction of

3+2+)=luF
electric ficld remains perpendicular to plate and is directed
Total charge, Q = 1x
24= 24 uC fron positive to negative plate.
Now, potential difference acruss 6 uF capacitor

6
can Slab
113. (c) Given circuit be reduced as
•12004
3 aF

x
I=3d
x*d 2d
Let potential atPle V, and potential at B be Vg.
As capacitors 3 aF and 6 uF are in scrics, they have same Electric ield in air =9
charge.
Charge on 3uF = Charge on6 uF and electric field in dielectric =
Keo
31200 -V)= 6V-V) Positive plate is at higher potential and ncgative plate is at
lower potential. So, electric potential increases continuously
As B point is attached to earth. as we more from x = 0 to x = 3d.
So,
117. (c) Potential,Vret A0-(2)(200)
So, 1200-V =
2Vp 80+ 40 C= 400
V 2+C
V, 400 ..
Capacity of second condenser C = 8uF
114. (b) The circuit can be redrawn as
118. (d We have,
A
H
6 aF
(2) (4) + (C)5 = (2+ C)4.6

3 uF
0.4C= 1.2
C=3 units
10V 119. (6 The simple circuit will be as under.
Here, 4 uF and 6 uF are in series. So, charge is sarne on both.
6uf
Now, equivalent capacity between A and B,
6x4
12V
So, charge on 4 uF capacitor,
The potential drop 12V will be equally distribute.
x
QCan
10
Potential difference on capacitor of 6jFis 6 V. So, the
= 24 x 10= 24 uC voltage across a 2 F capacitor is 6 V.
113. (d Equivalent capacitance between A and B, 120. ( PD actoss charge 4 uf.
Gul
H

1200 V 400 V

–x 1200 400 volt

Charge, q =4x 400 = 1600 uC

121. () In parallel, potential difference is same and in series, it
distributes in inverse ratio of capacity.
3 uF 7 F
As charge Q=CV

So, 1.5C=c,
2
x6 G-315 x 10 ,4 uF V

=
0.lx 10F= 0.luF
 159
Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance

Potential difference 127. (c Thc given circuit can be redrawn as follow

vo;=14v B
15uF

:.Charge stored in 5uF capacitor will be

q=CV= (5uF) (|.8)= 9uC
2000 V
122. (d In series, potential difference distributes in inverse ratio of
capacitics. Hence,
V, -V,)- 15 2000
Va-V)= 15000 V
1.5uF 2000-Va = 1500 V
V
3000V Vg 500
128. (b) Resultant capacitance between A and B
K:,:15=:15:1:6
6'9 1.5 (C+ G)xC (5+ 10)x4 60
C= +
19
12uF
(G+ C,) G (5+ 10)+ 4
V,=(3000) 352.9 V
129. (c) Work done
123. (a) In the given figure capacitors 3uF, 3uF and 3 uF (between 4
R
and S) are in series. If Qis the charge on each of these 130, e) Common potential. *20 +
3x0_120,,
capacitors, then (6+ 3) 9
30 = So, charge on 3uF capacitor
34 3u 34 20
3x10- 40uC
Q=30 uC
Potential difference betwecen R and S 131. (b) The energy stored when the plates are fully charged
valt
-l-30u
3u
V= 10 volt
132. (al When key is closed, then capacitor becomes short
124. (a) circuited and bulb will light up. But wihen capacitor becomes
fully charged, it act as open circuit and this time bulb will
C not glow.
133. (c) At the present position all the charges are in equilibrium.
But when they displaced slightly from their present position,
they do not return back. So, they are in urstable equilibrium
position.
CG+ C, + Cy 46
= 20 + 20 + 20 = 60 uF
134. (a) We have, V

30 C
60 4rR'
q c aR
C 30 60 or VoR
Potential is same V=V
C
60
»C=60uF
125. () Potential difference across Cis 10 V. is same
Ratio potential
q= CV 60 uC R 4
126. difference across 4 uF capacitor is 9 V and
(a) Potential
135. (c)V=
potential difference across 6F capacitor will be 4nL,3 Gxtr
(12-9) V= 3V. Elcctric ficld internsity at a distance 3 is given by
:.Charge stored in capacitor of 6uF
q= CV= 6x3= 18uC
160 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Thus,
E_ ql6nL,)E-S C= 3uF
Charge, Q= CV=3x 12uC= 36uC
Potential difference across 4.5 uF 36
cnergy stored in the capacitor. y
136. (d Area=V 8V
=

4.5
137. () Charge, q = nCV 142. (c) In series combination,

1=nxlx 10 x110

Number of capacitors, n =
110 x 10
100000g 9090
G-F
In parallel combination, = 1+
C,
2+ 4=7uF
11

138, (d)
G1/7_ 4

7
i3F "3uF 143. (c) Electric force, q = ma
qb

1.6x10-19 x Ix10
9x10-i
,3uF 1.6x10"

Initlally speed, u = 5x 10" and Final spccd,v =0

3uF H . From '=u'- 2as

3uF
Distance travelled by electron,s=

(5x10x9
2x1.6x1o3 =7cm
144. (a) Potential gradient is related with electric ficld according to
-dV
the following relation E=
3F d

E=
êr
-[i2ry++jr*+k3r')
145. (c) Potential energy of the system,
=0
2xr
The effective capacitance between point A arnd B.
+ kq
139. (e) Charge, Q = CV= 50OuF x 10 V= 5x10C -4ka)
2x
Now, Q =
t or te
kq' =4 kQ
5 x 10
=
100 x 10 x1000 s n 50 s Ratio =4
20

140. (a) By using,

mi-v) -Qv 146. () Electrastatic potential energy, U=.M2
2

x10vi - (0.21} = 10(600 -0) Here, =4, = 1.6x10 9c

2 m

Velocity of the ball at the point A, v, = 22.8 cms

and r9x10-
9x10° x L6 x 10-1º x L.6 x 10-19
141. (d The total capacity of capcitor, U=
9x 10-1s
C- x4.5uF = 256 x
13.5 10"J
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance 16

147. (b) When capacitors are connected in parallel, then

151. (a) We have AC = BC
Cp + C+C+C=3C
Acoording to question,
3C
B

3C xC 3CxC
.In series, C, =
3.75
4C
C= 5uF
148. (c)The wotk done by a elcctrostatic force is given by Wotkdone in taking a charge Q from D to E
K
=q, -L Here initial and final potentials are same in all
three cases ad sarne darge is inoved, so work done is sane W=QVE -V,)
in all tlree cases. W=0
152. (b)
149. (c) Inthis problem, the electric field intensity E and electric
potentiali V are related as E n - dV
d
(2, 0)
Electric field intensity E =0 sugrest that =0 (0, 0)

This imply that constant.

Thus, E =0 inside the charged conducting sphere
causesthe W2
same electtostatic potential 100 at any point insike the
1

sphere.
A0 -W2
A0 - 4 n2 and BO =2
Note V equals zero does not necessary imply that 0eg. the electric
potential at any point on the perpendicular bisectar due to electric Potential difference the points A and B
dipcle is 2eto but E not.
E= 0 does not necessary mpiy that V = 0 c.g. the electric field intensity
V
-V
at ay pont iside the charged sphercal shell is zero but there may exist
non-2ero electic potential. 1rE, AO Ane, BO
150. (a) Let Q and Q, be the charge on the two conducting
spheres of radii R=3em) and R,(=Icm, respectively.
= ()
: A0 = BOJ
133. (b)
10C
10cm

m 1m 0, 10m

Potential at the centre of tie ring 1 is

0 cn 10 5
,
:. Potential, = 10= 9x10" xQ
4nL10 uo +
(10j
3x102 10 5
10x3x10 ArE, L10 10/2
Charge, Q= ..i)
9x10 Potential at the centre of the ring 2 is

10
and
Ix10-* 10uo+(10
10x1×102 1
10
Charge, Q:
...iü)
9x10 1E10
According to Caulomb's law, Work done, W = q-V)
1C 5
Force of repulsion between therm is
F= 9x10 x10 x3x10*x10xIx 102
9x10° x9x10° x(10x10 4
(using Es. (i) and (i)

4%02
162 O8JECTIVE PHYSICS Vol.2

154. (6) As slown in figure component of dipole moment along 162. (d Electric potential at P;
the linc OP will be
p'= pcos RI2 R 4xER AE,R
Hence, electric potential at point P will be
0
Vepcos
4
R

155. () With in r =2R, total charge is q2.

Hence, option (b) is incorrect. RI2
156. (a) U-pE cos0
It has
minimum value when 0 0°
Unin =-pE cos 0° = -pE
163. (c) Charge on the 3 uF
157. (c) Length of each side of square is v2 m, so distance of its
centre from each corner is

V2m Im
164. () Cjir with dielectric slab C=
d
Potential at the cerntre,

V=9x10I
-1.8x10v
3 d

158. (a) By using W =

QE· Ar) The dielectric constant of the slab
K=. 4d 12) =2
4 -d
159. Point P will lie near the charge which is smaller in
(c)
165. c) Let potential will be zero at two points Pand 0, then
magnitude i.e., -6uC. Hence, potential at P,
12u:
-2 C

P
20 cm
1
1
(-6x10) (12x10°)0r=0.2 m

4zE, (0.2 xx) 10-%

160. (a) Work done, W

=3x 10V, -V), where 12x (6-a)
V
5x10-3=x10° q=2
So, distance of P
fromorigin, x =6-2=4
Vy (2x10) 5x105 13 At external point Q,
and
=10"Bx0Sxio0" V 1 .x 10
(6+ b)
b=6
So, distance of Q
from origin, x =6+ 6- 12
=
E,
161. () E, =-=-(-5)
dx
6
="-3
dy 166. b) Let radius of big drop be Rand radius of small drops be r,
.:. Volume of big drop =
dV 8x volume of snall drops
and E, =
dz ;R= 8
xr
or R=
2
Potential of big drop,
(q is charge on small drop)
C8'C
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance (63

Ve (8mul

-(8)
Vanall

167. e) We have, R= 2.
&|n-R. Q-
8 E
V=-.=
V
Further, 50

and Potential of
the large dron
V'=.9 R & 173. .
4RLo 2r
4x 50 200V ACH2CH4CHoB

68. a) 4nEL R R
U=0
+ or
204 q°0 Qa-! The equivalent capacitance between A and B,
69. 6) Potential of the system
V Net charge
174. la) The given figure is equivalent to two identical capacitors
Net capacity 4ne, ; + r) in parallel combination
170. ) Potential diflerence between plates A and B
d d
175. (6)Given plates are equivalent to 3 identical capscitors in
parallel combination. Hence, cquivalent capacitance
Gp =G+C+C= C=3
d
176. 6)Three capacitors are in parallel. So, their equivalent capacity

+
Ve Potcntial difference in air Potential difference in medium
V= d
-)+

C C+C+Ce 3C
177. 6) We have,
: Capacitance, C =
or K
- Ad
(d + Ad) -t+
4x10
Dielectric constart, K=
4x10- 3.5x10-3
171. 6) According to question, 4x101 40
0.5x10-38
K

Capacity of spherical condenser = Capacity of parallel plate

capacitor K=8
178. (c) This diagram is syumetrical about line AB, hence point on
4nE d perpendicular of AB i.e., CD and D are at same potential,
x remove capacitor between C and D, D and E.
de14r RRn(20 10? =0.1 mm
172. a) Three capacitors are in series therefore, their resultant
capacity is given by
1
A Hzc2c Hc

zctzc
The cquivalent capacitance,
C =C+ C+C= 3C
164) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

179, d) Given circuit is balanccd Wheatstone bridge circuit. 181. ) Given circuit can bee redrawn as follows.
Now, capacitor of capacity GuF. 12Fare in series and H H

9uF 18ul are also in series. 2 uF

6x12 A

6+ 12

Step(

18 uF
4

9x18 Step(2)
and
9+ 18 So, equivalent capacitance between A and B,
:. Equivalent capacitance between A ated B is = I+ CAB
l=2uF
1O uf
Cn4+ 6- 182. ld Capacitors C and C, are in series with C, in parallel with
180. a) The given circuit can he simplified in following way. them.
Now, C- K,/2) KA
ld 2)

2C: K,4: 2)
KA and C

2c

Step()

24
d

2 K+ K,)

So, tone otion is cortect.

183. (d In the given figurc, the
metallic plates forms a
Step (2)
conbination of two Cpacitors
in series with one capacitor in
parallel,
20 Let capacity of each capacitor be C then equivalent
capacitance between a and b,
2C

Step(3) d
3 EA
2 d
184. (d) The simple circuit is as shown bclow,
2C A

4uF
Q
4uF
Step(4)

So, capacity between Pand Q.

Gp = XC+C =KC
Gu (2+ 6}uF= 8uF
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance (165

{6)The given combination is a balanced Wheatstone bridge in 190. (d) Shell cis nowcarthed.
parallel with 10 C
V,=0
Capacitance, G = 6x6 - 3C
6+6

AC 10 C
=
Capacitance C, 2C
4+ 4

=0
The equivalent capacitance between the points A and G 31

Cac = (3+ 2+ 10)C= Cxc = 15C

4
186. (b) Potential difference between two points,
Now, pxotent ial difference,
Kq Kq/4_ Kq= Kq
=
V, -V,
=(2r -4y]M0,0)
(
4-10V 2
3a
K(2Q) KQ 191. (a) Potential difference only depends upon the inner charge.
187. (c)
2 2
-
So, if the shell is given a charge of 3), the new potential
20
K(3Q) differetce between the sane two surface is.
2a 192. (a) The induced charges will be as under.
KQ_ 10
a 3 2a
Now potential of inner sphere, -0

2a 2 a 23) 3
-
188. (0 We have, V

" 120 9
2
Kq = 240 units Potential at point O(the centre),
When it is made to touch the bigger sphere, whole charge will
Vo =
transfer to bigger sphere.
v=hg4 =40 V
6
is r. According to Millikan, for
4n, Lr
189. () Let radius of drop balance
of drop QE = mg or 193. (c Potential at point P,
Q-|'o VKQ _KL(_9)
QE R 4zE,R x)
194. (b) Here circuit is equivalent to two capacitors in parallel

d d

mg Energy stored
=C V

where, Vis potential difference and p is density of drop.

886 x 10 x50 x 10 x12x12

600 3 x 10
Q/2
2400 2 = 2.1x
10J
166 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

195. (c) In figure, there combination of two capacitors in parallel

is 200. (c) Given circuit can be redrawn as

G
=G+ C;
Kfou/2), K£,4/2) 5 piF

d
-24,4/2), 4t,412)
d Step(1)
10 + 10 30 uF
=2x
2
4x=2 H HH
A
196. () Given circuit can be tedrawn as follows.
13
F
10 F -
2000 V
Step (2)
12 uF 8 ul
Potential defference betwecn A and B

9 uf i.e..
V

60V
V, -V= 1300
= 15000 V
2000 -VA
AB 500 V
V,

Equivalent capacitance of the cireuit, 201. () Given circuit can be reducet to

24
CAB = 4 aF
2+ 1+3
Total charge given by battery.
q=CAR V= 4
x60 = 240 uC
Charge on 5 uF capacitor,
=
240 s0uC
4: i.* For series combination of G.C, C
resultant capacity,
197. la) We have, K+U, -K
+U, 6C or =
C
0+0=m² +(-e)KQ
R Now the ratio of thc charges on Gz and C,
2K(Q 6C/11 3
Velocity. v= 4Gs
mk 22
on =
198. (c Charge first capacitor C(-)=-CV 202. (c Potential difference between two eqipotential surfaces A
and B.
Charge on second capacitor = (2CX2V)= 4CV
:. Total charge on both capacitors
4CV -CV- 3CV A

, Coumon potential on then -=V ke

: Energy =3Cv =
Or

199. ( Charge, 4, =GV= (15) x 100 = 1 500uC.

Charge, q, = CY= (0l x 100 = 100 HC
Similarly,
: Net charge, qat q +
4, =
1600 uC:
Since, r, <ro <lç, therefore, rao <roc
When dielectric is removed.
C;9.15 203. (c) We kow that,
qE = mg
Now, cummon potential, V=
I600
800 V
C;+C 1+ 1
 Chapter 02 Electrostatic potential and capacitance (167

or the charge of the oil drop, 207. (d Case I When the capacitors are joined in series
x
EAmg 8.85x10 x2x10* x2.5 \0-7 x10 1G (4V
5x10-1 2 n,

=8.85 x 10C Case II When the capacitors are joined in parallel

204. (d Current flows through 22 resistance from left to right, is

given by
Given,
V2.3V :1 A 16C,
R+r 2+ 0.5
2 ,
The potential difference across 22 resistancc,
Note For the equnalent capaCtance of the combination is equat t
V=lR= lx 2 = 2V separatian between, two patesie, d, d, and dielectrik constant
+ K.

Sincc, capacitor is in series with 22 resistance, so it also has

2V potential difference across it.
208. (b) P
The charge on capacitor,
+6xt0C -6x10-C
q = CY= (MuF) x 2V = 8uC
(13-)
Note The potentiat difference across 202 resistance solely occurs acrass
15 cm
capacitor as no potential drop occurs across 102reistance.
Let the potential be zero at point P at a distance x, from the
203. () The capacitance of parallel plate capacitor filled with carge + 6x10 Cat A as shown in the figure. Potential at P
dielectrie block has thickness d, and dielectric constant K, is 1
given by V= 6x10(-4x10)|
+
AnE,| (15- x)

16x10 4x10 |
Similarly, capacitance of parallel plate capacitor filled with 15-x
dielectric block has thickness d, and diclectric constant K, is 4x10
given by 06x10
15-x
d
6x10 4x10 6(15- x)= 4x
15-x
Since, the two capacitors are in series combination, the or 10x = 90
equivalent capacitance is given by
90- 6x= 4x
9 cm

The other possibility is that point of zero potential P may lie

+ 6x10 C
on AB produced at a distance x from the charge
at A as shown in the figure.
C KKA ..)
A

d +6 10C
4
10C
But the cquivalent capacitarnces is given by 15 cm--15)-

Potential at P,
On comparing, we have
KK,ld, + d, V= I6x10 (-4x10)|
(r- 15)
+
Kl, K4, 4x1o-1
= 3000 0= I6x10
(c) Minimum number of condensets in each row =6 *-15 |

206. 500
capacity of 6 condensers in a row, 6x10 4x10
If C is
x-15
4

Let there be m such rows in paral!lel. x-15

Total capacity = m xC, 6r- 90
=

4r
=
90 or
x== 45 cm

2=m x zero at9 cm and 45 cm from the

6 Thus, electrostatic potential is
zero at infinity.
m=12 charge + 6x10° Cat A Also, potential to be
Total number of capacitors =6x12= 72
168 O8JECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

la) The given circuit can be reduced in following manncr

209. (c) We have. potential difference, V, -V, =-E.dr215.
3 uF 3 uf 3 uF
Potential ditferene. V, -V, - Ae--4
=-[30xdr- 30

210. (d As the ficld is upward, so the necgatively ctharged 2 af

2
jF uF 2 uF 3 uF
electron experiences a lownward force of the .magnitude
3 3 HF 3 uf
of el, where E is thc magnitude of the cectric ficld. uf
B4 B4E
The acccleration of the cictron is a, Step(l} Step (2)
m,
3 af

3uF

3 uF

wherc, m, is the nass of the clectron, Step (3)

Starting from rest, the tine taken by the electron to fall :. Resultant capacity between A and B
through a distance h is given by
i.e.
2
2hm, 2x1.5x1ox9.1x 10-"
216. ld) Given circuit can bc reduced in following manner
1.6x109 x2x10*
=
2.9x|)s
211. a) When a charge density is given 8
uF 4 aF
to inner cylinder an electric field
willbe produced betweeu the iner
and outer evlinder. Hence a potential 2uF
difference will appear between the
two cylinders.
Be
2 Step (1)
212. ( We
tave, V,=

Electric fieid at x = 4,

Electric field, E =
20 (2r - 0) = 160 10
(x'-4) 144 8 uf

213. (b Net electrostatic energy. U= A, kq Q9

( 4 uF

Be
Step (2)

The value of Q = 8/9 uF

H
2+ V2 32/9 uF
214. (b) Potential at centre due to all charges, -•B
8/3 uF
Step(4)

Be
Step (3)

So, equivalent capacitance between A and B,

32

I4.9.9
4nE,d d d
d|
32
9
in CGS unit 32
The value of
=F23
C
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance 169

217. () The potential of Q at the surface 221. (a) AU =U,

A=., 4nE, R"
The -U,

,
1
potential of q at the surface A= ..9R 0.3 0.4 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.5
1KE =
8Kq4, =

According to the question the change in the potential

encrgy is )*

K=81
222. ()qA
The potential at B is due to O inside s9 When B is earthed
4KE, R

The potential at B due to q= Kqa, KIQ/2)

a d
-Qa
„Potential at A V, 9
4xE,R R)
When C is earthed
Potential at E V = V
=0
. Kg:, KQ)_ KQa/2d)
0
d d
4n,r R)
21 21
m
218. () Capacitance, C 223. (a) At unstable equilibrium position potential cnergy is
d maximum. But U = qV
When capacitor is half filled with a dielectric capacitance Therefore Cis stable or unstable, it will depend ofn the sign of
at C.
C-,,5)-RA 4 placed
24 24 21 224. (a) From concept of series and parallel constbinatien, we can
10
easily find that in option (a) the esultant capacity is
2uF
Percentage change in capacitance,
2cA
2 uF 2 uF
d-x100% = 20%
d
219, () We have, dQ
=-dr The circuit can bec redrawn as

10 f
.. Equivalent capacity, 10 x1 10, F
Gy +
dr
10
Potential of small part, dV =9 14nE, 21 225. (e) lHeat produccd =, -U, U,+ U,)-U, =U

: Potential at
P.
V=v= 4nE, 2
= 9,My -VA)
220. (6) Work done, WB U
-Ua
Potential, V -V, =-[Edr
dr = Final
-
fnitial
q Kq
=
Heat produced
: Work done, W,-,=o in 2C Iax 2a
2a-a
170) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

F
e-F.4 - = CV:
W
226. (c So, charge in 6 aF branch

Now, W- U, -U=*9K
2
Vn0-25
6
V

3Kq* and Vac 100-Vn 75 V

21

227. (W Applying charge distribution Law on C, and Cz at stesdy B.) Medical entrance special format
state. Charge on C
question
Assertion and reason
Charge on C, 2. (c) Electric potential of a cuarge conductor depents rnot only
on the amount of charge and volume but also on the shape of
the conductor. Hence, if their shapes are different. they may
have different electric potential.
228. () Given circuit can be redrawn as shown. 4. (6) Potential energy of a system of two charges, U =K 2,

.. move away from otber

When two pnt charges
hen
ther theive energy
decreases and work done by Fcan
always be expressed in terms of a potential energy, when the
particle moves from a point.
5. (d Psitive charge flows fron higher potential to lower potential.
6. () For non-unifornmly charged ring with Q =0.
V, =0 but E, 0
7. (c) Five forces of equal magnitude are acting on -Q. When
they are added as per polygon law, their vector sum is zero.
is C= 8. (d) Battery is disconnected from the capacitor.
Capacity of each capacitor
d So. Q= constant
So, magnitude of charge on cach capacitor = Magnitude of
Energy
charge on each plate =y. 2EA
Energy d
As plate l is connected with +ve terminal of battery, so
=
9. (c) Energy supplied by battery qV= (CV)V=CV²
charge on =+
Energy stored cv²
Plate 4 comes twice and it is connected with positive terminal
of battery. So charge on plate 4 = 2E,AV :. Energy lost = CV?. -
229. The given circuit can be reduced as follows. (Resistance
lo)
does not matter in considering equivalent capacitance).

Therefore, half energy is lost.

2 ufF 10. (c) Incrcase in capacity of a capacitor does not depend on the
conductivity of conducting plate.
11. (HC= hA Cs
d d
1

H
Gqk dkd/2
6
100 y

6x2 =
Again for capacity of a capacitor CG

5 100 = Thereforc, capacity of a capacitor depends upon the medium

Total charge, Q=CV=x 230 C
between two plates of capacitor.
2
 171
Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance

3 Charge on both will becone zero. J2uFx 8uF

10 uf
Hence, U, is completely lost.
14. (c) Wotk done, W=q = (%-V,) x1.6uF) xv?
Resultant electric pot ential at the equatorial potential 1.6 x
Therefore, % loss of energy =
100 = 804..
M-V)=0 2
W= 0 2. (c) Given capacitor is equivalent to capacitors K, K, arsd K,
in parallkcl and part of K, in series with them.
Match the Columns
1.UandFa
1

d d
3. A dielectric slab is then inserted to fill the space between the 2 3
plates and battery is removed then K (K,+ K, +
K) K,
Quantity Battery is removed 3. (d When a parallel plate air capacitor connected to a cell of
emf V, then charge stored will be
Capacity C' Ke q= CV
Charge
V=!
Potential V= VIK

Intensity E= E/K Also enecrgy stored is U

Energy U= UK As thxe txatlery is disconneted from thec capacitor, the charge will
not be destroyed i.e., q' = q with the introduction of diclectric
4. (A) Capacitance C in the gap of capacitor. so thec new capacitance will be

885x10 x0:20= 177 C'= CK

x1010
0.01
C CK
(B) Charge on each plate q = CV= 3000 x 177 x10-10
The new energy stored will be
= 531x10-7
(C)C= 2XK

AU =U'-U=!
531x10-to &85 x
10-1 x 0.20
0.01 Hence, option (d) is incorrect.
0.01-0.01+ K
4. (a) The equivalent capacitance between the points
P and N is
given by
531x10l0 x0.01
K= 2
&85 x10-2 x0.20
(10 + 2O) 30
Dielectric constant K=3

(D) C=1 531x10-7

C=
1000
» C=531x10-10 Chatge on equivalent capacitor having capacitance 15 uF is

)Medical entrance's gallery Q = GV = 13 x 30 = 450 uC

3. (b) As, potential of spherical charge (Q) having radius r is
1. () Consider the given figure,
When the switch S is connected to point 1, then given by V=
initial energy
stored in the capacitor can be given as
Also, capacitance,
C=

When the switch Sis connected to point energy

2, dissipated
on conection across 8uF will be
IfG= 50 x 1012 F, then
172) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

50 x 10-12 10, (o) Energy stored in a paralel plate capacitor of capacitarce

Radius of the sphere, rm atd separated by a distare d is
- 30 x10 *9x 10' 50 x)x 10
- 150 x |0" m- 0,45/) m 45cm If aalab of dicletric constant K and thickness d is introduce

6. () There are 9l plates fornming 90) capacitors, Ietween plates of capacior, then
AI the capxcitors arc connected in parallel.
The equivalent capacitanue
Gu 1901 C=
is

(0) 3pF) 270 = pfF

d-di-) d

7. tb We have, mg =
.. Thc new encrgy of the system is given by
I.96x10 x10
(2 d
E Vid (400/0.02)
The new eneryy of the system, U KV%
1.96x 10-l4 x
0.98 ]0*16 11. to) The tmc constant,
2x10' x us
= 9.8 xI0 6e
I=CR= 100 2
200
The charge on capacitor after tine t,
B. {b) approach. total energy of particle is
At disaance of clusest
conveited into xential energv. =
Let charge on a-particle is q, and charge on nucleus is q Acconding to quetion, q 0.99 C 0.99- 1

then in irst case

In (0.0
K 200 us
This gives 920 us =0.92 tS
(=

In secosd case, (let distance of clusest apprnach is ,') 12. ( The eqeivalent caacitances of each row of the capacito
2K=
1
94: ...(ü)
****

On dividing Eq. fiil by Eq lil, we get

These cajcitors are in parallel conbination.
So, the cquivalent capacitance.
26

9. ( Initial velocity of the clectron along xrdircction is given by um of infinite GP series, S=

13. () After separation ciatge is comstant.

A

(apacity,C
d
, =u, , ad ,
As applicd eleetric ficld is vetical
= = + a,
=VG 0
1, Capacitance decteases with increase in distance and V
=

e
L (:.=v Potential incteases with decrease in capacitance (C).
cEL 14. (a) luside the sperical shell potential is same

We can write, tan = i.e.,

dllhs
2s
Lan @ =
15. bsmut +

arar 2
or
!
<
As is Harne.

0= tan
4
las E,/M, VM
 173
Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance

(c)When length x of the diclectric slab is placed betwecn the 20. (c) Let the charge on the inner shell be q'.
plates of the capacitor, then The total charge will be zero.
G-5tx So,
Ka'Kq-0 (r, >
and similarly C yu.-*)
d
. Net capacitance, Cpet -G+ Cy =9'L+**- 1)
21. (c) Given, g 3 nC 3 x 10 C
Thus, energy storcd in the capacitor, and r9em 9x 10* m

2d
-L+ x K - D) We know that. potential due to point charge is given by

V=
x3 x10
4.9x10 -= 3x 10
17. (0 Ee O
and Vn=Vte 4, 9x 102
4nE, R
Electric potential, V = 300 V

V!
22. () Potential,

V.(9x10
x
(5 x 10-)
4300 V

0.1
23. (d) The combinativn of three charges in serics,

C G G
G¿G=,
1_1,1,
6
= 1.5uF
4
18. (a) Potential due to a uniformly charged sphere is
= 180
The charge of this circuit, q C
L.5 x 120 uC.
...i)
1nE, R The potential differece aCTUSS the 3uF
180 =
Also,
60 V
3
4nR
24. (c) We know that,
aR 1xQ
...(ii)
4E -Q
From Eqs. (i) and (iü), we get V=

Potential due to sphere (1).K=

Concentric spherical shells (R, > R».

Potential cdue to sphere (2), V, =
...)
4nE, R,
Net potential at centre, V={+V, R+)
...ii)
4RE, R,
19. (d Potential energy of the systen,
The common potential of the capacitors,

U= If the capacitance of two concentric spherical shell be G then

RR
=
1
q-2q ql-24). 9

1-224.4 25. (a) Given, G = 10 pF- 10x10F

x
C;= 20 pfF 20 1oF
V
V= 200V and 100
2a 8ztA
a where. G = capacitance of Ist capacitor
C, = capacitance of 2:sd capacitor
174) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

V= voltagc across Ist capacitor 27. (b)The electric field maximum at B, because ckctric field is
V=voltage across 2rd capacitor directed along decreasing potential V, >V >Vy

We know that, and V, = 28. ( Graph 2 will be the right graph, of the
ý= 4, =yG ...i)
electric field inside the dielectrics will be
less than the electric field outside the
..(ii) diclectricx The electric field inside the
So, cornmon potential of capacitors, diclectric coukd
not bc zcro.
V=9t9KG+VC, As, K, > K the drop in electric field for K, dielectric
G+C; G+Cz
must be more than k
× 100 x 20 x 10-!2
200 10 x10+ 29. (d As the capacitors are identical,
20 x10-1?
10x10l4 G=C =C
200 x10 100
10+ 20
+ x 20
G=G
G+C; 2

2000+ 2000 4000 Gp=C+ C= 2C

1333V
30 30
s=1:4
26. (b) C
30. td Given, Vy=120V and V = 200V
B
Here given potential is zero for each capacitar, then
Cý-C¥ = CV =
0: CV;:
G+ C,
Clearly, the capacitors form Wheatstone bridge arrangement. 120 C =200 C,
=
12C =20C;;3G 5C
31. (6) As F = mq = qE
G G mg
By symmetry. , =4 4, =45
E= "9
E
Also, Alko, E=
4=44=4; =4, 42=0 d
(10- x
10x1x102-2x10C
q= myxt
500
32. (c)when two mctal spheres are joincd by a wire, charge
flows from one at higher potential to the other at lower
Ae potential, till they acquire the same potential.

Hence, the bridge is balanced. The point Sand T are in the 15 mC

same potential. No charge can accunulate on C, which thus 4-4
45 mC 3
become ineffective.
Final charge on first spherc,
Between A and B two series combination (C, C,) and (C, C,)
are connccted in parallel.
4=9,t43)=x60 - 20 mC
3
Then, effective capacitance.
33. (a) Electric potential at their common centre is given by
CGG; 4 4
V=R+r)
Similarly, C=2uF
Hence, equivalent capacitarce between A and B is where, ois surface charge density.
C= C+C" 2+2= AuF 34. (c) ln the given arrangement, plate Q is conmon for two
Due to balarsced Wheatstone bridge arrangement, charge qon capacitors which are connected in parallel.
G7 iszero,
Hence, net capacitance between A and B will be 4uf. Cp =,d A_3e,A
2d 2d
 Chapter 02: Electrostatic potential and capacitance175

The given arrangcment can be shown as Capacitance between A and D,

Let V be the potential difference actoss the capacitor, which is
equal to thbe potential of the plate Q. 12+1 3 1

C, 4.5 9
-p =
d
C 3uF
Charge on C= (3jF) (12V)- 36uC
So, the patential difference between A and B
2d
Charge 36 uC
8V
Capacitance 4.5uF
38. (d It will act like three capacitors
which are connected in
parallel order, so cquivalent capacitance,
+
x
8.85 x L0
C=G+C, C, =3+3+3= 9uF
V=R8.853 102d
x
Potential 39. () Cy =G+ C =9+9= 18uF
A
3 x8.85 x 2
2 d 9x 18
C7+ C
9+ 18 =6uF
x x
2x2x 10 8,85 10
6.67
3x 8.85 x 10-12 x 2 Equlvalent capacitance between the point A and B.
Cn =Czs + C =6+ 9 = 15uF
35. (d We know that the potential,
40. (a) The given circuit can be redrawn as

12uF
Herc, ,and r,2r
So. and V, =
24uF
4xE, (2-)
Hence
9uF 18uF
In question V= 12V (given)
It is a balance Wheatstone bridge tyjpe network
So,

36. (c) Let the charge on the inner sphere be Q, then the charge
induced on the inner surface of the outer sphere is -
:. Electric potential V of the inner sphere is given by
. i.e.,
C,
. 24 jF capacitor can be neglected.
G 2

6 12F
But Va3

4 6
9uF 18uF

12 Hence, equivalent capacitance between A and B

» iarge on the inner sphere Q= 36 esu -4+6=10uF
37. (c) The given circuit capacitance between B and D is 41. (d) The given circuit can be redrawn as
6 uF = 9uF
G= (3+

4.5 uF
6 uf

Ce 3C 3E, A
12 V
21
 176 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

42. (d) The given circuit can be redrawn as 47. (c) The clectric field E = 3i-3} kV/m
Cy =4 8= 32uF
x
E=/26+9= 34 kV/m
)
d= 0-4' + (3-o
- V(6 (3
BuF
- (36+ 9 - V45
Buf
Potential dilference between points A and B.
V=E.d= V34 x45= 39kV
48. (d Force betwecn the plates of a parallel plate capacitor
v'A Q

|F|=
43. (a) 2 E, 2A
49. (a) Store energy in caacitor of 3 uF.

- x
54 10j
20 Store energy in capacitor of 4 uF,
If potential at centre is zero, then
y++V, +V, =0
*4*(6) *
10 = 72x 10J
KQ Kq, A20. 24-o When both capacitors are connected in series,
3 x4

44. (a) Let

-Q-q+ 2q + 20 0 Qm -q
Rand r be the radi of bigger and each smaller drop,
G+G, 3+F
Energy lost
Tespectively.

R'=8xn R= 2r ..i) 2x{ox 10 0

3

The capacitarce of a snaller spherical drop is Total energy =,+ U, = 1.26 x10J
C1 ...iü) 50. \al In given figure, G, ardC are in parallel.
The capacitance of bigger drop is (2- 1.0 uF
C=4xE R
=2 x4 REr ((:R=2r) C 4.0 uF
2C (from Eq. (ii)

f:C' luF)
C= 6.0 f
45. () Heat produced in a wire is equal to energy stored in
capacitor.
x (2009 8.0 uf
G
H-cv²-x2x10) G- 2.0 u

- 10x 200 x
20) =4x|0J +
C"-C, C,
4uF
(a) Volume of 8 drops = Vulume of big drop
46. As C
and G are in series,,,.
nR 2r=k ...5)
C"=2uF
According to charge conservatio), Similarly, C, and C, are in parallel C" = 6+ 2= 8uF
8q Q
C" and C are
...) in seriesm. 8
We have.
V or 20 2r CM= 4F
Now, C" and C" ate in parallel,
Potential on cach drop.V, 10 V C4uF+ 2uF m
6uF
PTER

03 Current electricity
We have read that the directional flow of charge in a conductor under a potential
difference maintained betweenthe ends of the conducto constitutes an 'electric
current' in tlhe contuctor. In this chapter, we will study about the basic properties of
elcctriccuurent. property of batteries and how they cause current and energy transfer
in a circuit. In this anaysis, we wili use the concepts of current, potential difference,
resistance and electromotive foree.

1 Electric current
Electric current is defined as the rate of flow of charge through any cross-sectional
area of the conductor. It is denoted by I.
If electric current is steady, thern it can be expressed by
Total charge flowing (q)
Total tine taken (r)
I9ne
where, n = number of carriers of clectricity and e = clectronic charge.
But currernt is not always steady. So, it can be defined in tuo uays
{i) Average current I a charge Aq flows through a conductor in the time interval

to (r+ A), then average current is defined as l

I

(i) Instantancous current Current at any instant of titne is called instantaneous

current. If a charge dy lows through a contuctor in snall tine dt, i.e., limit of
Inside Aq
= dq
1) Electric current
At tending to zero, then lin
•
Curtent density
Ohn's lw Important points about electric current
•
Cmbiration of resistances (i)Current is a scalar quantity.
3. Kirchhoff's laws (iil Its SIunit is ampere (A) and CGS unit is emu and is called biot (Bi) or ab
Electriual energy and wer
B ab amp).
anpere. jA|=
•Hating effert of curent
10
4) Measuring instruments fot
curient and voltage (iil One ampere is the current through a wire, if a charge of ote coulomb flows
Wheatstoe's britye througlh any cross-section of tle wire in one secod.
• Icoulomb (C) =
Meter bridge l ampere (A) lcoulonb per second = Cs
1

• Potentioneter I
second (s)
178 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS VolL 2

(iv) As a matter of convention, the direction of flow of Sol. Given, n =l0,e =1.6x 101 C and (= 0.1 s
positive charge gives the direction of current. This is As we know,
called conventional current. The direction of flow 10x 1.6x
of electrons gives the direction of electronic Current, I1, 10C160 A
0.1 s
current. Therefore, the direction of electric current Direction of current is from point A to B (in the direction of
is opposite to that of conventional current.
clectrons)

Exomple 33 A wire carries a current of 2 A. What is the

charge that has flowed through its cross-section in 1.0 s? How
many electrons does this correspond to?
Fig. 3.1 Flow electronic current is equivalent to the
of

Sol. Given, i =2 A and t =1.0s

flow of conventional current in opposite direction

(v) As charge is conserved and current is the rate of As, current, i

flow of charge ie., charge entering per second at one A) (1s) 2C
qmit(2
end of coductor is equal to the charge leaving per
second tlhe other end. Also, q = ne

Note . Numbcr of clcctrons, na! =

1.25x 109
1. In case a charge q is revoing ina circle of radius r with uniform velocity v, current L6x 10-t9
is given ty
Exomple 3.4 If an electron revolves in a circle of radius 2 cm

2/e 2r with uniform speed 6x 10° m/s. Find the electric current.
2. Total charge in time interval r, and (, can be given as
(Take, r² =10)

Sol. Time period is given by t

= Area under the graphl versus t in the intervalt, tot, as shown in the fgure

Here, r cm and
v6x 10 m/s.
2
109
So, electriccurrent, i =

U1.6x 10x6x
2zr 2rx
x
10-2
2
9,6x 1o-"A
Fig. 3.2 Area under I versus t graph
So, average current in this interval, Example 3.5 If the amount of charge flouwed in time t through
Q-dt Areaunder the tversus ! graph
croSssection of wire isq = Bt - y, where andy are corstants. B

Time interval
() Find the current in terms of t.
(ii) Sketchi versus t graph.
Exomple 3.lHow many electrons pass thrnugh a bulb in l min, if Sol. Given q= Bt - y?
the current is 400 mA. le 1.6x 10 C? (i) As we know, current in a wire is given by
=
I 400 mÀ =
400 x d
Sol. Current, 10A idg_ -y')=ß-2t
Tirne, =lmin 60s m
dt dt
Charge, e =1.6x 10- 9 c So, at t =0, i=ß
Thus, charge passing through the bulb in I min is and when i=0, then t= B
2y
q=lx t = 400 10x 60C
x

Also, q= ne
(i) To plot a graph i versus t, we will compare the given
.. current with the cquation of a straight line, Le.,
Number of electrons,
V=mx+c
400x 10x 60 So, according to this, we have
-1.5 x 10 electrons
1.6x 10-t9 y=p-2y !

Example 3.2 10*" electrons, each having a charge of Which mcans a straight line with
negative slope Le., -2y and positive
1.6x 10°C,pass from a point Atouwards arother point B in intercept, Le.. ß
0.1 s. What is the current in ampere? What is its direction?
So, the plot will be
Br2Y
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (179

xample 3.6 The current in a wire varies with time according lf area is finite,
to the relation,
i 3A) + 2 A/s)t
(D How many coulombs of charge pass through a cruss-section
of the wire in the time intenal between t 0 andt 4 s? where, dA is a small element of the given surface.
(i) What constant current wuld transport the same charge in The SI unit of current density is ampercper square metre
the same time intenal? i.e., Am and its dimensional formula are
[AL..
Sol. Given, i =3(A) + 2A/s)t
Exomple 3.7 An electron beam has an aperture of 2 mm. A
(i) Current through a cross-sectional area is given by i= total of7 x 10 electrons flou through any perpendicular
dt cross section per second. Calculate the current density in the
dq = idt electron beam.
On integrating both sides betwcen the time interval Sol. As we know, current density in the electron beam,
given ie., O to 4 s, we get
ne
A
Substituting the valucs, we get
7x 10x L6x 10*19
=5.6x 10 Am-2
2x 10
12+ 16] = 28 C
= =
ß+,
(ii) Therefore, the current flowing through wire would be Electric Currents in Conductors
The electric current in a conductor can be explained by an
t 4 clectron theory. In an atom of a substance, the clectrons in
the orbits close to the nucleus are und to it under the
Current density strong attraction of the nuclear positive charge, but the
electrons far from the nucleus experience a very feeble
Current dernsity at any point inside a conductor is defined force. Hence, the outer clectrons can be removed casily
as "the amount of charge flowing per second through a unit
from the atom (by rubbing or by heating the substance). In
area held normal to the direction of the flow of charge at
fact, a few outer clectrons, leave their atoms and move
that point." freely within the substance (in the vacant spaaces between
Current density is a vector quantity and its direction is the atoms). These electrons called free electrons or
along the motion of the positive charge as shown in conduction electrons, carry the charge in the substance
Fig. 3.3 (a). from one place to thc other.
= Therefore, the clectrical conductivity of a solid substance
Current density, I
2A A
depends upon the number of free clectrons in it. In metals,
this number is quite large (z 10 im'). Hence, netals are
Area=A Area=A good conductors of clectricity. Silver is the hest
conductor of electricity than are copper. gold and
aluminium, respectively.
A,
There are some other materials in which the electrons will
be bound and tthey will not be accelerated, even if the
electric field is applied, i.e., no current on applying
Fig. 3.3 Direction ofcurrent density electric field. Such materials arc called insulators, e.g.
wood, plastic, rubber, ete.
If the cross-sectional area A is not perpendicular to the
current and normal to the area makes an angle with the Drift velocity
direction of the current as shown in Fig. 3.3 (b), then
A, =A cos0
It isdefined as the average velocity with which the free
electrons in aconductor get drifted touards the positive end
:.Current density, J= or
I= JA of the conductor under the influence of an electric field
A, A cos0 applied acISs the conductor."
180) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

It is given by Number of density of clectron, n = 8.5x 10m

V= 1We know that electric field sct up across thec
conductor,
where, e = charge on electron, E = clectric field, 4 =
20 Vm-!
m= mass of the clectron and t = relaxation time. 02
The electric current relates with drift velocity as Mobility of clectrons is 4
E
i= neAva V, 4.5 x 10* x 20 = 9 x 10* s

So, the current flow through a copper wire is

neA ne I = nev A
= 8.5 x 10*% x 1.6x 10-19 x
Hence, current density is also given by 10x 9x 10-5
=1.224 A
A
ney, Exomple 3.9 An altuminium wire of diameter 0.24 cm is
connected in series to a copper wire of diameter 0.16 m. The
The direction of drift velocity for electrons in a metal is wire carry an electric current 10 A. Find (i) current density in
opposite to that of applied electrie ficld. The drift velocity the aluminium wire, (i) drift velocity of electrons in the copper
of clectron is very smallof the order of 10- ms as wire.
(Given, number of electrons per cubic metre volume of
compared to thermal speed (= 10m/s) of clectron at room copper = 8.4x 10B )
temperature. Sol.
() Radius of Al wire, r= 0.24 =
0.12 cm = 0.12 x
10 m
Relaxation time (t) 2
Area of cross-section of Al wire,
As free electrons move in a conductor they continuously
collide with positive ions. The time interval hetween two A=r-3.14 x (0.12x 10 2 4.5 x
10-m?
successive collisions of electrons with the positive ions in ..Cuent tdensily. J - 10 4.5 x 10-6
the metallic lattice is defined as relaxation time. A
mean free path =2.2 x 10 Am-?
rms velocity of clcctrons Vrms (i) Area of crosS-section of copper wire is
With rise in temperature v, increases, consequentlyT A=nx (0.08x 10" 2x 1om? -
decreases. Also, n=84x 10" m,e=l.6x 19-1 C,I=10 A

Mobility (u) :. Drift velocity of clectrons in the copper wire,

10
Drift velocity per unit electric field is called mobility of V= x 8.4 x x
u =
enA L.6x 10 10
x2 10
electron, i.e., "d " -37x 10 ms-!
E m
Its unit is m'/V-s. Exomple 3.10 What is the drift velocity of electrons in a silver
Mobility of free electrons is independent of electric field. wire of length 2 m, having cross-sectional area 6.14 x 10 m?
Exomple 3.8 Find the current flow through a copper wire of and carrying a current of 5A. Given, atomic weight of silver
length 0.2 m, area of cross-section I mm", when connected to =108, density of silver =9.5 x 10 kg/m, charge of electron
a battery of 4 V. Given that electrut mobiliy is =1.6x 10GAvgadro's number 6.023 x
= per kg atom?
4.5 x 10m'ys and charge on electron is l,6x 10 C.
10
Sol. Use the formula, I nev, A
The number of dernsity of electron in copper is 8.5 x 10* m. First, we will caleulate, n = number of electrons per unit
Sol. Given, letgth ol copper wirc, I 02 m

volume.
Cross-sectional area, A =l mm' =10m? Imagine the volume of silver to be I
m'.
Potential difference., V=4V Now, its nass = density x volume =7.5x 10 x
Im'
Electron mobility, u =4.5 x 10 m'sy! m

Charge of an electron, e = L6 x 10-1°C 7.5 x 10 kg

 ow, nunber of moles of silver
7.5x 10 x
7.5x 10 6.023x 10
=
108 x 10 0.0696.9x 10 mo! 108x 101
= 4.18x
So, number of silver atoms in this get by multiplying 10 per m
by the Given, I
number of moles by Avogadro's number. =5A and A=6.14x 10
m

Le., number of silver atottns 7.5x 10x 6.023x 10 So, we have drift velocity, v, =
I08x 10-! neA
= 4.18x 5
10° atoms
Now, sincc the valency of silver is one, we can assume 4.18x 10*x 1.602x 101x 6.14x 10
atom of silver contributes one electron. So, cach
fnally =1.216x L0 m/s

Check point 3.1)

1. The current though a wire depends on time as

6. When the current is lowing through a cornductor, then the
I- 34 + 2 +5 The charge flowing through the drift velo0city is v. If 2 current is
fioed through the same metal
cross-section of the wire in time from 0 tot -2s is but having double the area, then the drift velocity vill be
(a) 22 C (b) 20 C (a) v/4 (b) vi2
(c) 18 C () 5C v
(c) (d) 4v
2. The charge of an electrorn is 16 x
10C How many t 7. A metallic resistor is connected actoss a battery. If the
electrons strike the screen of a cathode ray tube each number of colisions of the free clectrons with the lattice is
second when the beam curent is 16 mA? somehow decreased in the resistor (fot example, by cooling
(a) 10" (b) 10 it). then the current will
(c) 10-19 () 10-1" (a) inctease o) decrease
3. A conductor carries a Current of 0.2A In 30 s how many (c) rermain constant (d) becCome zero
electrons will flow through the crOSS-seçtion of the 8. When current flows through a Conkucto, then the order of
Conductor (g =1.6x 10-" Cp dritt velocity of electrons will be
(a) 0 375x 10!9 (b) 375 x 103 (a) 10'° cms-! (b) 10 cms!
(c) 3.75 x 10'9 (d) 375x 109 (C) 10 cms-! (d) 10 cms-!

4. In a closed circuit, the current / (in ampere) at an instant of 9. The dritt velocity does iot depend upon
timet (in second) is given by l=4-0081. The number of (a) cross-Secton of the wire
electrons flowing in 50 s through the crosS-section of the (b) lengtrh of the wire
Conductor is (c) number of the tree clectrons
x
(a) 1.25 109 (b) 6.25 x 1020 (d) magnitude of the current
x
{c) 5.25 10'9 (d) 2.25 x 100 10. The nunber density of free electron ina copper conductor is
How long does an electron take to dritt from
m

5. Drift velocity v, varies vith the intensity ot electric field as per 85x10
one end of a wire, 30 n long to its other end? The area of
the relation.
cross-section of the vire is 2.0 x 10° axd it is carrying a
m

(a) v, «E Current of 3.0 A

(a) 2.73 x 10 s (b) 4.73 x 10 s
(C) V,constant s
(c) 5 x 1o x s
(d) 6 1
 where, p is the constant of proportionality known as
resistivity or spceific resistance of the conductor.
2 Ohm's law Resistivity is the intrinsic property of the substance. It is
independent of shape and size of the body and it depends
It states that, "the current I flowing through a conductor is upon the nature of the material.
always directly proportional to the potential difference V
across the cnds of the conductor". provided that the Exomple 3.11 The resistance of a wire is R om. What will be
physical conditions (temperature, mechanical strain, etc) its new resistance ifit is stretched to n times its original length?
are kept constant. Mathematically, Sol. Suppose the initial length of the wire is l and becomes I
c or after stretching. The initial cross-section of the wire is A, and
I V
VI becomes A after stretching. Then, initial volume of the wire
V= IR ...(i)
Al
and after stretching it will be A'. But the volume of the
wire does not chnging on stretching.
where, R is resistance of the conductor.
i.e., Al = A"
Graph bet ween V and I for a metallic conductor is a
straight line as shown. At different temperature V-I curves
arc diffcerent. A I
If the specific resistance of the material of the wire be p, then
T the resistance of the wire before stretching is
R=pl/A) ...()
If the resistance becomes K after strctching, then
0 R =p/A) ...(ii)

(a) Slope of the line b) Here, tan , > tan 0,

From Eqs. (i) and (iü), we gct

- tan - So,
Le.,
R> R,
...(ii)
T > T;
Fig. 3.4
Note The substances which obey Ohm's law are krown as ohmic substances. |R=n'R
The devices or substances which don't obey Ohm's law eg. gases, crystal
rectifiers, thermionic valve, transistors, etc, are kncwn as non-ohmic of Example 3.12 Resistance of a conductor of length l and area of
non-linear conductors cross-section A is R. If its length is dorubled and area of
cross section is halved, then find its new resistance.
Resistance and resistivity Sol. Initial length =l, area = A

The property of a substance by virtue of which it opposes So, initial resistance, R =p

the flow of current through it, is known as the resistance. A

Resistance is defined as the ratio of the potential Final length, I 2, arca, A'nA
difference applied across the ends of the conductor to the 2
current flowing through it. New resistance, 2 -=4R
R'
=pp7
A
Mathematically, R = V

The resistance of the conductor depends upon the following Unit and dimensional formula of resistance
factors The SI unit of resistance is ohm and is denoted by symbol2.
(a) It is directly proportional to the length of the conductor.
ohm N)=
1 Ivolt (V)
R«l ...i) Iampere (A)
=lvolt/ampere (or VIA).
(b) It is inverscly proportional to the area of the
cross-section of the conductor. The resistance of a conductor is said to be one ohm, if one
ampere of current flows, when a potential difference of
Ral A
...(ii) one volt is applied across the ends of the conductor.
From Eqs. (i) and (i), we get Its dinensional formula of electrical resistance is[ML’TA
Note Any conducting material that offers some resistance is known as resistor.
Roc ...(ii)
A
 Chapter 03: Current electricity(183

hductance and conductivity Sol. Let l= longest edge, b = shortest edge,

I/b4
ductance
Reciprocal of resistance is known as conductance, C
=R.
Its unit is 1/2 or 2 or 'Siemen'.

Resistance between different faccs of area

(i) Area, A
=(x b)

:.Resistance, R, =p
Fig. 3.5
(il Area, A, (bx h)
Conductivity :. Resistance, R, = pl
=R max
Reciprocal of resistivity is called conductivity a), i.e., bh
(üi) Area, A, = lx h)
Its unit is mho/m.
:: Resistance, R,
==Rin
The dimensional formula of conductivity is [M-'L-T'A?}
Rm_(46
Rmin b =16
Vector form of Ohm's law
Exgmple 3.14 Calculate the electric field in a copper wire of
Electric field in a conductor of length l and having
cross-sectional area 2.0 mm carrying a current of 1A. The
potential difference V at its ends is given by conductivity of copper is 6.25x 10' Sm!.
V= El
Sol. Given, area A = 2 mm² 2x
10m
Using relation (i) and (iii), we get Current, elA, G = 6.25 x
10' Sm
V= IR = Ipl - El As current density, J = - = GE
A
E=pJ .:. Electric ficld, E= x x
Ao 2x 10 6.25 10
or J =GE ...(iv)
-8x 10 Vm-!
The above equation is the vector form of Oln's law.
Also, current density, Exomple 3.15 A copper wire has a resistance of 102 and an
area of cross-section I mm.A ptential difference of 10V

J= nev = ne ekt exists across the wire. Caleulate the drift speed of electrons, if
m the numler of electrons per cubic metre in copper is 8x 106
electrons.
ne´t
J=m E Sol. Given, R

V =
=102, A =l
10V, n
mn
=10m?
8x 102 clectrons/m
Comparing with Eq. (iv), we get Now, electric current, I = enAv
g = ne“t Using Ohn's law,
Conductivity,
= enAv,
R
and resistivity, p =
ne 0
enAR
Exomple 3.13
Al he edges ofa block with parallel faces are
unrqual. lts longest edge is four times its shortest edge. Find the L.6x 10 °x 8x1o²x10-x 10
ratia of the maximum to the minimum resistance between = 0.078x 10 ms
=0.078 mm/s
parallel faces.
184) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Example 3.16 A current of I ampere is flowing through a Sol. 6) According to the question, we draw a figure given belo
copper uwire of lengh 0.1 mn and cross-section l x 10m.
f6) che secific resistanc eof copper Iel.7x 10 "2-m, calculate
f
the poxential difference across the ends of the wire. 2i
(iü} Determine current density in the wire.

(Given, densitv of copger = 8.9x 10 kg atomic weight m, We have,

= 63.5, N = 6.02 x 10 per kg atom. ,=A, l;
Sol. Given, I =1 A,l= 0J m, A =lx 10 m'. pl
p=1.7x 1o-N-m, d 89 x 10 kg m. Resistance, K =
.R, Pl pl14_1 z
A, 4zr 16

Resistance of wite is. R=p_1.7x 10"x O!

Ratio of initial to final resistance, R =16.
(G)

lx 10 R,
=1.7x 10N (iü)
Given,h=l, =AI, =l+10N of
.Potential difference, V
=IR =1 x 1.7x 10* =1.7x10*v =l+ 0.17 =1.14 A, = A
We have A, =A,l, Al =Ax1.1 x I
() Current density, J
==x A
10 Am Area, A' A
1.1
Example 3.17 Find the time of relaxaion between collision and Resistance, R -P,R -P2pxIx1.1„pa
free path of electrors incopper at room temperature. A A1.1 A
(Given, resistivity of copper = 1.7x 102-m, density of R
electrons in coyper= 85 x 10 mcharge on an electron =1.?
= L6× 10-C, mass of electron = 9.Ix 10 kg and drift
= 100 -a.21-)»:
velocity of free electrons L6x 10 ms) % change :100=21%
Sol. Given, p =1.7x 10*Q-m, n =8.5 x 10"
m

(iii)Given, 4 =l, A =A
e
=l.6x l0* C, m, = 9] x 10 kg,
V4=1.6x 10 msl
We have, ,=A,l
We know that, p =
ne' = 6! 5A
.:. Relaxation time,
Al
AA-: 6
m, 9.] x 10 1 pl
np 1.6x 10-19 x 8.5 x 10%x 1.7x 10-8 R A.
p
2,4.6//5 A 36
R 4 A, 5A16 25
=2.5x 10-"
Mcn free path of electron (distance covered between two Increase in the resistance,
collisions)
x x
=V=1.6x 10 2.5 10-4

Example 3.18 A wire has a resistance R. Find neu resistance. Temperature dependence of resistivity
6) if nadius of cross-sectien of a cylindrical uire is doxubled, then Resistivity of a material depends on the temperature. As,
find ratio of initial to final resistance.
(i) if length of wire is increased iy 10%, then find the percentage
increase in its resistace.
(ii) if length of wire is incteased by 20%, then find the percentage When temperature increascs in a conductor, average spe
increase in its resistance. of free electrons increases, hence relaxation time
decreases. Thus, resistivity increases.
Resistivity of a metal conductor is given by
+
p=Po [l aT-T,))|
 Chapter 03 : Current electricity {185

Lere, p resistivity at temperature T,po = resistivity at 1.2 =1.01+3.8x 10*T -20))

nperature T, and a is temperature cocfficient of 3.8 x 10(T -20) = 0.2
resistivity
Solving this, we get T=72.6°C
P-Po
PoT - To) Exomple 3.20 Resistance of platium wire in a platinum
resistance thermometer at melting ice, boiling wxter and at a
In terms of resistance, hot bath are 6 S2. 6.512 and 6.2 S2, respectively. Find
Rcp temperature hot tkath.
R= Ro[l+ a(T-To) Sol. Given, R, = 62. R =
6.52 and R, =6.202
R-Ro The working principle of platinum resistance thermometer (r)
is given by
R,T -T,) B -6 x
wherc, RR, == resistance of conductor at 0°C t -Kox100°C 6.2
100°C
resistance of conductor at fC.
Roo -Ro 6.5 - 6
0.2 <

100°C 40°C
Important points related to resistivity 0.5
For metal. a is positive as their resistivity increases with Exomple 3.21 The temperature cocfficient of resistance of a
rise in termperature. The graph of p plotted againstp would
wire is 0.00145 °C. At 100 C its resistance is 2 2. At ushat
be a straight line as in Fig. 3.6 (a). temperature the resistance of the wire will be 3 S2?
For semiconductor, a is negative as their resistivity Sol. Using the relation, R = R,l + aT)
decreases with rise in temperature.
R, = R,0 + a,)
Variation in resistivity with the temperature for
2 Rol + 0.00145 x 100 ..)
semiconductor is shown in Fig.3.6 (b). The resistivity of
and R, =Rl uz! +
alloys also increases with rise in temperature. The graph
Rl + 0.00145 x t)
=
between resistivity and temperature is shown in 3 ...(1)
Fig. 3.6 (c). On dividing Ey. (ii) by Eq. (i., we get
312
= 1+0.001452
istivity
100
|+0.00145x

I, =394.8° C= 667.8K

T
Colour code for carbon resistor
Temperature In electrical and electronic circuits, there are two major
(a)
types of resistors, which are being used, i.e., wire bound
isivily resistors and carbon resistor, offering resistances over a
wide range. Wire bound resistors have resistances upto
few hundred ohn, whereas for higher resistances, resistors
are mostly made up of carbon.
To know the value of resistarnce of carbon resistorS, colour
Tenpetature Ternperature code is used. These codes are printed in the form of set of
(b)
rings or strips. By reading the values of colour bands, we
Fig. 3.6 Resistivity as the functionof temperature can estimate the value of resistance.
for fa) metals, (b) semiconductors and (c) alloys The carbon resistor has nornally four coloured rings or
Example 3.19 The resistance of a thin silver wire is 1.0Q at
bands say A, RC and D as shown in the following
Fig. 3.7.
20°C. The wire is placed in a liquid bath and its resistance
R C
rises to 1.2 S2. 1What is the temperature of the bxath?
a for siler is 3.8x 10 per C.
Sol. We krnow, R(T) = Rll + a{T -To)
Fig. 3.7 Carbon resistor
Here, R(T) =1.22, R, =1.02
u =3.8x 10 per °C and T, = 20°C Colour bands A and B indicates the first two significant
figures of resistance in ohm.
Substitutirng the values, we have
186) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2s

B and C indicates the decimal multiplier, i.e., the number Equivalent resistance in series combination is given by
of zeros that follows the two significant figures A and B. Reg = + + Ry
R
R,
B and D indicates the tolerance in percent as per the
indicated value, in other words, it represents the i.e., equivalent resistance is greater than the maximum
percentage accuracy of the indicated value, value of resistance in the combination.
The tolerance in the case of gold is ±5 % and in silver is R, Ry
t
+10%. If only three bands are marked on carbon
resistance, then it indicates a tolerance of 20%. (i.e., no -V
colour)
R= AB x CtD%, where D is tolerance.
Colour code for carbon resistors Fig. 3.8 Reststances in series
Letters as an Figure (A, B Multiplier
If n identical resistances are connected in series, then
aid to memory Colour
R = nR and potential difference across cach resistance, i
Black 109
=Vn.
B Brown 10
Red 10 2. Parallel combination
Orange In this combination, first end of all resistors are connected
Yellow to one point and second ends of all resistors are connected
Green 5 10 to other point.
Blue Same potential difference appears across cach resistance
violet 7 10 but current distributes in the reverse ratio of their
V
Grey 10 resistance i.e.. I .So,the total current is equal to the
R
White sum of currents through each resistance.
Note To remember the sequence of colour code fciloning sentences should be
iet n memory. B B ROY Great Britain Very Good Wife.

Exomple 322 Hou will you represent a resistance of

3700 Q t 10%,
by colour code?
Sol. The value of carbon resistance =37009+10,o
V
±
R=37x 10* 10%
Fig. 3.9 Resistances in parallel
The coiour assigned to nurnbers 3, 7 and 2 are orange, violet
and reed. For t 10 accuracy, the colour is silver.
Hence, the hands of colour on carbon resistance in sequence Equivalent resistance is given by 1
are orange, violet, red and silver. Reg
i.e., equivalent resistance is less than the minimum value
Combination of resistances of resistance in the combination.
In n identica! resistance are connected in parallel, then
There are two types of combination of resistances, ie.,
series and parallel combination. Req and current through cach resistance is, T =
1. Series combination Exomple 3.23 A wire of resistance 6R is bent in the form of a
In series combination, resistances are connected circle. What is the effective resistance betueen the ends of the
end-to-end, i.e., second end of first resistor is connected to diameter?
first end of the sccond resistor and so on. JR
3R
Same current flows through each resistance but potential
difference distributes in the ratio of their resistance, i.e., B

VaR. So, the total potential drop is equal to he sun of 3R

3R
potential applied acrens tlhe combination.
 :
Chapter 03 Current electricity (187

As shown in figure, the two resistances of value 3R each This combination is in parallel with R, (=22).
*re inAparallel with cach other. So, the resistance between the Hence, resistance between points of B and LD is given by
ends and B of a diamcter is
×
11,1
Rx R, 3R 3R 9R? R 4 2
R= 3R+ 3R
R.
K+ R, 6R 2 1
6
R=
B
R8
Exomple 324 Find the equivalent resistance between A and
in the following cases

20 2,+ (in
B
ww R
50 2
Sol. (i)
Ad
s02:
wwt Now, resistance R, R,R, fortn a series combination. So,
resistanece betwecn the cnds A and E is

R=4++
3
4

B
R= 934 SQ

As per dotted region 30 Sl and

From the atove dotted region,
50 M are in parallel, Example 326 Find in the given netuork of resistors, the
we have 20 2 and
50 x 50 2500 equivalent resistance betueen the points A and B, between A
30ne in setles. Req 25 2
=
R= 20+ 30 s0 ) s0+ 50 100 and ).
42

32 20
B

From the dotted zegiotn.

B Fron the atove dotted region, 3
2 and 52 are in parallel,
4 2 and IN are in serics, R- Sol. Resistance berueen A and D

As we can see from the circuit, 2 and 32 are in series,

1

R =1+3 =42
8.
Now, R, and 5 2 arc in parallcl, R, 4x 5
4 +5 9
15/82
62 are in series,
=
Now, R, and R, 20/ 9+6=n.
Be
Hence, from the dotted region, we have 74 x2 37
8 2 and 15/80 are in series,
Now, Ry and 22 are in parallel, R, 92
Ry - 15/a 79/82
8

Resistance betueen A and B

Example 3.25 A letter A' consists of a uniform wire of The resistors AlD (=22) arnd IX{= 62) are in series to give a
total resistance - 8 1The resistance K( 82) and the
R

resistance ohm per cm. The sides of letter are each 20 cm

1

long and the cross-piece in the middle is 2 cm long while apex resistor AC (=52) are in parallel. Their equjvalent
angle is 60. Find the resistance of the leter tbetuven the tuo resistance is
ends of the legs. 5x840 o
5+8 13
Sol. Clearly it is given that, AB - BC (D =DE = BD =10 cm
Now, R' and 35N are in series,
and R = R, =R, =R, =R, =2Q
As R, and R, are in serics, thcir combined resistance 79
R"= R'+3= 13.+3= 13
2+2 4 S2
188) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Now, R'" and 1S2 are in parallel resistarce between A and B, 4L2 2)

79/13
Rx 1+ 79/13 92
92
Example 327 Find the effective resistance betueen points A
B
and B for the netuork shown in the fiqure belouw. 40

D 32 and 52 arc in parallel.

22 R 3x5
F
A
4S2 :252
22
A
20 13/82

Sol. At points A and Da series combination of 2 2, 292 Bew

resistance (along AC and C) is in parallel with 4 2 resistarce 40 30
(along AD), therefore resistance between A and D
22. 32 and 15/892 are in series,
=22
40
2+2 4 w

Similarly, resistance between A

and F 1
22
2+2 4

Finally, resistance between A andB= T

Bww 4

2+2 2 » 55/82 and 9 S2 are in parallel.

Thus, the cffective resistance betwecn A and B is Q. 42
3 T27

Example 3.28 Find the equivalent resistance betueen A and B 493

127
in the following case
B
42
Aww
42.42 and 495/1272 are in series,
92.
Reg 4+4-495/127 R:1511,
127

ww Example 3.29 Find the equivlent vesistance letween A and B

452 39

Sol
A
20 . 10
ww
(i) A • W

6R 9R 12R
99 32

Bw 32
B/
2R
2R
(ii)
As per the dotted region, 1212 and 12 are in series,. 2R
Rel+1+] =32
 Chapter 03: Current electricity 189

)
6R ¿6R
9R
R R :9R
R
$12R
12R 12 R;

Sol. (i) The points connected by a wire are at same

same poterntial or
points. Then, redraw the diagram, by placing the 1 1 1 13
Parallel,
points of same potential at one place and then solve R 6R
equivalent resistance.
for 9R 12R 36R 13

36R'L3
6R X
WB
12R
B

Series, Rg =R+ 36R R=3.76R.

13 13

Example 3.30 () Determine the current supplied by

the battery
the circuit as shouUn
;6R Parallel 4Q

12 V

9R 8S2 4 2 B2
A, Y B, X

12 R:
(ii) Find currents in resistances 22 and 42.

Hence, from the new figurc A and Y are at same

potential; B and X arc at sune potential.
1 1
13 40

R 6R 9R 12R 36R
R 36R
=2.77R 20 V
13
Sol. (i)
A

B
22
12
v 82 B2
{ii) Bww B

R
12 V
Similarly, placing the points of sarme potential at one 34 2
place, then the equivalent resistance is

:20 All resistances in the circuit are in parallel.

22 1!.l,!.!
Re
4 8 4
:202

:22 l+2+l+2_6_3
=
8 8 4
Reg = 4/32
Farallel. Ry
e10 So, current supplied by batery, I V_I2x3
==9A
R
190) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

4x 2 From the figurc, the two 82 resistanccs connccted in

(i) According to the circuit. parallel, 8x 8 =
6 3 parallel, cquivalent resistace =
42
8+8
62 These two combinations are connected in series, equivalent
resistance =4 + 4 = 82.
Now, we have resistatnces of 4 S2, 8 S and 4 2 connected in
parallel, so
I_!,!.!.5
1 S2
B4844
20 V
20 V Also, V=l2V (given)
12
R

=6+l+n Current, i= =15 A

R 4/5
20 x3_12 Exomple 3.32 Find the eqivalent resistance between P and Q.
:. Current supplied by battery =
25 4R 4R
In order calculate the cutrent in resistance 22 and 4.
to
we can redraw the circuit as
p

22
2r 2r

I-12/5A 62
ww ww
4R 4R

1
2R
16/5
42R
Pserntial iference acos NY, V
2RS 2R
5
2R 2R
22 and 42 are parallel across XY. Hence, have sarne
potential,
16 8
Sx2Aaxd l, =
xe 3xl6
4 4 5
Sol. (a 1t can be scen that, in this diagram is symmetrical about
PQ, so points on the perpendicular biscctor of PQ. i.e.. X, Y
Exomple 3.31. Calculate the current shown by the anmeter A in and Z are at sane potential, so in type of diagrarns, to same
the circuit shown in figure. the equivalent resistance, we can remove the resistances at
the sane otential, i.e., the resistatces between X and Y, Y
192 and Z. are tedundant, and are removed.
80 Series, 8r
82, 82
42 e**eties, 4r

R
Sol. The circuit given can be redrawn as ww wwww
...N........
R

Series, &r
8
82

4R 8R
82 82 ww

4r

8R
ww
Parallel
12V 4R 4r 4Rr
:: Parallei, 8R, 8R in
4R+ 4r R+r parallel, R
=2R
 Chapter 03: Current electricity 191

(ii) Similarly as option (a)l, we see thatthere is symetry 8R?

aboaut AB and X,Y and Z ate at same potential: remove
resistance betweenX and Y: Y and Z.
R=R 2
R+3R
2
2R or -R
Series, 4R Equivalent resistance between A and B - 2R (equivalent
resistance cannot te negative).
2R
14
2R

h 2R 2R Cells, emf and internal resistance

2R: 2R 2R An electric cell is a source of energy that maintains a
2R 2RY continuoLS flow of charge in a circuit. Electric cell
changes chemical energy into clectrical energy.
2R
2R Electromotive force (emf) of a cell ()
Seties, 4R
Electric cell has to do some work in maintaining the
current through a circuit. The work done by the cell in
***
moving unit positive charge through the whole circuit
www (including the cell) is called thc clectromotive force (em)
:
of the cell.
If during the flow of q coulomtb of charge in an electric
*****,. circuit, the work done by the cell is W. then
:
=
emf of the cell,
Iarallel. R,
Its unit is joule/coulonb or volt.
Exomple 3.33 Find the equivalent resistance betueen A and B. If W=1joule and q= l coulkomb, then c=l volt. i.e., if in
Aw
R R R
the flow of I coulonb of charge, the work done by the cell
is 1 !
joule. then the emf of the cell is volt.
2R 2R 2R

B
Internal resistance ()
Sol. R
Internal resistance of a cell is defined as the resistance
offered by the clectrolyte of the cell to the flow of current
through it. It is denoted by r. Its unit is ohn.
2R$ 2R 2R
Internal resistance of a cell depends on the following factors:
Be (0 lt is directly proportional to the separation between
Here, there are infinite pairs of R and 2R. Supposc, the the two plates of the cell.
equivalernt resistance is R, txetween Cand D, i.e., exchuding (in It is inversely proportional to the plates area dipped
onc pair ncar AB (since. pais are infinite, equivalent into the electrolyte.
Tesistance will reInain same, if we includc pair near AB.) (iin It depends on the nature, concentration and
temperature of the electrolyte and increases with
Parallel. increase in concentration.
R 2R•R 2R•R,
2R• R, 2R+ Ro
Terminal potential difference (V)
B
Terninal pxotential difference of a cell is defined as thc
Rey =
Ro =R
-

2RRo potential difference between the two terminals of the cel

2R + R, in a closed circuit (i.e.. when current is drawn fron the
cell). It is represented by ' and its unit is volt.
Ro-RX2R + R)=2RRo
2RR, -2R R,- RR, =
2RR, Terminal potential difference ofa cell is always less than
the emf of the cell. In closcd circuit, the current flows
R - RR, - 2R² =0 through the circuit inciuding the cell, due to internal
192) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

resistance of the cell, there is sone fall of potential. This is Potential difference (V) across the terminals of a
the amount of potential by which the terminal potential cell
difference is less than the cmf of the cell. (i) When the cell is in open circuit,
= E, i.e., V = E
V=Vy -Vo
Relation between terminal potential difference, emf of
the cell and internal resistance of a cell
(i) If no current is dawn from the cell, i.e., the cell is in
open circuit, so cmf of the cel! will be equal to the Fig. 3.12
terminal potential difference of the cell. (ii) Discharging of cellwhen cell is supplying current,
or V I=0 = V =V, -Vo = E - Ir, ie., V< E
a
(ii) Consider cell of emf E and intcrnal resistance r is
connected across an external resistance R.
w

E
p W

Fig. 3.13
(iüi) Charging of cell when cell is taking current.
Fig. 3.10
V eVp
-V =E +Ir, ie., V > E
Current drawn from the cell, I = ..)
Sourc
R+r
=
where, emf of the cell, R= external resistance
and r= intermal resistance of a cell
Now from Ohm's law, pL
= V
V
IR I= ...(i) Fig. 3.14
(iv) When the cell is short circuited i.e., external
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we have resistance is zero,
I= Elr
R R+r Ve Vp - V =E-Ir = 0 i.e., V =0

Charging of cell
Fig. 3.15
Durng charging of the postve terminal (electrode) of te ces is (orneted to
a cell,

postve termnsl of bunery tharger and negathe termnal (electrode) ot the celt s Example 3.34 The reading ona high resistance voltmeter
when a cell is connected across it is 3 V. When the
Charger terminals of the cell are also connected to a resistance of 4
Q, then the voltmeter reading drops to 1.2 V. Find the
internal resistance of the cell.
Fig. 3.11 Sol. Herc, E =3 V, R= 42 and V =l2 V
As, internal resistance,
(crreted to negative terminat of battery charget. In ths process. cuttert flows frcm
postve electrode to negatlve electrode of the cell From fipure abre,

Ihs, te terminl pctental díifierenxe ot a el

beccnes geter than the emf of the cel. Example 3.35 A battery of emf 2 V and internal resistance
Thepoteti! drop atrOSs interral resstarce of the cef s called lost voltage, as it is not is connected in series with a resistor of 102 through an
indcted by a voltmeler. Its vakue is equ to . ammeter of resistance 2 2. The ammeter reads 50 mA.
Draw the circuit diagram and calculate the vale of r.
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (193

oTotal resistance =10+2 +r= 12+r)Sn ihitil Sol. The equivalent circuit is shown below.
102
A

29
p

*****.

Now, current = 50 mA = 50 x 10°A

CH
and emf -2V.
emf
So, resistaNCe =
current
2
12+ r= x
= 40
50 10 Resistance in arm AB =19
r=40-12 =282 Resistance in arm PQ
1+1 2
Exomple 336 A oltmeler of resistance 9942is connected
across a cell of emf1 Vand internal resistance 6 Resistance in armn =152
2. Find the
pxotential difference across the wltmeter, that across the These three resistances are coinectel in parallel.
terminals of the cell and percentage error in the reading of the Their equivalent reistance R is given by
wltmeter.
R !!,!,! or
Sol. Here, E -1V, r=
62 E 2V
R
Resistance of voltmneter, =9942 Current drawn fron the cell, l=
R+r
Cell

Voltmeter
....
74
Grouping of cells
n
R-998
Current in the circuit is Series grouping
IV In serics grouping anode of one cell is connccted to
=lx 10'A
R+r (994 + 6)Q cathode of other cell and so on. If n identical cells are
The potential difference across the voltmeter is connected in series, then
V=IR=l x 10 x 994 = 9.98 x 10-V Er E,r

The samc will be the potential diffecrence across the terminals

of the cell. The voltmeter usd to measure the emf of the cell
will tead 0.998 V. Hence, the percentage error is
0.998 w
E-V x
100- x 100 = 02%
Fig. 3.16

Exomple 3.37 Find the current draun from a cell of emf 2 V

{i)Equivalent emf of the combination, Eg = nE.
and internal resistance 2 SN connected to the netuvork given (ii)Equivalent internal resistance, rey = nr.
below. (iii) Maiu current = Current from eaclh cell = I = nE
A R+ nr
(iv) Potential diffcrence acrass external resistance, V = IR.
(v) Potential difference across cach cell, V =

If external resistance is much higher than the total internal

resistance, then cells should bc connected in series to get
2V, I 2 the maximum current.
194) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Note ifdissimlar plates of cels are connected together their emfs are added (iit) Main current flowing through the load,
to each other while, if their sumilar plates are connected together their
ems are subtractive. Whle their internal resistance is always additive nE mnE
mR + nr
R+
E,
(iv) Potential difference across load, V= IR.
(v) Current from cach cell, I=
Fig. 3.I7

Parallel grouping
(vi) Potential difference across each cell, =.
In parallel grouping all anodes are connected at one point (vii) Total oumber of cells = mn
and all cathodes are connected together at other point. In mixed grouping of a cell, the current through the
external resistance would be maximum, if the
external resistance is equal to the total internal
resistance of the cells.
Exomple 3.38. In the circuit shown in figure,
E =10V, E, = 4V, =h =12 and R =2n.
R Find the potential difference acoss battery l and battery 2.
Fig. 3.18

If n identical cells are connected in parallel, then

(i)Equivalent emf. Eg, =E.
R = r/n.
(i) Equivalent internal resistance,
E
Sol, Nct cmf of the circuit =E -E, =6V
(ii) Main current, I = E

R+r/n
(iv) Current from each cell. I 2fitahal)
(v) Potential difference across external resistance R
= Potential difference across each cell
=V= IR.
If external resistance is much stnaller than the net Total resistance of the circuit =R+r+h =42
internal resistance, then cells should be connected in = Nct cnf
.:.Current in the circuit, I -1.5 A
parallel to get the maximum current. Total resistaCe 3
Now, ,= -l; =10-(0.5XI)= 8.3V
Mixed grouping and V, -E, + Ir, = 4+ (1.5X1)= 5.3 V

If n identical cells are connected in a row and such m rows Exomple 3.39 Find the enf and internal resistance of a single
are connected in parallel as shown in Fig. 3.17, then battery which is equialent to a combination of three batteries
E, r
Er E.r
as shown in figure.
10 V 2
n
6Vn

1
4V 2S2
Sol.The given combination consists of two batteries in parallel
Fig. 3.19 and resultant of these two in series with the third one.
Fur parallel combination we can apply,
(i) Equivalent emf of the combination, Epy =nE.
(ii) Equivalent internal resistance of the combination, E 10 4

eq 1,1
2
2
 :
Chapter 03 Current electricity (195

urther, Sol. As.

nr
=R
2 2
eq 5
nx_30 or n
=30
m
n x 1.5
Now, this is in serics with the third one, ie., Current, l
=
or 1.5 =: or n = 60

6V 3Y
2R 2x 30
m= 60302 and mn l20
1
2
Exomple 3.42 36 cells each of internal resistance 0,5 2 and
E- 3V emf 1.5 V each are used to send current through an external
circuit of22 resistance. Find the best mnode of groupingthem
re22 and the current through the external circuit.
The equivalent enf of these two is (6 - 3) Vor 3V and the Sol. Here, - 1.5V,r=0.52.
internal resistance will be 0+)) or 2 2.
E R
22
Total number of cells, mn = 36 ...0)
Example 3.40 Tuo identical cells of emf I.5 V each joined in For rmaximum current the mixed grouping.
parallel provide supply to an extenal circuit consisting of tu n x 0.5 ... (1)
resistances of 17 2 each joined in parallel. A very high R or 2
resistance voltmeter reads the terminal woltage off cells to be Multiplying Eqs. (i) arnd (i), we get
1.4 V. Calculate the internal resistance of each cell.
0.5 n =72 or
Sol. Here, E =
V
n=144
1,5 V,Vel.4
36
Resistance of external circuit = Total resistance of two n=l2 and m = =3
12
resistances of 17S2 connected in parallel.
Thus, for maximum current there should be three rows in
01 R
=
RR, 17x1o= 8.52 parallel, cach containing 12 cclls in series.
R + R, 17+17"
:. Maximum current = mnt+ 36x 15 = 4.5 A
172 mk nr 3x2+ 12x 0.5

Example 3.43 12 cells, each of emf 1.5 V and internal

1702 w
resistance of 0.5 S2, are arranged in m rows eoch containing n
cells connected in series, as shown. Calculate the values ofn
1.5V and m for which this combination would send maximum curent
through an external resistance of 1.5 2.

R-1.52

Let r be the total internal resistance of the two cells.

Then,
= 0.62,
(n cells in cach row
As the two cells of internal resistance r2 each have been Sol. For maximum current tlrough the external resistance,
connected in parallel, therefore.
external resistance = total internal resistance of cells
or 2
=122
r=0.6x
0.6 R=
Exomple 3.41 Find the minimum number of cells required to nx 0.5
produce an electric current of1.5 A through a resistance of L.5=12 (: mn =12)
30 2. Given that the emf of each cell is 1.5 V and internal
resistance 1.02
36 =n*or n
=6and m =2
Check point 3.2,
1. Calcutate the amount of charge flovving in 2 min in a wire of 7. In the fiqure given below, the current passing through 62
resistance 102 vhen a potential ditferernce of 20 V is resistor is
applied between its ends
(a) 120 C (b) 240C Ww
(c) 20 C (d) 4 C
1.2A
2. Ife, rand m respectively, represent the electron density. AAAAA

relaxation time and mass of the electron, then the resistance (a) 0 40A
A

(b) 0.48 (c) 0.72A (d) 080A

of a wire of length land area of cross-section A will be
In the figure. current through the
m m'A 8. 32 resistor is 0.8 A, then
(a) (b) potential drop through 4 2 resistor is
ne'tA ne'i
ne²rA ne'A www
(C) (d)
2rmf 2rmt/
3. The following four wires are made of the same material and
are at the same temperature. Which one of them has highest
electrical resistance?
(a) Length = 50 cm. diarmeter = 0.5 mm
(a) 9.6V (b) 26V (c) 4 8 V (d) 1.2 V

(b) Length = 100 cm, diameter = 1mm

{c) Length -200 crm, diameter-2 mm 9. Current i as shown in the circuit will be
(d) Length = 300 crm, diaeter = 3nm
4. Carton resistors, used in electronic circuits are matked for
ther value of resistance and toerance y a coloUr code. A
given resistor has colour scheme b Own, red. green and
gold. Its value in ohm is
(a) 52 10x
10% (b) 24x 10° 5%
(c) 12x 10 10% (d) 12x 10 5%

5. The polentiat difference between points A and B of the 32 10V

tolloving figure is
(a) 10 A (b)A (c) zero (d) infinite
w
3
A

10. In the circuit, the current flowing through 102 resistance is

20 V
sa

52 102
W
0.50
(a) (d) 2 V

12
A

6. Resistance of 6S2 each are connected in the manner shown (a) 12 A (b) (c) 08A (d) 0.4 A
in figure. With the cufrent 0.5 A, the potential dfference 11. It al
the resistors shovn have the value 2 ohm each the
Va
-V is Cquivalent resistance over AB is
65) 62
ww
0.3 A

ww w

(a) 2 chm (b) 4 ohm

(a) 3.6 V (b) 6.0 V (c) 3.0 V (d) 72V .2 (d) 2
2chm
(c) 1ohm
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (197

The reading of the ammeter as per figure shown is 16. A current of 0.2A passes through a cell ot emf 1.5 vol!
w
having internal resistance of 0.15 chm. The potential
cterence measured in volt, across both the ends of the cell
will be
(a) 1.35 (b) 1.50 (c) 1.00 (d) 1.20
22 17. IfVAg is 4 V in the given figure, then resistance X will be
100 ww
22

(a)
A (b)
A (c)A (d) 2 A A

13. The current drawn trom the battery in circuit diagram shown
(a)
52 (b) 102 (c) 152 (d) 20Q
29
15v Hww
www 18. Two batteries of emt 4 V and 8 with internal resistances 12
and 22 are corected in a ctcuil vnth a resistance of 92 as
V

shown in fgure. The current and potential difference between

the points P and Q are
4V 8
20

B
82 102
(a) 1 A 2A(b) (c) 1.5 A (d) 3 A 952 w

14. Inthe circuit shown, the point B is earthed. The potential at

V
the point A is la) A and 3 V (b) A and 4
3 6
v
A
ww
(e) A and 9v (d 5A and 12

102 19. The current through the 52 resistor is

wwwww

30

8V
(a) 14 V (b) 24 V (c) 26 V (d) 50 V
15. in the circut shown, potential ditference between Xand Ywill be
502 92
ww

(a) 10 A (b) 1A (c) 2.5 A () 0.4 A

602 20. TwO cells, each of enf E and internal resistancer are
Connected in parallel between the resistance R. The
120V maximum energy given to the resistor will be. only when
(a) R =t 12 (b) R
=r (c) R = 2r (d) R =0
(a) zero (b) 20 V (c) 60 V (d) 120V
 This law is also known as Kirchhoff's current law (KCL).

3) Kirchhoff's laws
Many electric circuits cannot he reduced to simple
series-parallel combinations. Kirchhoffs laws are used
Fig. 3.21
to solve complicated electric circujts. These rules are
basically the expressions of conversion of clectric Thus, in Fig. 3.21 accordingto KCL, 1, +I; =l +l
charge and of energy. For example, two circuits that The junction rule is based on conservation of electric
cannot be so broken down are shown in Fig. 3.20. charge.

Kirchhoffs loop rule

R

This law states that the algebraic sum of charges in

E
D C potential around any closed loop involving resistors and
E
E E
cells in the loop is zero.
It means that, in any closcd part of an clectrical circuit,
the algebraic sum of the emfs is equal to the algebraic sur
ta
of the products of the resistances and currents flowing
Fig. 3.20
through them. It is also known as loop rule.
However, it is always possible to analyse such circuits by i.e., EAV 0

applying two rules, devised by Kirchoff in 1845 and 1846. ckoved lop
The two tens rclated to Kirchhoff's laws are given below. This law is also known as Kirchhoff's voltage law (KVL
Junction The loop rule is based on conservation of energy.
A junction in a circuit is a point, where three or more Sign convention for the application of
conductors meet. Junctions ate also called nodes or Kirchhoffs law
branch points. For exauple, in Fig. 3.20 (a) points Darnd C
For the application of Kirchloffs laws, the following sign
are junctions. Similarly, in Fig. 3.20 (b) points B and Fare
conentions are to be considered.
junctions. (i) The change in potential in traversing a resistance ir
Loop the direction of current is -IR while in the opposite
A loop is any closed conducting path. For example, in direction is +JR.
Fig. 3.20 (a) ABCDA DCEFD and ABEFA are loops.
Sinilarly, in Fig. 3.20 (b), CBEEC, BDGFB are loops. -IR +IR
Fig. 3.22
Kirchhoff's junction rule
(ii) The change in potential in traversing an emf source
The algebraic sum of the currents meeting at a point or at fron negative to positive terminal is +E while in th
a junction in an clectric circuit is always zero.
opposite direction -E irrespective of the directiond

current in the circuit.

i.e., S i=0
nxtio B

This law can also be written as, "the sun of all the currents
-E
directed towards a point in a circuit is cqual to the sum of Fig. 3.23
all the curTents directed away from that point."
 :
Chapter 3 Current electricity (199

8
To calculate potential difference between two points
by using kirchhoff's law
Here, negative sign of i, inplics that current i, is in opposite
WNt Gsg these rases o cakvdre the porena dference, the foswngpants sudN directiorn of what we have assumed.
(onSered
Exomple 3.45 In example abuve. find the potential difference
0) Start from a pcirt on the lbop and go along the loop, eitther art-ccka:se of
dockaise, to reath the same pcint aain, bt bilance (uSTerts untcn per s thetueen pxoints Fand C.
t
KCL Sol. let uS reach from Fto C via A andB,
(9) tfmoang torg the directicn of the curere, there wil
be potental drop aross V, =V;
a resstance and it movng in
te cpposite dreticn, there wil be potential
+2-4-2i,
-V
=4+ 2i, -2
V,

Rain,

() The net sum of all tese potential differenres shoud tbe rero, usng the Substituting.
rule. and i,=-(5/3) A, we get
- (4/3) V
Non, let us cosider a citut as shown in Fg. 3.24. V -Va
E
B
E Here, negative sign inplies that V, <Vç:
Example 3.46 () Find the putential difference beuween A and B.
7V
A w

2 2
Fig. 3.24 (ii 22
Srom

()
panko pas
Path A8CD.,
D

-, + ,+
,R, , 20 V ov
29%

Exomple 3.44 Find currents in different branches of the

B.
electric cincuit shoun in fiqure. (a) Find the potential difference beru'een the points A and
connected.
20 b) Findcarent through 200 V cell. if points A and Bare
Sol. il 9 8V
3A
6V A
it:2v 2 52

When we move from A to B, using KVL,

4 S2 V-9-3x1-8-3x2-7=V,
V, -V,
Sol. Applying Kirchhoffs first law (junction law) at junction
B
=33Vk
..) (i) (a) 22
Applying Kirchhoff's second law in loop
1
(ABEFA),
20V
I +10V
4+4-2+2=0
law in loop 2 BCDEBL
...ii) B
Applying Kirchhoff's second
-2i,-6- 4i, -4 =0 ...iii) 2n 22

Solving Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii), we get

22

B
22, No current flows in the branch CB
as AB is not cornnectecd.
A i.
Let curtent in the circuit APSCROA he
Using KVL,
2-ix|- ix2-ix2+10-ix =V,
- l
4V ix
V,
-ix 2-20
10i=-10 i=-1A
i.e., direction of i
is oppositec.
20
200 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Now, A to Bpath will be APSCB (::V= IR]

+
V,-ix 2- 20-ix 2- ixI =V 5
=

V-V =15+5i=l5+ 5x (-1) 10V

(b) Now if the points A
and Bare connected.
P 22 The SI unit of electrical energv is joule (J). where 1 joule
20 V =
lvolt x lampere x I sec = I watt x lsec

Electrical Power
22 It is defined as the rate of electrical energy supplied per
unit time to maintain flow of electric current through a
252 R
conductor.
Resistance 2,22 and 12 are in series.
2
P=VI =1'R
Mathematically,
and resistance 1 S 22 and 22 are in serics. R
The Sl unit of power is watt (W), where
I watt = I volt x ! ampere =1ampere-volt.
20 It can be defined as the power of an electric circuit is
V 51 10V
135 , called one watt, if one ampere current flows in it against
12 a potential difference of one volt. The bigger units of
electrical power are kilowatt (kW) and inegawatt (MW)
where, 1kW= 1000 W and MW = 10°W 1

So, the equivalent voltage will be Commercial unit of electrical power is horse power (hp)
20 5 10 where, 1hp = 746 watt.

E5 51+5+2_11x5
1+5+1 Heating effects of current
5
.:. An clectric current through a esistor increascs its thermal
Potential difference between points A and B, energy. Also these are other situations in which an electric
V,-V, =v current can produce or absorb tihermal energy. This effect
is called heating effect of electric current.
Cell of emf 20 V.
When some potential difference V is applied across a
VA -Vy = 20 -5 resistance R and charge q to flow through the circuit in
55 35 time 4, the heat absorbed or produced in given by
7
=20 -5 5=20-=17
7
=
iRt =
=

Current through cell of 20 V, =17A

W
qVa Vit joule
R
Vi

Electricalenergy and power 4.2 4.2 4.2R

cal

Electrical energy where, J is the joue's mechanical equivalent of heat

(4.21 J/cal).
It isdefined as the total work done W by the source of emf
Vin maintaining the electric current / in the given circuit These relations are also called Joule's law of heating.
for a specified time t.
Exompe 3.47 in the circuit shown in the following figure, find
According to Ohm's law, we have the heat developed across each resistance in 2 s.

V= IR
Total charge that crosses the resistor is given by 32
w
q =It
39
Energy gained is given by
=
E=W= Vq =V It) VIt
20 V
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (201

The 6 and 32 resistances are in parallel, So, their (i) the power supplied by 10 V buttery.
combined resistance is (i) the pNIuer constumed by 4 V lattery and
2
or R=22 (ii) the tuvr dissipated in 3S2 resistance.
3
R 6
Sol. Net emf of the circuit = (10-4) V =6V
The equivalent simple circuit can be drawn as shown.
Total resistance of the circuit =32
357 212
.:. Net emf
Current in the circuit, i=
Total resistance ==2A
3
(i) Power supplied by 10 V battery = Ei= 00) 2)
-
20 V 20 W
Current in the circuit, (ii) Power consumcd by 4 V battery = Hi =(4) 2) = 8W
Power consumed by =
Net emf 20
-=2A
(ii) 32
resistance iR 23)
Total resistance 3+2+5 =12 W
V = iR = (2) (2) = 4 V Note Here we can see that total power suppied by 10V battery (ie.20 W)

= poner consumed by 4 V battery and

i.e., potential differcnce across 62 and 3 2
resistances are 32 resstance. Which proves that
4 V. Now, conservation of energ holds gosd in electric circuts also
392
Exomple 3.49 In the following figures, each of the three
resistances, the rating of 24 WV and resistance of 6 2. Find the
maximum pouwer rating of the circuit.
62
B 60
20 V W

6)
H0 =Rt (2 (3) 2)=24 J

Hso
Sol. To find maxinum current i,

R 6 3 we use, P=iR ==4 i=2A

R 6
Hsn =

=
3

(2' (5) 2)=40 J

3 Resistance betwecn A
and »+11, 6
B,

R
-
6 6 R=32
and Hso =Rr
and resistance bet ween A and C =3 + 6=9S2
If we make 2 A current flow through the given circuit 1 A
Electricity consumption will flow through each of 62 in parallel and 62 in series,
so now will fusc. This is maximum current circuit can hold.
To measure the electrical energy consumed commercially,
So, power of circuit = I'R =2x 2x 9 = 36 Ww
joule is not sufficicnt. So, to express electrical energy
consumed commercially a special unit kilo-watt-hour is
ILsed in place of joule. It is also called I unit of electrical
Power consumption in a combination
energy.
I kilowatt hour or l unit of clectrical energy is the amount of bulbs
of energy dissipated in I hour in a circuit, when the
electric power in the circuit is kilowatt. 1
Series combination of bulbs
I kilowatt hour (kWh) = 3.6x 10 joule () (i) Total power consumed is given by
Note Resistance of electrical appliance On electrical appliances (bulbs,
ceysers, heaters, etc wattage, voltage printed are called rated valuUes. P P
)
P,
The cesistarce of any electricat appiance can be calculated by rated
poner and rated voltage by using R = VIP,

Example 3.48 In the circuit shown in the following figure, find

10 V

Fig. 3.25 Series combination of hwo bulbs

3)
202 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

o V
« R i.e., in series Exomple 3.51 Tuo bulbs having rating of 40 W, 220 V and
P
(ii) Pcoeumed(brightness)
P,et 100 W, 220 Vare joined in series and altenately. () 30O Vand
combination bulb of lesser wattage will give more (ii) 440 V is applied. Find out which will fuse in each case.
bright light and potential difference appearing across Sol. We first have to find out the maximun current each bulb
it will be more. can bear. This can be calculated from rating of the bulb,
P=VI
Parallel combination of bulbs 40 =200 /
(i) Total power consumed is given by 40
Potal =P +P; + .. 220
=0.18 A

This is maximum cuITent 40 W bulb can bear.

Similarly, 60 W bulb can bear =0.27 A.
220
=
Now, find out resistance of each bulb, R
p

Resistance of 40 1W bulb = x 220 =!2102

Fig. 3.26 Parallel combination of wo bulbs
40
220 × 220 -
Resistance of 100 W bulb 4842
a Patet
1 , i.e., in parallel 100
(ii) Pconvumedbrightness) aIa R These are joined in series, so total resistance =16942
combination, bulb of greater wattage will give more Current in cach when joincd with 300V
bright light and more current will pass through it. 300
i.C., =17.7
1694
Applications of heating effect of current This current will flow in each, so now will fuse as the less
(i) Filament of electric bulb is made up of tungstern than their maximumn permissibie current they are joined
which has high resistivity and high melting point. under 440
V

in serics then current will be

0

26A.
(ii) Electric devices having heating clements like hcaler, 1694
geyser or press are mnade up of nichrome which has This curTent is less than maximum permissible current of
high resistivity and high nelting point. 100 W bulb but more than 40W bulb. Hence, 40 W bulb will
be fused and 100 V bulb will remain safe.
(iii) Fuse wire is nade up of tin-lead alloy, since it
should have low nnelting point and higl resistivity. Exomple 3.52 In the alove example, if we join the bulbs in
It is used in series as a safcty device in an electric parallel and 300) V is applied, which of the tun bulbs will fuse?
circuit and is designed, so as to nelt and tlhereby open Sol. When they arc joined in parallel and 300 V is applicd on
the circuit, if the current exceeds a predetermined them, then both will get 300V. Since, thei rating is 220 V,
value due to some fault. naturally current flowing through them will be more than
maximun posible. Hence, both will fuse out.
Example 3.50 Two bulbs having rating of 60 W, 220 V and
100 W, 220 V are joined (i) in series, (i) in parallel. Which of Exomple 3.53 Tiuo coils of power 60 W and 100 W and both
the two will glow brighter in each case? operating at 220 takes timne 2 min and 1.5 min separately to
Sol. Suppose both are used in 220 V condition in both the cases, boil certain amount of water. If they are joined (i) in series and
When they are in parallei, both will receive 220 V, so they will (i) in pxarallel, then find the ratio of time taken by them to boi!
flow with full wattage. In casc of parallel combination, samc the same uxaler in the tu cases.
voltage will be there, hence heat produced will bx proportivnal Sol. When joined in series, tlhen total power, P.
to l/R. As, bulb of greater wattage will giow more. Hence,
60x 100
100 W bulb will glow brighter. In case of series combination, 37.51W
same current flows through, henee heat produced will be R+P, 160
proportional to R P = i'R). As we know higher the wattage, When joined in parallel, then total power = 60+ 100 =160 W

lower the resistance, then 60 W bulb will have higher Time taken to toil the water will be inversely proportional
to power, so ratio of time taken in the two cases will be
resistance. That means more heat will be proxduced in 60 W
bulb in this case, so this bulb will glow brighter. 160: 37,5.
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (203

kample 3.54 Figure shows three identical bulls A, B and C (i) When the switch is closed, then the bultb Cis short
ich are corrected toa battery of supply ivltage V. When the circuited and hence these will he no current through C.
itch S is closed, then disctuss the change in So, P = 0

So, -p
R 4R 4

Therefore, the intensity of illumination of each of the

bulb A and B become 9/4 times. Tlhe initial value but
the intensily of the bulb C becomes zero.
() the illumination of the three bulbs. (iü) The power dissipated in the circuit before closing the
(i) the pouer dissipated in the circuit. switch is
Sol. When the switch is open, R =P,+P, +P =3P
Va=l=Ve =V/3 The power dissipatcd after closing the switch is

and - P(say)
R OR
-pp*o

Check point 3.3

1. The tigure shWS a netvwork of Currents. The current iwill be 4. A current of 2A flows in resistances as shown. The potential
ditterence VA - Va will be
\I5A 3A/
8A

(a) 3 A (b) 13 A 2A
(c) 23 A (d) -3A
2. In the circuit element given here, it the potential at point
B,Ve 0, then the potentiatls of A D are as B
and given
(a) + 4V (b) + 2 V (C) 1 V

(d) - 1 V

5. How much work is required to carry a 6 uC charge from

the
(a) V =- 15V, V, = +2 V negative terminal to the positve terminal of a 9V battery?
x
(b) V, =-1.5 V,
V, =+ 05V (a) 54 10-J x
() 54 10J
(c) Va =+ 1.5 V. V, (c) 54 x
10J
V, =+
+05V (a) 54 x 10-1²J
() 1.5 V. V,
=-05V 6. Two resistors R and 2R are connected in series in an
3. Three resistances are connected to fom a T-shape as Circuit. The thermal energy developed in R
electic
and 2A are in the
shown in the ligure. Then, the curtent in the ratio
42 resistor is
(a) 1:2 (b) 2:1
20Vw W
{c) 1:4
7. The resistor of resistance R is connected to
(d) 4 :1
25 V supply and
heat peoduced in it is 25 Js The value of A is
(a) 225 2 (b) 12
(c) 252 (d) 500
8. Just as electricity is suppl:ed at 220 V for
domestic use in
India, it is suppled at 110V in USA. It a
(a) 0.93 A resistance of 60 W
bulb tor use in India is R, then that of 60 WV bulb for use
(b) 4.5 A in
USA will be
(c) 2.5 A
(a) A /4 (b) A2
(d) 1.57 A
(c) R (d) 2R
204 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

9. IfR, and R, are respectively, the filament resistances of a 15. Two electric bulbs one, it 200 V-40 W and other 200V-100 W
200 Wbulb and 100 W bulb designed to operate on the are connected in series to a 200 V line, then the potential
Same voltage. then drop across
(a) A, is two tmos R, (b) R, is two times R, (a) the twa bulbs is the sarne
(c) R, Is four tmes R, (d) R, is lour tnes R, (b) Both the bultbs is 200 V
(c) 40 Wbub is greater than the potential drop across 100 Wbulb
10. The electrc bulb have tungsten ilaments of sarme length. If
one of them gives 60 W and other 100 W, then (d) 100 Wbuo is greater than the potential drop acrOSs 40 Wbulb
(a) 100 W bulb has thcker filament 16. One kiiowatt hour is equal to
x J x
(b)80 W butb has thicker filament (a) 36 10 (b) 36 10 J
(c) Both ilaments ate ot sarne thickness (c) 10 J (d) 10°J
(d)it is not possible to get ditferen! wa!tage unless the lengths
ae different 17. Three identica bulbs are connected in series and these
together dissipatea powerP If now the bulbs are connected
11. res:stor of resistance Ris connected to arn ideat battery. I
A in parallel, then the power dissipated will be
the value of R is decreased, then the power dissipated in the (b) 3P
(a)
resistor vall 3
(a) ncrease (b) decrease P
(c) 9P
(c) remain unchanged (d) None of these
12. How many calories of heat will be produced approximately 18. A and 8 are two bulbs connected in parallet. If A is glowing
in 210 watt electrc bb in 5 min brighter than B, then the relation between R, and R is
(a) 800000 cal (b) 63000 cal (a) R, = Rg (o) R, >Ry
(c) 1050 cal (d) 15000 cal (c) R, >R, (d) None of these
13. It in the circuit,. povwer dissipation is 150 W, then R is 19. Electric bulb 50 W 100V gloing at tull pOwer are to be used
in parallel with battery 120 V, 102 Maxmum number ot
bulbs that can be connocted so that g'ow in full poer is
(a) 2 (b) 8
(c) 4 (d) 6
22
20. Some electric bulbs are connected in senes across a 220 V
supply in a room. If one bultb is fused, then remaining bulbs
13 V are connected again in series (after removing the fused
bulb) across the same suppy. The illumination in the room
(a) 22 62 (b)
(c) 52 (d) 4

wil
14. wire when connected 220 mains supply has power
A to V
(a) increase
dissipation P. NoN, the wre is cut into two equal pieces
(b) decrease
Which are connected in parallel to the same supply. Power samo
(c) remain the
dissipation in this case is P,. Then, P, :P, is (d) not continuous
(a) 1 (b) 4 (c) 2 (d) 3

Ammeter
4) Measuring instruments It is an instrument uscd to mcasure current and is always
for current and voltage connected in series with the clement through which
current is to be measured. Smaller the resistance of an
There are various instruments like galvanometer, ammeter ammeter more accurate will be its reading as it will not to
and voltmeter which can be used to detect current and change the circuit current. Arn anneter is said to le ideal,
voltage, depending on the range. if its resistance r is zero.

Conversion of galvanometer to ammeter

Galvanometer
A galvanometer can be converted into an ammeter by
It isan instrument used to detect stnall current passing
connecting a low resistance (called shunt S) in parallel
through it by showing deflection. It does not measure to the galvanometer of resistance G. Hence, only a small
current. lt can be converted into voltmcter (for measuring amount of current pass through galvanometer and
voltage) and ammeter (for measuring current). remaining pass through the shunt.
 Chapter 03 Current electricity 205

nd Sare parallel and hence have equal potential Exomple 3.56 How can we make a galianometer with2
)erence, i.e., i,G = (i - i, )S. G= 202 and i, = 1 m4 into a oltmeter with a maximum
runge of10 V
Sol. Using

=
We have, R-20 9980n
10

Thus, a resistance of 9980 Qis to be connected in series with

Fig. 3.27 Ammeter
the galvanometer to convert it into the voltmeter of desired
range.
Required resistance, S =
Wheatstone bridge
Example 3.55 What sunt resistance is regired to make the It isan arrangement of four resistances used to measure one
1
mA, 20 2 galvanometer into an ammeter uwith a range of O to of them in terms of the other three as shown in Fig. 3,29,
50 mA?
Sol. Hete, i, =1mA= 10 A, G=20Q

i= 50x 10- A

Substituting in S :

(10) (2O)
(30x 10)-(10-)
=0.408Q
Fig. 3.29A Wheatstone bridge
Voltmeter The bridge is said to he balanced when deflection in
It is a device used to measure potential differernce and is galvanometer is zero U, = 0), i.e.,no current flows
always connected in parallel with the circuit element through thc galvanomcter (branch BD). In the balanced
across wlhich potential difference is to be tneasured. condition,
Greater the resistance of voltneter, more accurate will be
the reading, as only small anournt of current pass through Q s
it, by not changing the circuit current. A voltmeter is said
to be ideal, if its resistance is infinite. On mutually changing the position of cell and galvanometer,
this condition will not change.
Conversion of galvanometer into voltmeter Note Different forms of iheatstone brdge.
A galvanometer can be converted into voltmeter by
connecting a large resistance R in series with the
galvanometer.

Fig. 3.28 Voitmeter

According to Ohm's law, V = i,(G + R)

or required resistance,
R=-G w
Fig. 3.30
 206 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Exomple 3.57 Find out the magnitude of resistance X in the E K

circuit shouwn in fiqure, when no current flows through the 52

resistor. S

6V scale
lo Meter 1001
182 Iuulututuuluh

2
00-0
Sol. As no current flows through the middle 3 SQ resistor. the
circuit represents a balanced Wheatstone bridge. Fig. 3.3I Measuring unknown resistance using meter bridge
A 2 or 2 x 18
X =62 :: At balancing situation of bridge,
18 6 6
R S= l00
Example 3.58 Calculate the current drawn from the battery by
Q
s 100 -1
the netuork resistors shoun in figure.
of

Applications of meter bridge

29 (i) It is used to neasure an unknown resistance from
52 D 49 RU00 -)
R
S:

2)
(ii) To compare the two unknown resistances
R
S 100
Sol.The given nctwork is cquivalent to the circuit shown in Example 3.59 In the following circuit. a meter bridge is sheun
figure.
in its balanced state. The meter bridge wire has a resistance of
12-cm. Calculate the xlue of the tnknoum resistance X and
the current draun from the battery of negligible internal
resistance.
Sol. In balanced condition, no current flows through the
24 galvanoneter.
Here, P= resistance of wire AJ = 402
=
H
Q= resistarke of wire BJ 602
=

4V
R=X,S 62
60
192 22 Ww
Now,
22 492
-40 cm E) cm
Le., P_R A
R

The given circuit is a balanced Wheatstone bridge. The

resistance of 52 in arm BD is incffcctive. The cquivalent
In the balanced condition,
circuit reduces to the circuit shown in figure.
PR 40 X or
Qs G0
X= 4Q
Meter bridge
Total resistance of wire AB=1002
A meter bridge is slide wire bridge or Carey Foster Total resistance of resistaIces X and 6 2 connected in series
bridge. It is an instrunent work on the principle of =4+6
=
102
Wheatstone bridge. This series combination is in parallel with wire AB.
It consists of a straight and uniform wire along a meter 10x 100 100
.Equivalent resistance
scale (AC) and by varying the taping point Ba shown in 10+ 100 11

Fig. 3.31, the bridge is balanced.

 :
Chapter O3 Current electricity (207

mí
the hattery =6V
of
Current drawn from the battery.
Potentiometer
emf 6 The potentiometer is an instrunent that can be used to
=0.66 A measure the emf or the internal resistance of an unknown
resistance 100 /11
source. It is a device which does not draw any current
Example 3.60 The given figure shous the experimental set up through the circuit to measure the potential difference.
of a meter bridge. The nuil point is foxund to be 6) cmn away
from the end A with X and in position as slown. When a
Y llence, it is cquivalent to an ideal voltnneter. It also has a
number of other useful applications.
resistance of 152 is connected in series uithY, then the null
point is found to shift ly 10 cm towards the end A of the wire.
Find the position of mll point, if a resistance of 302 were
connected in parallel with Y.
Y

lel200

A
Meter rod R

Fig. 3.32 Potentiometer

Sol. In first casc,
60
or
Principle of potentiometer
Y 40 The principle of potentiometer that, when through a
is
In second case,
wire of uniform cross-section and composition, a constant
amount of current flows, then the potential drop across the
50 wire is directly proportional to its length, i.e.,
XY+15_3 Val V= kl ...)
where, k is the constant of proportionality.
Also, by Ohm's law,
2
V= IR =p .(i1)
Y =302 A
x 30 =45n
If the cuTent / is constant, then would be constant.
When a resistance of 302 is connected in parallel with Y, A
then the resistance in the right gap becomes So, comparing Eqs. (i) and (i), we will have
30Y 30 x 30 -15Q
30+ Y 30 + 3O kep
A
Supose the null point occurs at / cm from end A. By putting this in Eq. (i)
Then,
V= kl, the principle of potentiometer.
15 '*' is also known as potential gradient, which means
potential drop per unit length of the potentiometer wire
45 V
15 100-! i.e.,

300-3/ =|
The SI unit of potential gradiernt is Vm
4l =300
and CGS unit is Vem'.
I= 75 cm
208 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Applications of potentiometere
) compare the emfs of two cells
To
Consider two cells of emfs E, and E, is to be compared.
The positive poles of both the cells are connected to
terminal A of potentiometer and the neyative pole of both
a
cells are connected to lerminals and 2 of 2-way key,
1

while its coMmon terminal is connected to a jockey J

through a galvanometer G. A battery E, ammeter A,
rheostat R, and 1-way kev K are connectcxl between the
terminals A and Bof the potentiometcr. -GR
Fig. 3.34 Circuit for determining internal resistance of cell

Ifthe plug in kev K, is kept out and the jockev J is movec

400
B O
on the potentiometer wire to balance the emf F of the ccll
whose internal resistance r is to be determincd.
,
Suppose be the balancing length of the potentiometer
per
wire between point A and jockey J. If x is resistance
unit length of wire, then enf of cell is given by
E = xl,
Metet Itl
Introduce some resistance, savs fromthe resistance box
S

and now put in the plug key K,. The potential difference
V between the two poles of the cell is given by
Fig. 3.33 Circuit for comparing emf's of wo cells
V= xl! ...ii)
Now to compare emfs of two cells having constant
a
I:: = balancing length
h
current passing through the wire between terminals A and On dividing Eq. (i) by Eq. (ii), we havc
B. The current is kept constant by using rheostat. If the

plug is put in the gap between terminals and of 2-way

1 3

key, then the emf E, of the cell is given by

=
E, (xl,)I .i)
The internal resistance of the cell is given by
where, x=resistance per unit length of potentiometer wire
= balancing length)
[:,
Now, when the key put in the gap between terminals 2
is
gap between I and 3, Now, substituting values of
E
in above equation, we ge
and 3 after removing from the
it

then the enf E, is given by

E; = (xl,)I (:,= balancing length) ...ii)

From Egs. (i) and (ii), we have where, Sis the resistance of the resistance box.

E4 Note
L
The sensitveness of potentiometer means the smallest potential ditferenc
that can be measured with its telp
compare unknown resistances and t
measure internal resistance of a cell
(ii) To 4poeoeter Can ais0 De used to
an ammeter
voltmeter
a E. Let on the potentiometer wire, if the fatl of potent
Now, to find the internal resistance rof cell of emf 3 A balance point is obtaned
driving cell is greater than the emf of tr
E' be enmf of the battery. A constant current l
is maintained along the potentiometer wire due to
with the help of rheostat. cell to be balanced
through the potentiometer wire
 Chapter 03 Current electricity (209

komple 3.61 A potentiometer wire is t0 m long and has a V

E if no current is drawn from the lattery
sistance of 182. I is connected to a bottery of emf 5Vand
ternal resistance 2 S2. Calculate the potential grodient along or
R+ R

the wire. =
Here, E n2V, R
10
Sol Here, I= 10 m ,R=182, F =5V, r = 20
Current through the potentiometer wire,

and E=10x 10 y
R+ 18+2
Substituting in alxove, we get
. Potential gradient==* =0.45Vm! R 790 2
I 4 10
Example 3.65 AB is I m long uniform wire of 10 2 resistance.
Example 3.62 A cell can be balanced against 1 10 cm and
Other data are as shoun in figure. Calculate (i) potential
100 cm of potentiometer wire respectively. when in open circuit gradient along AB and (ii) length A0, when galunometer
and whern short circuited throrugl a resistance of 102 Find the shous no deflectiorn.
internal resistance of the cell.
, =110 cm. I, =100 cn, R = 102 and
Sol. Given. r=? 2V 59
110-10O x 10
100
=1
1.202
wwwwds
1.5V

Example 3.63 In a potentiometer arrangement, a cell of emf 0.3)

2.25 V givs a balance point at 30.0 cm length of the wire.
If the cell is replaced by another cell and the halance point Sol. () Total resistance of the primary circuit
shifts to 60.0 cm, tlhen what is the emf of the second cell? -15+ 10 =252 emf -2V
Sol. Hee, E =2.25 =30.0 cm, ten
V.
. Current in the wire AB.
60.0cm, E, =?
=
I,
As we know that in case of potentioneter, the potential
I==0.08
25
A

Kradicnt remains constant. Potential difference across the wire AB

So, = (Current x Resistance of wie AB
2.25 30.0 =0.08 x 10= 0.8V
E, 60.0 Potential gradient
E, 23x60 Potential difference 0.8 cm
=4.5 V a0,008 V

30 Length 100
Example 3.64 A potentiumeter wire of length 100 cm has a (i) Resistance of secondary cireuit = 1.2+ 0.3 =1.5M
resistance of 10S2. I is comected in series with a resistunce emf = 1.5V
and a cell of emf 2 V and of negligible inteutl resistance. A 1.5
source of enf 10 mVis bulanced aginst length of 40 cm of Current in the sccondary circuit = -1.0A
1.5
the potentiometer urire. What is the vale of extemal resistance? samne is
The the current in 0.3 S2 resistor.
Sol. Fron the theory of potentioneter.
Potential ifference between oints A and )
= Potential difference across 0.3 S2 resistor in the zero
deflection condition
WA =Curent x Resistance
R =
1.0x 0.3 0.3 V
difference
Length AOPotential
abwwwwwwwws Potential gradient
0.3V
=37.5 cm
0.008 V cm
Check point 3.4)
shown, A and V are idcal ammeter and
1. In the circuit 6. What is the reading of voltrneter in the figure?
voltmeter. respectively Reading of the voltmeter vill be 10V

100052
A V

5002 5009)

(a) 2 V (b) 1 V (a) 3V V (d) 4 V

(b) 2 (c) 5V
(c) 0.5V (d) zero
7. A gavanometer of 25 2 and havng tull scale detlection for a
2. The net resistance of a voltmeter should be large to ensure current of 10 mA is changed into voltmeter of range 100 V by
that connecting a resistance R in series with the galvanometer.
(a) it does nct get overheated The resistance R in ohm is
it does not draw enmissive current (a) 10000 (b) 975
it can neasure large potental ditference (c) 10025 (d) 9975
(d) 4 does not appreciably change the potential difference to be
8. An ammeter and a voltmeter are joined in senies to a cell.
measured Their readngs are A and V. respectively. If a resistance is
3. Tvo galvanometers A and B require 3 mA and 6 mA ncow joined in parallel vitth the voltmeter
respectively. to produce the sarne deflection of 10 divisions V
(a) BothA and wll decrease
Then, (b) BothA and V
will
increase
s
(a) A more sensitve than8 (c) A wlt decrease, V will increase
(b) Bis more sensitve than A vill increase, V
A

decrease
wi

A and B are equally sensitve

9. In the circuit shoNn in the figure. the voltmeter reading is
(d) sensitveness of 8 iS twice that ot A

4. An ammeter A, a voltmeter V ard a resistance R are

connected as shown in the figure. If the voltmeter reading is
1.6 V and the ammeter reading is 0 4 A, then R is

40 2
W

equal to 42
V
(b) greater than 42 (a) 2.4 V (b) 34
(c) less than 4 n 32 and 42
(d) between (c) 4.0 V (d) 60V
5. In the tollavang ciicuit, the em! of the ce is 2 Vand the 10. To send 10% of the rmain current through a moving coi!
internal resistance is negligible. The resistance ot the galvanometer of reststance 992. the shunt required is
voltmeter is 802 The reacding of the voltmeter will be (a) 995 (b) 10s
(c) 112 (d) 90
11. The potential dilterence 9002ww
across the 100 2
802
resistance in the circuit is
measured by a voltmeter of W

9002 resistance. 109 1002

202 802
The percentage error made
ww

in reading the potential

(a) 0.80V (b) 1.60 V ditterence is
V
(c) 1.33 10
(d) 2.00 V (a) (b) 0.1 (c) 1.0 (d) 10.0
9
 :
Chapter 03 Current electricity 211

2. A microammeter has a resistarce of 1002 and a full scale 17. A potentiometer is used for the comparison of emf of two
range of 50 1A, It can be used as a votmeter as a higher celis E, and E,. For cell E,. the no defection point is
range ammeter provided a tesistance is added to it. Pick the obained at 20 cm and for E2, the no deflection point is
correct range and resistance combenations. cbtained at 30 cm. The ratio of their emfs will be
(a) 50 V range with 10 2 resitance in senes (a) 23
(b) 10 V tange wth 200 K2resstance in series (b) 3/2
(c) 10 mA range with 12 resistance in parallel (C) 1
(d) Nore of the above (d) 2
13. The percentage error in measuring resistance with a meter 18. In a potentiometer experiment, the galvanometer shows no
bridge can be minimized by adjusting the balancing point deflection when a cell is connected across 60 cm of the
close to potentiometer vire. It the cell is shunted by a resistance of
(a) 20 cm (b) 50 cm (c) 80 cm (d) 100 cm 62, the balance is obtained across 50 cm of the wire. The
14. When an additional resistance of 1980 is connected in internal resistance of the cell is
series wth a voltmeter, then the scale division reads (a) 052
100 times larger value. Resistance of the oltmeter is (b) 0.6N
(a) 102 (b) 20s2 (c) 30S2 (d) 402 (c) 1.22
(d) 1.52
15. In the given circuit, it is observed that the current / is
independent ot the value of the resistance Re. Then, the 19. A resistance of 4 2 and a wire of length 5 m and resistance
tesistance values ust satisty 52 are joned in senes and connected to a cell of emf 10V
and internal resistance 1 2. A parallel combination of two
R
identical cells is balanced across 3 m of the wire. The emf E
of each cell is
R
Rs 4
2 10V
w

R R

52,5 m
1 1 1
(a) A,A,R, =RyR,R; (b) R, R, A, + R, R, + Ra

(c) R,R, = R,R (d) A,R, = R,R, = R,R6

16. AB is a wire of uniform resistance. The gavanometer G (a) 1.5 V
shows no Ccurrent when the length AC -20 cm and (b) 3.0 V
80 cm.
CB The resistance R is equal to (c) 067V
(d) 1.33V
ww 809 w

20. Potent:ometer vete of length 1 m is connected in series with

490 2 resistance and 2 V battery If 0.2 mV/ cm is the
potential gradient, then the resistance of the poterntiometer
Vre is
(a) 4.9?
H
(b) 7.9
(c) 5.9
(a) 3202 (b) 82 (c) 202 (d) 402
(d) 6.92
Chapter
exerciSes
A.) Taking it together
(Assorted questions of the chapter for advonced level practice)

1. The tcrninal potential difference of a cell is greater 8. Conductivity increases in the order of
than its emí when it is ia) Al, Ag, Cu (b) Al, Cu, Ag
(a) being discharged {c) Cu, AI, Ag (d) Ag, Cl, Al
(b) open circuit 9. By mistake, a voltmeter is connected in series and an
(c) being charged
ammeter parallel. When the circuit is switched on
ld) being cither charged or discharged (al Both ammcter and voltmeter will be damaged
2. Identify the material commonly used for making coil (b) Neither the anneter nor the voltmeter will be damaged
of a resistance bOX. (c) Only the ammeter will be damaged
fal Molytklenum (b) Manganese (d) Only the voltmeter will le cdamaged
(c) Manganin (d) MagrIesium 10. If E is the emnf of a cell of internal resistance r and
3. Which of the following is a vector quantity? external resistance R, then potential difference across
(a) Current density (b) Current Ris given as
(c) Wattless current (d) Power (a) V=E/R +r) (b) V = E
(c) V =E/0+ r/R) (d) V = EI| + R/r)
4. Electrie field and current density have relation
1
11. Two non-ideal batteries are connected in series.
(a) EJ 6) E«J² c) E
Consider the following statements.
A. The equivalent emf is larger than either of the two
5. Consider the following two statenents. emfs.
A. Kirchholf's junction law follows from the B. The equivalent internal resistance is smaller than
conservation of charge. either of the two internal resistances.
B. Kirchhof's loop law follows from the conservation of Each of and B is correct
A

energy. (b) A is correct but B is wrog

Which of the following is correct? (c) Bis correct but A is wrong
(a) Both A and B are wrong (d) Each of and Bis wrong
A

(b) A is correct but B is wrong 12. When n cells are joined in parallel combination as
(c) A is wIOng but Bis correct shown, the strength of the current i is given by
(d) Both A and Bare currect
6. For measurement of potential difference,
potentiomcter is preferred in comparison to
voltmeter because
(a) potentiometer is more sensitive than voltmeter
(b) the resistance of peotentiometer is less than voltneter
(c) potentioneter is cheaper than voltmcter
(d) potentiometer does not take current from the circuit
7. What is immaterial for an electric fuLSe wire?
(a) nE E
R+nr R+r/n)
(a) Its specific resistance (b) Its radius
(c) Its length (d) CCurrent Ilowing through it (c) (d) None of these
r+ Rn
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (213

13. A student has 10 resistors of resistance r each. The 20. The current-voltage graph for a given metallic wire
minimum resistance made by him from given at two different temperatures T, and T, is shown in
resistors is the figure. The temperatures T, and T, are related as
(a) 10r (b) (c)
10 100 5
14. A wire has resistance 12 2. It is bent in the form of
a circle. The effective resistance between the two
points on any diameter is equal to
(a) 122 (b) 62 (c) 32 (d) 24 2
a (a) T; > T; (b) T,< T;
15. A steady current (0 is flowing through conductor of
(d) 7, >2T,
uniform cross-section. Any segment of the canductor
has 21. Which of the following characteristics of electrons
la) zero charge determines the current in a conductor?
(b) only positive charge [NCERT Exemplar]
(c} (a) Drift velocity alone
only negative charge
(d) charge pruportioral to current (b) Thernmnal velocity alone
(c) Both drift velocity and thermal velocity
16. There are n cells, each of emf E and internal (d) Neither drift nor thermal velocity
resistance r, connected in series with an external
resistance R. One of the cells is wrorngly connected, so 22. An aumeter and a voltneter of resistance R are
that it serRls current in the opposite direction. The connected in series to an electric cell of negligible
current flowing in the circuit is internal resistance. Their readings are A and V,
(n -1)E respectively. If another resistance R is connected in
(a)
(n + 1)r +2 nr +R parallel with the voltmeter. then
- (a) Both A and Vwill increase
(n 2E n 2)E
(b) Both A and will decreasc
nr+R
(n
-2 +R (c) A will decrease and V will increase
17. The maximum power dissipated in an external (d) A will increase and Vwill decrease
resistance R, when connected to a cell of emf E and 23. The resistance of a wire is 10.2. Its length is
internal resistance r, will be increased by 1 by stretching. The new resistance
will now be
(a) (b) d)
2r 41 (al 122 (b) 1.2 SQ (c) 132 (d) 112

18. The resistance across A and B in the figure below 24. Four resistances are connected in circuit in the given
will be figure. The electric current flowing through 42 and
62 resistance is respectivey
R R R ww
(a) 3R (b) R (c) these (d) None of 62
3
19. The tcmperature (T)dependencc of resistivity (p) of a
semiconductor is represented by
'20V
(a) 2 A and 4 A (b) 1
and 2 A
A
(c) 1 A and 1 A (d) 2 A and 2 A
(b)
25. Current through the 5 resistor is

10V

(c)

(a) 2A (b) 4A
(c) zero (d) IA
214) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

26. A cell which has an emf I.5 V is connected in series 34. In the circuit shown, the currents i and i, are
with an external resistance of 102. If the potential
difference across the cell is I.25 V, then the internal
w

2 S2
122
resistanee of the cell is (in Q)
(a) 2 (b) 0.25 (c) 1.5 d) 0.3
27. A piece of wire of resistance 4 2 is bent through
180° at its mid-point and the two halves are twisted
together, then the resistance is
(a) 82 tb) 12 (c) 292 (d) 52
12 V, 1
9
28. A wire of resistance Ris divided into 10 equal parts,
(a) i, = 1.5 A, i, = tb) i, = 0.5 A, i, = 1.5 A
These parts are connected in parallel, the cquivalent
resistance of such connection will be
(c) i,
=1 A, i,
=3A
0.5 A
(d) i = 3 A. ,= lA
(a) 0.01 R (6) 0.t R 35. Consider the following statenents regarding the
(c) 10 KR
(d) 100 R network shown in the figure.
29. Three resistors each of 2 2 are connected together in R R
a triangular shape. The resistance between any two
vertices will be
(a) 4/3 Q (b) 3/4 Q (c) 32 (d) 62 A
30. The effective resistance between the points A and B Lwwww
in the figure is 2R 2R

60
(1) Tle cquivalent resistance of the network between
points A and B is independent of value of G.
(2) Tlhe equivalent resistance of the network between
points A and B is 4 /3 R.
(a) (3) The current through G is zero.
52 (b) 22 (c) 32 (d) 42
31. Two resistances are joined in parallel whose Which of the atxove statement(s) is/are true?
la) (1)alone (b) (2) alone
resultant is S2.One of the resistance wire is broken (c Both (2) and (3)
8 d) (1), (2) and (3)
annl the effective resistance becomes 2 S2. Then, 36. To send 10% of main current thbrough a moving coil
the
resistance in ohm of the wire that got broken was galvanomneter of resistance 992, shunt required is
(al 3/5 (bl 2 (c) 6/5 (d) 3 (a) 92 (b) 112
32. A wire of resistance 92 is broken in two parns. (c) 10 (d) 9.9 2
The
length ratio being l:2. The two pieces are 37. A 1250 W heater operates at 115 V. What is the
connected in parallel. The net resistance will be resistance of the heating coil?
(al 292 (b) 3) (a) 1.6S2 (b) 13.52
(d) 692
(c) 1250 N (d) 10.6Q
33. In the network shown, the equivalent resistance
betweern A 38. The resistance of a wire at 20°C is 202 and at
and Bis
500°C is 602. At which temperature its resistance
will be 252?
(a) 5/C (b) 60°C
(c) 70°C (d) 80°C
39. A conducting wire of eross-sectional area l cm as
3x 10* charge carriers per metre. If wire carries a
current 24 mA, then drift velocity of carriers is
(a) 5x 10 ms1 (b) 0.5 ms!
(c)224
17 (c) 5x 10ms-! (d) 5x 1oms-!
 Chapter 03 Current electricity (215

). At room temperature, copper has free electron 45. Two cells of emfs E, and EE, > E,) are connected
density of 8.4x 10m. The electron drift velocity as shown in figure.
in a copper conductor of cross-setional area of
10°mand carrving a current of 5.4 A, will te
la) 4 msl {b) 0.4 ms

fd) 0.4 ums

When a potentioneter is connected between A and B,
lc) 4 cms1
the balarcing length of the potentiometer wire is
41. Three voltmet ers A Band C having resistances R. 300 cm. On connecting the same potentiometer
1.5 R and 3R respectively. are used in a circuit as between A and C, the balancing length is 10O cm.
shown. When a potential difference is applied The ratio is
between X and Y., the readings of the voltmeters are
V, V, and V, respectively. Then, (a) 3:
1
(b) 1
:3
(c) 2:3 (d) 3: 2
46. A voltmeter of resistance 998 SN is connected acrOss
a cell of emf 2 V and internal resistance 2 S2. The
potential difference across the voltmeter is
(a) 1.99 V (b) 3.5 V
(c) 5V (d) 6V

(a) ý=V, =Vy {b) V<V; =V, 47. A wire 50 cm long and l mm in cross-section
carries a current of 4 A when connected to a 2 V
battery. The resistivity of the wire is
42. A metal rod of length 10 cm and a rectangular (a) 2x 10-'2-n (b) 5x 10-N-m
cross-section of lcm x (1/2) cn is connected to a
battery across opposite faces. The resistance will be (c) 4x 10Q-m (d) x 10n-m 1

[NCERT Exemplar]
(a} maximum when the battery is connected across 48. Three resistances P. Q, R each of 22 and an
l cm x 1/2) cm faces unknown resistance S fornn the four arms of a
(b) maximum when the battery is connected across Wheatstone's bridge circuit. When a resistance of 6N
10 cm x ) cm faces is connected in parallel to S, the bridge gets
(c) maximum when the battery is connected across
balanced. What is the value of S?
10 cm x (1/2) cm faces (o) 32
(d) same irrespective of the three faces
(a) 22
(c) 692 (d) 12
43. Two cells of emfs approximately 5V and 10V are to 49. A 2V battery, a 990 SQ resistor and a potentiometer
be accurately compared using a potentiometer of of 2 m length, all are connected in series of the
length 400 cm. [NCERT Exemplar]
resistance of potentiometer wire is 102, then the
la)The battery that runs the potentiometer should have
voltage of 8V
potential gradient of the potent iometer wire is
(a) 0.05 Vm-! (b} 0.5 Vm!
(b) The battery of potentioneter can have a voltage of
15 V and R adjusted so that the potcntial drop across (c) 0.01 Vm! (d) 0.1 Vm!

the wire slightly exceeds 10 V 50. The electron with charge (q = 1.6x 10" C) moves in
(c) The first portion of 50 cm of wire itself should havea
potential drop of 10 V an orbit of radius 5x 10 m with a speed of
(d) Potentiometer is usually used for comparing resistances 2.2x 10° ms,
around an atom. The equivalent
and not voltages current is
44. The resistivity of a potentiometer wire is (a) 1.12x 10 A (b) 1.12x 10* A

40 x 10 2-m and its area of cross-section is (c) 1.12x 10* A (d) 1.12A
8x 10 m'.If 0.2 A current is flowing through the
wire, the potential gradient will be
(a) 10* V /n
resultant resistance is .
51. Two resistance wires on joining in parallel, the
One of the wire breaks.
(b) 10 /m the effective resistance is 22. The resistance of the
(c) 3.2 x 10-² V/m broken wire is
(d) I V/m (b) 22 (d) 32
216) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

52. A pkatentiometer having the potential gradient of 59. AB is a potentiometer wirc of length 100 cm and its
2 nV/cm is usei to measure the difference of resistance is 102. It is coniected in series with a
potential actass a resistance of 102 in same circuit. resistance R=40 2 and a battery of emf2 V and
If a length of 50 cm of the potentiometer wire is negligible interal tesistance. If a source of unknown
requircd to get the null point, then the current cemf E is balanced by 40 cm length of the
passing trough te
102 resistor is (in mA) potentioneter wire, the value of E is
(a) 1
(b) 2 (c) 5 (d) 10

53. The n tows each containing n cells in series are

joined in parallel. Maxinmum current is taken fromn
40cm
this conmbination across an extermal resistance of 3 2
resistance. If the total ounber of cells used are 24
and internal resistance of each cell is 0.5 2, then
(a) m= 8, n =3 (b) m =6, n=4
(c} m=l2, n =2 (d) m =2. n =l2 (a) 0.8 V (b) 1.6 V
(c) 0.08V (d) 0.16V
54. A 100 V volmeter of internal tesistance 20 k2 in
series with a high resistance R is connected to a
60. Equivalent resistance between the points A and B is
(in 2)
110 V line. The voltmeter reads 5 V, the valuc of R
is
(a) 210ks2 (b) 315ks2 (c) 420 k? (d) 440 k2
55. cellsupplies a current i, through a resistance R,
A

and a current i, through a resistance R,. The

internal resistance of this cell is

(a) R, - R b) -iR lal

5
d
3
61. In the circuit shown bere, what is the value of the
56. Out of five resistances of RQ each 3 are connected unknown resistor R. so that the total resistance of the
in parallel and are joined to the rest 2 in series. circuit bet ween points P and Q is alson equal to R?
Find the resultant resistance.
(a) (3/7)R2 (b) (7/3)RQ
(c) (7/8)RO (di (8/7RQ 32
pw
57. Two batteries A and B each of emí 2V are connected
in series to an external resistance R=12. If the W

internal resistance of hatterv A is 1.9 N and that B is 30

0.9 S2. What is the potential difference between the (a) 32 (b) W39 2
terminals of battery A? (c)
692 (d) 102
62. Two wires of same metal ave the sane length but
their cross-sections are in the ratio 3: 1.They are
joined in series. The resistance of the thicker wire is
102. Tlhe total resistance of the combination will be
(a) 2 V (b) 3.8 V (al 402 )
fc) zero (d) 4.8 V
(d) 1000
58. For a cellof enf 2 V, a baiance is obtained for 50 cnm
of the potentiometer wire. lf the cell is shunted by a
63. The masses of he three wires of copper are in the
22 resistor, the balance is obtained across 40 cm of ratio 5:3:lanl their lengts are in the ratio I:3:5.
tie wire. Find the intemal resistance of the cell The ratio of their electrical resistances is
(a) 0.25 2 (b) 0.50 2 la) 5:3:| tl) i25:15:1
(c) 0.802 (d) 1.00N
(c) 1:15:125 (d) I:3:5
 Chapter 03 Current electricity 217

8. If power dissipated in the 92 resistor in the circuit 69. The currenti drawn from the5 V source will be
shown is 36 W, the potential lifference across the
292 resistor is
92 52 10 02 20 0
wwww
100
6S2

3V
2 2 (a) 0.33 A (b) 0.5 A (c) 0.67 A (d) 0.17A
(b) 10 V (c) 2 V (d) 4 V
(a) 8V 70, The current in the given circuit is
65. The reading of the ammeter in the following figure 5V
will be
62
AO

4 S2 2 V
21 20 2

(b) 0.4 A (c) 0.1 A (d) 0.2 A

(a)0.3 A
71. Two resistors 400S2 and 8002 are connected in
32
22 series with a 6 V battery. The potential difference
measured by voltmeter of 10k2 acrOss 4002 resistor
(a) 0.8 A (b) 0.6 A (c 0.4 A (d) 0.2 A V
(b) 1.95 V fc) 3.8 (d) 4 V
to a cell of
(a) 2 1
66. A wire of length 100 cm is connected emf
72. A battery of emf E has an internal resistance A
r.
2V and negligible internal resistance. The resistance to terminals of
variable resistance R is connected the
of the wire is 32. The additional resistance required the battery. V'
the battery. A current iis drawn fromn
to produce a potential drop of l milli volt per
cm is
is the terminal potential difference. If R alone is
(a) 60 2 (b) 472 lc) 572 (d) 35 Q
gradually reduced to zero, which of the following
67. Two uniform wires A and Bare of same metal and best describes i and V?
have equal masses. The radius of wire A is twice
that of wire B. The total resistance of A and B when
connected in parallel is
(b) i appraches ,
la) i approaches zero, V approaches E
E Vapproaches zero
S2
(a) 4 2 when the resistaNe of wire A is 4.25 E
tc) tapproaches,V approanches E
(b) 52 when thc resistance of wire A is 4 2 r
when the resistance of wire B is 4.25Q
(c) 4
2 (d) i approaches infinity, V approaches E
is 4SN
(d) 52 when the resistance of wire B gaps of a meter
73. Two resistances are connected in two
are given in ohm. the zero
68. In the given circuit, the resistances bridge. The balance point is 20 cHn Irom
resistance is 3 A while
The current through the 102
passes
end. A resistance of 15Q2 is conncted in series with
that through the resistance Xis A. No current 1
to 40 cm.
the smaller of the two. The null point shifts
through the galvanometer. The values of the unknown
Tle value of the snaller resistance in ohm is
resistances Xand Y'are respectively (in ohm) (al 3 (bi 6
(d) 12
1A wY (c) 9
e) None of these
X 24 84
an emf
74. A battery of four cells in series, cach having
is to be
of 1.4 V and an internal resistance of 22
30
a
used to charge small 2 V accumulator negligible
of
internal resistance. What is the charging current?
3A (c) 0.3 A (d) 0.45 A
12 (d) 6
and 6 (a) 0.1 A (b) 0.2 A
(a) 14 and 54 (b) 12 and6 (c) 6and
218) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

75. The length of a wire of a potentiomneter is 100 cm, 82. A tap supplies waler at 22"C, a man takes L of 1

and the emf of its cell is E volt. It is employed to water per nin at 37°C from the geyser. The power

resistance is 0.5 .
measure the emf of a battery whose internal
If the balance point is obtained
at = 30cm from the positive end, the eunf of the
of geyser is
(a) 525 W (b) 1050 W 1775 W (d) 2100 W
(c)

83. Tlhe mean free path of electrons in a metal is

battery is 4x 10 m. The electrie field which can give on an
30E
(a average 2 eV energy to an electron in the metal will
100.5
30E
be in unit of Vm?
(b) (b) 5x 10-!! (c) 8x 10-! (d) 5x 10
100- 0.5 8x 10
(a)

(c) ,
30F - 0.5) wherce i is the current in the potentiometer 84. You are given two resistances R, and R2. By using
them singly, in series and in parallel, you can obtain
wire
four resistances of 1. 52, 22, 62 and 8S2. The
(d)
30E values of R, and R, are
100 fa) 12, 72 (b) 1.59, 6. 52
76. When a resistance of 100 2 is connected in series 32. 512
(c) (d) 22, 62

with galvanometer of resistance R, then its range is

a 85. A potentiometer having the potential gradient of
V. To double its ange, a resistance of 1000 Q is 2 mVcm is used to measure the difference of
connected in series. Find the value of R. potential across a resistance of 102. If a length of
(a) 700n 50 cm of the potentiometer wire is required to get
(c) 00 SQ {d) 100 Q the null points, then the current passing through
77. Two cells witlh the same emf E and different internal 102 resistor is (in mA)
resistances r, and r, are connected in series to an (a) ! (b) 2 (c) 5 (d) 10

external resistance R. The value of R, so that the 86. In the circuit shown in the figure,
pxtential difference across the first cell be zero, is
(a) (b)
+ 0.5 A
2
78. Two wires of the same material but of different 1A
diameters carry the same curTent i. If the ratio of their
diamcters is 2: 1, then the corresponding ratio of (a) The current through NP is 0.5 A
their mcan drift velocities will be (b) The value of R, = 402
(a) 4:1 (b) |: I (c) I:2 (d) 1 :4 (c) The value of R
=14Q
79. Two bulls coIIsume same ower when operated at (d) The potential difference across R = 49V
200 V and 300 V, respectively. When these bulbs 87. A galvanometer of resistance 50 S2 is connected to a
are connected in series across a DC souce of 500 V, battery af 3 V along with a resistance of 2950 2 in
then series. A full scale deflection of 30 divisions is
(a) ratio of otential differenCes across them is 3/2 obtained in the galvanometer. In order to reduce, this
(b) ratio of potential differences across thern is 9/4
deflection to 20 divisions the resistance in series
(c) ratio of powers consuned across them is 4/9
should be
(d) ratio of powers consurIed across them is 2/3
(a) 44502 (b) 50502
80. A factory is served by a 220 V supply line. In a (c) 55502 (d) G050 n
circuit protected by a fuse marked 10 A, the 88, When a galvanometer is shunted by resistance S,
maxinum number of 100 W lamps in parallel that then its current capacity increases n times. If the
can be turned on, is sarne galvanometer is shunted by another resistance
la) 11 (b) 22 (c) 33 (d) 66
S, then its current capacity will increase by n' is
81. Two bulbs narked G0 W, 220 V and 100 W, 220 V given by
are connected in series and the series combination is (n +1S Stn -1) + S
(a) (b)
now connected across a 220 V main supply. The S
power dissipated in the circuit is n+S Sln -1}) -S
(b) 75 W c)
(al 37.5 W (c) 80 W (d) 40 W S
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (219
9. The tungsten filaments of two
electric bulbs are of
the same length. If one of 94. Consider a current carrying
then gives 25 W power wire (current D in the
and the other 60 W power, shape of a circle. Note that as
then currrent progresses
(a) Both the flaments are
of same thickness
along the wire, the direction the
of J fcurrent density)
(b) 25 W bulb has thicker changes in an exact manner,
filament while the current I
(c) 60 W bull has remains unaffected. The agent
thicker filament that is essentially
(d) Both the hlaments have same tesponsible for
cros-sctional area (a) source of emf
(NCERT Exemplar]
90. Three unequal resistors in parallel are
equivalent to a (b) electric field produced
resistance 1 2. If two of them are in by charges accumulated on
the
the ratio I:2 surface of wite
and if no resistance value is fractional,
then the (c) the charges just
behind a given segmment of wire
largest of the three resistances in ohms push them just the right way which
is by repulsion
(a) 4 (b) 6 (d) the charges ahcad
(c) 8
(d) 12 95. Two batteries of emf &, and
91. In the circuit given here, the points A,
70 V, zero, 10 V, respectively. Then,
B and Care fesistances r, and , e,k, >c) and internal
respectively are connected in
parallel as shown in figure. [NCERT Exemplar]
wwwwo
20

10 W

(a) Two equivalent emf an of the two cells is

between
and E,. i.c., E < Ey < C
(a) the point D will be ata potential of 60 V (b) The cquivalent emf is smaller than &,
(b) the point D will be at a potential of (c) The
20 V is given by =+E, always
(c) currents in the paths AD, DB and DC are (d) is independent of internal resistances r
in the ratio of and r,
1:2:3 96. A resistance Ris to be measured using a meter
currents in tlhe paths AB DB and DC are in the ratio of
(d)
bridge. student cho0ses the standard resistance S to
3:2:1
be 100 SQ. He finds the null point atl, = 29cm. He is
92. The current in the resistance R will be zero if told to attempt to improve the accuracy.
Which of the following is a uscful way?
INCERT Exemplar]
(a) He slhould measufe more accurately
(b) He sthould change S to 10002 and repcat the
experiment
(c) He should change S to and repeat the experiment
32
(a) E (d) He should given up hopc of a more accurate
=El, measurement with a meter bridge
97. The current drawn fron the battery shown in the
figure is
(e) E + E,, =Efz
(d) E -E; =Ef
93. The magnitude and direction of the current in the
circuit shown will be
ar wwy 10V
R

3V
(bl d
2R

32 98. Two non-ideal unidentical batteries are connected in

parallel with positive terminals. Consider the
following statements
(a) A fron a to e (b) A rom to e
b

3 3 A. The equivalent emf is smaller than cither of the two

(c) IA from b to e (d) 1A rom a toe emfs.
220 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

B. The equivalent interna! resistance is smaller than 103.In the figure shown, the total resistance letween A
cither of the two internal resistances. and B is
(a) Both and Bare correct
A

29
(b) A is cortect bu B is wTOng
(c) Bis correct but is wrong A
Awwwwww
and B are wrong
(d) Isoth A
99. In the below circuit, the battery E, has an emf of 12
V and zero internal resistance. While the battery E, newwwwmwwwwwww
20
D

has an emf of 2 V.
(a)122 (b) 4 2 (c) 62 (d) 82
500 Q
G 104.The potential difference in volt
across the resistance R, in the
E+ circuit shown in figure, is R.
(R, =
152, R, = 1592, R, = 30 2.

If the galvanomcter G reads zero, then the value of the R, =352)

resistance X in otuns is (a) 5
(a) 250 (b) 100 (b) 7.5
lc) 50 (d) 200 (c) 15 R
100.The potential drop across the 3 S2 resistor is (cdh
I2.5
32 105.In the given circuit, the voltmeter records 5 V. The
resistaIce of the voltmeter in S2 is

wA

(a) 1
V (b) 1.5 V (c) 2 V (d) 3V
101. Equivalent resistance between A and B will be
(a) 200 (b) 100
(c) 10 50 (d)
106. In given figure, the potentiometer wire AB has a
resistance of 5 2 and length 10 m. The balancing
length AM for the emf of 0.4 V is
wWw

R= 4512 W

32

B
39 32 4

(a) 292 (b) 182

(c)
62 (di 3.6 S2
0,41
102. In the network of resistors shown in the figure, the m
0.4 m (b) 1
equivalent resistance berween A and B is (a)
m
(c) 0.8 m (d) 8

30 107.In the circuit shown herc, 6VI2

the readings of the
4
ammeter and voltmeter
are A
V
6n
(a) 6 A. 60
V 4 9
(b) 0.6 A, 6
(a) 54 2 (b) 18 (c) 6 A,
6V
(d) 6/1 A, 6/|I V
(c) 3652 () 92
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (221

Os.Each of the resistance in the network shown in the 113.The effective resistancc between points A and Cfor
figure equal
is to R. The resistance bet ween the the network shown in figure is
terminals A
and B is
www

(c) 2R
(b) 5R (c) 3R (d) 2
(a) R 6R
109.Find the cqivalent resistance acrOSs AB. 114.Three resistarnces 52, 52 and 62 are connected as
shown in figure. If the point S divides the resistance
62 into two equal halves, the resistance between
202 points Pand Sis

(a) 12 (b) 22 (c) 3Q (d) 42

110.The equivalent resistance between Pand Qin the
figure is approximately
60
(a) 112 (b) 82 Ic) 62 (d) 102
(c) 42
115.A potentiometer circuit is set up as shown. The
6 potential gradient across the potentiometer wire, is
k volt/cnm and the amneter, present in the circuit,
102 reads 1.0A when two way key is switched off. The
balance points, when the key between the temninals
(al 62 (b) 52 (c) 7.5 (d) 202 (i) 1 and 2 (ii) ancd 3, is plugged in, are found to le
1

,
at lengths em and I, cm, respectively. Te
111.In the given network of resistances, the effective
resistance betwecen A and B is magnitudes of tle resistors R and X in ohmn, are then.
respectively equal to

(a) (e) 5R (d) 8R

3

112.A source of enuf E =15 and having negligibie

V

internal resistance is connected to a variable

resistance, so that the curTent in the circuit incrcases
with time as i = 1.21 +3. Then, the total charge that
will flow in first five second will be
(a) 10 C (b) 20 C
--,))
(a) All, arnd ki, (b) k, and kil, -)
(c) 30 C (d) 40 C: (c) kll, and kl, (d) kl, and kl,
222 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

116.An electric imnersion heater of 1.08 kW is 121.Two electric bulbs rated 50 W and 100 W are
immersed in water. After the water has reached a glowing at full power, when sed in parallel with a
lemperatute of 100°C, how much time will be battery of cmf 120 V and intemal resistance 1O2.
g of
required to produce 100 steam? The maimum number of bulbs that can be
la) 50 s (b) 420s connected in the circuit when glowing at full
(c) 105 s (d 210 power, is
(b) 4 (c) 2 (d) 8
117.A mnoving coil galvanometer is converted into an (a)6
ammeter reading upto 0.03 A by connecting a shunt 122.The equivalent resistance between points A and B of
of resistance 4r across it and into an amneter reading an infinite network of resistances, each of IQ,
upto 0.06 A whena shunt of resistance r is connected as shown, is
connected across it. What is the maximum current 12
which can be sent through this galvanometer, if no 12
shunt is used?
(a) 0.01 A (b) 0.02 A

(c) 0.03 A (d) 0.04 A B

118. B, B, and B, are the three identical bulbs connected

to a battery of steady enf with key K closed. What (a) infinite (b) 22
happens to the brightness of the bulbs and B, (d) zero
when the key is opened? 2
123.In the given figure, the current through the 20V
battery is

16V 16v 20v

(a) Brightness of the bulb B, increases and that of B, 29
decreases
(b) Brightness of the bulbs B, and B, increases
(c) Brightness of the bulb B decreases and B, increases (a) 1! A (b) 12 A
(d) Brightness of the bulbs and B, deczeases (c) 7 A (d) 14 A
119.The scale of a galvanometer of resistance 100Q
contains 25 divisions It gives a deflection of one 124.The current in resistance R, in the given circuit is
division on passing a current of 4 x 10A. The
resistance (in ohm) to be added to it, so that it may
becormea voltmeter of range 2.5 V is
(a) 150 (b) 170 R,•20R- 22 R-30
lc) 110 (d) 220

120.Three electric bulbs of 200 W, 200 W and 400 W '2V

are connected as shown in figure. The resuitant
power of the combination is (a) 1
A (b) 2/3 A
(c) 0.25 A (d) 0.50A
200 W
125. In the circuit shown in
400 W

figure, the resistance R

has a value that depends 2o vi
on the current.
200
W Specifically Ris 209
when iis zero and the amournt of increase in resistance
is numerically equal to one-half of the current.
What is the value of current Iin circuit?
fa) 800 W (b) 400O W (a) 15 A (b) 10 A
fc) 200 W (d) 600 W (c) 20 A (d) 5 A
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (223

The charge flowing in a conductor varies with time 131.Find the reading of the ideal ammeter connected in
as Q= at - be´. then the current the given circuit. Assume that the cells have
(al reaches a maximum and then decreases negligible internal resistance
(b) falls to zero after t = 10 V 4V
25
(c) changes at a rate of (- 2b)
(d) Both (b) and (c)
127.In the circuit shown in figure, arnmeter and
voltmeter are ideal. IfE = 4V, R = 92 and r =
12,
then readings of ammeter and voltmeter are
(a) 0.8 A (b) 0.25 A 1.95A (c)(d) L.0 A
132.A moving coil galvanometer has 150 equal divisions.
Its current sensitivity is 10 divisions per milliampere
and voltage sensitivity is 2 divisions per millivolt. In
order that each division reads 1 V the resistance in
ohm needed to be connected in series with the coil
(a) 1
A, 3V (b) 2 A, 3V
V
will be
(c) 3 A, 4 (d) 4 A, 4V la) 99995 (b) 9995
128. In the circuit shown, the current in 3 2 resistance is (c) 10 (d) 10
(c) None of these
22 32
w 133.It takes 16 min to boil some water in arn electric
kettle. Due to some defect it becomes necessary to
AAAA

+10V 3n renove 10%, turns of heating coil of the kettle. After

repairs, how much time will it take to boil the same
Imass of water?
(a) 1
A
(a) 17.7 min (b) 14.4 min (c) 20.9 min (d) 13.9
7 min
129.Under what conditions 134.Equivalent resistance between points A and B is
current passing through the H
resistance R can be increased
by short circuiting the battery
of cmf E,. The internal
resistances of the two w R
batteries are r and rz R
respectively. w
(a) E; > E,R + rn) (b) E; <E,R + )
R R
E; <E,R + r) (d) Er, >E,R
+)
130.In the arrangement shown, the magnitude of each
resistance is 12. The equivalent resistance between
O and A is given by

(a) 3R (b) 4R (c
5R 7R
(d)
2 2
135.All resistances shown in circuit are 22 each. The
current in the resistance between D and E is
B

10 V
DwE
(b) (d)
6 wH
(a) 5 A (b) 2.5 A (c) 1
A (d) 7.5 A
E 224 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

136.A battery of enf 10 Vis connected to a group of 139.In the circuit shown in figure, Vmust be
resistances as sown in figure. The potential
difference Va -V, between the points A and B is ww w

4 2 202 100 2

32

4A

(a) 50 V' (b) 80 V

(c) 100 V (d) 1290V
(a) -2 V (b) 2 V
20 140.As the switch Sis closed in the circuit shown in
(c) 5 V
11 figure, current passing through it is
137.If V, - V' =Vo and the value of each resistance is R.
www
42 42 51
then
:22

whwwwww
R
I. et resistance betweern ABis (al 4.5 A (b) 6.0 A
{c) 3.0 A (d) zero
3R
I. net resistance between AB is 141.Current through wire XY of circuit shown is
5
III. current through CDis 0R w 22
2Vo
IV. cunent through EF is
3R w

Which of the option/options are correct? 32

(a) l and II (b)I and II (c Only I (d) All of these

138.In the circuit shown, when key K; is closed. then the
ammeter reads I, whether K, is open or closed. (a) 1
A (b) 4 A
But when K, is open the ammeter reads I, /2, when lc) 2 A (d) 3 A
K, is closed. 142.ln the circuit shown in figure, the ratio of currents
i,li, is
29 w 32

I6V

E,

Assuming that amnmeter resistance is much less than

R,. the values of rand R, in ohms are (a) 2 (b) 8
(a) 100, 50 (b) 50, I0
(c) 0.5 (d} 4
(c) 0, 100 (di 0, 30
 Medical entrance special format questions
6. Assertion Kilovolt-ampere (kVA) and
Assertion and reason kilowatt-hour have the same dimensions.
Directions (Q. Nes. 1-19) These questions consist of tuo Reason Both are the units of energy.
statemets each linked as Assertion ond Reason. While 7. Assertion If by mistake, a voltmeter is connected
ansuering these qestions ou are required to chose any in series, then circuit will burn.
one of the following
fie responses. Reason Current will drastically decrease in the circuit.
(a) ll bxoth Assetion and Reason are true and Reason is the 8. Assertion Resistance of an ammeter is less than the
correct explanation of Aserton.
(b) 1f both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not resistancc of a milliamneter.
correct explanation of Assertion. Reason Value of shunt required in case of ammeter
(c) lf Assertion is true but Reason is false. is more than a millianneter.
(d) li Assertion is lalse lut Reason is truc.
9. Assertion A resistance wire is broken into four
(e) Ifboth Asserti and Reaso: are false. pieces and all are connected in parallel. Then, net
1. Assertion '= iR is Ohm's law. resistance lxconies 1/16imes.
Reason V- igraph is always a straight line passing Reason In parallel net resistance is less than the
through origin. smallest value of individual resistance.
2. Assertion Current versus potetial difference (i-V) 10. Assertion Potential difference acrOSs the terminals
graplh for a conductor at two dilferent tenperalures of a battery is always less than the emf of the
T, and T, is shown in figure. Ilence, T, > T,. battery.
Reason During discharging of a battery potential
difference across to terminals of a battery is
V =E-iy
V<E
11. Assertion Inside a conductor, electrons have no
motion in the absernce of sone potential difference
acrss it.

Reason In the abscnce of potential difference no

Reason Resistance of a' conductor increases with electrostatic force will act on the electrons inside the
rise in temperaturC. conductor.
3. Assertion If a current flows through a wire of 12. Assertion Current between two points in an
electrical circuit always flows from higher potential
Ion-unilorm cross-section, potential difference per
unit length of wire is sane throughout the length of to lower potential.
wire. Reason During charging of a battery current inside the
Reason Current through the wire is same at al! battery flows from negative terminal to positive
terminal.
cross-sections.
13. Assertion In case of potentiometer experiment, if
4. Assertion In our houses when we start switching on
emfs of known and unknown both batteries are
different light buttons, nain current gos orn incteasing.
increased two times, then null point length will
Reason Different connections in houses are in remain unchanged.
parallel. When we start switching on different light Reason Null point length does not depend on emf of
buttons, then net resistance of the circuit decreases.
either of the two batteries.
Therefore, main current increases.
14. Assertion In potentiometer experiment, null point
5. Assert ion If a current is flowing through a cannot be obtained if emf of unknown battery is
conducting wire of non-uniform cross-section, drift more than the emf of known battery.
speed and resistance both wiil increase at a section
where cross -sectiornal area is less, Reason By inereasing the emf of known battery,
null point length increases.
Reason Current density at such sections is more
where cross-sectional area is less.
226 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

15. Assertion Iu the circuit shown in figure,

battery is 2. In the part of circuit shown in figure, match
ideal. If a resistance R, is connected in parallel with the
following two colunns for
R, then power aCross R will increase. Va
w
10 V
w

Column I Column II
Reason Current drawn from the battery will increasc. A. If im 5A
0V
V
tp)
16. Assertion Two 6(0 W bulhs are first connected in
B. If i m
series and then in parallel with samne hatterv. Total -5A
power produced in second case will xecone four C. If
i- 0 ir) Van 20 V

times. Rated voltage is sanne for two bulbs. D

If points A and B
are connected (s) -10V
Reason In series total power proxluced will be by a codxtingg wite
30 W and in parallel 120 W.
3. In the circuit diagram shown in figure match the
17. Assertion T'wo resistance wires shown in figure following two columns when switch S is closed.
are of same material. Thev have equal
length. More
heat is generated in wire A.
B

C
Reason In series H«R and resistance of wire A is
Column I
Inore. Column Il

18. Assertion Two identical bulbs when connected A. Current 4) (p) will increase
across a battery. proxluce a total power P. When
they B Curtent (i,) (q will decrease
are connected across the same battery in series total
C. Potential difference (r) will remain same
power consumed will be cros A and B
4
Reason In parallel, P = Potential difference Is) may increase or decrease. I1
P +P, and in series across C and D will depend on vale of r
P= PP,
P +P, 4. In the circuit diagram shon in figurc, potential
differernce across 3 2 resistance is 20 V. Then, match
Match the columns the following two colums.
power ofa bulb at Vvoltage is P. Now, same 129w 32
1. Rated
voltage Vis applied in all conditions mentioned in W w

Column I. Match this Column I with Column Il in

which actual total xower consumed is given.

Column I

Column II
A. Two bulbs are connected in parallel. P Column l Column ll
B Two bulls sfe connected in series. lq) 2P A Potential difference actass 62 reststance p) 30 V
C Two bu!ls ate connected in parallel Ir P
1x otic bulb
Potential difference across 4 2 resistance (q M0 V
in series with this 2
combination. Potential difference actus l22 resistarwe (r 20 V
A group of two-two balbs in furallel s None Potential differchce actoss 8S2 resistance 80 1
ae mutiually connected in seties.
 Medical entrances' gallery
(Collection of guestions asked in NEET & various medical entrance exams)
A potentiometer wire is 100 cm long and a constant 8. Consider the diagram shown below. [AIIMS 2015]
potential difference is maintained across it. Two celis
are connected in series first to support one another
100 2 1000
and then in opposite direction. The balance points
are obtained at 50 cm and 10 cm fron the positive
end of the wire in the two cases. The ratio of emfs is
|NEET 2016]
(a) (b) 3:4 (c) 3:2 A voltmeter of resistance 150 S2 is connected across
5:4 (d) 5: 1

2. The charge flowing througlh a resistance R varies A and B. The potential drop across Band C measured
by voltmeter is
with time tas Q = a -b, where a and b are
(a) 29 (b) 27 V (cl 31 V (d) 30 V
positive constants. The total heat produced in R is a
|NEET 2016] 9. Each resistor shown in the figure has resistance of
(a)
a'R a'R 102 and the battery has the emf 6 V. What will be
the current supplicd by the battery? [UK PMT 2015]

3. The potential difference V4 -V; ) between the points

10S2 I02
and B in the given figure is
A
|NEET 2016]
w

2Q 3V V'8
102 102
=
A, 2 A B

(a) -3 V (b) +3 V (c) +6V (d) +9 V

4. A filanent bullb (500 W, 100 V) is to be used in a (a) 0.6 A (b) 1.2 A (c) 1.8 A (d) 0.3 A
230 V nain supply. When a resistance R is
10. A 192 resistance in series with an anmeter is
conected in series, it works perfectly and the bulb
consumes 500 W. The value of R is [NEET 2016| balanced by 75 cm of potentiometer wire. A standard
cellof ennf 1.02 V is balanced by 50 cm. The
(a) 2:3) 2 (b) 462 (c) 2692 (d) 13
m
amneter shows a realing of 1.5 A. Then, the error
5. A potentioneter wire has length 4 resistance 82. in amncter reading is |EAMCET 2015]
The resistance that must be connected in series with (a) 0.03 A (b) 3A (c) 1.3 A (d) 0.3 A
the wire and an accumulator of emf 2 V, so as to get
a potential gradient of I mV per cm on the wire is 11. The range of voltumeter is 10 Varnd its internal
(CBSE AIPMT 2015| resistance is 50 N. To convert it to a voltnneter of
range 15 V, Iow much resistance is to be added?
(a) 322 40 (b) (c) 44Q (d) 482
(a) Add 252 resistor in parallel |EAMCET 2015)
6. A, Band C are voltmeters of resistance R, 1.5 R and (b) Add 25 2 1esistos in series
3R respectively, as shown in the figure. When some (c) Add 1252 resistor in parallel
potential difference is applied betweenX and Y, then (d) Add 125 S2 resistor in series
the voltmeter readings are Va. Vy and Vç: 12. Identify the wrong statement. [Kerala CEE 2013)
respectivey. Then. |CBSE AIPMT 2015)
(a) Charge is a vectur quantity
(B (b) Current is a scalar quantity
(c) Charge can bc quantised
(d) Charge is additive in nature
(e) Charge is cotserved
(b) Va V =V
(c) V =V V 13. When the rate of flow of charge through a metallic
7. Across a metallic conductor of non-uniforrm conductor of non-uniform cross-section is uniform,
cross-section, a constant potential difference is then the quantity that remains constant along the
applied. The quantity which remain (s) constant conductor is [Kerala CEE 2015]
along the conductor is [CBSE AIPMT 2015|
(a) current density (b) electric field
(c) electric potential (d) drift velocity
(a) current density (b) current
(c) current
(c) drift velocity (d) electric field
228 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

14. The resistance of a carbon resistor of colour code 21. The current I shown in the circuit is (WB JEE 2015]
Red-Red Green Silver is (in k2) (Kerala CEE 2015)
la) 2200t 3%, (b) 2200+10% 2v+,
lc) 220 10% (d) 220 t
5%
212
22 22
220+ 1%
(e)
2V 2v+*
15. The slope of the graph showing the variation of
potential difference V on X-axis and current Y-axis (a) 1.33 A zero (c) 2 A A
b) (d)
gives conductor (Kerala CEE 2015)
{a) resist.ance (b) resistivity 22. A metal wire of circular cross-section has a
lc) tecipcal of resistance (d) conductivity resistance R,. The wire is now stretched without
(e) impedance breaking, so that its length is doubled and the density
is assumed to remain the same. If the resistance of
16. Two wires of equal length and equa! dianeter and
having resistivities p, and p, are connected in series.
the wire now becomes R,, then R, :R, is
(WB JEE 2015]
The equivalent resistivity of the conbination is (b) l :2
[Guj. CET 2015)
fa)1:1 (c) 4: 1
(d) 1:4
23. Consider the combination of resistor,
(a) PP:
2
(b) p, +P2

fc) PPy
PtP:
The equivalent resistance betwecn a and b is
17. A galvanometer of resistance 50 2 is connected to a (UP CPMT 2015)
attery of 8V alkong with a resistance of 3950 2 in (a)
2R
(c) (d) 3R
series, A full scale deflection of 30 divisions is 6 3
obtained in the galvanometer . In order to reduce this
24. A potentiometer wire of length 100 cm has a
deflection to 15 divisions, the resistance in series
resistance of 102. It is connected in series with a
should be... Q.

(Guj. CET 2015] resistance and a cell of enf 2V having negligible

(al 1930 (b) 7900) internal resistance. A source of emf 10 mV is
(c) 2000 (d) 7950 balanced against a length of 40 cm of the
18. ChoOse the correct statement. [CG PMT 2015] potentiometer wire. The valuc of cxternal resistance
(a) Kirclhhoff's first Law ofclectricity is based on is [UP CPMT 2013)
conservation of charge wthile the second law is based (a)760N (b) 640N
On conservativ1 ol energy (c) 7902 (d) 840N
(b) Kirchhoff's first law of electricity is based on
25. Thrcc resistances 22,32 and 4 2 are connected in
conservation of energy while the second law is bascd
On COnservatiun of charge parallel. The ratio of currents passing through them
{c) Kirchhoff's both laws are based on conservation of when a potentia! difference is applied across its ends
charge will be |KCET 2015]
(d) Kircthhoff's both laws are based on conservation of (a) 5:4:3 (b) 6:3:2
energv (c) 4:3:2 {d) 6:4:3
19. A metal plate weighing 750 g is to be clectroplated 26. Four identical cells of emf and internal
resistancer
are to be connected in series. Suppose. if one
with 0.05% of its weight of silver. If a current
of of the
0.8 A is used. find the time (approx) needed for cell is connected wrongly, then the equivalent
depositiIg the required weight of silver (ECE of emf and effective internal resistance of
the
silver is 11.8x 10 kgC) combination is [KCET
[CG PMT 2015) 2015]
(a) 5 min 32 s (b) 6 min 37 s
(a) 2E and 4r (b) 4E and 4r
tc) 4 in
16s (d) 6 min 10s
{c) 2E and 2r (d) 4E and 2r
20. A LDC ammeter has resistance 0]2 and current 27. In the circuit shown R
its alongside, the amneter
ranges 0-100 A. Ifthe range is to
be extended to and the voltmeter readings
0-500, then the following shunt resistance will
be are 3A and 6V,
required CGPMT 2015) |
(a) 0.010Q (b) 0.011Q
respectively. Then, the
(c) 0.025 S2 value of the resistance R is (KCET 2015)
(d) 0.25N
{a) <252 (b) 2Q (c) 22 (d) >22
 Chapter 03 Current electricity 229
The resistance ol a bulb filament is
100 S2 at a 36. Six resistances are connected as
temperature of 100°C. If its temperature shown in figure. If
coefficient total current flowing is 0.5 A,
of resistance be 0.005 per
C, then its resistance wilI then the potential
difference Va
become 200 2 at a tempPerature
(KCET 2015)
-V is |EAMCET 2014)
(a) 500C: (b) 300° C
6S2
62 6S2
(c) 200°C (d) 400°C
29. A and Bare the two points on a 0.3 A

uniform ring of radius r. The ww

w

resistance of the ring is R and 6) 12 )

LAOB =0 as shown in the (a) 8V (b) 6 V
(c) 2 V (d) 4 V
figure. The equivalent resistance
37. Four cells, each of emf E and internal
between points A and B is resistance r,
are coected in series across an
(Guj. CET 2015] external resistance
R2%-0) R. By mistake one of the cells is
(al RO connected in
teverse. Then, the current in the external
circuit is
[WD JEE 2014)
(c)
-) (d
R
4* 2r-00
(a) 2F
1r+
R
(b
JE

3r+
3E
R
2F
3r R
+

30. The dimensions of motbility of charge carriers are 38. A circuit consists of three batteries of emf E,
[Kerala CEE 2014]
=1V,
tal [MT°a) (b) (MT°A E, = 2V and E, =3Vand internal resistance
tc) [M2T'AJ
12, 22 and 12 respectively which are connected in
parallel as shown in figure. The potential difference
te)(M-T°A) between points P and Q is [WD JEE 2014]
31. The temperature coefficient of resistance of an alloy E=! V
used for making resistor is |Kerala CEE 2014)
(a) snall and jositive E,-2 V
(b) snall and negative
fcl large and (xsitive (d) large and negative
(c) zero
32. A wire of resistance 42 is stretched to twice its tal 1.0 V (b) 2.0 V
original length. In the process of stretching, its area (c) 2.2 V (d) 3.0 V
of crosssection gets halved. Now, the resistance of 39. Two resistos of resistances 2
and 6S2 are 2

the wire is [EAMCET 2014] connected in parallel. This combination is then

(a) 82 (0) 162 (d) 452 connected to a battery of enf 2 V and internal
A
33. carbon film resistor has colour code green, black, resistance 0,5 2. What is the current flowing
violet, gold. The value of tlhe resistor is [KCET 2014] through the battery? (KCET 2014]
(a) 50 M2 (b) 300 MQ 4
(c) 500 + 5% MQ (d) 500 10% MOQ
(a) 4 A (b)
A
3
17 (d) 1
A

34. A uniform wire of resistance 92 is joined 40. The resistance in the two arms of the meter bridge
end-to-end to form a circlc. Then, the resistance of are 52 and R2, respectively. Whern the resistance R
the circular wire between any two diametrically is shunted with an cqual resistance, tlhen the new
points is (Kerala CEE 2014] balance pxint is at 1.6,. The rsistance R is
(CBSE AIPMT 2014j
(b) 32 (a) t02 (b) 13Q (c) 20 (d) 252
(c) 12 41. A potentiometer circuit has been set up for finding

35. Tlhe equivalent resistance of two resistors connected the internal resistance of a given ccll. The main
in series is 62 and their parallel equivalent battery, uIsed across the potentiometer wire, has an
emf of 2.0 V and a negligible internal resistance. The
resistance is 2. What are the values of resistances? Jtentiometer wire itself is 4n long. When the
3 (KCET 2014] resistance R connected acrOSS the given cell, then has
(al 4 2. 62 (b) 82, I2 values of
{c)4 S2252 (d) 6S2, 2S2 (i) infinity (ii) 9.5 S2
230 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

The balancing lengths of the potentiometer wire are 49, A galvanometer has a coil of resistance 100 2 and
found to be 3 m and 2.85 m, respectively. gives full scale deflection for 30 mA current. If it is
The value of internal resistance of the cell is to work as a voltmeter of 30 V, the resistance
(CBSE APMT 2014) required to be added is [UK PMT 2014)
(c) 0.5
(a) 025S2 (b) 0.952 d) 0.75N (al 500 n (b) 900 2
42. In an ammeter, 0.2% of main current passes through {cl 1000 n (d) 1800 N
the galvanometer. If resistarnce of galvanometer is G, 50. When current flows for 2 min in an electroplating
4 A
then the resistance of ammeter will be cxperinent, then mn gram of silver is deposited. Then.
(CBSE AIPMT 2014)
the amount (in gram) of silver deposited by 6 A
499, current flowing for 40 s is [NEET 2013]
499 500 500 499
ta) 4m (b) (c) 2m
43. In Wheatstone bridge. three resistos P, Q and Rare 2 4
connected in three arms in order and 4th arrn of 51. Awire of resistance 4 is stretc!hed to twice its
S2
resistance s, is formed by two resistors S, and s,
original length. The resistance of stretched wire
connected in parallel. The condition for bridge to be (NEET 2013)
would be
balanced is, (a) 292 (b) 42 (c) 82 (d) 1692
(MHT CET 2014)
s,) 52. The internal resistance of a 2.1 V cell which gives a
(a) lc) (ds current of 0.2 A through a resistance of 10 is
Ris + s;) (s + s) Rss; [NEET 2013)

44. An electron in potentiometer experiences a force lal 02 n (b) 0.5 lc)

(d) 1.02 0.8

24 x 10-l9 N. The length of potentiometer wire is 53. Thc resistances of the four arms P. 0. R and Sin a
Gm. The emf of the battery connccted across the Wheatstone's bridge are 10 Q, 30 2, 30N and 90N,
wire is (electronic charge = 16 x
10-"C) respectively. The emf and internal resistance of the
(MHT CET 2014) cell are 7V and 5. respectively. If the
(a) 6 V 9V (b) (c) 12 V (d) 15 V galvanometer resistance is 50 2, then the current
drawn from the cell will be [NEET 2013]
45. A galvanoneter having internal resistance 10N la) 1.0 A (c) 0.1 A
0.2 A (d) 2.0 A
requires 0.01 A for a full scale deflection. To convert
this galvanometer to a voltmeter of full scale 54. An electron revolves in a circle at the rate of 10
deflection at 120 V, we need to connect a resistance rounds per second. The equivalent current is
le = 16 x 10-19 C)
[UK PMT 2014) U&K CET 2013]
(a) 1190in series (b) 11990N in parallel (a) 1.0 A (b) 1.6 A (c) 2.0 A (d) 2.6 A
(c) 120102 in series (d) 120102 in parallel 55. A silver wire of radius 0.!cm carries a current of
46. In potentioneter experiment, a cell of emf 1.25 V 2A. 1f the charge density in silver is 5.86 x 1o? m
gives balarncing length of 30 cm. the cell is then the drift velocity is U &K CET 2013]
replaced by another cell, then balancing length is (a) 02x 10 ms-l (b) 0.4x 10 ms-l
found to be 40 cm. What the emí of sccond cell?
(KCET 2014) lc) 0.68x 10ms! (d) 7x 10 ms

(a) 1.5 V (b) L67V (c) = 147 V (d) - 137V m long wire of diameter 0.31 mm has a resistance
56. A 1

47. Potentiometer measures the potential difference of 4.22. If it is replaced by another wire of same
more accurately than a voltmeter because material of length 1.5 m and diameter 0.155 mm, then
(UK PMT 2014]
the resistance of wire is j&K CET 2013}
(a) it does not draw current from external circuit
252 S2
la) (b) 0.62 (c) 26.7n (d) 0.82
(b) it draws a heavy current from externa! circuit
(c) it has a wire of high resistance 57. 24 celis of emf 1.5 V each having internal resistance
(d) it has a wire of low resistance of ohn are connected to an external resistance of
1

1.5 ohms. To get maximum current, U &K CET 2013)

48. In a potentiometer experiment, the balancing with a
(a) all cells are connected in series combination
cell is at ength 240 cm. On shunting the cell with a (b) all cells are connected in parallel combination
resistance of 22, the balancing becomes 120 cm. (c) 4 cells in each row are connected in series and 6 such
The internal resistance of the cell is (UK PMT 2014) rows are connected in parallel
(a) 12 (b) 0.5 (d) 22
(c) 42 (d) 6 cells in cach row are connected in series and 4 such
rows are connected in parallel
 Chapter O3: Current electricity (231

. The temperature coefficient of the resistance of a 64. Which onc of the following electrical meter has the
wire is 0.00125 per °C. At 300 K its resistance is 1S2. smallest resistance?
The resistance of wire will be 22 at J&K CET 2013) (a) Amneter (6) Millianmmetei
(a) 1154K (b) 1100K (c) Galvanometet (d) Voltmeter
(c) 1400K (d) 1127K (d) Millivoltmeter

59. The cmí of cell E is 15 V as shown in the figure

a 65. Two wires of the same material having equal area of
with an internal resistance of 0.5 2. Then, the value cross-section have length L and 2L. Their respective
of the current drawn from the cell is (EAMCET 2013) resistances are in the ratio (Kerala CET 2013]
72 (a) 2: 1
(b) 1: 1

(c) 1:2 (d) 1:3

(e) 4: 1

66. Two bulbs 60 W and 100 W designed for voltage

0.52 220 V are connected in series across 220 V source.
w The net power dissipated is (Kerala CET 2013]
102 la) 80 V (b) 160 W (c) 37.5 W (d) 60 V
(a) 3 A (b) 2 A (e) 120 W
(c) 5 A (d) 1
A 67. The drift speed of electrons in copper wire of
60. Copper and carbon wires are connected in series and diameter and length l is v. lf the potential difference
the combined resistor is kept at 0°C Assuming the across the wire is doubled, then the new drift speed
combined resistance does not vary with temperature, becomes (Kerala CET 2013]
the ratio of the resistances of carbon and copper (a) (b) 2v (c) 3v (d) w2
wires at 0°Cis (Temperature cocfficients of (e) w4
resistivity of copper and carbon respectively are 68. A potentiometer wire of length 10 m and resistance
4x10°/°C and -0.5x 10 /°C) [EAMCET 2013) 102 pera metre is connecteda in series with a resistance
(a) 4 (6) 8 box and 2 volt battery. If potential difference of
(c) 6 (d) 2 100 mV is balanced across the whole length of
61. Three conductors draw currents of1 A, 2 A snd 3 A potentioneter wire, then the resistance introduced in
the resistance box will be IMP PMT (2013))
respectively, when connected in turn across a
battery. If they are connected in series and the (a) 1900N (b) 900N
(c) 190 Q (d} 902
combination is connected across the same battery,
then the current drawn will be [Karnataka CET 2013) 69. If a wire is stretched to four tines its length, then
the specific resistance of the wire will (MP PMT 2013)
la b)A
7 (a) become 4 times (b) becone 1/4 times
(c) becone 16 timcs (d) remain the same
70. For the circuit shown in figure given below, the
62. Masses of three wires of copper are in the ratio of equivalent resistance between points A and B is
[MPPMT 2013)
1:3:5and their lengths are in the ratio of 5:3:1 D
The ratio of their electrical resistances is
[Karnataka CET 2013]
(a) 1
:3:5 (b) 5:3:1
(c) 1: 15: 125 (d) 123 : 15:1
63. In the circuit diagram, heat produces in R, 2R and 102
1.5 R are in the ratio of [Karnataka CET 2013]
(a) 102 (b) 52
(d) 22
1.5 R
!
71. Two resistors of 62 and 92 are connected in serics
to a 120 V source. The power consumed by 62
2R resistor is (MP PMT 2013]
(a) 4:2:3 (b) 8:4: 27 (a) 384 W (b) 616 W
(c) 1500 W (d) 1800 W
(c) 2:4:3 (d) 27: 8:4
232 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

72. A current of 2A flows in the arrangement of 78, The equivalent resistance between A andBof
conductors as shown in below figure. The potential network shown in figure is [UP CPMT 2013|
difference between points A and BV, -Vg) will be
[UP CrMT 2013| K

22 352
B

2A

314 1R (c) 6R (d) 2R

+1V
(a) (b) -1V 79. Agalvanometer having resistance of 50 2 requires a
+2V
(c) (d) -2V current of 100 uA to give full scale deflection. How
73. A cell of emfE and internal resistance r supplies much resistance is required to convert it into an
current for the same time r through cxternal ammeter of range of 10 A? [BCECE (Mains) 2012]
resistance R, and R, separately. If the heat (al 5x I02 in series (b) 5x I0* Qin parallel
developed in both the cases is the sane. then the (c) 10°2 in eries (d) 10°2 in arallel
internal resistancer will be [UP CPMT 2013]
80. Two cells when connected in serics are balaced on
x
(b) rR, R, 8 m on a potentiometer. If the cells are conneted
with polarities of one of the cells is reversed, then
(d) r= they balance on 2 m. The ratio of emfs of two cells is
2
(BCECE (Mains) 2012)
74. When a current of (25 + 0.5) A flows tlhrough a wire, fal 3:4 4:3 (b)
it develops a potential difference of (20 + D V, then (c) 3:5 (d) 5:3

the resistance of wire is (UP CPMT 2012] 81. In the given circit diagram if each resistance is of
(a) (8 + 2)2 tb) (8 L.6}2 102, then the urtent in aru AD will be
(c) (8± 1.5)0 (d) (8+3)2 [BCECE (Mains) 20121
75. To draw the maximum current from a combination of
cells, how should le the cells be groupel?
(UP CPMT 2012]
(a) Parallel
(b) Series
(c) Depends upxon the relative values of internal and
cxtermal resistance
(d) Mixed grouping

76. The variation between V-i has shown by graph for

heating filament |UP CPMT 2012] 2i
5

(a) (b) 5
82. When current i is flowing through a conductor, the
1
drift velocity is v. If the value of current through the
conductor and its area of cross-section is doubled,
then new drift velocity will be (BCECE Mains 2012)
(a) 4v (b) Id)

83. A wire having resistance 12

2 is bent in he form of an
77. Two bulbs when connected in parallel to a source cquilateral tringle. The cffctive resistance lxtween any
take 60 W each, the power consumed, when they are two corners of the triangle will be [BCECE Mains 20121
connected in scries with the same source is
(a) 69
(UP CPMT 2012]
(a) 15 W (b) 30 y (c) 60 (d) 120 W (c) 92 (d) 122

Chapter 03: Current electricity 233

 Chapter 03: Current electricity (233

84. In the circuit shown, tlhe cells A and B have 91. Six resistances each of valuer=52 are connected
negligible resistances. For Va =12 V, R, = 500 Q
and R = 100 2 the galvanometer (G) shows no between points A Band C as shown in the figure. If
deflection. The value of V is R,,R, and R, are the net resistance between A and B.
(CBSE AIPMT 2012] hetween B and C and between A and C respectively.
then R, : R, :R, will be equal to (ANMU 2012]

V.

lal 4 V (b) 2 V (c) 12 V (d) 6 V

S5. A millivoltmeter of 25 mV range is to be converted
into an ammeter of 25 A range. The value (in ohm) B
of necessary shunt will be (CBSE AIPMT 2012]
wwww
ra6
la) 0.001 (b) 0.01 (d) O.05
(a) 6:3:2 l:2:3
86. If voltage across a bulb rated 220 V- L00 W drops by (c)
(b)
2.5% of its rated value, then the percentage of 5:4:3 4:3:2 (d)
the
rated value by which the power would decrease is 92, Charge passing through a conductor of cross-section
area A = 03 is given by q
m

(a) 20 {b) 2.5% (c) 59,

[CBSE AIPMT 2012]
(d) 10%
=3t+ 5t + 2 in
coulomb, where t is in second. What is the value of
87. 62 and 122 resistors are connected in parallel. This drift velocity at r = 2s? (Given, n =2x 10m)
combinatiot is connected in series with a 10 V (AIIMS 2012|
battery and 62 resistor. What is the potential (a) 0.77 x 10m/s
difference between the terminals of the 12SN (b) 1.77x 10'm/s
resistor? (AIIMS 2012] (c) 2.08 x 10'm/s
(a) 4 V (b) 16 V (c) 2
88. A voltmeter of range 2 V and resistance 300 S2 cannot
(d)
8v3ti11 (d) 0.37x 10'm/s
be converted into anmeter of range 93. Each resistaIce shown in figure is 22. The
[Manipal 2012)
(a) 1
A (bl I mA (c) 100 mA (d) 10 mA equivalent resistance betvween and Bis |AFMC A
2012)
89. In the Wheatstone network given, = 10S2,
Q= 20 S2, R = 152, S =302, the current passing
through the battery (of negligible internal resistance) 2

[Manipal 2012)

252 22

(a) 22 (b) 12
(c) 42 (d) 52
94. In the circuit shown, the potential difference
between x and y will be JCECE 2012]
(a) 0.36 A (tbl zero
(c) 0.18A 40 2
(d) 0.72A w

90. A current of 5 A is passing through a metallic

of cross-sectional area 4 x 10 m. If
wie
the density of
charge carriers of the wire is 5 x 10" m,the drift
velocity of the clectrons will be [Manipal 2012| 0S2
120 V
la) lx ms-!0
(b) 1.56 x 10 msl
(a) zero (b) 120 V
(c) 1.56 x 10- ms-! (d) I x 10² ms-! (c) 60 V (d) 20 V
234) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

95. For the circuit shown in figure, JCECE 2012] (a)A

R

to5A ww

(c)
10) 20 2
(d) 2 A

97. If a current of 2A flows through resistances

connected as shuwn in figure, the potential
la) resistance R = 462 difference Va -Vg is [BHU Sereening 2012]
(b) current through 202 resistance is 0.1A
(c) potential difference across the middle resistance is 2 V
(d) All of the above ate true
96. An anmeter connected in the circuit as shown in
ligure shows a reading of [BHU Sereening 2012]

3n4
22 2V
A

(a)-V
22 ww (b) +1 V
(c)-2 V

22. (d) +2V

Answers
Check point 3.1
1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (b) 5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (b) 10. (a)

Check point 3.2

1, (b) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (c) 9. (b) 10. (b)
11. (d} 12. (b) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (d) 16. (d) 17, (a) 18. (a) 19. (d) 20. (a)

Check point 3.3

1, (c) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. () 5. (b) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (a)
11. (b) 12. (d) 13. (b) 14. (b) 15. (c) 16. (a) 17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (c) 20. (a)

Check point 3.4

1. (d) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (c) 6. (d) 7. {d) 8. (d) 9. (d) 10. (c)
11. (b) 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (c) 16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (c) 19. (b) 20. (3)
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (235

Taking it together
6. td)
11. (b)

86. (b.cd)

Medical entrance special format questions

Assertion and reason
1. (c) 2. (d) 3. 7. (d) . (b 10. (
12. (e 4. ( 17. (a)
Match the
colums
s:D -p 2. (A +p, B r,C-qD+p) 3. (Ap. B
-aC-4D)
iA-R-boCp:D-+)
Medical entrances' gallery
Hints and
explanations
Check point 3.1
Check point 3.2
1. (a) Current, ! = d -33²+ +
5
d 1. (6) We have,
i=!R!
5) dt
q-+2+ .. Charge, q
V 20 x2 x
60
240 C
q = 22 C 10
Charge, =(+r+
2. (a) Resistance. R
=p-A and resistivity. p
2. (ol Cutrent, i = I net
ml
R=
i= 16x 10nx1.6 x 10 nerA
:. Number of electrons, n
10'
3. () R=p

Since, wires afe of same material, so resistivity p of all wire

3. lcd Ve have current, i = will be same.
0.2 30 × Therefore, Ra Rx
.:. Number of clectrons, n =
3.75 x 10!9
1.6x 10-19
4. (b) Let the numter of electrons =N Ro
I=4-0.082
d =4- 0D.08r
For length 50 cm and diameter 0.3 mm

0.08) dt Resistace will be maximutn.

4-4- 4. (A) B
0.08
-
Brown Ree! (Green old
4 100 C
2
2 10 59
100 100 R

xC+D
AB
N= L.6x 10-o
R=12x 10 5%
6.25 x
102)
5. () Given circuit can be redrawn as follows

5. (a) D:ift velocity.

23Y. 23Y,
6. ( Drift velocity, v, =

- and
J,Ai
2)
AWw.
52 5S2 52

8. (b) The order of drilt velocity is 10- ns= 10 cms-! : Potential diference across AB 2
is+=v
3 3 3
10. (a) Drift velocity,
6. (c) The given circuit can bxe reduced to
x x B
ieA 8.5 10 1.6x 10- x2x 10

=0.1]x 10 ms-! D,
Equivalent resistance between A and
length of the wire 3 x 10 s Rn 2+ 4
m62
Time )= T=2.73
0.11x10 = (i) (0.5) =
3V
V-V
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (237

7. (b) Potential difference across the circuit Current through arnmeter.

= 1.2×/6x 4)
6+ 4}
2.88V
(8/3)
2
62
8

So, current through 62 resistance =:

2.88 = 13. (a) The circuit can be reduced as follows
0.48A

Alternative solution
From current division law, 15V+
6n
= 0.48A
8n
Step()
8. (c) Curent dividcs according to resistance, so current in 62
0.8 - 20,
resistance is 0.4 A
2
So, total current in circuit is 0.8 0.4 1.2A
:: Potential drop across 42= 1.2x 4 = 4.8V
B3n
9. (b) Two resistances are short circuited.
So, oudy third circuit will be considered and hence
i=V/R= 10/3A Step (2)
0. ( Net resistance, R, is So, equivalent resistance across battery.
10 x 15 = R, 8.5- 2+ 4.5- 152
Ry = -+3+ 0.5 9.5
10+ 15 Hence, CuIrent from the battery

IE R 2.1A 15
9.5
ts
14. (b) As B is connected to the earth, so potential of B is V,
=0.
Curtent through 102 resistance
Now, current in the given circuit,
1.2A
4-2.i= 15)
5+74 10+3
50
2A

1. (à Resistance, RAs
3 Potential difference between A and B is
or V,
2
V, -V =2 x 12 -0= 24
V, - 24V
+

2
3
15. () It is an open circuit and for oen circuit, terminal
= a
Rn potential difference cmf of cell, ie.. VeE

16. (d We have
12. (b) 1he circuit can be redrawn as follows
VE-ir 1.5 - 2x0.15
22 w
V=1.20V
17. (d Potential difference betwecn A and B is given by
22
A

5Y+ 2 x 10
4=
X+ 10
22 X 20n
Resistance across AB, 18. (a)
w

Total resistance of circuit,

R, 2
=2+
92
238) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

=
E, 4V and E, 8V 3. (6) Let at junction C, potential is V
So, E, > E, current lows from Q to P. V
42
20 ww
A

:. Potential difference acToss 202

PQ=x9= 3V
3
19. (d The potentials of different ponts are as shown in figure, Yov
2 V
2 4 2
(8 V 20
-V,5 -V_V-0
2 2

10 V
92
Current through 5n resistance Current, I4.5A
Potential ifference (4-2) = 0.4A 4, (c) Equal current (of 1
A) will be distributed in the two
Resistance tranches.
20. (a) For maximum enengy, we have V, -V, =2xl= 2V
External resistarnce of the circuit and Vo -, =3 x l= 3V
Eçuivalent internal resistance of the circuit.
=
5. (b) Work done, W
qV=6x10 x9=54 x 10 J
Check point 33 6. (a} In series i is same, H =iRt. Therefore, H R.

1. (c) 25 x 25 =
R =
7. (o) Resistance, 252
15 A 25
or R v
8. (a) Resistance, R
P
8A

D R,
=
9. (6) Power, P
R
Applying Kirchhoffs first Law at junction A, B, C, D
At
iR =15+8= 23A
A. P; R
At B, =23+ 3 = 26A So.
At D, y &A- 5A =3A
At C,
200R,
or 3+=26 100 R
i 23A
R, = 2R
2. (a
10. (a) Power,
P

R
Potential difference between A and B,
V,-Vy =1x 1.5 or
V,-O 1.5
Pal
Vv

V 1.5 Also, resistance of wire

1

Potential dilference between Band C, (radius of filament)²

Vy -Ve =
..
lx 2.5 = 2.5 V Pa(radius of flanent)?
0-V 2.5 V So, 100 W bulb has thicker fila::ent.
V

V-2.5 Y? P_ 210 x
5 x
60
- 15000 cal
So, potential difference between C and D, 12. (d H

- 0.5V 4.2
Ve-V, =- 2V or -2,5-V, =- 2 or V,
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (239

3. (b
P
*R 6. (d) 10V
2R
2+ R) 1000S2

2+R_ 2
2R 3
:. Resistance, R- 62 A -Ww
S0X) B
000
-

14. (b) R'

4 R Equivalent resistance of circuit.
000 2500
P'=4P R, 3004
15. tc) Rp > Rgy- In series, potential difference 3
distrittes in
dircct ratio of resistance. .Current drawn from the cell,
16. (al kWh = 1000 x 60 x 60 = 36x 10 W-s = 36 x 10 3
10J
1

A
2500/ 3 250
17. (c) Vhen bulbs are in series, P=
3R
..)
Reading of voltrneter =
250
3100-4V 3
When bulbs are connected in parallel.
7. ld V- IR
(fron Eq. (i)) L00 = (10 x 10) (25 + R)
(R/31
=9P Resistance, R = 99752
.:.

8. (d When sarne resistance is connectcd in parallel with

18. () In parallel, V
is same, P= or Px voltmetcr the cffective resistance get decreased.
R R
10. (c) We have, i,G = (i-i,1S
19. () When each bulb is glowing at full power.
10 x 99 = (9015
Current fron each bulb, i= 50 1 10 x 99
100 S=
90
So, main current,
Shunt, S- 112
Also, E =V+ ir 11. (c) 102 w
100 2
120 =100 *10
|)
nu4

20. (a) P=R will decrease. Therefore, P

will increase.

Check Beforc connecting the voltmeter, let the potential ifference

point 3.4 across 1002 is V.
1. (d Resistance is parallel with voltmeter, therefore it is zero.
1.6
4. (6) 1f voltmeter is ideal. then R should be 42. lf it is 11
0.4
non-ideal R should be greater than 42.
5. (c) Total resistance of given circuit
o0420= 40+ 20 602
=

1+1
2
:. Main current, i= A

60 30
Now, in parallel, there are two resistaxes of 802 cach. (one
of voltmeter and othcr 802 resistance) So, current is equally
distributed in 802 resistance and vol:meter, So, After connecting the voltmeter across 1002.
100
Current flows through each. Fpuivalent resistance : x00 902
.. Potential difference across 802 resistance 100 + 900
Let this time potential difference is Vy.
1
60
x
80 = 1.33V
240 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

4. (a) Current dernsity relates with electric field as

J= oE=i» JaE
erTor = = 1.0 wherc, o conductivity andp= resistivity or specific
Magnitude of % J 10-x00 resistance of substance.
6. (d Pot entiometer works on null deflection method. In baiance
12. (b) (a)50 (50 x 10)(100 +
10 Thereforc, (a) is wrong. condition, io curTent flow in secondary circuit.
10 (50 x 10*)000 + 200 x
10°. Terefore. h} is cortect. 7. (o W'e cannot increase the rating of fuse wite of lower value
bl just by incrcasing its length. For it, we shall have to mak
50x 10 Therefore. (c) is wrong fuse wire thick.
10x 10-50x 10 100
8. (b Specific tesistance of silver, copper and aluminium are
(6RV)(100)=, 1.6x 10 "n-m I.7 x 10* S-m and2.7 x 10 Q
14. ( + 1980)
.:.
Tespectivelv.
Resistance, R= 20 S2
Thhus, correct sequence is Al, Cu, Ag.
15. ( AR
R R,
alanced Wheatstone bridgel
9. () Voltmeter has high resistance. So, most of the main
K,R, R, R, current will flow through amneter which is in parallcl. So, it
of
will burn out. No damage will (xcur to voltmeter.
16. () The galvanometer shows o current, it means this is a
10. ( V
=E- it =E R E
balaced Wheatstone bridge, So,
R 4C 20 -.=Ek
80 13. ( The minimum resistance can be achieved whcn we
. Resistance, R= 202 connect all resistances in parallel.
is cqual to
=

17. (a) ln potentiometer, the ratio of emfs the ratio of So, cquivalent resistance of combination 10
no deflection lengths.
( When wire is bent in the formn of a circle, theu it is
E4.2
E, 4 3
14.
equivalent to two resistances in parallel.
12
18, (c) ra. 2

15. (a) As steady current is flowing through the conducto9, hence

60 -50Y the number of electrons entering fron one end and outgoing
x6*1.za
from the other end of any segment is cqual. IHence, charge
19. (H For potentiometer, emf will be zero.
El or Ek 16. (d Out of n cells, two cells will cancel out cach others enf.
where. k is a constant. So, nct emf (n - 2) E.
Total resistance =R+ nr
Also,
L Current. i =
E
nr + R
E=
=
17. (d Current, i
10 5
E..3=3v Power, P= iR
E°R
P= (r+
P R R²
20. (a) Potential gradient,xm
R+R, + r) L Power will be maximum when t =R
x
0.2 10) 2 E

R= 49 2 P
10* (R+ 490+ 0) 4r
18. tc) Three resistances are in parallel, so effectively the
A) Taking it together resistace would be equal to
1. (cd Duing the charging of battery terminal, potential difleretce
is always greater than emí of circit. I,!,I3
V-E+ ir Ret RR RR
R
3. (al Although current is denoted by arrow but it is a scalar So,
quantity, and power is also scalar quantity, while current
density () is a vector quantity.
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (241

9. (à The resistivity of a semiconductor decreases with inctease 27. (6) For twisted wire, there are two halves cach of resistance
in temperature expornentially. 22 in parallel.

Hence, option (c) is correct. So, R, 2x2

0. (a Slope of the V-icurve at any point is equal to resistance at 2+2
that point. 28. (al When wite is divided in 10 cqual parts, then cach part
From the curve, slope for T, > slope lor T; will have a resistance R/ I0 0.01Rr.
Let equivalent resistance be r. then
R, < Ri,
> Also at higher temperature resistance will be higher, so I.!,!.+.0
r
imes
1
10 10 100
1. (a) The relationship between currernt and drift speed is given
by (R/10) R

i= neAvs R =
0,01R
Here, I is the curtent and v, is the drift velocity. 100
So, 29. (a) Equivalent resistance between B and C.

Thus, oniy drift velocity deterrnines the current in a (2+ 2) x 28

conductor. 2+2+ 2
6
2. lc) Current in the circuit will increase because another
resistance is connected in parallel to the circuit and bence
potential drop acrosS other anmeter will therefore decrease.
So, the potential difference over voltmeter will increase
because total of potential difference over ammeter and 202
voltmeter is cqual to emf (constant).
23, (a) II there is a inctease in length, then w

R-pL/A, let assume the wire is a cvlindrical on stretching 20

the wire, the volume of the wire remains satne.
So, tnew tesistance pl'A'

)-"-21 -
-C

R= |.21R= 1.21x 10 12.I2

24. (d Circuit can be reduced as follows. 2S2

32
Ww 30. ( Given circuit can be reduced to

20 V
Step (2)
Stept1)
So, equivalent resistance of circuit.
R =5Q
:. Current in the circuit = 20 So, equivalent resistance between points A and B is equal to
5
As in parallel, cuTent is divided according to resistancc, so, A
current flowingthrough cacth resistance 2A
25. (a) Potential difference = 10V
So, i 10 -
2A
5

26. (a) lnternal resistance, r

6x3
202
6+ 3
242 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

(P+QNR+ S) IR+ RX2R + 2R)

31. td Given, RR, ...) 35. ld Km
K+R, P+Q+ R+ S) CR.R+ 2K+ 2R)
When one resistance is broken say R, is broken, then The equivalent resistance of the network between points A
R- 292 ...(i) and .
From Eqs. fi) and (i), we get Ren R

In this case, equivalent resist ance of the network between

points A and B is independent of the value of G.
32. (a) We have R= Let resistance, R =
36. (b 1002
R«l R'=100+ 100 x I0 - l102
R, , 2 . Requircd shunt, AR R
100
-R- 110- 99-110
37. (d Given, V= 115V
K=x9= 3) W
and P=1250
2
x9 m62 We know, R=
p
Net resistance, Rern
RR; (115)
22 R - 10.582
So,
1230
33. (a) The simple circuit is as suwn beluw Resistance, R= 10.6 2
-w 38. () Resistance. R, = R,(1+ a)
20 = K,{l+ 20 a) and 60 = R,(1+ 500a)
From this cquation. we can find
R, = 18.332
62
a4.54 I0
x

R, 25S2
R, = R(1+ ut)
Again
25 =18.33K1+ 4.54 × 10)
!6/10 2 24/10 92
ww-w
We find t80°C
39. () The current i crossing area of cruss-section A, can be
expressed in terms of driftvelocity v, and the moving charge
1

R
3 4
6 i= nevA
1+3+ 2 9 where, n is number of charge carricrs per unit volume and
12 12
e the charge on the carricr.
24 x 10
R, =
neA (3x 10"N1. 6x 10"X10-)
=
12 x4 5x 10m
34. () Resistance, R= 2= 2-52
12+ 4 16 40. () Drift velocity in a coppcr conductor,
5.1
Elcctric current, i : 2A x
L.6x 10-1" x 10
R+r 6
neA 8.4 x 10
= 0,4 x mns
10 ms0.4
41. (a) Here.
= 0.5
I.5R
and

i, =1.5
A,=
A
i, 1.5 0.5
V
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (243

i.e., Potential difference across the voltmeter is

and V= iR=(2 x 10) x 998 = 1.996V
i, - and i, = : 47. (d Resistance, R
2V - 0.512
3 4 A

Now,
Resistance, R= 0.5
m
n0.5
2i x
15R = iR A lx 10
3
Resistivity of wire
x 3R iR
0.5 x 10 - 10Q-m
Le. 0.5
2. (a) The resistance of wire is given by 48. (6)In order to balatxe the bridge, the effective value of S
must be equal to 29.
Sx6
So, 2=
S+6
For greater value of RImust be higher arxd should be lower A

and it is possible only when the battery is connccted across 2S+ 12 = 6S 4S= 12 > Se 32
lcm xcm (area of cross-section 4.
49. (c) Current in the potential wire = 2
990 + 10
2x 10A

3. (2) In potentiorneter experiment, the emf of a cell can be Potential drop over wire 2x10 x 0 = 2 x 10 :V= IR
measured, if the potential drop alog the wire
is Inote than the emf of
the cel o to d Here value Poneter Potential gradient = 2x 102 =

10 V/m
of emEs of two cells are given as 5V and 10V, 1herefore the
potential drop along the potentiometer wire must be oTe
than 10 V. 50. (0) Current, i - f g[").6x (2n)10" (2.2x 10°) {5 x 10-)
14. (a) Potential gradient' iR_ipL ia
= 1.12 x
L
L I. A 10A
x10* 31. (d Suppose resistanccs of wires are R and R,, then
x
0.2 40 =
10Vim R,
8x 10 6 R

15. () When potentiometer is connected belween A and B, then 5 R+R,

it tneasures only E, and when connected between A and C
then it measures E
If R, breaks, then R,- 22
-E 6 2xR,
Hence,
E, - E, , 5 2+ R,

E;-Ez4 52. (d We have k xi=ixR

12 x10*(50) = 10 xi
E,
100 The current passing through the resistor,
E i- 10 x 10
E, 300 A- 10 mA

53. (d Total cells xn = 24 = m ...0)

E For maximum eurrent in tthe circuit,
Eg.? 3
x
(0.5) m n
...(ii)
E 3
E3 2 On solving Eqs. (i) and {ü). we get m = 12andn2
(cd Current, ,, =
E, 5 =
0.25 x 10A
54. R 20 x10
46. (a) From Ohm's law,

= x
110 0.25
10R+ 20)
***ik*****.
R= 420k2
35. to We have =
r+ R,
Ftom these tw equatios,we get

R+r
E 98
2 2x 10A
244) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

3
56. (4
1
l,1 Resistance of thick wire, R, = 102 (given)
R R
RR
R
:. Resistarnce of thin wire. R, = 3x 10 = 30S2
= R+ Total resstance of series cunbination = 10 + 30 = 402
R 2 R, R= 2R2
63. (c) Given, = V,= 34 l, = 5k
R. Rp +
R and m, = m, m, = r =m m

R 2R+- 3 3
Resistance,
A

2+2 where. p is resistivity of the material of conductor.

37. () i -
1+1.9+ 0.9 38 So, R:k,:R, 4,4..5.
Fur cell A.
EV+ ir
= x1.9
m, m, m, -!::-1:
5 3 1
15:125
VE-ir 2-
3.8 64. (b) Electric power, P = iR
V
0(zero)
Current., i
58. (5) Intenal resistance
For resistance of 92,

59, (dE:
4-4=2A
+
R+ R r)L iXR.2x9_
10 = 0.16V 6 6
(10 + 40 + 0)
xx0.4 1
i=+ t,= 2+ 3= 5A y= iR, = 5 x
2=10V
(c) 65. (c) The equivalent circuit can be drawn as
60.

In circuit, resistance between PQ. QR and RS are in parallel.

Now circuit reduces to i

w
10

www 1/32
B

2
Current =- 0.4A
( Resistance, R= 3+ 10(3+ R)
61.
13+ R 66. (c) Total potential drop across the given wire
Solving this equation, we get =(|x 10(10)- 0.1 V
R-V69n Therefore, potential difierence across R should be 1.9 V
62. (al Resistance, R=p,
For same meterial and sane length,
RA, 3 100 em, 3 Sn
L. o
R, = 3R Now, R=572
0.1 3
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (245

S7. (a) We have Also since, cels are connccted in opposite directions, the
resultant emf is
A, =4A or y E=E-E,
= 5
V- 2 V=3V
Rg = 1RA
From Ohm's law, E
iR
3
i.ER 30
-0.1 A
17 17
If R
4, then R, 4.252 or R, = 68Q 71. (6) lere, the resistances of 4002 and 1000052 are in parallcl.
Balaxed condition for Wheatstone's bridge. their effective resistarke R, will bee
400 x 100O00 5000
R R -100 +
10000 13
x
10 I Total resistance of the circuit
58. (0 We have 24+ ...(i)
v
84- 30 5XX0 + 800 -l3100
3 24+ 84+ x+y 13 13
+
10 30 39
Current in the circuit, A
15400 /13 7700
...lii)
10 Potential difference across voltmeter
Solving this equatinn, we get
= iR = 393000 =
1.95 V
7700 13
69. (0) The given circuit can be redrawn as when
R
decreases to 0,i,
72. (b) Current, i=
10 2 R+r r
w
2032
(c 20
73.
80
P+15 10 P-+ 15 2
60
I
152 15 5 Q- 3692
4
Q 3 Q 12
It is a balanced Wheatstoue bridge arnd hene, cuTrent
flows in tle midkdle resistor, so eguivalent circuit would be as
o Resitance,
P x

36 =
92
shown i figure. =
74. (à Effective voltage on charging 4x1.4-2= 3.6V
20 2
OS2
Total resistance 8n i=VIR = 3.6/8 = 0.45 A
=

75. ) Sice, on balatcing hu current flaws thrngh the battery

so its internal iesistace will not affected.

102 Potential gradient =

100
E 30E
So, balaICing emf x
30 =
100 100
76. (c) When a resistance of 100 2 is connected in series, then
the current flowing will be
10 2 and 209 resistances are in series.
...i)
R= 10 202 = 302 100+ R
Similazly, 3) and 102 are in serics. R' 1592
When a resistance of 1000S2 is connected in serics, then its
Now, R' atxi R'are in parallel, range of galvanometer double.
15x 30 21
R= Current, i ..(ii)
15+ 30 1100 + R
V 5
So, 0.5 A
Fron Eqs. (i) and tii). we get
R 10 21

70. lc) Ve know that when current flow is sae then resistors 100 + R 100 + R
are connectei in series, hece resultant resistance is
R= 900
2

=
=
R= &+ R, 102+ 202 302
246 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

77. (c) There are two batterses with emf 84. (di By joining 22 and 62 in parallel, we get 1.52 and
E cach ad internal resistances joining them in series we get 82.
r,, respertivelv.
nd So, values of R, and R, will ie 20 and 62.
Hence. we have iR +ttl=2F 85, (h 10 xi= 2x 50
Thus,
2
100 -
w
10 mA
10
Now, the potential differece acrss the irst ceil would be
86. (4 1n parallei current distribution in inverse ratio of
cqual toV E - ir. Frotnthe question,V = 0 bence,
reststance.
E = in = 2r -. R
thus ++r, -2
hence R-rz R
3.3A
R+nt
0.3A 2A
78. (d Drift velocity, v, ix4
20 52

iie..

R-402
Further V = 20V = V =
69- 20 = 49V
79, (c) Power, 49 =
R=-
3.5 192
(b) We have
p
or
Ra2 88.
shunt, S=: G
2001
L.e.,
R, 300 wherc, G is resistance of galvanometer.
When connected in scries, then potential drop and power Again.
consumced arc in the ratio of their resistakes. So, G
S'= ...(il
In'-1
P V, R, 9 S (n'

80. (b) Current tequired by each bulb, S (n-D

i= P_100 A Sn -D
1' 220
lf n bulbs are oined in parallel, then
ni=
100 =
10 89. (cd Higher the power, lower the resistance and lower the
220
resistance, thicker the elenent.
n=22
90. (b) Given,
81. (a) When connected in series power dissipated, R, 2
x
I00 60 6000 -
100 - 37.5 W Let, third resistance is R.
R+ 60 160
So
82. (8 Rise in temperature = 1SC 2a R
Amount of water =1l= 1000 cc = 1000 g 3R
Heat supplied in cal 1000 x 15x1 2(R-1
In joule = 1000 x 15 x 1.2
As resistance is not fractional. (given
x 15 x 42
Power 1000
-

1050 W (Joule/secl
60
83. (h Work doc hy clectric force on clcctron on an average on So, R2
mean per path
x = a=3 and 21 =6
Eq 4* 10 2
xV Applying Kirchhoffs law at point D, we get
91. ()
E= 4x10-4 0,5 x 10 i=,+h
=
5x10' V/m 10 20 30
 247
Chapter 03: Current electricity

70 -V, Y. Y-10
3
So, the value of S should be changed from 100
obtain reading in the mean position.
2 to 3Q 10
70 - 40 (5) No cutrent will flow through
V,
40V 3A 97. the groutded wire.
10
40-0 = 2A 98. () Es E,,•E,
20
Therefore, E, can be greater than, less than or equal to E,
depending upon the condition whether E, > E,.E, = E or
E, <E,
99. (b) We have, I,
=0
=
Vy E,=2v
Vson (12 -21 500
2 X
10 V X-1002
-:40-
10 100. la) Equivalent resistance of circuit,
and i, 3 x6
30 R=4 62
- E,/ra
= Elr 3+6
92. (b E and current through battery.
Current through R will be zero if 3
E, =0 i0.5A
6
EE V= iR= 0.5 x 6= 3V
Potential difference over 4S3V
Net emf I0-4 = lA from a
93. (d) i= toe. Potential difference across the resistor of 32
Net resistance 1+2+3 over V
62=4-3=]
94. Electric field provides force to the clectrons to change
(b)
101. (d The given circuit can be reduced to
direction due to curtent density. It is all into the centripetal
force in circular motion which changes the direction of www.
velocity in this type of motion.
95. (a) E willbe less than E, and more than E,

We know that in the given circuit,

3n
Ef;* Ef A
wwww
662
Here, E
is weighted average of E, and E,. So, equivalent resistance between A and B,
Naturally, its valze will lie between the value of E, and E
9x69 x6_ 18 RAR = 3.69
96. () We know that percentage of error can be minimised by 9+6 15 5
adjusting the balarce point near the middle of the meter scale
i.e., aroud 5/) cin. This can be achieved by adjusting the 102. ( The network can be redrawn as follows
value of S For balance point to be at 2.9, we have the
equation.
R 29 29
S 97.1
R= 971 *100=3
The value of R is 32. Step (1)
For balance point to n the middle,
R_1
S1 Step (2)
R=S
Now, there are three resistances in series.
Herc, R= 32
So, equivalent resistance, R, =3+3+ 3=92
S=32
248 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

103. (d) 29 22 108, (a) The given circuit forms a balanced Wheatstone bridge
Aww between points A and B.

-www Ww
2) 29 22 i.e..
Stepl)

292 212
ww wWw

So, cffective resistance between A and B is R.

109. (al The simple circuit is as sbown below,
Be Ww
2) 22 Ran- IS A

Step (2)
22
22

wWww
20 22
Step (3)
Bo
Bo
:. The equivalent resistance across AB.
4
2x2

20
R+2
Step(4) 110, () The simple citcuit is as shown below.

Now, equivalent reistance between A and Bis 102

R, 2+ 4+ 2-B2
104. () 'Total resistance of the circuit,
8S2 -w 62.
+ =
(15+ 15) x 30 Q+
R=R
+

+
35 +
(R R,) R (15+ 15) 30 6Q
30 x
30 10 x(8+ 247
= 35+ 50 R
5.39
30 + 30) 10 + (8+ 24/7)

-
50 111. (a) The given circuit consists of a talanced Wheatstone bridge.
Current in circuit., i IA
50 22
Curent thogh R, =i, -A
-dwwww2/3R
Potential diflerence acrss, R, = xR,=30 =
|5V w

103. (6) Potentia! difference actoss 100 2 reststance should be 5V

as voltnicter and l0092 resistance are in parallel. It meas R, -R+:
cquivalent tesistake of voltneter ad 1002 shold he 50 2.
So, resistance of voltmeter must be 100 S2.
iR 113. (a) As Ra = R) and Rpy = Roy so pints O and B will b at
106. (à Emf of cell, E X x
ne xtential and hetce, tesistance R becomes ineffective.
Similarly, as K =Rp and R = Ryy. resistarxe R, become
ineffetive.
So, excluding Ryyannd R,, cquivalent resistarsce R, of the
5 5
given network between oints A ant Cwill be given by
0,4=
(5+ 45+ 0) 10 =
I8m
2R 28 2R
ke.,
R R
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (249

4. (e) The circuit can be drawn as 50

121. (& Maximum current possible in bulb =
0.5 A
Ion
Resistance of each bulb 100x100 =
2002
59 50
If n be the number of bulb possible, then total resistance of
80 200 +
circuit = 10
w

Maximum current in the circuit =0.5xn

30 39
120
So
200 + 10

122. (c Let Ran x. Then.

Resistance between points P and S= 4N

A
w
15. (b) In the first case potential difference balance against
resistance R= k 4
Bo
Potential difference against, R+ X = kl
Potential difference over X2 - kll,-4)
6. (d Power 1.08 kW = 1080 W or
1+ x
PxtE 1080 x
m x

ot
1080 x! = 100 x540 x42 x-r-l=0
t 210s
17. (D For an 2
amnneier 123. lal Potential difference across
G4 S 42 resislance (20+ 16)V
current through
,G li - )S 12 resistance
,G= (0.03 - i,)4r ...i) =36r- 36 =9A [frorn top to bottom)
and ,G = (0.06-i,t ...ii)
From Eqs. () and ii), we get 0.12- 4, = 0.06-i, Similarly, current through 20- 46
22 Tesistarnce 2A
Maximun current through the galvanometer, 2
i 0.02 A Therefore, total current through 20 volt battery will be
18, c) When key Kis opened, bulb B, will 11A.
ot draw any cutent 124. (b Current through R and R, comes out to be zero (potent ial
from thc source. So, that terminal voltage of source increases.
Hence. power
beenosuned by bullb icreases. So, light of the difference = 0)
Dulb tmore. The brightness of baill
B decreases. . Current through, R, Net emf
19. (a) Maximumn current possible in galvanometer Total resistance
= 25 x4 x10* A =
|0 A (4 + 3+2) -
(2 + 3+ 2)
25 3
So. 10-=
100+ R 125. (4 According tothe question,
100 R- +
250 R-20+
Resistance, R= 150S2
Now, current i 250 250
20. la) Let, the bulb 400 W is having
resistance value of R. For 20 + (/ 2)
200 W, necessary value of resistarnce will Solving, we get
be 2R.
Total value of resistance in the circuit will be
R+R= 2R i=10
A

If lis the maximum current in the circuit,

then IR 400 126. (8 According to question.
through 200 W each, current will be
I2 and power will be i
400 Q=at- br

Q-2
2x2R=R = 200 w
2 2
Power circuit asa whole |x 2R i=0 at (

2xR 2x400
= 800 1W di
250) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2a

127. (a) The given three resistors are in parallcl. 131. difference across any resistance. we
(c) By finding potential
w
can find current through each resistance directly.
10 V 8V 6V

0.8 A
0.25 A o.s A 3A
Current, i= 4
t+R/3+31A .
i=3+ 0.25–0.5- 0.8= I.95 A
vRor E-ir9-3v 132. ( Voltage sensitivity = Current ensitivity
Resistance of galvarnometer G

128. (c Resistance, 6x2 Current sensitivity

=2+E
Ra
G
Voltage sensitivity

Ge 512
2
0V $22 - 15 mA
Full sca!le deflection current, i,
10
Voltage to be neasured, V = iR- 150 x 1- 150 V
10 20 =

150
Hence, R -G= 5- 999552
(7/2) 7 13x 10)
x
(2+6) 133. (6) We have x16=H (:H=P
R
129. (d Current, = E+E, =

0.9 R
-xtH»x16
R 0.9R
and E Time, t= 16x0.9 = 14 nin
R+
134. Toptnost and bottommest figures are short-circuited.
Simple circuit is shown below.
E, EL or E,r, >ER
E, +)
130. ( Both B and D are symnetrically located with respect ta
1/2R
points O. Hence, the figuse can be folded as shown in figure,

1/22,
Rey R+ R4R
2 2

135. (6) Duc to balanced

Whcatstone bridge, resistlatce between A
and B can be removed.
The current between D and E,
B, D
V
10 10 A

Rpe +
R: 2+2-=2.5
136. (6) Resistance between upper branch and lower branch in
parallel part is samc, so cqual anount of current flows
through them.
Let main cuzrent is &

The givern circuit forms Wheatstone bridge. 352 ww

I+1
3S2
wwwww
33 +10v
Resistance, Km
2 2
R
 :
Chapter 03 Current electricity (251

Equivalent resistance of cireuit, 20-V V-0 or

10
5V= 45
2 2
R =3+ 2= 52 i=2A
5 V=9V
So, current in cach branch lA .. Current 9
Now, Vc -V =lx l= |V through switch S, h==45A
also V
-VIx 3-we3V ...i)
141. (c)
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), have 22
V -V =3- l= 2V
= R
36. (u, c)
Ra 2 l= R
D w

32 40
A -wwwwtww 50V
Let current trough XY is i, Applying Kirchhoffs law to
loops (1) and (2),
Vu R2 CD R2
...0)
and
So,
Also,
-
2
- })+
44,
24
+
i) =0
- 4i, =
50 =
,- 2(-i)
...01)

138. (d When K, is closed, R, is short-circuited.

When k, is open, , E E
50
34- 2i, = 30
-- 2
( - ij)
...(iii)
..i)
r+ R, r+ 100 From Eqs. (i), (ü) and (ii), we get
When K, is closed, i, = 2A

...(iü)
142. (b
Further dividing 2A across different resistors we can find that
From these two cquations, we get r=0
When k is open arnd K, is clened. 2A 2A

...iii)
2 2R + 50)
16 V
From Fqs. (i) and (ii), we have
K=50 iA
139. (4 In the circuit, we can see that 20 2, 10ON and 25N are in
parallel.

Net resistance of circuit 4+ 6+ 20 2

+ +
20 100 25 Hence.
Ve iRa 4 x 20 =& V

140. (a) Letthe potential at junction C. isV.

Applying Kirchhoffs junction law at C B.) Medical entrance special format
20 V
Ww
42 12 questions
Assertion and reason
29 -
1. i0 constant = R for ohmic circuits is Ohm's law. Further.
s only for ohrnic circuits V-igraph is a straight line passing
yov through origin.
2. (d R=
2
252) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Resistance of a conductor increases with incease in 15. (d In both cases potential difference across Ris E.
temperature. Hence,
P=!
3. R, and R, are resistances per unit length. In second case net resistance will decrcasc. Therefore, main
current will increase.
16. (6 In series,

p 60 60
Pen = 30 w
In parallel.
= + = 120 W
L
=+P, 60 60
and
17, (a) R=por Ru
R, > R
Area of cross section of first wirc is less. Hence, its resistance
Hence. is more.
1
5. () We have, v, and J R

A Match the columns

6. (e kVA is the unit of power. While kWh is the unit of 1. In parallel, P = P + P;
energy
7. (d Resistance of voltmeter is high. If it is connected in series, ard in scrics ,
P R P,
then current will decrease but circuit will not burn.
8. () The tesistafice of milliammeter becomes high because of 2. Daring discharging. V = F - ir
o
increased of turus of coil, M» the torque pnluced in the
coil is tot decreaed due to kow value of current.
During charging, V=E+ir
When i=0V=E and =0. if short-circuited. V

Milliammeter generally do rot have shunt because the main

current is already very low. Even if there is shunt, it value is 3. In parallel connections nct resistance will decrease.
kept high so that current diversion through it is least in case Therefore, main current will increasc.
of mallianneter.
Vs =Va=E - y
10. (d During charging of battery. or Va, will decreae. Further, i, = Yas
V
=E+iR
With increase in
V R
Van
is decreasing. Thercfore, i, will also decrease.
V>E
11. (e) Only drift motion iN asent in the absence of potential 4. The simpic circuit is shown in figure.
difference across it. Further, there will be electrostatic force
on clectrons fronI other electrons,
nucleus, ctc.
12. (e) Current through a resistance wire flows from higher 22
potential to lower potential. Baut inside cell it flows from
lower to higher potential.

Further, during charging of a battery current flows in the

Also, 352 and62 are in parallel connection.
Hence, potential clifference across (6Q is also
direction shown in above figure. 20 V.
20
and, for BO. = 10
13. (c) ipl = F 8 3 6 6
V= 80 V

ip Similarly, for 122 and 4,

E, and i both wilIl become two times. Thetefore, Iwill temain
unchanged.
8 3
14. (c) Reason is false. lf
we increase emf of known battery.
potential gradient increases, so less length will be required to
8 3
equalise emf of unknown battery. So, null point
lengh will V,= 30 V
decrease.

Chapter 03 :

Current electricity (253

 Chapter 03 Current electricity (253

::Resistance R is connected in series,

)Medical entrances' gallery . 230
Curent, 230
ntrance corner Re R + R, 205 16
R

1. (d According to question, cmf of the cell is diretly 26S2

proportional to the balancing ength, i.e. E 5. ta) Given, 4 L
Now, in the frst case, cells afe connected «l
...i)
in seties to suppxort R= potentiometer wie resistance 82
0ne anther, i.e.,
Net emf E, + E,
Potential gradient dInVc-!
Fton Eq (), E, + E, =
50 cm (given) ...41)
So, for 400 cm, AV=400 x1x 10 =0.4V
Again cclls arc connected in serics but in opposite Let a resistor R, is connected in serics, so as
direction
L.e.,
Net emf = E, -E) R
R+ R&
From Eq. (i), E, -E, 10 cm (given) ...(iüi) = 2
From Exp. (i) axd fiü), 0.4
E, +
8+1
E5010 Ci 5+ _6321 16 =

E;-E, E,
5-1 4 2 8+ R=
0-4
40 R= 32CQ

2. (h) Given, charge Q = at - b

6. (a) The cquivalent resistance between
Qand S is given by
: We know that curtent, I=
..(1)
1.5 R
d B

So, Eq. (i) can be written as

...iü) 3R
For maximum value of r.

t Ooret
d
-²)0
1
I 2
+1
R I.5R 3R 3R
-..4i1) Now,
:: The total heat produced
H)can be given as Also,
VaIR
Hence,
7. (8 As the cross-sectional area of the conductor
is non-uniform.
fa' 467-4ate) Rdt 50 cuIrent density will be different.
As,
..(i)
It is clear from q
when area increes the cutrent
(il,
3 2
density decreases so tle number of flow of electrons will
same ard thus the current be
Solving above cquation, we get will be constant.
8. (c) When voltmeter is connccted across A ad B, the
H a'R equivalent resistace of the circuit is
65
150 2
3. (d v,2A ww mmV
3V
Applying KVL,
V,+EV=V 2x2+ 2*1 50 V
V -V; -3=4+ 2V, -V9v x
4. (c) If a rated voltage aid pwer are given, ey =100 + 150 100
100+ 150
Then, = + 15000
R 100 100+ 60- 1602
. Current in the bulb, (= . Current. i~ 50
250
i==500 5A
. Resistance of bulb, R, = 100 x 100 =
100 I60 16
Thercfore, potential drop acruss B
andCis
SO0
202
3100==31.25 V

16
254 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

9, (a) Figure can be redrawn as 14. (6) Given,

Colour coting of resistance = Red, Red, Green, Silver
ww
100 First band value = 2
{100 Second band value =2
Third band value = 1
100 102 Fourth band value=t 10%
Now, R= 22 x L0 + 10%2
R
2200 10% ks2
6V 15. (c) Slope
10 (from figure)
As,
10 V= IR
So, circuit is said to he Wheatstone bridge in balanced
condition and hence current through arm Mb is zero, ie., no VR
cuITent flows. Hence, slope is reciprocal of resistance.
Now, the cquivalent resistance of the circuit is given by (a) The resistance of two wires are
16.
Reg
1.1=
20 20 20
=
R, 102 R,=Pand R, =P:
A
:.Current supplied by the battery. Now, equivalent resistance of series connection of wire
6 =

0.6A
R 10
10. (a) Suppse, actual current through the ammeter is I.
Now, we can write
The equivalent resistance
R can be given by R =P

Ir= k4 IxD= k(75) ...i)

Pog A
A
wherc, k is a constant.
Similarly. 1.02 = k (50)
P2 PPa
...ü) Hencc.
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
75 3 17. (a) Total resistance 50+ 3950 4000 2

1.02 50 2 For this circuit. deflection of tesistance, R be

I=1.02)=3(0.51)= 1.53 A
4000 4000 =
30

2 R= 20002
R 15 2
Thus, error in ammeter reading is Then, resistance should be in series = 2000-50 - 1950 2
Al- (1.53 - 1.5) 0.03 A A

18. (al Kirchhoffs first Jaw states that aigebraic sum of currents
11. (6) The current in casc of voltrncter range 10 V and Tesistance meeting at a point in a circuit is zero. It is based on
502 is conervation of charge. Kirchhofs second Law states that the
10 algeiraic sum of ptential dilferences around a closed loop is
...i) zero. lt is tased os the law of conservatio of energY.
50
Let X is the resistance connected in order to make a 19. (b) Using the formula, m = ZI. where m = mass of silver
voltmeter with range 15V is deosited = 0.05% of 750 g = 0.375 g = 3.75 x 10 kg
...(ii) Current passing thrnugh it, 7= 0.8A
Z ECE of silver |1.8x10 kee-!
Equating Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
15 10 (15) x (50) :.The time necded for depositing silver is given by
X -75S2 3.75 x 10
50 (10) m
397 s = 6 min 37 s.
- ZI 11.8 x 10 x0.8
Then, R = 75 50=252 must be connected in series,
because Rwhen current is constant.
V
20. (c) The shunt resistance Tequired is given by

13, (e) Current 1emains cotistant througheut the metallic LO0 =

100 x
0.1
100, x0.1
conductor. Current density J- - is no constant because 500- 400

cross-sectional area is variable parameter. Drift velocity

. S
0.02512

is rot constant. Since, v,

f this value of shunt resistarce is corunected in fparallel with
neA A the DC anmeter, then the ange wil! bee extended to 0-500 A.
 Chapter 03: Current electricity (255

21. (a) The circuit diagram can be redrawn as the potential Given, E =2V, RB =
102
bet ween A and B is 40 = x
Ra x10 =42 and E
10 10*v
D
On solving Eq. (i), we get R
20
-v 790 2
25. (d We know that potential drop acros a resistance,
VIR Ve constant
i.e.,
R

4:h:h-,,
'6:4:a
As,
For the loop ABCDA +2-21" +2-2l = 0 ...(4)
,:,:= 6:4:3
For the loop ABFEA
26. (al Total internal resistance does not change
2-1+2-2 -1) = 0
R'=4
4-21-2+ 2'-0 Net ernf
= E'- Ebn-2m)
4-4/+ 2T"
0 Here, n=total number of cells = 4
2= 27-1' ...i) Wrong connection = 1

From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we gct Le.,

E'= H4-4 E'= 2F
2= 2-I, 2=1+r' 27. (b) Given, I 3A, V - 6V
=
4=34,1= 4/3 1.3 A
We know that, V
IR
22. td As we know that, R,pp,
where.l=length o! wire
R» R-R- 20
the amneter and voltmeter have resistance, i.e., R <
If 29
a= axea of cross-section of the wire
and V'- volume of the wire. 28. ( Given, K,- 1002
=
As, R, «! R, 2002 T 100° C

a =
0.0)5 per "C
Ve know that new resistance of the bulb filament,
R, R,[l+ a(T,- TI
23. c) The combination of resistors can be radrawn as 200 =10 (1+ 0.005 (T, -100))
2|+ (0.005 (, - 100)
0.005 (T,-100)= 1

7,-100 I000
=
T,-100:
0.005
T;-100 200200 + I00 - 300°C
> 7
29. () Considet the ring as two parts. As two resistances jxined in
parallel bet ween two points A arnd B, then two resistances
Therefore, equivalent resistance is given by would be
R
R=
Res RRR 3 2nr
2

and R, =(2x R - 0) (2r-0)

24. (c) See the circuit (potentiometer)
2rr 2

Now, equivalent or efective resistance between A and B,

R
Rey
R+ R

R°O2 -0)]
La Rax
21 2
(2n-0)
R e+ 2nR
Hence, Va =E üf no current is drawn fron the battery) 2
2r-0 2n
R'O2r-0) 22 ROX27-0)
2rR
256 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

30. (6) As, nobility =

drift velocity Now, 62 and 652 are in series.
electric field So, R'=6+ 6= 122
metre R
69
12 12 12
Evolt-second (ioule/coulomb)-second R*
R

|L The required resistace of the circuit = 2+ 6=80.

So, the pential dilference,
kg-metre-secsecond
Vy -Vg = iß = 0.5 x 8= 4V
amperescond
37. (a) Total eml of the cell = 3E -E- 2E
(L E
(MLTA)
32. (» Resistance of wire. Rp
=
Given, B= 42, 4 =4A AR, =? Total internal resistance 4r
I, =2 A, - A/2p constant
.:Total resistance of the circuit = 4r + R
R444xA So, the current in the external circuit
2E
4xA2, R,= 162 4r +
R
2 xA
38. (b) As, resistances12 22 and 1S2 are in parallel.
33. tc)Carresponding to the coloars of the first and sccond bands
L.e.. greetu and black. the figures are 5 and 0. So, the required internal resistance,
Correspxnding to the coluur of third band, i.e., violet, the E, - 1V
multiplier is 10'. TIhereforc. the value of the resistance is
E,-2V
50 x 10's2. The gold colour of the tourth band indicates the
tolerance of +5%.
So, the value of the resistor is written as
50 x
10'2 59, = 500 x 102
RR
2
+ 5%

R
=
S00 5% MS2
!.!,!
r

The potential difference bet ween points P and Q,

2-1+2
2 rn
34. kc) The required resistance

2 2
EE,E, I,2, 3

35. Lct the values of resistances be K, and R, respectively.

(ch

When K and R, resistances are in series, then 2+2+ 6

R+ R, =6(aceording to question) 10/2
When R and R, resistances are parallel. then
..(i1 10,2-2v
5/2 5/2 52
,= 292, R,
62E = 2V, r=0.52,1=?
=
R
+
R, 3 ..i) 39. (d) Given,

R, R, ate in parallel combinatio.

From thie Eq. (i), we get
S&o

6 3
RR, 4x2
mn

RR,= 8
...ü) RRR, 6 2 4

We k:ow that, Then, the curicnt in the circuit,

2 -

1A
r+R (5 +
15 20
(as internal resistance, r is in series with other resistance)
R-R, =2 40. (b Case I For txalanced point of meter bridge.
From Eqs. (i) and (iv). we get ..(iv) 5 4
= ...i)
R=42, R, 22 100 -4
36. \d Given, 6S2, 62 and 62 are in parallel. Case II When Ris shunted with equal tesistance, Le., R
So, I_1,1,I_3 ->
R 6 6 6 6 R' R
R R= RI2
3
R=-22 RI2
16
100- 164
...fii

Chapter 03: Current electricity (257

 Chapter 03: Current electricity (257

Fron Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get 45. (b) Resistance,

R.c 120
10 = 12000-10
-4) 100- 164
16
»= 25 cm
R-l1990
0.01

Fron Eq. (i. 25 150 To convert a galvarkometer into a voltmeter, high resistarnce of
11:
R
7 R=
value 11990 2 should be connected in parallel.
41. () As, r internal resistance, 46. () Given, first balancing length 4 = 30 cm
,
Second balancitng length, = 40 cm » E=125V
and -4 ...i)
E, n?
So, according to the principle of potentiometer,
Also, r= R, ...ü) ...i)
E, = Kí,
and ..()
Subtracting Eq. (i) from Eq. (i), we get
E K{ L23 30
10
125 x 40 5 1.67 V

o =
285 cm
E;-1666V
As, R= =3m and R, 5h= 30
285 mcasures the potential difference more
(3-285) 95-Or0.52 47. (a) Potentioneter
a
accurately than voltmeter because while ncasuring cmf
2 (electromotive forcc). it docs not draw any current from the
42. (a) As, current
lc 1g source of known emí. Potentiometer has its own battery
which mnaintains potential dog> across the pentiometer wire.
Resistance of
rgatvanometer Driving battety of poentiometer

Pxentjotetet
wire
Alko,
= = F
48. (d As, kl, E-rieE-r(0)
We know that potential across
Iotentioneter battery
G and shunt r auc same.

216 GI
2G + r)= 1(00
r
tr)
1000 G+r
G+r 500 r
> G+ l=500
1

Gir =199 G => r=

499
43. (a) Balanced condition for Wheatstone bridge,
P_R ...0)
QS
where,
=-+s= ..iü)

From Eqs. (i) and (i). we get

=E
k, ..i)
Q and kly
E-rj- Ri

44. (5) Force experienced by electron, F = gE RE

..)
where, F = eletric field intensity. R+r R+r
24 x
10"16
x
10E »E 15 NCl On dividing Eq. (i) by Fq. (i), we get
Moreovcr, E
potential gradient 4.R+r
,
dy R
E Exl=V 15 x6= 9V
dl
258 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol.2

=
We know that tor internal resistance, A=n'= O.1x 10,e 16 x 10-1"c
:. Drift velocity, V,= 0.68x 10 ms!

where, balarcing length of potentiometer wire = 240 cm

4 = 36. (al As R«ild' R;4d
I,= halacing length after shunting 120 cm m rows afe connected in parallel and cach row
R= shunting resistance = 22. 57. (d Suppase
contains n identica! cells (each cell having E = 1.5Vandr = 12)
Putting all the values, we get
For maximum current in the extermal resistance R, the
240 - 1
=
(2-Dx 2 = 22
Internal resistace, r =
|x2 necessary condition
120
49, ( Let, R, resistance be connected in series to convert R=
galvanomneter to voltmeter. n xI
1.5=
R, I.5m an ...(i)
Total cells = 24 n Xm ...ii)
According to the equation, R, = 100 21, = 30 mA On solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
Curtent corresponding to full scale deflection. m4
Now, we can write,V'= l, x R, + I, =
1,R, +R,) ...(i) n 4

Given, V= 30 Therefore, 6 cells in each row are connected in series and

From Eq. (i), we get 4 such rows are connected in parallel.

30 = (30 mA) (1002+ R,) 58. (d) RR, (1+ a)

30 - 100 S2+ R, > 30V 100 2 + x 27)
..fi)
x
R, l= R, (1+ 0.00125
(30 mA) 30 10A 2 =
R

il+ 0.00125 x) .ii)

- 1000 S2- 1002
102 1002 + R, R, 9002 From Egs. (i) and (ii), we get
(b) By Fatadav's Law of electtolysis, m = Zit t= 848 C=1121K
50.
Given, m, = m grann, 4 = 4A, , =6A,4, = 120 s Note None of the four optsons Jre corret, but option (d) is close to
, 40 s, m, ?
correct answer
59, (d We know that,
4
x120
13 15
6x 40 1A
0.15+ 145 14.65
m x6 x40
4x 120 2 60. (b) Given, temperature coefficicnt of cartn,
As
51. (d Re(when wire is stretched),
Temperature coefficient of copper,
R=n'R=2 x4= 4x4= 169
= E or =
a,=-0.5
x
10 oc
52. (# As I E R+ r) 2l=0.2(10+ r) Hence, Ra, =
-R,a
R+r
R-4x10
I0+r=x10
2
R 05x 10
r10.5- 10 0.52 61. () Let the three conductors are R, R, and R, and the curent
$3. ( Effective resistance. drawn by then are 1A 2A and 3 A respectively, when
40 x 120 4800 connected in turn xTOss a battery.
Ren = 30 2 V=R Vm 2R, and V -
120+ 40 160 4
.. Curtent 7 So.
=0.2 A
3
(30 + 5) 35
When the conductors are connected in series, acToss the same
54. (b) Curent, I qf battery, then
Given, q - l6× =
10-Cand f 109
R

l- 1.6 A
2Awww
33. (c R
x
3Aww
Given, I 2An 586 10m
 Chapter 03: Current electricity 259

69. ld Specific resistance does not depend upon

length.
70. (d 70 and 3N are serics, so total 1O2 and
parallei, so total resistance- 102 are in
52. Now, 52 and ate in 5 2

52. (0 <PIm»
R
R:R, : R,-i;, series, so they make 102,
102 arxd 102 are in parallel. So,
10

--125:15:1
13 5
71. (a) Equivalent resistarnce in series =
6+9- 152
63. (b) We have, , Ix 2R_ 2 Current flow in circuit, i=: 120 : 8A
3R 3
15
Voltage in 6
resistor, Vm iR 8x6= 48V
H-R=R ...(i) Power consutned by 62 resistor,
Also, IxR I
48x48 =
3R 3 8x 48 =384 W
6
H, =l; (2R)
=2R
9 ...ii)
72. la) Curtent through each am DAC and DBC = 1A
and H, -I'(.5 R) Vy -Va=2 and V
-V, =3
...lii)
From Eqs. (i), (i) and (iiil, we get
73. (6) Heat
=R
H,:H,:H,-R: x
2R:1 x1.5R
[:tis the samel
-1.5- 4:2: 135 =
8: 4:27
On solving, we get
64. (a) A
millianmeter will have grcater resistance
because (1) number of turns in than ammeter
the coil in milliammeter is
increased to compensate low value of current
to create Large 74. (a) We have, R= 20 AR
deflection. (2) milliammeter does not have usually a
shunt in 25
parallel because main current is very small.
have a shunt in parallel which makes overallAnimeter usually 0.50 1

resistance low.
65, (c) We kow that the resistatce of any 20 25
wire,
R-DA
AR=8 4
2
R= (8 20
In given case L, = LL y= are constants. 75. (c) We haveR
2p and A
MgTouptng the of cells depcnds upon
Hence,
K4 relative values of internal and external tesistance.
R, 2 76. (a) As the current in heater filament increases, it gets more
66. () Power when connected in series, heated. Hence, its temperature incieases
and resistance also
increases, due to which the current decreases.
P
P, 77. (A In series, P =P2
Given, P= 60 W and P, = 100 W
60 x 100 6000 Given, P=P =
6)
Hence, P P= W

60 + 100 J60
P=37.5 .:. =

60 x 60
Power. P 30 W
60 x 60
67. (b) We know drift specd. v, e Et
79. ( To convert a galvanometer
into an ammeter, a resistance
Here, (shunt) is required, connectd in parallel to
the galvanoneter.
Given, condition v, v
and V, 50 x 100 x 10
2v By using, S
5x 102
=

(10-100 x
Hence, i-i, 10)
v
80. (0 By using the relat ion,
68. (c) Potential across
potentiometer wire
x
E4+; (8+ 2) 3 (E'+F" = F)
100 10x10 = E,
4-4
10
0.1V
0.]=2 (8-2) E" mE, E'-
100 + R 81. ( The current distribution in the
Resistance, R = 190 2 cicuit can be shown as
Applying Kirchhoff's law in mesh ABDA
- 10(i- 4)-10 í,+ 20
4=0
...i)
260) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

87. (a)

(4-i-)

12
Resistance, R= 6x 6x12
-=42
6+ 12 18

in Mesh BEFCB Total resistance,

ad
-20(i -4-)+ 104+ i,)+ 10i, = 0
Rey
=6+ 4= 10Q
..i) Current, i==
R 10
From Eqp. () and (ii), we get
The curTent in 12S2 resistor is
2

82. (d) The drift velocity, v,

The potential differenke in 122 resistor,
(where, Jis current density =) V=ix2R=x12=4V
So, 20
88. (b)I, =A300 300
:1000 mA
3
mA

24 A !, 667 mA
So. As range of atnneter cannot be decreased but can be
83. (b) As resistance, R« length increased only, thetefore, the instrument cannot be cornverted
12 to mcasure the range mA 1

:.Resistance of each arm = =42 R

3 89. la The balanced condition lor Wheatstone bridge
So, effective resistace between afiy two corners,
is=
4
x832_o As is obvious from the given values, no, current flows through
4+ 8 12 3 galvanometer is 2er0.
Now, P and R are in series, so
84. (6) Applying Kirchhoffs law, 500l + 100f = 12
Resistance, R, = P + R= 10 + 15= 252
12 x 1o - - 2 x i0-²A
So, Similarly. Q and S are in serics, so
6
Resistarnce, R, = R + S= 20 + 30 = 509
Hence, V, 100 (2x 10-) - 2V Net resistance of the network as R and R, arc in parallel,
85. (a) The full scale deflection currernt, V 0.6 -
R 50 0.36 A
ampere
G Deift velocity, v, =
90. (
where, Gis the resistance of the meter. neA
The value of shust tequired for converting it into ammeter of 5
range 25 (5 x 10*) x (16 x 10-19) x (4 x 10)
A is Se =
1.56x 10 ms!
25 mV
So that
S
-=0.00l2 91. (c)

86. (c Power, P ww
AP 2xAV
For snual variatiot, x
100% = x 100%,
p
=
5%
=2x25
Therefore, power would decrease by 5%.
ww
 Chapter 03: Current electricity 261

Resistance between points A and B,

0.5 A

23V

Resistace between points B and C. R' 49

4 25
Now, using Ohm's law, i
R+R
2 3 = 25
0,5
Resistance between points C and D, R+4
25
R+4=
3 0.5
R=50 4= 46Q
3 2 0.5 x 5 2.5
Current through 202 resistor =0.1A
20 + 5
92. (b) Given, A = 0.3 m, n =2x 10 Im Potential differetxce seros middle resistor
q= 2 -Potential difference across 20S2 20 x 0.l2V
3+ 5t+
96. (6) The given circuit can be shown as the resistance between
- + m
6t 5 17 A and I3
We have curtent, i = ne Av,
2.
3
Total recsistance of the circuit
Dift velocity,
17 20 2V

ne A 2x 10*x 1.6x 10-" x 0.3

22
17
0.96 x 10-61.77x
10m1 ww

93. ta) Given cireuit is a alaneed Wheatstone bridge. So, diagonal 2 2

resistance of 2 S2
will be ineffective.
Fquivalent resistance of upper arm = 2 + 2= 40 29
Equivalent resistance of lower arm=2+242 w

4x4
4+ 4
=29 -2+-a
So, the rcading of ammetcr.
94. (61 In open circuit, current
though the circuit i0
Potential difference betweenx and y will be =E-120 V V

R 8/3 8

R 10 10 20
97. \d The resistances of branches ABC and ADC are in parallel.
w The current entering at node A will equally divkded in each
parallel branch.
a
0.5 A Va- IR-Ix2- 2V
23 V
toa 200 Point Ais at gre.ater potential with respect to point B, so
Va
-V=+ 2V
 CHAPTER

4 Magneticeffect
of current and
moving charges
In earlier unit, we have studied about the clectric current, its measurement and the
thermal effects of current. In this unit, we shall study about magnetic effects of
current. Earlier, it was thought that there is no connection between electricity and
magnetisn. However in the year 1820, Oersted tealised that electricity and
magnetism were related to each other. He showed experimentally that the electric
current through a straight wire causes noticeable deflection of the magnetic compass
needle held near the wire. He also found that the iron fillings sprinkled around the
wire, arrange themselves in concentric circles with the wire as centre in the plarne
perpendicular to the wire. This shows that the magnetic field is associated with a
moving charge or a current carrying conductor. The branch of plysics which deals
with the magnetism due to electric current is called electromagnetism.

Inside
1 Magnet field
•Biot-Savart's law (magnetic field due
to a currrnt catrying codwtor)
Application of Biot-Savarts law
1) Magnetic field
2) Ampere's circuital law
• Applications
of ampere's The space in the surroundings of a magnet, moving charges or a current carrying
circuita! law conductor in which its magnetic influence can be experienced is called magnetie
3) Force on a moving charge in a field. Manetic field is a vector quantity and is denoted by B. SI unit of magnetic field
uniform magnetic field is weber/m? tesla (T) and its CGS unit is gauss or maxwell/cm, where I tesla
= gauss.
4) Force on a current carrving 10
conductor in a magnetic field
• Force between two parallel current
Magnetic field due to moving charges (Oersted's experiment)
carrying cunductors
Oersted, found experimentally that a magnetic field is established around a current
• Magnetic force
bet ween two
carrying conductor just as it occur around a magnet. In the experitnent, he placed a
. moving charges
The moving col gahranometet NMCG) magnetic compass near a current carrying conductor and observed that the needle of
curent sensitivity the compass shows deflection. Also, when the current is reversed, the needle shows
deflection in opposite directiorn.
 Magnetic effect of current and moving charges (263
Chapter 04:

square of distance between

Key Key Key
• inversely proportional to the
Battery (apen) (closed) lopen) the clement and the point i.e., dB
« Vr ...iv)
t
Combining all the above four relations, we get
Canducting
Wre ldl sin
B dB c 2

This relation is called Biot-Savart's law.

If conductor is placed in air or vacuum, then magnitude of
Magnetlc compass Compassshowing Compass stwing
with no deflection deflection in delection in magnetic field is given by
ore direction oppasite direction
(b Ho ldl sin0
|dB|=
Fig. 4.1 Oersted's experiment 2

hus, from the above figure, he concluded that a magnetic

eld is established around a current carrying wire because where, PO
4
s a proportionality constant.
which such deflections are visible.
f

We call#o the permeability of free space (or vacuum).

Dersted experiment shows the connectivity between the
SI unit of magnetic field is N/A-m or tesla (T) or weber/m2
nagnetic field and electric current and as electric current
neans moving charges, so it can also be concluded that or gaus,
where, l gauss =10 T.
oving charges also produce magnetic field in their
urroundings. In Sl unit, #o = 41 x 10- Tm/A or Wb/A-m and its

Biot-Savart's law (magnetic field due dimensions are (MLT

A1 The value of
4n
in CGS
c0 a current carrying conductor)
system is unity.
Biot-Savart's law is an experimental law predicted by Biot In vector form, Biot-Savart's law can be written as
nd Savart. This law deals with the magnetic ficld Ildlx r)
oroduced at a point due to a small current clenent (a part ...i)
bf any conductor carrying current). Ir
Consider awire XY carrying curent I. Let dl be The direction of dB is represented by the right hand screw
nfinitesimal element of the conductor, dB be magnetic rule or right hand thumb rule.
ield at point Pat a distance r from the element. Similarly, magnetic field induction at point P due to
Y Current current through entire wire is
element
Iidlx r)
B-f.
ldl sin0

Biot-Savart's law in a medium

If the conductor is placed in a medium, then vector form
Fig. 4.2 A long current carrying conductor
of magnetic field is given as
Biot-Savart's law states that, the magnitude of the
magnetic field induction (dB) at the point due to the
current element is
directly proportional to the current flowing through the
conductor Le., dB c I
where, , = relative permeability

..i) and u = absolute permeability of the medium.

• directly proportional to the length of the element
For air or vacuum u, =
i.e., dB oc dl ..i) l.
• directly proportional to the sine of angle between Biot-Savart's law in
the terms of current density J
length of element and line joining the element to
the ldl
point i.e., dB sin0
..(üi) ldA
A Adl dV
264) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Biot-Savart's law in terms of charge (g) and its of current flow, then the direction of the folding
velocity (v) fingers will represent the dircction of magnetic field
A moving charge constitutes current and hence, associated
lines of force.
magnetic field is given as,
dB o.4(vxr)
4*
Special conditions of Biot-Savart's law
Special conditions of Bior-Savart's law are gien belou B

(i) The nagnetic field due to the current element can

alsu be writte1 as, Fig. 4.5 Right hand thumb rule

B i dl xr Note
1
Mmagnetic field is ditected perpendicular and into the plane of the aper, it is
reresented by (rSs) whereas if ragnetic fetdis drected perpendcular
and out of the plane of the papet, it is represented tyO ldot)
where,C= = speed of light in vaçuum. 2
Clockwie ArmcoWe

(ü) When 9 = 0°or 180°, then magnetic ficld produced

due to the current will be zero. In In
(ii) When = 90° i.e., r is perpendicular to dl, then
magnetic ficld will be dB which is maxinnum. Direction of
magnetic fields
In Magnetic field is away from the observe o
perpendicular irwards
Rules to find direction of magnetic field Out Magrnetic field is towards the obsenver or perpendicular outwards

(i) Right hand palm rule If we spread our right hand

in such a way that thunt is towars the directio of Applications of Biot-Savart's law
current and fingers are towards that point where we Applications of Bio-Savart's law are given below
have to find the ditection of field, then the direction
of field will be perpendicular to the paln.
1.
Magnetic field surrounding a thin,
POB Current carrying straight current carrying conductor
(utuctor
Magnctic field due to a current carrying wire at a point P
which lies at a perpendicular distance d from the wire as
shown is given as
Fig. 4.3 Right hand paim rule
B
Ho(sina +
sinß)
(iü) Maxwell's right handed serew rule If a right 4r d
handed cork screw is rotated such that its tip moves
in the direction of flow of current through the
conductor, then the rotation of the head of the screw
gives the direction of magnetic ficld.
C, Bx

Fig. 4.6 A current carrying wire subtends angle a and ß at a point P

Fig. 4.4 Right handed screw rule Note down the following points regarding the aove equation.
If a straiglt current (i) For an infinitely long straight wire, a ß= 90°
(i) Right hand thumb rule
carrying conductor is lheld in the right hand such sin a + sin B=2
that the thumb of the hand represents the direction 2n d
 Chapter 04 Magnetic effect of current and moving
charges (265

(ii) When wire is semi-infinite (at the foot

of long wire), south from the wine, and in a vertical
plane at a distance of
a,= 0°and B =
(iii) 40 cm dounuvards, (iv)
50 cm tefruards.
2 Sol. The magnitude of the magnetic
field at a distance of r metre
B- sin 0° + sin
B= from a long wire carrying a current of i ampere
is given by
4nd 4nd
(iii) For axial position of wire i.e., when point
P lies on
axial position of current carrying conductor, then
=2x 107 TmA-!.
where, "
magnetic field at P 2x
(i) The magnetic field in a horizontal plane at a distance
B0 of
(iv) B c Vd i.e., Bd graph for an infinitely long straight 10 cm (= 0.10 mlnorth from the wire is
wire is a rectangular hyperbola as shown in figure. A

B = (2x 10-7TmAl, 10 m
0.10
=2x 10T
The curent in tdhe wire is fromm east to west. So,
according to the right hand palm rule no. 1, the
direction of the field at the point towards north
will be
downwards in a vertical plarne.
Fig. 4.7 B-d graph for an infinitely long straight wire
(ii) The magnetic field at a distance of 20 cm (= 020 m)
south of the wire is
Magnetic field for different configurations of the
Bs
straight conductors -2x10"1xI0-T
0.2
Magnituce and drerticon ol magretc fields asscciated with
diferert
The direction of the field will be upward in the vertical
Corigstions cl strarstt conductors are gen belon. plane.
(iii) The field at 40 cm(0.40 m)
from the wire downwards
in the vertical plane is
0
By =2x 10-) =5 x 10-4 T
0.40
The field will be in a horizontal plane pointing south.
(iv) Thec ficld at 50 cm ( 0.50 m) above the wirc in the
8, sn ae 8, [9n a -sinBle vertical plane is
B, =2x 10=4x 10 T
(N) 0.50
The field will be in a horizotntal plane pointing north.
Example 4.2 () A pair of stationary and infinitely long bent
wires are placed in the XY-plane as show. The wires carry
to
=
Starting pxont currents 10 A each. The segments P and Q are purallel to the
8, Y-axis such as OS = 0R = 0.02 m. Find the magnitude and
direction of the magnetic field at the origin O.
()

Starting point
fiä) Three long wires, carrying currents 10 A, 20 A and 30 A are
8,=[in a+ 1]0 placed paralle to each other as showT. Points P and Q are in
Whengb., 8, the miduayof wires. Find ratio of magnetic fields at Pand Q.

Exomple 4.l A current of 10 A is flowing east to west in a long

wire kept in the east-uest direction. Find magnetic field in a -2d-2d
horizontal plane at a distance of (0 10 cm north, (i) 20 cm
266) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Sol. (i) Consider the wircs as shown below

2r pward
<7 xld-
B, is minimum, if
xd- x)is maximum.
and xd- x)is uaximum, if
x=d-x r=d2
(the product of two parts is maximun, if parts are
equal)
d
As, x = B
is mininum, Bpein
244
Rd pward
Magnetic held B = B, As, x0, B o

=0 t:0=0°] xd, B
Magnetic field B, = =
B, From x=0 to x =d/2, magnetic ficld decreases reaching to
4rd minimun value at x=d/2.
Magnetic ficld at the centre O, From x sd/2 to x=d, magnetic field increases and
tends to
infinite at x =d.
Bo = B, + B, Hox 10 o
1000 Lelt of O: At x distance from
2nd 0.02 47 0.
=10 x 10
=10T

30 A 20 A 10A4 At P:B 2rydownward.

P
-d Upward
2r(r +d
2d--2d
Magnetic field at the point P,
Magnetic field at the point Q.
20 B,
B, = Bo30 10 Mo 20 2n
downward
2 d d 3d 2r 3d
xx+d)
Magnetic field at the point P, Example 4.4 (i) very long wire carrying a current i is bent at
A

B -Ha3020 10_ 20 right angles. Find magnetic field at a point lving on a

2x3d d d 2r d perpendicular to the wire, drawn through the point of bending.
The ratio of magnetic fields at P and Qis at a distance d from it.
Be. =3 (ii) Three long wires carrying same current are placed as sowUTL.
Find magnetic fielkd at O.
Bo
-d d
Example 4.3 Tuo long wires carrying sume currents in
opposite directions are placed at separation d as shown. Predict
ariation of magnetic field as one moves from one wire to
another along X-axis excludling the points O and A.

...... ......* A Sol. (i) A very long wire is bent at right angles

Sol.

-d- 3
Between the wires Magnetic field atP.
Magnetic field at point Pat height d above point
0,
Due to (1), B
2x
upward Due to wie (l), B,
=,
towards +X-axis
4zd
Due to (2), B, = ,upward
2rld - x)' Due to wire (2), B, =
F, towards - Y-axisf
4rd

Chapter 04 Magnetic effect of current and moving charges

267
 :
Chapter 04 Magnetic effect of current and moving charges267

B, is perpendicular to B,
B B

B, B Pis the centre of

square.
Magnetic field at the point P, (ifi)

4zd 22nd

Pis the centre of equilateral triangle.

B. (iv)
B;
B

Magnetic field at the point O,

Due to wire (l), B o2ry2d
Pis the centre of
reqular hexagorn.
Due to wire (2), B, =
Sol (i)
2rd
Due to wire (3), B, =
P--B
2rv2d
Bs

45/ B;
-30
B

Magnetic field at point P.

Resultant of E andB, is
B
[cos 0, + cos 0,]
2B cos
B 45° ol 4na'
2nd
0) = Ho cos 0
B
•
B2 4nCaiCos + cos
From the figure, PA =Ga) + (4a
B' =B,
.!. Magnetic field at the centre O,
PA n 25a PA 5a
Example 4.5 Evaluate magnitude and direction From the figure, cos 9

of magnetic
ield at a point P in the following cases.
:. Magnetic field, B,
=
H1_2u0i
6za 5 15na
(i)

4a
o.
B

36
2a
268 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Magnetic ficld at P due to one side of square, say AB, Exomple 4.6 A wire shaped to a regular hexagon of side
-lcos0 + cos 0) 2 cm carries a current of 2 A. Find the magnetic field at the
=
centre of the hexagon.
a' =d,9 =45° Sol.

B= o.2.
na 4 V2 2/2ra
Magnetic field due to square loop,

Bp = 4}
Since, current is clockwise, tnagnetic field at P will be
inside the plane of aper. From geometry of the figure, we have
BC =
tan BC= 1 cn
OC
(iii) = tan 30° = rzv cm
Net magnetic field at () =6 tines the magnetic field due to
one side.
B
-6Ho r sin 0 + sin 0)

a/2
2r
= 1.38x 10 T
-5 10

From the figurc,

0 Exomple 4.7 A rectanqular polvgon of n sides is formed by
2/3 =0,
tan 30° -30°
al2 bending a wire of total length 2rR which carries a current i.
Find the magnetic field at the centre of the polygon.
Magnetic field, B, [cos 30° + cos30°)
=o'
4a'
Sol. One side of the polygon is

B=
2 2ra
4n 2v3

So magnetic field at P due to triangular loop,

a
B, = 3B
=

2ra 2nR
Since, curent is anti-clockwise, magnetic field at Pis 0=

outside the plane of paper.

B, -e 2na Angle,
2x

2
d
la /2)
(iv)

-)ma(a)
All sides of the polygon produce the magnetic field at the
centre in same direction (here). Hence, net magnetic field,
\60°:6 B = (n) (nagnetic field due to one side)

=|
bin a+ sinp)
Magnetic field, 4rd

4na'
o'fcos 60°+ cos 60°) an2sin )

-2 cos 60°=Ho
4n (an 60° 2ra3
or
Magnetic ficld at the centre P, cot (Tn)
 Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges269

xomple 4.8 Consider the following Therefore, tmagnetic ficld at the centre duc to the whole
qure in which ABCD is a sqare of circular loop is
dge a. Resistance of the wire ABC ís
o

and that of ADC is 2R. Find (2na)

agnittule and direction of magnetic 4na 4na
Feld at the centre O of the sqtiare.

ol. B= Po
2ra
Direction of this field is outward perpendicular to the
plane of the paper.
Note i the loop tave N turns, then magnetic field, B - o

2xa

Magnetic field due to an arc

Magnetic field due to an arc of a circular current carrying
Given, RARK:
=R=Ro. RAsx: =R, =
2R, coil at the centre is given by.
2R 2i
Ro + 2Ro

Magnetic field Ho (cos 45°+ cos 45°)=

4nd 242 zd
4o2i/3) = Iwards
3V2ra
B,0
Fig. 4.9 Magnetic field due to an arc
=
Magnetic field B, o2 (cos 45°+ cos 45°)
4zd 2n 2a 47\a
Aoli/3) - B,O Hete, is to be sutbstituted in radians.
2/2 nd 3/2xa

Magnetic field at thc centre O, Magnetic field for different configurations of the
By
= B, + B,)- B,+ B,)=24gi2o'
3N2ra 3/2na
circular coil
3ra

2.
Magnetic field at the centre of a
circular current carrying coil
Consider a circular current carrying coil of radius a and
carrying current i. Magnctic field at the centre 0, due to
che current element dl is
(di) iv
idl,

Fig. 4.8 Circular current carrying coil

dB
o
dxr
wherc,dlr, so 0= 90°
dB =
o
dl sin 90 B, = 0 for any value of o:
a
41
 270 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Exomple 4.9 A current path shaped as shown in figure

produces a magnetic field at P, the centre of the arc. If the arc
subtends an angle of 30° and the radius of the arc is 0.6 m. R
What is the magnitude of the field at P, if the current is 3.0 A? 2a

P30 (itt)

Sol. Magnetic field at centre of the circular loop,

2R
Sol. i)
Magnetic field due to an arc of a circle at the centre is

Here, =30 and i=3A R= 0.6m

10 x Since point O is along the length of straight wires 1
and
3x26x 10
0.6x 6
T 3, hence B =B =0

Exomple 4.10 Figure shows a current loop having two circular

Magnetic field B, = B, =,40
arcs joined by tuo radial lines. Find the magnetic field B at the (ii
centre 0,

Since, point O is the foot of long wires 1

and 3,
Sol. Magnetic field at point 0, due to wires CB and AD will be
Zero.
4z0
Magnetic ficld duc to wire BA will be, Duc to semi-cirele (2),
B, - oo
B
Magnetic field at the point O,
Direction of field B, is coming out of the plane of the figure.
B, = 4 + B, + B,
Similarly, ficld at O due to arc IX: will be
2ta 4a 4az
(ii)
Direction of B, is going into the plane of the figure. The
resultant ficld at O is,
B=B - B = Hoi0lb -a) , coming out of the plane
4r ab
Exomple 4. What is the magnitude and direction of magnetic
field at point O in the following cases?
Magnetic field, B
=e,o
na 4

Magnetic field, B, =
o, o
4a
 Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges 271

Magnetic field, B, = 0 Magnetic ficld at the centre 0,

Magnetic field at the centre point 0,

4zR -1R
(ii)
omple 4.12 Find the magnitude and direction of magnetic
d at point O in the following cases.

Magnetic field, B

Magnetic field, B, Mo.

2R
,o
4
Magnetic field, B, = 0
Magnetic field at the centre, B, =B + B,

Exomple 4.13 Evaluate the magnitude and direction of

magnetic field at point O in the following cases.

.
(i)

(ii)

Magnetic fiekd at O due to straight wires is zero.

B=o
4R
B,=
(iti)
Magnetic field at 1he centre point 0,

Sol. (i)

R
Magnetic ficld at O due to straight wires is zero.
B,
4Rand
=

B> B,
272 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

From the figure, d =a cos= Example 4.14 What is the magnetic field at the centre of the
circular loop (as shoun in figure), when a single wire is bent to
B Mo form a circular loop and also extends to form straight section?
4nd
sin+ sin ,|

cos
9n.
47a

2a
= +
Magnetic field at the centre ), B, B,

2ra
tan
+-o Sol. From the figure, agetic field due to Aß,
(i)
-
Magnctic field due to circular loop,

2
Magnetic field due to straight wire BC,

B,
4nR
- 0)
Magnetic ficld,
R m
Ho27
2R 2r 4zRL
.. Resultant magnetic field, = +
Magnetic ficld. B, = B
B+ B, B,
2R, 2*
1
Magnetic field at the centre 0. =
B B +
B, 2R 2
2n-0)+
4nk, Example 4.15 Find the magnetic field at the centre O of the
(ii) loop shoun in the fiqure.

2R
Sol. Due to straight parts, there is no magnetic
field at 0. There
are thrcc ficlds at 0. B-Po
4zR

4n(4R) due to arc of radius 4R

2
=!.33ui
B,
Magnetic field, =
B, due to arc of radius 2R
2a 4 4r12R)
Magnetic field, B, m
-(cos90°+ cos 45° ) B, Bo )
4ne 4nk2 duc to arc of radius R
As the curent is anti-clockwise in all three arcs,
4V2nb therefore, all
Magnetic ficld at the centre O.
the fields are perpendicular to plane and outwards.

+
B,= +
B, + B,
Bo =B + B, B,)= Po &
2v2xb Bc oI,|9
R 8
32 8
32R
 (213
Chapter 4: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges
ample 4.16 In the given fiqure, resistance of wire ABCis centre and decreases as we move away from the
uble of wire ADC. Fnd the magnitude and direction of centre on the axis of the loop.
gnetic field at the centre O.
B
2a

\A' Point of inflexiotn

A (point of change of
crvatue)

. r-0r
Fig. 4.11l B-r graph at the aris of coil(ring)
2R%/
FR Direction of magnetic field on the axis of the circular
coil
Direction of magnetic field on the axis of a circular loop
can be obtained using the right hand thumb rule. If the
R
i, D fingers are curled along the current, then the stretched
Given, RAC; =R =2R, RDC = R, = R thumb will point towards the magnetic field as shown in
figures given below.
and i, =i-i=
+ B
R, 2R 3

Magnetic field, B, =
2R 2 12R
Magnetic field, B, =oz.d o
2R 2 6R
Magnetic field at the centre O, B, =B, -B =,o
12R' Fig. 4.12 Right hand thumb rule
. Magnetic field at
the axis of a circular Magnetic field due to circular current carrying coil
apart from axis
Current carrying coil
a coil of radius a is carrying current i, then magnetic The magnetic ficld at a point not on the axis is
ield on its axis at a distance r frorm its centre is given by mathematically difficult to caleulate. We show qualitatively
in figure the magnetic field lines due to a circular current
which will give some idea of the field.

Fig. 4.10 Magnetic field on the axis of a current carrying coil

Nia
= Ho 2r
Bats

where, N
number of turns in coil.
r = 0=> B. = Po 27N Fig. 4.13 Magnetic field lines ofa current carrying loop
0) Atcentre,
2a
a
(ii) At far points, 4. Magnetic field due to set of two
r >>a B Ho2rNia H
Nia circular current carrying coils
2 3 (case of Helmholtz)
(üi) B-rgraph shows the variation of magnetic field at Consider the setup of two co-axial coils of same radius
various position on the axis of circular current such that distance between their centres is equal to their
carrying coil. Magnetic field is maximum at the radius. This arrangement is called Helmholtz.
274) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

2 2rx 10-2 * h=4A

=
B, 4x 10
O, 0 0, Y
: Magnetic induction. B,pt ; +B -J'+4')x 10-10

Fig. 4.14 (a) Magnetic field due to two eo-aual coils Bp 5x 10T
(b) B-R graph of rhwoco-arial coils

At axial mid-point O, magnetic field is given by

B= 0.716HgN;
R
= 1.432 Bux 2) Ampere's circuital law
It states that the line integral of magnetic field, B around
wherc. HoNi any closed path (Amperian loop) or circuit is equal to u
Bnas
2R times the total current crosing the area bounded by the
Example 4.17 The magnetic field B due to a current carrying closed patih provided that the electric field inside the loop
circular loop of radius 12 cm at its centre is 0.5x 10T Find remains constant. Thus,
the magnetic field due to this loop at a point on the axis at a B-dl =Ho (iget
distance of 5.0 cm from the centre.
Sol. Magnetic field at the centre of a circular loop is, B
In the abrve relation, we willuse a sign convention given
2R by right hand rule. By this rule, fingers of the right hand
are curled in the sense, the boumdary is traversed in the
and that at an axial point, B, loop integral B-dl. Now, the direction of the thumb gives
2
R'+22
B,
R
R' the sense in which the current I is treated as positive.
Thus, or B, =I Amperian loop

Substituting the values, we have

B, = (0.5x 10-) (12) 10

I44+ 251z=3.9x
144+
Upward curtent (+
Dkwnward currenr -)li
Exomple 4.18 Tun concentric coils, each of rodits equal to
2n cm, are placed at right angles to each other. Current of Fig. 4.15 Sign covention for the current
3 and 4 respectiveiy, are flouwing throxugh the tuv cois. What
A

In this way, currents i,. i, and i, shown in the diagram are

will be the magnetic induction in Wbm at the centre of the
coils{u =
4r x 10 Wb Am) ? respectively taken as positive and negative.
Sol. Field at the centre of the loop is given by mc=i +i, - i, » B-dl #, i, + i, -i,)
B= Its simplified form is, Bl =
2R #ot
cm m Tis stnylifiexd equatk can be teed uxder the follouing coratiticrn
where, R is radius given, R=2r =2ax 10
{) At every paint of the closed path B || di.
2x1 (ii) Magnetic field has the same magnitude B at all
places on the closed path.
(ii) Ampere circuital law holds for steady currents whic
do not change with time.
Exomple 4.19 Write cqquativn for Anpere's circuital law for
the Amperial lxp as soun below.
(Traerse in the direction shuum by arrow mark but on it.)
Amperian lorp
x
2 2r 10
4 =3A
3x 10°
=3x 10:5T
 Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges (275

Sol. If observed from the top <

lef side portion
the loop is of (ii) Inside the solid cylinder (r R)Current i' enclosed
traversed clockwise, while the other portion traversed is by Amperian loop is lesser than the total curtent ().
anti-clockwise. Thereforc, by sign convention
+i, Amperian
is(+). i, (+) kong

+ i,
Thus, fR-dl =po4+i -) JAetan
loop

Applications of ampere's circuital law Fig. 4.18 Amperian loop inside a solid cylinder
Ampere's circuital law can be applied to calculate magnetic Current density is uniforn i.e.. J
=J
field associated with symmetric distributed current
carrying configurations, which are discussed as follows
1. Magnetic field due to a cylindrical wire
(i)Outside the cylinder (r >
R)To find magnetic field
Hence, at inside point Bi
dl =o
outside at point P. Now, we will assume Amperian Ho ir
loops as shown below.

Arnperian Joop (iv) Inside the thick portion of hollow cylinder Current
P enclosed by the Amperian loop of radius r is
given by

f=ix=ix (2- R)
A R -R)
a) Solid cylinder to) Thin hollow cylinder
p

(c) Thick bollow cvlinder

Fig. 4.16 Applications of Ampere'scircuital law for a point Fig. 4.19 Amperian loop inside the thick portion of the
P. outside the cylinder hollow cylinder

Hence, at point P.
In all the above cases, magnetic ficld outside the B-d =ho
wire at P
fB-dl= B2r) Bn
Hoi (r- R)
2rr W- R)
out
2r Variation in magnetic field with radius
(i) The variation in magnetic field due to infinite long
In all the above cases, Burl xe
solid cylindrical conductor along its radius is as
2rR shown in figure.
(ii) Inside the hollow cylinder (r < K) Magnetic field 4B
inside the hollow cylinder is zero because no current
is enclosed by Amperian loops as shown below Bnax

B)

B=0 Oi
(B-0
re 0 F
R
Anperian Joop
Fig. 4.20 B versus r graph for solid cyinder
Amperian loop
(a) Thin hollow cvhndet b) Thick bolow cvlinder Note that inside the wire B0 as r 0.
Fig. 4.I7 Magnetic field inside the hollow cylinder Also, the magnetic field is continuous at the surface
of the wire.
276) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

(ii) The variation in magnetic field due to

infinite long (ii) Infinite length solenoid If the solenoid is of
hollow cvlindrical conductor along its radius is as
infinite length and the point is well inside it
shown in figure.
i.e., a =ß=(r2).
Bax So,
1fthe solenoid is of infinite length and the point is
near one end i.e., a =0 and ß = (/2), so
B=0

r0 r-R
|B,uoni)
2
Fig. 4.21 B versus r graph for hollow cylinder
(iii) Variation in magnetic field with distance d from its
Magnetic field outside the cylindrical conductor does centre
not depend upon nature (thick/thin or solid/bollow)
of the conductor as well as its radius of cross-section.
2. Magnetic field due to a solenoid B2
End of solenojd d-
Ed of solenoid
A cylindrical coil of many wounded turns of insulated
wire with generally diameter of the coil smaller than its Fig. 4.2S B versus distance d graph for solenoid
length is called a salenoid.
Note 1
Magnetic feld produted by solenaid is ditected along
its axis
2.Magnetic field inside the solenoid is yniform
3 Magnetic field outside the volume of the ideal solenoid (tughtly wound)
approaches to zero

Solenosd
3. Magnetic field due to a toroid
A toroid can be considered as a ring shaped closed
Fig. 4.22 Solenoid and its magnetic field solenoid. Hence, it is like an endless cylindrical solenoid.
A magnetic field is produced around and within the
solenoid as shown in above figure. The magnetic field Winding
within the tightly wound solenoid (ideal solenoid) is
uniforn and parallel to the axis of solenoid.
Outside the ideal solenoid tnagnetic field is zero as shown
in the figure below.

Fig. 4.26 Toroid and its mugnetic field

9o000oo000. Consider a toroid having n turns per unit length. Magnetic
field at a point P in the figure is given as
n
where
Fig. 4.23 fagnetic field (outside) due to ideal solenoid 2rr 2nr
(i) Finite length solenoid N= total number of
If Note
turns, l= length of the solenoid, n = number of turns 1 Macnetic field outsice the volume of toroid rs always zero
per unit length = Nil 2 Magnetc field at the centre of toroud is always zero.

4. Magnetic field due to an infinitely large

carrying current sheet
Given, an infinite sheet of current witlh linear current
density J (A/m).
We want to determine thc magnetic field at distance d
Fig. 4.24 Magnetic field due to finite length solenoid from the sheet as shown in Fig. (a).
Magnetic field inside the solenoid at point Pis given by Now, consider a square Amperian loop of side las shown
in the Fig. (b).
B= [sin a + sin B)
2
 Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges 277

Br P
.:.Total resistance of wire,
Br: R =2rx 1.0 x 10*x 400 ×
0.01 = 8nx 10"2
Number of turns per unit length, n= 400 = 2000 n

20x 10
V
As, magnetic field
By
B=#ni=l. R
.:.
(b) emí of the battery,
Fig. 4.27 (a) Magnetic field at point P V=
BR 10x Bx 10²
(b) Amperian loop around the sheet 4nx 10x 2000
Consider two strips X and Y of the sheet situated Exomple 422 A coil wrapped around a toroid has inner radius
svmmetrically on two sides of the oint P.AL this point of 20.0 cm and an outer radius of 25.0 cm. If the wire
magnetic field due to strip X is B1X, similarly ByLYp: wTapping makes 800 turns and carries a current of 12.0 A.
Find the maximum and minimum values of the magnetic field
Resultant of By and B, is parallel to XY and resultant of within the toroid?
field due to whole sheet bc in this direction. Let the
Sol. Let a and b denote the inner and outer radij of the toroid. Then.
resultant field be Bp. maximum value of magnctic ficld,
From Anpere's law, 4nx 10x 800x 12.0
N x
2za 2rx 20.0 10-2
=
Since, Bp L dl along the pathbcand
=
d
a therefore 9.6x 10 T=9.6mT
NI
B, dl = 0: [B, dl 0 Minimum value of magnetic field, B,n l =Ho:
2rb
Also, B || dl along the path a - b and c - d, thus Bmin =
4nx 10x 800 × 12.0
2*x 25.0x 10
=
768 × 10T7.68 mT

Exomple 4.23 A long straight wire of radius a carries a steady

The current enclosed by the loop is i = JI. current I. The current is uniformly distributed across ts
Therefore, cross-section. Find the ratio of the magnetic field at and 2a. -
2
2Bpl = Ho y) or B, =
*o (from Ampere's law) Sol. Current density, =L
2
From Ampere's cireuital law. B-d=u sd
B-Hod
Or
rca, Bx 2zr =uo Jx nr' B=
Mx
X

2 For
TO² 2

Example 420 A 0.8 long solenoid has 800 turns and has a
mm

field density of 2.52 x 10 T at its centre. Find the current in At r=ar2,

4na
the solexoid.
For r> a, Bx 2rr u!
Sol. Number of turns per unit length, 2ar
N 800 = 10000 turns/m
n== 0.8 m
We know that, H =#i
. Current in the solenoid, ia
B 2.52 x 10-3
=2.0 A

4nx 10x 1000

Example 421 A copper wire having a resistance of 0.01 2 per

metre is used to ind 400 fturns solenoid of radius 1.0 cm and
length 20 cn. Find the emf of a battery which when connected
across the solenid would proxduce a magnetic field
near the centre of the solenoid.
of10T B,
- Ho
A

r2a,
4Ra
Sol. Length of wire used =2zrx No. of turns
So, !
l.0x 10* x 400 B,
m

-2rx
Resistance per unit length =0.01 S2/m
 278 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Exomple 424 A solenoid 50 cm long has 4 lavers of windings 350 x 4

=2800 m-!
of
350turns each. The radius of the lowest layer is 1.4 cm. If 0.5
the current caried is 6.0 A. Find the magnitude of B (i) near TnA!
the centre of the solenoid on its axis and off its axis, (i) near its
Now, In 6.0 Au 4nx 10"
m-!
ends on its axis, (iül outside the solenoid near its centre. n=2800
Sol. (0 The magnitude of the magnetic field at or near the centre B=4rx10- x 2800x 6T 2l x
=
10T
of the solenoid is given by This value of B is for both on and off its axis. Since, for an
infinitely long solenoid, the internal field near the centrc
is
B =hl
where, n is the number of turns per unit length. uniform over the entire cross-section.
B.
This expression for B can also be used, if the solenoid has (iü) Magnetic ficld at the ends of the solenoid is
more than one layer of windings because the radius of wire
does not enter this equation. Therefore, Ho
2
-105 x 10**T
No. of turns per layer x No. of layers
(ii) The outside field near the centre of a long solenoid
length of the solenoids is negligible compared to the internal field.

Check point 4.1

1. Which of the tollowing gives the value of magnetic field due 7. The magnetic field produced at the centre of a current
r,
to a small current element according to Biot-Savart's law? carrying circular coil of radius is
r
Ho 6/ sin (a) directly proporticnal to
(a)
iA/sin 0 o) (b) versely proportional to
Sin 0 (c) directly proportonal to r
(c) o 4/ 4n
(d) inversely proportional tor

8. An arc of a circle of radius R subtends at an angle n/2 at the

2. Magnetic field at a distance r trom an infinitely long straight
as centre. It carries a curternt i, Th magnetic field at the centre
Conductor carrying steady current varies will be
(a) 1/ (b) 1/
(d) 1/V ta) (b) (c) () 5R
(c) 1/ 2 4R
3. The strength of the magnetc field at a distance r near a long 9. A particle carryng a charge equal to 100 times. The charge
straight current carying wire is B. The field at a distance r/2 on an electron is rotating one rotation per second in a
vall be circular path of radius 0 8 m The value of the magnetic fieid
B
(b) (c) 28 (d) 48 produced at the centre wall be
(a) for vacuum)
u
=permeability
4. TWo parallel long wires carry currents i, and i, with
i, >i,. 10 (c) 10"Ho () 10 o
(a) (b)
10o
When the currents are in the same direction, then the
wires is 10 uT.
magnetic fiekd at a point mcway between the 10. In the tiqure shown, there
are two
I the directon ol i, is reversed, then the feld becomes s,
semicircles radii and in
of
,
304T. The ratio ,/1, is which a current i is flowing. The
(a) 4 (b) 3
(d) 1 magnetc induction at the centre O
2
a power line. will be
5. The current is flovang in south direction along
magnetic field above the power line
The direction of
(neglecting earth's field) is
(a) (D)(-4)
(a) south (b) east
(d) west (c
(c) ncth
wires lie in the
6. Two infinitely long, thin, insulated. strarght a
coil of 100 turns and
respectively Each wire 11. A current of01A cirçulates around
XY-plane along the X and Y-axes, cm. The magnetic field set up at
the positive X-drection and having a radius equal to 5
carries a current / respectivey, in
wall be zero at al! the centre of the coil is uo m4n 10x
x Wb/A-m)
Y-directon. The magnetic field
positive (a) 5x
x 10 T (b) 8x 10T
points on the straight ine wth equation (d) 2*
x 10 T
(b) y--x (c) 4x x 10T
(a) y-x
(C) y= x -1 () y=-x+1

279
Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges

277 of 904
 Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges (279

12. througha closed loop as shown in figure.

A current / flows 17. Two concentric coils of 10 turns each are siluated in the
The magnetic field at the centre O is same plane. Thei radi are2 cm and 4 cm and they carry
respectively, 0.2 and 0.3 A current in opposite directions.
The magnetic feld (in Wbtm) at the centre is
(a) (35/4) u (b) 4/80)
(c) (7/80) #a () (25/2) u
28 18. A gven lengtth of a wire carries a steady current It s bent
first to torm a circular plane cod of one turn. If a koop of same
length is now bent more sharpy to qive a double loop of
(al (t-0+ tan 0) (-0+ Sin 0)
smaller radrus, then the magnetic field at the centre caused
2
Ihe same current is
(c)e +
sin 9)
(d) None of these (a) a quarter of ts frst value o) unaltered
(c) four times of ts first value (d) two times of its
frst value
13. A current ampere flows in a ccrcular arc 19. Which of the following figure shows the magnetic flux density
of wire wtose radius is R. which subtends Bat a distance r from a long straight rod carrying a steady
an angle 3a/2 radian at its centre. The Current ?
magnetic induction B at the centre is B
(b)
R 2R
(a) (b)
3u
(c) (d)
8A

14. Magnetic field due to a ting having n turns at a distance x on

its axis is proportional to (it r radius of ring)

(a).) (c) (d)

n
20. In using Ampere's law, to find the magnetic field inside a
15. The ratio of the magnetic field at centre of a current carying straight kong solenod, the loop that is taken is
coil of the radius a and at a distance a from centre of the coil
(a) a ciraular lcop, co-axal wth the solenokd
and perpendicular to the axis of col is (b) a rectangula locp in a plane is perpendicular to the axis of
1
(a) (o) V2 (d) 2/2 the solenod
(c) a rectangular koop in a plane contaning the axs of the
16. A circular current carying coil has a radius A. The distance solenod. the loop being totally withri the solenoid
trom the centre of the coit on the axis of the coil, where the (d) a rectanqular loop in a plane containing the axis of the
magnetic induction is 1/8th ot its value at the centre of coil is solenod, the loop being partiy inside the solenoid and partty
(a) (b) R/N3 (c) 2/V3R (d) RI243 utside it

is zero, when
3) Force on a moving charge (ii) F
(a) B= i.e., no magnetic field is present.
a (b) q = 0 ie. particle is neutral.
in uniform magnetic field (c)v= 0 i.e., charged particle is at rest or
If a particle carrying a positive charge q and moving with (d) O = ° or J80 i. e., Force = 0
=
velocity v enters a magnetic ficld B, then it experiences a (ii) F is maxinum at 0 90° and this maximu value
force Fm which is given by the expression is Bqv.
F
=q (vx B)
Rules to find the direction of
(i) The magnitude of F = is magnetic force (F)
F, Bq sin 0 From the property of cross product we can infer that F, is
where, is the angle between v andB.
perpendicular to botl v and B or it is perpendicular to the
 280 DBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

v= 2i-3j) ms!
plane formed by v and B. The exact direction of F, can be
giien by any of the following methods.
-
B (5i 2j)T
() Ditection of F =(sign of q) (direction of vx ...i) B)

Therefore,
a =
022i --3j)x (si
x
2j) ms

We can say that. ifq is positive in Eq. (i), magnetic =

02(4k +
15k]ms?
force is along v x Band if q is negative magnetic
force is in a direction opposite to v x B. a
-38 ms?
(ü) Fleming's left hand rule According to this rule,
the forefinger, the central finger and the thumb of Example 4.26 When a proton has a velocity
the left hand are stretched in such a way that they V =
2i+3j) x 10" ms, it experiences a force
are mutually perKndicular to cach other. If the k) N. When its veloxcity is along the
F-(1.28× 10
central finger shows the direction of velocity of Z-axis, tlen it experiences a force along the X-oxis. What is
positive charge (v) anxd forefinger shows the direction the magnetic field?
of magneic field (B), then the thumb will give the
Sol. Magnetic force is,
direction of magnetic force (E, ). x B)
E, =q(v
F.Direction of agtetic foce)
For F, to be along (-k} magnetic ficld must be along -).
B
Now, substituting propcr valucs, we get
B (Direction of magtetic fed)
-(1.28x 10" k)= (1.6x 10-"t2i + 3j)x (-Bj))x 10
1.28= 1.6 x 2x B,
I.28 0.4
B, =
3.2
(Velocity of the charged particle)
Therefore. the magnetic field is, B- -Bi =(-0.4})T
Fig. 4.28 Directions of F, by Flemings left hand rule
Exomple 427 A charged particle is projected in a magnetic field
(c) Right hand rule Wrap the fingers of your right B +
4j}x 10 T
Ihand around the line perpendicular to the plane of v =3i
and B as shown in figure, so tHhat they curl around The acceleration of the pxuticle is found to be
with the sense of rotation from v to B hrough the a = (xi + 2j)ms
smaller angle between them. Your thumb, then points
in the direction of the force F, on a positive charge. Find the value of x.
Sol. As we have read, FLB
Fvx B
Fr i.e., the acceleration a 1B or a B0
+ 2j)· + 4j)x 10"' =0
Right hand rule xi si
Br+ 8)x 10-=0
Value of x=
Exomple 2028 A mAgetic field of (4.0 x 10- k)T exerts a
force (4.0 i + 30j) x 10" Non a particle having a charge
Fig. 4.29 Direction ofF, by right hand rule
10°C and moving in the NTplane. Find the velaxity of the
Note F, Theretore, f, 1 ds cr the work done try the magnetic
pxarticie.
Ivorf1
Sol. Given, B =t4x 10-'kT. g=10C
force in a static magretic fseld is zero
+30j)x 10-"
N
W,
=0 and magnetic force. F, =(4.0

Example 425 A charged particle of specific charge Let velocity of the prticle in XT-plane be
i.e., charge per unit mass) 0.2 CCky has velcity 2i -3j ms v=v,i+v,j
at sone instant in u uniform maqnetic field 5i + 2j (tesla), Find
Then, from the relation,
the arcelerution of the particte at this instant.
F, qlv x B)
Sol. The acccleration of the particle, a
=

F-2x B) We
have,(40i+30j)x 10-° =10tvi r)x
+
4x 10'k)
=(4v, x
10 12-4v, x 10²)
Given, 2-0.2 CAg
 Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges 281

Comparing the coefficients of i and j. we have

x
4x 10-0= 4u, 10-12 2.5 A
v, =10 ms=100 ms-! Sm

and 3.0 x 100 =-4v, x 1012 Sol. i) Magnetic ficld at R due to wires,
V, =-73ms-!
+
v=v,itv,j -(- 75i 10o) m/s
= + i), along -Y-axis
100
Exomple 4.29 A charged particle carrying charge, q = luC
moves in eniform mnaqnetic field with welocity, = 10 ms at , ......9--..*r= 4 x 10S m/s
an angle 45° with X-axis in the xy-plane and experiences a
force F, =5/2 mN along the negative Z-axis, When the same
particle nove with velocity, v, = 10 ms along the Z-axis Angle between v and Bis 90°,
then it experiences u force F, in v-direction. Find Force, F = Bqv
fil magnitude and direction of the magnetic field. 3.2x 10o=10a+ 90.6x 10-19X4 x 10°)
fii) the magnitude of the force F,. 1+í=5
So!. F, is in y-direction when velocity is along 2-axis. Current, in 4A
Therefore, magnetic fietd should be along X-axis. So, let (b) Third wire can he placed left of R or right of Rat
B= Bj distance d. ll it is placed left of R, current in it should be
wpward or placed right of R, current in it shiould be in
i) Given,
downward direction.
B, =0
2.5
and =-52x 10'& o2.55
2r 2 27 d
From the equation, .. Position,
Feqlv x B) d l n
1We have,
Motion of a charged particle in uniform
magnetic field
As we know that, the magnetic force on a charged particle
--k is perpendicular to its velocity. Thus, this force does not
do any work on the particle. Hence, the kinetic energy or
-5v2x 10
the speed of the particle does not change due to the
magnetic force.
B, =10T Let a charged particle q is thrown in magnetic field B with
Therefore, the magnetic field is a velocity vas shown in thc figure. The magnctic force
B=10*iT acting on the particle is given by F = Bqv sin0, where 0 is
(ii) F, =B, sin 90° the angle between the velocity and the magnetic field.
As the angle between B andv in this case is 90°,
= N
F, 10ao0)=10-
Example 430 Tuo long parallel wires carrying current 2.5 A
and i in the same direction ídirected into plane of the paper)
o
q
are held at P and Q respectivelv, such that they are B
perpendicular to the plane of paper. The poins P and Q are Fig. 4.30 Charged particle with velocity v at
located t distance of 5 m and 2 m respectively, from a angle Owith the magnetic field
collinear pxoint R.
Depending on the initial conditions, the charged particle
(i) An electron movingy with a velxity of 4 x 10' m/s along positiw can follow different Irajectories in a region of uniform
xdirection experience a force of magnitude 3.2 x 10 N at magnctic ficld. Let us take them up one by one.
the point R. Find the alue ofi.
(i0 Find all pxitions at which a third long parallel wire canying a
Case 1. When is 0 or 180,
current of magnitude 2.5 A may be placed, so that magnetic As discussed earlier E, =0, when O is cither (0° or l80°.
field at R is zero. Hence, path of the charged particle is a straight line
282: OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vot. 2

(undeviated) when it enters parallel or anti-parallel to (iii) Frequency of rotation is,

magnetic field, as shown below. 1

2nm
-0 9- 18 Note when a charged particle is projected perpenditular to a magnetit feld,
() 1s path is orcular in a plare perpendicular to the plane of magnetit feld.
(u) The speed and kinetc energy of the part<le remains constart
(i) fhe velocity and mamentum of the partcte changes only in direction
F,0 (w) The time periad of revckution, angular velocity and frequency of
resoution is indepencent of veloxty of the particle and radius cf circular
Fig. 4.31 A charged partirle moving parallel er anti-parallel to path.
magnetic field

Case 2. When 9 is 90, then path

Important points related to motion of a charge
=
particle in uniform magnetic field
When 90, the magnetic force is,
The speed of the particle in magnetic field does not
By sin 90° = B:.
F, =
change but the particle gets deviated. The devitation 9 can
This magnetic force is perpendicular to the velocity at every be found in two ways.
instant. Hence, path is a circle. The necessary centripetal
force is provided by the magnetic force. Hence, if r be the
radius of the circle, then

xB

Fig. 4.32A charged particle is Imoving in a circular path

Fig. 4.33 Deviation (0) of the charged particle in magnetic feld
= Bgv or r =
Bq (i) After tiine t, deviation will e
This expression of r can be written in following different ot Bq
ways 0=
V2qVm
PV2Kn as () =
Bq
Bq Bq Bq Bq
Here, p = momentun of particle and (ii) In terms of the length of the magnetic ficld (i.e.,
when the particle leaves the magnetic field) the
K =KE of particle =
or p=V2Km deviation will be,
2m
We also kow that, if the charged particle is accelerated by 0= sin
a potential difference of V volts, it acquires a KE given by
K = qV
(i) Further, time eriod of the circular path will be

Bg 2nm
T=
Bq
(ii) Angular speed o) of the particle is, Fig. 4.34 Charged particle having I80° deviation
2 B Since, sin0 2 1,this relation can be iused only when
m xr.
For x > r, then deviation will be 180° as shown in
Bq
Fig. 4.3G.
m
 Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges (283

Example 4.31 What is the smallest value of B that can be set up (ü) We have, V = 10' V.q m2e =2x 1.6x 101 C
at the equator to pemit a proton of speed 10' ms to circulate
around the earth? (R = 6.4x 10° m, m, = 1.67x 10 kg). d=0.I m, B0.1T and m, 6.4 x
10 kg

Sol. From the relation, R = Kinetic encrgy. K

Bg
m

We have, B=

Substituting the values, we have

(1.67x 10}(10') R=
B:
=1.6x 10*T B 2eB
(1.6x 10-) (6.4x 10) 2eBi
Also,
Example 4.32 A proton and an a-particle, accelerated through R m,v/B·2e m,v
same otential difference, enter in a region of uniform magretic
2eBl Bd
field with their elocities perpendicular to the field. Compare
the radii of circular paths followed by them.
Sol. Let mass of proton = m, charge of proton ee
Now, mass of (a-partice = 4m, charge of a-particle =2e 1.6x to-19 x 0.1x 0.1 =:
When a charge q is accelerated by V volts, it acquires a kinetic l6.4x 10-" x 10
energy E; =qV ..Change in direction =30°
:, Momentum is given by mv = 2mE, =2mq
(ii) We have, m =10g =10x 10 =10 kg
2mV
Radius, r= mw q= 4
uC=4x 10 C,v=270m/s
qt
Magnctic ficld, B =3001T = 500x 10 = 5x 10T
2mV 2e3² 1 m

Thus,
VeB?
d=100
V214m)V 2
10 x 270 x m

Radius, R= 13.5 10°

Example 433 (i) charged particle having mass m and
A Bq 5x 10x 4x 10
charge q is accelerated by a potential difference V. it (lies
sin 0 = 100 10
throtugh a uniform transwerse magnetic fieldB. The field
R 13.5x 10* I3.5
occupies a region of space d. Find the time intenval for which it
remains inside he magnetic field. 0 is very small.
fit) Anu-article is accelerated by a potentiat difference of10" V. = 400
Deflection =3.7x 10m
Find the change in its directia of motion if it enters ormally in 2R 13.5 x
a region of thickness 0.1 m having transverse maqnetic
2x 10
intuction of0.1 T. m, =6.4 x 102 kgl Case 3. When the charged particle is moving at an angle
(0) 10g bullet huing a charge of 4 uC is fired at speed of
a (0 the field other than 0°,90° or 180
270 ms in a A
horizantal direction. vertical magnetic fiedof In this case velocity can be resolved in two components,
5004T exists in the space. Find the deflectin ofthe bilet due one along B and another perpendicular toB. Let the twa
the magnetic field as it travels throgh 100 m, Make components be v and v .
appropriate apgroximations.
B
Sol. (i) Kinetic energy of the charged particle, vsin 0

PCOs )

Fig. 4.35 Components of velocity of the charged particle

d d
=
Then, =V cos
0
sin O V,
and "= sin )

0= sin The components perpendicular to field (v, gives a

cireular path and the conponent parallel to field (,) gives
m
QBd a straight line path. The resultant path is a
Time interval, t m 0 m sin- helix as shown
Bq qB in figure.

284 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

284 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Example 4.35 A beam of protors with a veixcity 6 x 10 ms

enters a niform magnetic field of 0.4 Tat an angle of 37° to
O00006 the magnetic field. Find the raditus of the helical path taken by
proton beam. Also. find the pitch of helix.

sin37 =3/5 and cos37° 4/5 m,

=
Use, L6x 10 kg
S
Sol. Radius of helical path, R= ""
Bq

Fig. 4.36 Helical path of the charged particle

a.6x 10")6x 10°)(sin37°)
(0.4)0.6 x 10-")
() The radius of this helical path is, =
0045 cm
mv sin 0
r=
Time period, T
= 2zm 2rl .6 x 10*) 5xx 10s
Bq Bq x
10-")
B 0.40.6
(ii) Tine period and frequency do not depend on Pitch of belical path
velocity and so they are given by,
(6x 10°Mcos37° X5rx 1o)
=

Bq p=vcos0T
2nm and =
T= f
Bq 2nm =30xx 0.8 x
10 =2.4rx 10m=7.5cm
(iii) There is one more term associated with a helical Example 4.36 A beam of protons uith a relcity 4 x 10°ms
path, that is pitch tp) of the helical path. Pitch is enters a uniform magnetic field of 0.3 T at an angle of 60° to
defined as the distance travelled along magnetic field the magnetic field. Finad the pitch of the heix (uwhich is the
in one complete cycle. i.e., distance travelled bv a proton in the beam parallel to the
magnetic field during one period of the rtation).
or p= (v cos 0) 2tm
p=vT Mass of the protom = 167x 10kq
Bq
Sol. Whern a charged angle to a
article is projected at atn
2rmv cos 0 magnetic field. the component of velocity parallel to the field
p sv cos while perpendicular to the ficld is v sin 0, so the
Bq
particle will move in a circle of radius
Note After every ptch, the particle touches the X-axis (as showrn in Fig 436), Le. x x
(v3/2)
X= np, where, n = 0,12..
mlv
sin 0} L.67x 102 4x 10
Example 4.34 A bean of protons with a elociry of 4 x 10° ms L.6x 10x 0.3
enters in a region of uniform magnetic field of0.3 T. The velocity 2
=l.2 cm
makes an angle of 60° with the magretic field. Find the radius of V3
x10m
the helical path taken by the proton beam and the pitch of the 0
sin
helix.
Sol Velocity component along the ficld v, = 4 x 10* x cos 60

=2x 10 ms-! cos

- 4x 10°) sin 60° -
x ns
and v, 2/3 10

Proton will describe a circle in planc perpendicular to 2z 2zx 12 x 10

magnetic field with radius, and time period, T= V sin 0
4x 10x (v3r2)
.67x 10-" kg)x 2V3x 10° s) =
2175 x
-=1.2 cm 10's
n.6x 101PC)x (0.3T)
one
So, pitch of the helix, p evos 0x T

Time taken to complete revolution is x

x
T_2rr_2x 314 x 0.012
-4x 10x 2.175 107
2\3 x 10
Because of , protons will also move in the direction of
.e.. p= 435 x 10m= 435 cm
magnetic field. Exomple 437 A particle of specific charge u entersa unifom
Pitch of helix = x T , magnetic field B = B,k with velocity y vi from the origin.
Find the time dependence of welocity and positiorn of the
2x L0 x 2x 314 x O012m= 0.044
m=4.4 cm particle.
2V3 x 10
 Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges (285

How to Proceed In such type of problems first of all see the

angle between v and B. Because it only decides the pxath of the
particle. Here, the angle is 90. Therefore, the fxuh is a circle.
If it is a circle, see the plane of the circle (perpendicular to the
magnetic field). Here the plane is x-y. Then see the sense of the
rotatio.

90

F B-Bk
O is the centre of the circle. In AAOC,
LOCD = Z0AD
CX= (' adis o circle 90°-B = 90° -a
B=a
Here, it wvill be anticlockwise as shoum in figure, because at (b) ZCOD = ZDOA =a
origin the magnetic force is along pusitive y-direction (uwhich
can be seen from Flemning's left hand rale). Find the deviation (as Z0CD = Z0AD = 90°- a)
=
and radius of the particle. LAX 2a
Vo 2mvg
=
B, at and r= length ABC =r2a)=
9= of
B
B,a
Now according to the figure, find vt) and rtl ABC Zrrcx

Sol. Vclocity of the particle at any time t is, Ba

v tr) =v,i + v,
=V, cos + v, sin Oj i Alternate method
v
() =v, cos ,ar)i + Vg sin Bcui
Position of particle at time t is,
(2m 2am
rt)xi +
v =r sin0i + (-r cos @j
B
Substituting the values of r and 0, we have (c) Distance AC 2 AD) =2 (r sin a)
r)=sin (B,uri +il - cos B,atI 2mv
sin a
Boa Bq
Example 438 A charged particle lq m) enters a uniform
magnetic field B at angle a as shoun in figure with speed v Motion ofa charged particle is
Find,
combined electric and magnetic field:
Lorent'z force
Consider a point charge q moving with velocity v is
located at position vector r at a given time t. If electric
field E and magnetic field B are existing at that point, then
force on the electric charge q is given by
(g, m) F =q(E +vx B]=Fettic +Fmagtetic
fa) the ungle ß at which it leaves the magnetic field, This force was first given by H. A Lorentz, hence it is

) time swnt by the particle in nagnetic field and called Lorentz forcc.
() the distance AC. Here, nagnetic force F, = qlv x B) Bv sin 0 and
Sol. (a) Here, velocity of the particle is in the plarne of paper electric force F, = E.
while the magnetic ficld is perpendicular to the paper The direction of magnetic force is same as vx B. if charge
inwards, i.e., angle between v aud B is 90°. So, the path is a is positive and opposite to v x B, if charge q is negative.
circle. The ralius of the circle is, r=
286) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Case I When v, E and B are all collincar Also, current associated with the beam,
In this situation. the magnetic force on it will be i= ne n=ile
where, n is number of protons/time.
zero and only electric force will act. So, a =
m
Momentum of a proton = mv
Force, F=n m
The particle willpass through the field following a im E 0.80 x 10x L.67 x 10" x 220 x 10
straight line path (parallel fied) with change in its
eB L.6x 10 x 50x 10
speed. So, in this situation speed, velocity,
momentum and kinetic energy all will change without = 3.6x
10N
change direction of motiorn as shown below
Cyclotron
Cyclotron is a device used for accelerating positively
charged particle (like a-particles, deutrons, etc.) by the
Fig. 4.37 Motion of a
charged particle with v ||E ||B help of uniform magnetic field upto energy of the order of
Case II VWhen v, E and B are mutually perpendicular MeV. It consists of two hollow metallic dees D, and D,.
These are placed in a uniform magnetic field
In this situation, if E and B are such that
F =F, +F =0 ie., a = (F/m) = 0 perpendicular to the plane of dees. An alternating voltage
is applied between the dees.
yE
As, it uses the combination of both the fields (electric and
magnetic). which are perpendicular to each other, hence.
are called crossed fields. The charged particle to be
B accelerated is produced at centre point between the dees.
The particle accelerate along circular path to acquire
Fig. 4.38 Motion of a charged particlewith v 1EIB enough energy to carry out nuclear disintegration, etc.
As shown in figure, the particle will pass through the field
with same velocity. without any deviation in its path.
eflectot
In this situation, as F, =F, ie, qË = qv
v= E/B Target

This principle is used in 'velocity-selector' to get a charged

beam having a specific velocity. Dees
Note if only magnetc feld is present, we have to putE= 0F- glv x B)

Smilarly. ifB 0 F çE

Exomple 4.39, A charge particle having charge 2 C is throun E

with veloity 2i + 3j inside a region having E =2j and magnetric High freqency
field 5k. Find the initial Lorentz force acting on the particle. oscillatoT
Sol. Lorentz Force is given by, Fig. 4,39 Path described by a charged particle in a yelotron
Fa qlE + vx B)
Cyclotron frequency Time taken by ion to describe a
F=22j + ci + sj)x s&) semicircular path is given by
=2(2j +10(-j)+1si] = 30i -16, Tm

Exomple 4.40 A proton beam passes wirhout deviation qB qB

through a region of spxace, where there are uniform transverse IFT = tine period of oscillating electric field, then
mutually perpendicular electric and magnetic fields with
2rm
E=220 kV/m and B=50 mT. Then, the beam strikes a T=2t =
grounded target. Find the force imparted by the beam on the qB
tarqet, if the lwan current is cqual to i = 0,80 mA 1 qB
Sol. Since, proton is movitng in a st raight line, hence net force
.Cyclotron frequency, v=
T 2am
s ZerO.
Note Cy lotron based on the fact that the time pericd of one revolution
is is
independent of its speed cr radius cf the orbit.
=
g£ Bq v=
B
 Chapter 04 Magnetic effect of current and moving charges
(287

Maximum energy of particle Maximum energy

gained Example 4.42 Magnetic field applied ona cyclotron
is 0.7 T
hy the charged partice, and radius of its dees is 1.8
m. What will
be energy of the
emergent protons in MeV?
Sol. Fnergy of the emergent
2m protons,
where, ro is maximum radius of the circular path followed E-4'B 1.6x 10l9x 0.7x 0.8
by positive ion. 2rn 2x L67 x 10-27
x
Note L.6x 101"x (0.7 0.8
1.
(yclotron is sutable orly for accelerating heavy 1.67 x
10- y L6t0-g MeV= 76 MeV
particles tike proton, 2x
deuteron, a-particde, etc Electrors cannot be accelerated
by the cyclotron
because the mass of the electron is smali and a smal Exomple 4.43 Deuterons in a a circle of
increase in enercy o radius 32 cm. Just
the electron makes the electon rave with a véry high spetd As a result of before emerging
it, the electtoas go Quxkly out of step
th osctlating electrc field fm the. The frequency of the applied
alternating ioltage is 10 MH:. Find
2. When a positNe san s
atcelerated by the cytotron, then d moves with
greater and greater speed. As the Speed ion (D the magnetic
fhw densitv( i.e.,the magnetic field
of be
becomes comparabe with
that of licht, the mass cf the ion increase according to the relation (iÐ the eerqv and speed
of the deuterorns tipon emergence.
Sol i FrequetKy of the applied emf Cyckotron
freqiency

where, m,
the rest mass ol the ion
or f B
27 m
m= the mass of the ion while moving with velocity v
c=Veipcity of ligit .. 2nmf
¿nd B=
Now, the time talen by the ion to
describe semiticular path is
(2) (3.14)(2x 1.67x 10" (10x 105) - 1.30T
1.6x 10-19
shews, that asv increases,t increases It means (ii) The speed of deuterons on
It
the postive on will take the emergence from the
tanger time to Cescribe semicitcular path th than the time for BqR
0sollatng electrik feld. As a tesult of it, the ion will not half-cle of cvclotron, v =
=
fR 2r
arfve in the gap
between the two dees exactly at the rnstant the
polaty of the two dees is = (2) (3.14)(10x 10°) (32x
reversed and henxe. will not be accelerated 10)
further Thetefore, the ion
Cannot move with a speed beyond a certain imi in a cytlotron 2.01 x 10' ms-!
Example 4.41 The magnetic field ayplied in a :. Energy of deuterons
cyclotron is mv
3.5 T. What will be the frequency of electric
field that must be
applied betuween the dees in order to accelerute
proons?
Sol. The frequency of the field, =ix (2x 1.67x 10")(2.01 x 10'J
Bq 3.5 x 1.6x 10-! =4.22 MeV
f= x 10°27 =5.57x 10 Hz
2rm 2x 314 L6x

Check point 4.2

1. A strong magnetic field is applied on a stationary electron,
then the electron 3. An electron is moving on a circular path of radius rwith
moves in the direction of the field speed v in a trarnsverse magnetic field B.
(a) e/m
for it will be
(b) moes n an cpposite drection of the field (a) (b)
(c) temans stationary
(d) starts spinning (c) Br (C
2. A particie of mass m and charçe Q moving with a velocity v
enters a region 4. An electron and a proton with egual momentum enter
of unitorm
magnetic beld of inductionB. perpendcularty into a uniform magnetic field, then
Then, its path in the region is
(a) the path of proton shall be more curved
(a) aways circuar (b) circular, it v xB= 0
than that of electron
(b) the path of proton shall be less Curved
(c) circular, it vB=0 than that of electron
(d) None ot these (c) Both are equaly curved
(d) path of both ill be straght line
288 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol.
2

5. A chaged particle travels along a straight line

with a speed v 13. Lorentz force can be calculated by using
in a region, where both electric field the fornula
are present. It toRows that Eand magnetic field B
(a)Fq (EV * B)
(b) F
=qE-vxB)
(a) |E| =|B|and the two (c)F g
E vB)
felds are perpendicular (d) F
=qE xvB)
(b) |E| v|B|and the two fields are perpendicular 14. If
electron velocity is (2i +
is subjected to a
3j) and it
(c) |B|= v|E| and the tvo fields are parallel magnetic tield 4k. then
(d) |B| =v|E|and the two felds are perpendicular (a) speed of electron will change
6. A proton, a ieuteron and an a-partice, (b) path of electron will change
having the sanme
constant magnetic tield If ,,
kinetic energy, are movng in cirCular trajectories in a
and r, denote respectively
the radi of tthe trajectoies of these particles, then
(c) Both fa) and (b)
(d) None of the above
A
15. beam ot protons wth a velocity ot 4x 10 ms enters a
(a) <
uniform magnetic tekd ot 0 3Tat an angle of
(d) tiekd The radus ot helical path taken
60 to the nagnetc
=G= by proton beam is
7. When a charged particle enters in a uniform (a) 0 036 n (b) 0012 n
magnetic field,
then its kinetic enegy (c) 0 024 m (d) 0 048 m
(a) remans constant (b) increases 16. A proton anda deuteron both having the same kinetic
(c) decrcases (d) becomes zero
A proton of energy 8 eV is moving in a circular
enegy. enter perpendicularty nto a unilom magnetic field .
path n uniform Fo motion of proton and deuteron on circular path of radius
agnetic feld The energy of an alpha particle moving in the R, and R, respectively, the correct statement is
same magnetic field and along the same path will
be (a) R, v2R, (o) R, - R,/42
(ai 4 V (b) 2 e
(c) R, = Ao (d) R, -2R,
(c) 8 eV (c) 6 eV 17. If a charged partcle a! rest experiences no olectromagnetic
9. A charged particle of mass m and charge q describes force. then the
circular motion of radus r in a uniform magnetic (a) electric fied ust tbe zero
feld of
strengthB. The frequency of revolution is (b) maqnetic fheld must be zero
Bq Bq (c) electric field may or may not be zero
(a) (b
2zm 2m (d) None of the atove

(c) Bm 18. If a charged particle projected in a gravity free room

Bq deflects, then
10. A proton and an electron both moving vith the same velocity (a) ihere must be an electric feld
v ente into a region of (b) Ihere must be a magnetc field
nagnetic field directed perpendçular
to the velocity of the particles They wll noN move in circular (C) Botth felds cannot
be zero
orbits sch that (d) Norne ot the above
(a) thef time peiods will be same 19. Two ions having masses in theratio 1:1 and charges1:2
(b) the time periOd tor proton wl be hicgher are proected into uniform magnetc tield and perpenxicular
(c) the time perod tor elctron will
be higher to the field of a cyclotron with speeds in
the ratio 23. The
(C) their arbital radi wall be sarne ratio of the radiiof circular paths along which the two
11. ! a charged particle is describing a circle of radus r in a partices move is
magnetic field vath a time period I. Then, (a) 4.3 (b) 2:3
(a) T r
(c) T
x? (d) T z (c) 3:1 (d) 1:4
12. A particle is projected in a plane perpendicular to a unitorm
20. Which particles will have minimnum frequency of revolution
magnettc teld Tre area bourded by the path described by when projected in a cyclotron with tho same velocity
perpendicular to a magnetic field?
the partcle ts proportional to (a) Li
(b) Electron
(a) the velocity (b) the momentum
(c) the kinetic energy
(C) Proton (o) He'
(d) None of these
 direction of magnetic field B), then the thumb will give
on a current the direction of magnetic force E ).
) Force
F, (Dsection of force
carrying conductor in a Thumb ot conductor)

(irection of
magnetic field B magnetic
--
Forefinger
feld)

Vhen a current carrying conductor is placed in a ior

(hrection of current)
nagnetic ficld, then the conductor experiences a force in Central finger
direction perpendicular to both the direction of
magnetic field and the direction of current flowing in the Fig. 4.41 Fleming 's left hand rule
conductor.
Right hand palm rule
Stretch tthe fingers and thumb of right hand at right angles
to each other. Then, if the fingers point the direction of
field B and thumb in the direction of current i, then normal
to the palm will point in the direction of force.
(Current

Fig. 4.4D Current carrying conductor in a uniform magnetic field

= ilB sin Magnetic
The magnetic force is, F ficld
n vector form, F=ilx B) ...()
where, B = intensity of magnetic field Force
Fig. 4.42 Right hand palm rule for force on a
i= current in the conductor current carrying conducto
l= length of the conductor
and 0 = angle between the lengh of conductor and
direction of magnetic field. Magnetic force on an arbitrarily shaped wire
Cases For the magnetic force on an arbitrarily shapcd wire
1. If 0 = 90° or sin = 1, then F = ilB(maximum). segnient, let us coIsider the nagnetic force exerted on a

Therefore, force will be maximum when the conductor small segment of vector length d.
carrying current is perpendicular to magnetic field.
II. If 0 = 0° or sin = 0 then F = ilB x 0 = 0
Thus, the force will be zeto, when the current
carrying conductor is parallel to the field.

Direction of force on a current carrying

Fig. 4.43 Arbitany shaped wire in a uniform magnetic
conductor in a magnetic field field
The direction of this force can be found out either dE, =i (dlx B)
...(ü)
by
Fleming's left hand rule or by right hand palm Tocalculate the total force F, acting on the wire shown
rule as in
discussed below. Iigure, we integrate Eq. (ii) over the length of the wire.
Fleming's left hand rule ...(iii)
The direction of F, or Fcan tc given by Flerming's left
hand rule. According to this rule, the forefinger, But the quantity dl represents the vector sum of all
the
central finger and the thumbof the left hand are length elements from to D. Frotn the polygon
A
stretched in such a way that they are mutually law of
vector addition, the sum equals
perpendicular to each other. If the central finger the vector l directed from A
shows to D. Thus,
the direction of current (or ) and forefinger shows
the
F =i (l x B)
290) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

or we can write, × B) in uniform field. Example 4.45 A square of side 2.0 m is placed in a turiform
Fc =Fan =i
D

magnetic field B = 20T in a direction perpendicular to the plane of

Here, AD = effective length of the wire (left). the square inwards, Equal current, i = 30 A is flowing in the
directions shoun in figure. Find the magnitude of magnetic force
Magnetic force on a closed current carrying loop on the loop.
When a clused current carrving loop is placed in uniform
magnetic ficld, then the magnetic force on it is always
zero. As the vector sum of is always zero, i.e..
d=0
= 0
F=ifdx B
Magnetic force on different configurations Sol. Force on wire ACDForce on AD Force on AED
of the urve All these forces are acting along EC.
Now, consider magnetic forces on current carrying
.:. Net
force on the loop =3 (Fsp)
Frut 3(i) LAD) B) = 3) 3.0) 242) 2.0N =36v2 N
conductors of different configurations as shown below.
Here, magnetic force only depends upon effect length of
Example 4.46 A straight wine of length 30 cm and mas
the wires.
60 mg lies in a direction 30° east of north. The earth's magretic
B
O field at this site is lorizontal and has a magnitude of 0.8 G.
What current must be pussed througlh the wire, so that il may
loat in air?
Sol. As shown in figure, if a current iis passed through the wire
from end A towards B it will expericnce a force Bil. sin 9
*
vertically up and hence willloat, if

F
F- BiL t2alB
(a) Straiglt wite (bI Senic ircular wire B

Bi! sin =mo

i.e.,
Bl sin )
x
60x 10 10
= 50 A
F- BL 08x 10x 30 x
10*x 1/2)
(o Siusoid.al wire

Fig. 4.44 Example 4.47 A straight wire of mass 200 g and length 1.5 m
carries a cunent of2 A. lt is suspended in mnid air by a
Exomple 4.44 A wire of length 'a' carries a curent i along the uniform horizontal magnetic feld B. What is the magritude of
Y-axis. A magnetic field exists given by the magnetic field?
B= B,3i +2 + k) T

Calculate magnetic force in vector form and its magnitude.

Sol. Length of the wire, I = j
Magnetic force on the wire,
B) = ia Sol. ApplyingFlening's rule, we find that upward force F of
F= ilx B, x 3i + 2j ki magnitude IiB acts. For mid air susjension this must be
=
ia Bl- 3k +0+i) balanced by the force due to gravity.
mg =IIB B g
+ +
IF|=F B,ja yla (-3
Given, m = =
02 kg. g
m
200 9.8 ms,2A/15
I0Bja 0.2x 9.8
We have, B 0.65 T
2x 1.5
 Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges 291

Exomple 4.48 In the figure shunn a semicircular wire loop is Example 4.50 A wire PQ of uss 10 g is at rest on huv pxrallel
placed in a uniform magnetic feld B =1.0T. The plane of the metal rails. The scpNIration letueen the rails is 4.9 cm.A
loop is perpendicular to the magnetic field. Current i = 2A flous magnetic field of 0.80 T is applied perpendicular to the plane
in the loop in the directions siown. Find the magnitude of the of the rails, directed ounuards. The resistance of the circuit is
magnetic (rce in both the cases (a) and b. The radius of the slowly decreased. When the resistance decreases to below 20 2,
loop is 1.0 m. the wire Q lwgins to slide on the rails. Caiculate the
coefficient of friction beween the wire and the rails.
*

i2
A
*i-2AM

lm 6V
4.9 cm

Sol.Refer Fig. (a) lt forms a closed loop and the current

conpletes the loup. Therefore, net force on tlhe loop in begins to slide whcn magnetic force is just equal to
unifom field shoukd be zero.
Sol. Wire P
the force of friction i.e., u mg e ilB sin 0 (: 0 = 90°)
Refer Fig. (b) In this case although it forms a closed loop but E
cuITent does not complete the loop. Hence, net force is not zero, llere, i= 0.3 A
R 20
ill3 (0.3) (4.9x 10(0.8)
0.12
(10x 10(9,8)
Exomple 451 The mapetic field existing in a region is gien
by. B = Bo A square loop of edge L. carrving a

Y- axes.
FA
=FAD current i is placed with its edoes purallel to the X and
Find the net magnctic force experienced by the loop.
Sol. Consider the situation shown below
IFoopl=2|Fpl
=2ilB strn 0 (::l=2r =2.0 n)
BO
=2)2) C2) a) sin 90 8N B

Example 4.49 A wire, carrving a current i is kept in the

A magnetie
xv-plane along the cune y cm) sin
2

ficld B exists in the 2-direction. Find the magnitude of the

A. J......
x
magnetic force on the pxortion of the wire betueen =0 and
For wire AB,
x=/2. I=QB =4Fas =0
Sol. Consider the sinusoidal shaped wire
as shown below
For wire CD,

Fa 2B,,il, towards right

=
on DA.
Force on BC is cqual and opposite to force
OB . nehay =Fy =213, iL. towards
right

Example 4.52 A conducting rod of

a
for x = À/2 is length aud mass m is moving down
Eifective length of the wire
smooth inc lined plane of inclination 9
= v. A Current iis
Left with constant ecity
a
(lowing in the condctor in direction
Magnetic force on the wire, perpendicular to fpaper inirds. A
Ivrticallv upuxrds magnetic field exists
B
Fuilelt) -B,
B upward.
in spuce. Then, find magnitude of
magnetic (ield B
292 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Sol. Consider the forces acting on the rod as given helow Exomple 4.53 Currents of 10 A and2 A are passed through
tuo parallel wires A and B respectively, in ofposite directions.
If the wire A is infinitely long and length of the wire B is 2m,
then the find the force acting on the conductor B which is
situated at 10 cm distance fromn A.
F, tmagnetic
force) Sol. Force on a conductor of length lcarrying current l, and
placed at a distancer parallel to another infinitely lorng
conductor carrying current is
mq sin 0
feompothent of ng!
F-Ho. 2l,
4n
Hence, from figure,
F, cos
0=mg sin 0 ...)
= Bil ...(ü)
Also, F FF -
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get

B="i tan 9

Force between two parallel current Here,

, =2
=10A, A, l =2 m, r =10 cm =0.l m
carrying conductors =10- y 2x10x 2x2
F 8x 10sN =

Consider two long wires 1 and 2 kept parallel to each 0.!

other at a distance r and carrying currents i, and iz Exomple 4.54 A andB are tuo infinitely long straight parallel
respectively in the same direction. conductors. C is another straight conductor of length im kept
parallel to A and B as shouwm in the figure. Then, find the
magnitude and direction of the force experienced byC

2 A
3A 4A

cm
Fig. 4.4S Tiwo long parallel wires carrying currents in 5 cm8
the same direction Sol. The force between the conductors is attractive, if the
Magnetic field on wire 2 due to current in I is, currents in them are in the sane direction and repulsive, if
the currents are in opposite directions.
B (in direction) Mutual force betweetn conductors A and C,
21 r

Magnetic force on a small element dl of wire 2 duc to this 2

r
magnetie ficld is, d F = i,dl x B) Mo 2 x 3
x-2.40x10N (towards A
Magnitude of this force is, 21 0.05
Mutual force beetween conductors B and C
r r
27 2* Ho.4x S*I3 10N x
(towards B)
0,08
Direction of this force is along dl x Bor towards the wire 1.
Hence, the resultant force cxperienced by (
The force per unit length of wire 2 due to wire 1 is, = x
=(3-2.4)x 10N 0.6
10N (towards B)

Example 4.55 A long horizontal wire P carries a current of

50 A. It is rigidly fixed. Another fine wire Qis placed directly
alow and pxarallel toP. The ueight of wire Q is 0.075 Nm
The sane force acts on wire I due to wire 2. The wires
attract each other, if currents in the wires are flowing in and carries a current of 25 A. Find the perpendicular distance
of wire Q from P so that wire Q remains suspended due to the
the same direction and they repel eaclh other, if the magnetic repalsion. Also indicate the direction of current in Q
currents are in opposite directions. with respect to P.
 293
Chapter 20: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges

When switch S is closed, current is in wire PQ.

i
current (b)
Sol. As force per unit length between two parallel Magnctic force on PQ. F, =
Bil, downward
carrying wires separatel by distance d given
a is by

d
1n d

60

2T' sin G0° = mg + Bil

+ Bil
and is repulsive the current in the wires is in opposite
if
7g
direction (otherwise attractive). x 0.5 x
So, in order that wire Qmay remain suspende, the force
F 100 10x 10+ 2x 0.2
on it must be repulsive and equal to its weight i.e.. the 3
current in the two wires must be opposite directions and
I+0.2_N
F = My i.e.,
F_Mg
Magnetic force between two moving
[Ed. 2|d _Ba
4 charges
x Consider two charges q; and q2 are moving with veloxcities
y Zx 50 25 |
d=10-
0.075
=x
3
10n V
and v, respectively and at any instant the distance
between them is r.
as, =0.075
Nm|
F, Fe
Example 4.56 The fiqure sous a rod PQ of lengeh 20cm and
mass 100g stuspended through a fixed point O by tuo threads of
lengths 20 cm each. A magnetic field of strength 0.5T exists in Fig. 4.46 Two moving charges
the vicinity of the wie PQ as shoum in fiqure. The wire
conecting PQ with the btferv are lose annt exert no force on A magnetic force F will appear between them alongwitth
PO. (a) Find the tension in the theads when the switchS is the electric force.
open. (b) A current of2A is estabished when the switch Sis
closed. Fnd the tension in the threads row. Le., ...(i)
2

Electric force between thcm, is

92
F= 47Eo r
...(ii)

From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we have

Sol. (a) When switch S is open

F

for charges moving with same velocity

Example 4.57 Tuo electrots move purallel to each

an egal elocity v = electrons. Calculate oher with
60 the ratio of forces of
magnetic and electrical of the electrons.

2T sin 60° = mg
T= 100 × 10 x10
 294 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Sol. Electrical force between electrons, Exomple 4.59 Find the magnitude of magnetic moment of the
current carrying loop ABCDEFA. Eoch side of the loop is
F,=ee repulsion 10 cm long and current in the loop is i = 2.0 A

Magnetic force between clectrons,

F, -
attraction

F,
200 x 10)
=44x 10-7 Sol. By asuning two equa! and opposite currents in BE, two
3x 10 current carrying loops (ABEFA and ICDEB) are formed. Their
magnetic moments are cqual in magnitude but perpendicular
F.<<F, to cach other. Hence,
The path of electrons will be as shown below,
M,M +M² =2M
M= iA=2x (l x b)
=
-2x (0.1)0.1) 0.02 A-m²
Nt =(v2)002) =0.028 A-m?
Magnetic dipole moment Exomple 4.60 In the Bohr model of the hydrogen atom, the
Magnetic moment associatcd with a current carrying loop electron circulates around the nucleus in a path of radius
is given as, 5x 10 mat a frequency 6.8 x 10 H: of

= (0 What value of magnetic field is set-tp at the centre ofthe orbit ?

M= Ni |M| NiA
(i0 What is the equivalent magrnetic moment ?
=
Here, N number of turns in the loxap, Sol. (i) An electron moving around the nucleus is equivalent to
iz curtent in the loop a current,
A =
area of cross-section of the loop.
and i=q{
It is a vector quantity directed along area vector (A) of the Magnetic ficld at the centre,
loop with anti-clockwise sense as positive. Its SI unit is A-m.
2R
2R
Example 4.58 Find the magnetic moment of a thin ound loop we
with current if the radius of the loop is equal to Substituting the values, have
R= 100 mm and the magnetic induction at its centre is equal to (4nx 10).6x 10-)( 6.8x 1d") =
B-= 13.4 T
B= 8.0uT. 2x 5.] x
10-!!
Sol. (i) The current carrying circular loop is equivalent to a
magnetic dipole, with magnetic momernt.
M= NiA = (N{ zR')
R Substituting the values, we have
M =(1) (1.x 10-1) (6.8x 10) (3. 14) (5.I x 1o-ll

8.9x 10-24 A-m²

Magnetic field at centre O
B iRB Exomple 4.61 A square loop OABCO of side l carries a current
2R i. It is placed as shown in figure. Find the magnetic moment of
Magnetic moment of loop the loop.
= 2RB
M= iA=i- nR'
x
2BR'_2x 8x 10 (0.1
4x 10-7
=4x 10Am-? O
60
 Chapter 20 Magnetic effect of current and moving charges (295

Sol. Magnetic moment of the loop can be written as, Sol. Magnitude of torque is given by
M =iBC× CO) |= (0.04 r)2) sin 90
Here, M= NiA= Q)1.0)(z)(0.2) (0.04)Am
Here. =-k
BC
B =2T and angle between M and B= 90
co -lcos 60° i-Isin 60°] =
||= (0.01z)2)sin 90° 0.25N-m
Note Here the angte 45" is given ust to confuse the students Mis along
negatve 2-direction (petpendcular to paper inwards) while B is in xy
plane. So, the angte between M and B ts 90* ot 45° So, far as orcty
magntude otof t Is congerned thete is no use of gvng 4S. But when the
direction of torque is desred then this angle rs used Because in that
tase you nrite, B e 2 cos 45i + 2 sin 45°i =
2 (i+ jlT
M
--)2 ll
and M=-(00 n)kA-m²
or = (i
tMB= (0.04 Win) (--i)
0 19
-i)
Torque on current carrying loop in a
Example 4.63 A wniform magnetic field of 3000 G is established
magnetic field alongthe positie z-direction. A rectangular loop of sides 10 cm
When a current carrying coil is placed in a magnetic field, and S cm carries a curent of l2 A. What is the torque on the
loop in the different cases soum in figure. What is the force in
the coil experiences a torquc.
each case? Which case corresponds to stable equilibrium?
Consider a rectangular current carrying coil PQRS having
Nturns and area A, when this coil is placed in a uniforn
ficld B, in such a way that the nornal (â) to the coil makes
an angle 0 with the direction of B. The coil experiences a

B
torque given by
|t = NBiA sin 9|
(a
In vector form t = Mx B
Special cases
(i) t is zero when = 0 i.e., when the plane of the coil
perpendicular to the field.
is
(ii) is maximum when = 90° i.e., the plane of the B B

coil is parallel to thc field =NBiA

di le)

Sol. Here, B = unifom magnetic field =3000 G along Z-axis

=3000× 10 T=0.3 T
A= area of tectangular loop
=lxh=l0x 5 =50 crm² =50x 10 m²
Torque on the loop is given by, t = AB sin0
Fig. 4.47 Current carrying loop at an angle 0 with magnetic field
where, is the angle between the normal to the plane of
the
Note loop and the direction of magnetic field.
1 Expression of torque is arolicable for all shapes (a) Here. 0 = 0°
2. Av's af rotaticn is parallel to . for laops relating freely in magnetic field t=0.3x 12x 50x 10x sin 90°= 1.8x 10 N-m
and acts along negative y-direction.
Example 4.62 A circular loop of radius t=M x B
R= 20 cm is placed in a uniform (b) 90°
magnetic field B = 2T in xyplane as :. =0.3 x 12% 50 x 10 x sin 90° =
1.8 x 10 N-m
shown in figure. The lop carries a and acts along Y"-axis or Y-axis.
current i= 1.0 A n the direction shoUn
in figure. Find the magnitude of torqque :. t=0.3x 12 x 50x 10x sin 90° 1.8 x 10* N-m
acting on the loop.
and acts along -x-direction.
 296) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

=
(d) Here, 0

= 0
Current sensitivity of the galvanometer is the deflection
T= BIA sin 0
per unit current flowing through it. It is given by,
(e) =180° (NAB
I,
Net force on a planar loop in a uniform magnetic field is
always zero, so force is zero in each case. Its unit is rad/A or div/A.
Case (d) corresponds to stable equilibrium M is aligned Voltage sensitivity is the deflection per unit voltage.
with B.
It is given by, Vg 0_NAB)!
The movingcoil galvanometer (MCG)
current sensitivity Vs =NABx, NAB (:V= IR)
k IR kR
a device which is based on the principle when a current
It is Current sensitivity
Voltage sensitivity
carrying coil is placed in a magnetic field it experiences a R
torque. Its unit is rad/V or div/V.
The MCG consists of a multi-turn coil free to rotate about a
vertical axis, in a uniforn radial nagnetic field. There a Exomple 4.64 The coil of a moving coil galvnometer has an
S effectiw orea of 5 x
cylindrical soft iron core to increase the sensitivity of the MCG. t
10m. is suspended in a magnetic
field 2x 10 Wbm.I{ he torsional constant of the
of
Torsion head
suspension fibre is 4 x 10 Nm deg', then find its current
Phosphox sensitivity in degree per microampere.
bronze strip
Concave miror Sol. Here, N=l. 5 x 10*n? A

Coi! B =2x 10 Wbm?, ke4x 10Nm deg

Soft irotn core
1o-2
Current sensitivity= M6A_Ix 2x 10x 5x

T
4x 10
x
=0.25 10 deg A- =0.25 deg t A-!
Hair spring
Levelling Example 4.65 A moving coil gavanometer has 100 turns and
each turns has as area of 2 cm. The magnetic field prauced
by the magnet is 0.01 T. The deflection in the galianometer
coil is O.5 rad when a current of 10 mA is passed throtugh it.
Fig. 4.48 NMoving coil galvanometer Find the torsional constant of the spiral spring.
The plane of the coil always remains parallel to the field k NABi
NAB-0
Sol. We have, ie
thereforc, 0 =90°. The deflecting torque has maximum value k0
t = NiAB
...(i) 100 x 2x 10 x 0.01 x 10x 10o

where, the symbols have their usual meaning, since the 0.05
field is radial by design, we have taken sin lin the
above expression for the torque. k=4.0x 10 Nm rad

As coil dellects, a restoring torque is set-up in the suspension Exomple 4.66 A current of 5.0 A is passed through the coil of
fibre. If a is the angle of twist the restoring torque is a galanometer having 500 tuns and each turn
has an veraq
area of3x 10* m.1f a torque of 1.5 Nm is required for this
Trest
=ka ...(ii) coil carrving same current to set it parallel to a magnetic field,
where, k is the torsional constant of the fibre. When
the then calculate the strength of the magnetic field.
coil is in equilibrium NBiA = ka i Ga Sol. The magnetic moment of a current loop,
a « =
x
M NiA=500x 0.5 3x 10 =0.075 A-m²
where, - k Aiso, T=Mx Bof =
MB sin 0
G= is the galvanometer constant.
NBA where, = angle between B and A.
This linear relationship between i and a makes the moving Here, 0 = 90°
coil galvanometer useful for curTent measurement and t=MB sin 90°;
detectiorn. 1.5
B==
M
=20T
0.075
Check point 4.3
7. A conducting loop carrying a current / is placed in a uniform 7. The force between two long parallet wires A and B carrying
magnetic field pointng into the plane of the paper as shown. Current is 0 004 Nm The conductos are 0.01 m apart. If
The loop will have a tendency to the current in conductor A is twice that of conductor B, then
the current in the conductor B woutld be
(a) 5A (b) 50 A (c) 10 A (d) 100 A
8. A metallic loop is placed in a magnetic field. If a current is
passed through it, then
(a) the nng wall feel a force of attraction
(b) the ing wil feel a torce of repulsion
(c) it wll move to and fro about its centre of gravity
(d) None ot the above
(a) contract
(b) expand 9. current carrying loop is placed in a uniform magnetic ield
A
(c) move towards +ve X-axos The torque acting on it does not depend on
(d) move towards -ve X•axis (a) shape of the koop (b) area of the loop
(c) number of turns in the loop (d) strength of the current
2. Two paraltel wires carrying currents in the same direction
attract each other because of 10. Current i is carned in a wire of length. If the vite is tuIned
(a) potentual dtference between thern into a cirçular coil, the maximum magnitude of torque in a
(b) mutual inductance between them given magnetic field B will be
(c) electic torce between them (a) (b)
(d) magnetc torce between them 2 2 4% 4
3. Two paralel conductor A and B of equal length carry 11. A circular coit of 20 turns and radus 10 cm is placed in
unitorm magnetic fiekd of 0.10 T normal to the plane of the
Currents I and 10, respectvely, is the same direction, then
coit. If the current in coil is 5 A, then the torque acting on the
(a) A and B vilt repcl cach other with same torce
col will be
(tb) A

arB witth attract each other ith same force

(a) 314 Nm (b) 3.14 Nm (c) 0314 Nm (d) zero
(c) A will attract B but 8 vill repel A
(d) A arng B will attract each other wth diffeent torcos 12. Tho pole pieces of the magnet used in a pivoted coil
galvanometer are
Two Ihin long parallel wores, separated by a distance d carry (a) plarne surfaces of a bar magnet
a current of (() ampore in the same drection. They will (b) plane sulaces of a hoOrse-shoe magnet
(a) attract each other vith a torce of uoi /2nd (c) cylindrcal surtaces of a bar magnet
(b) repel each other with a torce of (d) cylindrical surtaces of a orse-shoe magnet.
u
/2zd²
(c) attract each other with a force ofu2 nd 13. In a moving coil galvanometer, the deflection of the coil 0is
(d) repel each other with a force of ug/2 nd related to the electrical current iby the relation
5. Two long conductors, separated by a distance d cary
(a) i
tane (o) i «0
a (c) i 0 (d) i«Vo
Currents, and I, in the same direction They exert force
F

one 14. In order to increase the sensitivity of a moving

coil
on each other. Now the current in of them is increased
to wo times and its direction is reversed. The distance is galvanometer one should decrease
also increased to 3d. The new value of the force between (a) the strength of its magnet
them is (b) the torsional constant of its sUspension
F 2F -2F (c) the umber of turns in its coi
(a) (b) (C) ()
3 3 (d) thearea of its coil
6. In parallel wires A and B, 10 and 2 A Current
tvwO

respectively, is fowing in opposite directions The distance

15. Two galvanometers A and B require 3 mA and 5
respectvely to produce the same deflection of
mA
division. ,
between the wires is 10 cm. It the wire A is of infinite length Then
on the wire
and wire B is of 2 m length, then the force acting (a) Ais more sensitve than B
B will be (b) Bis more sensitive than A
x N
(a) 8
x
1oN (b) 4 10- (c) A and B are equally sensitive
A
(d) 8 x 10 N (d) sensitiveness of Bis 5/3 times of that of
(c) 4x 10-N
Chapter
exercises
A.) Taking it together
(Assorted questions of the chapter for advanced level proctice)

1. Biot-Savart law indicates that the moving electrons 6. Let E

denote the permittivity of the vacnum and to
(relocity v) produce a magnetic ficld B such that that of the permeability of the vacuum. If M= mass,
L. = length. =
tine and / = electric current, then
T
[NCERT Exemplar]
tal B is gKrplicular tu y the dimensional formula of the
(b) B is parallel to v
lal Eo =[M'TI) b) Eg = (M'Lr
(cl it oteys inverse cube law
lcl
=
(M.T td) Ho =[ML²T')
td) it is along the line joining the clectron and point of
observation
7. In a co-axial, straight cabe, the central conductor
2. A cufrent flows in a
conductor from east to west. and the outer conductor carry equal currents in
The dircction of the magnctic ficld at a point above oppasite directions. The nagnetic field is zero
the conductor is (a) outside the cable
la) towards noth tb) towards south (b) inside te inner conductor
(c) towards cast (d) towards west (c) inside the outer conductor
in between the two conductors
(d)
3, In a cyciotron, a charged particle |NCERT Exemplar]
(a) ndergoes acceleration all the time 8. A current carrying circular loxop of radius Ris placed
(b) speeds up between the dees bexause of the magnetic in the xy-plane with centre at the origin. Half of the
field loop withx> 0 is now bent, so that it now lies in the
speeds up in a dee
(c)
(di slows down within a dee and speeds up between dees
yzplane. Then, [NCERT Exemplar)
(a) The magnitude of magnetiv monient now diminishes
4. An electronis projected witlh uniforn velocity along (b) The magnetic moment does not change
the axis of a current carrving long solenoid. Which of (c) The magnitude of B at (0,0, z), : > R increases
the following is true? [NCERT Exemplar) () The magnitude of B at (0,0, 2), 2 >>Ris unchanged
(al The clectron will be accelerated along
the axis A particle of charge qand nass m moves in a circular
(b) Tie eletron path will b cireular about the axis 9.
(c) The cxtron will expcrience a force at 45° to orbit of radius r with angular speed o. The ratio of
thc axis the magnitude of its magnetic moment to that of its
and hence execute a helical path
(d) Te electro will continue to tove with uniform angular momentum depends on
veloity along the axis of the solenoid (a) oand (b) o, 9 and m
(c) q ad m (d) oand m
A proton is moving along the negative direction of
X-axis in a magnetir field direvted along the positive 10. The maximum energy of a deuteron coning out a
direction of Y-axis. The proton will be deflected cyclotro is 20 MeV. The maximun energy of proton
along the negative direction of that can be obtained from this accelerator is
(a) 10 MeV (b) 20 MeV
lal Xaxis (b) axis
fel Z-axs (
Noe of these
(c) 30 MeV (d) 40 Mey

Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges (299

 Chapter 04 Magnetic effect of current and moving charges (299

a
11. A long thin hollow metallic cylinder of radius Rlas 16. A wire of length 2 m carrying a current of I A is
current i ampere. The magnetic induction Baway Ikenl to forn a circlc. The magnetic moment of the
from the axis at a distance r from the axis varies as coil is (in A-m')
shown in
(a) 21 /2
(b) (c) n/4 (d) 1/n
B
17. A current carrying conductor of length I is bent into
two loops one by one. First loop has one turn of wire
(a) and the second loop has two turns of wire.
Compare the magnetic fields at the centre of the
loops.
(a)B =4B (b) 4B =B c) 2B -B (d) B =2B
B B
18. Two charged particles traverse identical helical paths
in a conupletely opposite sense in a uniforn magnetic
field B = B,k.
(NCERT Exemplarl
(a) They have egual z-cojonents ol moment
(b) They must have equal charges
(c) They necessarily represent a particle, anti-particle
pair
12. In hydrogen atom, an electron is revolving in the (d) The charge to mass ratio satisfv
orbit of radius 0.53 A with 66 x 10 rot/s. Magnetic
field proxuced at the centre of the orbit is
(al 0.125 Wb/m' (b) 1.25 Wb'm?
(c) 12.5 Wb/m? 19. When a certain lengtlh of wire is turned into one
td) 125 Wb/m?
circular loop. then the magnetic field produced at the
13. A particle of charge q and velocity v passes centre of coil due to some current flowing, is B,. If
undeflected through a space with non-zero electric
the sane wire is turned into three loops to make a
field E and magnetic field B. The undeflecting circular coil, then the magnetic inluction at the
conditions will hold, if centre of this coil for the same current will be
a) signs of both q and E are reversed
(a) b) 98 tc) 38
(b) signs of both q and Bare reversed (di 273,
(c) Both Band E are changed in magnitude 20. A long solenoidcarrving a current I is placcd with its
but keeping
the product of Batd E fixe axis verlical as shown in the figure. A particle of
(di Both Band Eare doubled in magnitude mass m and charge q is released fromn the top of
the
14. The magnetic field at the centre of a circular coil of solenoid. Its acceleration is (g being acceleration
due
radius r carrying current I is B,. The ficld at the to gravity)
centre of another coil of radius
2r carrying same
current I is B,. The ratio B, IB, is
la) L/2 (b)
(c) 2 (d) 4
15. Three long straight wires A, B
and Care carrying
current as shown in figure. Then, the
on B is directed resultant force (a) greater than g (b) lessthan g
(c) equal to g (d) Notte of these
21. A proton moves at a speed v= 2x 10"
region of constant magnetic field of magnitude
sin a
1A! 2A 3A B = 0.05T. The direction
of the proton when it
enters this field is 0 = 30° to
the fiekd. When you
look along the direction of
(a) towards A the magnetic field, then
the path is a circle projected on a plane
to the agnetic field. How far will the peredicular
(b) towards C
(c) perperndicular tothe plane of paper and outwatd proton move
(dl perpendicular to the plarne along the direction of B when two
of paper and inward projected circles
have been completed?
(a) 4.35 m (b) 0.20A m (c)
2.82 m (d) 2.41 n
300 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

22. An electric current i enters and leaves a uniform

circular wire of radius a through diametrically
opposite points. A charged particle q moving along
the axis of the circular wire passes through its centre
at speed v. The magnetic force acting on the particle
when it passes through the centre has a nmagnitude (7+ 1) (t (z-1)
4R 4nR
(a) qu (b) qv (R+ 1) (d) zero
2
2na 8xR
(c) qu () zero 27. Magnetic field produced at the point O due to
current flowing in an infinite wire shaped as shown
23. A particle of mass and charge q noves with a
m in the figure is
v
constant velocity along the positive x-direction. It
enters a region containing a uniform magnetic field B
directed along the negative z-direction, extending
from x =a to x =b. The minimum value of
required, so that the particle can just enter the region
x>bis
(a) qhB/m (b) qlb - a) B/m
(c) qaB/m (d) gtb + a) Br2m 3

24. A proton of mass I.67x 10-2 kg and charge

1.6x 109 C is projected in rvplane with a speed 4R 4rR
of 2x 10 m's at an angle of 60° to the Xaxis. If a (c
uniform nagnetic field of 0. 14 T is
applied along the
4R 2zR 4R 4nR
Y-axis, then the path of the proton is 28. Two identical coils carrying equal currents, have a
(a) a circle of radius 0.2 m and time period z x common centre and their planes are at right angles to
10s
(b) a cirele of radius 0.I m and titne period 2nx 10s each other. Find the ratio of the magnitudes of the
(c) a helix of radius 0.07 m and time period 0.5x resultant magnetic ficld at the centre ad the field
10s due to one coil alone.
(d) a helix of radius 0.14 n and time period I.0x 10s
(a) 2:1 (b) I: 1

25. An equilateral triangle of side length is forned from (c)

1: V2 (d) 2:1
a piece of wire of uniform resistance. The current !
is fed as slhown in the figure. Then, the magnitude of 29. A circular flexible loop of wire of radius r cafrying a
the magnetic field at its centre O is current l is placed in a uniforn magnetic fieldB
perpendicular to the plane of the circle, so that wire
comes under tension. If B is doubled, then tension in
the loop
(a) remains unchanged (b) is doublcd
(c) is halved (d) hecomes 4 times

30. An electron moves in a circular orbit witha uniforn

speed v. It produces a magnetic field B at the centre
of the circle. The radius of the circle is proportional
to
B
(a) (t (a) (b)
B
2zl 2ri
td)
(d) zero VB
2nl
26. An infinitely long conductor is bent into a circle as 31. Two wires of same length are shaped into a square
shown in figure. It carries a current I ampere and the and a circle. If they carry same current, then ratio of
radius of loop is R metre. The magnetic induction at the magnctic monent is
(a) 2: (b) n:2 (c) :4 (d) 4 :I
the centre of loop is
 Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges (301

32. Two particles X and Y having equal charges, after 37. Three long, straight and parallel wires carrying
being accelerated through the same potential curents are arranged as shown in figure. The force
difference, enter a region of uniform magnetic field experienced by 10 cm length of wire Qis
and describe circular path of radius R and R
respectivcly. The ratio of mass of X to that of Yis RI P

(a) 2 cm 10cm
R Rz

33. Two long thin wires ABCand DEF are arranged as

20 A 10A 30 A
shown in the figure. The magnitude of the magnetic
ficld at O is (a) 1.4 x towards the right
N
I0
(b) L.4 x 10 N towards the lcft
(c) 26x 10 N towards the right
(d) 2.6x 10" N towards the left
A
38. A current of 10 A flowing in a wire of length
is
1.5m. A force of 15 N acts on it when it is placed in
a uniforrm magnetic field of 2 T. The angle between
the magnetic field and the direction of the current is
(a) 30° (b) 45°
(c) 60° (d)

(a)
2W2zr
(d) zero 39. An ionised gas contains both positive and negative
4nr 2ar ions initially at rest. If it is subjected simultaneously
a
34. A circular conductor of uniform to an electric fickd along the +x-direction and
resistance per unit length, is magnetic ficld along the +z-direction, then
positive ions deflect towards
+
-direction and negative
connected to a battery of 4 V. (a)
ions --direction
The total resistance of the +-direction
(b) all ions deflect towards
conductor is 4 S2. The net (c) all ions deflect towards -direction
magnetic field at the centre of {d) positive iots deflect towards -y-direction and
negative
the conductor is ions towards + ydirection

2
(b)
a 3
(c) 2o (d) zero
40. A charged particle P leaves the origin with
at some inclination with the X-axis.
speed
There is a
parallel and V= V, strikes a
35. Figure shows, three long straight wires
P

uniform nagnetic field Balong the X-axis.

currents. Then, the value of
equally spaced with identical fixed target Ton the Naxis for minimum
a
to the other is T, if
force acting on each wire due B= Bo. Pwill also strike
b (a) B = 2B, v=2vo (b) B= 2B Vo =

(c) Both are correct (d) Both are wrong

a
coil of area A is in ficld Find
B.

41. The rectang

(b) F, >F; >F, the Z-axis when the .coil lies in the
(a) F, >F >F, the torque
position shown and carries current
a
(d) F, >F, >F
(c) F, > F, >F,
of equal length
36. A, B and Care parallel conductors
carrving currents I, land 21, respecuey Distance
between A and B is x. Distance Band Cis
B on A. F, is the
also x. F is the force exerted by
correct answer.
force exerted by Con A. Choose the

21

(a) IAB in negative Z-axis

(b) IAB in pxositive Z-axis
(c) 2LAB in positive Z-axis
(d) 214! in negative Z-axis
(a) F =2F; (b) F
=
2F (c) F=F; (d) F=-F;
302) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

42. In hydrogen atom, the clectron is making H, He and 0* are respectively, in the ratio
66x 105 rev/s around the nucleus in an orbit of 1:4:16 As a
result
radius 0.528 A. The magnetic moment (A-n²) (a) H' ions will be deflected most
will be (b) 0* ions will be deflected least
x (b) 1x 10-10 (c) He and (0* ions will suffer same deflection
(a) l
105
(c) Ix 10-21 (d) 1x 10o-" (d) Allions will suffer the same deflection
47. A battery is connected between two oints A and B
43. Two infinitely long conductors carrying equal on the circumference of a uniform condeting ring of
currents are shaped as shown in figure. The short
radius r and resistance R. One of the arc ABof the
sections are all of equal lengths. The point P is
ring subtends an atngle O at the centre. The value of
located symnetrically with respect to the two
conductors. The magnetic ficld at P due to any one
the magnetic field produced at the centre due to the
current in the ring is
conductor is B. The total fickd at Pis (al proportional to 2180°- 0)
th) inversely proportional to
r

e) zero, only if0= 1%)

(d) zero for all values of 9
48. A circular loop which is in the form of a major arc of
a circle is kept in the horizontal plane and a constant
magnetic ficld B is applied in the vertical direction
suc that the magnetic lines of forces go into the
plane. If Ris the radius of circle and it carries a
current Iin the clockwise direction, then thc force
on the lop will be

(a) zero (b) B

(c) V2 B (d) 2B

44. A particle of mass m and having a positive charge q

is projected from origin with speed v, alongthe
positive X-axis in a magnetic field B =-B,k, where
B, is a positive constant. If the particle passes
through (0, v. 0), then y is cqual to BIRtan c (b) 2 BIR cos (a /2)
(a (d my, (c) 2 BIR sin (a/2) (d) None of these
gB qB
49. Two protons are projected simultaneously from a
45. A 10O turns coil shown in figure carries a current of fixed point with the same velocity vintoa region,
2 A in a nagnetic field B= 0.2 Wb/n. The torque where there exists a uniform magnetic field. The
acting on the coil is nagnetic field strength at B and it is perpendicular to
the initial direction of v. One proton starts at time
Tm The
t=0 and another proton at t= separation
2B
N
between them at time t (where, m
and q are
gB
the mass and charge of proton), will be
approximately
0.32 N-m tending to rotate the side AÐ out of the page
(a)
mv
(b) 0.32 N-m tending to rotate the side AD into the page (a) 2 " 2
(c) 0.0032 N-m tending to rotate the side ADout of the page gB
(d 0.0032 N•m tending to rotate the side AD into the page (e
46. H". He and 0* ions having same kinetic energy q3 2qB
pass through a region of space filled with uniform
50. A disc of radius R rotates with constant angular
magnetic field B directed perpendicular to the velocity eo about its own axis. Surface charge density
velocity of ions. The masses of the jons of this disc varies as g = as, where ris the distance
 Chapter 04 Magnetic effect of current and moving charges (303

from the centre of disc. Determine the magnetic field 55. The coil of a moving coil galvanometer has an
intensity at the centre of disc. effective area of 4x 10- m'.It is suspended in a
la) HooR (b) oaoR} magnetic field of 5x 10*² Whm. If deflection in
6 the galvanometer coil is 0.2 rad when a current of
5 mA is passed through it, then
(a) torsional constat is 5 x 10 N-m rad
8 3
current sensitivity is 40 rad
A

(b)
51. A rigid circular loop of radius r and mass m lies in (c) torsional constant is 3 x l0 N-m rad
the xy-plane on a flat table and has a current i
flowing in it. At this pårticular place the earth's (d) current sensitivity is 40 deg A-!
magnetic field is B = B,i+ B,k. The value of i, so 56. A large metal sheet carries an electric current along
its surface. Current per unit length is
.
that the loop starts tilting is

zrB,
mg Magnetic field induction near the metal sheet is
nrB, (a) 24
2
52. Two circular coils and 2 are made from the same
1

wire but the radius of the Ist coil is twice that of the 2
2r2
2nd coil. What is the ratio of potential difference = 2A is
applied across them, so that the magnetic field at 57. Some current i

their centres is the same? flowing in a wire frame as

(a) 3 (b) 4 (c) 6 (di 2 shown in figure. The
Frame is a combination of
53. A circular and radius r is lying in a
loop of mass m two cquilateral triangles
horizontal (x-plane) table as shown in figure. A ACD and CDE of side 1 m.
uniform magnetic field B is applied parallel to It is placed in uniforn
X-axis. The current l in the loop, so that its one edge magnetic field B = 4T acting perpendicular to the
just lifts from the table, is plane of frame. Te magnitude of magnetic force
acting on the frame is
(a) 24 N (b) zero
(c)
16N (d) 8 N

58. A conducting stick of length 2L and mass m is

moving down a smooth inclined plane of inclination
60° with constant speed 5m/s. A current 2A is
flowing in the conductor perpendicular to the paper
inwards. A vertically upward magnetic field B exists
in space there. The magnitude of magnetic field B is

mg
al"
Rr'B nrB 2nrB mg!

54. A charged particle with specific charge (charge per

S)moves undeflected through a
unit mass I=
region of space containing mutually perpendicular
and uniforn clectric and magnetic fields E and B. 60
When the E field is switched off, then the particle
will mave in a particular path of radius (b)
(a)
la L
BS B V3 mg Vömg
ES (d 4L 2.
(c)
B B²S

304) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol.2

303 of 904
304) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

is moving with a velocity v,

=lim/s at a 63. A wire bent in the form of a regular polvgon of n
q
59. A charge
point in magnetic field and expericnces a force
a sides, is inscribed in a circle of radius a. IF i ampere
is the current flowing in the wire, then the magnetic
F=-j + 1k) N. If the charge is moving with a
field at the centre of the circle is
velocity v, = 2j nu/s at the sane point, then it
experiences a force F, qli - Ik) N. The magnetic
induction Bat that point is

(ch (-i +j -kIWb/m? (d)

i+j-ÁWb/m
60. A square frame of side m carries a current I.
1

Droduces a magnetic field Bat its centre. The same

current is passed through a circular coil having the
same perimeter as the square. The magnctic ficld at
the centre of the circular coil is B. The ratio B/B' is
(a) Ho tan tan
2na 2na
8 8\2 16 16
(al (c) 2 ni ni
Hp tan
=H tan (d)
2a
61. The magnetic field existing in a region is given by 64. A wires PQRS carrying a current I runs along thrce
cdges of a cube of side las shown in figure. There
exists a uniform magnetic ficld of magnitude B along
one of tlhe sides of the cubc. The magnitude of the
A square loop of edgeIand carrying current I is force acting on the wire is
placed with its edges parallel to the Xand Y-axes.
The magnitude of the net magnetic force R
experienced by the loop is
la) 2B,J! (b) zero (c) BJI (d) 4B,J!
62. Two straight infinitely long current carrying wires
are kept along Z-axis at the coordinates (0, a 0) and
(0,-4, 0) respectively, as shown in the figure. The
current in cach of the wire is cqual and along zero (b)
3 B (d) 2B
negative Z-axis (into the plare of the paper). 65. The magnetic field at the centre of square of side a is

R- stanas for resistance

of wire
R 2

2R

The variation of magnetic field on the X-axis will be (a (b) 2 Ho (d) zero
approximately 3ra 3 a
B 66. A straight roxi of mass m and length L. is suspended
from the identical springs as shown in figure.
The
(a) spring is stretched a distance X, due to the weight of
(b
the wire.

(c)

Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges (305

 Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges 305

The circuit has total resistance R. When the 71. A non-planar loop of
magnetic field perpendicular to the plane of paper is conducting wire carrying a
switched on, then springs are observed to extend current lis placed as shown
further by the same distance. The magnetic field in the figure. Each of the
strength is straight sections of the loop
2ngR mgR mR maR is of length 2a. The
(a) (b (d)
LE 21.E magnetic field due to this
67. A particle of specific charge qlm = nkg is loop at the point P(a, 0, a) in the direction
projected from the origin towards positive X•axis
with a velocity of 10 m/s in a uniforn magnetic ficld
B=-2kT. The velocity v of the particle after time
t=-swill be
6 72. A rectangular lxp consists of N closed wrapped
(a) (5i + 5/3 j) m/s (b) 10j ms turns and has dimensions a x b. The loop is hinged
(c) (543i + Sj) m/s
(d -10j m/s along the Y-axis. What is the nagnitude of the
torque exerted on the loop by a uniform magnetic
68. A charged particle enters into a uniforn magnetic ficld B = B, directed along the X-axis when current
field with velocity vo perpendicular to it, the length
in io in the direction shown. The torque acting on
of tnagnetie field is x = (V3/2) R, where R is the the loop is
radius of the circular path of the particle in the field.
The magnitude of change in velocity of the particle
when it comes out of the ficld is
(a) 2u (c) (d) vo
2

69. A proton moving with a constant velocity passes 37

through a region of space without any change in its

velocity. If E and B represent the clectric and
magnetic fields respectively. then this region of space
may have
(a)
4NiabB,j b) NabB,i
(a) E = 0, B = 0 (b) E = 0, B0 5 5
(c) E0, 0B
4Niabli ld) -2Ni,ahB,j
E
(d) 0,B0
70. Figure here shows three cases, in all cases the 3
circular path has radius r and straight ones are 73. A particle of charge -q and mass m enters a uniform
infinitely long. For same current, the magnetic field magnetic field B (perpendicular to paper inwards) at
at the centre P in cases I, 2 and 3 have the ratio Pwith a speed v, at an angle a and leaves the ficld
at Q with speed v at angle Bas shown in the figure.
Then,

(2 (3)

(-))
a(}(5-)) (a) a =p
(b) v=Vo
(c) PQ: 2mv, sin
a
2 By

the field for time (= 2m

(d) particle remains in (n- a)
Bg
74. A square coil of edge L having n turns carries a 75. A long straight wire along the Z-axis carriesa
current i. It is kept on a smooth horizontal plate. A current I in the negative z-direction. The magnetic
lnifotru magnetic field Bexists in a direction parallel vector field Bat a point having coordinates (x, y) in
=
to an edye. The total mass of the coil is M. What the z 0 plane is
should be the ninimum value of B for which the coil (as Hovi-x) +
will start tipping over? 2 ztx* +
v') 2 xtx )
My Mg yi)
al (b)
2riL
(c) Hdxj- (d)
Mri-yj)
Mg
2
ztx+ v') 2 nix* + y)
(d
4nil nil

B.) Medicalentrance special format questions

Assertion and reason 5. Assertion An a-particle and a deuteron having
safme kinetic energy enter in a uniform magnetic
Directions (Q. Nos. 1-20) These questions consist of tuo field perpendicular to the field. Then, radius of
statements euch linked es Assertion and Reason. While circular path of a-particle will be more.
ansuering these questions you are required to choose any
one of the following five responses Reason Im ratio of an c-particle is more than the I
(a) If both Assertion and Reason are tnue and Reason is the
cottect expianation of Assertion. ratio of a deuteron.
(b) 1f bot Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not 6. Assertion A charged particle is rotating in a
cutiect explnation of Assertion. circular path in uniform magnetic field. Then, plane
(c) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
of circle is perpendicular to the magnetic field.
(d) If Assertion is false but Reason is true.
botl Axsertion and Reason are false.
(e) If Reason Circular motion is a two-dimensional
motion.
1. Assertion Two infinitely long wires A and B carry
unequal currents both in inward direction. 7. Assertion In a uniform magnetic ficld B = Bk if
velocity of a charged particle is Voi at t = 0, then it
B
can have the velocity voj at some other instant.
Then. there is only one point (exluding the points at
infinity). where net magnetic ficld is zer. Reason In uniforun nagnetic field, acceleration of a
Reason That point lies between points A and B. charged particle is always zero.
8. Assertion If velocity of charged particle in a
2. Assertion When a charged particle moves
uniform magnetic field at some instant is (a,i - aj)
perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field then its
monent un renains constant. and at sone otlier instant is (b,i + b,j), hen
Reason Magnetic force acts perpendicular to the
velocity of the particle.
Reason Magnetic force cannot change velocity of a
3. Assertion If a charged particle is projected in a
charged particle.
region, where B is perpendicular to velocity of
projectinn, then the net force acting on the particle is 9. Assertion In non-uniform magnetic ficld speed of
a charged particle varies.
indepedent of its mass.
Reason Tie particle is performing uniform circular Reason Work done by magnetic force on a charged
mu particle is always zero.
motion and force acting on it is
10. Assertion Path of a charged particle in uniform
4. Assertion lfa charged article enters from outside magnetic field cannot be a parabola, if no other
in uniform magnetic field, then it will keep on forces (other than magnetic force) are acting on the
rotating in a cireular path. particle.
Reason Magetic lorce is always perpendicular to Reason For parabolic path, a constarnt acceleration is
velocity vector. required.
 Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges 307

11. Assertion A beam of electron can pass undeflected 18. Assertion Net torque in the current
a
through region of E and B. carrying loop placed in a uniform
Reason Force on moving charged particle due to magnetic field (pointing inwards) is
magnetic field may be zero in some cases. Zero.

12. Assertion If the pyath of a charged article in a Reason Magnetic moment (M) is inwards.
region of unifornm clectric and magnetic field is not a 19. Assertion A charged particle is rotating in a circle.
circie, then its kinetic energy may rennain constant. Then, magnetic ficld (B) at centre of circe and
Reason In a combined electric and magnetic ficld magnetic monent (M) proxluced by motion of charged
region, a moving charge cxperiences a net force particle are parallel to each other.
F =gE + q (vx B), where synbols have their usual
meanings.
13. Assertion Magnetic field (B) and clectric ficld (E)
are present in a region. Net force on a clharged
particie in this region is zero, if Reason Mand B are always parallcl to cach other.
EBx V
20. Assertion Current sensitivity of a galvanometer is
Reason has the dimensions of velocity. directly proportional to the current throngh the coil.
Reason Voltage sensitivity is inversely proportional
14. Assertion Three infinitely long current carrying to voltage.
wires have equal currents and they are equally
spaced. The magnitude of magnetic frce on all tlree Match the coluMns
is same.
1. A charged particle enters in a uniform magnetic field
perpendicular to it. Now, match the following two
colunus.
ColumnI Column II
AI Spevd of the paticle Ipl s cOLst:ant
Reason Net force on wire-2 is zero. IB) Veloity of thhe particle 6 not custant
15. Assertion Upper wire siown in figure is fixed. At a Acceleration of the particl r) s naximum
certain distance x, ower wire can remain in equilibrium.
Fore on the partic le is mininnum

2. Four particles a-particle, deuteron and electron and

a ion enter in a transverse magnetic iekd
C

perpendienlar to it with sane kinetie energv. Their

Reasorn The above equilibrium of lower wire is paths are as shown in figure. Now, match the
stable equilibrium. following (wo columns,
16. Assertion A flesible wire loop of irregular shape
carrying current when placed in a uniforn external
magnetic fielkd avquires a circular shape.
Reason For a given perimeter circular slhape is
having the greatest area.
17. Assertion At the centre of a circular current
carrying kop 4,), there is an infinitely long straight
current carrying wire l,} perpendicular to the plane Columnl Column II
of the circle. Then, inagnetic force of attraction
between two is zer0. (A) Ieuteun
Reason Magnetic field of I, at centre is iwards, uparticle ath-2
parallel to l,. Elecron atl
CH path-4
308 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

3. A charged particle is rotating in uniform circular 4. A square current carrying loop abcd is placed ncar an
motion in a uniform magnetic field. Let r = radius of infinitely long another current carrying wire ef. Now.
circle, v z speed of particle, K = kinetic energy, match the following two columns.
a= magnitude of acceleration. p = magnitude of
linear nmomentum. I =a =specific charge and
o= angular speed. Then, match the following two
columns.

ColumnI Column II
1!
(A) vis doubled p
rwill become two times
(B)
11
Kis doubled o will becane two times Column Column I!
If p is doubled a will become two times
(A Net force on bx atd da (p) zero
(C (r
Net force on ab and cd q)
TON-7era
D)
If a is doubled None lkwp abed ) tightwars
Net force ot conplete
D) Net force on ab lcftwards

C) Medicalentrances' gallery
(Collection of questions asked in NEET & various medical entrance exams)
1. A long wire carTying a steady current is bent into a 4. A long straight wire of radius a carries a steady
circular loop of one turn. The magnetic ficld at the current I. The current is uniformly distributed over
centrc of the loop is B. It is then bent into a circular its cross-section. The ratio of the magnetic fields B
coil of n turns. The magnetic field at the centre of
and B' at radial distances and 2 a respectively,
this coil of n turns will be [NEET PHASE II 2016] 2
(a) nB (b) n'B from thc axis of the wire is [NEET 2016
(c) 2rnB (d) 2n'B 1
(b) (c) 4
2. An electron is moving in a circular path under the 2 4
influence of a transverse magnetic field of 5. A wire carrying current I has
3.57x10 T. If the valuc of e/m is 1.76x 10"" C/kg, the shape as shown in
the frequency of revolution of the electron is adjoining figure. Linear parts
[NEET PHASE II 2016] of the wire are very long and
la) GHz1
(b) 1C00 MHz parallel to Naxis while
(c) 62.8 MHz (d) 6.28 MHZ
semicircular portion of radius
3. A square loop ABCD carrying a current i, is placed R is lying in yz-plane.
near and coplanar with a long straight conductor XY Magnetic field at point O is
(CBSE AIPMT 201s
carrying a current I, thc net force on the loop will be
[NEET 2016] (al B Ho (ni +2k (i -2k)
(b) B --H
4n R 4n R
(c)
B=Ho (i +2k) (d) B
4n R
=Hoii
4n R
-2k)
6. An electron moving in a circular
orbit of radius r makes n rotations
per second. The nagnctic field
produced at the centre has
(a)Holi magnitude
(b)
iL3n (CBSE AIPMT 2013]

la) (b) zero

2nr
2n 37
(d)
2r
 Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges (309

7. Consider the circular loop having current i and with field and the particles describe circular paths of radii
central point 0. The magnetic field at the central R, and R, respectively. The ratio of the masses of A
point O is (AIIMS 2015) and B is [WB JEE 2015)
(a) R,/R (b) R/R; tc) (R,/R (d) (R,/R
2R
13. There is a ring of radius r having linear charge
density and rotating with a uniform angular
velocity o. The magnetic field produced by this ring
at its own centre would be [UP CPMT 2015]

acting downward (b)

Ho acting downward (a)
3zR 12R 2-Mo 2 2 o
acting downward (d) acting upward 14. Two particles A and B having equal charges + 6 C
7R after being accelerated through the same potential
8. A proton is projected with a speed of 3 x 10° m/s difference, enter in a region of uniform magnetic
horizontally from east to west. An unilorn magnetic field and describe circular paths of radii 2 cm and
field of strength 2 x 10 T exist in the vertically 3 cm, respectively. The ratio of mass of A to that of B
is (Manipal 2015]
upward direction. What would be the acceleration of (a) 1/3 1/2
(b) 4/9
(c) (d) 9/5
proton? [UK PMT 2015]
(a) 1L6 x 10' m/s? 15. A proton beam enters a magnetic field of 10* Wb/m
(b) 17.4 x 1' m/s
x normally. If the specific charge of the proton is
tc) 5.8 L' m/s? (d) 2.9x 1d' m/s?
10" C/kg and its velocity is 10 m/s, then the radius of
9. The magnetic field at the centre of a circular coil the circle described will be [KCET 2015)
carrying current I ampere is B. If the coil is bent into (a) 100 m (b) 0.1 m (c) 1 m (d) 10 n
smaller circular coil of n turns, then its magnetic ficld 16. A cyclotron is used to accelerate (KCET 2015]
at tlie centre is B'. The ratio between B and B is (a) Onlynegatively charged particles
(Kerala CEE 2015l neutron
(b)
(a) 1:1 (b} n:l (c) Both positivcly and negatively charged particles
(c) n:1 (d) 2n :1 (d) Only positively charged particles
le) n + 1):1
17. Two parallel beams of positron moving in the same
10. Equal currents are passing through two very long and direction will (Manipal 2015)
straíght parallel wires in the same direction. They (a) not interact with each other
will (Guj. CET 2015) (b) repel each other
(a) attract cach other (c) attract each other
(th) repel each other (d) be deflected normal to the planc containing two beams
fc) lean towards each other
18. Two concentric coils cach of radius cqual to 2r cm
ld) Ncither attract nor repcl cach other are placed at right angles to cach other. If 3A and 4A
11. The variation of magnetic ficld B) are the currents flowing througl the two coils,
due to circular coil as the distance respectively. The magnetic induction (in Wb/m') at
X varies is shown in the graph. the centre of the coils will be (KCET 2015]
Which of the following is false? (a) 5 x 10-5 b) 12x 10-3
(CG PMT 2015)
(c) 7x 1o-5 (d) 10-$
(a) A
Points and A' are knowI as pxoints
of zero curvatue 19. The conducting loop in the form of a circle is placed
(b) B varies linearly with X at points A
in a uniforTm magnetic field with its plane
atd A' perpendicular to the direction of the field. An emf
0 at points A and A willbe induced in the loop, if [WB JEE 2015]
dt
(a) it is translated parallel to itself
(d)
d'B points A
andA' (b) it is rotated about one of its diameters
,2Oal (c) it is rotated about its own axis which is parallel to the
12. Two particles A and Bhaving equal charges, after field
(d) the loop is deformed from the original shape
being accelerated through the same potential
difference enter into a region of uniform magnetic
310 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

20. A solenoid has length 0.4 cm, radius I cm and 26. 1fthe velocity of charged particle has both
400 turns of wire. If a current of 5 A is passed perpendicular and parallel components while moving
through this solenoid, then what is the magnetic field through a magnetic field, then what is the path
inside the solenoid? [KCET 2014) followed by a charged particle? [KCET 2014]
x
(a) 6.28 10T (b) 628x 10T (a) Circular (b) Elliptical (cl Linear (d) Helical
(c) 628x 10T (d) 6.28 x 10T 27. A particle with charge q is moving along a circle of
21. A toroid having 200 turns carries a current of 1A. radius R with uniform speed v. The associated
The average radius of the toroid is 10 cm. The magnetic monent u is given by [EAMCET 2014)

magnetic field at any point in the open space inside (b) -qvR
4
the toroid is (Kerala CEE 2014] 1
(a) 4x 1o-T (b} zerO
(d) 3 x
(b) 0.5x10T 10T
(e) 2 x 28. A charged particle of mass m and charge q moves
10T along a circular patth of radiusr that is perpendicular
22. When a proton is released from rest in a room, it to a magnetic field B. The time taken by the particle
starts with an initial acceleration a, towards west. to complete one revolution is (UK PMT 2014)
When it is projected towards north with a speed vo it 2urnq
moves with an initial acceleration 3a, towards west. (a)
B m
The electric and magnetic fields in the room are 2nqB 2%m
(NEET 2013} gB
4t west, 2mau
a) 2rmap down
west,
evo e 29. Magnetic induction produced at the centre of a
circular loop carrying current is B. The magnctic
(c) east,
3mag
up (d) P
east, 3maa dowN moment of the loop of radius R is
evo
(where, H = permeability of free space)
23. The magnetic field due to a
current carrving circular [MHT CET 20141
loop of radius point on the axis at a
3 cm at a BR? 2zBR BR? 2xBR²
(a) (b (c)
distance of 4 cm from the centre is 54 T. What will 2 Tuo 2nu0
be its value at the centre of the loop? (UK PMT 2014)
(a) 200 T (b) 250 uT ()125T (d) 75uT 30. In cyclotron, for a given magnet, radius of the
semicircle traced by positive ion is directly
24. Two identical long conducting wires AOB and COD proportional to (where, v = velocity of positive ion)
are placed at right angle to cach other, with one MHT CET 2014)
above other such that O is their common point for (a) (b) (c) (d)
the two. The wires carry I, and I, currents,
respectively. Point Pis lying at distance d from 0 31. When a magnetic field is applied on a stationary
electron, then it (Kerala CEE 2014)]
along a direction perpendicular to the plane
(a) remains statioary
containing the wires. The magnetic field at the point
(b) spins about its own axis
Pwill be (CBSE AIPMT 2014)
(c) moves in the direction of the field
a) (b) +
1) (d) moves petpendicular to the direction of the field
2rd (e) moves opposite to the direction of the field

(c) -) 32. An clectron in circular orbit of radius 0.05 nm

a
2rd performs 10" rev/s. The magnetic moment due to
25. A proton of mass m and charge q is moving in a plane
this rotation of clectron is (in A-m). (WB JEE 2014)
with kinetic energy E. If there exists a uniforn (al 2.16x 10-23 (b) 3.21 x 10-2
magnetic field B. perpendicular to the plane motion, lc) 3.21 x 10-24 (d) 1.26 10-2)
x

the proton will move in a circular path of radius

V2lim
(WB JEE 2014] 33. A circular coil of radius 10 cm and 100 tums carries
(a 2Em a current A. What is the magnetic moment of the
1

q3 qB coil? (KCET 2014|

VEm J2E la) 3.142x 10' A-m? (b) 10 A-n?
(c d (c) 3.142 A-m (d) 3 A-m
2gB q
 Chapter 04
:
Magnetic effect of current and moving charges 311

34. Two thin long conductors separated by a distance d

, 40. A proton and helium nucleus are shot into a
carry currents and I, in the same direction. They magnetic field at right angles to the field with same
exert a force F on cach other. Now, the curent in kinetic energy. Then, the ratio of their radii is
one of them is increased to Iwo times and its [KCET 2013)
direction is reverscd. The distance is also increased (a) 1:1 tb) 1:2 (c) 2: I (d) 1:4
to 3d. The new value of force between them is 41. Two charged particles have charges and masses in
(UK PMT 2014] the ratio 2:3 and 1:4 respectively. If thev enter a
2/ uniform magnetic ficld and move with the sane
(a) -2/ 3 3 velocity, tlen the ratio of their respective time
35. A charged particle experiences magnetic force in the perioxls of revolution is |Kerala CEE 2013)
presence of magnetic field. Which of the following (a) 3:8 (b) 1:4 (c) 3:5 (d) 1:6
statement is correct? [KCET 2014) le) 2:5
(a) The particie is moving and magnetic field is 42. A metal roxl of length Ieuts across a uniforn
perpendicular to the velocity magnetie fieid B with a velocity v. If the resistance of
(b) The particle is moving and nagnetic field is parallel to
the velocity the circuit of which the rod forms a part is r, then
(c)
The particle is stationary and magnetic field is the force required to move the rod is [Kerala CEE 2013]
perpendicular to the velcity B
(b
Blv
(c)
B'h B'
(d) The particle is stationary and magnet ic field is parallel
to the velocity
(e)
36. The ratio of magnetic dipole monent of an electron r
of charge e and masS m in Bohr's orbit in hydrogen current of 2 A is made to flow through a coil
atom to its angular momentum is [MHT CET 2014)
43. A
which has only one turn. The magnetic ficld
m 2m
(a) (b) (c) (d) produced at the centre is 4n x 10 Wb/m². The
e
radius of the coil is [MP PMT 2013]
37. A wire of length L metre carrying a current I ampere (a) 0.000I m (b) 0.01m
is bent in the form of a circle. The magnitude of the (d) 0.001 m
lc) 0.1n
Imagnetic monent is [EAMCET 2014]
LI
44. A lo1g straight wire is carrying a current of 12 A.
(a)
4
(c) (d) The magnetic field at a distance of 8 cm is
4n 47 luo = 4nx 10- NA') U&K CET 2013]
38. a
A long conducting wire carrying current I is bent at la) 2x 10 Wb/m (b} 3x 10 Wb/m'
120°(see figure). The magnetic field Bat a point P on
(c) 4 x 10 Wb/n (d) 4 x
the right bisector of bending angle at a distance d 10Wh/m
from the bend is 45. The magnetic field at a point on the axis ol a long
(u, is the permeability of free space) (MP PMT 2014) solenoid having 5 turns per cm length when a current
of 0.8 A flows through it is U&K CET 2013]
(a) 5.024 x 10 Wh/m? (b) 6.024x 10-% Wn
d, (c) 7.024x 10Wb/m (d) 8.024 x 10 Wb/m

46. In the diagran, I, 72 are

the strength of the currents
ta (d'
in the loop and straight
2nd 2rd V3zd 2zd conductors respectively.
a magnetic field (NEET 2013] 0A = AB = R. The net
39. A current loop in magnetic lield at the centre
(a) experiences a torque whether the field is uniform or
non-uniform in all orientations Ois zero. Then, the ratio of
(b) can be in quilibrium in onc oricntations the currents in the loop and B
(c) can be euitibrium in two orientations, both the tlhe straight conductor is
[KCET 2o13]
equilibrium states are unstable
(d) can be in equilibrium in two orientations, one stable (b) 2. (d)
while the other is unstable 2%
312 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol.2

47. The adjacent igure shows, distance nmoved by proton in the X-direction during
the crosS-Section of a long the period of one revolution in the yzpiane will be
rod with its length (mass of proton = 1.67 x 102 kgl JAMU 2012]
perpendicular to the plane of (a) 0.033 m (b) 0.136 m c) 0.157 m (d) 0.23G m
the paper. It carries constant 53. A planar coil having 12 turns carries 15 A current.
current flowing along its The coil is oriented with respect to the uniform
length. B,. B,, B, and B, magnctic field B = 0.2i T such that its directed area
respectively, represent the is A 0.04i m. The potential eneryy of the coil in
magnetic ficlds due to the current in the rod at points the givern orientation is [AMU2012|
1,2. 3 and 4 lving at different separations from the (a) 0 (b) + 072 J fc+1.44 J fdi -1.44J
centre ), as shown in the figure. Which of the
54. A current ianpere flows along the inner conductor
following shall holkd tne? [AMU 2012)
of a co-axial cable and retuns along the outer
(a) B > B, z 0 (b) B, >
B, 0 conductor of the cable., then the magnetic induction
(e) B -B, = B, 0 (d) B, >
B, 0 at any point outside the conductor at a distance
r metre from the axis is
48. Two straight wires each 10 cm long are parallel to JCECE 2012)
one another and separated by 2 cm. When the (a) o (b) zerO
r
current lowing them is 30 A and 40 A 4n
respectively, then the force experienced by either of 55. Two parallel long wires catrv euirrents i, and i, with
the wires is I&K CET 20131 i > ip. When the currents are in the sanne directiorn,
x then the magnetic ficld midway between the wires is
(a) 1.2 10N (b) 12 x 0N 10 uT.When the direction of i, is reversed, then it
(c) IL.2x 10N (d) 10.2 x 10 N
becomes 40 T. Then, ratio of i, i, is UCECE 2012)

49. A conductor of length 5 cm is moved parallel to itself ta) 3:4 () 5:3 (c) 7:1! (d) 11:7
a
56. A charged particle with velocity 2x 10 msl
with a speed of 2 m/s, perpendicular to a uniform
magnetic field of 101 Wb/m'. The induced emf passes undeflected through lectrie field and
generated is &KCET 2013) magnetie ields in mut ually perpendicular directions.
x The agnetic fiekl is 1.5 T. The magnitude of
(a) 2 10v (b) 1x 10
electrie field will be [Karnataka CET 2013]
x
(c) l
10v (d) 2x 10y lal I.3 10'NC-!
x
{b) 2x 10' NC-!
N

one metre length carries a constant fc) 3x 1o' fdh 1.33 x 10'NC
50. A wire of
current. The wire is bent to form a circular loop. The 57. Two sinilar coils of radius R are Iving concentricaliy
magnetic field at the centre ol this loop is B The with their planes right angles to cach other. Thc
satme is Iow bent to forn a circular loop of snaller current llowing in them are l and 21, respectively,
radius having four turns. The magnetic field at the The resultant magnetic fied induction at the centre
centre of this new loop will be DIIU 2012] will be (CBSE PMT 2012)
(a) (b) 4B (d) 16B (a) (b)
4 2R 2R 2R
51. proton is moving in a uniform magnetic fielkd B in a
A 58. When an eleetron bean jasses throngh an electric
circular path of radius a in a direction perpendicular field they gain kinetic energy. Ifthe same cicctron
to Z-axis along which field Bexists. Calculate the bean passes through a magnetic ficld, then their
angular monentun. If the radius isa and charge on (BHU 2012]
proton is e. IManipal 2012| (a) energy and momentum both ramain unchanged
(b) potential energy inieases
e
B

la) (b) eB'a (c) momentun increas(s

(d) kintic ehergy increases
(c) a'eB (d) oeB
59. If a
steel wire of length I and nagnetic moment Mis
52. The magnetic field in a certain region of space is Ixent into a semicircular are,
given by B= 8.35x 10 iT. A proton is shot into the the new magnetic
Imoment is
UCECE 2012)
the ficld with velocity v = (2x 10i+4x 10°j) m/s.
(a) Afx I 2M
The proton follows a helical path in the fickd. The (c) (cl) M
 Answers
heck point 4.1
1.(c) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4.(c) S. (d) 6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (b) 10. (C)
11.(c) 12. (a) 13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (d) 16. (a) 17. (b) 18.(d) 19. (d) 20. (

heck polnt 4.2

1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (c) S. (b) 6. (a) 7.(d) 8. (a) 9. (a) 10. (b)
11.(d) 12. (c) 13. (b) 14. (b) 15.(b) 16. (a) 17. (a) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (al

heck point 43
1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (d) 6. (a) 7.(c) 8. (d) 9. (a) 10. (c)
11. (d) 12. (d) 13. (b) 14. (b) 15. (a)
L
Taking it together
1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (c) 6.(c) 7. (a) 8.(a) 9. (c) 10. (d)
11. (a) 12.(c) 13.(c) 14. (c) 15.(a) 16. () 17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (b) 20. (c)
21. (a) 22. (d) 23. (b) 24. (c) 25. (d) 26. (a) 27.(d) 28. (c) 29. (b) 30. (c)
31. (c) 32. (c) 33. (d} 34. (d) 35. (b) 36. (c) 37. (c) 38. (a) 39. (c) 40. (a)
41.(b) 42.(<) 43. (a) 44, (d) 45. (a) 46. (ac) 47, (d)
48. (c) 49. (b) 50. (b)
51. (b) 52. (b) 53. (b) 54. (d) 55. (ab) S6. (b) 57. (a) S8. (c) 59. (a) 60. (b)
61. (c) 62. (d) 63. (b) 64. (c) 65. (b) 66. (b) 67. (a) 68. (d) 69. (a,b,d) 70. (a)
71.(d) 72. (a) 73. (a,b,cd) 74. (b) 75. (a)

Medical entrance special format questions

3.

Assertion and reason

1.(b) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (d) 5. (e) 6. (b) 7.(c) 8.(c) 9. (d) 10. (b)
11. (b) 12. (b) 13. (b) 14. (d) 15.(c) 16. () 17. (a) 18.(3) 19. (c) 20. (b)

Match the columns

1. (A p, B
-*q.C-qD *44) 2. (A ->qB -p:C-+s:D ) 3. (A +p. B -+q;C-p:D-+)
4. (A p. s;
B+q. C4.s, Dqs)

C Medical entrances' gallery

1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (b) 5.(c) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8.(c) 9. (c) 10. (a)
11. (d) 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (a) 16. (4) 17. (c) 18. (a) 19. (b) 20. (b)
21. (b) 22. (b) 23.(b) 24.(d) 25. (b) 26. (d) 27. (c) 28. (d) 29. (b} 30. (c)
31. (a) 32. (d) 33. (c) 34. () 35.(a) 36. (d) 37. (c) 38. (d) 39. (d) 40. (a)
41. (a) 42. (a) 43. (c) 44. (b) 45. (a) 46. (d) 47. (d) 48. (a) 49. (c) 50. (d)
51.(c) 52. (c) 53. (d) 54. (b) 55. (b) S6. (c) 57. (3) 58. (a) 59. (a)
Hints and
explanations
Check point 4.] 11. (6) Magnetic field at the centre of arc is given by
3. (c) Magnetic field at distance r ncar a straight current Ho Oi
B:
carrying wire is given by 2 R 8Rh
9. (b) Current proxiuced in wire,
47 r
100 xe
B

B, B, e
i100
B, 28 Magnetic field at the centre of circular jath
4. (c) According to the question,
4
..i
o x
200 x L.6 x 10-19
=10"0
and -01o ...(iü) 4x 0.8
10. () The ditection of magnetic field produced due to both
On dividing Eq (i) by Fq (i). we get semicircular parts will he perpendicular to the paper and
inwards.

Also,
Solving this cquation, we get

12. (a) The magnetic ficld at the centre 0

Bo n B + B,
5. (à From Flcming's right-hand rule, the direction of
current is towards West. Hd2*-20| sin 0 +
sin 9)
2R 2n
N

W
HJ-0.
2R Az (R cos 0)
(2 sin 0)

Hfn-0+
2aR
tan 0)

6. (a) Along the line X =Y, magnetic fields due to two wires at O is is given by
will be equal and 13. (d) Magnetic field induction
oppsite.

7. (b) Magnetic field at the centre of coil is.

B
2r
8. lc) Magnetic field at the centre of circular coil of Nturns is B(Magnctic ficld due to whole circle)
given by

BVnx Io x 10Ox 01
=4 nx 10T
-3()34,d
4 2R, 8R
2r 2x 5x 10-2
 Chapter 04 Magnetic effect of current and moving charges 315

14. (c) Magnetic ficld duc to a ring having n turns at a distance Check point 4.2
x on its axis is given by
2*nir?
1. () On static charge, there is no effect of magnctic ficld, so
electron temains stationary.
4 n (r+22 2. (c) Path is circular when vl BorvB=0.
mu
B
3. (a) Radius,

15. (d) Ratio of magnetic field at the centre of a current mm

For clectron,
carrying coil and at a distance a from the centre is eB

Here, 4. (c) Radius of circular path of charged particie is given by

m
p

Since, electron and proton both have same momentum,

16. (a) According to the question, therefore the circular path of oth will have the same radits,
5. (b) As, F, = F# qf = By
2(x+ R²r2 82R E= By

1 Vm
6. (a) Radius, r =
8R
(r²+ R²2 Ba
=
(w?+R²? 8R V4,VI21:l:42
or x+R'= AR?
2TT
x=3R 7. (d) Work done by magnetic force is zero.
17. (6) Supposc the coils arc like, 8. (a) Radius of circular path of an alpha particle,
V2kim
0.3 A or
Acm Bg
Kx m (for samne radius)

0.2À
9. (a) For charged particle in uniform magnetic field, time
cm
2
period is given by

qB

At 0, ql3
Frequency, v =
.H0.2) ,o 2rm
212) 20 10. (6) When charge particke move in circular path into a
B, - Po0.3)_3u region of magnetic field, then time period of charged
2 Rm
2(4) 80 particle
is given by,T
gB
=
Net magnetic field, B, -B -B, -Aa T«m (o and Bate satne)
20 80
.. Time period of proton >
80 Time period of clectron.
80
= 2nm or
11. (d) Time period of charged particle is, T T is
18. (d) The magnetic ficld, B = or B
Bq
2R 2R
independent of r.
Number of turns will become two tines while radius
J2 Km
remains half. Radius of particle, r
=

12. (c)
Bq
19. (d) Inside the rod, B
o r and outside it B«-. 2Km or Aa
B'q
Thus, graph (d) is cotrect option.
316 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol.
2

13. (a) Lorentz fore, F

=F, +F, =q E+q{vx B)
3. (b)
Two parallel conductor A and Bof equal
length carry
q(E +vx B) currents I and 10, respectively is
the same dircction, then
14. (b)
Velocity is in xplune and magnetic field A and B attract cach other with same
along 2-axis. force.
Therefore, path of the electron will be a circle. Magnetic 4. (c) Force per unit length.
force cannot change the speed of a particle.
15. (b) Radius of helical path taken by proton F_Po.22
bean
Mr sin 60
(167x |0x (4x 10) sin 60° F_Mo 2i
Bq 03 x L6× 101 4n d (i=4=)
=0.012 m F_Mo2Ho
16. (al For charged partice on circular path (attractive)
2n d
mu 5. (d Force between two conductors,
=quB
m
Fe
When is changed to 2
and d is changed to 3d.
For proton. F2)4).2F
3d
R As direction of current is reversed so,
F= -
2F/3.
qB
For deuteron, 6. (a) F
=
ill
-
2)2)2x10) ao - 8x 10 N
0.1
V2 m
7. (c) Force per unit length,
qB
R

R "=2
m, Given, i, = 2ig

2x10
R =2R, (0.004) = -2)
0.01
19. (a) Radius of the cireular path, r= ia 10 A
,m =
10. (c) Torque, NiAB =lx ix nxB
4m, 2x224 2ar =L r=
1x3 1 3

2rr
20. (al Frequency of tevolution, f= Bq
2zm
As q is sane for all given garticles, f « Mass of Li' is
11. () Torque acting on the coil is given by
maximum, therefore frequency will be minimum. T= NilBA sin
Check point As, magnetic field is normnal to plane of coil.
43 So, 0= 0

1. (b) Applving Fletning's left-hand

rule, if magnetic field is
12. () The pole pieces of the magnet used in a pivoted coil
perpendicular to paper inwards
atd current in the loop is galvanometer are cylindrical surfaces of a horse-shoe
cockwise, the nagnetic foce Fon magnct.
each elenent of loop is radially 13. (6) The electrical current in moving coil galvanometer
outwards and hus a tendency
to expand outwards.
NAB
Also, when a current carrying loop placed in uniform
nagnetic ficld, then net force on it is zero and luop cannot
14. (6) We have sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer
Iave trarnslation motion.
2. (h The parallel wires carrying cuIrents in the same S=:NAB
dircction attract each other because magnetic forces on the
(wo wires act towards each other. where, Cis the torsionai constant of its suspension.
 Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges 317

In order to increase the sensitivity of a moving coil 11. (a) For hollow metallic cylinder, magnctic ficld inside is
galvanorncter onc should decrcase the torsional constant of zero while, outside and magnetic ficld is inverscly
suspension. proportional to distance from centre of cvlinder.
B,, =0
5. (a) Sensitivity, S

Bd ...(1)
SA 2#r
Sa53 S>Sn Eqs. (i) and lii) botth are shown by graph ta).
S iA
S
12. (c) Magnctic fcld produce at the centre of the orbit.
)Taking it together
1. (a) In Biot-Savart's law, nagnetic field B|| i l xrand id 2n lqv)
BHo
due to flow of electron is in opposite direction of v and by 4n
direction of cross product of two vectors, 4nx 10° x
2x 3.14x 1.6 x 10-1
x
6.6 x 10

BIv 41x 0.53 x 10-10

2. (a) The direction of current is shown in the figure.
12.5 Wbm2
B
= B, Ho
14. () We have,
B
H,
2r 4r

According to Fleming's left-hand rule, direction of 15. Macnetic fotce on Bfrom both the wires is towards A.
magnetic ficld produced will be towards north.
16. (d) Given, 2nR =2.0
3. ta) The charged particle urndergoes acceleration as
(6) speeds up between the dees because of the oscillating m
clectric ficld and
(i) speed remain the same inside the dees because of the M= iA t) (zR²)
magnetic field but direction undergoes change
continuously.
4. () Due the magnetic force, electron is projected with
uniform velocity along the axis of a current carrying long 17, (a) In first case
-
solenoid, F- evB sin180° = 0 0 = 09 as magnetic field
and velocity are parallel. The electron will continue to
move with unifon velocity along the axis of the solenoid.
At centre, B
Force, F, =q(vx 2;
5. (c) ': B)

" proton
A
is moving along the negative direction of In second case
X-axis in a magnetic field directed along the positive
direction of Y-axis.
B= (: there are 2 turns)
So, proton will be deflected along the negative direction of 2r,
Z-axis.
8. la) The direction of magnetic moment of circular loop of B_44=4 B'=4B
B
radius R is placed in the ry-plane is along z-direction and
given by M= I (nr when halí of the loop with x >0 is 18. (d) For given pitch d correspond to chiarge particle, we
now bent, so that it now lies in the yz-plane, the magnitudes have,
of rmagnetic moment of each semicircular loop of radius R lie 2tv cos 0
in the xyplane arnd the yz-plane is M = I trr')/4 and the constant
qB
direction of magnetic fhoments are along z-direction and
Since, charged particles traverse identical helical paths in a
rdirection, respectively. completely opposite sense in a uniform magnetic field B,
Their resultant LHS for two particles should be same and f opposite sign.
M=Ar' + M' =2M -V2I (n')/
4
Therefore,
Sn, M <Mor Mdiminishes.
318 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

19, When wire is turned into n circular loops, then

(6)
Ho)e)
magnetic ficld prooluced is - Hd hn lef)
(c) Magnetic
field.B 2rR)
B B S0,
=n'B= (3'B =9 2R 2R
21. (a) Distance =2 (pitch) Radius, R =

Bo 31. (c) Let length of cach wire is L.

For square length of each side is U4

4x nx 16x 10 2x 10x cos 30°
005 L6x 10-19
x

=pat
Area of square
= 435 n
22. ( Velocity vector is parallel to magnetic ficld vector. For circle, L=2 nr r=
2x
23. (6) We have, (b-a) =r=
B Area of circle = :
(h-a) Bq 2r 4

m As, magnctic monent. M= iA

24. (ch Radius of circular pair.
mv cos 60 Mile 1:14n 4
Bq V2mk
(167x 10* (2x 10) cos 60° m
32. (c) Radius of particle, r = ra m

0.07
A60
014x 16x 10y
: 2nm 2r)(167x 10-7, m R,
and I x
10-1
0.5x 10s
Bq 014x 1.6
33. (d At 0, due to wire AB and )E, Nagnetic field will he
25. () Distribution of current wil
be as shown in below. zero. The combincd effect of BC and DFis equivalent to
that of an infinitcly long wirc.
37. lc) Force on wire Q due to wire R,
4nx 10 2x 20x 10-x 0.!
Fp = X F

0.02
Fy
- x
20 10N (towards right)
Force on wire (Q due to wire P,

F, = 4x 10 2x 30)x 10
At point 0. Bal,
=B
Net maynetic ficld at O is zero. N
=6x 10 (towards right)
26. (al B=(due to circular wire) + (due to straight wire)
Net force on Q.
F =F +
2R 2r R 2R 4Rz -
20x 10- +6x 1o- -26x 10 N
27. () Magnetic ield at O due to wvire l will be zero.
=B, +B,B -26x I0N (towards right)
38. (a) Force on the wire, F =ilB sin 0
4R 4nR F 15
sin 0
28. (c)The magnitude of the 10x L5x2 ilB 2
resultant is B, =2B . The angle between the magnetic ield and direction of
The ratin of the nagnitude of the curent, 0 =30.
the resultant magnetic ficld at 39. (c) If q is xsitive, due to clectric ficld, their velocity will
the centre and the field.
beecoe towards ositive N-axis.
Bntte x
B
Now, E qlv B)
v
where, towardsi
 Magnetic effect of current and moving charges 319
:
Chapter 04

and B towards k Since,

F towards j B =B,
Similarly, we can see with -q charge. According to Fleming's right hand rule, the directions of B,

it is colliding after one pitch. It

and B, are oppasite to cach other, hence the resultant
40. (a) For minimum value of B,
magnctic ficld at O will be zcro.
will collide the target again, if pitch is kalved or remains
8ame.
48. (c) From the (igure,
2zm
(

p (v cos 0) or pa AB =2R sin

Bq B
:. Force =
IB 2R
42. (c) We know that, current. i qv sin=2BIR sin 2
x 6.6 x 10 B
-l6x 10° =105x 10 A
.. Area, A =
nR²=31 4 x (0.528 x 10 m 49. () Given, timc, t
Bq of
2
protorn

.. Magnetic monent. M = iA
= 10.5x x
314x (0328x 10-0
10
= 10 x
102 units =]x 1(02 units
43. (a) Al magnetic ficlds are cancelling cach other.
Wa

14. (d) 2r=2

V2mv
Sepearation, d V2r
45. (a) Torque acting on the coil t = NiBA Ba
x 2x 0.2 x (0.08x n
100 0.32N-m 0.1)
50. (6) As, dA =2rrl dr

Direction of torque tis given by the vectot Mx B. = =

dq GdA 2rur dr

= J2 mk
46. la,c) Radius, r m
qB i= ldl f ldq)
2
(uor) dr

dB
H
alordr
2r 2

=l:2:2
,
47. (h Let I, be the lengths of two
2
51. (b) As tmg) (r) mAMB, I(arB,
6

parts ARB and ASB of thc ring,

and p be resistawe per unit
. Current, i=
IrB,
length of the conductor, R

The resistance of the portion 52. (b) At the centre of coil-1,

ARB will te R, =,p ...fi)
The resistance of the portion 41
ASB will be R, p
At the centre of coil-2,
Let , i, be the currents in ARB and ASB, respectively.
..fii)
Since, these are in parallot the potential difference
aCtoss thei. will be same. Biut
or i
OT
47
...i) As
to
According Biot-Savart's law, at
maguetic fields the
centre O due to current through circular ring ARB axd
te 12 or
2i;
ASB wil! bc 2r,
h sin 90 Now, ratio of potential differences,
B- Mo41
2i, x 2r, V, 1
x
B, - Ho (
y sin 90° 4
and
2
320) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

=
53. (b) As, (mgr) MB ) (nrB Again comparing, we get
B =land B, =1
rl
B
=+j+ kWb/m?
v
radius of path, r
EB
54. (d) Velocity, =and
B Bq 60. (b) According to question, n 2zR >R =
BS
Here,
=lA=4 x 10- m?
N
55. (a,

B-5x 10 Wb'n
=
i=5x 10'A, 0 0.2 rad, K =?, 1, =?
We have, i
NAB a2

K
NABi lx 4x 10x 5x 10x 5x 1o
and
02
5 x
10N-m rad! B ="C
2R 2..
Current sensitivity. 2
10°2
I, NUAlx5x 10°2 x4x =
K 5x 10
40 radA B=4.(sin
|4n a /2
45°4 sin

56. (b Applying Ampere's circuital law in the closed loop as

shown in figure,

B 842

2Bl o(2.)
. Magnetic field induction, 61. (c) F + F, =0
B = Ho
2
57. (a) We have, F =
Fo = Fp
.. Net
force on frame =3 F
=3 (Bil)=3x 2x lx 4 =24N
38. (c) According to the question,
= B) +
mq sin 0
iLB cos Force, Fs l,1+- B,x towands right)

J+ IB,x (towards left)

= IB] (towards left

Ft =Fd -F
62. (d At centre B 0.

:. Magnitude of magnetic field, B = mg tan =

Vömg
41
At x -
a, B 0 between zero and zero there will be a
maximum value.
59. (a) Let the magnetic field is, Along X-axis for x >4 is downwards. B,

Bi + + x
Along Xaxis lor <a Bpe is upwards.
B=
B B,k
Applying F q(v x B}two times, we have 63. (b) Radius, raa cos
d-i+k=i)x Bi Bj
+ +
B,k)=qB,k - Bj)
On comparing two sides, we get
B, =l and B, =1
Further,
:. Magnetic field,
+
-d-k B,I sin
B=n
4n a cos z/n sin;J2a tan
 Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges 321

64. (c) The magnitude of the force acting on the wire, When E =0 and B z 0, but parallel to the motion of
proton, there will be no net force acting on proton.
F =F+ F' nB
2Fe2 When, E z0 and B 0 but electric force and magnetic

65. (b) Magnetic ficld,

force cancel each other, then also velocity will remain
Ho 45° + sin 45°)- Ho,! unchanged.
B=2 4% 2sin
a 4n a 70. (a) For first figure,
/2 2

(sin 45°+ sin 45°) magnetic ficld at O due to straight part (a),

B, =
3ra

66. (b) As, 2kr, = mg = LB:

- Magnetic ficld atO duc to cireular part (b),
=
B
.: The magnetic ficld, B = mgR Magnetic field at O due to straight part (c),
EL

67. (a) Angle, 0 = ot

So, net magnetic field at the centre of first figure,
10 m/s Po TI
B; B, + B, -B, ...)
4
7r
For sccond figure, magnctic field at O due to fwo straight
and one circular parn is
B, Ho i ...i)

For third figure, magnetic fieid at Odue to straight part (a),

2x Tx or 60° B, =0
6- 3 Magnetic field O due to circular part (b),
at
Velocity, v=10 cos 60° +10 sin 60°

- (5i + 5V) m/s

68. (d) Deviation, = sin

(al

A60 Magnetic field at C due to straight part (c),

B, Po i
Velocity of the particle when it comes out of the field,

|Av |=2v, sin So, net magnetic field at centre of third figure,

2vo sin 30° = Vo

B,
=

:-)
Ho,! 3n ...fi)

69. (a, b,h As proton is moving with constant velocity, so From Eqs. (i), (i) anxd (ii), we get
acceleration is zero.
So, E =0 and B=0
322 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

71. (d)

We can consider the non-"parnar loop as made by two loops

ABCDA and AQRBA as shown in figure.
2(n -a) )

2míz- a)
(Bq m)
Bq
gPla, 0, a)
B 74. (b)
B

Magnetic ficld due to loop ABCDA will be along X-axis

and due tu loop AQRBA along Z-axis, magnitude of
magnetic field due to both loops will be equal.
Deflecting torque due to current,
, (niAB sin 90 nilB
Restoring torque,

Mg
Therefore, directiorn of resultant magnetic field at P will be niL'B 2 M9»#2 2nil.
along +k
V2 Mg
Bmin
2rnil
72. (a) Area vector, A =CO x OA
=(-b cos37°-bsin 37° k)xoj) Note M s along • l-axis and Bis along +
X-axis The magnetic mament
vector M tries to align aong B through smaller angte to have mrtamum
potential energy so coil rotates clockwse about line 8C
75. (a) In the z = 0 plane, the situation is as follkows

Hete,P (x ylis the point =

andr r+y'
plx, y
B
si0
Magnetic moment, M =NiA
Nieb si-4k)
B= B,i

t=Mx B= Nifb gi xi)-41k x i) Magnetic field at Pis perpendicular to OP, it is shown in

figure.
B= B sin 0i -B cos 0
So,

The loop will rotate in clockwise direction as seen frorm Here,

atkove. 2n r
2mv sin Ô =,cos 0 =
b, c, ) Fron the question, PQ =2r sin a a
=

73. (a, sin

Bq
0=2%-2a) I(yi -xj)
2
rr
 Magnetic effect of current and moving charges (323
Chapter 04:

)Medical entrance special format Match the columns

V2kim
questions 2. As, r = Vm

Ssertion and reason

B
1. (b Tothe right of B, both ficlds are downwards and to the left = p_V2Km
3. As, r B Bq Bq
of A ltth fields are ufiwards.
4. Magnetic field over the loop from the straight wire is
2. td Velocity will change but spced will remain constant.
perpendicular to paper inwards.
Heke, nonentum will change.
3. (c) Path will be uniform circulat, only if field is uniform.
V2Km Vm
C) Medical entrances' gallery
5. (el As, rm B
or
1. (b) Key idea Befte
2R
(for a circular coil)
where, n is number of turns is circular coil

2K 2/
Further. 2_ and
4 2
n'n'B
2. (a) As we know that, radius of a charged particle in a
7. tc) Acccleration of charged particle in uniform field is non-zerU
field B is given by
agnetic
Ixt speeei remains costant. In given codition, particke will
rolate in acircular pathin av plae. Therefore, if velocity is vi ...(i)
at some instant. then it can have the value vj at other instant
also. where, r charge on the particle
8. Magnetic force can change the velocity hut not the
(c) r=
speel of the particle
speed. Specds at two instants rnust be same. .:.The time taken to complete the circle,
11. (b) F, =Q if 0 = 0° or 180° (Irom Eq. (i))
27 qB
Further. if F, + F 0 or gE+g(v x B) 0
2n qB
Path is undeflected.
12. (b) Kinetic energy will remain constant, if
F, +
F =
0 q=e and176x 10' Ckg
13. (b» As, q E + q(v x B) = 0
B=3.57x 10-T 21_eB
E=-(v x B)= (Bx v) 7
m
14, (h Wire-2 is equally attracted by wires-1 and 3. 3.57 x
15. (ch Magnetic force of attraction on lower wirc is upwards 21 m -1.6x10x
2a
to4*)
while its weight is downwards. At a certain distancer
1.0x 10 1l2 =| GHz
these two forces are equal. If the lower wire is displaced
upwards frorn this position. then magnetic force will 3. (d) Consider the given figure.
increase but weight willremain same. Therefore, net force
is upwards or equilibriun is unstable.
16. (d It may or nay 1ot take a circular shape depending
upn te diection of B

18. tal M and B are parallel (bosh inwards). Therefore, t =0.

19. (o If a pxnitive chaged particle is rotating in a circle in
clockwise direction, then equivalent current is also From the above figure, it can be seen that the directivn of
clxkwise. Thercfore, Bat centre and M are txoth inwards. current in a long straight conductor XY and AB of a an
Hence, tthey are prallel. But at sone other point they may square loop ABCD are in the same direction. So. there exíst
not be parallel.
324) 0BJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

a force of attraction between the two, which will be

experienced by Fas as 4R
The net magnetic field at the centreOis
) B=B+ B,
+ B, =

4nR
-2k)+ Moi=Po2k+ri
1R
In the case of XY and arm (CD, the direction of currents
ate in the opposite direction. So, there exist a force of
6. (d) Current, I
=I
repulsion which will he experienced by CD as So, for an electron revolving in a circular orbit of radius r.

Therefore, het force on the loop ABCD will the

Fcy =Fa -Fa=

2r Lr2) 3Lr2)
q=e and = T
24 i! 2nne
3r T
2r/0 2n 2r
4. (b) Consider two Amperian loops of at centre
The magnetic field produced the is
radius and 2 as shown in the
a2 BPo_Hone
figure. Applying Anpere's circuital 2r 2R
law for these loops, we get 7. (6) The angle subtended by circular part of the conductor i
2a
3z/2 or 270°.
fBdL-Jd The net magnetic field at point O is
For the smaller Joop.
B. =B + B,
2
Bx where, B, = magnetic field due to arc Il and B, = magnetic
2*=* 4 4 field due lo are I

B=
, at
distance - fron the axis of the wire. Bet (downward
2 47x 3R 2
4nR2 12 R

Similarly, for bigger Anperian loop. 8. (c) Given, specd of proton, v 3x 10 m/s
B'x 2r 2a) =uJ Magnetic field,
B
=2x 10T
(total curent enclosed by Amperian Joop is 2)
Now, force (magnetic) on proton,
=
quB sin
F
- l6 x 101 x 3x 10 x 2x 10x sin 90°
At distatce 2a from the axis of the wire.
So, ratio of =32 x 3 x 10 =9.6x 10N
.
B
4za ..Acceleration of proton,
96x 10
5. (c) The magnetic field in the different regions is given by Nks9 10' m/s
L.67x 107 .67
-5.74 x 1' -
m/s² 5.8x 1' m/g?
9. () In the first condition, magnetic field,
B Po!
2

In the second condition, magnetic field,

2r/n
From Eq. (i), we get
41 R 4nR
 Chapter O4: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges 325

10. (a) Two infinitely long equal wire carrving equal currents 17. () Two parallcl bcams of position noving in the same
same direction will attract each other. diretion sct up two parallel currents Elowing in the sane
11. th Points A and A' are the inflection points, where the sign directioh. Hence, they attract each otlher.
uf curvature changes. ,
18. (a) Given, n3A I, =4A: R = 2r cm =2zx 10*m
At these points (i.e. A and A')
d'B We know that, magnetic field of a coi!, B =
dt
s d
well as
aTe zero, 2R
3
Now, B = 3 =Ho,
12. (b} Lct the masscs of two particles are m, nd 0-2
m

2R 2 2rx 4n 107
As the chges ae of the sune magnitue and being
celerated tluogli same pxxential, so tlee curges enter 3 =3x10%T
=10> 10-7
into the magnctic ficld with tthe sane speexts (let v. Now,
racii of the cirrular atts followed by two chnges is given by
Similarlv. B, =
and R,
R 2R 2 4n 10-2
ql q3
x
13. (c) The magetic field produced by the ring at its centre is
=10* =4x 1oT
10
...i) Now, net magnetic ficid at centre of a coil.

where, I= curtent through the ring

B=y3x10o+4x10o
T 2r
...(ii)
B-o"9+ 16)

Here, Q= total change on the ring B=5x10-T=5x 10- Wh/m?

and T time period of the ring 19. (b) Wheiever, there is a change in the magnetic flux
According to the question, ), = crossing through the loop, an emf induced in it and heIce
Q=),x 2ar ...ii)
2nr there is an anount of induced current through thhe loop. 1f
From Eqs. {il, (i) and (iü), we get loup is 10otated abxout one of its diameter, the flux through
it varies and causing the emt induced in it.
B- Mot 20. (b) The nagnctic field inside the solenoid is given by
2
j2mV m
B=pl
14. ( Since, r =
m
where, n = unber of turns per unit length
and I= current in coil
(2 Now, we have
Hence,

15, (al Given, B =10

m;
Wb/m?,
n== L
400 -x
0.4 x 102
lx 10* -
1000

I-1¢'Ckg and =10 m/s and =4rx 10 T.m/A

x

B=4x 314x 10XX) 5x 10-7

We know that, radius of the circle.
62800 x =6.28 x 10
-

10 T

21. () Maguetic field Bat any point in the open space inside
the toroid is zero, because the amperean loop cnclosc nct
10
current cquals zeTo,
r= 100
m

ad'ao) 23. (6}

16. (h As, electrons cannot be accelerated in a cyclotron. A

large increse in their eneigy increase their velocity to a dB cos
very latge extent. This thruws the eletrons out uf step
with the cscillating ficld, while, neutron being electrically
Ieutral, cannot bc accelerated in a cyclotron.
As magnectic ficld at axis of current carrying loop is given by
So, cyclutron is sed to xcelerate oulv pusitively charged B =
..)
article. 2+ d'
326 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol.
2

where, icument in loop, r=radius of loop

d= distatice on axis 2E
and B- magnetic field of current carrving loop m
Now, B = magnetic field at centre, d
=0
V2Em
Now, B= 2 +
o' 2,3 ...ii) qB

On dividing Eqs. i) and (ii), we get 26. (d Suppose, the velocity vof the particle entering the ficld B.
instead of being perperdicular to B makes an
Hoir x
2x (r2j2 angle with it.
B 2(+ d'yxgir
B 27
B 25}2
54uT 27
B Then, v nay be resolved into two components, y
5 =V Cos

B= 54 27
x 123
B =230T ,
parallel to B and v, =v sin 0 perpendicular to
cotnporncnt gives a lineat
a circular path to
B The
path and the compoent v gives
the particle. Tlie fesultant of these two is a
24. (d 1 helical path wlhose axis is parallel to the magnetic field.
27. (ch As, number of revolutions per second by the
charge q is
given as

The point P is lving at a distance d along the Z-axis.

B

90 T 2xR
Current through cirular path. i =
q1/T)=/2nR
Magnetic moment. =
iA =nR')p=R
B,
2rk
28. (d Consider the diagram, where a charged particle of mass
m and charge q noves
2n d along a citcular path
2r d

2n d OB
25. ( Given, kinetic energy E
anti-clockwise as shown, tmagnetic field B is assurned to
be
Mass = m intu plaie of paper and of constantl tnagnitusle.
Magnetic ficld = B Clearly, centripetal force lor the circular mnvement
of the
and charge = q charge will be provided by magnetic Lorentz force q
(vx B).
We kow that, F =
quB sin
Hence, = qvB sin 90°
fmotion of a charged particle in a uniform magnetic
field)
I|0 =90°, then F =qvB
..(i
We know that also (centripetal force), qvB

..ii) speed =y=

Fron Es. (i) and (iil, we get
...i)
gB
Time period of the periodic motion
complete one revolution
=T=time taken to

Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges 327

 Magnetic effect of current and moving charges
:
Chapter 04 (327

T-27 2r 2n 2z my [from Eq-

where, lis the length of the wire ad d is senaration
vr vgB
))
between the two wires F,, =1
"o
2m 2rd 2rd
qB According to question. |F,, =F F=
29. (b): Magnctic moment. 2nd
x Area of enclosed by loop Now,consider the sitation, where the cutent in first
M=Curent
wire is doubled and reverscd.
-IxA ...li)
and magnetic induction at the centre of circular loop,
2BR 21,
...(ii)
2R
-3d
Herc, Am R
...liii)
Proceeding as previous case, we can write
Substituting Eqs. (ii) and (iiil in Eq. (i), we get
23R 2rBR 3 x
M 2rd
Here, force on second wire will be towards right.
30. (c) ln cvelotron, force on charge= centripetal force
F
2zdx 3
Bqv =
So.
Bo
31. (a) When a magnetic field is applied on a stationary 2rd
electron, then it remains stationary. Here, negative sign is due to opposite directions of F" and F.
Because F =q(v x B)
2 2F
V=0
F=0
32. (0 Given, r = 0.05 nn = 0.05 x 10m, (:l nm =10m) 33. (al By Fleming's left-hand rule, the particle is tnoving and
k=1 rev/s e =L6x 10"C magnetic field is perpendicular to the velocity.
We know that, the magnetic moment, M= Ai

Mer x ne
= × x 1.6× 10-19
3.14x (0.03 10x1 B
= 1.26x
102 A-m
r
33. () Given, radius of coil, =10cm =10x 10 m
Number of turs, N =100 turns, cutent in coil, =1A
Magnetic monent, M=? 36. (0 Angular momentum, L= m
T

By magnetic dipole moment of current loop.

..i)
Therefore, ottbital motion of electron is equivalent to
M=NiA, where A = ? a
Current,
MNinr 100 x | x 3142x (10x 10 Iel/ T)

-100x 3x 3142x 10) x 10 =342 A-m

Period of revolution of clectron is given by, 7
34. (c) The situat ion is sown in the figure
Given wires are long.
Now, B magnetic field at I, second
wire) due to curtent in tlhe fitst wire 2rr
Area of clectron orbit, A E tr
Magnetic dipole moment of the atom
The field is perpetndicuiarly inward.
Now, force on the second wire due to 2r
first wirc,
Using Eq (i). we have
F, =l,1x B,) (towards lef)
=1,, sin 90°
328) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

37. (c) Circumference of cicle = 2rR 44. (b).. Magnetic ficld.

B

2ar
2rR =L
Given. u =4nx cm =
10 NNA,r=8 8x 10m J=12A
4nx 10
Arca, A= TRTI 1 B
= 12
B=3x 10 Wb/m
21 8x 0-2
Magnetic moment.(a} IA 45. (a)Given, #n = 4nx 1ONIA, n5 turns/cm, l = 0.8 A
We know that, B = u

38. (d) We know that, B=5.024 x 10Wh/m?

46. (d Given that the net agnetic field at the centre O is zero
Therefofe, nagnetic field at 0 due to circular coil ane
straight conductor must be equal and uppxosite in directiou.
,
2R 2r(2R) 2n

47. (d

The magnetic field at a point P.

Bi =2 4, + sin 0,)|
Hin
4nr

Magnetic field outside the long rod,

x (sin 90+ sin 30° B
An d3 2r
2 >
B, B, 0
50. () The magnetic field at the centre of new loop
2rd B =nB
n is
39. (d For parallel M is
stable and for antiarallel is tunstable. where, the unter of tuns in the loup
40. (o) The radius the circular path, of a charges particle in
of B =4B ot B
=16B
magnctic ficld
51. () Under uniform magnetic field. force vB acts on proton
2mF mu*
and provides the recessary centripetal force
Here, kinetic energy for proton and helium is same and deB
=ruBv=
both are moving in the same naguetic field
Now, angular momentii,
J"rx pax aeB a'eB
I3 = 8.35 x
52. () Given, 10it,v =2x10'i + 4x to'j)
So,
m 2qI The distance covered by proten, p = T v) =2n
4m q3
L.67x 1027
=2x 314 x
43. (c) We know that, magnetic field at centre of a coil 1.6× 10-9x 835 x 1o
4x 10
x2x 10°i+
m

p=0.157
Givetn, i2 A; N =1 ( n
Given, =12 tums, ! =|5A B =
53. 02i.
So A=-004im'
.:.
Potential cnergv. U = nlAB
R=
4nx 10xlx2 » m
2x 4nx 10 R0.l
10
=12x 15x (-0.04)x 02 =-I,44 J
 Chapter 04: Magnetic effect of current and moving charges (329

54. (b) The described condition can be shown as On dividing Eq. (öi) by Eq. (i), we get

3
-h
56. ( The charged particle goes undeflected through both the
field, therefore, force experience by charged particle due
magnetic field must bxe equal to the force experienced by
the ctarge particle due to electric field, Le., =F, F
evB sin 0 = eE
The magnetic field at P due to inner and outer conductors
ate equal and opposite. Hence, the net magnetic field at P Given, U=2x 10ms!
will be zero. B=1.5T and 0 = 90°
lHence, E = vB sin0 =2x 10 x 1.5 x sin 90°
55. (6) When the current in the wircs is in same direction.
Magnetic field at mid-point O due to I and II wires are =3x 10' V/m
respectively
B, Ho and B, m
Ho 57. (a) The magnetic fivll (B)at the centre of circular currcnt
2i
4n x 41 x carrying coil of radius and curent LB="O
R

2K
Similarly, if current =21, then
Magnetic ficld =:o2! =2B
2R
So, resultant magnctic field

2R
So, the et magnetic field at O 59. (a) When wire is bent in the formn of semicircular arc
then, I r
10x 10 =
o. 4-i,l ..)

When the dircction of i, is reverscd,

B, o. and Ba, =
Ho22
:The radius of semicircular arc, r =/r
2 Distance betwecn two cnd points of semicircular wirc
=2r= 21
..Magnetic moment of semicircular wire
2 mt

So, net tmagnetic ficld at 0

Beut ml is the magnetic moment of straight wire ie.,
B.4+4) ml= M

40x 10 Ha.
=
+i,) ...(ü)
. New magnetic moment
CHAPTER

05 Ma
Magnetism and
matter
A Greek philosopher, Thales of Miletus had observed in 600 BC. that a
naturally
oCcuring ore of iron attracted small pieces of
iron towards it. This ore was found in
the district of Magnesia Asia MiIOT in Greeve. HeICe, the ore was
Inagnetite. Later, William Gillert first suggested tlhat naned
earth behaves as a huge magnet
which causes the aligument of compass needlles, then oersted
discovered that moving
charges are the sources of magnetic fields. So, the science of
magnetism was known
long before the 19h century.
The phenomenon of attraction of suall bits of iron, steel, cobalt, nickel, etc..
towards
the ore was called nagnetism. Matters like (solid, liquid or gases) show magnetism
and hence ate classified into different categories according
to their magnetic
properties. In this chapter, we shall learn about magnetism
matter followed by knowledge of magnet, magnetic and magnetisation of
dipole and their magnetic fields.
We will also discuss about the earth's
Inside magnetism.
1) Magnet
Magnetic feld lines
• Magnetic
dipele
.Coaslonb's Law for magtetism
• Magretic
field strength at a jint
1) Magnet
due to magetie
diote o bur nagietA nanot is a
Curtent carrying loop as a magnctic material or obiect that exhibits a st rong
dipole pruperty magnetic lield and has a
to attract some scific materials like iron towards it. The
Bar magnet in a uniform magrwtic
fiekt invisible but is responsible lor properties a magnetic field is
2
of magnet.
Earth's magnetism Magnets are of tuw tvpes
.
Elements of carths magnetism
• fi) Natural magnets
Neutral points
. (iil Artificial magnets
Tagent galvatanetet
Vibration magnetomcter Natural magnets ate generally irregular in
hand, artificial magnets nay have desired shae
and weaker in strength. On the other
3
Magnetic induction and slhae and
shoe magnet, compass needle, etc., all are strength. A bar nagnct, a horse
magnetic materials exanples of artificial agnet.
.Sotne iportant terns tused
in manetisn
Classification of substances on the Bar magnet
basts of tnagnetic behaviou: A bar magnet consists of two equal
. and non-separable magnetic poles. One pole is
Curie's law
designated as horth pole (N) and the
Atomic del of agnetisn other as south pole (S). These poles are
at a small distanICe. But they are not separated
Hysteresis exactly at the ends. The distance
between two
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter 331

poles of a bar magnet is known as magnetic length of a lines, which begin from a positive charge and
magnet. lt's direction is from Spole of the magnet to terminate at the negative charge or escape to infinity.
N-pole and is represented by 21. It is sometimes also known (ii) The tangent, at any point of a magnetic field line,
as cffective length U., ) of the magnet and is less than its represents, the directionof net magnetic field 'B' at
geometric length L, ).
the point.
(iii) At any point tangent to the magnetic field line
For a bar magnct, L,
represents the direction of net magnetic field (B) at
that point.
(iv) The tangent at any point of a magnetic field line respect
the directions of net magnetic field B at that point.
(v) The larger the number of field lines crossing per unit
Fig. 5.1 Bar magnet area, the stronger is the magnitude of the magnetic
fickd B.

General properties of magnet (vi)The magnetic field lines do not intersect, for if they
did, the direction of the magnetic field would not be
Directional property unique at the point of intersection.
When a nagnet is suspended freely, then it points in the (vii) The direction of field litnes in from Nto Sif they are
earth's N:S direction (in magnetic meridian). outside the magnet and from S to N, if they are
inside the magnet.
s (vii) Fig. 5.5 la) shows the uniform magnetic field lines and
Fig. 5.5 (6) shows non-uniform magnetic field lines.
Fig. 5.2 Freely suspended bar magnet
Uniform nagnetic ficld
Monopole Non-existance
If a magnet is broken into nunber of picces then cach Non-unit
-uniform
piece belhaves as an individual magnet rather than isolated magtetic field
poles. This means that monopoles do not exist.
Fig. 5.5

s Different pattern of magnetic field lines

N
sN sN
Fig. 5.3 Ifa bar magnet is broken, each picce
hehaves as a small magnet.
a

Attractive/repulsive properties
Like magnetic poles repel each other and unlike magnetic
Magnetic field lines Magnetie field lines ot dotted
poles attract cach other. dae to a bar magtet due to a horse shoe magnet boundary lines

Repu'sion
N
SAttraction id

Fig. S.4 Like poles repel and unlike poles atract

Magnetic field lites Magnetic field lines
Note Peoutsion is a sure test of nagnetisin
bet ween twn utlike pole between two like poles
Magnetic field lines Fig. 5.6 [Different patterns of magnetic field lines

The magnetic field lines of a magnetic field are the imaginary

lines which continuously represent the direction of that Magnetic Dipole
magnetic field.
A magnetic dipole is an arrangement which consists two
Properties of magnetic field lines tmagnetie poles of equal and opposite strengths separated at
a small distance. A bar magnet, a compass necdle, etc., are
(i) The magnetic ficld lines of a magnet form closed
the exanples of magnetic dipoles,
continuous loops. This property is unlike electric fied
 332 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Pole strength Magnetic dipole moment

Like electric charge, we have equivalent analogous in It is the product of thc strength of either of the pole
magnetism which is known as pole strengh. Thus, pole strength and the magnetic length of the magnet. It is
strength can be defined as the strength of a magnetic represented by M. It is a vector quantity.
pole to attract magnetic materials towards itself. It is a -n M

scalar quantity and its SI unit is ampere-netre (A-m). The

strength of N and S-pole of a nagnet is conventionally
-
represented by + m and m, respectively. It depends on -21
Fig. 5.7
the nature of material and area of cross-section of the
magnet. The direction of magnetic dipole moment is same as that
Srength of N and pole of a magnet
S- m). is always equal and of 21. Therefore, M = m(21)
opposite (+m and Its SI unit is ampere-metre (A-m')

Pole strength and magnetic dipole moment in special cases

Special Cases Figure Effect on Pole Formula for new
strength magnetic dipole
moment
If bar magnet is cut into two Remains unchanged 2 M
equal ieces such that the
length of eacth piece becomes (becomes hal)
half

Ifbar agnet is cut into two Poie strength of cach

equal sieces such that the piece becomes half
width of cach picce
-
-m/2
(becomes half)
becomes half -m2 m/2

.
If bar magnet is bent in the Remairs uxhanged M- m2 2! n]
forrn of semi-circl Afmx2.204
becones times

When two identical bar Remains uchanged

Magiets áre xined
perpendicular to each ozher -IT

When two ar nagnets are Nlt ml Remains uxhanged Resultant magnetic monent,
inelired at an angle Af= M• M+ 2MM, con0
Angle made by resultant
(- ml magnetic monent (M) with M,
is given by.
M, sin0
tano
M M+ Mycm8
(- m)
 Chapter 05: Magnetisn and matter (333

Example 5.1 Consider a short magnetic diole of magnetic Example 5.4 Tuo magnetic poles, one of which is four times
length 10 cm. Find its yeometric length. stronger than the other, exen a force of 10 gf on each other when
placed at a distance 20 cn. Find the strengtlh of euch pole.
of

Sol. (Geometric length of a magnet is- times its magnetic length.

Sol. Let the pole strength of the two dipoles te m and 4 m

: Geometric length =x 10 = 12 cm Here, F = 10gf = 10x 10 kgI =

10x 10x 9.8N,
and r=20 cm =0.2nm
Exomple 52 A thin br maget of length 2L. is lent at the
mid-point, so that the angle betueen them is 60°. Find the new
Using Coulomb's law of magnetisn. F

o.
length of the magnet.
Sol. On bending the magnet, the length of the = 107 x m x 4m
magne,
Substituting the values, 10x 10x 9,8 (0.2
AC = 10 x 9.8 x (0.2 x
A0+0c -Lsin +Lin or m 10-980)
m, m=98,9 Am
= 2L sin 30°
=2L x -L ano m,= 4mn =4x 98.9 36 =
Am

Exomple 53 The length of a magnetised steel wire isl and its Example 5.5I Tiuo similar poles, hauing pole strenaths
magnetic noment is M. lt is bent into the shape of L. with tuo in the ratio 3ande l m apart. Find the point uhere a
sides eqal. What will be the neuw magnetic moment? tunit pole experiences no net foree due to these tuv poles.
Sol. If m is strength of cach pole, then magnetic moment M =m x I Sol. Let ihe pole strengtths of the two magnetic poles be m and
When the wire is bent into L shape, Jm. Supose the required point is located at distarce x Irom
eflective distance between the poles the first ole. Then at this point,
Y

Force on unit pole due to first pole

New mnagnctic moment = Force on unit xole due to second
ole
M

=mx M (m will remain unchanged)

47 4* 4-x
3x' =(-x' or
3r =| -x
Coulomb's law for magnetism
0.366 m
=

This law states that the force of attraction or repulsion I+

ietween two nagnctic poles is directly proportional to the
product of their pole strength (m) and inversely Magnetic field strength at a
propuortional to thc square of the distance betwecn them.
point due to magnetic dipole
or bar magnet
Fig. 5.8 Two magnetic poles separatcd by a distance r

a magnetic field at any point is defined by

Let pole strengtl of either pole be then macnetic frce ie strength of
mn,

of unit strength the

force experienced bya hypothetical
between these two isolated poles kept at separationr will be
at
north pole placed that point
m, x n, F
F= i.e., B
where m is the pole strength of hypothetical
north pole. Magnetic field strength is a vector quantity.
where, Ho10- N/AZ
The direction of magnetic field B is the direction along
41
which hypothetical north pole would tend to thove, if free
Important points about the Coulomb's law for magnetism are to do so. We
as follous have used the word hypothetical north pole in
the alve discussion because an isolated magnetic pole
(i) Force will be attractive, if one pole is north and other not
does exist.
south, i.e, opposite poles. Let us now calculate the nagnetic field strength at
fii)Force will be repulsive, if both poles ate of same different points of magnetic dipole (or bar magrnet).
type (i.e., north-north or south-south).
 334) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

1. When point lies on axial line of a bar Magnetic field strength at Pdue to N-pole of magnet is,

magnet B, pole to point P.N

4T (NP)2 (2Tom
47
Let 2l be the magnetic length of a bar magnet with its
centre at 0.The magnetic dipole moment of the nagnet is Magnetic fickd strength at P due to S-pole of magnet,
M, where M = mx 21. The distance of the observation = -. from point P to pole S
B,
oint Pon the axial line from the centre of the magnet be 4n ( +')
OP =r. As, B, = B, in nagnitude. their vertical components B, sin
B
0 along OP produced and B, sin0 along I0 will cancel out.
Howevet, horizontal components along PX will add.
B, P Therefore, magnetic field strength at P due to the bar
S
magnet,
B, = B, cos0 +
B, cos = 2 B, cos0, along PX.
Fig. 5.9 Magnetic fieldof bar magnet on axial line
a mx 21 M
If m is the strength of each pole, then magnetic field B 4r
B,
strength at P due to N-pole of magnet is given by
('+'}*2

B,
Po mx1 Po along OP.
If the magnet is short, / << r, such that is neglected.
47 (NP)² 4n ( -? B.O M
B ...(ii)
Magnetic field strength at P due to Spole of magnet,
PO The direction of B, is along PX.a line parallel to line

.:.
B,
(SP)' z ,+2long joining Npole to S pole.
On dividing Eq. (i) by Eq. (ii). we get
Magnetic field strength at P due to the bar magnet,
Da
-
B, - B, B,
- Ho 21/r -2 B, =
2B,
B
Hence, magnitude of magnetic field due to a short bar
(superposition - sign due to opposite direction) magnet at any point on the axial line of magnet is
When the magnet is sorn, << r,
suct that / is neglected. twice the magnetic field at a point at the same
thet, distance on the equatorial line of the magnet.
B, - Ho 21/
41
B, ..) 3. When point makes angle with
axis of a bar magnet
The direction of B, is along OP.
At an angle 0 with the axis of magnet, the magnetic field
at point Pat a distance r fr0n centre of magnet is
2. When point lies on equatorial line
of a bar magnet
In figure given below, the point P is shown on equatorial
line of the sane har magnet, where OP = r.
B, B, sin
B, com
•M
B, con 0

Fig. S.11
B,/ B, sin e
B-Po.MM+3 cos0
4n
m4. ..9
and lana= ;tan0
Fig. 5.10 Magnetic field of bar magnet on equitorial line
 Chapter 05 Magnetism and matter 335

For axial position of point P, 0 = 0° and for equatorial Exomple 5.8 Calculate the magnetic induction at a point 1
A
position, 0 = 90°. awav from a proton, measured along its axis of spin. The
magnetic moment of the proton is 1.4x 10 A-n.
Note The magnetK potential due to a maenetic diople at dstance ris
Sol. On the axis of a magnetic dipole, magnetic induction is
V= given by
NoN,(a) on the axIS of magnet 0 0

V
4rr Substituting the values, we get
(b) On the neuttal ax1s, 0 = 90
(10)(2)(1.4 x 10"). mT
B= =2.8x 0
T=2.8
V-0
Exomple 5.6 Find the magnetic field due toa dipode of Exomple 5.9 A short bar maugnet has a magnetic moment of
magnetic moment 3 Am at a point 5 m auvay.from it in the 0.48JT. Give the direction and magnitude of the maynetic
direction makingg angle of 45 with the dipole aris. field protuced by the magnet at a distance of 10 cm from the
centre of maqnet on ) the axis (i) the cquatorial lines (normal
Sol. The condition given in the figure can be drawn as bisector) of the mauet.
B
Sol. i) When the point lies on the axis, then let B be the
magnetic field at P.
r=l0cm 0.lm
=

0.48
Ho 2M
=10-, 2x
4 (01

s.....0-tM = 0.96x 10*Tfrom S pole to N pole

(iil Let B, be the magnetic field at point Pon the equatorial
So, the nagnetic field at point P is. line.

BoI+3 cos²0
. B, O.10, 048
(01)
47
4%r
x
Herc, M
u3 Am, rm5m, 0 45° l0T=0.48G along fron N polce to S pole.
=0.48
B
=10 x (5iTV!+3os'45°) Magnetic field due to a hypothetical
monopole
=10xx+).5
125 At any point, magnetic field due to hypothetical monopole is
given by
=107x158 =3.79 x
125
10T B= n
mo
tan 0-
Also, tan a

2
an 45"
-a-tan 'as) Npode

Example 5.7 A tar magnet of length 0.1 m has pole strength

of 50 A-n. Calculate the magnetic field at distance of0.2 m Fig. 5.12 Magnetic field due taa monopole
from its centre on
() its uiul line and (in its eratorial line. So, at a point P situated at distance r from a monopole,
Sol. Hcre, m =50 A- m, r =0.2 m 27 = 0.1 m or
l= 0.05 m magnetic ficld is given by
K m
Magnetic dipole monent, B

=m2I) = 50 x 0.] =5A-m?

A

(ÖB, Ho 21r 10×2x 5x 0.2

=1.42 x
10-T Important points about magnetic field due to moopole
4R('-1 (0.2 -0.05 (i) It is away from pole, if it is N-pole as shown in
M 10x5 Fig. 5.13
(id Bgi =

4n('+1' (0.2 +
0.05"2 (ii) It is towards pole, if it is S-pole, as shown in Fig. 5.13
= x T
Spole
5.71 |0
Fernula with (r -) and (apl) are used becatuse here
r >>ldoes tot apply.
Fig. 5.13 Magnetic field due to S-pole
 336) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Example 5.I0 A current of fA ix flonwing througl a 20 rurns

Current carrying loop as a magnetic cireulor coil of radius 5 cm. The coil lies in the xv-plane. What
dipole is the magnitude and direction of the magnetic dipole moment
as«viated with it?
Consider a planar loop of wire carrying current as shown in Sol. Magrnetie dipole moment is given by
Fig. 5.14. Looking from the upper face, current is
M= NIA
anti-clockwisc. Therefore, it has a north polarity | (V Here, N 20 u 6A, r 5 cm = 0,.05 cm
22
Loking from the lower face of the loop current is cloxkwise AM
20)x (6)xx (0.050.91 Am?
7
STherelore, it has a south polarity. Thus,the curent The direction of magnetic dipoe monent is perpendicular to
carrying loop behaves as a system of two cqal and opposite the plane of the coil. Hence, it is along Z-axis.
magnetic poles and can bhe considered as a magnetic dipole.
Magnetic dipole moment of a revolving
electron in an atom
The circular motion of an clectron around the positively
charged nucleus of an atonn carn be treated as a current
loop producing a magnetic field. Hence, it belhaves like a
Fig. 5.14 Current loop with north ond south polarity magnetic dipole.
The (negatively charged) electron is revolving
Magnetic dipole moment of current anti-clockwise and so the current is clockwise. Hence,
carrying loop according to the right-hand rule, the dipole moment M is
The magnetic dipole moment of the current carrying loop perpendicular to the plane of the current loop and is
(M) is diretly proportional to directed downwards.

Fig. 5.15 Maynetic dipole monment of current loop Fig. 5.16 Orbital magnetic moment ofu revoing electron.
(i) strength of current U) through the loop and Let m, lx the n1:ass and- e the harge of an clect ron
(ii) area A) enclosel by the loop revolving with spced v in a circular orbit of radius r.
i.e., Maland Ma A The magnitude of the magnctic diole moment M
M= klA ... associated with the revolving electron is
()
where, is proportionality constant
k M =
IA =
...i)
If we define unit magnetic dipole moment as that of a small 2nr 2
single turn lxop of unit arca carrying unit current, then from The magnitude of the orbital angular momentun L. of
Eq. (i), we get electron,
1=kxlxl or k =l ...
m, vr
.. From L= (i1)
Eq. G). M= IA On dividing Eq. (i) by Eq. (ii), we get
For N turns M= NIA M e ... (iii)
M= NIAn L 2m,
In vector form,
where, î is unit vector perendicular to the plane of the loop. Thus, the ratio of the magnitude of the magnetie
Here, the factor Ni is called ampere turns of current loop. dipole moment to the magnitude of the angular
momentum the revolving clectron is a constant.
So, magnctic dipole moment of current loop
= Ampere turns x loxp area This ratio is called the gyromagnetic ratio. Its value for
an electron is 8.8x 10" C/kg.
Note Direction of magnetic moment ts given by right hand rule.
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter (337

The vector form of Eq. (ii) can be written as The magrnetic dipole moment of a circular ring.
M=IA (where, A is area of the rig)
M= or ..(iü)
2m. On putting the value of r from Eq. (i) in Eg. (ii), we get
M
The minus sign means that M is directed opposite to L..
Now, aceording to Bohr's quantisation principle, the
angular momentun of a revolving electron assumes M= Inx L
discrete values only. That means, it is an integral nultiple
h
of where h is a fundarnental constant of quantum A-m'

mechanics named after Max Planck, known as Planck's

Example S.12 The electron in hirogen atonm moves with
a

constant having value i626x 10 J-s. Therefore,

sved of 2.2 x 10° mm/s in an orbit of raditus 5.3 x 10" cm. Find
angular momentum can be written as the magnetic moment of the orbiting electron.
= nh ...(iv)
L=m,r Sol. Frequency of revolution, f=
2nr
wherc, n is an integer of values n > 0 and is also known as The moving charge is equivalent to a current loop. given by
principle quantum number. i=fxe or I=
Now, from Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get,
If A be the area of the orbit, then the magnetic mnoment of the
M neh orbiting electron is,
M ...(v)
nh/2r 2m, 4Rm,
2zr
When n =l,M = u (the elementary magnetic dipole
moment), thus Putting the values, we get
eh (1.6x 10"N2.2 x 10 X5.3 x 10" x 10*)
...<vi) M
4nm,
=9.3x 10 "A-m²
The elementary magnetic moment of a revolving
electron is also known as Bohr magneton (u). Bar magnet as an equivalent solenoid
Now, substituting e= 1.6x 10 C,h= 6.626x 10 J-s, The magnctic ficld lines for a bar nnagnet and a current
R=314 andm, = 9.01x 10 kg in Eq. (vi), we get, catrying solenoid resemble very closely. Therefore, a bar
x magnet can be thought as a large nunber of circulating
1.6x 10 6.626x 104 -A-m² currents in analogV with a solenoid. The expression for the
4x3.14x 9.01x 10-1 magnetic field due to a solenoid is,
= 9.27 x 10-2" A-m² 2rn
B= Wo
:. =
1
Bohr magneton 9.27x 10-27 A-m2 47
where r is the distance between the centre of solernoid to
Exomple 5.7 A current I flous in a conducting wire of length
L. If ue bent it in a circular form, then calculate its magnetic
the required point.
dipole moment. This expression is same as the expression for magnetic
Sol Let a wire of length L is bent in a circular form of radius r. field of a bar magrnet at its axial point. Thus, a bar magnet
and a solenoid produce sinmilar magnetic fields.
Then. 2nr =L re ...0)
2: Therefore magnetic field lines associated with a solenoid
are also similar to a bar magnet as shown in the figure.

Fig. S.17 Magnetic field lines due to a solenoid carrning current

 338 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Exgmple 5.13 A closely uvund solenoid of 800 turns and area In vector form, we can rewrite this equation as t= Mx B!
of cross-section 2.5x
10'm² carries a current of 3.0 A.
Explain the sense in which the solenoid acts like a bar magnet. The direction of t is perpendicular to the plane containing
What is its asciated maqnetic moment? Mand Band is givern by right handed serew rule.
Sol. given that number of tuns, N
It is =
800 and Work done or potential energy of a magnetic dipole
(bar magnet) in a magnetic field
x m

Area of cross-section, A=2.5 10'

Now, magnetic moment of the solenoid is The torque acting on the dipole tends to align it in the
M= NIA = 800 30x 25 x 10
x
direction of the field. Work has to be done in rotating the
-
0.60JT dipole against the action of the magnetic torque. This work
Which acts along the axis of the solenoid in the direction done is stored in the form of potential eergy of the dipole.
related to the sense of flow of current according to right Now, a snall amount of work done in rotating the dipole
handed screw rule. through a small angle is given by.
dW = t=MBsin0 - (from Eq. (iil)
Bar magnet in uniform magnetiC field Total work done in rotating the diyole from 0 = 0, to
When a bar magnet is placed in a uniform magnetic fielkd, 0 0 can be obtained by integrating the above
torque acts on the magnet. Also, magnetic potential energy expression.
is associated with the magnet due to its orientation as .:.
Then, potential energy of the dipole is given by,
discussed in following sections. U
W =
-MB(cos) - cosO, )

Torque on bar magnet in a uniform magnetic field Let us assune that, 0,, = 90°
- cos 90°)
Let us cosider a bar magnet of length 2l placed in a So, U=W" =-MB(cos
uniform magnetic field B Let the magnetic axis of the bar Therefore, U= -AMB cos 0

magnet makes angle 0 with the ficld B, as shown in the

In vector notation, we may rewvrite this equation as
figure.
U= -M-B
Special Cases
(i)When dipole is perpendicular to magnetic field its
potential energy is zero i.e., when 90°
S79... U=- fB cos0 MB cos90° =0

Fig. S.18 Torque on a bar magnet

(i) When the magnetic dipole is aligned along the
magnetic field, then it is in stable equilibrium having
= 0
Then, Force on N-pole = mk along B minimun potential energv i.e., when
MBcos 0°
U-
=

Force on S-pole = mB oppositc to B

MB
cos0 -MB
(ii) When 0 = 180°.
where, m = strength of cach peole and = - MBcos180° = MB
B= strength of magnetic field Un- MB cos)
In this condition, potential energy is maximum.
These forces being equal and opposite form a couple, which
tends to rotate the magnet clockwise, so as to align it Exomple 5.14 magnet of magnetic moment 50i4-m is
along B. So, the moment of couple or torque is given by, placed alorsg the Xaxis in a magnet field B = (0.5i + 3j)T.
t = Force x Perpendicular distance Find the torqe acting on the magnetic field.
T
mBx NA .)
Sol. Torque, t = Mx B
NA NA whete, AM
is magnctic moment and B is magnetic field
In ANAS, sin Given, Me 50iA-n', B =05i +3j T
2
NAsin0 21 t= 50i x
(0.5i +3j)
x j)
=
Eq. (i)becomes, t mBx 2l sin) t150i
Also, M= mx 2/ Using ixj = k, we have
= MB sin9 ...ii) T150k N-m
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter 339

Example 5.15 A bar magnet uhen placed at an

angle of 30 to Thus poential energy in this case is given by
the direction of magnetic field of 5 x 10** T,
experiences a
moment of couple 2.5x
10 Nm. lf the length of the magnet is U=-m-B= -mB cos 180°
5 cm, then what will be its pole strength? -032x 015x (-1)
Sol. Here, 0 =30°, 40.018J
B=5x 10T Exomple 5.19 Cosider the sittuation shoum
in the diagram,
and t= 2.5x 10 N-m, where A small magnetised needle A isplaced at a centre marked
and 2/ = m; as ). The diection of its mametic moment
=5cm 0.05 =?
m
is indicated bv arrow.
The other arrous show different pusitions (aUxd orientations
:.Torque te MB sin O
m2l3 sin 9
magnetic moment) of another identical magnetised needle X.of
the
2.5 x 10
(i) In which confirration, the sstem is mot
in eqatlibrtum?
BOIsin0 5x 10(0.03)sin 30°
In which configation is the system in (a) stable and
m 2x 10 A-m (b) unstalle equilibrium?
(iii) Which configration corresponds to the kouest potential
Exomple 5.16 The work done in turning a magnet
of magnetic enerqv among all the confiqvations shou,
moment 1/bv an angle 9% from the meridian is
'times
corresponding uork done to turn it throtugh an angle of
the

What is the vzlte of n?

60.
Sol. Here, W; = MBlcos 0° - cos 90°) =MBO =
–0) MB
Similarly, W, = MIBlcos ()°- cos 60°)
MB
2
W
Sol.Potential energy arises due to the PE of dipole X in
=2W, n=2 magnetic field of A
Eynmole 517
Exd A Ikr
free to rotate abvut a tertical axis t
magnetgmoment 2.0 A-n is
its centre, The
Magnetic field due to A.
On end position, B, -Po. M
mugnet is released from rest from the east-west position.
Find 4r Talong
the kinetic enerqv of the manet os it takes the noth-south
psition. The horizontal component of the eath's magnetic field s
On broadside position, B,
-Ho. M
opposite to M
is B=25 uT. Earth's magretic 4n
field is from south to orth.
Sol. (ain in kinetic energy = loss in potential energy The PE. U= -MB= -MB cos 0
Thus, KE =U, -U, For stable equilibrium. U is minimum i.e., 0 = 0
MB cos 0 For unstable equilitbrium, U is aximum i.e., 0 = 180°
As U=- (i) In N, and N, when not in equilibrium
KE =-MB
co--MB cos 0° ) =
MB
(il (a) X, N, in stable equilibrium and (b)XN, in unstable
equilibriun.
Substituting the values, we ave,
(i) X, coresponds to lowest PE,
KE = (2.0) (25x 10")j= 5O uJ U-AMB cos 0
Example 5.18 A short bxur magnet of magnetic momen! cos 0°= Mo24/
=Umin
m= 032Jr is placed in a uniform magnetic field 0.15 T. If 4zr
the bas magnet is free to rotate in the plane of the field, which
orientati uvuld cowrespond to its (i) stable and (iil uistuble Oscillations of a freely suspended magnet
equilibrium? What is the potential energy of the magnet in
each case? When a smallhar magnet of magnetic moment M is placed
Sol. (i) When m is parallel to B, then the magnet is in stable in a uniform magnetic field B such as it is free to vibrate
cquilibrium, in a horiz0ntal plane of magnetic field B about a vertical
axis passing through its centre of mnass. This bar magnet
.:.
PE in this case is given by. oscillates. The restoring torque in this case will be,
U-mB= -mB cos 0 =-ASIO : For small oscillation, sin0 -0)
-0.32 x 0.15 x | = -0.048] The deflecting torque on the magnet is
(ii) When m is anti-parallel to B, then the magnet will be in
unstable cquilibrium, T=la=d0
0=180° d
340 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

where is the motnent of inertia of the magnet about the The table gien below gives a comparison between an
electric dipole and a magnetic dipole.
axis of rotation and is the angular acceleration.
d? S. N.
Physical quantity to Electrie dipole Magnetic dipole
be compared
In cquilibrium, deflecting torque = Restoring torque
1. Dipole moment p2) M- ml2)
-MID MB
Or -00. where o 2 Direction of dipole I'rotn negative From south to
dt charge to the riorth pole
mxnent
« positive charge
i.e., angular acceleration angular displacement
3 Net force in unifotm field

So, the oscillations of a frecly suspended magnet in a 4 Net toryue in uniform fied t=pxE t = MKB
uniform magnetic field are simple harrmonic. The period of
vibration is given by
5
Ficd at far away point lalong p)
r
lalorng M)
Dn the axis 4

6 Field at far awav point

Dn perpendicular 4 nE
bisector loppposite to p) lopposite to M)
Magnetic fieldB can be calculated from above equation
7. Potential energy U,=-M-B
and is given as --pcos0 =-MBom)
8. Wotk done in rotating -,- - cos,
MT? the dipole pf (cos, cos0,) MBlcos0,

Exomple 5.20 A magnetic needle is free to oscillate in a Note in the tabie, 0 s the angte between field (E or B) and dipole moment (p or M)
niform nagnetic field as shou in fiqure. The magnetic
moment of mauetic needle is 7.2 Am and moment of inertia
I= 6.5x 10 k m. The number of oscillations performed in
Magnetism and Gauss's law
3 s is 10. Calculate the magnitude of mugetic field? The Gauss's law of magnetism states that, "the surface
integral of a magretic feld over a closed surface is zero ie., the
net magnetic flux thronugh any clsed surface is aluays zero."
fB-dS = 0
Consequences of Gauss's law
Number of revolutions 5 a
=
Sol. Here, T 0.5 s (i) Consider a Gassian surface (any closed surface
Time taken 10
enclosing one of the poles (say south) of the magnet i
M-7.2Am", l - 6.5 x 10 kgm? shown in figure. Here, the number of field lines
entering the Gaussian surface is same as the nunber of
As Te 2r VAMB MB lines leaving it. i.e., net magnctic flux for the whole
The magnitude of the magnetic ficld is Gaussian surface is zero.

B=
4x 3.14x 6.5x 10 =1.42 x
10T
MT 7.2 x
(0.5F

Comparison between an electric dipole

and a magnetic dipole: The electrostatic Gussian
surface
analogue Fig. 5.19 Magnetic field lines are continues
The behaviour of a magnetic dipole (may be a bar magnet (i) The Gauss's theorem in magnetism implies that
also) is similar to the behaviour of an electric dipole. The isolated nagnetic ples do not exist.
only diflerence is that the clectric dipole moment P is (ii) case of open surface
In =

replaced by magnetic dipole moment M and the constant BS

is replaced by o4n (magnetic flux associated with the surfacc)
(iv) The magnetic poles always exist as unlike pairs of
equal strengths.
Check point 5.1
1. Magnetic length is 8. The intensity of magnetic field due to an isolated pole of
(a) less than geometric lençth strength m at a point drstant r from it will be proportional to
(b) equal to geometric length m
(b) (c)
(c) greater than geometric length m
(d) None of the atbove
9. A particle of charge q and mass m moves in a circular orbt
2. Magneic ines of torce due to a bar magnet do not intersect of radiuS with angular spced o The ratio of the magnitude
because of its magnetic moment to that of ts angular momentum is
(a) a pornt atways has a single ret magnetic field qor qo q?
(b) the ines have simdlar charges and so repe each other (b) (c) (d
2m 2m 2rm
(c) the lines aways drverge trom a sngie point
10. bar magnet of magnetic moment M, is placed in a
A
(d) None of the atbove
magnetic feld of induction B The torque exerted on it is
3. The urnit ot pole strength rs (a) MxB (b) -B-M
(a) A-n (b) Am
Am* (c) (d) A-m? (c) MB (d) M. B

4. A bar magnet of magnetc moment M, is axially cut into two 11. The coupie actng on a magnet of length 10 cm and pole
equal parts. It these two pIeces are arranged perpendicular strength 15 A-m, kept in a field of B 2x 10 T,at an angle
to each other, the resultant magnetc moment is M, Then, of 30 is
the value of M/M, is
(a) 15x 10 N-m (b) 15×10- N-m
(c) 15x 10 N-m (d) 15x 10 N-m
(b) 1
() 2
12. A bar magnet is held at right angle to a uniform magnetic
5. A:a pount on the nght bisector of a magnetic dpole. the fheld. The couple acting on the magnet is to be halved by
magnetc rotating it from thiS position. The angle of rotation is
(a) potential vares as 1/r (a) 60 (b) 45
(b) potentia is zero at all points on the rnght bisector (c) 30 (d) 75*
(C) tieid varies as r
13. a bar magnet of magnetic moment Mis freely suspended
It
(d) freld s perpendicular to the axs ot dpole in a uniform magnetic feld of strength 8, then the work done
6. The tato of the magnetic felds due to small bar magnet in in rotating the magnet through an angle 0 is
end poston an broad side on position is (at equal distance (a) MB(1 - sin 0) (b) MB Sin 0
fron the magnet) (c) MB cos 9 (d) MB(1 - cos 0)
(a) 1/4 (b) 1/2 (c) () 2 14. The effect due to unifom magnetic teld on a treely
7. Two solenoids acting as short bar magnets P and O are SUspended magnetic needle is
afranged such that their centres are on the X-axi and are (a) Both torque and nat force are present
separated by a large dstance The magnetC axes olP and (b) torque is present but no net torce
(c) Both torque and re! force ae absent
O are along X ard Y-axes. respectivety At a point R, michway
() net torce is pesent but not torque
behveen ther centres. if B is the magitude of induction due
to Q, then the magnitude of total inducton at R due to the 15. The net magnetic flux through any ciosed surtace kept in a
both magnets is magnet:c teld ts

(a) 38 (b) V58 (d 8 (a) zero (c) 4xu,

carth's magnetic north pole is located near the geographic

2) Earth's magnetism south pole.
In fact, the configuration of the earth's magnetic field is
Our earth behaves as a huge powerful magnet. The value very much similar to the one that would be achieved by
of magnetic field on the surface of earth is a few tenths of burying a gigantic bar magnet deep in the interior of the
a gauss {1
G= 10 T) and its strength varies from place to carth.
place on the earth's surface. The earth's magnetic south The axis of earth's magnet makes an angle of 1 1.5° with
pole is located near the geograplhic north pole and the the carth's rotational axis. The magnetic lines of force
around the earth is shown in figures.
 342 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Some definitions related to earth's magnetism are (u) Magnetic Inclination or Angle of dip (0)
() Geographic axis The straight line passing through The angle of dip 0) at a place is the angle between the
the geographical north and south poles of the earth direction of earth's magnetic fieid B) and horizontal line in
is called its geographic axis. It is the axis of rotation the maguetic meridian. At earth's magnetic poles, the
of the earth. magnetic field of ecarth is vertical iLe., angle of dip is 90", the
(ii) Magnetic axis The straight line passing through the
freely suspended magnetic needle is vertical there. At
magnetic north and south poles of the earth is called magnetic equator, field is horizontal or angle of dip is 0°.
the magnetic axis.
(iüilMagnetic equator It is the great circle on the earth (i) Horizontal and vertical component of earth's
perpendicular to the magnetic axis. magnetic field
(iv) Magnetic meridian The vertical plane in the Let B, be the net magnetic field at some point. H and Vx
direction of B is called magnetic meridian. the horizontal and vertical components of B,. Let is the
(v) Geographic meridian The vertical plane passing angle of dip at the some place, then we can see that,
through the line joining the geographical north and cos
south poles is called the geographic meridian. H= B, 0

Axis of rOtat ion

and V=B, sin 0
...(i
of the cath Geographical
Geographical North
north pole Magnetic
south pole
Magnetic
gnetic North H
equati

Geogtaphikal
Meridian

Magnetic
Magtetlc Meridian
north pole Geographtcal
sERth le

Fig. $.20 Magnetic field of the earth

Fig. 5.22 Elements of eurth 's magnetic field
Note Earth's magnetsc field vares irregularty trom place to place and al a place
it varies with time als.
Squaring and adding Eqs. () and (ii), we get
Elements of earth's magnetism
Tlhe earth's magnetic field at a place can be completely Further, dividing Eqs. (ii) by Eq. (i), we get
described by three parameters which are called elements
of earth's magnetic field. These three elements are =
tan (G)
(i) Magnetic declination or Angle of declination (a) By knowing H
and0at some place we can find B, and V
At anv place the acte angle between tthe magnetic at that place.
meridian and the geographical nneridian is called angle of Note
declination 4. The value of a is small in India. It is (°41' t At magnetic equatar, - 5, cos 0°-B, and at poles - B, cos 90-0
H H

E
for Delli and 0°58IW for Munmbai. This ncans that at Smularly. at magrett equatot V - B, sin 0*- 0 and at poles
yn 90°
this place compass needle tells true north very accurately.
V
-B, -6,
2 tan - 2 tan o where s magnetic latttude ot place
True North
3. Magneuc maps shaw variation of mnagnetic elements from place to plad
Some important lines drawn on magnetic maps are
-Angle of decliration o
ts o! equal dip or
(6 Isoctinic tines These are the trnes joining points
tie
A
inclinaton lune joning places of zero dup s called acnic lne or
magretiC rquato
(n) Isogonic lines These are the lines joiting places of equal dectnation, Th

line qning plare of zeto dectnation s (alled agonic line.

(i) tsodynamic lines These are the
yon
lnes5 jCaning places having the same
Fig. 5.21 Determining angle of declination value af honzontal comgonent of rarth's magnetx feid
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter (343

Exomple 521 Aconpass needle of magetic mnnt 60 A-m Direction of B The earth's field lies in a vertical plane 12
is pointing vyruphical noth at a certain place. It experiences west of geographic meridian at an angle of 60atove the
a torque of.2x 10 Nm. The horizontal conponent of
horizontal line.
earth's magnetic field at that place is 40 uWb/m. What is tlhe
angle of declination at tat place? Exomple 525 Amnagnetic ncedle suspended in a vertical
Sol. A compass
plane at 30° from the maqnetic meridian makes an angle of
necdle in stale equilibzium position peints -15" with the horizontal. Find the
towards magnctic nth i.e., aleong the hotizontal conjouent H tre ongle of di.
of carth's Iagetic fieki. Wunit is turned throgh the angle Sol. In a vetical plae at 30 fren the magnetic meridian, the
of drialion a, o as to wint gevgtaplial notb, then it korizontal comoent is,
Cxperieces a torque of magnitude Ml sin a.
.. MH
sin a =1.2 10 N-n (givenl
Af = G0 A-m", Magnetic Heos 0
Hete,
Meridian
H=40x 10 Wh/m'
1.2x 10"
Sin a
-0.5.. a 30
G0x 10x 10
Example 522 In the magretic meridian of a cetain place, the
horizontal compent of earth's maqnetic field is 0.26 G and
the dip angle is (6KP. Find H =| cos30
(i) vertical comqwwnt of earthi's maqnetic feld.
While vertical conpopent is still V. Therefore, apparent dip
til the net ragnetic field at this place.
will be given by tan
Sol. (iiven, H= 0.26 Gand = 60° IH cos 3(0
=
tan0 but tan 0 (where O = true angle of dip)

VHtan 0
(0.26) tan 60° 0,45 G
tan 0 tan
fiü) HB, cos 0 cos 30
H 0.26 0-tan tan cos 30°1
B, =
-

G
cos cos 60° =0.52
tan(tan 45°cos 30°))* 41°
Example 523 The horizontal and ertical conNnent of
Example S26 A ship is to reach a place 10° south uest. In
eurths feld at a place are 0.22 gauss and 0.38 uss, of
repectielv. Calculate the angle of dip and restultant intensity which direction shnld it be stecred if the decliation at the
of eath's field. olace is 18 uvst of north?
Sol. As the ship has to rex a place l0° south
Sol. Hee. of west i.e..
H=022G,V =038G along OP, so it should be steefed west of magnetic north at
Now, tan 0 038
1.7272 angle of 90°-18° + 10°= 82°
II 022
:. Angle of ip, 8= 59° 56
Resultant magnetic field of the carth ix
ti8...MI:
GW GE
B='4 o22 +
0.38 =
0.427 (G
A

Example 524 At a certain kxation in Africa, a conpss

foints
12" uest of the
xrui orth. Te torth tip of the mupetic S S
eedle of a dip circle placed in the plane of agnetic meridian Example 5.27 A dip circle shous an aparent dip
points G) ane the horizotal. The of 45" at a
orizontal component of the place where the true dip is 30°. If the dip circle is rotated
nrth's field is measzured to le 0.16 G. Specify the direction and through 90°, what apprent dip will it show?
mmagnitute of the erth's feld at the
Sol. Using the relation. cos
iwutio. Sol. ,
and 0, ate the angles of dip in two atbitary planes which
HB, 0, we get the magnitude ofB are perpendicular to cach other.
given by
Herc,
0.16 0.16 4=45°and 030
B.= As, cut'0=cot + co'0,
cos o cos 60°
where 0 is ture dip.
cot 30° = co
=0.16x 2=0,32G 45°+ cot
0,
B=0.32x 10T ::1G-10) cot0, 3-12 cot 0, =1.414 . 0, =
35.2
344) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Example 528 A short magner (M = 4 x 10*A-m) lying in a Sol.The geomagnetic poles are in end-on-position.
horizontal plane with its north-pole points 37° east of north. The magnetic field at geomagnetic poles
Find the net horizontal field at a point of the magnet (O.1 m
auay fromn it B, =11u T) (sin37 = 3/5 cos37° = 4/5)
B

8x 10*T
4% R'
Sol.
The magnctic field at point P
Af con (0 RHg+3 cos0}*
4KR

-a+3cm'o?
2
M sin
cos' 120°2
-xl+3
Due to magnet at P
2M cos 0
B: 1
r

10x2x 4x 10° x1 tan a -tunoan120

5 =64x 10T
(0.1
Ho Msin
B,
a - tan"
3
10x 4x 10x
3-2.4x10T Dip is an angle made by the carth's magnetic field with the
(0.1 horizontal plane
Since, B and B, are in same direction
B -B+ B, = 64x 10+1| x
10 =174x 1oT ma-90°

Neutral points
When we trace magnetic lines of force around a magnet
B,
using a compass necdle, we obtain the resultant of the
magnetic field of magnet and that of the earth. In the plo
of the resultant nagnetic field, we come acrOSs points at
= V308.52x which field B) due to the magnet becomes equal and
10T opposite to the horizontal component 4) of the earth's
2.4x 10 field i.e., B= H. Therefore, the net magnetic field at thes
tanß - 0]4

Exomple 529
has a magnitude
he
8x 10 eyd
17.4x 10%

magnetic field at qeomagnetic poles

the magnitude
and the
,
points will be zero.
the ponts where net magnetic field due the
to
magnet and due to the earth is zero are called neutra
a
direction of the field at pxoint on points.
the earth's surface where the
radius makes an angle of 120 with the axis of the earths A small compass needle placed at a neutral point shall
an:
Therefore, it can set itself in
assumed magnetic dipole. What is the inclination (dip) at this
point?
ex
ee io Toreforque.
, which may be different from usual N-S direction.

North (i) When a magnet is placed with its north pole toware
By geographic south, then neutral points lie on axial
line of the magnet.
Vertiçal
At each neutral point,
e-12
B, o 211r
=H
South
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter (345

For a short magnet (l << r).H Ho 2M The pole strength of the magnet,
M 2.582
m 2
0.30
-8606 A-m

N Example 531 A short bar magnet is placed with its north pole
pointing north. The neutral point is 10 cm auay from the centre
of the magnet. 1[ ll = 04 G. Calculate the magnetic monment of
the maqnet.
Sol. When north pole of the magnet points towards magnetic
orth. null point is obtained on perpendicular bieetor of the
magnet. Simultaneusly, magnetic field due to the bar magnet
Fig. 5.23 Neutral oints on axial line should b cqual to the horizontal component of earth's
(ii) When a magnet is placed with its north pole towards magnetic fiekd H.
geographic north, neutral points lie on equitorial line Thus,
H
of the magnet. (H/4n)
M
At each neutral point, B,
=
Substituting the values, we have
+
4r ( ?)*2 (0.4 x 1000x 10 m
M
10
-0.4 A-

For a short magnet ( << r), H= "o M

4n 3
Tangent law
Tangent Law states that, if a magnet is placed in two
magnetic fields right angle to each other, then it will be
acted upon by two couples tending to rotate it in opposite
directions. It will be deflected through an angle O, such
that the two couples balance each other.
B
nB

Fig. 5.24 Neutral points on equiatorial line

Note nhen the magnet is held vertcally on the board there will be only one
neutral pont on a horirontal board In the other orentations, there will B
be two neutral ponts

Example 5.30 A bar magnet 30 cm long is placed in the

magnetic meridian uith its north ple pointing south. The
reutral foint is ohsered at a distance of 30 cm from its one
end. Calculate the pole strength of the magnet. Gien horizontal
conponent of earth's field = (34 G. Fig. 5.25 Tangent law
Sol. Here, 2/ = 30 cn or l=15 cm = 015 m, And the tangent of the angle of deflection gives the ratio
re 30 cn = 030 m of the two fields as,
= x
and H 03-4G= 034 10-T where 0 is angle between magnet and magnctic field B,.
When magnet is placed with its north pole pointing south, B

then neutral point is obtaincd on its axial line. tan 0 :

or Ha, 2Mr B,
BH =H

Applications of tangent law

M=,H-1 21 Tangent galvanometer
-
0.34 x
10x (030 015 a device used to measure very small current, It is a
It is
10-7* 2x 0.30 moving mngnet type galvanometer and works on the
x principle of tangent law.
034 10x (0.0675) 2582 A-m
10 x 2x 030
346) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

In case of tangent galvanometer, a magnetic compass ncedle where k= 2r1 is constant for a given galvanometer at
is placed horizontally at the centre ofa vertical fixed current
carrying coil whosc plane is in the magnetic meridian. given place and is called reduction factor of galvanometer.

Sensitivity
Sensitivity means, the measure of change in the deflection
produced by a unit current.
It is given by,

d ksec0

For good sensitivitv, the change in deflection should be

large for a given fractional change of current.

Note
Fig. 5.26 Tangent galvanometer 1 The tangent galvanometer is most sensitve when deflection is around 45

As shown in figure, pointer Pis rigidly attached to Example 5.32 In a tangent galvnometer, when a curret of
compass neelle and perendicular to it. The compass 10 mÀ is pswd, the deflection is 31". By wtat percentage, the
needle together with pointer can rotate freely alout the curment has to le increased, so as to proxduce a deflection of 42°:
vertical axis. Sol. Ilete, h - 10nmA, 0, -319,1, a ?. 0, = 420
When o current flows through the coil, its plane is
parallel compass needle and coincides with magnetic
to As.
tan ,
meridian. When current passes through the coil, it tan 0
produces magnetic field at the centre which deflects the
10y an
12
tan ,
compass necedle and pointer deflects through the same angle.
tan 31°
The magnetic field proxuced at centre due to a coil is,
10x 0.9
15 mA
HoNI 0.6
B
2r Percentage incrcase in current,

where Nis number of turns in the coil, ris radius of coil

U,
-4)105-10, 100= 50%
10
and /is current in the coil.
Field B, is perpendicular to plane of coil, i.e., Example 533 The coil of a tangent galvanometer of rudius
12 cm is having 200 urns. If the horizontal compnent of
perpendicular to magnetic meridian,
component of earth's earth's magnetic field is 25 uT. Find the current uhich gives a
f epehdicular to horizontal
i.e.,
field. deflection of 60.
Ima
The resultant horizontal magnetic field Sol. Given, r= tadius of coil = 12 cm = 0.12 m,
=
N Number of turns of coil 200,
= x
H=25uT 25 1oT
B, =

tan (tangent law of perpendicular field) and 60

H As we know, I = k tan 9
The needle will stay in cquilibrium when its length is where, 2rf!
parallel to B.
The deflection of the needle from its original position O is 2rll
given by. lan0
H
tan 9 EB oNI 2x 0.12 x 25 x
10x tan 60
2r
4nx 10x 200
2rH tan 0 = k tan 0 0,042 A
 Chapter 05 Magnetism and matter 347

Vibration magnetometer (iv) Comparison of magnetic moments by sum and

difference method
Vibration magnetometer is an instrunent which is used to Sum position
find magnetic moment of bar magnet and to conpare
•M,
magnetic fields of two magnets. This device works on the
M,
principle that whenever a freely suspended magnet in a
uniform nagnetic ficld is disturbed from its cyuilibrium Fig. 5.28
position, it starts vibrating about the mean position. Net magnetic moment, M, = M, + M,
Iosion head Net moment of inertia, I, = 1, + I,
e
Sctrew Time period of oscillation of this pair in earth's
GLuss tube
magnetic field H,
T.= - 25at, +
-Stirrup
2x, M,)! ...(i)

Frequency, v,
1Plane
nirror
2r
Magneti Differencc position This mcthod can be used when
meridian magnets are placed with their poles in opposite
Fig. 5.27 Iibration magnetometer direction.

Time period of oscillation of experimental bar magnet (with N

- M,
magnetic monent M in earth's magnetic field ) is given by
Fig. 5.29
the formula, T = 2r where I = moment of inertia of
VMH Net magnetic monent,
short bar nagnet. M, = M - M,
(i) Comparison of horizontal components of earth's
Net monent of inertia, I I, +l}
magnetic field at two places
and T, = 2* MH 21 M, - ...(ii)
T= JLsince I and M of the magnet are M,#
2,-
VMH M,
Frequency, v.a
1
-M,)H
Constant

So, (ii) Comparison of two magnetic fields Suppose we

H H, T wish to compare the magnetic fields B, and at B

(ii) Determination of magnetic moment of a magnet some point Pdue to two magnets. For this vibration
The experimental (given) rmagnet is put into Imagnetometer is so placed that the centre of its
vibration magnetometer and its time period Tis magnet lies on P Now onc of the given magnets is
determined. placed at some known distance from Pin the
magnetic meridian, such that point P lies on its axial
Now, T= 2 MH M= line and its north pole points north. In this position
H.T? the fields B, at P produced by the magnet will be in
(ii) Comparison of magnetic moment of two magnets the direction of H. Hence, the magnet suspended in
of samc size and mass the magnetometer will vibrate in the resultant
, magnetic field H + B,. Its period of vibration is
As, T= 2r VMH' here I and H are constants noted, say it is T,, then
T, = 2n
So, M
Now the first magnet is replaced the sccond
MT magnet and the second magnet is placed in the same
position and again the time period is noted.
 348 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

If the field produced at Pdue to this magnet be B, Inthe vertical north-south plane (magnetic meridian), the
and the new time period be T,. then necdle oscillates in the total earth's magnetic field B, and in
vertical east-wet plae (plane perpendicular to the magnetic
meridias) it (scillates only in eath's vertical conponent V. If
T; = 2r
MH + B,) its time period te T; and T,. then

Finally the time perixd of the magnetometer under and

the influence of the carth's agnetic field alone is MB,

determined. Let it be T, thetn From above equLations, we can find

= 2%.
T
VMH T B, n²
Solving above three equations for T, T; and T, we
can show that Similatly,

B,

B,
T'-T)T} Further.
B = sec sec 30°
-
2

T'- T}) T; and tan 0 tan 3(0)°

Exomple 534 A br maget of length 5 cm, width 3 cm and J3
height 2 cm takes 5 s to conplete n
owillation in vibration
magnetoeter placed in a hurizontal muyretic field of 20 T.
The mass of this lrr nagnet is 250 g. fo) Find the magnetic
moment of the magnet. (6) If the magnet is put in the n,= 21.5 oscillations/min
magnetometer with its 0.5 cm edgc horizontal, uhat uvwld be
the new time period?
Sol. (a) Moment of inertia of magnet is given by. n, 15.2 oscillations/min
m'+b')
Example 536 A magnet performs 15 oscillations per minute
12 in a horizontal plane, uher angle of dip is 60 and earth's
where m = ass of magnet tnal field is 0.5 G. Ar omxher place, where total field is 0.6 G,
L25015'+3')x 1ox 10 =7.08 x 10 kgm? the nunet performs 20 oscillatiors per minute. What is the
12 angle of dip at this place?

Also, T -
Sol. As, H =Bcos
2n,M r' where, H = horizontal component of earth's magnetic field,
On putting values, we get B=total carth's magnetic field
M:*3.14
x (7.08 x
10) 5.58 Am And 0 =angle of dip
x
Then, H =B cos and H, B, cos 8,
20 10x 5x 5
(b) New moment of incrtia is given by = Further, I, =2r
12

::T=2% MH T,
and -2n i, MB, cos
0,
T_= 0.86 B, cos 0,

B cos
.:.T= Tx 0.86 =5x 0.86 4.30s
cos 0, =
Example 535 A nagretic needle perforns 20 oscillations per
mimite in a koriztal plane. If the angle of dip le 30°, then
how many oscillations r miute will this needle perform in
tertical north south plhme and in vertical east-west plane?
Sol. In horizontal plane, the agnetic nevdle oncillates in
cos 60 0,74
horizontal compotnent H.

0, = cos (0.74) = 42.2°

VMH
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter (349

Exomple 537 The time period of vibration of tuv magnets in

Moment of inertia of magnet, I
stum position (magnets placed with similar poles on one side one 12
above the other) is 3s When polarity of weaker magnet is
rewrsed the combination makes l12 oscillations per minte. New monent of inertia, m/
What is the ratio of magnetic moments of tuw magnets?
Sol. 60s
Il5I2x8
Here, I, =3s, T, min
12

- M, 5 -3² 168 Now, T=2

T; T,
MB,

Example 5.38 A small bar magnet having a magnetic moment

of 9x 10 A-m² is suspended at its centre of gravity by a and II8
MB /2)
light torsionless string at a distance of10* m vertically aloe a
long, straight horizontal uire carrying a current of 1.0 A from
east to west. Find the frequency of oscillation of the magnet 2 T 2
about its equilibrium position. The moment of inertia of the Example 540 The time period of the magnetic in an
magnet is 6 x 10 kq-m.H=3x 10TA oscillatiorn magnetometer in the earth magnetic field is 2 s. A
Sol. The magnctic moment of the bar magnet is, short bar magnet is placed to the north of the magnetometer, at
M= 9x 10A-m² a searation 10 cm from the oscillating magnet, with
ui its
The magnitude of the magetic ficld at the location of the pole pointing touards north. The time periad becomes half.
magnet due to current carrying wire is, Caleulate the magnetic monent of this short magnet.
B, =12uT.
B=Ho(2x 10 1.0)
2nr 10
-2x 10 Wb/m (S to M Short
magnet
The earth's horizontal ragnetic ficld is, 10cm
H =3x 10 T= 3x lo- Wb/m?
B+H=5x 10 wb/m'
The fregucncy of oscillation will be,
MB + ) Ihete. I= moment of Tine period T
2x
inertia) Sol
-2rT- B*
1
(9x 10x (5x 109) (S to N]
Let M is magret moment due to short magnet and B is a
nagnetic field due to short magnet, along south to north
6x 10
Given, T, =2s B, =12 uT
-1.38 x 10 Hz T, =lsB, = B+ =12 + ® B

Example 539 A thin rectangular magnet suspended freely has B+ B') T

a period of oscillation equal to T. Now, it is broken into tuo

equal haiwes (each thaving half of the original lengthl and one
piece is made to oscillate freely in the same field. If its periot 12+ B"

of oscillation is T. Then, find the ratio T/T. 12

Sol When magnet is divided into two equal parts, the magnetic B =36T
dipole moment,

M= pole strength x{pole strength remain same]

2 2 36x 10
10 x -
244
Also, the mass of magnet becomes half i.e., m' = (0.10
M= 0.18 Am²
Check point 5.2
1. The earth's magnetic field is
9. The dip at a piace is & For measuring it. the axis of the dp
(a) 10T (b) 10T necdle is perpendicular to the magnetic mericdian, It the axis
(C) 10T (d) None of these of the dip needle makes an angle Owith
2. Magnetc meridian is a the magnetic
meridian, then the apparent dip wall be grven by
all

(a) poirnt (b) horzontal plane (a) tan 8 cosec0 (b) tan 8 sin
(c) vertcal pianc (d) lne along N-S (c) 1an8 cos0 (d) tan ô
Sec 0
3. The angle between the magnetC mendian and geographical 10. At a neutral point
merndan is called (a) teid of magnet is zero
(a) angle of dip (b) angle of declination (b) teldof earth is zero
{c) magnetic monent (C) power of magnetic fekd (c) feks of maget is perpendicuar to field to earth
4. Angle o dip al the equator is () None of the above
(a) 0 (b) 30"60 (c)
(d) 90 11. Tangent galvanometer measures
5. Earth's magnetic field always has a horizontal component (a) capactance (b) current
except at (c) resistance (d) potential dillerence
(a) magnetic oquator (b)magnetic pole 12. To tangent galvanornelers A and B are identical except in
(c) geographical north poe () overywhere ther rumber of turns. They ae connected in seres. On
6. If
H=V,then find angle of dip. (where, symbols have passingacuieithomher
are produced The
them, deflections of 60 and 30
ot turns in A

(a) 31
ardb
their usual meanings) (b) 3:1 (C) 1:2 (d) 2:1
(a) 60 (b) 30 (c) 45° (C) 90"
13. Vibrafior magnetcmeter is uSed tor comparng
(a) ragnetic fields (b) earth's feld
7. Let V and Hbe the vertical and horizontal comporents of (c) magnetic moments (d) Al ot these
earth's magnetc field at ary pont on earth. Near the north
pole 14. The time period of a freely suspended bar magnet in a field
is 2 s It is cut into two equal parts along its axis, then the
(a) V >>H (b)V<H (c) V= H (d) V=H=0
a
tme peiod is
8. If agnet is suspended at angle 30° to the magnetic 05 s
(a) 4 s 0
(b) (c) 2s (d) 25s
merdian. then the dip needle makes ancale of 45 with the
A
15. bar magnet suspended freely ina unitorm magnetic field
horizontal The real dip is
(a) tan '(V3/2) (b) tan'(W3) is vibratng with a lime period of 3 s f the tield strength is
increas0d to 4 times of the earlier fietd strength, then the
(c)
tan") () tan
time period (in second) will be
(a) 12 (b) 6 (c) 1.5 () 0.75

through which the flux increases to a larger value and are

3) Magnetic induction and known as ferromagnetic substances.

magnetic materials Some important terms used to describe

Several experiments have been done which showed that the properties of magnetic materials
magnetic lines get mo«lified due to the presence of certain
materials in the magnetic field. Few substances such as
(i) Magnetic induction (B)
O, air. platinum, aluminium, ctc., slhow a very small The number of magnetic lines of force inside a magnetic
increase in the magnetic lux passing through them, when substance crossing er unit area norm:al to their direction is
placed in a magnetic field. Such sutstances are called callet the magnetic induction or magnetic flux density
paramagnetic substances. inside the stutntance. It is denoted ty B. The Sl unit of Bis tesla
Few other sutistances such as H,. 1,0, Cu, Zn, Sb, ctc. (Dor webr/metre (Wb/m'). Thc CGS unit is gauss (G).
show a very snall decrease in flux and are said to be 1
Wb/m'= 1T= |0 G
diamagnetic. There are other substances like Fe, Co ctc.,
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter 351

(v) Relative magnetic permeability (u,)

It is the ratio of the tmagnetic permeability u of the
substance to the permeability of free space.
Thus,

#, is a pure ratio, hence dimensionless. For vacuum its

value is 1.
Fig. 5.30 Magnetic field lines of a magnetic material #, can also be defined as the ratio of the magnetic field B
in the sustance when placed in magnetic field B,. Thus,
(i1) Intensity of magnetisation (/) B
"Intensity of magnetisation (D is defined as the magnetic B
moment per unit volume of the magnetised substance." For paramagnetic substance,
,
>1.
This basically represents the extent to which the substance
=
For dianagnetic substatce, <land
H,

is magnetised. Thus, I For ferromagnetic substance, #, >>1.

The SI unit of I is anpere/metre (A/m). Its dimensional (vi) Magnetic susceptibility )

formula is
[M°L'rAJ It the property of the suhst ance which shows how casily
is
bar magnet,
a substance be magnetised when kept in a magnetising
Note for l=mfk
field. It can also be defined as the ratio of intensity of
() Magnetic intensity or magnetic field strength (H) magnetisation in a substance to the magnelic intensity
)
Wn applied to the substance i.e.,
The capability of the magnetising field to magnetise the
substance is expressed by means of a vector H, called the
magnetic intensity of the field. It is defined through the
vector relation, a scalar quantity with no units and dimensions.
It is
For paramagnetic substance, z is small and poitive.
H-I
The SI unit of H is same as that of I i.e., ampere/metre
(A/m). The CGS unit is oersted.
(vi) Relation between ,
For diamagnetic substance, y is smalland negative.

and zm
We have, B=u,1+ H).
Note
or B

,
1,
In vacUum, I
0..H

intensty of solenod ts = = relative permeability

2. The magnetic field H

nt is independent of the But

3
matersal of the core of a solenod
When magnetic material s kept inside the solenoid, thenBB,
where, B, = magnetx fieid due to magnetising fheld.
B, ,
B
m+1
and B, magnetc freid ueto magntrsatuon of the material Example 5.41 The magnetic moment ofa magnet
15 cm x 2cm x1cn) is 1.2 A-m. Calculate its intensity of
(iv) Magnetic permeability (u) magnetisation.
"lt is defined as the ratio of the magnetic induction B Sol. Given, magnetic moment, M= 1.2 A-n
inside thc magnetised substance to the magnetic intensity Volume, V =
15x2x )x 10 m' =30x 10m'
Hof the magnetising field i.e., :. Intensity of magnetisation,
B 1.2
H 1)x 10
-4x 10'Am!
45x2x
It isbasically a measure of conduction of magnetic lines of
Example 5.42 Relative permeability of irorn is 5500, wht will
force through a substance. The Sl unit of magnetic be its magnetic suscetibility.
permeability is weber/ampere-metre (Wb/A-m) or tesla
metre-ampere (mA ).
Sol. As we know that. u, =l + Xm 5500 z. 1+
Xm 5500-1 =5199
 352 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol.
2

Example 5.43 The magnetising field of 20 CGS units

a fuux of 2400 CGS units in a produces
lur of inn of crss-section 0.2 cm (i) s
Calculate the (i) permeability and (ii) susceptibility •N
So. .
Magnetic field.
of the bar.

B-9_2400x 10-4
-= 1.20 Wb/ m At centre, Hx north pole
A0.2x 104 dri2lng
() The permeability of the bar material. Hs
B
=S, along south pole
1.2
10 H/m 4n/'
H 20/ 4-v 10J.51x H=Hy + H, 2
(ii) The magnetic susceptibility and permeability of a
tmaterial are related with each other as,

-]: 7.54x 101 -l=599

4n
, 2r' 2n2 x 10
along south pole

(ii) Magnetic field at the centre of magnet,

4nx 10 B=uH + D)
=4nx
Example 5.44 A solenoid having 2000 turns/m
has a core
10-x10 +2x 10|
a material with relatie permeability 220. The area core of
of is
=-10+ Bzx 10 =
(8r -)x 10
4 cm and carries a current of 5A. Calculate (a)
Magnetic V

x 10
intensity (b) Magnetic field (c) Magnetisation () of the core. =24 T, along north pole
Also calculate the pole strength developed.
Sol. Given n = 2000 turus, I=5A, L, =220, A
=4 cm Classification of substances on the
(a) Magnetic intensity, H = nl= 2000 x 5=10000 A/m basis of magnetic behaviour
(b) Magnetic ficld, B =uH =lH,H All substances (whetber solid. liquid or gases) may be classified
4nx 10* x 220x 10,000 88r x
10*T into three categories in terms of their magnetic belhaviour
(c) As we know, B - BH + D (i)paramagnetic, (i) dianagnetic and (ii) ferromagnetic. In the
88Rx 10 4nx 10 a0000 + D following section we will discussed them in details.
2.20 10 =10 + I
x
1. Diamagnetic substances
l =2.20 x 10° -10')=2.19x 10° A/m Diamagnetic substances are those which are repelled by a
(d) Pole strength, m = IA = 2.19 x 10"K4 x 10)= 876 A-m magnetic field.
Example 5.45 The spce within a current carrying solernotd Examples of such substances are bismuth, antimony, gold,
is
filled with magnesium having magnetic susceptibility. quartz, water, alcohol, etc.
Z AM, =.2 10
x What uwill be the percentage increase in They have the following properties.
magretic field? (i) These substances when placed in a magnetic field,
Sol. Magnetic field without magnesium is Bo
=Hf acquire feeble nagnetisation in a direction opposite to
= + that of the applied field. Thus, the lines of induction
With magncsium, B uH ol zH
inside the substance is snaller than that outside to it.
..% increase =|

-Xmy X
100
=
1.2 x
10x 100 =1.2 x 10 IaragTNti
suttaNe
Example 5.46 Consider a lkr magnet having pole strength B«B,
2 A-m, magnetic length 4 cm and area of cross-s s-sectiorl cm?
Find Fig. 5.31 Magnetic field inside a diamagnetic substance
() the magnetisation I.
(ii) In a non-uniform field these
(ii) the magnetic intensity H and
substances move from stronger
(ii) the magnetic field at the centre of magnet. to weaker parts of the external u

Sol. Given, m =2 A-m, 2/ = 4 cm, A =l cm field. As they acquire

m
(i) Magnetisation / Mm27 2
=2x 10'A/m magnetisation in opPposite
Fig. S.32 Diamagnetic
V A-2l A
1x 10 direction, hence, these are substance in external
The dircction will be from S tu Npole weckly repclled by the ficld. field
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter (353

(ii) If a diamagnetic liquid is filled in a narrow U-tube

and one limb is placed in between the pole of an
clectromagnet, then the level of liquid depresses
when the field is switched on.
(iv) The relative permeability H, is slightly less than 1
Fig. 5.36 Paramugnettc substance in external field
i.e., 4, < L

(v) The susceptibility Xm of such substances is always Tlus, they move fotn weaker to strotger rts of the field.
small and negative. It is constant and does not vary (üi) lf a paramagnetic liquid is filled in a lharrow U-tube
with field or the tenperature as shown in figure. and one linb is placed in between the pole pieces of
an clectromagnet
sch that the level of the liquid is in
line with the field, then the liquid will rise in the limb
the field is switched on.

N |S.

Fig. 5.33 L versus Tgraph for diamagnetic substances

(vi)Here, intensity of magnetisation varies inversely

with magnetic field strength i.e., - I < Has shoun "
in figure.
Fig. 5.37

(iv) For paramagnetic sustances, the relative perneability

L, is slightly greater than ene.
(v) Magnetic susceptibility is positive.
Fig. 5.34 I versus H gruph for diamagnetic substances (vi) -Hcune can be given s
Note Diamagnetism is a universal property, but in host of the substances
the effect is so weak that they behave like paramagnetic or
ferromagrnetic, etc

2. Paramagnetic substances
H-
Paramagnetic substances are those which arc attracted Fig. 5.38 Iversus Hgraph for puramagneticsubstances
by a magnetic field.
Examples of such substances are platinun, aluniniuun,
chromium, manganese, CuSO, solution, etc.
Curie's law
They hae the follouing properties According to this law, the magnetic susceptibility of
() The sutstances when placed in a nagnetic field, paramagneticsulstances is inversely proportional to its
acquire a feeble nagnetisation in the saune sense as absolute temperature i.e.,
1
the applied field.
Thus, the magnetic inductance inside the substance
is slightly greater than outside to it. where C is Curie constant,T abs«olute temperature in
Paraagretic kelvin. On increasing temperature. the magnetic
sutstace B>E susceptitbility of paramagnetic naterial decreases and
vice versa as shown is figure. This vuiation can be shown as

Fig. S35 Magnetic fieldinside a

paramagnetic substance
(ii) These substances are attracted towards regions of
stronger magnetic ficld when placed in a
non-unilorm magnetic ficld. Fig. S.39 , rsus T gruph fur parumagnetic suhstances
354) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Exomple 5.47 The magnetic susceptibility of a paramagnetic (v) Susceptibility decreases steady with the rise in
material at -73°C is 0.0075. Find its value at -173°C. temperature. Above a certain temperature known as
Sol. Magnetic susceptibility. Curie temperature, the ferronagnetic substances
Xo = 0.0075 7, -73°C- (-73 + 273) K= =200 K become paramagnetic. It is 1000C for iron, 770°C
+
Ln, m?. 7, -173°Cm (-173 273) 100 K K
for stecl, 360°C for nickel and 1150°C for cobalt.
Aceording to Curie's law, z.m (vi) Its I-H curw can be drun as

i. Ratio of magnetic susceptibilitics, mXm 7,

200

100 2
=
Zm, 2%,m 2x 00075 0015

Example 5.48 A soleoid hving 5000 turns/mn carries a

curent of 2A. An aluminium ring at tenperuture 300K inside
the solenwid provides the core. la) If the magnetisation I is
2x 10 A/m. find the stusceptibility of aluminium at 300K. Fig. 5.41 I versus H eurve for ferromagnetic substance
) If temwrafure of the aluminim ring is 320K, what will be Curie-Weiss law
the magnetisation?
When temperature increases above the Curie temperature,
Sol. (a) !
-l= 3000x 2 =10'A/n a ferromagnetic substance becomes an ordinary
paramagnetic substance whose magnetic susceptibility
I 2x 10-2 obeys the Curie-Weiss law as given below
2x 1o4
H C
(b) According to Curie Law

where, T
Curie temperature, = constant
= C

Variation of z versus Tis shown in the figure.

320
X=1 =
300
x
2x 102.13x 104
Magnetisation at 320 K

x
I=1ll =2.13x 10x 10 =2,13 10A/m
T
T,

3. Fig. 5.42 X, versus Tgraph for a magnetic substance

Ferromagnetic substances
Ferromagnetic substances are those which are strongly Atomic model of magnetism
attracted y a magnetic fickd. Exanples of such substances
are iron, nickel, steel, cobalt and their alloys. are familiar with the model of an atom which has a
TheseWenucleus that contains the protons and neutrons and
substances resemble to a higher
degree with paramagnetic substances as regard with their clectron in the orbit around the nucleus. Within the atom,
behaviour. the electrons behave as if they are magnet.
They hae follouing properties The three moperties of atoms that give rise to magnetic dipole
moment are discussed belw.
(i) These substances are strongly magnetised by even a
weak magnetic ficld. (i) The clectrons moving around the nucleus in the
(ii) The relative peneability is very large and is of the orbits act as smallcurrent loops and contribute
order of hundreds and tlousands. Here B>> B. magnetic moments.
(ii) The spinning electron has an intrinsic magnetic
Fefroagnetic dipole moment.
suetances (ii) The nucleus contribute to magnetic moment due to
the motion of charge within the mcleus.
Fig. 5.40 Nfugnetc field inside ferromagnetic substance
The magnitude of nuclear moments is about 10
(ii) The susceptibility is positive and very large. times that of clectronic moments or the spin
(iv) Magnetic susceptibility of ferromagnetic sutstance magnetic moments as the later two are of the same
does not change according to Curie law. order. Major contribution in tnagnetic moment of an
atom is produced by electron spin as the net
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter 355

contribution of the orbital revolution is very small. field. Thus, the wole stuhstaxe is magnetised in the direction
This is because most of the electrons pair off in such of the external magnetic field.
a way
that they produce equal and opposite orbital
magnetic moment and they cancel out. Although
these electrons also try to pair up with their opposite
spins but in case of spin motion of an electron it is -
not always possible to form cqual and opposite pairs.
Fig. 5.44 In presence of external magnetic field

Explanation of magnetism in magnetic As the temperature of substance is increased, the thermal

agitation disturts the magnetic alignment of the atoms. Thus,
substances we can say that paramagnetism is temperature dependent.
On the basis of the above discussed properties, we can
explain the origin of magnetic materials as follou. (i) Ferromagnetism
Iron like elements and their alloys are known as
() Diamagnetism ferromagnetic substances. The susceptibility of these
The property of diamagnetism is generally found in those substances is in several thousands.
substances whose atoms (or molecules) have even number Like paramagnetic substances, atoms of ferromagnetic
of clectros which forn pairs. "The net magnetic moment substances have a pernanent magnetic moment and behave
of an atom of a diamagnetic substance is thus zero." When like tiny magnets, But in ferromagnetic substances, the
a diamagnetic substance is placed in an external magnetic atoms form innumerable small effective regions called
field, the spin motion of electrons is so modified that the domains.
clectrons which prxluce the magnetic moments in the
direction of external field slow down while the electrons maim
which produce magnetic moments in opposite direction get
acceletated.
Thus, a net magnetic moment is induced in the oppsite
direction of applied magnetic field. Hence, the substance is Fig. S.45 Unmagnetised material
magnetised opposite to the external field.
temperature independent.
The size of the domain vary from about 10 cm' to
Note Diamagnetrsm is
10 cm'. Each domain has 10" o 10" atoms whose
(i) Paramagnetism magnetic moments are aliged in the sane direction. In an
The property of paramnagnetism is found in those unmagnetised ferromagnetic specimen, the donnains are
substances, whose atoms or molecules have an excess of oriented ranxionly, so that their resultant magnetic
moment is zero.
clectrons, spinning in the same direction. Hence, atoms of
paranagnetic substances have a permanent magnetic When the specimen is placed in a magnetic field, then the
moment and behave like tiny bar magnets. In the absence resultant magnetisation may increase in two
of external magnetie field, the atomic magnets are
randomly oriented and net magnetic moment is, thus zero.
different ways.
Weak B

Durnains
Strong , External icd
Tiy bar magnets

a
Magtetisatkon by (h) Magtetisation by
donain growth demain rotation
Fig. 5.43 In the absence of external magnetic field Fig. 5.46 Ferromagnetic suhstance in (a) weak B, and (b) strong B,

When araagnetic sutstance is placed in an external (a) The domains which are oriented favourably with
mgnetik freld, then each atonic mgnet experiences a torque respect to the field will inerease in size. Whereas
which texts to turu the tmamt in the direction of the ficld. those oriented opposite to the external field will
The atomic magnets are thus, aligned in the direction of the reduce.
(b) The domains rotate towards the ficld direction.
356) 08JECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Comparative study of magnetic materials

S.No. Diamagnetic substances Paramagnetic suhstances Ferromagnetic substances
Tlee suttat when pcvd in a magnetic Ilee lntatue when placed in a tugnetic These substances when plaed in a magTetic
feld, acquire feele magnetiun oqyite to thc fell, ite feeble magietin in the ficld are sttongly tn.agnetist in the dirvction
ditextion of the msgetic field. ditecthutn of the hgetie field. of the field.

2 Tlhew sutstanes are tepeled by a magnet. Tiey ubstanc e afe frebly attrated by a Thee substanxes are strongly attractd by a
tnagiet Inet.
3 When a dhamgtetic Moulion is pNred into a
The level of the uasanagnetic solution in that No liquid is fertonagtetic.
Utube ad one atn iv plced It weet the
poics o st rong magnet, then the levei of
solution in that arn is kwered.

Paramagnetic
salution
Diamagetic sutinn

4 If a rod of diamagnetic material is susyended ParamagTetic rod becomes parallel to the Ferroanagnetic tod alo becomes parallel to the
freely btwe two magnctic pxiles, then its Inagnetie field. Imagnetic field.
axis becumes perpendicular to the
agtietic field,
s
R
Axis Ayis

Axis
In non-urnifom gnetic field, the In non-uniform magnetic field, they move In non-urularm magnetic fieid, they move
diamagetic sutntarxes are attracted tuwards Irom weaket to sroget artof the magnetic from weaker to stronger magnetic field
the weaker frlds ie., they move from fied slowlv. rapidly.
MrOger to weaker magetic field.
Theit perneaility is less than one (u <L Their permeability is slightly greater than otie Theit pertnealility is mch greater than one
0<#,<lu <Ho
7 Their uscepibalty is snall ard negatlve. Their suscejtibility is small and eitive. Their sseeptibility is Large and ponitive.
[-l<1,< O} It is independent of
(0<L<el It is inversely proportional to (x, >>1 They also fellow Crie's law.
temperature. atrolate temperatute which is Curie's Law Le.,

At Curie tetnperature, fermmanetic sntetanres

change into parangretic sulntances,
Slape of diamgnetic liqid in a glavs Tucible Shape of paramagnetic liquid in a glas No lkpid is ferromagnetic.
and kept vet two LIgnetic ples. cruwille ant kept ver two nagnetic poles.
Iiamagetic liquid Paramagtic lipid

9. In these suhstancs, the tnagnetic lines of In these substances, the magetic lies of In thee sulstanKes, magnetic lines of force
force are larthet than in air. force are kser than in air. ate tnuch cloer thn In air.
10 The resultant magnetic onent of these These suntances have permancnt tmagnetie These stibstances alsuo have a pernuunerit
a
sulst.anes is zeto, msnent. magnetic mnent.
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter (357

Hysteresis (viii) The area enclosed by

the loop represents loss of
The word hysteresis means delayed. Thc phenomenon energy during a cycle of magnetisation
of and
the lagging of magnetic induction behind demagnetisation.
the magnetising (ix) Unit of area of 1-H loop is
field is called hysteresis.
(i) The plot of intensity of magnetisation (x) Unit of area of BH loop
A
m.
() of x unit of area
ferromagnetic substances erstus magnetic intensity of 1-H loop.
(H for a complete cycle of magnetisation and (xi) Area under BH loop is equal to
the energy loss per
demagnetisation is called hysteresis loop. cycle per unit volume.
Exomple 5.49 The hysteresis loss for a
specimen of iron
weighing 15 kg is equivalent to 300 Jm
cvele.
Reteritivity
Find the loss of energv per hour at 25 cycle
iron is 7500 kq m.
s.
Density of

Sol. Let Q be the energy dissipated per unit

volume per
hysteresis cycle in the given sample. Then
the total energy
Iost by the volune V of
the sample in time t will be
W"=Qx Vxvxt
Cercivity where v is the number of hysteresis cycles per second.
Here, Q = 300Jmcycle,v= 25 cycde
Fig. 5.47 Hysteresis loop for a ferromagnetic substance s',t =lh=
3600 s
Volume. Ve Mass 13m
(ii) It is clear from the above figure that intensity of Density 7500
magnetising field n is increased, the intensity of
magnetisation also increases. This is because more :.Hysteresis loss, W= 300x 15
25 x 3600J = 54000 J
and more domains are aligned in the direction of 7500
applied field. Example 5.50 The coerciity of a certain permanent magnet
is 4.0x 10 Am, The magnet is placed inside a solenoid
(iii) When all domains are aligned material is
20 cm long and having 700 turns and a current is passed in the
magnetically saturated. Beyond this, if intensity of solenoid to demagnetise it completely. Find the current.
magnetising field ) is increased, then intensity of Sol. The coercivity of 4 x 0
magnetisation ) does not increase. Amof the permanent nagnet
implies that a magntic intensity H = 4x 10* Am is required
(iv) When intensity of magnetising ficld ) is decreased to be applied in oppsite direction to demagnetise the magnet.
intensity of magnetisation also decreases but it lags 700
Here 700 =3500 turns/m
behind H. Therefore, when H becomes zero but I n=
20 cm x 10 m
20
does not reduce to zero ie., the curve does not
retrace itself.
As H=n
= H_4x10
(v) Now this value of intensity of magnetisation U) :.Current, ! -l1.5 A
which is left in the material at H= 0, is called n 3500
retentivity or remanence (BO. This occurs because
all domains do not dealign even, if H= 0.
Magnetic properties of soft Iron and steel
(vi) When the magnetising field is applied in reverse A comparison of the magetic pruperties of ferromagnetic
substances can be made by the comparison of the shapes and
direction and its intensity H, is increased. The
sizes of their hysteresis loops.
material starts demagnetising. The value of
magnetising field needed to reduce magnetisation to These are tuo types of ferrmagnetic materials.
zero is called coercivity (0CA (i) Soft magnetic materials These are those materials
which have low retentivity, coercivity and small
(vii) If reverse magnetising field is increased further, the
material becomes saturated. Now, if the magnctising hysteresis loss e.g., Soft iron.
(ii) Hard magnetic materials These are those materials
field is reduced after attaining the reverse saturation,
which have high retentivity, coercivity and large
the cycle repeats itself. hysteresis loss. e.g., steel.
 358 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Hysteresis loop for soft iron and steel can be drawn (a) bigh initial permeability,
as below. 2l2a1912t
(b) low hysteresis los.
Sft IO
Fron the view point of these facts, soft iron is at
Stel ideal material for this purpose.
(ii) Transformer cores and telephone diaphragms As
the uagoetic thaterial used in these cases is
subjeted to cyelicchanges. Tuus, the essential
requirements lor the seletion of the materia! are
(a) bigh initial permealility.
(b) low hysteresis loss to prevent the breaklown.

Electromagnet
As we know that a current carying solenoid behaves like :
Fig. 5.48 Hysteresis loop for soft iron and steel bar magnet. Ií place a soft iron rod in the solenoid, thet
we
the magnetism of the solenoid increases hundrets of times
Following threc conclusions can be drawn fron their
axd the solenoid is called an electromagnet. It is a
hysteresis lops
(i) Retent ivity of soft iron is more than the retentivity
temprary mgnet.
An eletuagnet is made by winding closely a nunber ol
of steel.
(iü) Coercivity of soft iron is less than the coercivity of
turns of insulated copper wirc over a soft iron straighl rod
or a hose shoe rod. Oa passing current through this
steel, solenoid, magnetic field is proxuced in the space within
fiüi) Area of hysteresis loop (i.e.. hysteresis loss) in soft the soleoid.
iron is snaller than that in steel.

Choice of magnetic materials

The choice of a magnetie material for different uses is
decided fron the hysteresis curve of a spcimen of tle
material.
(i) Permanent magnets The materials for a permanent
magnet should have
(a) high retentivity (so that the magnet is strong) and
(b) high coercivity (so that the magnetising is not
wiped out by stray magnetic fields). As the (h
material in this case is never put to cvcic changes Fig. 5.49 An electromagnet
of agnctisation, hence hysteresis is immaterial.
F'rom the point of view of these facts steel is Applications of Electromagnets
more suitable for the construction of permanent
(i) ElectrULagnets are ued in electric bell, transformer,
magnets than soft ion. telephone diaplragms, etc.
Modernn pernanent magnets are made of 'cobalt-steel', (iü) In mcdical field they are ised in extracting bullets
alloys ticona!'.
Irom the lunan body.
(ii) Electromagnets The aterials for the construction (iii) Large clectronagnets are used in cranes for liftiug
of electromagnets slhould have,
and translerring big nachines and parts.
Check point 5.3
1. Which one of the following is a non-magnetic substance? 9. Which of the folwing is true?
(a) Iron (b) Nckel (a) Diaagnetism is ternperature dependent
(c) Ccbat (d) Brass (b) Paramagnetisn is tempetature dependent
(c) Pararnagnetism is temperature independent
2. The Si unit of magnetic permeability is

(d) None of the above

(a) Am
(b) A-m 10. Magnet:c permeability is maximurn for
(c) Henrym! (a) darragnetic substance ) pararnagnetC substance
(c) terronagnetc substance (d) A
of these
() No unt. is a dinensionless number
11. The ternperature at wtich a fertomagnetic material becomes
3. The und of magnetic susceptbility is
(a) H (b) Wbim
pararnagnetc is called a
(a) neutral tempetature (b) Curie temperature
(c) A/m (d) None ofthese
(c) inversion temperature (d) critcal ternpetature
4. The relation connecting B. Hand / in Sl system is 12. Substances in whch the magnetic morrnent of a single atorn
(a) B-H+| (b)
BH-!, is no! zero, is known as
(c)
B, (H +) (d) B
(H-) (a) darmagnetis (b) ferrorrnagnetisn
a
5. An example of diamagnetic substance is (c) paramagnetisn (d) ferrmagnetism
(a) auminum (b) copper
(c) iron (d) nickel
13. Liquid oxygen remains suspended between two pole faces
of a magnet because it is
6. The unversal property of all substances s (a) dianagnetic (b) paramagnetic
(a) diamagnetism (c) ferromagnetic (d) antiterromagnetic
(b) ferromagnetism
(c) paramagnetism 14. The onty property possessed by ferromagnetic substance is
(a) hysteresis
(d) Al of these
(b) susceptbility
7. Which magnetic materials have negative susceptibility? (c) directional pxoperty
(a) Dianagnetic matena's (b) Pararnagnetic materias
(c) Ferromagnetic materiats (d) All ot these (d) attractng magnetc substances
15. The permanent magnet is made from wtich one of the
8. ldentity the pararmagnetic substanCe.
(a) tron (b) AlurTenium foilowing substances?
(a) Diamagnetic (b) ParamagnetC
(c) Nickel (d) Hydrogen
(c) Ferromagnetic () Electromagnetic
Chapter
exercises
A.)Taking it together
(Assorted Questions of the Chapter for Advanced Level Practice)
1. magnet is placed in iron paowder and then taken
A
9. Which of the following is diamagnetic?
out, ten maxinurn iron powder is at (a) Aluminium (b) Quartz
la) some distancc away from north ole (c) Nickel (d) Bisnuth
(b) sone distawe away from south pole
the middle of the magnet
(ch 10. The perneability of paramagnetic substance is
end of tlhe magnct
(d) the la) slightly more than vacuutn
(b) slightly less than vacuum
2. A permanent magnet lc) much more than vacuum
(a) attrats all substances (d) Nonc of the atove
(b) attracts onlv magnetic sutstances
{c) attrats nagnetic substances and repels all 11. Unit of magnetic flux density (or magnetic induction) is
non-Tietic suhstances (a) tesla (b) weber/metre*
td) attracts non-magnctic substances and repels magnetic (c) newtorn/ampere-metre (d) All of these
substances
12. Magnetic ficld intensity is defined as
3. Magnetic ield measured by
is (a) magnetic momeit per unit volume
(al pyroIneter (b) hvdrometer (b) magetic induction force acting on a unit magnetic pole
(c) thernmometer (d) fluxneter (c) numter of lines of forve crossing per unit area
(d) numter of lihes of force crossing per unit volume
4. Lines which represent places of constant angle of dip
are called 13. Perneability is defined as the ratio between
(al isobaric lines (b) isogonic lines (a) magnetic induction and susceptibility
lch isoxclinic lines (d) isodyanic lines (b) magnetic induction and magnetising field
(c) magnetising ficld and magnetic induction
5. A line passing t}hrough places having zero value of
(d) magnetising field and susceptibility
magnetie dip is called
(a) isoclinic line (b) agonic line 14. Hysteresis loss for steel is .....
that for iron.
kl iwgoic line (d) aclinic line (a) lesser than (b) equal to
6. Aclinic lines are tlhe lines joining places of (c) gteater than (d) Eithe b) or (c)
lat zero dip eal di
fcl zero declination
(d) equal decination 15. Hysteresis is exhibited by a substance.
(a) paramagnetic (b) ferromagnetic
7. The arms a
of defletion magnetometer in the tan B (c) diamagnetic (d) All of these
position are placed
(a) cast-west (b) north south 16. Which of the following materials has got the
lch north-cast (d) south-west maximum retentivity?
(al Copper (b) Zinc
8. If the current is doubled, the deflection is also
(c) Soft iron (d) Hard iron
doubled in
(al a tangent galvanometer 17. The arca enclosed by a hysteresis loop is a measure of
(bi a moving coil galvanometer (a) retentivity (b) suscepibility
(c Both (al and (b) (d) energy loss per cycle
(c) perneability
fd) None of the alxove
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter 361

18. Which of the following is the nost suitable material 26. A dijp circle is at right atngles to the agnetic
for making permanent nagnet? meridiarn. What will be the apparent dip?
(a) Steel (b) Soft iron (b) 30
(c) Copper (d) Nickel (c)
60 (d) 90°
19. The materials suitable for making electromagnets 27. A compass needle which is allowed to move in a
should have horizontal plane is taken to a gemagnetic paole. It will
(a) high retentivity and high coercivity (a) stay in orth south direction only
(b) Jow retentivity and low cocrcivity (b) stay in cst-west dirertion only
(c) high retentivity and luw coercivity (c) becone igid howing no movement
(d) low relentivity atd high coærcivity (d) stay in asy ition
20. Which of the following is most suitable for the core 28. When the Npole of a bar magnet points towards the
of clectromagnets? south and S
pole towards the north, the null points
a) Ion (b) Steel are at the
(c) Soft iron d) Cu-Ni alloy (a) agIetic axis
21. A magnetic needle kept in a non-uniform magnetic magoetic centre
(c) peiendicular divider of magnetic axis
field exeriences
(a) a
fotce and tuTque (d) Nand S poles
(b) a
force but not a torque 29. Due to earth's magnetic field charged cosmic ray
(c) a torque but not a force
particles
(d) Neithet a torque nor a force (a) require greater kinetic energy to reach the equator than
22. The variation of magnetic susceptibility ) with pole
temperature for a diamagnetic substance is best (b) require less kinetic energy to reach the equator than pole
(c) can never reach the pole
represcnted by
(d) can never teach the equator
30. A magetic hcvdle, suspended horizontally by an
unspun silk fibre, oscillates in the horizontal plane.
(a) o (b) O because of a restoring force originating nainly from
(a) the torsion of the silk
ibre
(b} the fofCe of gravity
the horizontal component of earth's magnetic field
(d) Al! the abxve factors
31. An electron moving around the nucleus with an
(d) angular momentum /has a magnetic moment
(a) | (b) |

23. The angle between the earth's magnetic and the (c) td)
2nm
carth's geographic axis is
(a) zeto (b) 11.5" 32. A vibration mnagnetometer is placed at the south pole,
(c) 23 (d) None of these then the time period will be
If a nagnet is hanged with its nagnetic axis, then (a) zeo
24. it
(bl infinity
stops in
(a) magetic meridian (c) same as at mnagnetic equator
(b) gometric meridian () same as at any other place on earth
lc) angle of dip 33. Which of the following statenents are true alxut
td) None of the akve the magntic ssceptibility z m of paramagnetic
25. A dip heedle in a plane perpendicular to agnetic substae?
meridian will remain (a) Value of z, is inversely proportional to the absolute
temperature of the sanple
(a) vertical
(b) z is famitive at al! temperature
() horizontal
(c) in any direction (c) X
is hegative at all tempetature
(d) at an angle of dip to the horizontal (d) x, does not depend on the temperatue of the smple
362 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol 2

34. Thc angle which the total magnetic field of earth 43. The magnetic field lines due to a bar magnet are
makes with the surface of the earth is called correctly shown in
(a) decliration (b) magnetic meridian
lc) geographic meridian (d) incination

35. Resultant force acting on a diarmagnetic material in a ta)

magnetic field is in direction
ta) from stronger to the wcaker pxut of the nagnetic field
(b) from weaker to the strotnger part of the magnetic field
I perpndieular to the magnetic field

d) in the dircction making 6Y to the magnetic field

36. The mathematical cquation for magnetic field lines of
force is

(al VB=() (b) VB 0.1

fe) VB>0 (d) V-B<0
37. Two lines of force due to a bar magnet
(a) intersect at thie neutral oint 44. Susccptibility is pusitive and large for a
(b interset neat the poles of the magnet (a) paramagnetic substance
c) interet on the equatorial axis of the magnet (b) ferromagnetic sutstance
)
do not infetrt at all (c) on-magnetic sutstance
(d) diamagnetic substance
38. What happens to the force hetween magnetic oles
when their pole strength and the distance between 45. Torques t, and t, are required for a magnetic needle
them both gets doubled? to remain erpendicular to the magnetie fields B, and
ta) Fotce inteases to fwo times the previous value B, at two different places. The ratio B, B, is
b) No cange
(c) Force decteases to half the previous value
(a)
2 (b)
(d) Fore itcreases to fout tines the previouy value

a unagnet of
39. If
ole strength m is divicled into four
Jparts such that the length and width of cach part is
Ihalf that of initial oe, then the pole strength of each 46. A dip circle is taken to geomagnetic equator. The
Jart will lx needle is allowed to move in a vertical plane
(a) m / 4 (b) m /2
perpendicular to the magnetic meridian. The ncedle
will stay in
(c) m / 8 (d) 4m
(a) horizontal direction only
40. Two magnets have the sane length and thc same (b) vertical direction only
pole strength. But one of the magnets has a sImall (c) any direction except vertical and horizontal
hole at its centre. Then (d) None of the above
(a) bth have cqual maguetic noment
47. At thc magnetic north pole of the carth, the values of
(b) one with hole has sraaller magnetic moment
(c) one with hole has larger magnetic moment
the lorizontal component H and the angle of dip 0 are
(a) H= Q0 = 45° (b) H = B,. 0 = 0°
(d) ote with hole loncs Hagnetisn through the hole (c) H =Q0= 09
(d) H =B,, 0 = 90
41. The magnetic field at a distance d from a short bar 48. When the magnetic inclination (dip) was mneasured at
magnet in longitudinal and transverse positions are in various places on earth, in one of the following
the ratio countries it was found to be zero. Vhich one was it?
(al 1:1 () 2:3 (a) Pakistan (b) Brazil
(c) 2:1 (d) 3:2 (c) Scotland (d) Canada

42. When a diamagnetic substance is brought near nortlh 49. In a deflection magnetometer, the needle is short and
or south pole of a bar magnet, it is the pointe is long because, the
(al attrxted by the ples (a) needle cannot be made long
(b) repellet tby the es (b) circular scale cannot be tnade shot
(c) attrxted by the 1octh pole and repeled by the south pole (c) necdle must be in a uniform ficld
(d) repellkd ly the rxnth peole arxl attracted ly the south pole (d) pointer must be in a non-unifornm field
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter 363

50. A curve between magnetic moment and temperature 57. The magnetic moment of a magnet of length 10 cm
of magnet is and pole strength 4.0 Am will be
M M (a) 0.4 Am (b) 1.6 Am
(c) 20 An (d) 8.0 Am'
(b)
58. All ihe magnetic materials loss their magnetic
propetics when
(a) dippcd in water
(b) dippert in oil
(c) brought neat a piece of iron
(d) (d) strongty heated
59. A ferromagnetic material is heated alove its Curie
temperature. Which one is a correct statement?
(a) Ferromagnetic domains are perfectly arranged
51. The tangents deflection produced in tan A and tan B (b) FerrOmagnetic domains become randou
positions by a short magnet at equal distances are in (c) Ferromagnetic donains are tot influeced
the ratio (d) Ferromagnetic matcrial changes into diamagnetic
material
1:
(a) 1
(b) 2: 1

(c) 1:2 (d) Nonc of these

52. The relative permeability is represented by and , 60. Above the Curie temperature, the susceptibility of a
ferromagnetic substance varies
(a) directly as the absolutetenperature
the susceptibility is denoted by z for a magnetic (b) inversely as the atsolute temperature

(a) 4, <L Z <0

lc) u, >ly<0
(b)
(d)
,, >l>0
substance. Then for a paramagnetic substance
<lx >0
{c) inversely as the square of atolute temperature
(d) directly as the square of absolute temperature

a
61. The given figure represents a material which is
53. When piece of a ferromagnetic substance is put in
a uniform magnetic field.the flux density inside it is
four times the flux density away from the piece. The
magnetic permeability of the material is
(a) 1 b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4
54. Which of the four graphs may best represent the (a) paramagnetic ) diamagnetic
current- deflection relation in a tangent (c) ferromagnetic (d) None of these
galvanometer?
62. A nagnetic wire of dipole moment 4z Am tent in
the form of semi-circle. The new magnetic momnent is
(a) 4nAm (b) 8rAn
4 Am² (d) Noe of thee

63. A magnet of magnetic moment Mand pole strength

m is cut in two equal parts along the axis of magnet,

(a) d (b) a (c)

c
(d) b
then magnetic moment of each part will be
(a) M (b) M72 lc) M/4 (d) 244
55. If a diamagnetic solution is poured into a U-tube and
one arm of this U-tube placed between the poles of a 64. Two identical thin bar magnets each of length and
strong magnet with the meniscus in a line with the pole strength m are placed at right angles to cach
ficld, then the level of the solution will
other with north pole of one touching south pole of
(a) rie (b) fall
the other. Magnetic moment of the systen is
(c) oscillate slowly (d) remain as such (a) ml (b) 2ml fc) N2ml (d)ml
2
56. A paramagnetic liquid is filled in a glass U-tube of
65. A short bar magtet placcd with its axis at 30° with a
which one limb is placed between the pole pieces of
an When the ficld is switched on the uniform external magnetic field of 0.16T
electronagich is in the field
liquid in the experiences a torque of magnitude 0.032 J. The
(a) rise (b) fall
wl magnetic momeut of the bar magrnet will be
la) 0.23 JT (b) 0.40 JT
(c) remain stationary (o irst rise and then lall (c) 0.80 JT (d) zeO
364) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

66. A bar magnet when placed at an angle of 30" to the 73. The agnetic field on the axis of a short bar magnet
at a distance of 10 cm is 0.2 oetsted. What will be
direction of magnetic field induction of 5x 10 T.
1! the ficld at a point, distant 5 em on the line
experiences a moment of couple 25x 10 N-m, perendicular to the axis and passing tirough the
the length of the magnet is 5 cm., its poe strength is nagnet?
(al 2x 10 A-m (b) 5x to'A-m
(a) 0.025 oerst

(c) 2 Am (d) 5 A-m (b) 0.2 ersted

67. A bar magnet of nagnetic moment 3 A-m is placed (c) 0.4 xTsted
x (d) 0.8 versted
in a uniform magnetic induction field of 2 10 T.
If cach pole of the nagnet experiences a force of
74. If the angles of dip at two places ate 30° and 45°
respectively, then the ratio of horizontal components
6x 10 N, the length of the magnet is of magnetic field at the two places will be
(a) 0.5 m (h) 0.3 m
(c) 0.2 m (d) 0.1 n
ta)
V3:2
(b) I: N2
68. A toroid of n turns, mean radius Rand
crOSs-SCctional radius a carries cutent I. It is placed
fch
1:3
on a horizontal tahle taken as XY-platie. Its magnetic 1:2
(d)

moment m INCERT Exemplar] 75. The earth's magnetic field at a certain place has a
(a) is no zero and points in the Zdirection by symmetry horizontal component 0.3 G and the total strength
(b) points along the axis of the toroid yu
n
) 0.5 G. The angle of dip is
la) tan
(c) is zero, otherwise there would be a ficld falling as

Large distances outside the toroid

(d) is pointing radially outwards (c) tan

69. A magnct of nagnetic moment Mis situated with its

axis alkong the direction of a magnctic ficld of 76. At a certain place, the angle of dip is 30° and the
strength B. The work done is rotating it iy an angle horizontal coponent of carth's nagnetic field is
of 180 will be 0.50 (ersted. The carth's total nagnetic field (in
(a) -MB (b) +AB ersted) is

(c) zero (d) + 24B

70. A magnet of magnetic nnoment 2 J/T is aligned in the

direction of magnetic field of 0.1T. What is the net () 1/3
work done to bring the magnet normal to the
magnetic field?
(al 0.1| (b) 0.2J 2J
(c) 1J (di 77. In a pernanent magnct at room tempraturc,
71. A planat coil having 15 turns carries 20 A current. (NCERT Exemplar]
The coil is oriented with respect to the uniforn ta) nagnctic tnomernt of cach molecule is zero
magnetic field B = 0.5T such that its direeted area is (b) the individual molecules have ton-zero magnetic
A =-0.04 i n'.The potential enengy of the coil in moment which are all perfectly aligned
(c) donains are jartially aligned
the given orientation is
td) domains are all perfectly aligned
(a) ) +
0.72J c) 6J
Ib) (d) -1.44J
78. A dip needie lies initially inthe magnetic meridian
72. The nagnetic field of the eartlh can be modelled by wien shows an agle of dip 0 at a place. The dip
it
that of a point dipole placed at the centre of the circle is totated through an angle x in the horizontal
earth. The dipole axis nakes an angle of 11.3° with plane and then it shows an angle of dip 0. Then
the axis of the carth. At Munbai, declination is tan 0'
nearly zero. Then, (NCERT Exemplar]
the tet ween 11.3* W to 11.3 E
tan 0
(3 decination varies
he least declination is ( (a) 1/ cos x
(c) the plane defined by dipole axis and the earth axis (lb) 1sin x
passes thtouglh Greenwich lc) 1/ tan x
(d) declination averaged over the earth nust be always (d) cos x
egative
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter 365

79. For different substances hvsteresis

B-H) curves are from its centre. The magnetic
given as shown in figure. For moent of the magnet
making temporary is (
magnet which of the following is best? i H= 4x 10Wbn)
(a) 3.2 Am
b) L.6
An
(c) 6.4 Am () 0.8 Am
86. A long magnetic needle of length 21, magnetic
(b) monent Mand pxole strengh m units is broken into
two at tle midde. The nLagnetic
strength of cach piece will b
Ionent and pole
(a) (11/2), m/2 mn
(b) Af, /2
M/2 m
(c)

87. Consider the two idealised systems (i) a parallel

plate
capacitor with large plates with small separation
and
(d) H (i) a long solenoid of length L >» R. radis of
cross-section. In fil E is ideallv treated as constant
between plates and zero outside. In fii) magnctic
field
is constant inside the solenoid and zero outside.
80. A bar magnet is oscillating in the carth's magnetic These idealised assumptions, however,
contradict
field with time period T. If its mass is increased fundamental laws as below NCERT Exemplar)
four
times, then its time period will be la) Caw (i) contradicts Gaus's law for ciectrostatic
felds
Ib) Caw ii) contradicts
(al 4T (b) 2T (c) T (d) Tr2 Gas's law for magnetic ficlds
(c) Case () agrees with
81. When 2 current is passed through a tangent
A dl = 0. E

galvanometer, it gives a deflection of 30°. For (d Casc ü) contradicts H

60 dl I
deflection the curent ust be
88. Due to a small magnet, intensity at a distance x in
{al 1
A (b) 2/3 A (c) 4 A (d) 6 A
the end on position is 9 gauss. What will be the
82. Two tangent galvanonmeters having coils of the same
intensity at a distance on broad side on position?
radius are connected in series. A current flowing in
them produces deflections of 60 and 45° resjectively. la) 9 gauss (b) 4 gaUSS (c) 36 gauss
(d) 4.5 gauss
The ratio of the number of turns in the coils is
89. A magnet a
oscillating in horizontal plane has a tine
(al 4N3 perioxi of2 s at a place where the angle of dip is 30°
3
-1 and 3 s at another place where the angle of dip is
83. A bar magnet of length 3 cm has points A and B 60°, The ratio of tesultant magnetic fields at the two
along its axis at distances of 24 cm and 48 cm on the places is
4V3
opposite sides. Ratio of magnetic fields at these la) (c) 9
points will be 7 93 4N3
90. Two short magnets of equal dipole monents M are
c
fastened perpendicularly at their centres (figure). The
24 48 cm magnitude of the magnetic field at a distance d from
lal 8 (c) 3 (d) 4
the centre on the bisector of the right angle is
2v2
84. The magnetic moment produced in a substance of lg
is 6x 10 Am'. If its density is 5 g/cm', then the
intensity of magnetisation in A/m willbe N
la) 83x 10 (b) 3.0
(c) 12 x 10-7 (d 3x 10
85. A short bar magnet is arranged with its north pole
pointing geographical north. It is found that the
horizontal component of carth's magnetic induction
B,, is balanced by tihe magnetic induction of the

magnet at a point which is at a distance of 20 cm 4n

366 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

sane mass, length and 96. The figure illustrates how

91. Twvo bar magncts of the B, the flux density inside
a
24M are P
breadth having magnetic noments M and a sample of unmagnetised
joined together pole to pole and suspended in ferronagnetic material R
vibration magnetometer. The time perioul of
one of the magnets varics with B,, the
(oscillation is 3 s. If the polarity of
is reversed, the tine period of scillation will be
magnetic flux density in
which the sample is kept.
(a)
3s For the sample to be
(b) 343s suitable for making a
(c) 3s pemanent magnet, then
(d) 6 s (a) be Large, OR should be small
00 should
a
92. A thin rectangular magnet suspended freely has ()
(bi and OR should both be large
Large
(c) OQ should be mall and OR should be
period of oscillation 4 s. If it is broken into two
(d) cQ ad OR stould both be small
halves each having half their initial length, then
when suspended similarly. the time period of 97. Two like magnetic poles of strength 10 and 40
SI
scillation of each part will be a cm. The
units are separated by distance 30
(b) 2 s intensity of magnetic field is zero on the line joining
s
(4) 22 them
93. For ferromagnetic material, the relative permeability (a) At a point 10 cm from the stronger pole
u, ), ersus magnctic intensity () has the following (b) At a goint 20 cm from the stronger pole
fc) At the mid point
shape
td) At infinity
98. A magnet mnakes 40 oscillations per minute at a place
x

a) (b)
having nagnetic field intensity of 0l At 10T.
another place, it takes 2.5 s to complete one vibration
The valuc of carth's horizontal ficld at that place is
T
(a) 0.25
x
10T (b) 0.36x 10
, x
(c) 0.66 x
10T (d) 1.2
10T
(c)
99. A
circular radius 20 cm and 20 turns of wire
coil of
mounted vertically with its plane in magnetic
is
meridian. A snall magnetic needle is placed at the
H centre of the coil and it is deflected through 45°
when a current is passed through the coil. Hlorizonta
94. Twvo magnets of sane size atd masS make component of earth's field is 0.37x 10 T. The
respectively 10 atnd 15 oscillations per minute at
Current in coil is
certain place. The ratio of their magnetic moments is (b)
(a) 4:9 (b) 9: 4
(a) 0.6 A 6A
(c) 6x 10'A (d) 0.06 A
(c
2:3 (d) 3:2
100. A dip circle is so that its needle moves freely in the
95. There are four light-weight -rod samples A, B, (C and magnetic meridian. In this position, the angle of dip
D separately suspended by threads. A bar nagnet is is 40°. Now, the dip circle is rotated so that the plar
slowly brought near each sample and the following in which the needle moves makes an angle of 30
observations are noted. with the magnetic nneridian. In this position the
(i) A is feebly tepelled needle will dip by an angle
(ü) Bis feebly attracted (a) 40 (b) 30°
(c) more than 40 (d} less than 40°
(ii) Cis strongly attracted
(iv) D renains unaffected 101.An iron rod of 0.2 cn eross-sectional area is
Which one of the following is true? subjected to a magnetisting field of 1200 Am- Thc
(a Cisof a diamagoetic material susceptibility of iron is 599. The magnetic flux
(bi Dis of a ferronagnetic material produced is
(c) A is of a non-tagnetic material (a) 0.904 Wb (b) 1.81 x 10 Wb
(d) Bis of a paranagnetic material (ch 0.904 x 10Vb 5.43x 10 Wb
 Chapter 05 Magnetism and matter 367

102. A paramagnetic sample shows a net magnetisation of 12 oscillations per minute are made but for unlike
8 Am when placed in an external magnetic field of poles together only 4 oscillations per minute are
0.6 T at atemperature of 4 K. When the same executed. The ratio of their magnetic mnoments is
sample is placed in an external magnetic field of (a) 3: 1
(b) 1 :3
0.2 T at a temperature of 16 K. the magnetisation lc) 3:5 (d) 5:4
(NCERT Esemplar]
willbe 107.A magnet is suspended in such a way that it
(a) Am (b) 2 Am oscillates in the horizontal plane. It makes
3 3 20 oscillations per minute at a place wherc dip angle
(c) 6Am! (d) 2.4 Am is 30° and 15 oscillations per minute at a place

103.The plane of a dip circle is set in the gengraphic where dip angle is 0°. The ratio of earth's magnetic
fields at two places is
meridian and thener dip is ô,. It is then set in
vertical plane to the geographic
fal 3/3: 8 (b) 16:9
meridian. The appartent dip arngle is ð,. The lc) 4: 9 (d) 2v2 :3
declination 0 at the plane is
= 108. Two identical short bar magnets, each having
(a) tan"(tan & tan õ,)
magnetic moment M, are placed a distance of 2d
(b) 0=an'(tan ô tan 6,) apart with axes perpendicular to cach other in a
horizontal plane. The tnagnetic induction at a point
(c) 0 tan tan,
tan , midway between them is
(d) tan(tan - tan &,)
4n d'
104.The figure shows the various positions (labelled by
subscripts) of stnall magnetsed needles Pand Q. The
arrows show the direction of their magnetic moment.
Which configuration cortesponds to the lowest 109. A short magnet oscillating in vibration magnetometer
potential energy of all the configurations shown? with a frequency 1O Hz. A downward cutrent of
15 A is established in a long vertical wire placed
20 cm to the West of the magnet. The new
frequency of the short magnet is (the horizontal
component of carth's magnetic field is 12u)
p
(a) 4 Hz (b) 2.5 Hz
H
(c) 9 Hz fd) 15

110.Two bar magnets having same geometry with

Q magnetic moments Mand 2Mf are placcd in such a
(a) Q, (b) PQ, way that their similar poles are on the sanne side,
(c) PQ, (d) PQe then its time period of oscillation is T,. Now, if the
105. Two short magnets of magnetic moment 1000 Am polarity of one of the magnets is reversed, then time
are placed as shown at the corners of a square of side period of oscillation is T,, then
10 cm. The net magnetic induction at Pis (a) I,<T;
(c) T, = T, {d) T; = , T,
=0
111.The length of a magnet is large compared to its width
and breadth. The time perioxi of its oscilation in a
vibration magnetometer is 2 s. The magnet is cut
along its length into three cqual parts arnd three parts
-f are then placed on each other with their like poles
(a) 0.1 T (b) 0.2 T together. The time period of this combination will be
(c) 0.3 T (d) 0.4 T 2
(a) 2s
106.Two magnets are held together in a vibration
magnetometer and are allowed to oscillate in the (c) 243 s 2
carth's magnetic field with like poles together.
B.) Medical entrance special format questions
Reason Diamagnetic substances are repelled by the
Assertion and reason field.
Imagnetic
Directions (Q. Nos, I-19) These questions corsist of tuo
statements each linked as Assertion and Reason. While 10. Assertion The earth's magnetic field is due to iron
ansuering these questions ou are required to choose arny present in its core.
one of the followiny (ive resIses,
Reason At a high temperature magnet loses its
(al If hot Assertion and Recason are Irue and Reason is the magnetic property or tnagnetism.
cotrect explanation of Assertion.
11. Assertion Earths magnetic field inside a closed iron
(b) If th Asrtion and Reason are true but Reason is not box is less as compared to tthe outside.
correct explaration of Assertion.
(c) l ANetion is true but Reason is false. Reason The magnetic permeability of iron is low.
(d) If Asscrtion is false but Reaon is true. 12. Assertion To protect any instrument frorn external
(e) If both Assetinn and Rcason are false. magnetic field, it is put inside an iron hox.
1. Assertion The poles of a magnet cannot bc Reason Iron is a magnetic substance.
separated by breaking it into two picces. 13. Assertion -T graph for a diamagnetic material
Reason The magnetic monent will be reduced to is a straight line paralel to T-axis.
half when a magnet is broken into two equal pieces,
Reason This is because susceptibility of a
2. Assertion It is not iecessary that every magnet has diamagnetic material is not affected by temperature.
one north pole and one-south pole.
14. Assertion WVhen radius of a cireular wire carrying
Reason It is a basic fact tat magnetic poles occur in current is doubled, its magnetic moment becomes
pairs. four tinnes.
3. Assertion Basic difference betwecen an electric line Reason Magnetic moment is directly proportional to
and magrnetic line of force is that forner is area of the loop.
discontinuous and the latter is continuous or endless.
Reason No cleetric lines of forces exist inside a 15. Assertion A magnet suspended freely in a uniform
charged conductor but magnetic lines do exist inside a magnetic ficld experiences no net force, but a torque
magnet. that tends to align the magnet along the field.
Reason Net force, mB- mB = 0. But the forces on
4. Assertion The net nagnetic flux coming out of a north and south poles being equal, unlike and parallel
closed surface is alwavs zero.
make up a couple that tends to align the magnet, along
Reason Unlike poles of equal strength exist together. the ficld.
5. Assertion Horizontal component of earths magnetic
field () has been chosen as a magnetic clement 16. Assertion Time period of vibration of a pair of
instead of the vertical component (V). magnets in sum position is always snaller than in
difference position.
Reason Most of our esperiments are perfomed in
horizontal configuration. So, His nore relevant. Reason T = 2r vI/MH, where symbols have their
6. Assertion At neutral point, a conmpass needle may standard meaning.
point out in any arbitrary direction. 17. Assertion The ferromagnetic substances do not
Reason AMagnetic ficld of earth is balanced by field obey Curie's law.
due to maget at the neutral point. Reason At Curie point ferromagnetic substances
7. Assertion Steel is not attracted by a magnet. start beaving as a paramagnetic substances.
Reason Steel is not a magnetic substance.
18. Assertion A soft iron core is used in a moving coil
8. Assertion Relative magnetic permeability lhas no galvanoneter to increase the strength of magnetic field.
units and no dimensions. Reason From soft iron more number of the magnetic
Reason H, = u/ where the symbols have their lines of force passes.
standard meaning.
19, Assertion The properties of paramagnetic and
9. Assertion If one arm of a U-tubc containing a
diamagnetic solution is placed in between the poles lerronagetic sutstances are not affected by heating,
of a strong magnet with the level in line with the Reason As temperature rises, the alignment o
ficld, the level of the solution falls. molecular magnets gradually decreases,
 Chapter 05 Magnetism and matter (369

3. Match the terms of Column Iwith the items of

Match the columns Column Il and choXse the correct option from the
1. With reference to magnetic dipole, match the terns codes given below.
of Colum Iwith the of Cnlumn ll and choose
teus Columnl Column 1
the correct option from the codes given below.
(A) Negative stzcejibility
(p
Ferromagneti
Column
1

Column ll
M-D () Positive and small tq) Diafnagetic
A) Dipole nnneut
for a short lg) M B
(B) Eqt iorial field diple sIsceptibility
((3 Axial feld tor a shot dipole (r -/4 C3 Poitive and Large susceptibility r) Paramagnetic
D) External field Torque
:

m
: 4. Match the terns of Column I with the items of
(E) Exteral field Eergy
Colunn and chXse the correct option from the
Il
2. Consider the expression for magnetic potential energy codes given below.
Uobtained in previous question, match the terns of Columnl Column II
Colunn I with the terns of Colunn Il and chose the
correct option frou the codes given below. {A) Damagetia (p) >>, >>|al
z
>>1

Column Column Il (B) Paramgnetic (q) -1sI<0, Su, <land <po

(A) PotentLl encrgy at 90 ) Minimun
@

Ferromagetic r) 0<X<el<u,,<|+c and

(B)Potenti! etergy at @ 0
tql MMaximum

(C Pot ential energy at = 180 (r) Zetu

C) Medical entrances' gallery

(Collection of questions asked in NEET & various medical entrance exams)
1. A bar magnet is hung by a thit cotton thread in a 4. If r be the distance of a point on the axis of a
uniform horizontal nagnetic field and is in magnetic dipole from its centre then the magnetic
cquilibriunm state. The energy required to rotate it by field at such a point is proortiotnal to (UK PMT 2015]
60° is W. Now the torque required to keep the (bl (d) None of these
magnet in this new position is (NEET 2016]

5. A bar magnet has a coercivity of 4 x 10 Am. It is

2%V
W
(al
V3 placed inside a solenoid of length 12 cm having
2. The magnetic susceptibility is negative for (AIMPT 2016] 60turns in order to demagnetise it. The amount of
(al paranagnetic mnaterial only
current that should be passed througlh the solernoid is
(EAMCET 2015]
b) ferromagetic material only (d) 2A
(a) 16A (b) 8A (c) 4A
(c) paramagnetic and ferromagnetic materials
(d) diamagnetic materia! only 6. The cffective length of magnet is 31.4 cn and its
pole strength is 0.8 Am. The agnetic moment, if it
3. The variativn of magnetic susceptibility with the .....
is bent i the form of a seticircle is A-m'.
tenperatute of a ferromagnetic material can be (Guj. CET 2015)
ploted as (AIIMS 2015) (b) 1.6 lc) (d) 0.12
(a) 1.2 0.16
7.At a place on carth, the vertical component of carth's
(a) maguetic field is v3 times its horizontal conponent.
...
The angle of dip at this place is J&K CET 2011|
(a) 60 (b) 30° () 45" (d) 0"
8. A tangent galvanometer has coil of 50 turns and a
a
radius of 20 cm. The horizontal conponent of carth's
Lagnetic field is By, =3x10T. What will be the
curTent which gives a deflection of 45? (Guj. CEI 2013]
(a) 0.39 A (b 0.29A fe) 0.19 A (d) 0.09A
370) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

9. The correct curve between intensity of magnetisation

) and magnetic ficld 4N for a ferromagnetic
substance is given by (UP CPMT 2015]
0.8 Am ,
16. A paramagnetic sample shows a net magnetisation of
when placed in an external magnetic field
of strength 0.8 T at a temperature 5K. When the
same sample is placed in an extermal magnetic field
of 0.4 T at a tenperature of 20K. The
(a) magnetisation is (EAM CET 2014]
(a) 0.8 Am (b) 0.8 Am
(c) 0.1 Am (d) 0.1 Am-!

17. Nickel shows ferromagnetic property at room

(c) (d) temperature. If the temperature is increased beyond
curie temperature, then it will show (UK PMT 2014]
(a) paramagnetic (bl anti-ferromagnetisn
(c) diamagnetism (d) no mgnetic property
bar magnet with magnetic moment 25x 10
T

10. A

is rotating in horizontal plane in the space containing 18. The intensity of magnetisation of a bar magnet is
magnetic induction B 4 x
10T. The work done in 5x 10 Am. The nagnetic length and the area of
totating the magnet slowly from a direction parallel Cross-section of the magnet are 12 cm and I cn
to the ficld to a direction 45° from the field, is (in respectively. The magnitude of magnetic moment of
joule) [UP CPMT 2015] this bar magnet (in Sl unit) is [WB JEE 2014)
(a) 0.6 (b) 1.3
(a) 0.0 (b) 0.2 (c) 0.03 (d) 0.02
fc) 1.2 (d) 2.4
11. Core of clectromagnets ate made of ferromagnetic
material which has (KCET 2015)
19. The magnetic susceptibility of a material of a rod is
lal low peneability and high retentivity 299. Permeability of vacuum # is 4nx 10 Hm'.
(b) high perteability and low retentivity Absolute permeability of the material of the rod is
(c) low permeability annd low retentivity (EAMCET 2014)
x
(d) high permeability and high retentivity (a) 3771 x 10 Hm! (b) 3771 10* Hm
x
12. If the magnetising fielt on a ferromagnetic material
(c) 3770x 10 Hm-! (d) 3771 10 Hm!
is increased, its permeability |AIMS 2015) 20. A wire of length L metre carrying a current I ampere
(a) decrease (b) increase is bent in the form of a circle. The magnitude of the
(c) is unaffected (d) may he inctease or decrease magnetic moment is |EAMCET 2014)
13. Following figures show the arrangement of bar (d)
nagnets in different configurations. Each magnet has 4n 4n 47
magnetic dipole moment
m
Which configuration has a circular orbit of radius 0.05 nmn
21. An clectron in
highest net magnetic diole monentCASE AIPMT 2014) performs 10 revolutions per second. The magnetic
moment due to this rotation of electron is (in Am).
[WB JEE 2014)
(al x 10-* 3.21 x 10-2
la) 2.16 (b)
ss (c) 3.21 x
104 (d) 1.26 x 1021
22. A bar magnet of lengthl and magnetic dipole
moment Mis bent in the form of an arc as shown in
N figure.

14. A bar magnet of moment M arnd pole strength m is

cut into parts of equal lengths. The magnetic moment
and pole strength of either part is (UK PMT 2014]

(a) tc) m (d) M. m

22
15. A suSceptibility of a certain magnetic material is 400. The new magnetic dipole moment will be [NEET 2013])
What is the class of the magnetic material? (KCET 2014]
(a) M
(a) Diamagnetic
(c) Ferromagnctic
(b) Pararnagnetic
(d) Ferroelectic
2
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter 371
23. The horizontal and vertical
components of
magnetic field at a place are
0,3 G and 0.52G. The earth'sth (a) I x 10 NA" m
(b) 2x 10 NA m

earth's magnetic field and the 4x 10

(c) NA m

angle of are
dip x
(d) 6.61 10 NA
J&K CET 2013] 31. The horizonatal conponent u!
(a) 0.3 G and & = 30° of carth's magnetic
(b) 0.4 G and 6 = 40° field
(c) 0.5 G and J = 50° at a place is 3 x
(d) O.6 G and =
60 10 T and the dip is tan
24. A bar magnet of pole
strength 10 A-m is cut into two A metal rod of length
equal parts breadthwise. The pole 0.25 m is placed
magnet is
strength of each direction and is moved at a constant in N-S
speed of
(a) 5 A-m
U&K CET 2013] 10 cms towards the east.
(b) 10 A-m (c) 15 A-m (d) 20 A-n
The emf induced in the
rod will be
25. A short magnet of magnetic
moment M, is placed on |BCECE 2012] Mains
a straight line. V
(a) 1
(b) 5 V (c) 7 V
The ratio of magnetic induction fields () 10uV
B, B,, B, values on this linc at points which are at 32. Assertion Susceptibilitv is
defined as the ratin of
distance 30 cm, 60 cm and 90 cm intensity of magetixation to
respectively from l magetis intensity H.
the centre
of the magnet is Reason Greater the value of susceptibility
[EAMCET 2013) snaller
27:3.37:1
(a)
(b) 373:l:27
the value of intensity of magnetixation !. (AIIMS
(a) lf
2012)
tc) 27:8:3.37 (d)1:2:3 both Assertion and Reason and true
and Reason is the
correct explanation of Assertion
26. A bar magnet of moment of inertia lis vibrated in a
(b) If both Assetion
magnetic ficld of induction 0.4 x ad Reason ate true but Reason is not
10T. The time the correct explanat ion of Asertion
period of vibration is 12 s. The magnetic moment (c) lf Assction true but Reason
i is false
of () 1f both Assertion and Reason ate false
the magnet is 120 Am. The moment of inertia of
magnet is (in kgm² ) approximately the
33. If amagnet is suspended at an angle
(EAMCET 2013] 30° to the
magnetic meridian, the dip ieedle
la) 172.8x 10 (b) 2.1 x 102 45° with the horizontal. The real
nakes angle of
(c) 1.57x 102
(d) 1728x 10
dip is [Manipal 2012)
(a) tanW32) (b) tanW3)
27. On heating a ferromagnetic substance above curie
temperature
(c) tan'3/2) () tan '2/3)
IMP PMT 2013]
(a) becunes paramagnetic 34. If a stecl wire of length land nagnetic noment Mf is
(b) becomes diamagnetic bent into a semicircular arc, then the new magnetic
(c) remains ferromagnetic with constant moment is yCECE 2012]
magnetic susceptibility
(d) becones electromagnetic (a) Mx I (b) ()
28. The work done in turning a magnet of magnetic 35. An iron rod of volume 0m' and relative
moment M by an angle of 90° from the magnetic perneability 1000 is placed inside a long solenoid
meridian is n times the corresponding work done to having 5 turns/cm. If a current of 0.5 A is passed
turn it through an angle of 60. The value of n is through the solenoid, then the magnetic moment of
(UP CrMT 20131 the rod is [BCECE 20121
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 1/2 (d) 1/4 (a) 20 Am' (6) 23 Am
29. A dip needle vibrates in a vertical plane (c) 30 Am? (d) 35Am
perpenticular to nagnetic neridian. The time of
vibration is found to be 25, the same needle is then 36. Two tangent galvanometers A and B have coils of
allowed to vibrate in the horizontal plane and the radii 8 cm and 16 cm respectivelv and resistance 82
time period is again found to be 25.Then, the angle each. They are connected in parallel witha cell of
of dip is (UrCPMT 2012) emf 4V and negligible internalresistance. The
(a) ( (d) 90 deflections produced in the tangent galvanometers A
(b) 30 (c) 45°
and B are 30 and 60° respctively. I! A has 2 turns,
30. he dipole moment of a shot bar magnet is
If
then B must have (Manipal 2012|
1.25 A-m, the magnetic field on its axis at a distance
(a) 18 turns (b) 12 turns
of 0.5 m from the centre of the magnct is (BCECE 2012) (c) 6 tutns (d) 2 turns
 Answers
Check point 5.1
1.() 2.(d) 3. ta) 4. ( 5. (b) 6.(d) 7. (b) 8.(a) 9. (a) 10. (a)
11. (a) 12. (2) 13. (d) 14. (b) 15. (a)

Check point 5.2

1. (a) 2. (C) 3. (b) 4. (a) 5. (b) 6.(9) 7. (3) 8. (d) 9. (a) 10. (b)
11. (b) 12. (b) 13. (d) 14. (C) 15. ()

Check point 53
1. (d) 2.(c) 3.(d) 4.(c) 5.(b) 6.(a) 7.(a) 8. (b) 9. (b) 10. (c
11. (b) 12. (cl 13. (b) 14, lal 15. (c)

A. Taking it together
1. (d) 2. (b)
3. (d) 4, (c 5. (d) 6.(a) 7. (b) 8. b) 9. (d) 10. (a)
11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (b) 14.(c) 15. (b) 16. (c) 17. (d) 18.(a) 19.(c) 20. (c)
21.(a) 22. (5) 23.(b) 24.(a) 25. (a) 26.(d) 27. (d) Z8. (a) 29. (c) 30. (c)
31. (b) 32. (u) 33. (a.t) 34. (d) 35. (a) 36. (3) 37. (d) 38. (b) 39. (b) 40. (b)
41.(c) 42. (b) 43.(d) 44. (b) 45. (b) 46. () 47. (c) 49. (c) 50. (c)
51.(b) 52. (d) 53.(d) 54, (c) 55. (b) 56. (a) 57. (a) 58. (d) 59. (b) 60. (b)
61. (b) 62. (d) 63. (b) 64.(cl 65.(b) 66. () 67. (d) 68.(<) 69. () 70. (b)
71.(c) 72. (o) 73. (d) 74. (a! 75. (c) 76. (c) 77. (d) 78. (a) 79. (d) 80. (b)
81.(d) 82. (d) 83.(a) 84, (b) 85. la) 86. (c) 87.(b) 88. (c) 89. (c) 90 (b)
91. (b) 92. (b) 93. (d) 94. (a! 95. (d) 96. (b} 97. (b) 98. (b) 99. (3)
100. (a)
101.(b: 102. (b) 103. (c) 104. (di 105. (a) 107. (b)
106. (d) 108. (d) 109. (d) 110. (a)
111. (b

B. Medical entrance special format questions

Assertlon and reason
1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (a) S. (a) 6. (a) 7.(c) 8. (a) 9. (al 10. (d)
11. (c 12. (b) 13. (a) 14. (a} 15. (3) 16. (b) 17. (b) 18. (a) 19. (e)

Match the columns

1. (A -+s, B -,C-, D >Ep) 2. (A-, B-p, C-g) 3. (A ->gB,C->p)
4. (A q B
+r.Cp)

C Medical entrances' gallery

1. b) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. lc) 5. (b) 6. (c) 7.(a) 8. (c) 9.(b) 10.(c)
11. (b) 12. (a) 13. (c) 14. (c) 15.(c) 16. (d) 17. (a) 18. (a) 19.(a) 20. (c)
21. (d) 22. (b) 23. (d) 24. (a) 25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (b) 29. (c) 30. (b)
31. (d) 32. (c) 33.(d) 34. (c) 35.(b) 36. (b)
Hints and
explanations
Check point 5.1
11. (a) As, t = MBsin 9 = (m x 2) x2x10 sin 30°
2. ( Magnetic lines of forcc due to a bar magnet do not =

interscct because if they interset then it mcans, there are

15 x10 x10
x2x10x=1.5 x \0 N-m
two directions of magnctic ficld intensity which is impossible. =
12. la) As, MB sin 9
4. () Initial magnetic moment = M wherc, 0= 90°t MB
When cut in two parts, magrnetic momcnt of cach part Given, t, =
iMBsin9 =MB sin0 =0= 30°
..
2 Angle of totation = 90-30 = 60
When place perpendicular, effective tnagnetic noment 13. Work done is rotating the maget through an angle 0 from
initial position (Le.. = 0°is given by
WWMBlcos ,-
cox ) =MMBcos 0°- cos 0) = MB(1-cos 0)

13. ta) According to Gauss' thenem in magnetisn, surface integral

of magnetic field iitensity over a surface (closed or open) is
7. Xaxis and for magnet
(6) Since for magrnet P, axis lies along always zero iLe.. {B- dA 0
Q. axis is along Y-axis, The point Ris along axial line w.r.t.
magnet P. and is along equatorial line w.r.t. magnet Q. Check point 52
Hence, magnetic field due to nagnet Q 1. tal It has beern established that earth magnetic field is fairly
unifon. The strengh of this field at the surface of the earth
4n
=B |R= equatorial point] ..)
is approximately 10 tesla or l gauss.
Magnetic field due to magnet P 3. between the magnetic meridian and the
(b) Tihe angle
B, Mo
2B [R= axial point) .iü) geograptic meridianis called magneic declanation.
4n x 6. or
ta Magnetic dip magnetic inclination is given by
As at point Rinagnetic field due to Pand Qmagnet are a
perpendicular to each other, tan0
B, Net magnetic fild at Rdue to magnet Pand is givern as Q. where, V and H ate vestical and orizontal components of

,
earth's magnetic field, respectively.

9. lal The relation between magnetic moment }and angular

Given,
H=V ...(ii)
momentum () is
From Egs. (i) and (i), we get
=

2m
tan0 30= 60
ö tan 45
The negative sign indicates that the angular momentum of the 8. (d As,, tan &' = lan
cos 0 cos 30°
electron is opposite in direction to the magnetic moment.
10. la) When a bar magnet of magnetic moment M is placed in a tan 8' =

magnctic field of induction B, then net force on it is

F, = mB+ (-mB=) 9. ta As, tan 6
=,nd tan o,= H
cov90°-01
Lanð
cos(90°-0)

ml 12. () As the current and the other factors are same for both the
galvanomneters, so
While torque, t mB x2 sin MB sin 0
(as M-2m) N tan 60° N
Nr tan
Le., t= MxB N, tan 30 N, /AS:1
 374 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

24. kal A freely hanged mignet stays with its magnetic axis
14. (o As, time period I 2r.
fparallel to magnetic meridian.
25. ta A dip needle in a plane perpendicular
to magnetic
T- 25,=M= T=T=» T=2s meridian will remain alwavs vertical.
28. la) 1f the noth pole of a nagnet points sath. the fields of the
15. (c) As, thetime
eriod. T 27n magnet and the earth will point in openite directienss along
the axis of the magiet, o twn neutral itt are ot ained
which are cquidistant fron the magnct on its axis.

Check point 53
2. (c) Magnetic permeability.

Its ŠI unit is Wb/mVxs 2xs1 31. (b An electron moving around the nucleus has a magnetic
A/m Axm tnonent given by
14. ta) Sme peruliar propertics of ferronagnetic materials are
comnenly displayed by curve ofBagaint H which is called
where, lis the nagnitude of the angular momentum of the
BH uve or hysteresis is B loop. Dia and gara do rot show circulating electron atound the ncleus, The smallest value of
these properties. u is called the bohr tnagneton and its value is
13. lc) f a magnct retains its attracting power for a long time it is
x
9.27 10
= T

said to be permanent, otherwise temporary. Permancnt

magnets are made of ferromagnetic substances. 35. (a) Resultant force acting on a diamagnetic material in a
magetic field is in direction from stronger to the weaker part
of the magnetic fieid.
A) Taking it together pole stretgth be m, and m, and distarnce between them
38. (5) Let
1. ld Magnetic is stronger at end part of magnet,
ole
so maxiniun iron ttetigtod at the cnd point is r, then force between magnetic poles,
F"
pnwder of
magne ,
In second case, F" km,mm
2. (b) A pemanenl muagnct has large retentivity arnd coercivity so (2
it attracts only magnetic sutbstances
F'=F
4. t) Lines which tepresent places nf costant angle of dip are
called isox linic lines. The lie joining place of zetn dip is
39. (b)
N A2
called aclinic line (or magetic eqtutor). At all places upon NS
this line, a freely spended nagnet will remain horizontal.
N
S N A2
3. (d A line passing tlrogh laces having zero value of
magtuetic dip is called aclinic line.
11. (h Sl unit of magnetic induction is, The situation is summerised in figure, we see that magnetic
Unit of WL pole strength of each part becomes halí i.e., n/2.
Unit of A4 Tesla
41. (c) Fo longitudinal panitions agnetic field will be B
Alo, SI weber/netre' and Newton/anp-metre.
unit of 3is
For transverse positions magnctic field will be B, xM
12. (o Magnetic noment per unit volune is intensity of
d
magtetiatinn, arx umter of lines of force crosing per unit
arca is intensity magnctic field. S
right option is {c). =2:1
B
18. ta) Steel has nore retent ivity and coercivity, so it is used for
making tnaent magnet. 45. (b) Torque, t = MB sin 0
21. (a) Iu ou-unifon gnetic field, a magnetic nccdle t, MB sin 90° IIL
experiees a fove
sni a torquc. MA
T,-MB, sin 90* MB, or
22. (bi For a diamagetic autntane, y is sunall, negative and
independcnt of tenperature.
B, T;
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter (375

50. lo Magnetism of a magnet falls with rise of temperature and 69. (d Work done in rotating the magnet rom angle 6, to angle 0,
becomes practically zero above curie temperature. is given by,
53. td Given, B = 4R, W=MBcos 0, - cos
0,)
Here, = 0°
B 4
u, 4 0 and 0, 1 80°
WMB(cos 0°
cos 180° )= 2\B
60. () Above the Curie temperature, ferromagnetic substance 70. () Work done in rotating the magnet in uniform magnetic
become paramagnetic in natute. field is given by
62. (d The magnetic moment will be zero bccause it becomes an W= MBcos 0, - cos 0,)
open circuit. Here, =
0°, 0, 90°

63. (b) If magnetis cut along the axis of magnet of length then I, W= 2 x0.1(cos 0®- cos 90}
new pole strength becomes half i.e., m' m =

=and new length -

=2x0.!(|- 0) 0.2 J
71. () Here, B 0.5 T;I- 20 A; N =
12;À= -0.04im?
remains same i.e., l' =.
.New magnetic mnoment Magnetic moment of the coil,
ml_M M= NIA
= = - 12iAm?
(|5N20 AX-0.04 im')
64. () Net magnetic moment of the systemn is given by The potcntial energy of the coil in the given orientation is

U=- M B- -(-12i Am')-(0.5iT) = +6J

N
72. lab For the earth's magnetism, the magnetic field lines of the
S earth resenble that of a hypohetical nagnetic dipole located
at the centre of the earth.
NS The axis of the diole does not coincide with the axis of
rotation of the carth but is presently tilted by approximately
M M

11.3° with respect to the later. This fesults into two situations
as given in the figure ahead.
M=
ArM V2M? m!
65. (# Magnetic moment of the bar magnet is given by
rMB sin 0
M
B sin 9
0.032 0.032 x 2 0.4 |T!
0.16x sin 30 0.16

66. la As, t MB sin 0 Hence, the declination varies between l1.3º Wto 11.3 E.
t= m(.) B

sin 0 MNS (10/5) = 0,8 oersted

73. (d..
25 x
10 .2 244/(10 2
(2) B sin 0 (0.05XS x 10) sin 30°
-2x 10- A-m
H, B cos cos
74. (a) A, 0,cos 30v2 YO
67. () Force experienced by each pole of bar magnet is given by H, B cs 0, cos 0, cos 45°
F= mB 75. () Total strength of magnetic field
where, m is pole strength of bar magnet
out M ml.
Ve ' -H- o.s-(0.3 -0.4
M
*B» 6x 101 - *2x10
F= =
0.4
tan
m H 0.3 3
L0.l
68. (d In cave of totoid, the magnetic ficld is only confined inside
the body of toroid in the form of concentric magnetic lines of
force and there is no magnetic ficld outside the body of 76. (c) As,
HB. cos 0

toroid. This is because the kop encloses no current. Thus, the

magnetic motnent of toojd is zero.
In general, if we take r as a large dist ace outside the totoid,
BRut this case is not B,
then m possible hete, =ersted
376) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

77. (d As we know a permanent magnet is a substance which at It contradicts for magnetic field, because there is a magnetic
room temperature retain ferrOmagnetic property for a long field inside the solenoid and no field outside the solenoid
period of time. carrying current but the magnetic feld lines forn the closed path.
21
The individual atoms in a ferromagnetic material possess a 88. (c) ln CGS, B
=99 = ...i)
dipole moment as in a pararnagnetic material.
Howevet, they interact with one another in such a way that M 84
B,n ...i)
they spontaneously align themelves in a common direction
over a macroscopic volutne called dornain. Thus, we can say
that in a permanent magnet at roon temperature, domains are
all perfectly aligned. From Eq. (i) and (ii), Brgulr 36 gauss
79. td For a temporary magnet, the hysteresis loop should be
90. (
long and narrow.
80. (b) T a vi B B,
2B
By increasing mass to four times, the moment of inertia will
alsa increase four times. Then T' -2NI
81. \) For a tangent galvaroneter, if Iamp cutrent flows through
coil, then this current is proportional to angle of deflection (of
the ncedle).
Ic tan 0

tan t,
tan , 2
I,
tan 30°
tan 60°

82, (d In series çurrent is sarne.

91. (b)
T« » M= 3M and M, = M

Mtarn, tan 60°

M tan 0, tan 45°
94. (a) Time period of vibrating magnet is given by
83. (a) Magetic field due to a bar magnet at a distance r from the
centre of magnet on axial position
Bo 21/ Tuo)
4

)
A-)--. M,
B4(60/ T
19
(60/10
4

84. (b) Intensity of magnetisation,

M 95. ()h Paranagnetic materials will be feebly attract, diamagnetic
mass/density material will be feebly repelled and ferromagnetic material
mass 1 g= 10kg will be strongly attracted.
Given,
x10 kg 97. (b) Suppose magnetic field is zeto at point P which lies at a
and density = 5g/cm =

5x10'%g/m' distancex from 10 unit pole.

(10
10 unit 40 unit
6x10 x5x 10'
Hence. I -3A/m
10
30cm
83. (a H-Ho. 4x0s= 107 (20)x10 Hence, at P
x
(20)x4 10 x104 10 x
|0 cm
M=
107 4z (30 - x}
M= 32 A-m' So, from stronger pole distance is 20 cm.
87, () Gauss'
As law states, E dS = lor electrastatic field. t T=
98. (b Time period, 2x.| MB
does not cOntrad:ct for electtostatic ficlds as the clectric field
lines do not form contimuous closed path.
According to Gauss' Law in magnetit field,
BdS0
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter 377

60/40 104. (d As potential energy is given as

2.5 U= - MB1- cos 0)=U - MI (when 0 0°, U- minimum)
x
Hence, M arnd B parallel to each other for ninimum potential
B, 0.36
10 T energy.
99. (a) The needle is deflected thrcnugh 45 means magnetic field PQo configuration provides 8 0°, Um - MB
at the centre of cirrular coil is equal (in magnitude) to the
horizontal cotnponent of earth's magnetic field. 105. (a) Point Plies on cquatorial line of magnet (1) and axial line
of magnet (2) as shown
NH
2
x
2x0.2 x 0.37 10
I
H x 0.6 A
(4n 10) (20)
100. (a) Apparent dip, tan

- tan" (2
tan) B = 10-l000 0.1T
Here, = true dip = 40°
=
47 (0.1)
2 x1000
101. (6) As, u o(1+ z)or u 4nx101+ 599) B, = 0.2T
(0.1
H 7.536 x 10 TmA
0.1T
-B=
B,
H..
B=uH= 7.536x10 *1200 T
. Hence, f= BA = 7.536 x10* x1200 x0.2 x 10 Wb 106, (d
-1.81 x10 Wb
102. ( As Curie law explains, we can deduce a formula for the
I.!
T,
relation between magnetic field induction, temperature and
magnetisation.
3
B (magnetic field induction) Further, T«
Le. I (magnetisation) r (tempetature in kelvin)

M-M!
M4+M,3
Here 1,-8Am! This equation gives, M5
M, 4
B 0.6T, T, = 4K (H Time period of suspended magnet
107.
B, = 0.2T,T, = 16K, I, =? MB cos 8
T 25 ve
0.244
16 8
MBcos 6
0.6
V
103. (c) Here, tan
b,Heoso
B«
cos 60
B 409 16x2I 16:9/3
B, cos 30* 225 9x= + B;
108. (à At point P net magntic field R B

H sin Ô
-dN
tan 6, H cos
(90- 0) Hsin@ S
tan
tan ,, sin
cos 0
= tan0 where

O= tan an& and

4n d
tan6,
 378 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

I (MH When magnet is cut along its length, into three equal parts
109. () Frequency. Vm
and placed on each other, then new moment of inertia of
MUB + H) system
I

where, B - Magnetic field due to downward conductor and magnetic monent of system
x
3= M

:.Time period of system

T:2%|B
Then,
B) Medical entrances' Special format
2x15 Questions.
B=10x 20 x102
1. (6) When we beak maget into two pieces its poles does ot
B=15 4T get separated as it again becotnes a magnet. Also, when
v.R+B, magnet is broken into two cqual pieces, its magetic moments
gets redced to half.

15• 12 L5 4. (a) According to (Gauss's Law in magnetism, (3 dS

m0
V 12
8. (a) Relative magnetic permeability is given by
v'= 15Hlz
110. (a) Using the formula for time period for magnetic system
It is a dimensionless quantity.

9. (a) Diamagnetic substances are repclled by a magnct. The

level of a solutjon falls when one arm of a U-tube
U-tu containing
T a dianagnetic solution is placed in between the poles of a
strong naget.
When similar poles placed at same side, then
12. (H nfact, iron is a ferromagnetic thaterial.
M- M+ 2M = 3M 13. (a) The susceptibility of diamagnetic material is snall and
So, from Eq ) negative. It is independent of temperat ure.
.(5i) 14. (a) Magtietic nonent of circular loop, M= NIA
n
where,A= when r'
When the polarity of a tmagnet is reversed, then
M, = 2M-M = M
So, from Eq. i) 15. (al A magnet does not experience arny force since net force.
mB - mB=0. The forces orn NS poles are equal, unlike and
...üi) parallel makes a couple to align the magnet.

16, (b) Tine eriod in sum position, 7, = 2n,

Now, dividing Eq ii) by Eq (iil, we get "MM
= +
1 where, I,
-4+1, and M, M
M

Hence, T<, Time period in dilferene arition,

111. (6 Initially, the time period of the magnet T T,<T,

17. (b The susceptibility of feromagnetic sulstances vaties

inverely with temperature, After curie point the
susceptibility ot substance varies inversely
For each part of magnet, its moment of inertia is 27 ndits its alsolute temperature. lerronagances neCurie's with
ohev's law
magnetic moment = MI3. only abKove its curie point.
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter (379

18. (a) The core of a transformer undergoes cycles of 4. (e) As we know that, the magnetic field at a point due to the
magnetisation again and again. The encgy loss is lesser and =
bence it is used in moving coil galvanometer.
dipole is given by B
Ho,+ 3cos²0
4n
19. (e) The propertics of a sutstance is due to alignment of where, Mis magnetic dipole moment.
molecules in it. When these sulstances are heated. molecules
Kquire kinctic encrgy. Somc of the molccules get back to the
closed chain arrangement leading to zero resultant). So they
lose their magnetic Hence the properties of 3. (6) The coercivity of bar magnet 4xL0' Am
ramagnetic anxl ferronagnetic su stancesare effected
para Length of solenoid- 12 cm; Number of turns = 60
by heating.
The coercivity of 2 cm length of solenoid
=
Match the columns 4x10 x12x10= 480
2. Since, the magnetic potential energy U, is given by, Now, current through each turn to denagnetise = 480
U, - mB= - mB cos = 31.4 cm
6. (d The effective length of magnet
A. For =
90 U= - mBcos 90° = 0
Pole strength, m= 0.8 Am
B. For 9 = 0°.U = - mB cos 0° = - mB
The potential energy is minimum and hence the needle is in Length of semi-circe =l
nost stable position.
- - mB cos where, D - diameter of circle
C For 0 = 180°, U,,
3. In terms of the suceptibility , 180°+ mB
a material is dianagnetic, if z D. 2.231.4x10
3.14
D= 20 x 10 m
is negative. para-i!y is positive and snall and ferro-if y is
Now, the magnetic mornent
large and ponitive.
0,8 20 x 10-2
x

ml n)
4. Diamagnetie Paramagnetic Ferromagnetic 16x10° 016A-m
-IsI<0 0<1<E (a) As, vertical component of Earth's magnetic field is
7.
I<u, <l+ 4,>>1 B, = V8,, (Given]
Angle of dip at any place is given by.

tan =
B,
C) Medical entrance's gallery B
6= tan W3) = 60°
1. (b : Work done in rotating the magnet
SSMB (cos 0, - cos 0) 8. (c) Given, B, = 3x10 T, 0 = 45°, n= 50
where, f= magnetic moment of the magnet and and r= 20 10mx

Be magnetic ficld
As, the current, I tan
MB lços
SW= 0-cos
2x 20 x 10x3x10x tan 45°
MB 2W ...G)
4nx10' 50
Torque on a magnet in this position is given by, 120x(07 3 3 3 =

T=MxB MB·sin0 21W sin 60° (írom Eq 6)) 0.19A

4n x10 x 50 5x 5x3.14 13.7
a
2
9. (4 The intensity of agnetiation increases lor
ferromagnetic sulstance with the applied magnetic field and
2. (d As we know the relaticn between the magnetic permieability become constant, when the doins get perfetly aliged
and suscetibility of natetial is, u, = l+ m ..(6) with respect to the exterral tagnetic ficlts.
:So,Foraccording
diarnagnetic substances,
to
<! u,
10. () The work done fin rotating) by external agent
E ), the magnetic susceptibility
(z.)of = change in potential energy
dianagnetic substance will be negative. - MB cos
0, - (-MB cos 8)
While in case of pra and ferromagnetic substances -MBcos 45
Cos 0°
subsceptibility is positive. 0.41 1

3. () The magnetic susceptibility of a fetromagnetic substance 0.03)

decreases with increae in tempetature and above curie's
temperatute, the sutntance behaves like paranagnetic orie. 11. (b Core of clectromagnets are made up of ferronagnetic
Hence, option (b) is correct. material which has high permcability and low retentivity.
380) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

12. (al Magnetic permeability of substance, u B A 4% x

10* (1+ 299) > -40**30
where, His the magnetising or magnetic field strength. So, 2.6400 10-7 = 3771.4 x 10*
Hmor
the tnagetisitg field of a feromgnetic material is increasing 7
thus its, permeability decreased. a 3771x 10 Hm-!
(c) a.
13. M m2 20. (c) Circunference of circle = 2xR
b. M,
-0 2rR -L R=

cos
M, mJ1+ 302 Area, A np' Rl.
4n
=
Magnetic moment,(u) IA
M, = 2m cos 30°= mW3
= (0.05 nm nm
21. (d Given, r 0.05 x|0m (:l 10 nl
14. (c)The bar magnet is shown in the diagram n- 10 revolutions
For fig. (a) and (b) and ea 16xl0"C
We know that the magnetic moment, M= Al
m

N
SN = 3.14 x(0.05 x
N
S
M= nr'xhe 10x106 xl.6x10:1®
-2/- or
x
=1.26 10 A-m'
Magietic motnent for (a) is =m (2)
M
magnetic moment 22. ( Let magnetic pole strength be m then M= m
Magnetic momet for (bl is of the first
Mm'O) where
1m')
Now, Afmh ...6)
M m(2)
When magnet is cut as shown in the diagram, pole strength
will ot be affected. Hence, m'=m 23. () As, B, =B, + B and tan = B B,

(from Eq. (i))

2 Given, B,, - 0.3 G, 0.52G
15. () The class of the magnetic material is ferromagnetic. B, =(0.30' + (0.52 -fo.36 - 0.6G 4

16. (d Fot paramagnetic sanple Curie's Law) I «B/T

whete, 4 0.8 A/m and 0.8T and 8= tan
:B tan
0.52 =
0.3
60*
=
and T, = 5K B, 0.4T
24. ta) When magnet is cut into equal parts, area of cross-section
T, 20 K
I, ? becomes half. Hence, pole strength becomes half.

I, B,/1,
, B, 23. (a) We kow that the magnetic field induction at a point,

x
08 0.8× 20 0.4
0.1 Am
I,=
0.4x5
17. (al When fenperature increases beyond
According to question B:B,: B, =:
(03(06 (0.9
urie
Curi
magnetic temethe disorder of the
of the material -// Given, M= 120 Am?.
=
27:3.37:1
T-12s and B - 0.4x
incrcascs, hence algnment of magnetic moments are 26. (a) 10T
disturbed which caused material to behave as paramagnetic.
We know that, T= 2r tscquaring both sides)
VAMB
18. (al We know that intensity of magnetisation, I=
x

I
T'MB or -121" x
(120) (0.4x 10)
where, M=magetic onent,V= volune So,
4n 4x 3.14x 3.14
So, M=IV=5x10 x 12 x
100 (10o I=175.2 10 kgm'
-60 x10 x10 =0.6 A-m? In this question, the option (a) is appruximately equivalent to
173.2 x 1o,sa the arnswer is l=172.8x10 kgn".
X, =
19. (a) The given. 299
27. (a) On heating a ferromagnetic sutstance atove curie
and Hp 4n x 10 Hm, u =?
temperature, it becomes paramagnctic.
We u
kow that, =ll*L)
 Chapter 05: Magnetism and matter 381

35. (b We know that, B=u+po!

29. (c) As
IB-uH_uH-uH
Ve
Htan6tan6
I= u, - DH
But, For a solcnoid having n tuns/length and current J.
tan S= 5= 45
(b) The fmagnetic field at a point on the axis of a bar magnet
Dn!' - (1000 - D300 x 0.5
30. - 2.5 x 1oAm
5,
=
B.Ho 10 x 2x1.25 - 2
x10 NA'm! Magnetic rment, M = IV= 2.5 x 10 ×
10 23 A-m²

(0.5
36. (b) Cutent in tangent galvanorneter
31. (d Rod is moving towards east, 50 induced emf acrss its end 2rl1
wil! be
B= Byl= By tan 0 (:tan9= B/B,}|
=3x10-* x 10 *10xo.25
-
10v= 10uV R

(c) From
82
32. the relatiorn, susceptibility of the material is

a
Thus, it is obvious that greater the value of susceptibility of
material greater will be the value of intensity of
magnetisation ie., more easily it can be magnetised.
tan & = tan
5 tan 43°
33. (d Here, R and R, are in parallei
Cos ros

8= tan
1!.IR, +R8+8
RKR, RR, 8x8
Ru =42
34. (o When wire is bent in the forn of semicircular atc then. l= 1r
V4
:The radius of semicircular arc, r l/z
Hetke,
I-1A
Distance between two end points of semicircular wire From Eq. (i), we get
=
= r tan 0 H
N
.Magnetic moment of semicircular wire tan 0,
A

tan0,
=mr =mxml NA N
But ml is the magnetic motnent straight wire Le., ml = M .16x3
V3 x2 NA
New magnetic moment =M = 12 turns
N,
 CHAPTER

06 Electromagneti
induction
The phenomenon of generating current/emf in a conducting circuit by change in
strength. position or orientation of an associated external magnetic field is called
electromagnetic induction. The emf, so developed is called induced emf. Il the
conductor is in the form of a closed circuit, a current flows in the circuit. This is
called induccd current. It is the reverse proces of magnetic field produced by
electric current. EMI was discovered by Michaci Faraday in 1831. In this chapter, we
will study about thc Lenz's law, motional emf and inductances.

1) Magneticflux
Inside
1) Magnetic flux The total number of magnetic field lines crossing through any surface, normally when
.Faradayv's Laws of electromagnctic it is placed in a magnetic field is known as the magnetic flux of that surface.
induction
•
Len's Law and conservation of Consider an element of area dS on an arbitrary shaped surface as shown in Fig. 6.1.
enetgy If the magnetic field at this element is B, then the magnetic flux through the
2 Motiknal electromotive for ce element is
•
Ceneral lorm of notional emf cdon = BS cos0
•
Flemin's right hand thumb rule to dn B$
fird the directon of induced current
•
Indxtion of ficld

3) Self-iduction
Kirchhoffs second Law with an
ixhscto
4) Mutual induction
•
Mutual inductance for
two concentric coils
. Mutual Fig. 6.1
inductance of two long
coaxial soienoxds
• Mutual inductance of a solenoid
Here, dS is a vector that is perpendicular to the surface and has a magnitude equal to
surrourded by a coil the area dS and is the angle between B and dS at that element. In general, dg
.Coefficient of copling varies fron element to element.
• Combination of rutual
inductaxes
The total magnetic flux through the surface is the sum of the contributions from the
•Growth and decay of curtent in individual area elements.
L-R circuit
 Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction (383

Note
Exomple 62 A long solenoid of radius 4 cm, length 4000 cm
() As magneticlines of force are closed curves (be, monopoles do not exist),
carries a current of 3 A. The total number of turrns is 100.
total magnet flux linked wth a closed surface is atways zero. Assuming ideal solenoid. find the flux passing through a
(i) A special case, in whichB is uniform over a plane surface with total area S circular sturface having centre on aris of solenoid of radius
magnetic flux is gven by BS (os 3 cm and is perpenticular to the axis of solenoid (i) inside and
(i) at the end of solenoid.
Sol N= 100
4
cm

Fig. 62 A plane ofsurface area Splaced on uniform field B

|= 400 cm
Number of turns per unit length is given by
Specific conditions
For =
90 For =
180°
nJ00 4
25 turns/m
(i) Magnetic field of a solenoid at a point inside is
= 0°
B=#i S= * and
Magnetic flux
= BS cos ng cos 0
h= =#ni
4nx 10x 25 × 3 xtx (3x 10?
027x 10 Wb = 027u Wb
B is parallel to surface B is perperdicular to B is antijurallel to (iü) At the end, magnetic field of solenoid is given by

,
vector ie., S.
= RS cos0
surface vector
i.e., S
surface vector, i.e., S.
= RS cos 180

==
027 0135 uWb
BS BS cos90 =
RS (-D= -RS 2
maximum
Exomple 63 A long straight wire carrying current I and a
square conducting uire loop of side l. at a distance 'a' from
Units and dimension of magnetic flux current wire as shoun in the (igure. Both the current wire and
loop are in the plane of poper. Find the magnetic flx of
(i) Magnetic flux is a scalar quantity. current uire, passing through the loop.
(ii) The SI unit of magnetic flux is tesla-metre
(1 T-m') This unit is called weber (Wb).
1
Wb = 1
T-m' = I N-m/A
The CGS unit of flux is maxwell (Mx).
IMx = 1 gauss-cm²
= 10
1Wb
=lT x lm² Gx 1o cm?
1
Wbe 10 Mx
Thus, unit of magnetic field is also weber/m Sol. Asthe field of current wire passing through the loop is same
(1Wb/m? ) in direction (normally inward) but not uniform in magnitude.
So, we will use intcgration method for finding the fiux.
1T= 1
Wb/m?
The small flux through a thin rectangular strip of length land
(iii) The dimensional formula of magnetic flux is width dr, is given by
(ML2TA-y do, B, dS B,dS cos180,
Magnetic field due to a long straight wire carrying currcnt Jis
Exomple 6.1 A uniform magnetic field exists in the space
B= BÍi+Bj given by B - H, and area, dS =Ix dr.
–B,k. Find the magnetic flux through an areaS, 2nx
if the area S is in yz plane.
Sol. Since, the field is uniform, we can use formula, = B-S
Area S is in y-plane, it means S=Si a

+!
= + -B,k)-(si) = B,S.
Hence,
i B 21
 384 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Faraday's laws of electromagnetic

induction
There are two laws of electromagnetic induction given by Fig. 6.3
Faraday's law as below:
(iv) The angle between B and the normal to the loop
O

can change with time.

Faraday's first law This can be done by rotating a loop in a magnetic
Whenever the amount of magnetic flux linked with a field.
circuit changes, an enf is induced in the cireuit.
The actualnumber of magnetic lines passing through the
circuit does not matter of the values of the induced emf.
Induced current is determined by the rate at which the
magnetic flux changes.
Fig. 6.4
Farada's second law (v) Any combination of the above can occur.
The magnitude of the induced emf in a circuit is cqual to
the rate of change of magnetic flux through the circuit. Example 6.4 A coil with an average diameter of 0.02 m is
placed perpendicular to a magnetic field of 6000 T. If the
Mathematically, Faraday's second law can be expressed as, induced emf is 11V. W"hen the magnetic field is changed to
Induced emf c Rate f change of magnetic flux 1000T in 4 s. What is the number of turns in the coil?
e Sol. Given, radius of coil, r= 0.02 0.01m
dt
( rate of change of magnetic flux= P2 -9L B -6000T, B, =1000 T, ! = 4 s,e =11V
- 4!=NAB,
emf, e
=N, -8
The negative sign in above relation indicates that the
induced emf in the loop due to changing flux always
opposes the change in the magnetic flux.
(6000 - 1000)
In the case of a closely wound coil of N turns, the change ll =N.x (0.01x
of flux associated with each turn, is same. Therefore, the
Number of turns,
cxpression for the total induced enf is given by
1|x 7x 4
= 28
N x x
- 22 (0.0 5000
|e=
dt
Induced current and induced charge
The induced emf can be inereased by increasing the
number of turns N of a closed coil. Induced current
The magnetic flux can be changed in the following ways When the agnetic lux passing through a loop is changed,
(i) The magnitude of B can change with time. an induced emf and hence an induced current is produced
Thus, time-varying magnetic field is in the cireuit.
If R is the resistance of the circuit, then induced current is
(i) The current producing the nagnetic ficld can change given by
with time. Thus, time-varying current is e
=
i) i : . ..(i)
i dt
(üü) The area enclosed by the loop can change with time.
If induced current is produced in a coil rotated in a
This can e
done by pulling a loop inside (or outside) a
magnetic field. By doing, so the area enclosed by kxop uniform magnetic field, then
(hatched area) can be changed. NBA osinot =
lo sinot
R

Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction (385

= NBA 0) =
where, lo peak value of induced current,
R
N= number of turns in the coil,
B= magnetic field, o=angular velocity of rotation,
A = area of cross-section of the coil.

384 of 904
 Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction (385

= NBA) =
where, lo peak value of induced current,

N= number of turns in the coil,

B= magnetic field, o = angular velocity of rotation,
A= area of cross-section of the coil.
Induced charge
When the current starts flowing in the circuit, flow of B

(Decreasing)
charges also takes place. Charge flown in the circuit in time
Fig. 6.6
dt will be given by
1
> 90°,
d = idt
(-d,) ...(iü)
[O
n<0, >0, so induced current is
R dt
Thus, for a time interval Ar we can write, negative)
Example 6.5 A coil consists of 200 turns of wire having a
e=: total resistance of 2.02. Each tun is a square of side
RAt 18 cm, and a unifom mgretic field directed perpendicular
Aq to the plane of the coil is turned on. If the field changes
and --aða)
R
...(i1)
lineariy fron O to O.5 T in 0.80 s, then uhat is the
mayritude of induced emf and current in the coil while the
Direction of induced current field is changing?
The direction of induced current in a loop may be obtained by Sol Given, N = 200 turns, R= 2.02, change in magnetic
using ficld, AB
m
0.5 T, side of square, I =18cm- 18x 10*n,
do and
dt i-) At=0.80 s
From the Faraday's law,
So, the steps to decide the direction of induced current are as
follous Induced emf, le - Ndt, (:: B.S)
dt
(i) Define a positive direction for the area vector S. =
Area, S =!' 08x 10
(i) From the directions of S and the magnetic fieldB,
determine the sign of a
and its time rate of change (200) (18x 10 (0.5 - 0)_A05 V
0.8
dt
I.0o
A

-.Further, induced current. i

(iü) If do is positive, i.e., flux is increasing, sign R 2
dt
of induced current is negative and vice-versa. Exomple 6.6 The magnetic flux threading a metal ring
In this way, we will determine the sign of the induced aries uith time t according to à, =3 (at -be') T-m
current. with a = 2.00s and b = 6.00s. The resistance of the
(iv) Finally, determine the direction of induced current ring is 3O 2. Determine the maximum curret induced in
using your right hand. Curl the fingers of your right the ring during the intenal from t =0 to t 2.0 s
i

around S, with your right thunb in the dircction Sol. Given, magnetic flux ¢, =3 lar -k')Tm'
of S. the induced current is positive, it is in the same
If a
direction as your curled fingers and if it is negative, it
where, =2%, b= 6,7
is in the opposite direction. :. Induced emf.
B
jel=dt
(Lncreasing)
-
..
Induced current, i
= lel Sar
6t -3at - 2it
3
di
For current to be maximum, 0

dt
.:. 6at -2h = 0 or t= b
Fig. 6.5 [0<90°.4, >a>Q so induced current is
negative) 32
dt
386 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

at t
b
current is maxirnum.
Using the relation, , =
BS BS cos 0

Here. 00
Substituting the values in Eq. (b), the maxinum current is 4 =S
Magnetic lux of square loop will be
(34,
20 16
6' -b

,
Magnetic flux of circular loop will be
3a 3a 3a

Magnitude of this maximum current will be imn 4

Sutstituting the given values of a and b, we have Average induced emnf is given by
(6
6.0 A BJ(I 1). B(4 -)
31 2) At 4n 16 I6nt,
Example 6.7 A square lup of side 10 cm and resistance 0.5 2 Example 6.9 Supposea coil of area Sm², resistance 10 and
is placed ertically in the east-uest plane. A uniform maqnetic l
numier of turns 200 held perpendicular to a unifom magretic
field of O.10T is set ufp across the plane in the north-east field of strength 0.4T. The coil is now turned through 180° in
direction. The maqrnetic field is decreased to zero in 0.70 s at a
ime ls. Wuut is
steady state. What is the magitude of current in this () avenage induced enf
time-interval? (in average induced curtent
Sol. Given, B = 0.10 T, area of squarc loop 10 x 10 =100 cm (ii) total charge that fleus through a given cross-section of the
coil?
-10m'
Sol. Given, arca of coil, S = 5n“, resistance, R = 102, number of
As the magnetic ficld is set up across the plane in the
turns, N = 200, magnetic field, B = 0.4 T, Ar =Is
orth-east direction, then 9 = 45°
The initial magnetic flux is given by When the plane of coil is perpcndicular to the magnctic field
i.e.. 0, = 0° and after it is rotated through 180°, then
•, = RS os 0, =1809.
01 x 10 W
Initial lux, =NBS cos 0° = NBS
=200 x 0.4 x 5 = 400 Wb
Final flux, (given) and final flux = MIS cos 180° =-NS =-400Wb
The change in flux s, =
brought abuut in 0.70 i.e., At 0.70s
Change in flux. A¢.! (

The magnitude of the induced emf is = NHS

-(-NES) 2NES = 800Wb
=

109
V2x
G) Average induced emf (e) |42NBA =800V
At 0.7
- = 2NBA
The magnitude of induced current isI 2 mA (ii) Average current -80A
R RA
R 0.5
Exomple 6.8 A wire of length l in the form of a square loop lies (ii) Average charge
=
Q2NBA
in a plane normal to a magnetic field B. If this wire is RAt
converted into a circular loxp in time, then find the awrage 2NBA
induced emf. Total charge AQ 80C
R
Sol.
Exomple 6.10 Thruugha long solenoid of diameter 4.1 cm,
having 100 turns per cm, a curtent I = LA is flowing. At ts
centre, a 60 turns closely packed coil of diameter 3.1 cm is
placed such that the coil is cozxial wnh the long solenoid. The
current in the solenoid is reduced to zero at a steady rate in
10 ms. Vhat is the magnitude of emf induced in the coil while
the current in the slenoid is changing?
Sol. Initially, magnetic flux passing through the coil (one turn),
Total length of circle will be =2ar r= ,-B-A =
BA cos 0°.
21 Magnetic field at a point inside the solenoid is given by
Side of square, Bun,
L,

where nisnumber of turns per metre,

 :
Chapter 06 Electromagnetic induction 387

We know, q = idt
4 So, for time 0 2T,
21
n
Here, =10000 turts per metre, q- (idt tosin ordt 0
I=lA,d =3l cm
31x 10F x (v) Heat (ID generated in a loop during time 0 2T, is
4x 10" x1x 10000 IX
4 given as
= 0.947 x 10 Wb
Finally. the flux becotnes zero because the current reduces to
zero.
e l40_0947x 10-3 -.2.I-á.2*2ze (-r-3)
Thus, induced emf, -9.47x 10-v R 2 0 oR R
10x 10
The total emf =Nxe = 60x 947x 10 = 568.2x
10v Exomple 6.12 A square loop ACDE of area 20 cm² and
resistance 52 is rotated in a magnetic field B = 2 T through
Example 6.11 A square loop of edge b having M turns is rotated 180°,
with a uniform angular velocity o abnut one of its diagonals () in 0.01 s and (i) in 0.02 s.
which is kept fixed in a horizontal position. A uniform
Find the magnitude ofe, i and Aq in both the cases.
magnetic field B, exists in the vertical direction.

Find (i) the emf induced in the coil as a function of time t. Sol. Let us take the area vector S perpendicular to plane of loop
(iD the maximum emf induced. inwards. So initially, dS Band when it is totatecd by 180,
(iid the aerage emf induced in the loop oera long period. st!B.
(id if resistance of lxgp is R, amount of charge floun in time Hence, init ial flux passing through the loop,
t=0 tot =2T. , BS cos 0°= 2)( 20x 10)(1)
(u heat pratuced in time t 0 tot 2T. = 10 Wb
4x
Sol. i) 1" to the field. Let at any
Irnitially, plane of loop is
Flux passing through the loop when it is rotated by 180,
time t, normal to lcop makes an angle 0 with magnetic
ficld 0 = of. =BS cs180°
The flux passing through loop, (2) (20x 10)(-1) -4x 10 Wb
cos cos cot
BS =MB} Therefore, change in flux,
e =
ot = e, sin of, Ao, = -, =-8x 10 Wb
t MBJosin () Given at At
=0.0l s, R=5Q
=
where, o MB'o Using thc rclation,
(iü) For emf to be maximum, then sin 0of should be equal to I.
8x 10 V
0.8
0.01
(ii) Long period means one time period, ie.. 0 ->T
A
We know that average cmf is given as or induced current
i=0=
R 5
0.16

and charge Aq iAt =0.l6x 0.01 1.6x 10 C

otd =0
F--osin (i) Similarly. given at At = 0.02 s, R 52
8x 10 -= 0,4 V
0.02
(iv) Using the relation, induced current,
, sin i-lel0.4
i- RR sin cot of
R5
0.08 A
= 1.6x 10 C
Aq = iAt = (0.08) (0.02)
whete, i, = and charge
388) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Exomple 6.13 The tuo conducting rails are placed perpendicular the help of Lenz's law, an associated principle with
to each other, such that their ends are joined as shoun in figure. Faraday's law.
A conducting bhar is now pluced ower the rails and start moving
with constant velcity v starting from the vertex at time t 0. Lenz's law give the same result as the sign rule we
t0 The fhex through the triangle (isesceles) by the rails and bar introduced in Faraday's law but is often easier to use.
at t lo Lanz's law states that, the direction of any magnetic
tin Te emf around the triangle at that time. induction effect is such as to oppose the cause of
(i) In what manner does the emf around the triangle nry with effect.
time. This law is based upon law of conservation of energy. As
OB the induced emf opposes the change in flux, work has to
be done ag:ainst the opposition offered by induced
emf/current in changing the flux. The work done appears
as electrical energy in the circuit.

Direction of induced current with the help

of Lenz's law
Sol. Direction of induced current can be determined by
checking whether the flux through a conducting loop or
circuit is increasing or decreasing.
4H 2ut
• If flux is decreasing, the magnetic field duc to induced
current will be along the existing magnetic field.
• If flux is increasing, the magnetic field due to induced
current will be opposite to existing magnetic field.
area of loop, =p?
(i) At time =
t,
S=-2it
Important points based on Lenz's law
t area of isosceles triangle =x base x
height) The following are some important points that will explain
the direction of induced current according to Lenz's law.
Using the relation,
,
Magnetic flux RS Bv'r" and at, fto
m
Bo't (i) Consider a conducting loop is being pulled insidea
magnetic field, hence area of loop inside the
(ii) The enf developed around the triangle at to, magnetic field increases,
-
further, e
d
J²-2 2Bvt
Motion
At=toe= 2Bv't

(ii) According to the relatio obtained for the enf

i.e., e= 2Bvt e«t

Fig. 6.7

From the above figure, it is clear that the magnetic

flux through loop is increasing and hence magnetic
field due to induced current will be opposite to the
Hence, emf varics linearly with time. existing magnetic field i.e., inside the plane of
paper, thus direction of induced current will be
Lenz's law and conservation of energy clockwise.
(ii) Consider a loop is being pulled out of magnetic
The negative sign in Faraday'% cquation of electromagnetic field, arca of loop inside field decreases and hence
induction describes the direction in which induced emf flux ( = BS) passing through loop also decreases.
drives the current. This direction is easily determined with
 Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction (389

(v)Consider two conducting loops are placed in a

Motion magnetic field.

1(Lnduced current)

Fig. 6.8
Fig. 6.11
So, magnetic field due to induced current will be In this case, if magnetic field is increasing, then fux
along the existing magnetic field, i.e., inside the through each loop will increase, hence magnetic field
plane of paper, thus direction of induced current will due to induced current will be opposite to the existing
be clockwise. magnetic ficld, i.e. 0, hence induced current will be
(ii) Consider a loop is placed near a current carrying anti-clockwise but single current will flow in the
loop wire. The magnetic field due to long wire at wire. The induced emf in loop 1 will be greater due
to its bigger area, so single current will flow
distancex from it is given by
according to current in loop 1. Induced current in 1
will be anti-clockwise and in loop 2 will be
2TX clockwise.
Bci (vi) (a) When north pole moves towards ring, then flux will
Bai increase, induced current will oppose this, so north
pole will be formed in loop as seen by observer.

Observer Mation

Fig. 6.12
OB Induced current will be anti-clockwise.
Fig. a9 (b) When north pole moves away from ring, then flux
will decrease, induced current will oppose this, so
If the current in long wite increases, then
south pole will be formed in loop as seen by

to long wire will be.

also increases. The direction of magnetic field due
In this case, is increasing,
magnetic field due to induced current will be
observet.

S
opposite to cxisting magnctic ficld, i.e.O, hence (7
Observer Motinn
direction of induced current is anti-clockwise.
(iv) If a conducting loop is brought away from a current Fig. 613
carrying straight wirc. Induced current will be clockwise.

-Motion Anti-cockwise Clockwise

Fig. 6.14
(c) Similar otservations (as in case (a) can be
Fig. 6.10 observed when south pole moves towards ring. So,
induced current will be clockwise here.
As the loop is moving away so, flux through the loop
will decrease, magnetic field due to induced current
will be along the existing magnetic field, ie., 0,
(
Observer Motion
hence direction of induced current is clockwise.
Fig. 6.15
 390) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

(d) Similar olservations (as in case (b) can be observed north pole, so that field lines of coil's magnetic ficid are
when south pole moves away from the ring. So, upwards. Now, like poles repel each other. Hence, a < 9.
induced current in this case will be
anti-clockwise.

N S

Observer Motion

Fig. 6.16

(vi) Two co-axial circular loops, identical to each other,

carry equal amount of currents and circulating in the If this circular loop had a slot, an emf in that case will be
sane direction. induced but no curent will flow Le., a =g.
(a) When loops approaches cach other, then the flux
linked with each coil will increase. Exomple 6.15 A bkur magnet is brought near a solenoid as
shoun in figure. Will the soleoid attract or repel the magnet?

N OOO0000)
Fig. 6.17 Sol When the magnct is brought near the solenoid, then according
to Lenz's Law. both repel each other. On the other hand, if the
Magnetic field due to 1®at will be given by magnet is noved away Íron the soleroid, then it atlracts the
HoNiR magnet. When the magnet is braght hear the slenoid, then
B
2R? + x2)w2 the nearer side becomes the same pole and when it is moved
x
So, decreases, B will increase also increases.
s
away it becomes the opposite pole shown in figure.

The induced current in each coil will try to reduce

flux and will be opposite to original current. So,
0000000;:
current in each coil will decrease.
(b) Now, loops move away from each other, then the
flux linked with coil will decrease and so the O000000
induced current will try to increase the flux and
hence current in each coil will increase.
It can also be urnderstood by increasing or decreasing
Example 6.14 A bar magnet is freelv falling along the axis of a field lincs as in Example 6.14.
circular loop as shoum in fiqure. State uhether its acceleration
'a Example 6.16 A circular loop is placed near a current
is eqçual te. grrater tharn or les than the acceleration de to gmuity carrying
conductor as shown in figure. Find the direction of induced
Current, if the current, in the wire is decreasing.

Drctearing)
Sol. Acceleration of the bar magnet will be less than acceleration
due to gravity la < g) because according to Lenz's law,
whatever may be the direction of induced current, it will Sol. In this case loop is placed to the right of current carrying
oppose the cause. Here, the cause is, the free fall of tnagnet wire (not to the left as it appears, hecause if you move in the
and so the induced current will oppase it axd the acceleration ditection of current, loop lies to the right).
of magnet will be less tharn the acceleration due to gravity g.
Alternate method This can be understod in a different
manner. When the magnet falls downwards with its noth Induced current
pole dowIwards. The magnctic field lines pssing thrugh the
coil in the downward direction increase. Since, the induced Now, the current is decreasing. therefore induced current in
current opposcs this, the upper side of the coil will become the loop is clockwise (S) as shown in figure.

Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction391

Example 6.17 A curent carrying straight wire pusses inside a Plot the ariatiorn of flux through the loop with respect to time.
trianqular coil as shown in fiqure. The current in the wire is Also, plot the ariation of induced emf w.r.t. time t.
perpendicular to puper invards. Find the direction of the
Induced current in the loop, if curTent in the wire is increased.
B.
 391
Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction

Example 6.17 A cutrent carrving straight wire pusses inside a Plot the uriation of flux thrUugh the lop with respect to time.
triangular coil as shown in figure. The current in the wire
is Also, plot the variation of induced emf w.r.t. time t.
perpendicular pIfer inwarnds. Find the direction of
to the
induced current in the loop, if current in the wire is increased.
B.

Sol. As the loopmoving with constant veocity, the flux will

is
be increasing as long as the loop will be entering the
linerly,
Sal. Magnetk field lines around the current carrying wire are as B field. (Oce the lonp has completely entered the B field the
shown in figure below. Since, the lines are tangential to the flux will become constant. Now, when the loop will start
loop (0 = 90°L the flux passing through the loop is zero, coming out the flux will lincarly decrease to zero value.
whether the current is increased or decreased. Hence, change
in flux is zero. Therelore, induced curtent in the loop will be Flux ()
zero,

Tine (t

Since, emf induced, e

=

it means emf is negative of the

dt
slope of the -t
graph. So, emf is negative constant in the
beginning. then it becomes zero and then it becomes positive
constant and again it becomes zero.
enl (e)
Example 6.18 A tuniform magnetic field B = B,ti in a egion
exists. A cicular conducting lop of radius r and resistance R is
placed with its plane in yz plane. Determine the current Time (o
through the loop and sense of he curret.
Sol. The flux linked with the loop is

Exomple 6.20 Througha conducting coit along its axis, a short

bar magnet is rapidly pulled uith uniform velacity with, with its
north pole entering the coil first. Plot the ariation of (i) flex,
(i) induced current and (ii) pouer dissipated in coil with time.
Sol. (i)

We know that magnetic flux is given as

BS Krcos 0° Magnetic field due to magnet is given as
B

2
and
B-Ho
dh Bonr -Borr
d

Further, induced emf, c= -Borr²

d

When a bar magnet is pulled rapidly through a

Therefore, curtent. iEBorr conducting coil, then flux first increases, reaching to a
maximum value and then decreases.
By Lenz's law, ishould be clockwise, so that it can oppose the
increase in magnetic field.
Exomple 6.19 Thrvugh a uniform B field, A small rectangular
loop is moving touxards left uith constant velocity as shown in
the figure. Counting of time t begins at the moment, the loop
starts entering the field.
392 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

(Gi) Induced ettrent verses time t Sol

When flux increases, then north pole is formed, current
s antilockwise.
When flux decreases, then south pole is forrned, current
is clockwise. (Taking anti-clockwise current as positive.)

We know, according to kinematic equation, distance travelld

Here, initial velocity, ue Q, acceleration,
*=t +ar'.
2
a =b=30 cm/s?
So, in time t, distance travelled by conaductor, x =

(iü) As power induced current. The corresporrding power

Iersus t can be drawn as
Flux passing through loop, RS
=
Blx= BI
2
Here, B and t both are variable.

2
dt
0.4 x 0.3 (02 x +
2² 2B)
2
A
0.06(0.8 2B)
Exomple 6.21 In a uniform magnetic field, a n shaped metal - 0.2
Given, T/s dB 0.2d:
frame is lorated perpendicular to the plane of the conductor d
and varving uith time at the rate B / dt) = 0.20T/s A On integrating both sides, we get
condu ting connector starts moving with an acceleration
a = 30 cm's along the parallel bars of the frame. The length 02 x
B=02 (= l= 0.2
of
the conector is cqual tol = 44 cm. Find the emf induced in
the loopt =| s after the beginning of the motion, if at the
So, induced emf,e = 0.06(0.8+ =6x 1o* v
=
0.2) 0.06
momentt = 0, the locp area and the magnetic induction are
equal to zero.

Check point 6.1

1. The magnetic flux linked with a vector area A in a untorm 6. The magnetic flux (in weber) in a closed cirCuit of
magnetic field B is resistance 102 varies with time t (in second) according to
B equation
= 6

(a) BxA (o) AB (C) B-A at = s

-5t + 1. The magnitude of induced Curre
0.25 is
2. The unit of magnetic tlux is (a) 1.2 A
(b) 08 A (c) 06 A (d) 02A
(a) Wbm? (d) Am
(b) Wb (c) H 7. When the current through a solenoid increases at a consta
3. The dimensions of magnctic flux are rate, thn the induced current
(a) [MLTA] (b)[ML’T'A) (a) is a constant and is in the direction ot the inducing cuent
(c) [ML’T'A] () (ML?TA1 (bjis a constant and is opposte to the direction of the inducir
current
4. The magnetic flux linked with a coi, in webers is given by the {c) incresse with trme and is in the direction of inducing currer
equaticn - 3:* + 4! +9 Then, the magnitude of induced
(d)increase with tme and is opposite to the directon of induc
emf atr 2s will be Current
(a) 2 V (b) 4V (c) 8 V () 16 V
8. The magnetic flux across a loop of resistance 102 is give
5. A coil havngan area A, is placed in a magnetc feld which 51 - 4t + 1Wb. How
by much current is induced in the
changes from B, to 48, in time interva! t. The emf nduced in loop after 0.2 s?
the coil will be (a) 04 A
(b) 02 A
(a) 3A,B,t (b) 4A,8,It (c) 38,/A () 48,1AJ (c) 0 04 A (d) 0 02 A
 Chapter 06 Electromagnetic induction393

9. A circular ringot diameter 20 cm has a resistance 001 2. 13. Lenz's taw is due to conservation ol
How much charge will flow through the ring, it it is rotated (a) charge
from a posiion perpendicuiar to a untorm magnetic feid of (b) moentum
to a position paralle to fieid?
B2T (C) energy
(a) 4 C () 6.28 C (c) 3 14 C () 2.5 C
(d) Curtent

10. In a circuit with a coil of resistance 22. the magnetc fiux 14. The noth pole of a long horizontal bar magret is beg
trought closer to a vertical conducting plane along the
changes from 2.0 Wb to 100 Wb in 0.2s. The charge that perpendicular ditection The direction of the inxduced current
flows in the coii during this time is
in the conducing plane wil! be
(a) 5.0C () 40C (c) 1.0C ()08c {a) horzontal
11. The direction of induced emf during electromagnetic (b) vertical
induction is given by (c) cockwise
(a) Faraday's law (b) Lenz's law fd) ant-cickwise
(c) Maxwel's (a) Ampere's law 15. There is a unform magnetic field directecd perpendicular axd
12 Two ditferent loops are concentric and lie in the same plane. into the plane of the paper. An itregular shaped conducting
The current in the outer loop is clockwise and increasing loop is sowly changing into a circular loop in the plane of
with time. The induced curent in the inner loop, is the paper. Then,
(a) clockwise (a) current is nduced in the loop in the ant-clockwise direction
(o)urrent is indUced in the kooo in the clockw:se drection
b) zero
(C) counter-clockwise (c)AC is nduced in the loop
(d) No crent is induced in the loop
(d) in a direction that depends on the rato of the koop radi

move
conductor as long as the conductor continues to
2) Motional electromotive through the uniform magnetic field.
This potential difference is called motional electromagnetic
force force, which is denoted by e, and is given by
So far we have considered the
cases in which an emf is e= Bul ...i)
a
induced in a stationary circuit placed in time-varying
magnetic field. In this section,
we will study about
a when
motional emf, i.e., the emf induced in conductor
a constant magnetic field. Now, let us
it is moving through
as in Fig. 6.17
consider, a straight conductor of length l slown
is moving through a uniform magnetic field
directed
which
we assune that the conductor
into the page. For simplicity,
is moving in a direction perpendicular
to the field with Fig. 6.18
constarnt velocity under the influence of some cxternal agent. current will be
If R is the resistance of the circuit, then
Written as
i
Bl ...i)
R R

F
General form of motional emf
a any shape, moving
To find motional emf for conductor of
in a unilotn or non-uniform
magnetic fiekd, we will consider
any snall clement dl of a conductor, then tle contribution
magnitude of dl multiplied by the
de to the emf is the to dl, i.e.,
Fig. 6.17 component of (vx B) which is parallel
= x
de (v B)dl
field a potential
Due to motion of conductor in magnetic x B)- d (motional emf, closed conducting loop)
difference is maintained between the ends of the ely
394) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol 2

Important points related to Then, e = B(v cos 0)/

motional emf Q
Some imortant poits related to motional emf are gien
below.
(i) For a semicircular conducting loop of radius R with
the centre at (O and moving with velocity v, then the
emf is given by
e= Bul2R)
Vp -Vo 2Bvk

Fig. 6.22

(v) When magnetic field varies at every point of

conductuor which is moving with speed v, then the
induced emf will be given by
Fig. 6.19
P
(ii) If aconducting rod AB nmoves witha velocity v in PQ
xV-plane, then we can resolve the vclocity vector in
two components as shown in Fig. 6.20. OB
ysin (
Fig. 6.23

where, B is the magnetic ficld due to a long wire at

Pi+
distance x and is equal to oo.
2zx

Fig. 6.20 2

No emf will be induced, due to v cos 0. So, the nct V, - V =e

effect of emf will te due to v sin 0,
which is given by e = B (v sin ) . Motional emf induced in a rotating bar
(ii) For a circular loop of radius R moving with velocity (ü) A conducting rod of length I rotates with a constant
v, we can
replace its two ends Iying on opposite angular spevd o about a pivot at one end. A uniform
sides diameter with a battery of emf e. Then, the
of
magnetic field B is directed perpendicular to the
emf is given by
plane of rotation as shown in Fig. 6.24.
e = Bv(2 R) = 2BvR

Fig. 624
Fig. 621

(iv) For a iegular shape, a conducting body of length I,

Let us suppose an element of length dr at a distance
rfrom P. The induced emf in this segment is
we can assume it, as a straight conductor and replace
it with a battery of ermf e as shown in Fig. 6.22. de = Br dr = Bir o)dr
 Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction 395

Because every segment of the rod is moving then central finger will represent the direction of induced
perpendicular to B. an emf de of same form is current as shown in Fig. 6.27.
generated acroSS each. o
Motion
So, summing the enfs induced across the ends of the cortuctof
Thab
rod is Forefinget

Direction of
0 magnetic field

Irestion of inded current

Fig. 6.27
BI'z
[: 2rv = o Exomple 6.22 Aconducting rod of unit lengah mores with a
T velocity of 5m/s in a direction perpendicular to its length and
where, v = frequency (revolution per second), perpendiclar to a unifurm magnetic field of magnitude O.47.
T = time period Find the emf induced betueen the ends of the stick.
(i) 1f a conducting disc of radius r rotates with constant Sol.
angular velocity o aboutits axis in a uniform
magnetic field parallel its axis of rotation as
to
shown in Fig. 6.25.
Aris

The negative terminal is that end towards which clectrons are

o oving due to magnetic force ad, the nagnetic force on clectron
is acting along Q bence (Q is neyative terninal of attery.
P
0B

Fig. 6.25

Take a rod between centre and point P

As, we know that induced emf for a moving rod is given by
e= Bw =
0.4 x 5xl =2V
Example 6.23 The horizontal component of the earth's d
45® A metol
Fig. 6.26 fielt at a place is 4.0 x 10T and the din is
As, we have already deduced the emf for a rod of length 20 cm is placed in the north-south direction and is
moved at a constant speed of5 cm's towards east. Calculate
rotating in a constant magnetic field. the emf induced in the rod.
So, the induced emf is given by, e -
Bor". Sol. P B

That mcans, disc is cquivalent to rod.

-E

Fleming's right hand thumb rule to

find the direction of induced current
According to the question, the velocity v, length and B,
The direction of motional enf or current can be given by (vertical component of earth magnetic field) are mutuLally
Fleming's right hand thumb rule. If we stretch the thumb, perpendicular using the relation,
the forefinger and the central finger of right hand in such e= B

a way that all are mutually perpendicular to cach other tan¢=

B,
and if thunb represents the direction of motion of the =B, tan ut
conductor, the forefinger represents the direction magnetic 4x 10 tan 45° x
0,05 x 0.20 =
10 V 4 x
field, There will be no induced emf due to B, (horizontal coHnponent
of earth magnetic field) because it is parallel to length of rod.
396) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol.2

=
As we know, induced emf in a rod is given by e Bvul.
Exomple 624 A ring of raditus 2m translates in its plane witha V

So, for rod PQ,e Bd 0.!x 10x 10-10

=

constant velocity 5m/s. A uniform magnetic field 0.1 T exists in

the space in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the ring.
x
For rod RS, e =0.|x 20 5 =10y
=
Bu

Consider different pairs of diametrically opposite points on the ring.

(0 Between which pair of fints is the emf maximum? What is the
So, the net emf produced in above figure is given by
V, -10V - 10V =
l , -V =
20V
Lale of this maximum emf?
(in Betueen which pair of pints is the emf marimum? What
is the Example 626 A vertical dise of diameter 10 cm makes
emf? 20 revlutions per second abot a horizontal aris passing
ale of this minimum
r = v through its centre. A uniform magnetic field 10Tacts
Sol Given, radius, 2m velocity, 5ms
perpendicular to the plane of the dis, Calculate the
rinm in volts.
Constant magnetic ficld, B 0.1T potential difference betueen its centre and
According to the question, So. As we know, disc is equivalent to a rod of length r. Divide
a anc
disc into rods, cach rod can be replaced by battery
POB these batteries are would be parallel in arrangernent.
-
er B2r 2By

According to the question, radius of disc,

From figurc, we can sce that enf is maximum
minimun at RS as PQis perpendicular to field
at Q and
and RS along the r==
10
2
5 cm =
0.05
m

field. Angular velocity, 20x 2x= 40 nrad /s

Using the relation for induced emf for a rod. Magnetic field, B =1oT
V,-V, 2Br
=

The emf of a disc is given as

a 2Bur

=2x 0.1 x 5x2 =2 V

-Rar'ao'x40=x0.05
Ve-V, 0 Vo
-V, .57 10"2v
x

O
emin
Exomple 627 A wire loop of sid 20 cm and
Example 625 Tuo rings of radii 5m and 10m
directions with elocity 20 m/s and 10 m/s
moe in opposite
respectielv, on a resistance 20 i.ral
uniform magnetic field
with a constant elocity vo in a
of induction =| Wh/m
as shoun
B

conducting surfaceS. There is a uniform magnetic

field of
in the figure. The maqnetic field lines are perpendicular
to
magnitude 0.1T perpendicular the plane the
to of rings. Find the a
the plane of the lop. The lxp is connected
to netuvrk of
of the tuo rings.
potential difference betueen the highest points resistance each of wal:ue 52. The resistances of the lead
shoxuld be the speed
wires BF and AE are negligible. What
a current of 2 mA in the
B |10 m/s of the loop, so as to have steady
0.1T|
loop? Give the direction of current in the lop.

as
Sol. The above situation can be drawn

S F

; is balanced
10 m/s
Sol. Fromthe figure, we sce that, net work CEOF CD.
20 m/s Wheatstone bridge, » no current will flow in branch

So, the equivalent resistance of CEOF

network is
S
10x 10 -
10+10 52
Resistance of loop 22
R2+
R
=2+5=72
 Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction 397

We know that induced emf, e = Bu

in 1
,
Sol. B
x 0.2
and induced current, I
le2x 10-x 7
Vo
=7x 10m/s-7 cm/s
As, flux is decreasing, so induced current / will be clockwise,
can slide
Exomple 6.28 Figure shows the top view of a rod that
a T magnetic field
without friction. The resistor is 6.0 2 and 2.5
is directed perpendicularly dounurd into the paper. Let l=l.20
m.
From, r = ) to
t=!
Induced eml,
By
in
e= Bt and I=
F which is anti-clockwise
R direction.
Again from t to t ,emfe0
a 5/ emf e Bu!
F reqgired to moe the rod to the right at
-
(0 Calculate the force tot=
mek
constant speed of 2.0 ms
S. induced current = eB
which is clockwise in
(i) At what rate is energy delivered to the resistor?
R
done by the
(ii) Show that this rate is equal to the rate of uork direction now.
as
arplied force. So, the plot of induced emf erstus timne is given
=
Sol. Given, resistance, R 6.02
Magnetic field, B = 2.57T
B
Length of the rod,
= 1.20m
I| o
as, e Br
The motional emf in the rod is given
or e- (2.5) (2.0) (1.2) V =6.0V
resistance
10A 60- Exomple 6.30 Tuo parallel rails with negligible
The curtent in the circuit, i= R a resistor. The
6.0 are 10 cm apart. They are conected by 52
circuit also contains tuv metal rus having auvay from 102
equal to the esistances of
(ü)
The magnitude of force F required will beopposes the are pulled the
magnetic force acting
on the rod, which and 15 along the rails. The rods respectiely.
m/s and 2 m/s,
motion. resistor at constant speeds 4.00
of magnitude 0.01 Tis aplied
= wB = illB A uniform magnetic field
F =F, to plane of the rails. Determine the
current
(|.0) N=3N
(0.21 (2.5) perpenddicular the
F-
energv is delivered to the resistor is in the 5N resistor.
(ii) Rate by which
(6.0) n6
= W
PRwork (1Fdone by the applicd force is,
is
(iüi) The rate by which
P =Fv= (3) (2.0) =6 W > P=B 4 m/s
2 m/s
being moved touards right
Example 6.29 A square loop of side
l
enters
in figure. The front edge
at a corstant speed as shoum
v
= width of field is 4l. Sketch
the magnetic field B at
t 0. The
versus 10S2
induced emf time graph.
are moving in uniform magnetic
Sol. Here, two conductors will
field. So, we will use the motiona! approach. The rod ab
act as a source of emf.
= v
e = Bul (0.01) (4) (0.1) 4x 10
and internal resistace, =|02 source of emf,
a
as
Similarly, rod ef will also act
e, (0.01) (2) (0.1) 2x 10y
r, =]50
and internal resistance,
398 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

From right hand rule we can see that

V, >V, and V, >y
Induction of field
Now, either by applying Kirchhoff 's Laws or applying The modetn view of electromagnetic induction states that
principle of superposition (discussed in the chapter of current inductiorn occurs whether or not a conducting wire or
electricity) we can find current through 5 2 resistor. We will material medium is present.
here use the superposition principle. You solve it by using
Kirchbof In general case, Faraday's law can be stated as, "An
's laws.
r, =152, electric field is induced in any region of space in which a
Now, in the figures, R= 52,5=102,
e, =2x magnetic ficld is changing with time."
4=4x 10 Vand 10v.
This law is also true if magnetic and clectric fields are
interchanged, i..,
"A magnctic field is induced in any region of space in
which an electric field is changing with time".
In each case the strerngth of the induced field is
proportional to the rate of change of the inducing field.
(a)
Induced electric and magnetic fields are at right arngles to
each other.

Induced electric field

As per Faraday's law, due to change in magnetic field, an
electric field is induced.
Let us understand this by considering a ring of radius r. A
Refer Fig. (b) Net resistance of the circuit uniform magnetic fiekd Bis perpendicular to its plane.
R - - |5+ 10x 3_55 o
So, time rate of change of magnetic field is
dB
di' then the
.Current, i=
10+ 5 3

Net resistance
flux associated will be . And the induced emf will be

6
e=
2x 10 dt
55/3 55 10A Hence, an induced current will low in anti-clockwise
.
Current through R, direction, which means, if there is a current present in the
ring, then there must be an electric ficid. And this electric
field is produced by the changing magnetic field.
mA
-x10A 55
Refer Fig. (c) Net resistance the circuit
of

-+2-10+
R+r, 5+15
5x 15
4

16
.Current, I =
Net resistance
4x 10
:10 A
55/4 55

.Current through R,

(16 , 10 A Fig. 6.28

=mA
55
Suppose a particle of charge qo is moving around the ring
From superposition principle net current through 5 2
in a circular path. So, the work done by the induced
resistor is
electric field in one revolution is given by
from d to e
(-i-À W = q0€, where e is the induced emf ...)
 Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction (399

We also know. Similarly, flux, , =

B )nR (as field is present only in
W=F-dl=qo -fE d1 ... (ii) region 0<r<. ...(iv)

Equating Eqs. (i) and (i), we get

...
(iii)

Eq. (üi) is
the relationship between induced emf and
induced electric field.
From the Faraday's law, e = ...
(iv)
dt d
Fron Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get Equating Eqs. (i) and (iv), we get
.. (v) E2zr =-BorR
dr
This is known as integral form of Faraday's law of E=-BR 2

electromagnetic induction.
Hence, plot between |El and r will be
Note In cOse of electromagnetic nducton line integal of induced emfE around
a close path is not zero, ie, induced electric field is not conservative. In
such a fieid, work done in maving a charge round or ctose path is not zero.

Exomple 631 A uniform magnetic field exists in a circular By

region of radius R centred at O. The field is perpendicular to

the plane of paper and its strength ixaries with time as B = Bot. |E|
Find the induced electric field at a distance r from the centre
for (i)r < R. (iWr > R. Also, plot a graph betueen |E and r for
both the cases.
Sol. As we know, induced electric field is given by
Example 6.32 The current in an ideal, long solenoid is varied
JEdisd
d
at a uniform rate of 0.02 A/s. The solenoid has 1000 urns/s
and its radius is 8 cm.
(Ö) For, r<R. Consider a ring
of radius r(< R) centered at O. (a Consider a circle of radius 2 cm inside the solerotd with its
The induced field at the periphery of the ring is circular
t
axis coinciding with the axis of the solenoid. Write the
such that, change in the magnetic fur throtugh this circle in 4 s.
fE-d1 -Ex 2rr ...(i) (i9 Find the electric field induced at a point on the
circumference of the circle.
(:dl =circunference of the ring = 2rr)
(iiÐ Find the electric field induced at a point outside the solenoid
As, magnetic flux, =BS RS cos at a distance 9 cm from its axis.
Here, 0 0°: so Bg)er
[:B Bl Sol.
R-0.08 m

Given, for solenoid, n =1(000 m/s

dou Bonr di
...(ii) and =
0.02 A/s
de
Equating Eqs. (i) and (iü), we get
di = 002 dt ...(i)
Ex 2nr e -Brr i) Magnetic field due to solenoid is given as
Bi
2 Flux through circle of radiusr, oy Brr
(the sign comes, when clockwise electric field lines are
developed) (: =B-S)
(ü) For, r>R. Consider a ring of radius r> R) centred at O.
Again following the same procedure,
Edl= Ex 2ar ...(iii) =r (0.02ktt [::using Eq- 0)

400 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

(iüi)
=unmr(0.02) d
400 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS VolL 2

x 4)
=
4zx |0x 1000 x x0.020.02
126 x 10- Wb
As discussed in (i), similar!y for radiUS outside the
(ii) Electric field induced is related to emf as, fE-dl =
soleoid,

E-2ar =u
di
E-Hor di E2ar
di R² EHR
2r dt
2 dt
1000 x (0.08 x
4xx 10x 0.02
4nx 10x 1000x 0.02 x 0.02 2x 0.09
2
x
- 81x 10°V/m =287 10V/m

Check point 6.2)

1. A conducting rod ot length l is falling with a constant velocity (dr/dn. Then, the induced emi at the instant when the radus
v perpendicular to a uniform honzontal magnetic fieldB. A 1S , IS

potential difference between its two ends will be (a) Bdr dt) (b) 2B(cr iot)
(a) 2 Bv (o) BN (C) aB/t) (d) (zr°2Bdr/dt )
(c)Bv
2
(d) Bv? 7. Two simular circular loops carry equa curents in the same
direction. On moving the cois further apart, the electric
2. A wire of length 50 cm maves with a velocty of 300 m/min,
CUrrent val
perpendcular to a magnetic field. If the emf induoed in the (a) rermainunaltered
wire is 2 V. then the magnitucde of the field in tesla is
(a) 2 (b) 5
(b)increases in one and decreases in the seoond
(c) 0 8 (d) 2.5 (c) increase in both
(d) decrease in both
m
3. A 10 wire kept in east-west direction is falltng with velocity
5 m's perpendicular to the field 03x10 Wo/m². The 8. A citcular coil of mean radius of 7 cm and having 4000 turns
induced emt across the terminal will be is rotated at the rate of 1800 rev/min in the earth's magnetic
(a) 0 15 V (b) 1.5 my field (8 = 05 gauss), the maximum emt induced in coil
V
(c) 1
5V (C) 150 will be
(a) 1.158V
(b) 0.57 V
4. A boat is moving due east n a regicn, where the earth's (C) 0 29
vV

magnetc field is 5.0x 10 NA m (d) 58V

due north and
horzontal The boat carrned a vertical areal 2 m long If the 9. A coilof N turns and mean cross-sectional area A is rotating
speed of the boat is 1.50 ms". then the magnitude of the with uniform angular velocity o about an axis a! right angle to
induced emt in the wire of areal is uniform magnetic fiekd 8. The induced emt E in the coil will be
(a) mV1
(b) 075 mV (a) NBAsinat
(c) 050 mV (d) 0 15 mV (b) NBsinest
5. The magnitude of the earth's magnetic field at a place is B,
(C) NB/ Asinoat
(d) NBAwSinof
and the angle of dp is & A honzontal conductor ot length/
lying a'ong the magnetic north-south moves eastwards with 10. A0.1 m long conductor carrying a currernt of 50 A is hekd
velocityv. The emf induced actoss tte conductor is perpendcular to a magnetc ted ot 1.25 mT The
a

(a) zero B,vsin& mechanical power

ms
required to move the Conductor with a
(c) BN speed of is 1

(a) 62 5 mW (b) 625 mW

6. A conducting cicular loop is placed in a untorm magnetic (c) 625 mw (d) 12.5 mW
field of induction B tesla vitth its plane normal 1o the field
(e) 125 mnW
Now, the radius of the loop starts shrinking at the ate
 Chapter Electromagnetic induction 401
06:

11. A metal rod of ength 2 m is rotating with an angular velocity 14. A metallic square loop ABCD is mnoving in its own plane with
of 100 rads in a plane perpendicular to a unitorm magnetic velocity v in a unitorn magnetic field perpendicular to its
field of 0.3T. The potential difference between the ends of plane as shown in the figure. An electric field is induced
the rod is
(a) 30 V () 40 V
(c) 60 V (d) 600V

12. A conducting rod of length is moving in a transverse

magnetc fseld of strength B with velocity v. The resistancCe of
thee rod
rod is R, The Current in the rod is
(a) () BN

(c) zero (a) in AD but not n 8C (o) in BC but not in AD

R
(c) Nether in AD nor in BC (d) in both AD and BC
13. A rectangular coil rotates about an axis norma! to the
15. Consider the following statements
magnetc fed. if E, iS the maximum value of the induced
emf, then the instantaneous emf when the plane of the coi
A. An enmf can be induced by moving a conducto in a
makes an angle of 45° with the magnetic feld is magnetic field.
B. An emf can be induced by changing the magnetic field.
(a)Em (b) Em (a) BothA and B are true (b) A is true but B is talse
(c) B is true but A is talse (d) Both A and B are false
(c)
Em (d) E

Coefficient of self-induction
3) Self-induction Definitlon using magnetic flux
If i is the strength of current flowing through a coil at any
Self-induction is the property of a coil by virtue of which tine and ¢ is the anount of magnetic flux linked with all
the any change in the strength of current the turns of the coil at that time, then it is found that
h
Ilowing i by inducing an emf in itself.
=

This induced emf is also called back emf. When the «ior Li
current in a coil is switched on, then the self-induction
opposes the growth the current and when it is switched where, L is a constant of proportionality and is called
f coefficient of self-induction or self-inductance of the
off, then the self-induction opposes the decay of the
current. Hence, self-induction is also known as inertia of coil. The value of L depends on number of turns N, area of
electricity. cross-section A and nature of material of the core on which
coil is wound.
L = NG
For N number of turns in coil, L.
incteasingt

Definition using induced emf

Fig. 6.29
If a currenttiis lin a circuit and it is changed with a
A circuit or part ofa circuit, that is designed to have a pssced
rate di/dt, then the emt e produced in the circuit
particular induction is called an inductor. The usual is directly proportional to the time rate of change of
symbol for an inductor is shown in Fig. 6.30. current. Thus,
dt
Fig. 6.30 dt
Thus, an inductor is a circuit element which opposes the When the proportionality sign is removed, the same
change in current through it. It may be a circular coil, constant L again comes here.
solenoid, etc.
Hence, e=-1 dt
 Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction 403

Sol. Potential difference acrosss the inductor is given as Here, S is the croSs-sectional area of the solenoid.
- 80 e
V,
=+1.-2)a0e)=
Further, by using Kirchhoff's second law,
Now, as we know, I.
n N
NSiH,N's
MN's
dt
or V
=(10:-)4)- 80--=-40:
dt This result shows that L depends on dimensions (S )
and is proportional to the square of the number of
Self-inductance of a coil turns.
Consider a coil of radius r and current is flowing through i L«N?
the coil. lf number of turns in the coil is N, then magnetic Because N= nl, we can also express the result in the
field at the centre is given as form,
(nly -S=poh'Sl =Hgh'V or L =Hon'V
L=#
Here, V = Sl is the volume of the solenoid.
Note ifthe space inside the solenoid is filted veith a materal of relative

Fig. 6.33
permeabtty u,. then =,ns
Exomple 6.36 (i) Caleulate the inluctance of an air core
Ber 2r
and = BS
solenoid containing 300 turns, if the lenngth of the solenoid is
25 cm and its crosssectional area is 4 cm.
where, S = area of cross-sectional of the coil = nr (ii) Calculate the self-induced emf in the solenoid, if the

#oNi
crent through it is decreasing at the nate of 50 A/s
So, Sol. (i) The inductance of a solenoid is given by
21

Now, net flux for the coil of Nnumber of turns,

LBo N's
where, S the cross-sectional arca of solenoid.
is
Substitut ing the values, we have
2 2
L4x 10")(300 (4x 10),,
= henry
We know tlat, L
L=oN"R (25x 10*)
i 2
(ii) The self-induced enf is given by
Self-inductance of a solenoid di
e de
Let ts find the inductance of a unifornly wound solenojd
having N tuns and lengh l. Assume tlhat / is much longer Here,
di -
50 As
than the radius of the windings and that the core of the
e=-(1.81 x 10)(-30) 9.05x 103 y
=

solenoid is air. We can assune that the interior magnetic

ficld due to a current ' is uniforn and given by cquation, e= 9.05 nV

Energy stored in an inductor

The energy of a capacitor is stored in the clectric field
between its plates. Similarly, an inductor las the
capability of storing energv in its magnetic field.
Iig. 634
i(Ircresing)

where, n is the numler of uns per unit length.

The magnetic flux through cah tun is
NS,
Fig. 6.35
404 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

An inereasing current in an inductor causes an cmf Sol. Given, L, =5mH and L, =ImH
betweern its tertinals,
i) As we know, induced voltage is given by, e
dt
The work dore per unit time is power.
-Li
di
L4dilde)
-4.-5:1 ..)
P= =-ei dt (iü)Power in the coil is given by
From, dW= -dU or we have P=ei
d dt Here,
dU
d
dU = Li di
Using Eq. (i), we can write,
:s
(ii) Energy stored in a coil is given by
The total energy (U supplied while the current increases
from zero to a final value i is

|W=U-Li Example 639 Suppose a cule of vlume 2mm is placed at the

2 centre ofa circular loop of ruditus 5cm carrying current 2A.
Energy stored per unit volumc in magnetic ficld is known Find the magnetic energy stored inside the cube,
as energv density. Sol.

Energy density
= 1 B'

=lA then 2= L
Thus, if i
Hence, the coefficient of self-inductance is equal to
twice the work done in establishing a flow of one Magnetic ficid at the centre of the circular loop is given by
amperc current in the circuit.
BH
Note Tume constant in f- orouut 5= 2R
We know, energy density. H =
Example 637 1What inductance uvld be needed to store 1 kWh 24
of energv in a coil carryina 200A current? and cnergy stored in the cube will be given by
(I &Wh= 3.6x 10J)
Sol. We have, i= 200 A

=| kWh= 3.6x
U

and 10 J where, Vo is the volune of the cube.

2U 2(3.6x 10°) = Substituting the valucs in the above cquation,
:. Self-inductance, L 180 H
V, =
(200P
2 Ho 2R, 8R

x
4rx 10* 2* * 2x 1o -m16 gx
8x (0.03
10-J
Exomple 6.38 Tuv coils having self-nductances, L = 5mH
and L, = mH. The cunent in the coil is increasing at same
1

constant rate at a certain instant and the pouer supplied to the Combination of self-inductances
coiis is al same. Find the ratio of
() In series
If several inductances are connected in seriesand there is
(i) current
(ii) enerqy stored in uv coilk at that trnstant interactions through self-inductance only as shown in
Fig. 6.36.,
 Chapter 06 Electromagnetic induction 405

L Ly

Fig. 6.36
Then their equivalent inductance is given by
Equivalent inductance, L = L4 +
lz + Ly
() In parallel
When several inductances are connected in parallel as Fig. 6.37
shown in the following figure 6.37, then their equivalent The equivalent inductance L is given by
inductance can be calculated as
1.1,!,!
L 4 L, L

Check point 6.3

1. The SI unit of inductance, the henry, can be written as
8. Self-inductance of a coil is 50 mH current of 1A passing
A

(a) weber/ampare b) volt-secondVanpere through the cod reduces to zero at steady rate in 0.1 s, the
(c) joulelampere? (d) ohm-second selt-induced em! is
2. A long solenoid has 500 turns When a current of (a) 5V (b) 0.05 V (c) 50 V (d) 05 V

2Ais
passed through h, then the resulting magnetic flux lnked 9. The sef-inductance of a coil is L Keeping the length and
with each turn of the solenoid is 4x10 Wb. The area same, the number of turns in the col is increased to
selt-inductance of the solenoid is four times. The self-inductance of the cot will now be
(a) 1.0
H

(b) 40H (c) 2.5 H (d) 2.0 H (a) (b) (c) 4L (d) 16L
3. a current ol 10 A changes in one
IM

seCoa nough coil

a

and the induced emf is 10 V.then the : f-inductance of the 10. In circular coil, when nurnber of turns is doubled and
Coll is resistarnce becomes (1/4)th of intial, then inductance becComes
(a) 4 times (b) 2 tmes (c) 8 tmes (d) No change
(a)H (0)
H 11. The selt-inductance of solenoid of length L, area of
(d) 1 H cross-section S and having N turns is

4. During a current change from2A to 4 A in 0.5 s, 8 V of emt

(a) M
(b) p (c) ,NLS (d) NLS

is developed in a coil. The coetficient of sel-inducton is 12. A solenoid has 2000 turns would over a ength of 0.30 m.
(a) H The area of its croSs-sOction is 1.2 x 10m I! an initia!
1
(b) 2H (c) 4 H () 8 H
5. The current passing through a choke coil of 5 H is decreasing current of 2 A in the solenoid is reversed in 025 s, then the
at the rate of 2 As. The ermf developing acrOSs the coil is emt induced in the coil is
(a) 10 V (b) -10 V (a) 6x 10v (b) 4 8× 10- v
(c) 25 V
(d) mV (c) 6x 10 y (d) 32.1 x
-25 10V
6. Ina coil of self-inductance 05H, the current vanes at a
13. A 50 mH coi carries a current of 2 A. The energy stored in
constant rate from zero to 10 A in 2 s. The emt generated in joules is
the coil is (a) 1 (b) 01 (c) O 05 (d) 05
(a) 10 V (b) 5V
V 14. In an inductor ot inductance = 100 mH, a current of= 10 A
L
(c) 25 V (d) 1.25
is flowing The energy stored in the inductor is
7. The sel-inductance of a long solenoid cannot be increased (a) 5J (o) 10.J (C) 100J fd) 1000J
by
15. Two pure inductors each ol selt-nductance are connected
L
(a) increasing its arca of cross-section
in parallel but are well separated from each other. The total
(b) increasing its length
inductance is
(c) charging the medium with greater permeability
L
(d) increasing the current thrOugh it
(a) 22 (b)
 change in the current in circuit 1. From the above equatiorn
We can write
4 Mutual induction M=
di, ldt|
Consider two neighbonuring coils of wire as shown in
Fig. 6.38. A current flowing in coil 1 produces magnetic
If di =l,then M
=e. Thus, coefficient of mutual inductio
ficld and hence a magnetic flux through coil 2. If the or
d
mutual inductance of two coils is equal to the emf
current in coil Ichanges, then the flux through coil 2
induced in one coil when rate time of change of current
changes as well. According to Faraday's law, this induces through the other coil is unity.
an emf in coil 2. In this wav, a change in the current in
one circuit can induce a curtent in a second circuit. This Some important points regarding the coefficient of
phenomenon is kaown as mutual induction. mutual inductance
In other words, thec phenomena according to which an (i) The Sl unit of coefficient of mutual inductance is
opposing enf is produced in a coil as a result of change in henry (1H).
current a magnetic flux linked with a neighbouring coil is
Coefficient of mutual induction or mutual inductanc
called mutual induction.
of two coils is said to be one henry, when a current
change at the rate of one ampere/second in one coil
induces an emf of one volt the other coil.
aduced urren (ü) M depends upon closeness of the two circuits, their
Cell current
orientations and sizes and the number of turns, etc.
(iüi) Its dimensions are(ML'T'A

(iv) Reciprocity theorem This theorem states that

Fig. 6.38 mutual inductance due to secondary coil on primary
coil is equal to the mutual induction due to primary
Like the self-inductance L), two circuits has mutual on secondary coil, i.e., M, = M2 =M
inductance (M).
Using Eq. i).
Coefficient of mutual inductance e, =-Mldi, td:)
and e; =-Mldi, ld:)
Definition using magnetic flux
Suppose the circuit I has a current i, flowing in it. Then,
total flux Nbh, linked with circuit 2 is proportional to the
current in circuit I. Ma1
and
Thus, N, Oa, i; or N,og, = Mi;
Here, the proportionality constant Mis known as (v) Average induced emf, =
-M -Mi,-)
coefficient of mutual inductance 'M of the two circuits. At

Thus, M= NB, (vi) A gooxd approach for calculating the mutual inductan
of tuo circuits consists of the following steps
(a) Assume anyone of the circuits as primary (first)
From this expression M can be defined as the total flux and the other as secondary (second).
NB, linked with circuit 2 per unit current in circuit 1. (b) Suppose a current i, flows through the primar

Definition using induced emf circuit.

(c) Determine the magnetic field B produced by the
If we change the current in circuit I at a rate di, ldt, an current i:
induced emf e, is developed in circuit 1, which is (d) Obtain the magnetic flux s,
proportional to the rate di, ldt. te) With the flux known, the mutual inductance can
Thus, e, di, ldt or e, =- Mdi, ldt ...i) be found from
Here, the proportionality constant is again M. Minus sign
indicates that e, is in such a direction that it opposes any M=
 Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction 407

Mutual inductance for two concentric coils Mutual inductance of a solenoid

Let us consider a coil having N, turns and of radius r is surrounded by a coil
surrounded by another coil having N, turns and of radius R Let N, be the number of turns of solenoid of radius r,
as shown in the Fig. 6.39 (R >» r).
and N, be the number of turns of coil of radius r,.

Fig. 6.39
t
Magnetic field due to coil 2 at centre, B, = F0e Fig. 6.41
2R
Flux through coil 1,¢s, =
N,B,S = NHoNi Kr² = Mi Magnetic field due toS,
2R B=#N,,)i
Then, flux through coil is
HN,N,r?
M=
2R
n =N, BS = N
inR = Mi

Mutual inductance of two long co-axial HoNN,R?

solenoids M=
Fig. 6.40 shows two long co-axial solenoids, cach of length . From the above relation, we see that, M is independent
Let n be the number of turns per unit length of inner of radius R,. This is because, solenoid's magnetic field is
solenoid S, of radius r, and n is number of turns per unit confined to its interior.
length of outer solenoid S, of radius r,
Note Mutual inductance of a smll circular loop and a rectangular loop
(<co,b)

S 4n cb

Mutual inductance between two (oils depends upon the geometry of two
cods and thet geonetical ornentation with reSpect to each cther To
find mutual indutance for a given arrangement, we assume a Cutrent
floang through one of the coils and find the fux through the other cot
Fig. 6.40 Then, usng the formuta-M, mutual inductance M can be catculated

Magnetic field due to S,. B, = ni Coefficient of coupling

Flux through S,.
The coefficicnt of coupling of two coils gives a measure
of the manner in wvhich the two coils are coupled
=
n,)on, inr =Mi together. If L, andL, are the sclf-inductances of two
coils and M is their mutual inductancc, then their
M=#onn,Rrt coefficient of coupling is given by
xS M
K=
M- PoNyN,
It is also defined as
where, S is the area of cross-section of inner solenoid. magnetic flux linked in secondary coil
Note ie do not take the area cf cross section of outer solenod because there is magnetic flux linked in primary coil
no maçnetic field betaeen the twa solenoids
where, 0sKs1
408) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

So, when K= 0, there will be no coupling, Substituting the values,

0<K<1
and K = 4
for loose coupling
for maximum coupling, It occurs when the two
Me (4Rx
10o004x 10
10)
coils are wound over cach other over a ferromagnetic core. =5x 10 H

The value of K is a number, depending on the geometry of

the coils and their relative closeness. Growth and decay of current in
P Air gap S L-R circuit
Il a circuit containing a pure inductor L and a resistor R in
series with a battery and a key is closed, then the current
through the circuit rises expornentially and reaches upto a
(A) K1 B)0< K«|
certain maximum value (steady state). If circuit is opened
Fig. 6.42
from its steady state condition, then current through the
circuit decreases exponentially. In case of growth of
Combination of mutual inductances current at time ( = 0, inductor offers infinite resistance and
at time ( = (steady state) inductor offers zero resistance.
) In series If two coils of
self-inductances L, and Ly This type of circuit is called L-R circuit.
having mutual inductance M are in series, situated
close to each other, then net inductance will be Exomple 6.42 Find current through the battery
f) jhust after the suitch is closed.
(i) long aofter the suwitch has bven closed.
(ü) In parallel If two coils of self-inductances L, and Ly
having mutual inductance M, are connected in 12 V

parallel, situated close to cach other, then I mH

h + l, t2M
Exomple 6.40 Calculate the mutual inductance betuven ruo
coils uhen a current 2A changes to 6A in 0.2s and induces an Sol. () Just after closing the switch, inductor offers infinite
emf of 20mV in the secondary coil. resistance. So, the circuit will become as
Sol. We know that emf is related to the mutual inductance by

Sutstituting the given values, 12 V+

20x 10-3
MI6 -2)_ Mx 4
- 204M
0.2 0.2
= ImH 12
M=10 H
So, the current will be
4
3A
Exomple 6.41 A straight solenoid has 50 turns per cm in (i) After long time, inductor offers zero resistance. So, the
primary and'200 turns in the secondary. The area of cnss-sextion equivalent circuit will be
of the soleroid is 4 cm'. Calculate the mutual inductance.

Sol. The magnetic field at aty point inside the straight solenoid
of primary with n, turns per unit Jength catrying a current is
V
given by the relation, 12
C42
B=#
The magnetic flux through the secondary of N, turns cach of
area S is given as
=
N, N,HS) =HS Net resistance. R,
-
4x 4x 4
615.33
4+4+ 4 12
4 .:. Current, I 2 or 12x 12 144 2.25 A

R S 64 64
 :
Chapter 06 Electromagnetic induction (409

Growth of current Decau of current

Let us consider a circuit as shown in Fig. 6.43, when tlhe Let us consider the Fig. 6.46, in which now the key K is
switch K is closed, then the value of current at any instant open. Now, the current will decrease with time.
of time tafter closing the circuit (when current is rising) is
During the decaying of current, the value of current at any
given by
instant of time after opening from thc steady state

...) condition is given by i = ioe

Here, t, is the time for current to decrease to Ve or about
where, i, = = E = steady state current at = 37% of its original value.

Induked
and tinne constant t, L/R [time constant) Current

So, the Eq (i) can be re-written as i = to(-e)

Main
current
Induced
CurTent
Fig. 6.46 Decay of current

Min J
The i-t graph is shown as Fig 6.47.
current
Gtowth of current
Fig. 6.43

Here, t, refers at time equal to one time constant the

current has risen to (1 - Ve) or about 63% of its final value i 0.37,
io. The i-t graph will be shown as Fig. 6.44.

Fig. 6.47
i
0.636
The energy that is needed to maintain the current during
this decay is provided by energy stored in the magnetic
field. Thus, the rate at which energy is dissipated inthe
Fig. 6.44 resistor = rate at which the stored energy decreases in
magnetic field of inductor. This is given by
Let us have an insight into the behaviour of an L-R circuit
from energy considetations. The instantaneous rate at
which the source delivers energy to the circuit ( = Ei) is
equal to the instantaneous rate at which energy is Note At any time,t.V, V
dissipated in the resistor (= i'R) plus the rate at which
energy is stored in the inductor (= iV, =Lidildt)

Thus, Ei = iR+ Lii

dt
Note At any time from Fig 653, V, V =E

Fig. 6.48

Example 6.43 A coil of resistance 20 and inductance .5 H

is switched to DC 200 V supply. Calculate the rate
of increase of curent
() at the instant of clsing the switch and
(iü) after one time constant.
(iii) find the steady state current in the circuit.
Fig. 6.4S
410 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS VoL. 2

Sol i) This is the case of growth of current in an L-R circuit. Example 6.45
Hence, current at titne tis given by
42
R

i=, (1 -et) L-2H

Rate of increase of current, di 2!
d
d
Att=4
LIR L

Substituting the value, we have E- 12 V

di 200-= Att =0, switch S is closed, calculate

400 A /s
dt 0.5 (i) initial rate of increase of current, i.e., di at t =0.
(Gi) di = = dt
At, I= -(400)e (0.37) (400) 148 As!
d at time when current in the circuit is 0.5A.
d
(iiil The steady state current in the circuit,
E 200 (iii) Current at t =0.6s
k010 A
(iv) rate at which energy of magnetic field is increasing. rate of
heat prutuced in resistance and nate at which energv
Example 6.44 Self-inductance 0.8 x 10* i
Hofa uniformly stpplied by battery when i = 0.54.
uund solenoid, having resistance 32 is broken up into tuo (u) enerqy stored in inductor in steady state.
identical coils. Those coils are conneted in series across a 6V
Sol. We know that
Iattery of negligilble resistance. Find time constant
and steady
slule current. E= iR + L
dildt
Sol. For a solenoid, sell-inductance is given by di E-iR
dr L
Current in the circuit at any time t,

where, r radius of solenoid. I length of solenoid,

where, k, =E/R, t, =L/R
N humnber of turns
and we know that, resistance is given by (i) Ratec of increase of current di _E- iR t Qi=0
N2r
dwhen
R=p-p di E 12
A A
So, on breaking it into two parts, now inductance and
d."56A/s
di
resistace is given as (üü) _E-iR__12-05x4.12-2-5A/s
Atr=0.5s,
d 2 2
R:
=
(i) At e
0.6 s, current
x
i=-e )

R PN2) 2rr R 4 0.6

A a- 05 )=31
-eA
4
2, R2 U2, R2
(iv) Encrgy storcd in inductor in steady state is given by

dt dt

E-6V
diE- iR12-05x 4 =
5 A/s
dt
So, the equivalent inductance, Lg =4 + dU
L =2x 0.5x 55J/s
=LI2 +
LI2 L. dt
and equivalent resistance, R, R+ R, =
Rr2 + R/2 =R Power produced per sccond, P R
(0.5x 4 =1J/s
So, the time costant, Power supplied by battery =Ei = 0.5 x 12 6J/s
y0.8x 10* - = x () We have k, EIR =12/4 3A
R
3
0.267 10s
Enetgy stored in inductor in steady state,
E
E_6
and current, I
R;=2A
 Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction 411

Example
6.46t I2 tod4 The magnitude of eddy currernt is given by
P induced emf
i=
resistance R
+12v 21 According to Faraday's lawv,
ldt
The switch is closed for a long time and then opened at time
e ind R
t=a Find the initial voltage across L after t 0, which end is The direction of eddy currents can be given by Lenz's law
at higher potential P or Q? or by Fleming's right hand rule.
Sol. Initially, current will be, , =,-12A However, their flow patterns resemble swirling eddies in
water. That is why, they are called eddy currents. These
So, the above circuit would be now as were discovered by Foucault in the vear 1895 and hence,
they are also named as Foucault current, e.g., when we
move a metal plate out of a magnetic ficld, then the relative
PG12A motion of the field and the conductor again induces a
current in the conductor. The conducting eclectrons building
2H up the induced current whirl around within the plate as, il
they were caught in an eddy of water.
Q

Effects of eddy current

Current at any time is given by m
i ,eand i, 12A
Eddy currents are produced inside the iron cores of the
rotating armatures of electric motors and dynamos and also
in the cores of transforners, which experience flux
Current, i=]2-0s changes, when they are in use. The curtents causes
di
unnecessary heating and wastage of power and the heat
=12e produced may even damage the insulation of coils.

So, Methods to Reduce eddy current

d =
t=QV, 48V Eddy currents are minimised by using laminations of metal
.e., current is decreasing, make a metal core. The laminations are separated by an
insulating material. The plane of the laminations must be
p arranged parallel to the magnetic field, so that they cut
across the eddy current paths. This arTrangement reduces
the strength of eddy currents.

Applications of eddy current

Eddy currents are useful in many ways, Some of the important
applications of eddy currents are given bclow

Applications of EMI: eddy current 0) Electromagnetic damping

In order to bring the moving coil of a galvanometer
When a changing magnetic flux is applied to a bulk piece
of conducting material, then circulating current induced in immediately to rest, we make the use of electromagnetic
the body of the conductor, are called eddy currents. damping which uses ed. currents to bring the coil to rest.
Because the resistance of the bulk conductor is LSually When the coil oscillates, then the eddy currents generated
low, eddy currents often have large magnitudes and heat in the core oppose the motion and bring the coil to rest.
up the conductor.
(1) Induction furnace
Eddy curents are always produced in a plane In an induction furnace, high temperature can be produced
perpendicular to thc direction of tnagnetic ficld. This by using eddy currents. We generally use induction furnace
current ssows both heating and magnetic effects. in preparation of alloys by melting the constituents of metal.
412 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vot. 2

A coil iswound over the mnetal which needs to be melted (iv) Magnetic breaking in electronic trainsie
and through the coil, we pass high frequency alternating Some clectric powered trains make use of strong
current. The eddy current generated in the metal produces clcctrom:agnets which are situated above the rails. Ihese
high temperature to melt the metal. electromnagnets are used to produce eddy curtent in the
rails which oppose the motion of the train and thus stop it.
(ii) Electric power meter
In this case, as thhere is no mechanical linkage, the
Old electric power meters (analog type) had a metallic disc.
breaking effect is smooth.
The disc rotates due to generation of cddy currents which
are produced due to sinusoidally varying current in the coil.

Check point 6.4)

1. Two coils and Y are placed in a crcuit Such that when the
X 8. Two coils of sel-inductances 2 mH and 8 mH are placed, sc
current changes by 2A in col X The magnetic flux changes close togcther that the eftectve thux in one coil is completely
by 0 4 Wb in Y. The value of mutual inductance of the cods is linked with the other. The mutual inductance between these
(a) 02 H (b) 5 H (C)
08 H (d) 4H cods is
(a) 4 mt (b) 16 mH
2. Two coils have a mutual nductance 0 005 H The current
(c) 10 mH () 6 mH
changes in the first coil according to equation/ = I, sin o.
where I, = 10 A and o= 100z rads. he maxmIum value of 9. Two coils of seif-inductances L, and L are placed cioser to
ernt in the second cod is (nvo) each other, so that total fluux in one coil is completely linked
(a) 2x 5: (b) (C) (d) 4n th other. It Mis mutuat inductance betveen them, then
3. The mutual inductance between a primary and secOndary (a) M= LL
circuits is 05 H The resistance of the prirnary and the {c) M
Lte (d) MLL,r
secondary circuits are 202 and 52, respectivey. To
generate acurrent of 04 A in the secondary. Current in the 10. An ideal coil of 10 H is joined in senes with a resistance of
primary mst be changed at the rate of 52 and a battery of 5 V. 2 s atter joining. the current fiowing
in ampere in the circuit vall be
(a) 4 0 As
(b) 1.6 As (c) 160 As (C) 8.0 As
(a) e (o) (1-e') (c) (1-e) (d) e
4. The coettcient of rmutual intuction between two circuits is
equal to the, ernt produced in one circuit when the current in 11. An L-R t has a cell of enf E. which is sSwitched on at
=
timet 0 The current in the circurt ater a long time weil
the second circut is
E
(a) kept steady at 1 A (a) zero (b) (c)
(b) cut-of at 1 A leve!
changed at the rate ct1
As
(C)

to 2As 12. During current growth in an L-A circut the tme constant is
() changed tromt
As

the time in which the magntude of current becomes

5. Two Circuts have coetficient of utua induction of0.09 H. (a) (tb) l,12 (c) 0 63 I, (d) 0 37 1,
Average emt induced in the secondary by a change of
current trorn 0 to 20 A in 0 006 s in the primary wll be 13. An L-R circuit with a battery is connected att 0 Which of
(a) 120 V (b) 80 V (c) 200 V (C) 300 V the following quanttes is not zero ust after the connecton?
(a) Current in the circut
6. A current is varying at the rate of 3 A/s in a col generates an
(b) Magnetic fekd energy
emf of 8 mV in a nearby coil The mutual inductance of the
two cols is (c) Power deivered by the battery
(d Emf induced in the inductor
(a) 266 mt (b) 2 66x 10 mH
(c) 2 66 H (d) 0 266 H 14. Eddy currents are produced when
(a) a meta is kept in varyng magnetic held
7. A solerod is placed insicde another solenoid, the length of
(b) a metal rs kept in a steady magnetc feld
both being equal carrying same magnitude of current The
(c) a circar col is piaced n a magnetc feid
parameters ike radius and number of turns are in the ratio
(d) theough a crcular cotl current is passed
1:2 for the twa solenoids The mutuat inductance on each
other would be 15. Whech of the folovang is not an applicaton of eddy currents?
(a) M,, =Ma (b) M, 2M (a) Induction turnace (b) Gavanometer damping
(c) 2M M1 (d) M, = 4M,1 (c) Speedometer o autorncbiles (d) X-ray crystatography
Chapter
exercises
A) Taking it together
(Assorted questions of the chapter for advonced level proctice)
1. If L, C and R represent the physical quantities 7. An inductor L, a resistance Rand two identical bults,
inductance, capacitance and resistance respectively. B, and B, are connected to a battery through a switch S
only the following combination does not have the as shown in the figure. Which of the following
dinensions of frequency statements gives the correct description of the
(a)
1
(b)
R
(c)
happenings when the switch Sis clused?
RC

2. The self-inductance L of a solenoid of length land area

of cross-section A, with a fixed number of turns N
increases as [NCERT Exemplar]
(a) Both l and A increase S

l decreases and A increases

l increases and A decreases
Both and A decrease
(a) The bulb B, lights up earlier than B, and finally both
the bulbs shine equally bright
3. In electromagnetic induction, the induced charge in a (b) Zlights up earlier and finally both the bulbs acquire
coil is independent of cqual brightncss
(a) change in the flux (c) B, lights up earlier and finally B shincs brighter than
(b) time taken to change the flux B
(c) resistance in the circuit (d) and B, light up together with equal brightness all the
(d) None of the above
time
4. A coil and a bulb arc connected in serics with a DC 8. Twa identical circular loops of metal wires are lying on a
source, a soft iron core is then itserted in the coil, then table without touching each other. Loop A carries a
intensity of the bulb remains the same current which increases with time. In response, the loop B
(b) intensity of thhe bullb decre
Creases (a) remains stationary
{c) intensity of the bulb increases (b) is attracted by loop A
the bulb ceases to glow (c) is repelled by loop A
5. A nagnct is brought towards a coil i) speedly (d) rotates about its centre of mass with CM fixed
(iü) slowly, thern the induced emf/induced charge will be
9. A coil having 500 square loops each of side 10 cm is
respectively
placed normal to a magnetic flux which increases at the
(al more in first case/nuore in first case rate of 1.0 Ts. The induced emf in volts is
(b) more in first case/equal in both case
(a) 0.1 (b) 0.5
(c) less in first ase/more in second case
(c) 1 (d) 5
less in first caselequal in both case
10. A coil having an area 2 m² is placed in a magnetic field
6. In a coil of area 10 cmn and 10 turns, a magnetic field -2
is directed perpendicular to the plane and is changing at which changes fron 1 Wun to 4 Wn in an interval
the rate of 10° gauss/s. The resistance of the coil is of 2 s. The emf induced in the coil will be
(a) 4 V (b) 3 V
2052. The current in the coil will be
(d) 5x 10 A {c) 1.5 V (d) 2 V
(a) 5A (b) 0.5 A (c) 0.05 A
414 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

11. The circular kxops of eqal radi are placed coaxially at 16. A circuit element is placed in a closed box. At time
some separation. The first is cut and a battery is t= 10, a constant current generator supplying a current
inserted in betwecn to drive a cutent in it. The of A is connected across the box. Potential difference
current changes slightly because of the variation in
resistance with temperature.
across the
x varies according to graph shown in the
figure. The element in the box is
During this period. the two loops
(a) attract cach other
(b) repel each other
(c) do not exert anv force on cach other
(d) attract or reel each other depending on the sense of
the current
12. small, conducting circula loop is placed inside a long
A
soleneid carying a current. The plane of the loop
contains the axis of the solenoid.
lf the current in the solenoid is varied, then the current {a) a tesistance of 22
induced in the loop is (b) a battery of enf 6 V
(a) clockwise tc) an inductance of 2 H
ld) a capacitance of 0.5 F
(b) anticlockwise
(c) zero 17. Some magnetic flux is changed from a coil of resistance
(di clockwise or anti-clockwise depending on whether the
resistance is increased or decreased
102 As a result an induced current is developed in it,
which varies with time as shown in figure. The
13. The north pole of a magnet is brought near a metallic magnitude of change in flux through the coil in Wb is
ring as shown in the figure. The direction of induced
current in the ring will be 44

0.1

(a) 2 (b) 4
(c) 6 (d) None of these
(a) anti-clockwise
(b) clockwise 18. Figure shows two bulbs B, and B, resistor R and
(c) first anti-clockwise and then clockwise inductor L, when the switch Sis turned off
(d) first clockwise and then anti-cockwise

14. In the figure, magnetic energy stored in the coil is

2H -ww

+10V

(a) zerO
(a) Both B and B, die out pronptly
(b) infinite
(b) Both B and B, die out with sone delay
(c) 25 J (e) B, dies pronptly but with some delay
ot
(d) None of the above (d) B des out pronptiy but B, with sone delay
15. An emf of 15 V is applied in a circuit coil containing 19. A coil of402 resistancc, 100 turns and radius 6 mm is
5H inductance and 10S2 resistance.
t
Tlhe ratio of the
connccted to ammeter of resistace I60S2. Coil is
t and
Currents at time ls is placed rpendicul.r to the magnetic lield. When coil i
taken out of the ficd, 32 u: charge flows through it.
e

(a1 (b)
The intensity of magnetic field will be
(a) 6.55 T (b) 5.66T
(c) 2.55 T (d) 0.566T
 Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction 415

20. A coil has an area of 0.05 m

and it has 800 thuns. It is 26. An electric potential difference will be induced
a
placed perpedicularly in magretic field of strength between ends of the conductor shown in the diagram,
4 x 10 Wb
m,
and is rotated through 90° in 0.1 s. The when the conductor moves in the direction
average cmf induced in the coil is
(a) 0.056 V 0.016 V (b)
(c) 0,026 V 0.016 V (d)

21. In a magnetic field of 0.05 T, area of a coil changes

from 101 cm
m
1O0 without changing the
resistance which is 2S2. The amount of charge that
flows during this period is
(a) P (b) O (c) L.
x
(a) 2.5
10C 27. A long horizontal metallic rod with length along the
2 x cast-west direction is falling under gravity. The
(b)
10C potential difference between its two ends will
(c) 10C (a) be zero (b) be constant
(di 8x10c (c) increase with time (d) decease with time
22. The resistance and inductance of series circuit are 52 28. All the three inductors have inductance 3.0 1. The
and 20 H, sespectively. At the instant of closing the cquivalent inductancc of the circuit is
switch, the current is increasing at the rate 4 As. The
supply vollage is
(a) 20 V (b) 80 V
(c) 120 V (d) 100V
23. The number of turns in the coil of an AC generator is (b) 2 H (c) 3 1|
5000 anxd the arca of the coil is 0.25 m. The coil is 29. Two inductances connected in parallel ate equivalent to
rotated at the rate of 100 cycles/s in a magnetic field of a single inductance of 1.5 H and when
connected in
0.2 Wm, The pcak value of the ení generated is series are equivaleot to single inductance of 8 H. The
nearly difference in their iduclance is
(a) 786 kV
() 440 kv (al 3 1| (b) 7.5 H (c) 2 | (d) 4 H
(c) 220 kV (d) 157 kV 30. An inductance anda resistaIce
L are R

24. A wheel with ten metallic spokes cach 0.50 m long is fist connected
to a battery. After some tine the hattery is disconnected
rotaed with a sped of 120 rev/min in a plane normal but L. and R rennain connected in a cksed circuit. Then
to the earth's magnetic fiekd at the place. lf the the curtent reduces to 37% of its initial vale in
magnitude of the ield is 4.0 gauss, the induced emf
(al RL second
between the axle and the rim of the wheel is equal to (b) second
(a) 1.256x 10V L
Mecond (d)
(b) 6.28 x 10V R second
LR
(c) 1.236 x 10V 31. Thc time costant of an inductance coil is 2.0x 10s.
(d
6.28 x 10y When a 902 resistance is joined in serics, then
the
time coIstant becomes 0.5x 10s The inductance and
25. An electron moves along the line AB which lies in the
sane plane as a circular loop of conducting resistance of the coil are
wire as (a) 30 mnH, 302
shown in figure. What will be the direction of (b) 30 mH, 602
the (c) 60 mH, 302
current induced (if any) in the loop? (d) 60 mH, 602
32. In the circutt shown, what is the energv stored in
coil at steadv state?
the
251

(a) No current will be induced

(b) The current will be clockwise 3H, 22
(c) The current will be anti-clockwise
(d) The current will change
direction as the electron passes W

througl 25 4)
(al 21.3J (b) 42.6J (c) Zeo (d) 213J
416) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

33. In thc following figure, what is the final valuc of An emf will not be induced in the coil, if the
current in the 10 ohmn resistor when the plug of key K
is inserted?

2002

2V (al magnetic field is incteased unifornly

(a) (3/10) A (b) magnetic field is switched off
(b) (3/20) A (c) coil is rutated about an axis NX"
(c) (3/11) A (d) coil is rotated atxout an axis perpendicular to the plane
(d Zero
of the coil and passing through its centre O

34. A square loop of side l, resistance R is placed in a 39. If a coil of 40 turns and area 4.0 cm is suddenly
uniform magnetic field B acting normally to the plane removed from a magnetic field, then it is observed that
a charge of 2.0 x
of the loop. If we attempt to pull it out of the field with 10Clows into the coil. If the
a constant velocity v, then the power needed is
resistance of the coil is 802, then the magnetic flux
(a) BRiv
density in Whtn is
la) 0.5 (b) 1.0
(c) 1.5 (d) 2.0
R R 40. A coil of wire of a certain radius has 600 turs and a
35. A square of side L metres lies in thc Xvplane in
a
self-inductance of 108 mH. The self-inductance of a
region, where the magnetic field is given by B 2nd simnilar coil of 500 turns will be
2i + 3j + 4k)T, where B, is constant. The (a) 74 m! (b) 75 mH
=B fc) 76 mH (d) 77 mH
magnitude of flux passing through the square is
(NCERT Exemplar) 41. The current carrying wire and
(a) 23,1? Wb the rod AB are in the same
(b) 3B,J Wb plane. The rod moves paralle!
Wb to the wire with a velocity v.
(c) 4B,J Which one of the following
(d) V29B,L? wb statemernts is true abxout
36. A conducting loop of area 5.0 cm² is placed in a induced emf in the rod?
(a) End A will be at lower potential with respect to B
magnetic field which varies sinusoidally with time as (b) A and B will be at the sune potential
B 02 sin 300 t. The normal to the coil makes an angle
of 60° with the ficld. The emf induced at t = (n/900)s
(c) There will be no induced emf in the rod
x (d) Potential at A will be higher than that at B
(a) 7.5
10-v (b) zero
(c) 15 x 1oy (d) 20x 42. Two circular coils can be arranged in any of the three
10v situations shown in the figure. Their mutual inductance
37. An infinitely long cylinder is kept parallel to a unilorm will be
magnetic field B directed aloIg positive Z-axis. The
direction of induced current as scen from the Z-axis
will be
(a) clockwise of the positive z-axis
(b) anti positive Z-axis clockwise of the positive zaxis 0
(c) zero A
(B
(d) along the magnetic field
(a) tnaximum in situation (A)
38. A rectangular coil is placed in a region having a (b) maximum in situation (B)
uniform magnctic field B perpendicular to the plane of (c) tnaximum in situation (C)
the coil. (d) the sane in all situations
 :
Chapter 06 Electromagnetic induction 417

43. A coil of inductance 300 mH and resistance 22 is 49. Switch Sof the circuit shown in figure is closed at t=0.
connected to a source of voltage 2 V. The current
reacbes lhall of its steady state valuc in
la) 0.15 s (b) 0.3 s (c) 0.05s (d) 0.1 s
44. An inductor of 2 H and a resistance of 10Qare
connected in series with a battery of 5 V. The initial
rate of change in current is
lal 0.5 As (b) 2.0 As

tcl 2.5 As-! (d) 0.25 As!

If emf in L. is e and i is the current flowing through the

,
45. In the circuit shown in the figure, what is the valuc
just after pressing the key K?
of at
circuit time t, which of the following gaphs is
correct?
62 2 ml!

(a) (b)
8n
10 V

la) 5/7 A (b) 5/11 A

{c) 1A (d) Norne of these

46. For in the circuit shown in figurc, current through the

battery at t= 0and = o ()
is
0.5H
50. Coefficient of coupling between two coils of
self-inductances L, and is unity. It means

,
(al 50% flux of L, is linked with L,

(b) 1006 flux of L, is linked with Ly

(c) time of flux of L, is linked with L,
(d)Noe of the atve
51. A square loop ABCD of edge 'a' noves to tlhe right with
(a) 1.5 A, 1.5 A (b) 0. 0 velocity v, parallel to AB. There is a uniform
a

(c) 1, I.5 A 0 (d) 1.5 A, magnetic field of magnitude B, directed into the paper.,
47. variable voltage 1' =2t is applied
A across an inductor in the region between PQ and RS only. I, Il and iIl are
of inductance L. = 2Has shown in figure. Then, threc positions of the loop.
2H B.

V-2 AB AB
(a) curtcnt lerstes time graph is a parabola
(b) energy stured in magnetic ficld att =2sis
D

4J
(c) potential energv at timet =ls in magnetic field is
inereasing at a rate of J s 1

(d) energy stored in magnetic field is zero all the time. i) The emf induced in the loop has magnitude Bav in all
ee
48. The network shown inthe figure is a art of a complete positios,
(iil InduCed emf is zero in position I.
circuit. If al a certain instant the current i is 5 A and (iii) The iduced emf is anti-clockwise in position I
decreasing at the rate of 10' As,thcn V -V is (iv) The induced emf is clockwise in position lll.
la) (i). (Gi)
15Y (b) (ii), (Gii), (iv)
tc) (), (G)
(a) 5 V (b) 10 V
(c) 15 V (d) 20 V (d) liii), iv)
418) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS VoL 2

52. A rectangular, a square, a circular and an elliptical loop, 57. The variation of induced emf (E) with time ) in a coil,
all in the XY-plane, are moving out of a uniform if a short bar magnet is moved along its axis with a
tnagnetic field with a constant velocity v = ui. The ity is best represented as
constant velocity
magnetic field is directed along the negative Z-axis
direction. The induced emf during the passage of these
loops, out of the field region, will not remain constant
for
(a) the rectangular, circular and elliptical loops
(hl the circular and the elliptical loops
(c) only the elliptical loop
(d) any of the four loops
53. A magnet NS is suspended fron a spring and while it
oscillates, the magnet moves in and out of the coil C.
The coil is connected to a galvanometer G.
38. The current i in a coil varies with time as shown in the
figure. The variation of induced emf with tine would
be

a000
TI4 T2 1Tu

Then, as the magnet oscillates,

(a) G
shows deflection to thc left and right with constant ermf
emt
amplitude
(b) G shows deflection on one side | T2 3T4 (b) o
T LT4
(a)
(c) G shows no dellection T74
(d G shows deflection to the left and right |2 3T4T
but the
amplitude steadily decteases
54. A coil is suspended in a uniform magnetic
field, with
the plane of the coil parallel to the magnetic
force. When a current is passed through lines of
)
starts oscillating, thhen it is very difficult
the coil it 174 TI23TI4
(d) oT23T74T
to stop. But, if
an aluminiun plate is placed near to
the coil, then it
stops, This is due to
(a) development of air current when connectet
the plate is placed 59. When: across a series
(b) induction of clectrical
(c) shielding of nagnetic
charge on the plate combin.Is n
of self-inductance L and resistance R,
lines of force as aluminium is a the
paramagreetic
the variation in the current i with time t is best
material
(d) electromagnetic
induction in the aluminium plate represented by
rise to electroagnetic damping give
55. Two conducting circular
loops of radii R, and R, are
placed in the samec plane with (a)
their centres coinciding. (b)
If, then R, >> R, then
t the mutual inductance M
between them will be
directly proportional to
(a) R /R, (b) R, / R,
tc) R R,
56. A short-circuited coil
is placed in a time-varying (c)
(d)
magnetic ficld. Electrical powet
is
due to the
urtent induced in the coil
Cur
to be quadrupled and 1fhPacu of turns were
the wire radius halved,
electrical power dissipated then the
would be 60. In the circuit shown in
the figure, the jockey is being
(a) halved
(bi the same pulled towards right, so J
that the resistance in the circu
(c) doubled d quadrupied is increasing. Its a value at some
instant is 5SN
 :
Chapter 06 Electromagnetic induction (419

The current in thc circuit at this instant will be If the magnitude of the field is 0.4 G, the induced enf
between the axle and the rim of the wheel is equal to
(a) 1.256x 10 v (b) 6.28 x 10 V
(c) 1.256 x 10 V (d) 6.28x 10*
65. An aeroplane in which the distance betwcen the tips of
the wings is 50 m is flving horizontally from east to
west with the speed of 360 kmh over a place where
ww the vertical conpotent of the carth's magnetic fieid is
20 V
2.0x 10 Wbm. The potential difference bct ween
the tips of the wings would be
(a) 4 A V
(a) 0.1 (b) 0.01 V (c) 0.2 V (d) 1.0 V
(b) less than 4 A
(c) more than 4 A 66. A conducting square loop of side land resistarnce Ris
may be less than or more than 4 A depending on the
(d)
moving outit of the plane with a uniforn vclocity
value of L
perpendicular to one of its sides. A uniform and
61. The value of time constant for the given circuit is constant magnetic field B exists along tthe perpendicular
to the plane of tlhe loop as shown in figure.
W

E.r

L The current induced in the loop is

(a (b Bl
R+r + Ra R+r) (a)
Blv
clockwise (b) anti-clockwise
(c) RtR, + r) R R
(d) None of these (e 2Blv anti-clockwise
(d) zero
R
62. An infinitely long conductor AB lies along the axis of a 67. Two rails of a railway track, insulated from each other
circular loop of radius R. If the current in the conductor and the ground, are connected to a millivoltmetre.
AB varies at the rate of x amperc/second, then the What is the reading of the millivolt:netre when a train
induced emf in the loop is
travels at a speed of 20 ms along the track? Given
that the vertical component of earth's magnetic field is
0.2x 10 Wbm and the rails are separated by l m
A
(a) 4 mV (b) 0.4 mV
mn

(c) 80 mV (d) 10

68. A pair of coils of turns n, and n, are kept close

together. Current passing through the first is reduced at
(d) zero the rate r, arx emf3 mV is developed across the other
2 4 2
coil. If the second coil carries current which is then
63. A physicist works in a laboratory where the magnetic reduced at the rate 2r, then the emf produced across
field is 2T. She wears a necklace of enclosing arca the first coil will e
0.01 m' in such a way that the plane of the necklace is (a) mV (6) ny (c) 6 mV () 3/2 mV
normal to the field and is having a resistance
R=0.01 2 Because of power failure, the field decays
to 1 T in time 10 s. Then, what is the total heat 69. A loop made of straight edges has six corners at A (0, 0,
O), B(L, 0, 0), C(L, L, 0), D(O, L. 0). E(0, L, L) and F
produced in her necklace?
(b) 20J
(0, 0, L). A magnetic field B = B,i + k) T is present
(a) 10J (c) 30J (d) 40J
in the region. The flux passing through the loop
64. A wheel with ten metallic spokes each 0.50 m long is ABCDEFA (in that order) is [NCERT Exemplar]
rotated with a speed of 120 rev min in a planc (a) B,L'Wb (b) 2B, L' wb (c) 2B,L' Wb (d)
normal to the earth's magnetic field at the plane. 4B,wb
420 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

70. One conducting U-tube can slide inside another as 74. A rectangular oop with a sliding connector of length
shown in figure, maintaining clectrical contacts 10 cm is situated in uniform magnetic ficld
between the tubes. The magetic field B is perpendicular to plane of loop. The magnetic induction
perpendicular to the plane of the figure. If each tube
moves towards the other at at
a constant speed ,
then the
is 0.1 T and resistane of connetor (R) is IQ. The
sides AB and CD have resistances 22 and 3S2,
emf induKed in the circuit in terms of Bland v, where respectively. Find the current in the connector during
I is the width of each tube, will be
its tmotion with constant velocity l ms.
• B

R
(a) zero fb) 2 Blv 1
(c) Bl (al
242 A (b) A
20
71. In a closed loop, which has some inductance but
negligible resistance, uniform but tine varying lc)A (d) A
magnetic fickd is applied directed into the plane of the 440
loop. Variation of field with time is shown. Initially,
current in the loop was zero. Then, 75. When the current in the portion of the circuit shown in
B
the figure is 2 A and increasing at the rate of l As.
then the measured potential difference V
8 V.
However, when the current is 2A and decreasing at
the
rate of 1As, then the measured pot ential difference
V =4v.
The values of R and L are

(a) emf induced in the loop is zero at

I=2s
(b) current in the loop will be maximum at t
fc) direction of emf in the loop will
2s
change at -2s
(d None of the alwe
72. A magnetic ficld given by B) = 0.2t- 0.03 tesla is
directed perpendicular to the plane of a circular coil
containing 25 turns of radius 1.8 cm and whose total
resistance is 1.52 The power dissipation at
approxinnately 3sis
(a)1.37 W

) 7 uW zero
(C) d) 4 uW
73. A stnall tmagnetMis allowed to fall through a fixed
(a) 32 and 2 H respectively
horizontal conducting ring R. (b) 32
and 3 H respectively
lt ghe the acceleration
due to gravity. The acceleration of M, a will be
(c) 22
and 1 H respectively
(d) 32 and I H resctively
76. Two different coils have self-inductances LL =
8 mlH
and L, =2 mi. The current in onc coil is
a constant rate.
increased at
The current in second coil is also
increased at the same constant rate.
At certain instant
of time. the powet given to the coils is
R the same. At
that timc, the current, the induced voltage and
the
ehergy stored in first coil are i,, V, and W;
respectively. Cortesponding values for
(a) <g when it is above R and moving at the same instant are V, and the second coil
towards R i, W,. respectively.
(b) > q when it is above R and moving towards Then, choose the wrong option.
R
(c) <9 when it iv below R and moving away
from R (a) !
(d) >g when it is below Rand moving away ftomn R i, 4
(b)
-4
4
 induction 421
Chapter 06: Electromagnetic

its axis. A
time t 80. A cylindrical bar magnet is rotated about
77. The current i in an induction coil varies with wire is connected from the axis and
is made to touch
graph shown in figure.
the cylindrical surlace through contact. Then,Exemplar]
to
according the a
(NCERT
(a) a direct current flows in the antneter A
no current flows through the ammeter
A
(b)
(c) an alternating sinusoidal current flows through the
= 2r
ammeter A with a time period T
flows through
(d) atine varying non-sinusoidal current
emf amneter A
Which of the following graphs shows the induced the
as figure. A
(E) in the coil with time? 81. There are two coils A and B shown in
B as shown, when A is moved
current starts flowing in
towards Band stops when A stopps tmoving. The current
is stationary when A
in A is counter-clockwise. B kept
moves. We can infer that (NCERT Exemplar]
(a) (5) A
(al there is a constant curent in the clockwise direction in
(b) there is a varying current in A
(cl there is no Cutent in A
(d) there is a constant Current in the counter-clockwise
direction in A

lc) (d)

82. Samc as above problem except, the coil A is made to

rotate abxut a vertical axis (figure). No current flows in
B, if A is at rest. The current in coil A,when the
=
78. A coil of inductance L = 50uH and resistance 0.5 2 is current in (at B

0 is counter-clockwise and the coil

connected to a battery of emf =5 V. A is as shown at this instant, t 0, is [NCERT Exemplar]
A resistance of 102 is connccted parallel to the coil. (al constant current clockwise
Now, at same instant the connection of the battery is (b) varying current clockwise
switched off. Then, the amount of heat generated in (c) varying cument counter-clockwise
the coil after switching off the battery is (d) constant curent conter-clockwise
(a) 1.25 n] (b) 2.5 mJ (c) 0.65 tmJ (d) 0.12 mJ
79. In the circuit shown, the coil has inductance and
resistance. When Xis joined to Y, the time constant is t
duringBgrowth of current. When the steady state is
reached, then heat is produced in the coil at a rate P. If
Xis now joined to Z, then choose the correct stalement. 83. A rectangular loop of sides 10 cm and 5 cm with a cut
is stationary between the pole pieces of an
electromagnet.
The magnetic field of the magnet is normal to the loop.
so
The current feeding the electromagnet is reduced,
that the field decreased from its initial value of 0.2 T at
the rate of 0.02 2. If the cut is joined anxd the loop has
a resistance of 2092, then the power dissipated by the
(a) the total heat produced in the coil is P:
loop as heat is
(b) the total heat produced in the coil is - Pr (a) 5 nW
2
(b) 4 nW
(c) the total heat produced in the coil is 2/:
(c) 3 W

(d) the data given is not sufficient to reach a conclusion

(d) 2 nW
422 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

84. The figure shows certain wire segments joined together 88. The loop shown moves with a velocity vin a uniform
to form a coprar The lop is placed in a magnetic field of magnitude B. directed into the papet.
perpendicular magnetic i, the direction going into The poterntial difference between and Qise
P

the plane of the figurc. The nagnitude of the field

,
increases with time. and I, are the currents in thc
segments ab and cd. Then,

0
B

=
(i)e BLv/2
(ii) e = BLv
(a) >,
(iii) Pis positive with respect to Q
(ivi Qis positive with respect to P
(b)4 <1, (c) (i). (iii) (4) (ii), Gv)
lc) is in the direction ba and I, is in the direction cd (a) (iü). (ii) (b) (i), iv)

(d is in the dirextion ab and I, is in the direction de 89. A conducting lop being pulled out of magnetic field
mav
a with a sevd &. Which of the following plots
85. A uniform magnetic ficld B exists in represent the power delivered by the pulling agent
as a
cm as
cylindrical region ef radius 10
function of the spced 1?
shown in figure. A unifom wire of
length 80 cm and resistance 4.02 is
bent into a square frane and is placed
with one side along a dianeter of the
cylindrical region. If the magnetic
field increases at a constant rate of 0.010
T/s, thcn the
curnent induced in the frame
(al x
39 10A (b) 4.0x 10°A
x
(d) 3.9 10A
of radius 10.0 cm whose
86. Figure shows circular wheel
a d (d)
a
(a) (b) b (c)c
upper h.alf, is made of ion and the lower half of wood length 10 cm is placed
as shown in figute. The two juctions are joined by
an 90. A square loop of wire with side
a
at angle of 45 with magnctic field that changes
iron rod. A uniform magoetic ficld Bof magnitude as
space above the central line uniformly from 0.I Tto zero in 0.7s. The induced
20x 10T exists in the pure current in the loop fits resistance is 12)
is
suggeste by the figure. The wheel is set into s (b) 2.5 mA (c)3.5 mA (d) 4.0 mA
2.0 for the (a)1.0 mA
rolling om the hotizontal surface. If takes
it
part to go up. two coils A and B placed
iron part to
comne down and the wooden 91. The diagram below shows is
period is a very small distance. Coil A
then the average emf induced during this parallcl to cach other at a very sensitive
connected to an AC supply. G is
galvanoneter. When the key is closed

/Wood

x
(a) 1.57x 10V (b) L.5 1ov
(c) 157x 10V (d) L55
x
10V
the
constant deflection will be observed in
translates in a direction making (a)
87. wire of length 10cn
A
of motion is galvanotneter for 50 H: supply
an angle of 60 with its length. The plane (b) visible small variations
will be olserved in the
ficld of 1.0 T that
perpendicular to a uniform magnetic galvanoneter for 50 H: inpt may
induced between the eds be observed when
exists in the spe. The enl is 20 em/s is (c) oscillations
i the galvanometer
a frequency ofI to 2 Hz
of the ro. if the speed of
translation the input AC voltage has even
)17x 10'v (d No variation will be
observed in the galvanometer
(a) L.7x 10v when the input AC
voltage is or 2 H I

() 0l7x 10v (d 1.7x 10V

 Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction (423

92. A magnet is dropped down an infinitely long vertical 96. Two concentric coils each of radius equal to 2r cm are
copper tube,
placed at right angles to cach other. 3 A and 4 A are the
(a) the nagnct moves with continuously increasing
currents flowing in cach coil, respectivcly. The
velocity and ultimately acquires a constant terminal
velocity
magnetic induction in Wb/m'at the centre of the coils
(b) the magnet noves with continuously decteasing will be (H, = 4nx 10Wb /A-m)
velocity and ultimately cones to rest (a) 12× 10 (b) 103
(c) the magnet moves with continuously increasing (c) 5x 1o (di 7x 10
velocity but constant acceleration
(d) the magnet moves with continuously increasing 97. An inductor U. 100 ml), a resistor (R
100NNand a
velocity and acceleration battery E=J00V)are initially connected in series as
93. An aluminium ring B faces an electromagnet A The shown in the figue. After a long tine. the battery is
current Ithrough A can be altered disconnected after short-cicuiting the goints A and B.
The curTent in the circuit ms after the short-circuit is
I

Observet Rear
side
(a) whether I increases or decreases, B will thot expetience
any force
(b) if I decreases, A will repel B (a) eA (b) 01A
(c) if I incrcascs, A will attract B (c)1A (d) /eA
1

(d) if I incteases, A will repel B 98. Three solenoid coils of same dimension, same number
94. A conducting square frame of turns and same number of layers of windings are
of side a and a long straight taken. Coil l with inductace L, was wounl usinga
wire carrying current Iare wire of resistance l1 S2 / coil 2 with inductance L
was wod using the sinilar wire but the direction of
located in the sane plane as
shown in the figure. The winding was reversed in each layer, coil 3 with
franne moves to the right inductance L., was wound using a superconducting
with a constant velocity v. wire. The self-inductance of the coils L,L, andL, are
The emf induccd in the frame will be proportional to (a) I, =L, =ly
(b} 2, LLy 0
1

(a) (b
2x+ a (d) 1, > L.,
>l4
(c (d)1/ 99. The loop ABC) is moving with velocity v towards right.
2x-a) 2x+ a) The magnetic field is 4 T. The lop is connected to a
resistance of 82 If steady current of 2 A flows in the
95. A rectangular lonp has a sliding connector PQ of length loop, then value of v, if loop has resistance of 4 S2, is
land resistance R2 and it is moving with a speed vas
shown. The set up is placed in a uniform magnetic ficld
(Given, AB =30 cm, AD =
30cm, sin37°n
5
going inta the plane of the paper. The three currents
4,.1, and I are

RO

2B
= Blv Bh 20 ms-!
=
ms-! (b)
(a) k =l, (b)4 =-I, (a)
3
3R R R
= Bl 2Bv Blv (c) 10 s (d) 100 ns!
te) { =1, 3R (d4=l, =|= 3
3R
424 BJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol 2

is rotated at a constant
is present in 104. A rectangular coil ABCD which
100. A uniform but time varying magnetic field as shown in the
angular velocity atbout an horizontal as
a circular region of radius R. The magnetic field
is
coil well as the
the figure. The axis of rotation of the
perpendicular and into the plane of the loop and magnetic field Bare horizontal. Maxitnum
current will
increasing at a constant rate a.
magnitude of field is flow in the circuit when the plane of the coil is
placed
There is a straight conducting rod of length 2R
as shown in figure.

(a) inclincd at to the magnetic field

30

(b) perpendicular to the magnetic field

2
(c) iclined at 45 to the magnetic field
across the rod is
parallel to the magnetic field
The magnitude of induced emf (d)
R'a zR'a a
105. A right-angled triangle alx, made from metallic wire.
(a) zR'a moves at uniform speed in its plane as shown in
2 4 a v

m is moving with figure. A uniform magnetic field Bexists in the

101. A conducting rod PQ of length L =1.0
perpendicular direction. The emf induced in the loop
a uniforn speed v =2
ms
in a uniform magnetic field
al<, in the segment b. in the segment ac and in the
B=4.01T directed into the paper. A capacitor of segent ab are
as
capacityC=10uF is connected shown in figure. OB
Then,

A
BT
(a) zero; vBllc).+ ve at c, zero,
v
B(bc),+ e at a
o ,
(b) Bc),* ve at zero, zero; v Bl< ),+ al a e
(c) zero; zero: rBih),+ ve at c, vBlbc1,+ ve at a
80uC and ge - 80 uC
+
(a)9,
(b) q, =- 80 uC and g, =+ 80 uC (d) vBc), ve at c, vBb).+ ve at a zero; zero
tc) 9, =0 =4 106. the circuit shown below, the key Kis closed
lIn at
t=0.
(d) charge stored in the capacitor increases expornentially The current through the battery is
with time
a
102. A conducting rod ACof length 4l is rotated about
point O in uniform mangnetic field directed into the
a B
paper. AO =land =3/. Then.
C
R.

VR +R,)
at (=0ad
(a) V, -, Bol'
2
Ba RR, R,
VIR + R,)
V
-Vo =žBo at t
(c)
V,-V 4B ol' tà 0 and at t=
R,

103. The current in an L.-R circuit builds upto th of its +

4
- at t
=0 and VIR R,) at =t
R, RR,
steady state value in 4 s. The time constant of this
circuit is at t =0 an +Katt=
(a) In tb (c) R.
2
ln 2 In 2 In 2
 :
Chapter 06 Electromagnetic induction (425

107. The figure shows three circuits with identical batteries, 110. A metallic ring is dropped down, keeping its plane
inductors and resistors. Rank the circuits, in the perpendicular to a constant and horizontal magnetic
decreasing order, according to the current through the field. The ring enters the region of magnetic field at
battery (i) just after the switch is closed and (ii) a long t=0 and completely emerges as
out at =T sec. The
time later current in the ring varics

(b)

lc)

111. An inductor l. = 0.03 H) and a resistor (R 015/2) are

(a) () i, > i, >4 {=0) (üil i, >j>i connectcd in series to a battery of 15Vemf in a circuit
(b) (i) i, <i, <, (4z0) Gi) i, >i, > shown below. The key K, has been kept closed for a
(c) (i) i, = i, ={=0) (iü)i, <i, <
(d) (i) i, =i, >, 4 * 0) (ii) i,
long time. Then. att =Q K, is opened and key K, is
>i, > closed simultancously. At t =lm/s the current in the
108. The graph shows the variation in magnetic flux r) with circuit wll be (e 150)

time through a coil. Which of the statenents given 0.15 kn

below is not correct?

15 V
(a) 100 mA (b) 67 nA (c) 6.7 mA (d)
0.67 mA
112. An inductor of inductance L= 400 mH and resistors of
la) There is a change the dircction as well as magnitude resistances R, =2Q and R, =29 are connected to a
of the induced emf between B and D battery of emf 12 V as shown in the figure. The internal
(b) The magnitude of the induced emnf is maximum resistance of the battery is ncgligible. The switch Sis
between B and C closed at t = 0. The potential drop across L as a function
t
ere isis a change in the
{c) There direction as well as magnitude
of time is
of induced enf between A ad dG
(d) The induced emf is not zero at B

109. Which of the following figure correctly depicts the

Lenz's law. The arrows show the mnoverment of the
labelled pole of a bar magnet into a closed circular loop
and the arrows on the circle show the direction of the R
induced current

(a) 6e V (d) 12e-v

al (b)
113. There are two solenoids of same length and inductance
L but their diameters differ to the extent that one can
just fit into the other. They are connected in three
different ways in series.
(1) They are connected in series but separated by large
distance.
(2) They arc connccted in series with one inside the
other and senses of the turns coinciding.
(3) Both are connected in serics with one inside the
other with senses of the turns opposite,
426 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vot. 2

as depicted in figures 1,2 and 3, respectively. The total induced electric field at point Pat a distance r from the

inductance of the solenoids in each of the case 1,2 and centre of the circular region
3 are respectively.

(b) decreases
as
(a) is zero
(a) 0, 4L 2L, (c) incTeases as r (d) decreass as
(b) 4 L2L,0
(c) 2
L, 0 4L, 118. As shown in the figure, Pand Qare two co-axial
(d) 2 L 4L, 0 conducting loops separated by sone distance. When th
114. A rectangular loop of length and breadth b is placed at switch S is closed. a clockwise current I, flows in P(a
seen by E)and an induced current Jo, flows in Q. The
distance of x from infinitely long wire carrying current i
such that the direction of current is parallel to breadth. switch remains closed for a long time. When S is
If the loop moves away from the current wire in a opened, a current lo, flows in (Q.
direction perpendicular to it with a velocity v, then Then, the directions of lo, and lo, (as seen by E) are
magnitude of the cmf in the loxop is ug = permeability
of free space)

(c)Hoil
+ x)
2rrl 2r
Battery
115. A circular coil of one turn of radius 5.0 em is rotated
about a dianeter with a constant angular speed of (a) respetively clockwise and anti-clock wise
80 revolutions per minute. A unifortn magnetic tield (b) both clockwise
B= 001T exists in a direction perpendicular to the axis (c) both anti-clockwise
of rotation, the naximum emf induced, the average emf (d) respectively anti-clockwise and clockwise
induced in the coil over a long period and the average 119. A magnet is Imade to oscillate with a particular
of the squares of emf induced over a long period is
frequency. passing through a coil as shown in figure.
(a) 64x
1ov. zero, 2.2x 10*v? The time variation of the magnitude of emf generated
(b) 6.6x 10v, zeta, 2.0 x 10*y? across the coil during one cycle.
(c) 6.8 x 10V, zero2.5 x 10-v?

(d) 64× 1oV, zero2.0 x 10v2

116. A non-conducting ring having charge q uniformly
distributed over its circumference is placed on a rough
horizontal surface. A vertical tine varying mnagnetic
field B = 4 is switched on at time =. Mass of the
m
ring is and radius is R.

The ring starts rotating after 2 s, the coefficient of

friction between the ring and the table is
(a)
4qmk (d)
2 mg

117. A uniform but time-varying magnetic fickd B) exists in a

cylindrical region of radius a and is directed into the
plane of the paper as shown. The magnitude of the
B) Medical entrance special format questions
Assertion and reason Reason The rate of change of current just after clasing
the switch is maximum.
Directions (Q. Nos. 1-17) These questions consists of tuo 8. Assertion If curent shown in the figure is increasing,
statements each printed as Assertion and Reason. While ansuering
then
these questions you ure required to choose anyone of the following
fire responses.
(a) f both Assertion and Reason are cortect and Reason is the
correct explanation of Assetion.
(b) If both Assertion and Reasn are correct but Reason is not Reason If current passing through an inductor is
the correct explanation of Asertion. constant, then both ends of the inductor are at same
(c) If Assertion is true hut Reason is false. potential.
(d) If Assertion is false but Reason is true.
(e) lf Both Assertion and Reason are false. 9. Assertion f two inductors are in parallel, then
current in them distributes in inverse ratio of their
1. Assertion Magnetic flux and the electric flux have the
inductance.
same units
Reason Flux passing through a surface gives an idea Reason In parallel, potential difference remains
about the field lines crossing that surface. constant.
2. Assertion In the phenomeon of mutual induction, 10. Assertion An induced emf of 2 V is developed in a
self-induction of each of the coils persists. circular loop, if current in the loop is changed at a rate
of 4 As .If 4 A of current is passed through this loop,
Reason Self-induction arises when strength of current
in sarne coil changes. In mutual induction, current is then flux linked with this coil will be 2 Wb.
changing in both the individual coils. Reason Flux linked with the coil is
3. Assertion When two nagnets are brought closer to
each other, then they will always repel cach other.
laval
Reason According to Lenz's law induced effects 11. Assertion Ifa straight wire is mnoved in a magnetic
always opposcs the cause. ficld, no emf will be induced across its two ends as the
4. Assertion Mutual inductance of two coils depends on circuit is not closed.
the distance between the coils and their orientation. Reason Since, the circuit is not closed, induced
Reason It does not depend on the maguetic material current will be zero.
filled between the coils. 12. Assertion If a loop is placed in a non-uniform (with
5. Assertion Coefficient of self-induction of an inductor respect to position) magnetic field, then induced emf is
depends upon the rate of change of current passing produced in the loop.
through it. Reason In a non-uniform magnetic field, magnetic
e dt flux passing thrmgh the loop will change. Therefore,
Reason From, =-L
d induced emf is produced.
We can see that, L= L« 13. Assertion If current passing through a circular loop is
di/ dt) (dildt) doubled, then magnetic flux linked with the circular
loop will also become two times.
6. Assertion If a magnet is brought closer to a current
carrying loop along its axis, then current always Reason No flux will link through the coil by its own
decreases in the loop. curtent.
Reason Magnet is repelled by the loop. 14. Assertion Two concentric conducting rings of
7. Assertion In the figure, just after closing the switch different radii are placed in space. The mutual
inductance of both the rings is maximum, if the rings are
the potential drop across inductor is maximum. coplanar.
Reason For two co-axial conducting rings of different
radii, the magnitude of magnetic flux in one ring due to
current in other ring is maximum when both rings are
R coplanar.
W
428 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vot. 2

15. Assertion The induced cmf and current will le same 3. A square loop is synnetrically placed
in two identical lonps of copper and aluniniun when between two infinitely long current
rotated with same speed in the same magnctic field. carrying wires in the sane direction.
Reason Induced emf is proportional to rate of change Magnitude of currents in both the wires are
of magnetic field while induced current depends on saune. Now, match the following two
resistance of wire. columns.
16. Assertion A conducting lxop is Columnl Column II
rotated in a unifom magnetic field Loop is moved towarts Indsced custent in the
with constant angular velocity oas
shown in figure. At time t =0, planc ight koog is clockwis.

of the loop is perpendicular to the Laxp is tnoved towarts Ittuced curtent in the
magnetic field. Induced emf produced left kop is anticlockwise,
in the loop is maximun when plane of Wire-1 is moved towards r. Inaitx e current in the
loop is parallel to magnetic field. lcf loop is 7eTo.
Reason When planc of loop ts paraei to Wire-2 is moved towards s.
ma D ldced cutrent in the
field, then magnetic flux paing oop is zero. right loop is on cTo.

17. Assertion A magnet

is
dropped along
a 4. Two co-axial identical circular current A
the axis of circular conducting loop as carrying loops are shown in figure,
shown in figure. T'hen, acceleration of currents in them are in the same
magnet is alwavs less than q.
directions. Now, match the following
Reason When magnet is atbove the loop. then it will two columns.
repel the magnet and when it is below the loop, then it
will attact the nagnet.
Column I Column I
A Curtent is incCascd p. Loops will attrat cach
Match the columns het
1. Match the folkowing colunns. B Curent i, is decreased Laxs will repel eah
Column
I

Column I othet

TesLa P (ML'AT Loo-1 is moved toward Curtent, will increase

A.
koop-2
Webcr 4 (MLAT) D. Loo-2 is moved away Current i, will iKrease
from kp 1
C Weber
m
t. (MAT)
D.
IHenry . None 5. Match the itens of Column I with those of Column II.
I
Column Column I1
2. In the circuit shown in figure, E = 10V, r=1Q. (Planar oops of (Direction of induced
=
R=42 and L. 5 H. The circuit is closed at time t 0 ditferent shapes) current)
Then, match the following two columns.

A boch

Column I cdabc
Column I!
A. VAn at t 0 P 4V

B. V at t 0 8V
C. Vn at
I= bcdab

D VAn at t 10 V
C) Medical entrances' gallery
(Collection of questions asked in NEET & various medical entrance exams)
7. A rod of 10 cn length is moving perpendicular to
solenojd has 1000 turns, When a current of A
4
1. A long
flows through it, then the magmetic flux linked with each unifotm magnetic field of intesity 5x 10
If
Wim.
the aceeleration of the rood is 5ms', then the rate
of
turn of the solenoid is 4 x 10 Wh. The sell-inductance
)
(NEET 2016) incteas of induced emí is (Guj. CET 2015
of the solenoid is
(a) 3 H (b) 2 H ta) 25x I0v (b)2.5x 10V,
tc) I H (d) 4 H (c) 20x 10Vs! (d) 20x 10*Vs

2. A uniform magnetic field is restricted within a region 8. The identical loops of copper and aluminium are
of radius r. The• magnctic field changes with tine at
a

moving witlh the same speed in nnagnetic field. Which

a
. r
of the following statements is true? (CG PMIT 2013]
rate Loop I of radius R>rencloses the region
(a) Induced enf and induced curent are same in both loops
and loop 2 of radius Ris outside the region of magnetic (b) Induced enf remains sme, induced curtent changes in
field as shown in the figure. Then, the emf generated is Ioth loops
[NEET 2016) tc) Induced enf changes but induced curtent remains sane
in both loops
(d) Induced enf wil be more in aluminiun loop

9. A straight conhuctor 0.Im long moves in a unifon

magnetic ficld 0.IT. The velocity of the conductor is
15 ms and is directed perjendicular to the ficld. The
(a) Zero in loop 1
ard zero in loop 2 emf induced between the two ends of the conductor is
b)
dB
dt
r in loop I and -Ddr zr
in loop 2
(al 0.10V (b) 0.15 V lc) 1.50V
(WB JEE 2015)
(d) 15 V
d
RR in loop l and zero in loop 2 10. The initial rale of increase of current, when a lattery of
emf 6 V is connected in series with an inductance of
(d) -dB n
in loop 1
and zero in loop 2 2H and resistancc 12Q, is [CG PMT 2013)
(a) 0.5 As (b) As 1
(c) 3 Asl (d 3.5 As!
3. The self-inductance of a coil having 3500 turns is
11. The current lows from A to B as showIn in the figure.
50 mll The nagnetic flux throg the crss-sectional
arca of the coil while current through it is 8 mA is What is the directon of curtent in circle?
[UK PMT 2014]
found to be (AIIMS 2015]
(a) 4x 10 Wb (b) 0.04 Wb
A -B
(c) 4 uWb (d) 40 mWb
(a) Clockwise (b) Anti clockwise
4. The plase difference between the flux linked with a (c) Straight line () Nonc of these
coil rotating in a uniform tuagnctic field arnd induced
cmf produced in it is IAIIMS 2015) 12. A very small circular loopof radius a is initially (at t =0)
(a) x/2 coplanat and cocentric with a much luger fixed
(b) z/3
(c)- n/6 circular loup of radius b. A eotstant cutent Ilows in
the larger loop. The stnaller loop is rotated with a
A rectangular coppcr coil is placcd in a uniform constant angular speed oatout the common dianeter.
magnetic field of induction 40O mT withits plane The enf induced in the smaller loop as a function of
perpendicular to the fielkd. The area of the coil is time tis (WD JEE 2014)
shrinking at a constant rate of 0.5 n's. The emf
induced in the coil is (EAMCET 2015] la 2 0 cos oo!
2%
(a) 10 mV (b) 20 V
tc) 80 mV (d) 40 nV
Changing magnetic fieks can set up current lps in 21
o sin ot
26
nearby metal 1 bodies and the currents are called as
(Kerala CEE 2015) 13. A straight conductor of length 0.4 m is moved with a
(a eddy curtents (6) flux currents speed of 7 s erpendicular to a magnetic field of
(c) alternatingcurrents (d) leaking currernts intensity 0.9 Wbu.The induced emf across the
(e) wattless currents conductor is [UK I'MT 2014)
(a) 5.04 V (b) 1.26 V lc) 2.52 V (d) 25.2 V
430 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

14. The current in a sclf-inductance L = 40 mH is to be Which one of the following is the correct variation of
increased uniformly from IA to !! A in 4 ms. The emf voltage with time in the coil? (CBSE AIPMT 2012)
induced in the inductor during the process i
[UK PMT 2014]
(a) 100 V
(b) 0.4 V (c) 40 V (d) 440 V

15. The induced emf in a coil of 10 H inductance in which (b)

current varies from 9 A to 4 A in 0.2 s is TI2
0&KCET2013]
(a) 200 V (b) 230 V
(c) 300 V (d) 350 V
16. A conductor of length 5 cm is moved parallel to itself
1

with a speed of 2 mn's, perpendicular to a uniform

magnetic ficld of 10 Wb/m. The induced emí (c) (d)
generated is U&K CET 2013)
(a) 2 x 10 (b) lx 10v
T
|T12
(c)1x 10y (d) 2 x 10*v
17. Two identical circular coils A andB are Kept on a 23. As shown in the figure, a mctal rod makes contact with
horizontal tube side by side without touching each a partial circuit and completes the circuit. The
other. If the curtent in the coil A increases with time, circuit area is perpendicular to a magnetic field with
in respornse, the coil B [Karnataka CET 20131 B= 015T. If the Iesistance of the total circuit is 32.,
(a) is attracted byA (b) remains stationary the force nccded to move the rod as indicated with a
fc) is repelled (d) rotates constant speed of 2 ms will be equal to (AMU 2012
18. A rectangular coil of 100 turts and size 0.1 mx 0.05 m
is placed perpendicular to a magnetic field of 0.1 T. If B0.15T (into page
the field drops to 0.05 T in 0.05 s, the magnitude of the
emf induced in the coil is [Karnataka CET 2013)
(a)
2 (c) Vo6 (d) V6

19. Electromagnetic induction is not used in

(Kerala CET 2013]
(a) speedometer (b) transformer
(c) AC gernerator (d) induction furace (a) 3.75x 10 N
(el room heatet
(b) 2.75x 10 N
20. Two coils have the mutual inductance of 0.05 H. The (c) 6.57 x 10 N
curtent changes in the first coil as = o sin ot, where
(d) 4.36x 10 N
l, =lA and o = 100r rad/s. The maximun enf induced
in secondary coil is [UP CPMT 2013] 24. 1f emf induced in a coil is 2 Vby changing the current
(a) 2.5 V (b) 10 V (c)
6rV td) 5rV in it fron 8 A to 6 A in 2 x 10 s, then the coefficicnt
[AFMC 2012
21. The magnetic flux linked with a circuit of resistance of self-induction is
100 2 increases from 10 to 60 Wh. The amount (a) 2 x 10 H (b) 10 H
of induced charge that flows in the circuit is (in (c) 0.5x 10 H (d) 4 x 1o H
coulomb) (UP CPMT 2012)
(a) 0.5 (b) 5 (c) 50 (d) 100 25. A wire of length lm is moving at a speed of 2 ns
perpendicular to its length in a homogeneous magnetic
22. The current ) in the inductance is varying with time fiekd of 0.5T. If the ends of the wire are joined to a
according to the plot shown in figure. circuit of resistance 6S2, then the rate at which work is
being dorne to keep the wire oving at constant
speed is jCECE 2012
w
(a)1W (b)
3
(c)w
6
 Answers
Check point 6.1
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (d) 5. (a) 6. (d) 7.(b)8.(6) 9. (b) 10. (b)
11. (b) 12. (c) 13. (c) 14. (d) 15. (a)

Check point 62
1.(b) 2.(c) 3. (b) 4. (d) 5. (5) 6.(b) 7.(c) 8. (b) 9. (d) 10. (c)
11.(c) 12. (c) 13. (c) 14.(d) 15. (a)

Check point 6.3

1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (b) S. (a) 6. (c) 7.(d) 8.(d) 9, (d) 10. (a)
11. (a) 12. (d) 13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (c)

Check polnt 6.4

1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (C) 5. (d) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8.(a) 9. (c) 10. (b)
11. (b) 12. (c) 13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (d)

A. Taking it together
1.(d) 2. (b) 3. (o) 4. (b) 5. (b) 6. (a) 7.(C) 8.(C) 9. (d) 10. (b)

11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (b) 16. (c) 17. (a)} 18. (c) 19. (d) 20. (d)
21.(a) 22. (b) 23. (d) 24. (d) 25. (dh 26. (d) 27.(c) 28. (a) 29. (d) 30. (<)
31. (c) 32. (c) 33. (d) 34. (b) 35. (C) 36.(8) 37.(c) 38. (d) 39. (b) 40. (b)
41. (d) 42. (a) 43. (d) 44, (C) 45. la) 46. (a) 47. (ab.c) 48. (c) 49. (c) 50. (b)
S1. (b) 52. (b) 53. (d) 54. (d) 55. (d) 56. (b) 57. (b) 58. (b) 59. (b) 60. (c)
61.(c) 62. (d) 63. (a) 64, (d) 65. (d) 6.(a) 67. (b) 63. (c) 69. (b) 70. (b)
71.(3.c) 72. (d} 73. (a.c) 74. (b) 75. (a) 76. (b) 77. (c) 78. (d) 79. (b) B0. (b)
81. (d) 82. (a) 83. (a) 85. (a) 86. (a) 87. (b) 88. (c) 89. (b) 90. (a)
91. (c) 92. (a) 93. ldi 94. (c) 95. (c) 96. (c) 97. (d) 98. (b) 99. (d) 100. (d)
101. (a) 102. (c) 103. (b) 104. (d) 105. (a) 106. (c) 107. (a) 108. (d) 109. (a) 110. (b)
111. (d) 112. (d) 113, (di 114. (c) 115. (b) 116. (c) 117. (b) 118. (d) 119, (a)

B. Medical entrance speclal format questions

Assertion and reason
1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4.(c) S. (d) 6.(b) 7. (a) 8. (b) 9. (a)
10. (a)
11. (d) 12.(e) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (G) 16. (b) 17. (a)

Match the columns

1.
(A t;@ -+s;Cr,0 -+p 2. (A ->s, B sCq: D +) 3. (A -p s:B+4,s:Cps:0+as)
4. (A a B -p. +q.r; D ps) S. (A +;B+p.C-+)

C Medical entrances' gallery

1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (a) S. (b) 6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (b} 10.(c)
11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (b) 16. (c) 17.(c) 18. (°) 19. (e) 20. (d)
21. (a) 22. (d) 23. (a) 24. (a) 25. (c)
*None of the optiotn is correct.
Hints and
explanations
Check point 6.1 Thereforc, induced current flows in the anti-cdockwise
1. (d Magietic flux linked with a vetor area A in a uniform direction.
=
magnetic ficld B is given by B A

2. ( Magtsethe flux is a scalar qantity. Its Si unit is weber.

=
3. h Dimensional fornula of magnetic flux (MI TA)
-
4. (d Magnitude of indced emf, e
Check point 62
+
(3e+ 4r+ 9)
=-(6t 4)
1. (b The potential difference between two ends of constucting
=
rods will be Bl
e-[6x (2)+ 4] -16 a wire of length I tnoves
2. lo When with velocity v,
16 V to a magnetic ficld B, then the induced emf i

lel= ptpendicular
produced. The magitude of induced emf is given by (tl= Blv.
5. (a As.
Jel m
Given = 30 cm= 0.5 m,: 300 m/ uin = 5 m/s
2
|el 2V or B = -
0.8T
6. (h Inuced emf, 0.5 5
= =
0.3 x 10
s
3. ( Induced emf Bv 10x5
t=0.25 =>e=2V v =|.5
A
=
1.5x 10 mv
.. Inced current, =0.2 A
4. (d ldced cmf Bxy x{
R
=

8. (H Magnetic flux, =
(-4+D Wb =5.0 x10ox1.50 x2 10.0 x10x1.5
= 1.5x 10 =0.15 mV

10r-4 Whs! 5. () When a conductot lying along the magnetic north-south,

then moves eastwards, it will eut vertical component of B.
The induced emf,e= -(10:-4) So, induced emf,
e=vB, I vH, sin öl) = RJu sin6
At,
t0.2%e -10 x0.2-4) 2V
=
2V 6. () lnduced eml. e B- -2nr3
The induced current, ! 0.2A dt
R 10! d
whete, is the rate at which radius of kop is shrinking.

9. Ib As, charge. | Aq|= 6.28 C 7. d Two citcular loos carrying curent in the sume direction
0,01 will attract each ot her. If they are nw separated, then
(10-2) current will incteaw in beth in axordance with Len's law
10. (4 As, charge. AQ= *y 4C
R 8. (b Inuced emf. e, - oNIS = (2rviNB(R) 2x*VNB
12. (c) Acording to lenz's law, the intuced cutrent will be in - 2x(3.1 '. 1600 x
4000 x
0.5x 10 x
(7 x10 0.57V
such a ditectin, that it oppes the change due to which
w
it
is
pruuced. 10. (c) Hete, l= 0. I m,v = l ms
13, (oLetu's hawd Law is un Law of conservation of energy. I= 50 A and B=1.25 mT =I.25 x
10T
to
14. t) Aceording Lenz's law, it will be anticdockwie. The indaed emf is, c = Blv.
15. tu) Des to change in the shae of the lwp, the magnetic flux
linked with he
lp incteaves. Hlence, curtent is induced in
The mechanical powet is.
P=l- Bl =1.25 x
10'x0.1x|x 50
the keo itn such a direction that it opposes the incteaes in - 625 x =
flux. 10W 625 mW
 Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction 433

11, () nduced enf, when rod totates in a vetical plarne

perpedicular to magietic fielt is given as 9. () Self-inductaxe of coil is direcly proportional to square of
number of turns in the coil, L.e.,
- 60
e-'a *0.3x2' 100 V

13. (oE E,n 45,

L, N
where, E s the maxinum vale of iduced eml.
L, AN
Check point 6.3
10. (o) L zN
So, when numtet of tuns is doubled ' will becone 4 times
of L, Le., I.'= 4!. ot 1
times.
L
and 11. (a) Self-indwtance of solenoid is given by
ditdt
L= ,/i
= volt-sccond
L]=(0]= (ridj di
ampere 12. (h Induced emf, e = Li_N's
2. (a) We have, N d
Li X
10 x x 1.2 x
AR
(2000' 101
Self-inductance, L. =
N, 500x4x10-! 321x102v
- IH 0.30
i 2
3. (d Self-inductance of coil, 13. (U Exnergy stored in the coil,

lel=L

Self-inductance, L= |H 13. (à Equivalent inductance.

4. (b) Self-itxluctace, L
=. ditdt
8

(2/0.5)
2H
:. The total ind«tance, L
2
5. (a) Given,
d
- 2A/s and l. =5l|
Check point 6.4
The emf developing actms the coil,
1, (a) We have, M=
=

eL 5x2 10V
0.4
(c) We have, Ai_ 10 M
6.
Mutual inductance, M - 0.21H
.:.

enf, e =L
2. IA Value of induced eml fn coil.
=
0.5 x 5= 2.5V e=M
7. (d The self-inductance of a long solenoid is given by =
(0.005 xi, sin eo)
dt
=
0.(003x o
cos o [or e COS (of 1)
I is clear that the self-inductance of a long solenoid does ot x

10 x
100r
depend upon the cufrent lowing thtough it.
e0.005
= 50 x
8. (h Here, L 10 | di
d! ((-01 3. (o) enf. e, = M

- 10
dt
e
d
x 10- x
. Current(0.) (5) 4A
eml, 50
10 0.5
= 20
30 x100.5V 5. (0 Average enf, e 0.09 x
=300
V

0.006
434) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

6. ta) As, lel =

M

8x10= Mx3 4. ( There will be self-induction effect when soft iron core is
dt inserted in the coil. So, intensity of bulb increascs.
Mutua! inductance, M - 2.66 mH 5. (H The magnitude of induced emi is diretly proportional tto
7. (a) We have, M = the rate of change of magnetic lux. Alo, induced charge is
KL4
» dq =
-

For perfet coupling. K=1 M2=My which is independet of time.

R
8. (a) Mutual inductance betwcen coils is
6. la) lnduced currernt is given by
M= K{14,
-
M= lW2x10x8x10 [: K=1] R

=
4x 10-4 mH 10 x 10" x 10 x 10 x 10

20
9. () utual inductance between two coils,
7. (o L·R circuit current grows exponeitially.
In
M=-4 So, B, lights up earlicr and finally B shines brighter than B

di,
8. (c) Apply Lenz's law. then loop B is tepelled by loop A.
Also, and e, -y = ch
9. (d lnduced emf. e -N
d
BA con =N dB
M= lel =N =N 8) A cos 9
(ddi,
dt 500 x 1
x(10 x 10- cos 0

10. (b) Growth of curtent in the circuit is given by =5V

,
where, is peak value of current and
10. (b) Induced emf.e = -
dt
d
=
le--A-2-3v de d
i= 1(|-e-3*210) (1-e}A 12. (c) = 0. Therefore, S = (0.

11. () In case of growth of current in a L-R circuit,

the curtent in 13. (a) The magnet gets repelled. Thereforc, north pole is formed
the circuit grows exponentially with time O to the maximum on the top side and hence current will flow in anti-clockwise
value at, i, ElR. direction.
12. (c) Time interval, during which the current in an inductive 14. (o Curtent in the circuit, i -V/R=J0/2= 5A
circuit rises to 63% of its maximum value is defined as time
constant.
. Magnetic energy stored in the coil,

A) Taking it together
15. (b Time constant, t,
1. (d We have, t, - RI, = and e
=ic R 2
We have. i=,(|-e"t)
2. (b The self-inductace of a long solenoid of ctoss-sectional
area A and length 4 having n turns per unit length. filled the
inside of the solenoid with a material of relative permeability
le. g. soft iton, which has a high value of relative
Substituting, t = t
permeability) is given by Is and

( Induced emf, e = -

But, e =
dt
iR and i
16. (d Fot a capacitor, i
=-c
Le., i =
constant, i =

constant
or
dq =- d
dt dr R :: C

So, induced charge in a coil is independent of time taken to

Capacitance,
Y"-05F
change the flux.
 Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction 435

17. (a) Charge induced in coil is given (a) In the given circuit, three inductances are in parallel,
ash 28. their
dy = id= Area underi-t graph eruivalent inductance is given by
R
d, (Area under i-tgraph)R

;*4 x0] x 10 = 2 Wb .:.

29. (d In parallel, L,
L, + Lz
19. (d We have, aq = A
and A¢ =
A8:Acos
R L,•L)1.5-4,
and In seties, Ls = L, +
4= 8
0 - B) x n x (6 x 10
:. 32 x = 100
10 (160 + 40)
x co% 0° L4y 12
..
Intensity of magnetic ficld, B -0.366 T

Ly = (8-4x12
20. (d Induced emf.
-NBAlcos 0, - cos 0,) Ly = 4H
L.
30, () Time constant, t
R
800 x 4 x
10 x
0.0cos 90- cos 0) It isthe time interval during which the current after opening
=0.016 v an induKtive circuit fallk to 37% of its
naxinumn value.
21. (a)..Magnetic flux, BA 31. (c) Time constant,T R2.0x l0-,
:.Change in flux, dh BdA
a 0,05 (101- 100) x10
=5x10 Wb and R+ on0.5x10-3,
. Charge, d, = 5x106 -
= 2.5 x 1oc Solving these two equations, we get
R 2
22. ( For growth of current in L-R circuit, current L-60 mnt
and R- 302
is given by 32. Four resistances form a balanced
(c)
Wheatstone bridge.
Therefore, energy stored in the coil És zero.
33. (d The whole current will pass through the inductor. So,
current in 102 resistor is zero.
di 34.
At
dt L
RE L
4=
20
(6 Power, P- Fv iBv

E 20 x 4= 80 V
R
23. (d Peak value of emf generated in generator
is given by 35. () The magnetic flux linked with uniform surface of area
e, oNBA A
in unifom magnetic field is given by
= (2rv) NBA
314 x 100 x 5000
-2x x
0.2 x0.25
B-A =
Hete, A = L'k and B = R, (2 + 3j + 4k)T
157 kV
24. (d) emf, e = Bl'nV -B-A- I,(2i 3j +
)-'Å= 4R1? Wb
36. (a).:. Magnetic flux,
-0.4 x 10 x (0.5 x(3.14) x 6.28 x
10y = BAcos = 0.2 sin 300t) x5x10 cos 60
60
25. () electron is moving fron left to 5x10sint300r)
right, the flux linked
with the loup (which is into the page)
then dectease as the electron passecs
will first incTease and i. emf, e 3
x10x300 con(3001)
through it. So the
induced current in the loop will be first
anti-clockwise and - 15x10 cn 300
will change direction as the electron passes
by. 00
26. (d B, and L. should be mutuallv 1.5x 10
perpendicular. con3) -0.75 ]0 x
7.5x10v
27. (c) Induced emí, e Bv 37. () Since, the magnetic field is unilorm,
..
therefore there will
ho change in flux, no hence current will be induced.
Also, n xBA
O9. (Charge, AO 00
R
Magnetic flux density,
So, potential difference
between its two ends will inctease
with time. B. 4Q-R_ 2×10 x 80
40 x4 x 10-4
436) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

to above circuit,
40. () We have, L « Applving Kirchhoffs second Law
N
48. (c)

5V 5 mH

500)
Self-inductance, Lg mH
=08=
600)
75
dt
or V,
42. (a) Mutual inductance between two coils depend on their -5 x|+ 15-(5x 10(-10) =V,
degree of flux linkage ie., the fraction of flux linked with one V,-,15V
coil which is, when some current passes through the other
coil. In figure (A) two coils with their planes are parallel. In 49, (c Att =Q induced cmf eis maximum and is eual to applied
this situation, maximum flux passes. emf, brtcurrent iis zero.
After lape of time, current through the circuit increases but
43. (d During growth of current in the coil, induced emf decreases.
50. ( Two coik are said to be magnetically coupled, if full or
a

part of the flux produced by one link with the other. Let I,
Fot
and L, be the self inductances of the coils and Mbe theit
mutual inductances, then
k=
. t= 0693=0693 x
00 *10=0ls
2 When 100% flux produced by ene coil links with the other,
then mutual inductance betwecen the two is maximum and is
44. () Growth of current in the circuit is
given by

di d d = Q emf
d
d
51. (b In position I, change in flux =0.
e
In position and lII,
I
Bav.
di
In position I, flux is increasing, hence anti-clockwise emf.

Initially, t=Q f position IlI. flux is decreasing, hence clockwise emf.

di Induced cmf.let BtS
dt RE2.5As
L
L 2
32. (
d

(a) Just after pressing the key K, the inductor offers infinite Now, as the square loop and rectangular loop move out of
45.
resistance. So, net resistance will be 14N. magnetic field, BtS is constant, therefore le is constant. But
dt
IV/R- 5/7A
case
= in of circular and elliptical loos, changes. Therefote,
46. (a) Atf= 0, current will flow from the capacitor and at
current flows fromn the induçtor. So, current in both cascs will
le does not remain constant.
be I.5 A.
54. (d
47. (a, b, c) We have, V
2 M
I
di Electromagnetic damping
or or
V=[,-= 2
2-=
d dt
=

or td) = t dt)
35. (d Mutual inductance between two coils in the ame plane
On integrating. we get i 2 with their centres coinciding is given by
N,
i.e., graph is a parabola.
-t H2r'R-N,
| henty
At t=2s,i= 2A R

56. (b Power, P e
hence e where = NBS

At t=| where, R=resistance, r = tadius, I = length

Potential energy.
d: pE
 Chapter 06
:
Electromagnetic induction (437

37. (b As the magnet moves towards the coil, the magnetic flux 68. (d M2 =
when rate of change of current is doubled,
My

increases (non-linearly). Also, tthere is a change in polarity of induced emf al becones two times,
induced emf when tlhe magnet passes on to the other side of
the coil,
Thus, emf proxtuced aczoss the first coil is 6 mV.
69. (6) Here, loop ABCDA lies in NY-plane whose area vector
x
58. (b enf, e A, L'k. wtereas loop ADEFA lies in YZplane whose area
dt
vector A,
=Li
59. Abo, the magnetic flux linked with uniform surface of area
A in uniform magnetic field is
given by
B.A
=

At>> t(= 1. /R). i,.

60. (d Since, you are decreasing current in the circuit by
increasing reststarnce of the circuit.
Induced emf across inductor will support 20 V battery.
Hece, net emf of the circuit is greater than 20 V or current
in the circuit is more than 4 A.
A B
61. (c) After short-circuiting the battery.

R
-
A A, A, L'k + L)
-
and B
Ri -T
Now, ¢- B-A = R,+ k-u’k+)- 2R,1 wh
70. (b Two emfs are induced in the closed circuit each of value
Resistance, R
R,
R+r) Blv. Their two emfs are additive. So, Ent = 23lv.

.. Tne constant, t LLR + R, +

r)
71. (a. dem
---A-- A(slope of B4 graph)

At =2, slope is zeto and it changes its sigrn.

62. (d Mametic lines on cireular loop, due to current in wire AB 72. (d) Magnetic flux,
are tangential to its plane. - NAB = (25) (x}(1.8x10°2)°[0.2-0.05
=

i. Magnetic flux, ¢
=0 or induced emf,
=0
0.02510.2- 0.05t')
dt
Induced emf, e

63. (a) Induced ernf. lel= A_(2- 1) (0.01)

= 10V d
0.025 0.2- 2x0.05 )|
10 At t=35, e = 0.0025 V
Current, i =10'A A
t=0.0016
Heat produced, H= eit = (1OX10
K10) =10| . Power dissipation, P = ei= 4 x 10 W

4uW
64. () Induced emf between the axle and the rim is given by 73. la, d In bot the cases (al and (c) the indced current in the
ring will be in such a direction that it attracts nagnet.
(as co = 2r{] the
74. (b)e = Bd = (0.1XNO.1) = Ly
=6.28 x10-5 y
0.4 x 10 x (0.5 x (314) x
100
60
1+*o
=
Net resistance
65. (d As, potential difference, 2+3 5
ve Bt =
(2.0 x10360 (s0) - 1.0 V .. Currernt, i V100
A
220
66. (a) If
the loop remains inside the region of magnetic field, no
current will be induced. But, if it moves out of the plane, 75. (a) From the figure, V, -iR -L
rt..
then the induced current is given by i= and its direction di
will be clockwise las per Lenz's law). dt
67. (8 As. Potential difference, e Bl According to given coitions,
= 8=2R +
L
(0.2x 10x20X1) V 4= 2R- L ..ii)
= 0,4 mV Solving these two cquations, we get
R- 32 and L 2H
438 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

76. (4V - 83. (a Hete, area, A= 10 x5 = 50 cm' 30 x10m

at|ame
-0.2 Ts-! R=20
d
4. P=Vi= constant
enf, e Ad50x10 x0.02 =
10V
Power dissipated in the form of heat
0

10 w

-0.5x10 5x10W= 5nW

84. (d) Cos magnetic field passing fron the closed loop is
increasing. Therefore, fron Letnu's Law, induced current will
prodce dot O magetic field. Hence, induced current is
Thus, wrong opticn is (b). anti-clockwise.
In that case, k = 1 funity)
77. td Induced emf, E
-L"dt (a) Only half area of ring will be considered.
85.
or induced emi - slope of i-t graph. So. graph (c) is correct.
78. (d) Esergy. 2
U-L-4;)
dt
-*s010-25n x10 = 39
x10A
Now. after switching off the battery this energy is dissipated 4
in coil (resistance = 0.5 2) and resistance (10S2) in the ratio of Mrx(0.1
their tesistatices f =
i'Rt ot H «R. Thetefore, heat generated 86. la).. emf,ll 9, S-02x10*
At 2x2
in the coil. Iel= 1.57x10V
(S05x
0.s/0.5+
10|2.5
10/
mj = 0.12mJ
87. (b) T
vcos 6O

79. (b Power, P e
(,R, ie. 4f-and l
Teal beat pradaed. U
6-ek: R) 2

80. ( When cylindrical bar magnet is rotated about its axis, no

Due to v cos 60°, e0
change in lux linked with the circuit takes place, Due tovsin 60,e = By sin 60°
COnsequently to emf inxtuces and herce no curtent flows
through the amIeter A.
Axis
88. () &B

nagnet

B1. (d)When A stopn moving the current in B bcome zero,

ponsible only if the current in is constant. 1f the current in
A

A would be variable, then thete must be arn induced emf

(current} in B even, if A stogs moving. x
89. (
82, (a) When the cuttest in Blat t= 0 is cmuntet-clokwie and
the coil A is considered above to it. Tle counter-cinckwi
flow of the current in Bis euvalent to torth ole of magnet
and magnetie fied lnes are emanatiig uward to coil A.
When il A start rotatisg at = 0, then the urrent in A is
constant along clockwise direçtion by Lenz's ule.
 Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction (439

Induced emf Bt
Bi 95, (o Cireuit can be reduced a

Induced current. i
R
Magnelic orce on loop, F, - Bil
R
Since, loop is moving with constant speed,
F=F.
Input power, P = F.y = Fy =
2 vlB
Pierstus v graph will be like,
yr (paralola, open upward)
3RI2 3R

(a) Area of square Joop, S 10 cm

1viB
90. x10 cm 2
3
»S- 100 cm' - 100 x
10m²- 10m
,
Initial magnetic flux linked with loop,
= AScos = 0.)x
10xcos 45°
0.lx 10 xI 10!
96. (c) NMagnetic field at P. B=
4n
x10x4x10-
2x0.02n
Wb/m

2
Final magnetic flux linked with loop.
o, =0 Wb
The induced emf in the loop, e =

10
I0

The induced current in the loop.

0.7 0.7x 10y
Magnetic field. at Q.
10v =

B,. An x10 x3

12
10'A.0 mA

2R 2 x0.02%
3x105Wb/m'
91. (d At low frequency of to 2 Hz also, oscillations may be
I
B-BI:
observed.
92. tal lf bar magnet is falling vertically through -y4 x103x1o5x10 Wb/m
the hollow
region of long vertical copper tube, then
the tnagnetic flux 97. (d During decay of current,
linked with the copper tube tdue to
'Hn-unifom magnetic
field of magnet) changes and eddy cuttents ate 100
(O010
generaled
the body of the tube by lenz's law. The eddy currents in =A
opose
the falling of the Lagnet which, therefore 98. ( The self-iductance of a coil, L
cxpetietces a =h'S, whereo=
retarding force. The retarding force increases with
increasing permeability of air,
velocity of the magnet and finally equals
magnet. The magnet, then attans a constant
the weight of the n= nunter of tums per unit length,
final termia! S=tea of cross-Section and
velocity., i.e., magnet ultinately (alls with zer
tero acceleratiotn in
the tube, I- length of the solenoid
This desends on the geometry of the inductor
93. (d such as
cross-setional area, length ad number of turms and not on

L00
the matetial, even if it is made of a superconducting
II the
material.
supercondcter is bekow the critical temperature,
then
the current will continuously flow and the inductance may
have the property of inductarce any more. ot
LL,L 0
Ifcurrent through A increases, magnctic 99. (d Curent, Potential difference
coil B inTeAses. Hence, anti-clockwise
field () linked with
current induces in coil Resistance
B. As shown in fgure both the currents Potential difference
produce repulsive =2 x12 = 24V
effect. =B
94. () As the emf Here, l= AD sin 37° = 0.3x
inducedB-B, =
0.18m
. Velocity, v= 4_ 24 100 ms
2ríx-gl2) 2{x+ al 2)
(2x-a2x + B 4x0.18 3
a)
440 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

100. (d tnducdeml. Vy
f The induced emf will be maximum
Ed dt when, sin est t.e.. maximum

Theefore, e wokd be maxiniui, hence current is tmaximum

e

(as t, =e, R, when -

0° i.e.. ormal to lane of cnil is
perpendicular to the field or plane of coil is parallel to
Lagnetic field.
105. (o)

dB
=a) OB
[:=B-Aand
d 4 d
101. (a According to Fleming's right hand rule, Pis at highet
potential and Qis at lower petential. Therefore. A is
positivelv charged arid Bis iegatively charged.
Also, charge. Q = CV = CB)
= 10 x 1o
x4 x 2xl= 80 C

q
4,80 uC and -80 C
v
102. (o For rotating rod, induced emf, =B'e For scgment k, enf

For segnent ac, emf ac:e =0

For segment ab, emf ob:

0
sin
AeRd sin 0
For part (X. V=Vi-V -Bw'a *sin
103. ( In L-R circuit, for growth of curtent,
or (given)
ie l-e Ci-¿4-)
(where, t, time constant) Bit
B

e=|-! 4 4

e
=4 or =log, 4

as V
106. () At 0
inductor bchaves broken wire, then i
log, 4 2log, 2
log, 2

104. (d As the coil is rotated. angle 9langle which is nomal to the

coil makes with B at arny instarnt h canges, therefore
nagnetic flux linked with the coil chunges axd hence an
enf is iniuced in the coil. At this intant t, il e is the emf
induced in the coil, then
d(NSB
where, Nis number of turns in the coil.
cos eot)
At i= , inductor bchaves as a conducting wire,
LR + R,)
e--NSBcos ot)n -NSB|- sin odo RR,
e=NSRo) sin eot ...)
 Chapter 06: Electromagnetic induction 441

107. (o) i) Just before closing the switch,

S
No curTent
w

El 0
due to L
(a
R
w Therefore, induced current flows in the coil in the clockwise
(1) (2}
direction.
No curent
110. ( When ring enters and leaves, then the field polarity of
induced emf is opxsite. Al), during the stay of ring
conpletely in the field thete is induction. o
111. (M When switch &, csed for long tine curtent through
15
inductot, I= R oJ5x10 0.1A
3

When K; opened and K, is closed, then

t= l ms |x10s
So,
(ü) After a long time closing the switch,

0.03 10

R
R 0.15x 10 5
(1)

Re 2R
0.le
0.! 0.1 x
10'mA
i=10 130
i = 0.67 nA

112. (d Elacrons BC) = ,d, +R, (using Kirchsoffs law) ...)

de

(31
Req 2R

As.
12vT
-E/2R i, - 2EIR i, • EIR R, 20
R,
Therefore. i, >, >4 20

108. (d) AI B, flux is maximun, so from |e=at =

A|el 0
d
2
109, (a) When the north polc of a bar magnet moves towards the At t 0, 1, R, 6A
2
coil, the induced current in the coil flows ina direction such
coil presents its north pole to the bar magnet as 400 x
10 =
shown in Fig. (al. 0.2s
22
Therefore, the induced eurrent flows in the coil in the
[using Fq. i)
anti-elox kwise diretion. When the north pole of a ar magnet
moves away froen the coil, then the induced current in the Potential drop area a
02,
coil lows in a diretion such that the coil presents its south
pole to the bar magnet as shown in Fig. (b).
12-0212V
442 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS VoL 2

an angle O with
are connected in Let at any time, normal to loop makes
113. (0 When two soletxids of inductance L, magnetic fiekd
series at Large distarnce and curtent
i is
passd throngh them, ,-NES cos 9 NIS Cos ot

i
then the total flux linkage .Ljt ot = ot
If L he the equivalent inductance of the systen, then 9nNBS sin sin
d

60
one inside the
When solenojds are conncted in series with 66x|Ov
othet atd settses of the turns coinciding. then there will be a average of induced
case, the resultant Over a Iong period, ie. one time period,
mutual inductae between then.
L In this
in coils is the sum of the emfs e, and e, in emf is
induced emf thc
the resective ob, ie.,.
-
0
-tL, )
where, (+)sign is for positive coupling and (-) sign for - 2.0x10-' v²
hegative coupling.
di El
But, 116. tc) As,
di di
-L ot E (2zR)
=
k'. d
Le., E =4R:
[lor positive coupling) F =4E 4gRt [tangetiat
one inside the
When soenojids are connected in seties with
other with senses of the turn opposite, then there is a
negative coupling.
So. L =,+ -2, =0 When t, >t,. ring will start rotating.

114. () We can show the situation as At t= 2%

&R' = mgR
:.Coæfficient of friction, u :

117. (8
B.

Since, lxp is tnoving away from the wire, so the direction of

current in the loop will be as shown in the figure.
Net magnetic feld on the loo due to wire, Draw a concentric circle of radius r. The induced electric fie
(E) at any point on the cincle is equal to that at P.
B=
2rx{l+ x) For this circle, induced emf
So, the magnitude of the cmf in the loop,
e-f Ed-s dt d:
2rxl+ x) d na jdB - 2nrl
E [but d
115. ( |d
BO
Ex (2Rr) s ro2B

E= a' dB
2
de
 Chapter O6: Electromagnetic induction (443

118. () When switch Sis closed magnetic field lines passing curtent Le., its positive terminal is on keft hand side or
through Q increases in the direction from right to left.
So, aceording to lenz's law, induced cuent in Q. i.e.. la will di
Further i= constant > =
0 or V, = 0.
flow in such a direction, so that the magnetic ficid lines due dr
to L, paSSes from left to right through Q. This is pussible = di
when I flows in anti-clockwise direction as seen by E. 9. (aV Constant
Oppesite is the case when switch Sis ogened, i.e., Is, will be
clockwie as seetn by E. L d) = constant = Li= constant
119. (a) As the north pole approaches, a north pole is developed at i
the face, i.e., the current flows anti-clockwise. Finally, when
it completes the cscillation, no emf is present. Now, south =

10. (a) L l.=2/4 |/2

pole approaches thee other side, i.e.. RHS, the current lows i /d
clockwise to feel Mnth pole. On putting values, we gel
This means the current is anti-clock wise at the LHS as
before. The break occurs when the pendulum is at the
¢- Li » x4=2Wb
extreme and momentarily stationary
11. (A If a conducting rod of letgth ( moving with a uniform
velocity v perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field B. then
B) Medical entrance special format indced emf Ibe e Bit

questions 12. (elln non-uniform magnetic field, magnetic flux will be

otained by integration, but it will hot varv with tine.
Assertion and reason 13. (c) = Li i
1. (d) EJectric flux ES and magnetic flux = BS. Both have
15. (d Since, both the loops ase identical (same area and number
different units. of turns) and moving with a same spced in same magnetic
a The tolal numbet
ol lines of force passing
magieis emal to magnetic
field. Therefore, sane emf is iduced in both the cojls. But
through an arca placcd in magnetic fi the induced cuttent will be more in the copper loxp as its
n

flux linked with the area. fesistance wire be lesser compared to that of the s
Mutual indctace is the pheKomenon according to which on aluminium loop.
opposing cmf produces. Flux in a coil as a result of change in
the current
or magnctic flux linked with neighbouring coil. 16. (H = BA cos ot
But when two coils are coupled, in cmí produced inductively At !0 maximum
addition to induced due to mutual inductance, induced ernf is
also produced in each of the two coils due to self-inductance. |el= -B nA sin eot
3. (d Accorting lo Lenz's law, the direction of induced emf or
le wben ot 90°, i.e., loop is rotated 90°, or it is parallel
curtent in circuit in such as to oppose the cause that
a
produces it. to magnetic ficld. At this instant 0.

17. (a) This is in accodance with Lenz's Law. When magnet is above
4. inductance of two coils depcnds on the distance
(c) (i) Mutual
the loxp. then noth pole is formed ant hence will repel and
betwecn the coils and their orientation. when it is below the lup, then it will attact the magnet.
(i) Mutual inductance depend on the magnetic permeability
of medum between the cotls or natute of materal on which Match the columns
two coils are wound.
1. A. Tesla - (MTA)
5. (d Self-inductarxe does not depend uon current flowing or
change in current flowing but it depends upon of turns N.
B. Weber - [ML'T'A'
C. Weherlm²|MAr
Area of cross-section (A) and perneability of medium ul
D. Henry |ML.'ATI
We have, e =
-L Vu, at
dt 2. t=0 =E-10V
t=0 = E 10
= V

af
6. (b) According to Lenz's law, induction effects always oppose
V

the caSe.
7. (al lf a circuit containing a pure inductor L and resistor R in E 10
series with a battery and a key is closed, then the circuit l==2A
R+r 5
current through the circuit rises exponentially and reacthes .
upto a certain maximun valuc. =
8V
=2x4
8. (b) If moving from left to right, current is increasing. then
= 1. di
battery induced emf will prooduce right to left
= 10-(2xD= 8V
444 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

is

loop is non zero. The magnetic flux linked with the coil
3. In all of the cases, the induced current in the 10
Li 30 10 x&x
x
can te determined by Lenr's
The diretion of intuced current
Law. When loop is ved tuowards right, then induced current -400 10=
x 4 x 10 Wb
in the loop is cloc kwise. WIhen lop is oved towards left,
op is anti-lokwise.
then induced curent in the 4. la) The flux is given by
4, When current i, is decreased, then flux thronugh decreases. BA
A
cos
According to Lenis Law, attraction un tween A and B. BI|Al
0

will repel [| B||A|cos

Similarlv, when currentÀ is inreaed, then loos dd
cach other. As distace bet ween the loop decreases. M Alo, indiuced emf, g=
decreasces. lHence, loops will repel each other and curtent
4
d (cos )
will increasc, when lonp is
oved toward loop
I
2.
=- |B||A -
|B||A sin
When lKp 2 is tmoved awav, loops will attract and i, will
o cos
iKTease. EBA (0- n/ 2)
5. A. The magnettc flux through the rectangular loop ahcd
x
3. (b Given,
B
40 mT 40 10T
incteases, due to the motion of the lowp into the regon of =
Rate of shrinking of area ).5m's!
magnetic field. The induced current must flow along the
rath kah, o that it oproses the increasng flux ms
B. Due to the cxutward mosos, maygnettc flux through the
A0.5
dt
tangulat lop decteaes due to whah the
at As, BA cos 0 BA ( cos 0 = cos 0°:
iduced curtent fkows akong kkcd. so as to the erse On differentiating with w.r.t. to t,
change n flux.
C As the magnetic flux decreaes due to moton of the
.44
irtegular shared lop ahd out of the regon of magnetic dt
= x
field, the induced current flows along cdahe, s as to orrne = induced emf = 40 x100.5 20 10y
change in flux.
20 mV
6. (a) Changing magnetic fields can set up current loop in
C) Medical entrance's gallery nearby metal bodies and the current is called as eddy curren
1. (o Given, number of turns of solenoid, N 1000 7. ( Consider a rod of 10 cm length is moving perperdicular t
uniform magnetic field as shown below.
Current,I= A

Magietic flux, o, 4x10 Wb

B.5.10 Wn
: Sclf-inductance of solenoid is given by
10 cn
...i)

Substituting the given values in Eq. (i), we get

The emf intuced in the rod, e =
4x 10 x 1000 - 1H Dilferentiating wìth tespet to timet, we get
Rate of increase of induced emf
2. (o Induced emf in the region is given by
Jel
dv g=aBl
d: dt
r
where, BA
=5x5x 10 x10 x102
-
-r 230 x 10-2.5x 10- Vs!

Rate of change of magnetic flux ansociated with loop 1. 8. (6 Induced emf in both the loops will be same as
dB -B osin of

dr dt
Similarly, e, = emf associated with loop 2 Since, B and o are same for both the caes, indced emnf wil

dt
t:: , =
0)
be same.
However, induced curent is given by
3. (a) Given, n = 500

L= 50 mH= 50 x 10| So, it will depend upan the value of resistatee, lower the
and in BmA=8x 10A resistance higher will be the curtent. Tletefore, induced
curtent is different in both the loos.
 Electromagnetic induction 445
Chapter 06:

Now, from Eq. (i), we get

9. Given, length of conductor,
( 0.lm m)
=(7 ms'K0.9 Wbm'x0.4
Mangetic field, B 0.1T E = V
Velocitv of conductor,
v 15
ms

70.90.4)
V
2.52
inductor of inductance l.
The angle between and Bis 90. 14. (a) Consider the
v

then emf (induced) inductor is i.

When v and B are mutually perpendicular, The current llowing through the
=
is given bv Now, we can write Li
15 is magnctic flux linked with the inductor
x
-

0.15V whete,
EB 15 x 0.l 0l
100
we can write
10, (c) Applying KVI. in the circuit,
L 40 mH
Given.
dt change in time
= = , -,=4ms = Ar

A - Ai
I= 10
di=h-4=1|-
(10)
(40 mH)
So, 4 ms
Ir= 0 dt A At
6-L-
dt
-10 x 10 = 100 ....)

Al initial stage, I=0 electrornagnetic inductiorn,

Accordng to Faraday's law of
di
6=L Emf induced.
d
dl63 As
100 V [fron Eq. )
dt L 2

circle is constant because

11. (d As tnagnetic field thuough is constant. MLagnetic lux e di
curent through straight wite 15. (: Induced emf, =-L,
through circle is not changing with time. dt
=
0.2 s
Given, L= 10 H. Ai
9- 4-5A,
dt emf.
e= 10
x- 5
0.2
250V

|E]=
dt RR 16. (d As, e
=
Bl
12. (d We know that, e NBA (o sin ot Here, B=10 Wb/m
where, N nunber of loops
= 1
p= n!s 2

A
nu m' I5cm 0.05mn
B.HoNJA-m
emí, e=(|0(2) (0.05)
=
1x10v
A changes, the nagnctic lux
linked
(za') o sin ot
17. (d As the current in coil downwards,
flux in. Bwill be
with coil B changes. Direction of
se
in coil B is in anti-clockwise direction
nau! ( Sin o!
hence current induces
according to Len's Law.
in coil Bis opposite to that
Consider the diagram, where conductor AB
a of length The dirction of induced curtent as
13. (c)
B current in coil A shown in figure
an inward magnetic field of the direction of
moving perpendicular to
X

Coil A

X
Due to currents in opposite
O
directions in the near by sides of
XX the coil. the coil B is repclled. m

18. () Given, = 100turns, A

n
0.! x0,05
Value of induced enl. s
B=0.1 T, B, = 0.05 T. dt = 0.05
IE-itvx B)|

90
We know that,
lB sin - A

dlcos
dn BA cos
En v! 0,9Wbm
dt
Given, v=7 ms=0.4 mand B=
446 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Here, 00° 23. (a) Given, B 0)5T,/- 50 x 10 cm and v = 2 ms

x =
|100x 0.1 x0.05 (0.1- 0.03) cmf, e
B

nAds
=
d 0.05
x
2x 30 x10 0.15
e0.15
e 0.5 V Cutrent, i 0.15 - 5x 10
None of the option s correct.
= Bil
R
=
3
x x
19, (c) Eltromagneticinduction is not used in room heater because it Force, F
0.15 x5 10 30 10?
works on the priciple of beating effect of electric current. x
375 10N
20. (d Givetn, M= 0.05 H and! = L, sin ot e
24. (a) Induced emf, =.2V
4
=8A
, =6A
d
At 2 x
10-s
-1,(o) x [= |x100: A/s Coefficient of self-induction,
-2
So, maximumeml. 0.05 x 100x = 5r V A/Ar (6- 8)/2 x 10

21. (al The amount of indtced charge is given by -2x2x 10

-2

|where, =10 Wh , =
60Wb, R=1000)
25. (c) Rate of doing work
-2x10H
-P
:. Charge. 50
0.5 C
00 But. P=Fv
22. (d For inductor as we know induced voltage -
Also, F-Bit
For t=0 , fo t= T/2
d!,d(20,)
lconstant induced curent, i
B

R
For t=T12tot7 :. Powet, P =E
=

dt-constant (0.5
R
*(21'
K

Therefore, answer will represent by graph (d). x(Dw

6
CHAPTER

7 Alternating current
We have already studied in our previous chapters about clectric
and magnetic ficlds
and how energy can be stored in capacitors and inductors. In this chapter, we will
71l study how energy stored in one location can be transferred to another location, so
that
it can be put to use. Most of the electric power generated
and used in the world is in
the form of alternating current. Here, we will study about some alternating current
system that transfers energy efficiently and we will
that make use of that energy.
alo discuss some of the devices

1) Types of current
There are two types of current which flows any of the electrical appliances. These
are as follow

Direct current (DO)

Currents whose direction does not change
with time through a load, are known as
direct current ([C). The graph given below shows
Inside that the direction of direct current
() or volage (W does not change with time (0.
1) Type of current
Mean or average
cAi or
av
value of an
altern
cmating current
Root mean square value of an
alternating current
Form factor
Peak factor
Fig. 7.1 voltage or current vs time
2
Representation of current and emf graph for a DC
as rotating vectors -
Phasors Alternating current (AO)
Ditferent types of alternating
cuITent circuits Currents whose direction changes periodically
Inductot as Jow pass filter alternating currents and the voltage is through a load are known as
AC voltage applied to a known as alternating voltage (AC voltage)
series
L-CR icruit lor V
Parallel circuit (Rejector circuit)
3
Power in an AC circuit
Wattless current
L-C ocillat ors
4) Choke coil -l
Transformet
ot VVo sin
Flectric generator or dynamo ot or
VVo cos et
Fig. 7.2 V'oltage or current vs
time graph of an AC
 448 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Here, the magnitude of current voltage increases from (iv) Phase Phase is a physical quantity representing
zero to a maximum value, then decreases to zero and both the instantaneous value and direction of
reverses in direction, increases to a maximun in this alternating quantity at any instant. It is a
direction and then decrease to zero. The complete set of dimensionless quantity and its unit is radian. If
= lo sin
variations is known as a cycle. Thus, during one-half of kor), then the argument of sin (ot +)
the cyele the curtent or voltage flows in one direction, called its phase.
whereas in the next half-cycle, it llows in the opposite (v) Phase difference The difference between the
direction. phases of current and voltage is called phase
difference. If alternating voltage and current is giv
The instarntaneous value of AC is given by by the relation,
V=Vo sin ot +,) and I= l, sinlot+)
where, I Curtent at arny instatnt, Then, phase difference, ¢ = - |
I, = maximum or peak valuc of AC
(relative to voltag
0=angular frequeney
and =1-2 (relative to currer
Alternating emf or voltage
The instantaneous value of alternating emf or voltage is Some important points related to
given by alternating current
V=V, sinot
where, V= voltage at any time, t
(i)
and is represented hy the svmbol ,
An AC is produced by AC generator or AC dynamo
V maximun or peak value of alternating voltage (ii) The AC is converted into DC with the help of
o =angular frequency rectifier while DC is converted into AC with the
Note Alternatrig current, alternatng voltage or emt, fiux ete all are snusosda! help of invertor.
waves
(ii) It cannot produce electroplating or electrolysis.
(iv) It is measured with the help of 'hot wire ammeter
Some definitions related to alternating
(v) An AC can be transmitted over long distances
Current or voltage without nuch power loss.
(i) Time period The time taken to complete one cycle (vi) In an AC (sinusoidal) current or voltage can have
of variations is called time period or periodic time. It following four values
is given by the formula, (a) Instantaneous value (b) Peak value d, or V

(c) rms value

, or Vem) (d) Awerage value
2:1
T=
()

where, 2n = angular displacement

in a complete cycle
Mean or average value of an
O= angular frequency alternating current
(ii) Frequency The humber of eycles completed per Average or mean value of AC is defined as that value of
second y an alternating current is called its direct current which sends the same amount of charge ir
frequency and is a circuit in
the same time as is sent by the given
denoted by f. alternating current in its half-cycle (ie., T/2). It is denot
by I,, or In.
Let an alternating current be represented by I I, sin o

The frequency of AC in India is 50 Hz Le., where Jo is the peak value. Clearlv, the mean value of
f= 50 Hz = 50 cps the current over a complete cycle is zero. It has no
significance. Hence, the mean value of alternating curres
o= 2af 314 rads -
is defined as its average over half a cycle. For positive
(ii) Peak value or amplitude The maxitnunn value of h
cycle,
alternating current or alternating voltage is defined
as peak value or amnplitude. It is denoted
by lo or Vo.
 Chapter 07: Alternating current 449

PuttingI= I, sin ot and

T= (2r/o), we get Exomple 72 Find the average value in the following cases

sin ot dt : elo-ços or]ö

{i) i= 4
+3 cos ot

(ii) V 5 sin ot +3 cos o

-- |cos n- cos 0] = --1-1

(iii) i sin ot + 2 sin 2eot +3 sin 3ot
fiv) V= cos cos
ot+3
2et+3cos3ot +2
Sol. li) Average value of curent =
l, =4 unit
Thus, ,mean 2 =
0.637l0 = 63.7% (ii) Average value of the voltage V, 0
=lo of lo
(i) Average value of current ,, 0
(iv) Average value of voltage V,, =2 unit
...Mean current over positive hall cycle)
Similarly, the mean value of alternating emf is 2E, /z for
positive half cycle. For negative hall cycle the mean value
Root mean square value of an
ol alternating current is -2l, /n and the average value of alternating current
emf for negative half cycle is -2E, /n. Su, the average It is defined as that value of a direct current which
value of emf of current for complete cycle is zero.
produces the same amount of heating effect in a given
In the same way. mean value of alternating emf Emesn) resistor as is produced by the given alternating current
when passed for the same time during a complete cycle. It
= 63.7% is denoted by ,m, or
E..=0 =0.637E, of E
le*
It is also called virtual value or effective value of AC.
Instantaneous value of alternating current
Average values of some important I=
l, sin ot
expressions of current and voltage If dH is small atnount of heat produced in time dt in
(i) Whenl =I, sixot + I,cos ot resistor R, hen dH = 1'R dt in complete cycle, the total
and V = V, sinor + V, cos«at heat produced is

where I,, ,,
V, and V, are constants,
,,
then 0 and V, =0
(ii) Similarly when I = lo + l, sivot +1, cosot H= , sin or)R? d

and V = Vo +Vsinot +V, cos ot

then, I,, = lo and
,, =Vo
On solving we get
I&RT
(iii) When = Io + I, sinot +l, cos 29t ...(i)
H=
2
and V = Vo +V, sinot +V, cos 291
,, I, and V,, =Vo If
.
value of alternating current and His the heat
is rms
then
produced by rms current, then
(iv) When I = I, sinot +, sin 2et +l, sin3ot +l, RT ..(ii
and V = V, sinat + V, sin 2ot +V sin3ot +Vo
H-
then
,, 0+lo l, and =V, V Frotn Eg. (i) and (ii)

AC. circuit
Exomple 7.1 If the peak value of a current in 50H:
is
7.07 A. 1What is the mean of ae
current oer
s after it uas zero?
half a cycle
and the txalue of curent l/300 Im =0.7071,
Sol. Asl_ 0, where. I, peak value of current 7.07A
= 70.7% of lo
= or m
I, =0.637× 7.07 4.5A
emf
In the same way, rms value of alternating
Also, at t= 300 = 0.707
E, = 70.7% of Ep
=
I=l, sin ot l, sin 2nft (::o=2:) V2
always measure the virtual
= 707sin AC amneter and AC voltrneter Also, the powver supply
|= Z07 sin 2*x 30 30o 3 value of AC or alternating voltage. as rms
our homes 220 V AC is the
which we are getting in
is, V, V2Vm = 311 V
=1.07x - 6.12A voltage and its voltage amplitude
450 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

as (b) Let be the peak value of the current.

lo
This is the reason why AC is more dangerous than DC
311 V will caase more haru to the human bkody than Here, ,,
= tms value of current
10A
220 V DC. The different values lp.,, and are shown
Then,
in figure,
L, =
2 ,m =1.414x 10 = 14.14A
Exomple 74 IfV = 220/2 sin(3141 -). calculate (a) peuk an
L,n0.707 1oot rms ahue of the iltage (b) aerage ioltage for half time perio
0.637
and (c) freqency of AC.
Sol Given. V = 220/2 sin314r - ) ...(

Comparing with general equation, we get

ta) Peak voltage, V, = 22042 V
Fig. 7.3 rms and average value on the same graph
rms voltage, V,220\2
rms values for some important V,5 =
220V

expressions of current and voltage (6) Average voltage V =

Zv, -2×2045 =41042
G)When I = I,sinet +l, cosot
where I, and I, are constant currents, then
(c) As, c)
34 rads!
2nf =314 f=30 Hz

Exomple 7.5 If the current in an AC circuit is represented by

the equation, I = 5 sin G00r
- 4)

Similarly when V = V,sinot +V, cosot

are constant Here, t is in second and I is in ampere. Calculate,
where V, and V, voltages, then
(D peak and rms vae of current.

(0 frequency of AC.
2 (i) average tent.
Sol. (i) Comparing the given cquation with general equation,
(ii) When l = l, + I, sinot + l, cosot we have
and V = V, +sinot +V, cos2ot I=, sin(ot t )
.::
The peak value, I, =5A
2 and
5
m3.535 A
(ii) When V=Vsinot +V, sin 2ot +V, sin3ot +V (i) Angular frequency.
and I= I, sinor +, sin2ot +I, sin3ot +Io
them,
=++
V. 2
v=
2r
,
47.75 Hz

Gi) Average curent,

J4--3.8A
Example 7.6 The ltage supplied to a circuit is given by
Example 73 V =Vo, where tis time in second. Fnd the rms value of
la) The peak oltag of an AC supply is 3O0V. oltage for the perioad, t a 0 to t = ls.
What is the rms tvltage?
Sol. The mean square voltage,
(b) The ms ulw of current in an ACircuit is 10 A. What is the
vak curent?
=
Sol. (a) Here, peak value of AC supply, V, 300V
.:. Using the relation Vm

We get, 300 212.1 V

Vm==
 451
Chapter 07: Alternating current

Exomple 7.7 Calculate rms value of curent and voltages for the 2lo for half-cycle
follourinq cases (ii) 7,, =
(i) i=4+3sinot 1,, =0 for one conplete cycle
fii) V = 5 + 2 cos or
(iii) i
=2+ 3sin of + 2 cos 2ot =1.1|
(iu) V = os et + 2 cos 2ot + 3 cos 3ot =
(iv) R, 2 =1.41
Sol. (i rms value of curent
where, R, = form factor; R, = peak factor
4.52 unit
Square or rectangular waveform
(ii) rms value of voltage
(i) I, l
2
=519 unit for one complete cycle
2 2
(iii) tms value of cutent

(iv) rms value of voltage

=3.24 unit
Fr
-2.61 unit Fig. 7.5 Square or rectangular waveform
2 V22
(ii)
,, =, for half-cycle
Form factor I,, =0
for one complete cycle
Forn factor is defined as the ratio of Is value of AC to
=
its average value during half-cycle i.e., (i) R, 1

Form factor, (R,)= Ims value V,N2 - =

1.11
average value 2V,/r 2/2 (iv) R,

Peak factor Half-wave rectified

The ratio of peak value and rms value is called peak
2
factor. It is given by Rp, R, =
o2=1.41 for one complete cycle

(ii) ,, = lo
Calculation of mean and rms value for
for one complete cycle
some specific cases of alternating current
d0 for half-cycle
Sinusoidal waveform
(ii) R, =
l,/n
== 1.57
2

(iv) R, =o
lo12
=2

2n
Fie. 74 Simusotdal wveform Fig. 7.6 Half-wave rectified waveform

452 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Full wave rectified

(i) ,m for one complete cycle

2I,
-3T
452 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Fullwave rectified
i) for one complete cycle

21,
(ii) 7,

(ii) R, 2/2 Fig. 7.8

2l, /n
(iv) R, = oloN2
=
Area of i-t graph for t=Otot =T_lo
T 2

Fie. 7.7 Full wane rectificd waeform (ii) R

I,/2
For a current varying wave as shown in the graph 2
=1.15

(iv) R,
(i),r

Check point 7.1

to a resistor The instantaneous
wave 6. 220 V. 50 Hz, AC is applied
1. The frequency of a sinusordal vatue of voltage is
(b) 220sn100x
cos [2000! 0 80 ]would be (a) 2202 sin100
E
Hz
040 (b) 2000 Hz 22042 sin50
(c) 220sin50 (d)
(a) 1000
H2 (d) 1000' Hz current in an AC crcuit is
(c) 20 7. The nstantaneous
of AC mains in India is value of current is
2. Frequency
(d) 120 cps
l= 2 sin (500+ n/4). The fms
(a) 30 cps (b) 50 cps (c) 60 cps (o) 50 A
(d) 1A
(c) 90 A
(a) 2A its
than 220 V DC because an alternating current is 5 A and
3. A 220 V AC is more dangerous 8. The peak value of
value and tirne taken to
ns
(a) the AC attracts trequency is 60 Hz Find its zero
Current startng from
() the DC repols reach the peak value of ms
resistance to AC (a) 3 536 A, 4 167 ms
(b) 3 536 A. 15
(c) the body offers less ms
220V (d) 2536 A 4 167
for AC is much Laroer than ms
() peak votace (C) 607A 10
as E 141sn (628!)
current is transmitted to take places 9. If an aternatng voltage
is represented are
4. Alternating voltage and the frequency
(a) a! high voltace and
low Current then the rms value of the
() at hcgh voitage
ancd hgh current respectvely
(b) 100V, 50 H2
(c) at kOw votage and lw Current (a) 141V, 628 H (d) 141 V. 100 H2
(d) at low voltage and high curent (c) 100V 100 H:
a cirCut is given by
E sin 2t
current in
given by £ 10. An alternatng + the
5. An AC voltage is 0.05x) The tms value and
A

l=20 sn (100 are

voltage calculated over any time frequency of current
respectvely
Then the mean value of (b) 10A and 50 Hz
(a) 10A ard 100 H: A and 100 Hz
interval of T2 second zero d 10/2
zero (b) is never (c) 10/2 A and 50 Hz
(a) is always (d) may be zerO
(c) is always (2Ea)
 Suppose E is the ptential drop across resistance (R), then
2) Representation of current E IR ...iü)

and emf as rotating

vectors-Phasors
To simplify the study of AC circuit, alternating quantities
(i.e., I or W are represented as rotating vectors, with the Fig. 7.10 AC voltage applted to a resistor
angle between the vectors equal to the phase difference Instantancous emf = Instantancous value of potential drop
between the current and emf or voltage. These rotating
vectors representing current and alternating voltage ate From Egs. {i) and (ül, we have
called phasors. =
E= E, sinot or Eo sinot
IR I=
• Tle length of the vector tepresents the maximum or peak R
value i.e.. l, and Vo:
• Te projection of the vector on fixed axis gives the I= lo sinot ...iü)
istantancous value of altenating curTent and altenatig emf.
If = lo sinot and V =V, sin orl projection is taken on Coniparing l, = E, /R with ohm's law. we find that
Y-axis. If U = lo cos ot and V =V, cos orl projection i resistors work equally well for both AC and DC voltages.
taken on Xaxis. From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get that there is zero phase
• A phasor is a geometric entity and not a real pysical difference between instantaneous alternating eunent and
quantity that helps us to describe and analyse physical instantaneotus alternating emf (i.e. they are in same phase)
quantities that vary sinusoid.ally with time.
• A diagram representing alternating current and alternating
emf (of same frequerncy) as totating vectors (phasors) with
the phase angle between them is called phasor diagram.

lo sin ot
Fig. 7.11 Graph of E and I of a resistive circuit

Phasor Dlagram

locos ot
Fig. 7.9 Phasor diagram

Different types of alternating

current circuits Fig. 7.12 Phasor diagram for a purety resistive circuit
In this section, we will derive voltage current relations for Here, peak values Eo and lo are represented by vectors
individual as well as combined circuit clements carrying a totating with angular velocity o with respect to horizontal
sinusoidal current. We will consider resistors, inductors relerence. Their projcctions on vertical axis give their
and capacitors. instantaneous value.
Note Since, there rs no phase difterence between E and (, so R behaves sarme
1. Pure resistor in an AC circuit in AC and DC (Direct (urrent) Steady s also catled DC
(Resistive circuit or R-circuit)
Variation of resistance with frequency of source
Supposea resistor of resistance R is connected to an AC
source of emf with instantaneous value E) is given by Figure given below shows the graph of Ras a function of
en
angular frequency The resistance R, does not depend
EE, sinot ...i) upon angular frequency of the source.
454) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS VoL. 2

R{ Eo sinkeot + n/2) ..ii)

VoC
I will be maximun when sinkot + r/2) =1, so that I = lo

where peak value of current, lo Eo

1/oC
Fig. 7.13 R remains constant with to orf Ie lo sinkot + n/2) ...(üi)

Example 7.8 A 20ON resistor is connected to a 220 V, 50 H: From Eqs. (i) and (iii), it is clear that in a perfect capacitor,
AC supply. Calculate ms value of current in the circuit. Also the current leads the voltage by a phase angle of /2 (90°)
or the voltage lags behind the current by a phase angle of
find phase difference between oltage and the current.
Sol. Given Vm= 220 V. f= 50 Hz. R = 2002 w2 (90°).
=
Current in the purely resistive AC circuit
R
..
rms value of current
220 1.1 =
A
200
In purely resistive AC circuit, current and voltage are in phase.
Therefore phase difference is zero. Fig. 7.15 Graph of E and I of a capacitive circuit

2. Pure capacitor in an AC circuit Phasor Diagram

(Capacitive circuit or -circuit) The phase representing peak emf E, makes an angle ot in
anti-clockwise direction with respect to horizontal axis. A:
Let us consider a capacitor with capacitance C be connected current leads the voltage by 90°, the phasor representing
to an AC source with emf having instantaneous value.
I, is turrned 90° anti-clockwise with the phasor
E Eo
sinot ...) representing E,. The projections of these phasors on the
vertical axis give instantaneous values of E andI.
4
E

Esin eot
E E sin co!
Fig. 7.14 An AC source connected to a capacitor
Due to this emf, charge will be produced and it will charge
the plates of capacitor with positive and negative charge. Fig. 7.16 Phasor diagram for purely capacitive circuit
If potential difference across the plates of capacitor is V,
then Capacitive Reactance (Xç)
or Instantaneous value of alternating current through a
V=I q=CV capacitor is given by
The instantaneous value of current in the circuit, -sin leo +n/2) =
I, sin or *
d
dt dt
d (CE)
[V= E]
VoC
Gomparing with Ohm's law we get. I,
= E, sinor! 1/ oC
-(CE, sinct) [:E
d 1
= CEn cos ot x o
(o C
coSot whete, Xc is called capacitive reactance.
VoC
The opposing nature of capacitor to the flow of alternating
(: cosot = sinlz/2 + ot)]) current is called capacitive reactance.
 Chapter 07: Alternating current (455

If f is the frequency of the alternating current, then Sol. As

1

2rf C where, Xc
oC 2zfC
The dimension of capacitive reactance is same as that of Here, C= 60u F= 60x 10F, V,n =110V. f = 6O Hz
resistance and its SI unit is ohm (2). The capacitive
reactance limits the amplitude of the current in a purely So.
60 x
10%
2x Kx 60x
capacitive circuit in the same way as the resistance limits
x
the current in a purely resistive circuit. It is inversely I =110x 2x 3.14 3600x 10
proportional to the capacitance and frequency of the - 2.49 A
current. Thus, if frequency of AC increases, then its
capacitive reactance decreases. Exomple 7.10 An alternating vnltageV = 200v2 sin 100)V is
connected to a l HF capacitor through an AC ammeter. What
When capacitor is connected to DC source, will be the reading of the ammeter?
Sol. Consider the purely capacitive circuit as shown below.
oC
C-luF
: For DC, w = 2rf= 0, as
f = 0]
Thus, capacitor blocks DC and acts as open circuit while
passing AC of high frequency.

Given, V - 200V2 sin Q 00t) ...(i)

Comparing it with general equation, we get
V=Vo sin lot) ..()
V, =2002v, o=100 rad s-!
Fig. 7.17 Capacitor connected to a DC source

Varlation of capacitive reactance with frequency

. Reactance X =
=10'2
oC 100x 10
The graph of Xe as function of angular frequency o can be
drawn as Peak value of current, Io =
== 10
2/2 x 10A
rims value of current
242× 102 =
20x 10A = 20mA
Reading of the ammeter will be sarne as I
=20 mA.
Fig. 7.18 Capacitive reactance X decreases with frequency
3. Pure inductor in an AC circuit
Capacitor as high pass filter (Inductive circuit or L-circuit)
The capacitive reactance of a capacitor is inversely Suppose an inductor with self-inductance L) is connected to
proportional both to the capacitance C and to angular AC source with instantaneous emf (E) is given by
frequency o. The greater the capacitance and the higher the E = E, sinot ...(1)
frequency. the smaller is the capacitive reactance Xç.
Capacitors tend to pass high frequency current and to block
low frequency current, just the opposite of inductors. The
device that passes signals of high frequency is called a high
pass ilter.
Example 7.9 A 60 uF capacitor is connected to a l10 V, E Eo in o

Fig. 7.19 An AC source connected to an inductor

60 Hz AC supply determine the ms value of the current
in the circuit.
456 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

When key is closed. then current begins to grow hecause Phasor Diagram
magnetic flux linked with it changes and an emf is The phasor representing peak emf E, makes an angle tor
indueed which oppSes the applied emf. in anti-clockwise direction fronm horizontal axis. As
According to Lenz's law. current lags behind the voltage by 90°, so the phasor
representing I, is turned 90° clockwise with the direction
e-L of Eo
de

where, e is induced emf d the rate of change of

andis
current.
To maintain the flow of current in the circuit, applied
voltage must be equal and opposite to the induced emf.
E= -e
E _Ldl or dl =
dt Fig. 7.21 Phasor diagramfor purely inductive circuit

Integrating the above equation on both sides Inductive Reactance (X, )

The oppsing nature of inductor to the flow of current is
called inductive reactance.

(E =
E, sino) As, I=
E

sinkot - n/2) or lo = E, loL

L oL
cosot
IEo- L
Eo cosot
oL
Comparing with Ohm's law, lo =2.
R
The quantity oL is
analogous to the resistance and is denoted by X.
So,
X, is called inductive reactance.

-sintr/2 - o)
Eo If f is the frequency of AC source, then
X, olL= 2rfl. 2R
sinlot - /2)
Eo
I= ...(ii)
oL
= = Io The dimension of inductive reactance is the same as that
sinlot /2) maximum =1, then of resistance and its SI unit is ohm 2). The inductive
where, peak value of current, I, = reactance linits the current in a purely inductive circuit in
(oL the same way as the resistance linnits the current in a
- /2) purely resistive circuit.
I= l, sinkot ...iii)
The inductive reactance is directly proportional to the
From Eqs. (i) and (ii, it is clear that in a pure inductor, inductance and to the frequency of the AC current.
the current lags behind the voltage hya phase angle of r/2 Thus if the frequency of AC inereases, its inductive
(90) or the voltage leads the current by a phasc angle of reactance also increases.
90 (z/ 2). If inductor is connected to DC source, then for C

f= 0
(:r-)
L

DC rce
Fig. 7.20 Graph ofE and I with time Fie. 7.22 Iructor connected to a DC source
 Chapter 07
:
Alternating current (457

Here, f is frequency. AC voltage applied to a series

X, =0 L-C-R circuit
Therefore, inductor passes DC and blocks AC of very high
Irequency. Suppose that an inductor Ll, capacitor (C) and resistor R)
are connected in series to an AC source. / is the current
Variation of inductive reactance with frequency passed through this circuit. As R, L, Care in series,
The graph of X, as function of angular frequency o can be therefore at any instant through the threc elements, AC
drawn as shown below clearly X, linearly increases withax has the same amplitude and phase. Let it be represented by
I= l, sinot
However, voltage across each element bears a different
phase relationship with the current.
V.

Fig. 7.23 X, versus co

Inductor as low pass filter

If an oscillating voltage of a given amplitude Vo is applied
AC
-
sutce, E- En Ân ot
Fig. 7.24 An AC source connected to series L-C-R circuit

smaller anplitude ,
across an inductor, the resulting current will have a
for larger value of o. Since, X, is maximum voltage across L]
[V, is
proportional to frequency, a high frequency voltage Ve is maximum voltage across C]
applied to the inductor gives only a small current while a
lower frequency voltage of the same amplitude gives rise
V =,R V is maximum voltage acrOss R]
Inside phasor diagrams of each L. C andR are given. To
to a larger current. Inductors are iIsed in some circuit
form phasor diagram for series I.-C-R circuit, combine all
applications, such as power supplies and radio interference these phasor diagrams.
filters to block high frequencies while permitting lower
frequencies to pass through. A circuit device that uses an
inductor for this purpase is called a low pass filter.
Example 2.11 An ideal inductor of inductaxe S0uH is connected 2
to an AC source of 220V, 30 Hz. Find the inductie reactance.
Sol As inductive reactance, X, = oL=2fL
= x
L.
where, is inductance 50uH= 50 10H
f= source frequency = 50 Hz
. X, =2x x 50x 50x 10
Fig. 7.25 Phasor diagram of a series L-C-R circuit
Since, volage U, is in upward direction and voltage Ve) in
2*x 25x 10 2 downward direction, so net voltage upto point A is - Vc V,

=
5rx 10N=5n ms2 (assuming V >Vç) and net maximum voltage is E,
From phasor diagram,
Example 7.2 A44 mH inductor is connected to 220 V, 50 H:
AC supply. Determine the rms value of the current in the circuit.
So. As lgs E - u,R)² + U,x, -ox )² (: OB = E,]
where, X, = aL= 2xfl. is the reactance of the inductor
Here, f = 5) Hz, L=4AmH 44 x 10H,V.. -220V
x x
.X, =2nx 50 44 10 =13.82 Q
.. ms =. 220 =15.9A
value of current in the circuit I,
-

13.82 Here, Z is called impedance.

458) oBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Impedance
Reduction of L-C-R Circuit to L-C, R-C, L-R Circuit
It isthe total resistance of a circuit applied in the path of
The gereral forrula cf-CR sernes circuit can be reduced to apply
alternating current. I is given by
it on -C, R-C, L -R, circut
X, -X
LC circuit fFo LCR CircuIt, impedance
Z

R.
From phasor diagram,
current lby angle . it is clear that voltage leads the For C-CCrcut, there is no R, S0, We can igrore terms related to R
For (-C crcut, Z -x -X¢' or (x -
x)
:.From AOCB, .ifX, X, then arcuit vet behave lixe pure nductor cir Cut and

= votage will ead by current by /2.

tano
OC 1,R IfX, <Xc. then circut will behave like pure capacitor circut and
voltage will lag bethird the curent by x/2
tan • If - Xc. then l-0 in ths conditicn, cutrent in the orout wl
X

R beraximu
A-C icuit For L-C-R Ciruit, impedance Z =JR+ (x, - Xe

For RC CirCuit there is roL, SO We can ignore the tern related toL
: For RCcrcut x¿
Z
-'
The phase difference between current and emf

tan ¢
R
0
Here, the curtent iesds the voltage ty
Fig. 7.26 Impedance triangle of an I-C-R circuit

.::

e .
The alternating emf in thc series L-GR circuit would
represented by E = E, sinlot +
Special Cases
L-R circuit
In L-R Circut

For
n-CRCrcut, ipedance
thereis no C, SO We can gore
-R Crcut Z-JR' x?
Z= R + (X, - X¿)
trhe term related to C

(i) When X, = Xc: The phase differerce between current ancd enf tan X, /R
= 0° Here the emt leads the current by o

Z=R and tano =0 I:

Hence, voltage and current are in the same phase.
The AC circuit is non-inductive.
(ii) When X, > Xç:
tano is positive.
0) Resonance
Hence, voltage leads the current by a phase angle . In series L-C-R circuit, when phase ) between current
The AC circuit is inductancee dominated circuit. and voltage is zero, the circuit is said to be is resonance.
(ii) When Xç > Xp. As applied frequency increases, then
tano is egative. X, =
ol, X, increases
.
Hence, voltage lags behind the current by a phase
angle The AC ciruit is capxIcitance dminated circuit. and Nç =
1

oC
Xç decreases,

The variation of Z with frequency, co is shown in At some frequency o, ). X =Nç

figure below. At o = 00. X, = Nc, Z = R= minimum.
X, = x =
0,L and

The frequency at which X and X, becomes equal is

called resonant frequency.
1
or or (2afo'=

fo )
2rfo
= ,
.
1G LC
2rv, where fo is resonating frequency)
or fo =
Fig. 7.27Z soforaseries L-C-R circuit
LC
 Chapter 07: Alternating current (459

Resonant frequency is independent of the resistance

Qis just a numer having no dimensions, it can also be
of the circuit. At resonating Irequency.
called voltage multiplication factor of the circuit.
=
Z=R Minimum
From the above relation, it is clear that as Rincreases, (or
current decreases) Q-factor of the circuit decreases which
I=-Maximum can be shown in grapl below.
Since, Z is minimum, therefore I will be naximum.
These circuits are used for voltage amplification and as R

selector circuits in wireless telegraphy. l0Q

Response curves of series L-(-R circuit RIxere

The impedance of an L-C-R circuit depends on the

frequency. The dependance is shown in figure. The
frequency is taken on logarithmic scale because of its wide
range.
Fig. 7.29 Q1s ograph of an L-C-R circuit
N, No R. Z. !
The electronic circuit with high values would respond to
a very narrow range
of frequencies and vice-versa. The
R
higher value of Q, the narrower and sharper is the
resonance and greater is the current as show below.
Resonance R

Fig. 7.28 Impedance (Z) vs log ograph for a series L-C-R circuit

From the figure, we can sce that at resonane,

1

(i) X, =Xç or 0, =
VLC
(ii) Z = Znin =R and Fig. 7.30 l vs a graph of an L-C-R circuit
(iii) / is maximum.
Also, Q-factor or Q=
Quality factor (0-factor) 0,-02
the neasure of sharpness of the resonance of an
It is where, o, and o, are frequencies when current decreases
L-C-R circuit. It is defined as, the ratio of voltage to 0.707 times of the peak value of current (Fig. 7.30).
developed across the inductance or capacitance at
resonance to the impressed voltage, which is the voltage
We may wrile, t0, =0o + Ao 0, s 0, - Ao
applied across R. The difference o, - 0, = 2Ao is often called the
bandwidth of the circuit.
Voltage across L (or C)
Qfactor=
Voltage across R Tlhe quantity is regarded a measure of
2Ao
0-factor= sharpness of resonance, i.e. Q-factor is defined as the ratio
V RVC of resonant angular frequency to bandwidth of the circuit.
The smaller the bandwidth (Ao), the sharper or narrower
is the resonance.
R o,RC Note
It is also defined as, ) 0-tacto denotes the sharpness of tuning
tu) High Q factor indcates lrwer rate of energy loss
= Maximum energy stored (un) Highe value of 0-foctor indcates sharper peak in the current
Q-factor 2rx
Energy dissipation () R= 0,0-factor infinity
460 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Example 7.3 siatsoidal votage of frequency 60 l: and

A Exomple 7.15 An alternating emf 200 virtual vnlts at 50 Hz is
eak alue 150V is applied to d series LR circuit, where connected to a ciruit of resistance S2 and inductance 0.01 H.
1

R= 2092 and l. = 10 mH. What is the phase difference letueen the current and the emf
in the circuit? Als find the virtual current in the circuit.
(o) CCmpte T. Z and à a N.
( Cnprute the amplitudes of current. Vg. l; andVo Sol. In case of an AC, the voltage leads the current in phase by
an angle,
Sol. (a) Consider a series L-R circuit as shown below
20 2 40 mi =tan X
w

Here, X, oL m 2rfL) -(2)(30) (0.O1) = *2

and R-1Q
V -
130 V. f 60 H = tan'(n) 72.3*

As
Further.
60
)=2nf =377 ads Sutstituting the values we have,
200 =
X, = ol. = (377)(0.010)= 15.082 60.67 A

Example 7.16 A resistance and inductance are connected in

Phase angle, = tarn
R
tan' (0.754) =
37 series across a vollage,
V= 283 sin 314I
(b) Amplitudes (naxinun value) are, The current is fernd to e 4 sin| 314t - Find the vates of
I50
-6A
23.05 the inductance and resistance.
» ok = I, R= 120 V and (V
=l,X, = 90.5 V Sol. In L-R series circuit curtent lags the voltage by an angie.
: =a. -
V, a = a20 + (90.5) =1503 V
= tan;
|R
)

Example 7.14 A i00 2 resistance is cornected in series

Here,
with a 4 H inductor. The wltage across the resistor is.
l= (2.OV) sin 40'rads). X, R
or oL
R

[o =314 rad
s

(i)Find the expression of circuit current. 314 L = R ...i)

(ii) Find the inductiw reactance. Further.
tii) Derie an expression for the vdtage across the inductor. 283 =
4 JR²+ x
Sol Current in the circuit
il
V) sin (10' rad
I(2.0 s' '283)
2
R 100 or R+loL' =5005.56
=(2.0x 0* A) sin (10' rad sr 2R =5X0S.56
4
(as ol. R
=
ii) lnductive reactance X, oL = (|0' rad s
(4 HI
=
4.0x 10*Q
R= 50
(iii) The amplitude of voltage across inductor.
and from Eq. (), L= 0.16 H

L',- ,N; = (2.0x 10 A (4.0x 10'2)= 80 V Example 7.17 A long solenoid connected to a 12V X. snurce
passes a steady current of 2 A. When the solenoid is connected
In an AC. votage sctss the inductot leads the current to an AC source of 12 Vat 50 H. the crent flowing is 1A.
by 90 or rad. Hence, Calculate inuctance of the solenoid.
Sol. Remember that the solenoid mentioned here is not just a
solenoid but has the resistance also due to its wire material.
Now, in a DC, the solenoid docesnt offer any reactance after a
= (80 V) sin few milliseconds, however in the beginning it offers infinite
(o' radstrad}
resistance. So, the curent by a DC into an inductor is, I=
Note The amplitude of voltage across the resistor (= 20V)s not same as the
R
ampltude of the voltage across the inductor (= 80 Vl even though the m62
arpitude of the cutrent through both dences the same s
 Chapter 07: Alternating current 461

But when an AC is connected to the same inductor, the reactanee Given. 0.50A
will also come into pictute.
o= 0.5= 110 »
Z=2202
So.
z + x
Here, l= 1A,V= |2V, R = 62
=R²+x 220' =010
=
0= 2r50 = 100 n (ads, L =? X 220o-110 330x 110
= 12 mH
10 L=33
Now we can Write

Example 7.18 A 100 uF capocitor in series with a 40 n tan = X1043-=3 =60°

R 110
resistance is connected to 110 V, 60 H: supply.
(a) Wht is the maximum current in the circuit? Exomple 720 An AC oltage source is applied across an RC
(b) What is the time lag eueen the current maximum and the
circuit. Angular frequency of the source is en resistance is R
vltage maximum?
and capcitance is C. The current registered is I. If now the
Sol. (a) Peak value of voltage E, = 2 Em 2 x 110V freqency of source is changed to o/ 2 ! tmaintaining the
same voltage), the Current in the circuit is found to le tuo third.
Let I, m
maximum current in the circuit
Calculate the ratio of reactance to resistance at the
E E original frequency o.
Sol. Consider the RC circut as showrn tbelow.
w

155.1
+ =3.23 A
J1600 703.84
(b) In an R-Ccircuit, the voltage lags behind the current by
the phase angle given by
lan =c R oCR
1 1

120a x 10-4 x 40
= 0,6628 = tan 33.5°

e
33.5°= 33.5x rad
80
:.Time between the current maximum and the voltage When frequency is changed to
maximum is given by
33.5 n ww
t 180
120*
= x s
155 10

Example 7.19 A circuit cotaining of a caxacitor and an active The value of new capacitive reactance is
resistance R = 1 10SQ connected in series is fed an alternating 2
voltage with anplitude Vo =110V. In this case, the amplitude
(co2)C
of current is equal to I,
-
0.50A Find the phase difference -
betueen the current and the oltage fed. New impedance, Z' R'+ X¿ = JR' + (2x
Sol. Consider an RC circuit as shown beiow

R-102 w

It is given that
462) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vot. 2

AR²+ 16x
=
9R' + 9X: Exomple 723 If the reading of toltmeter V, is 30 V, wtat is
the reading of voltmeter V,?

Exomple 721 A coil of inductance 0.0lH is connected in series

with a capacitor of capacitance 25 uF with an AC source
whose emf is gien by E = 310sin314t (ivlt) What is the
reactance of the circuit?
Sol. Consider a series L-C circuit as shoun below o
40 N2 sin
L0.01 H C- 25 mF
Sol. AC voltmeter reads rms value of voltage. RMS voltage
= = 40V
aplied

E-310 sin 314r(volt) Reading of voltmeter V', is X, then Vm V,

=
Given, E =310 sin314t (volt) Lx'+30 40V X= 26.45V
=
Comparing it with general equation, E E, sin eot Example 724 An inductor coil, a capacitor and an AC source
We get, of rms voltage 24 V are connected in series. When the
o2rf314 frequency of the sources is ried, a maximum rms current of
31-4
f 50 H2 A is olrervd. f this inductor coil is connected to a battery of
2* emf 12 V and internal resistance 4.0 S. What will be
Inductive reactance, the current?
X, = ol = 2rf. L.
=
SoL. Consider an L-C-R series circuit as shown below
-314x 0,01 3.140
Capacitive reactaxe

-127,3n
oC 314x 25x 10
.:.Net Reactance.
- 24V
X=Nç -N, 1273 -3.14)99 124162
Maximun current will occur at series tesoLance
Exomple 722 A series LCR circuit is connected across a
At series resonance,ZR 64
source of emfE = 20sin 100nt -"|. The current from the V 24
R=49
R
supply is I = 4 sin
100t +Draw the impedance triangle Now, this inductor coil is connected with a battery of emf 12 V
and internal resistance 4 2
for the circuit.
So. Given, E, = 2ov.
!, = 44

The current lads emf by

The impedance triangle can be drawn as
¢
12
---6)
H

12 V

In DC circuit, inductor offers zero resistance,

42

:. Current,
I15A
4+ 4
Exomple 725 A coil of inductance 0.4 mH is convected to a
capacitor of capacitance 400 pF. To what wuvelength, is this
circuit tuned?
cos Sol. Given, I. = 0.4 mi 0.4 x 10H,C= 400 pF 4 x 10°F
R3
This is the condition of resonance.
 Chapter 07: Alternating current 463

. At resonsnace, frequency,
The curnent will be same everywhere in the circuit, therefore,
PD across resistor
2nvLC 2x 3.14 Jo.4x 10-x4x 10-10 V =
R= 0.0707x 1000 = 70.7 V
PD across inductor
10
6283RH x 4
, =/, X, =0.0707 x \000 x 2 =141.4 V
If and PD across capacitor
the speed of electromagnetic for tuning the
Crcuit wavelength reauiredSvthen
would be Ve =m X
=0.0707x 70.7 V
P3xl0°ms-! Ix 1000x 106
-753.6 m Note The rms voltages do not add directly as, V,
10 V,+V. 2828 V
which is not the sour(e voltage 100 V The reason is
6.28 x 4 Hz that these voltaces
ate not in phase and can be added by vector o by phasor algebra
Exomple 726 A 200 kn telephone wire has
capacity of Example 728 Figqure here, shous a series L-C-R circuit
0.014 uFkm. If it carries an alternating current
of frequency connected to a vriable frequency 230 V souce. L = 5.0H,
50 kHz, uhat should be the value of an inductance required to C= 80 uF and R= 40 2.
be conected in series so that impedance is minimtum?
R
Sol. Capacitance, C = 0.014 x 200 uF = 2.8 x
10-lF
Frequency, f=50k Hz - c
0x 10 cycles s!
The impedance will be minimum at resonant frequency,
when
applied frequency will be same as resoant frequcency
(o /A
The resonant frequency, fo = 1 la) Deternine the source frequency which drives the
circuit in
resorxance.
(6) Obxain the ipedance of the circuit and the amplitude of
L: -0.36x current at the resatingg freqency.
22 22 1oH
(50 10Fx (2.8x 10-)
x
4% lc) Deternine the rms potential drops acTOSs the three
7* elements of
the circuit. Sho" that the potential drop across the
Exomple 727 Fnd the oltage across the
various elements,
i.e., resistance, capacitance and indtctance which are tn
and having ualues 1000 2, uF and 2.0 H respectiely.
1
series
Sol. lal lf ,
combination is zero at the resratig freqiency.
be the resonant angular frequency - source
frequency at resonance, then
L-C

Given emf as,

V 50 rad s-!
=l042 sin 100X% V VLC
5x 80x1o
Sol. The rms value of voltage across
the source, V,
50 Hz
=7.96
Comparing the given cquation with general 2r 2x 3.142
cquation, (b) At resonance, Z R =
Vo =100/2, o=1000 rad
s-! 402
Aiso, R=1000n, C =l uF -lx 10F
Aun
n5.75
A

,2,
and

L=2H 2x 230
8.13 A

=- V
100 V (c)

rms
Vs ,,
40
The rms pxotential drop across Ris given by
R= 5.75 x 40 230 v
The potential drop actss L is given by
JR?+X, -x¢
5.75x 50x 5= 1437.5 V
The rms potential drop across Cis given by
100 1
1
=5.75
1000 x
1I x 10 - 1437.5V
50x 80x 10

=0.0707 A The rms potential drop across L-C is given by

Ve =V -V: - 1437.5 - 1437.5 0
464 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Exomple 729 A hx P and a oilQ are connected is series X, ol. 100x |1009
uith an AC Me of oriabl frepenV. The emf of the nurce 5002
100x 20 10
is contant at
2i. The frequecy is so adlusted that the
murimtm uent flas in Pand Q. l'ind
(a) impwd.e of P and (Q at this (regency
=
(b) olton* ocross Pnd Q. -JCoo+1500 -100 50002

,
1.2l 122
:. Peak value
of
curreut 2o5A
500
-w
Hox Lo0.N2
(0::
I0.1A
acrons each element is
(i) ms voltage
30V
V, -R0.|300-
=
=
100 10V
Currefst s aIximn Lc., case of series resonance
V,
=,N, 0.| 50O = 50V
and
V

=I,.X 0.|
-10' rad s! (b) The average electric field
energy stored in capacitor is

given by
- = 25
m

resonance, X
20x 10x (30
At =N
energy stored in the coil
also the avetage magnetic field
=

122 X,
=

is given by
so +
Resistanee K, atet R, are in series, RR R,
2
25
-1A Example 7.31 A Meries L-C-R cituit containing aresonance
resistance of
the
KK, 1612 28
1202 has anqulor fregqecy ruds.Ar x 10°
inductance are 60V and 40V
ltages acss resistance annd
what angular
resectivly. Find the alues of and A
L C.
luqs the tuge lv n/4?
frequency the current in the circuit
and ZR12052
Sol. At resoance, N, -N, 0
-
t)V, 1Z 20 20V
(Ve 60
120

(Vm
Exomple 730 Also,
with an AG source. R3002,
la) n a series L-CR crctuit 40
- 1.0llI, V, 50/2V antf 50/z H:. Find (i)
L
L=
(
C-20uF, across
andl () the rms iodtage
the rns Cutent in the circuit
h
element.
(b) Cosider the sittuata of the
prevtos purt. Fnd the nvrage -2.0
x
10 H0.2 ml!
in the cufucitor and the
aerage
elecrik ficll eerqy stored given by, or
The resonance frequency
is
the coil.
muhnetic fell eneny stored in
as below
series L-CR citcuit shown
Sol Consider the Substituting the values,
we have
Cm

=3.125 10"F
(4 10 (2.0x 10 1

=
tan 45°
Current the voltage by 45, when
Lags R
tan 45
Substituting the vales of L, CRand
s
V, 0/2V 0 8x10 rad
It is givern that We get.
s
and )-2:/2%x 30100 rad
 Chapter 07: Alternating current 465

is known as resonance frequency. At resonance frequency,

Parallel circuit (Rejector circuit) admittance is minimum or the impedance is maxinum.
Let us consider an alternating source connected across an Thus, the parallel circuit does not allow this frequency
inductance L in parallel with acapacitor C. from the source to pass in the circuit. Due to this reason
The resistance in series with the inductance is Rand with the circuit with such a frequency is known as rejector
the capxacitor is zero. circuit.
(Every inductor has some non-zero internal resistarnce 1
same as tesonance frequency
Note fR- 0, 1e50nance frequency is i
while in case of a capacitor, it can be neglected).
senes t-(-R ciCut or acceptor cirtuit
L
At resonance, the reactive component of Y vanishes or Y
is real. The reciprocal of the admittance is called the

parallel resistor or the dynamic resistance. The

lc dynamic resistance is thus, reciprocal of the real part of
the admnittance.
..
Dynanic resistance
1
R?
Fig. 7.31 A capacitor (C) is in parallel with series Substituting. (resonance frequency)
combination of R and l LC
L
Let the instantaneous value of enl applied be V and the We have, dynamic resistance
corresponding currents are I, I, and lç. Then, CR

: Peak curtent through the supply : Vo

+ koC
R+ joL
as The peak current through capacitor =
-is known as admittance (), Admittance is defined IkoC
oCV,. The
the reciprocal of the impedance. Its unit is mho. ratio of the peak current through capacitor and through
Therefore, the supply is known as -factor.
R- joL
joC Qfactor = VooC
Thus,
V,CRL R
-
R+ joCR +oC oL) This is basically the measure of current magnification. The
rejector circuit at resonance exhibits current magnification
.. The magnitude of the admittance, of coL/R, similar to the voltage magnification of the same
ratio exhibited by the series acceptor circuit at resonance.
m- JR²+ koCR' + o'L°C - oL)? Fig. (a) shows the variation of current Iwith angular
R²+ o'L? frequency, o in parallel LC circuit (i.e.. R = 0) and Fig. (b)
shows the variation of impedance Z with o.
The admittance will be minimum, when
oCR'+ o°L'C - oL = 0
(0 =

It gives the condition of resonance and the corresponding

frequency, (b
Fig. 7,32 For a pIrallel LC circuit (a) I vs o (b) (2)s )
R2
Note Atresonance the current through the supply and voltage are in phase,
2n 2rLC ' while the (uffent thr oucth the apactor leads the voltae by 90"
466 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Example 7.32 A copacito of capcitance 230 pF is connected

in parallel with a choke coil having inductance of 1.6x 102H
and resistance 20 S2. Calculate
(a) the resonance frequerV and
(b) the circuit imnpedance at resonance.

Sol. (a) The resonance frequency of a rejector L-C-R circuit is

given by,
Assuming
1
R² Resultant cutrent, I =+ uc-1,9?
(20
ns 10-2)(250x 1o ) 1.6x 1o*
-7.96x 10' Hz
(b) The circuit imped.ance at resonance is given by.
1.6x 10
Z= CR 3.2x 10n
=

1-V2
(250x 10l2) (20) Impedance,.
Exomple 733 For the circuit shown in figure. find the
instantaneous current through each element.
tan-- X,
N

Phase difference,
VR

V- Vosin of
= tan
This means curretnt leads the voltage.
Sol. The three current equations are. Example 7.35 Find the current draun from the sOurce in each
and ...G) of the circuits as given belou
The steady state solutions of Eq. i) are, I-0.6 A
I, sin ot = Uok sin ot
R I-0.4 A

I=-0 cos ot cos cos

tot-o o!

and ; =VooCcos eof cos est = Uol cos cof

(ii)
1.0 A
wherc. the reactance X, and are as defined.

Example 734 AC oltage source (V, ) is apgplied across a 0.6 A

parallel LC circuit as shoun in the figure. Find the impedance
of the cirruit and phase of current. 0.3 A

Sol. (i) Current in inductot lags the voltage by r/2.

Current in capacitor leads the voltage by /2.
The phasor diagramn can be drawn as

Ic=0.4 A

Sol. Current through the resistor. I, =V/R, in phase with voltage

I -
Current through the indutor, I, =V/N,, lags voltage by */2 I, -0.6 A 02A|
Current through the capacitor, =V/X lcads voltage by x/2
l By vector algebra, current from source = 0.2A
 Alternating current (467
Chapter 07:

(ü) Current in resistor is in phase with voage. The phasor Exomple 737 Inductance (L), copacitance (C} and resistance (R)
diagraun can be drawn as are constanied in a bx. When 250V XC is opplied to the
terminak of the box, a current of 1.0A flous in the circuit.
Ic 1.0 A
0.4 at 2250 rud sec- is
A

When an AC source of 250 V.

connected, a current of 1.25 A,

flous. is odsened that the t
I; 0.3A current rises with frequency and becomes maximun at 450O
rad sec, Find the values ofl. Cand R. Draw the circuit
I- 0.6 A
0,3 A diaqram.
So, net current drawn from the source is Sol. When DCsource is applied, current =|A
=
i=y0.3 +0.4 0.5A In [X
ircuit, inductot oflets zeto resistance and capacitor offer
infinite sesistance, R and (G cantiot be in series,
Current rom soutce = 0.5A
250
Exomple 7.36 An LC circuitU. =0.01H, C =1
uF) is connected R
> R2302
to an AC source of vriable freqtuency. If For AC source,
the frequency is
twried from klH: to 2 kl:, then shon the corseqient
1
Z -
230
ariation impedance, -

200S2
of impedance by a nwugh sketch. 1.25
As Z <RRL andCcannot Ie in seties.
Rcannot be in seties withCas explained earlier.
As current is maximum at tesonance and current
increases with
frequecv, R cannot be in series witlh L. In fact, L and C must be
tn seties,
R230 2
Sol. Impedance (2 of the crcuit is

At resonance, X,
=X
230
=1A in phase with voltage
230
impedarce of lower branch.
JLC

fo

The phase dilference betwecn I, and voltage

2ry0.01)x 10-6
The angle between and I, is, is n/2.
90.
-1592 Hz 1.392 kH
At f impedance is mininum and equal to zero.
fo
At f<fo.Xç > X,, as frequency increases, impedance
increases
(= foNc>X, impedanke is maximum, Z=
when f > lo.Ne <Ny.as frequency
increases, impedance
decreases as shown below

P-1.25)-(225X0.25)
i, -1.5 x0.5 - 0.75A
468 OBJECTIVE PHYSICs Vol. 2

Solving Eqs. (i) and fil, we get

lol.-
oc|
.230'C
0.75
-1. 1000
3 (2250 )
4500 1000
(2250'L.C -1 000 ...) . 3
2250
2250 C 3
3/4 3 - -
At resorance, 1, is maximum, Z' is minimum 2250 1000
10F Iuf» LC =00
0 100
1500 x 45 x 45
10 81"
-

o = o
(1500 ...(5)
R= 2502. L = 4/81H. C = l
aF

Check point 7.2)

1. Ohm's law expressed as E IR 9. The unut of inductance is
(a) A (N-s) (b) JA (C) V-sA-! (d) V-As-!
(a) can never be applied to AC
(b) applies to AC n the same manner as to DC 10. In the case of an inductor
(c) always applies to AC circuts when Z is substituted for R (a) voltage lags the cuttent by
(d)tels us that Eet -0 707 (Ema. ) for AC
2. An alternatng current of ms value 10 A is passed through a (b) voltage leads the cuttent by
122 resistor The maximum potential ditference across the (c) voltago leads the current by 3
resistor is
(a) 20 v (b) 90 V () voltage leads the cutrent by
{c) 169 68 V (d) None ot these
3. The reactance of a 25 F capacitor at the AC frequency of 11. An inductve coil has a resistance of 100 12 When an AC
4000 Hz s signal of frequency 1000 Hz is appled to the coil, the
10 voltage leads the current by 45° The inductance of the
(a) Pa (c) 102 (d)
coil is
1 1

4. The capacity of a pure capacitor is 1 F. In DC circuits, its (a)

10*
( 208 (c)
40
(d
60
eftectve resistance will be
(a) zerO (b) infinte 12. Two inductors L, and L, are connected in parallel and a time
(c) 12 (d) 1/22 varyng cuttent fiows as shown in figure Then the ratio of
5. In an AC crcuit containing only capacitance, the currernt currents ,/, at any timet is
(a) leads the voltage by 180
(b) remains in phase with the voltage
(c) leads the vo'age by 90"
(d) lags the voltage by 90
6. A capacitor is a pertect insulator for
(a) crect current
(b) alterrnatng current
(c) drect as well as alternatng cuent
(a) L, lez (b) L,/L, (c)
(d) Nore of the above
7. In an AC CCuIt. an aternating votage e = 2002 sin 100tV
13. An inductance and a resistance are connected in series vat
is connected to a capactor of capacity 1 uF. The rns value an AC potential In this circuit
of the current in the circut is (a) the curent and the potential difterence acoSs the
(a) 100 mA (b) 200 mA (c) 20 mA () 10 mA resistance lead the PD actoss the inductance by phase
8. The reactance of a coil when used in the domestic AC power angle /2
supply (220 V, 50 Cycies per second) is 50 The (b)the current and the pgtential ditference across the
inductance of the coil is nearty resistance lag behnd PD across the inductance by an
(a) 2.2 H (b) 1.6 H
(c) 0 22 H (d) 0 16H angle a/2
 469
Chapter 07: Alternating current

(c) the current and the potential ditterence across the 21. In an L-C-R series circuit the AC voltage across R, L and C
resistarce lag betund the PD across the inductance by an come out as 10 V. 10 Vand 20 V respectvely The voltage
angle n across the entire combination will be
(d)the PD across the resistance lags behind the PO acroSs (a) 30 V (b) 10/3y (c) 20 (d) 10,2v V

the inductance by an ange s/2 but the current in the 22. With increase in frequency of an AC supply. the impedance
resistance leads the PD across inductance by n/2 of an L-C-R series circut
14. In L-A circuit resistance is 8N and inductive reactance is (a)temans constant
62 thern impedance is (b)increases
(a) 20 145 (D)
(c}
decreases
(C) 42 (d) 102
(d)decteases at first, becomes minimum and then increases
15. In an AC circut, the current lags behind the voltage by 23. A sinusoidal voltage of peak vaue 300V and an angular
frequency eo = 400 rads is applied to sernesL-C-A circuit, in
The conponents in the circuit ray be which R= 30, L =20 mH and = 625uF The peak cutrent
C

(a) andL
R
(b) L and C (c) R and C (g) onhy R in the citCuit is
(d) 6042 A
16. tn an AC cicut, a resistarnce ot R othm is connected in series (a) 302A (b) 60A (c) 100A
wth an inductance L. Il phase angle betwoen voltage and 24. The value of current at resonance in a senes L-C-A circuit is
Curtent be 45, the value ot inductive reactance will be atfected by the value of
(a) R/4 C onty (C) L onty (d) LC and A
(a) R only
(b) R/2
(c) R
25. An L-C-A series circuit is connected 1o a source of
(d) cannot be found with the gven data alternatng current. A resonance the apped voltage and
a
CuTent fiowing through the circut will have phase
17. In a circuit containing R and L, as the frequency of the difference of
impressed AC increases, the impedance of the crcuit (d)
(a) zerO (b) a/4 (c) n2
(a) decreases
(b) increases 26. A series L-C-R circuit is operated a! resonance. Then
(a) voltage acroSs F is minmum
(c) remans unchanged
(d) first increases and then deceases (b) mpedance iS minmum
(C) impedance is maximUm
18. An ACvollage is applied to a resistance R and
an inductor L
inseries Rand
352,
If the inductive reactance are both egual to
the phase ditterence between the applied voltage and
(d) current arnpitude is minurTurT

27. An L-C-R senes cirCuit is under resonance. If is Current

,
the current in the circuit is amplitude V, iS voltage ampltude, Ris the resistance, Zis
the impedance, X, is the inductive reactance and is the
X

(a) n/4 (b) n/2

(C) zero () n/6 capacitrve reactance, then

19. In an L-R circCuit, the vaue of LisH and the value of A (a)
7 X X
is 302 If in the circuit, an alternating emf
at 50 of 200 V an L-C-R series, AC
In circuit at resonance
28.
cycle s
i connected. the impedances the circut and
of capactve reactance ts more than the inductve
(a) the
Current will be (b) the capacitve reactance equals the inductve reactance
(a) 11 42 17 5A (b) 30 7 26.5A (C) the capacitrve reactance s less than the inductve
reactance
(C) 404 5A (d) 502 4A (d) the power dssipateds minimum

20. The instantaneous values of current and voltage in an AC 29. An L-C-R series circut, Connected to sourceE, is at
a
CiICuit are given by resonance Then,
(a) the vollace across R is zero
i- Gsin 100
)

(a)
v-5en

urrent leads the voltage ty 45

100
-. hen
fb) the otage across R equals appied voltage
{C) the volage across C ts

(d) the votage aross C

zero
equals
30. The reciprOcal of impedance called
is
appied voltage

(b) admnittance
(a) reactance
(b) voltage leads the current by 90 (d) conductance
Curent leads the voltage by 90
(c) inductarce
(d) voltage leads the current by 45*

Special cases
cireuit containing R only
3) Power in an AC circuit
(0 AC
Cos0°
Here. =0, P, =Vns
[rnaximum
of

defined
as
the product
clectric circuits nower
is
For

469 of 904
 Special cases
3) Power in an AC circuit (0 AC circuit containing R only
=
Here, 0° P, =V,m Cos0°
For clectric circuits power is defined as the product of [maximum
voltage and current. (iD AC circuit containing L. only
In AC circuit, both emf and current changes continuously or P,, = cos
with respect to time, so in AC circuit, we have to calculate
Vm, Im, P, =0
average power in complete cycle (0 -
T).
Hence, average power is defined as the average of
2
So, average power in L is zero.
(ii) AC circuit containing C only
instantaneous power in an AC circuit over a full cvcle. Its
or = Vems aas
SI unit is watt. P, cos=0
2 2
Instantaneous power, P =VI ...(i)
[:V=V sinor. = lo sinot + )) So, average power in C is zero.
(iv) AC circuit containing L and R
Here, V and I are instantaneous voltage and current.
respectively. tano cos =

Total work done or energv spent in maintaining current R

over one full cycle is given by R
P, =Vym'
w-olo cs JR'+o'L?
2 (d AC circuit containing C and R
Thus, average power associated in AC circuit is given by 1/oC R
tano coso =
R VR²+1/oc?
2
R
Vo.lo cos¢ P, =Vm p?
P. 1lec?
(v) AC circuit containing L, Cand R
cos = coso
P. =V I, Vly tano ol. -1/oC
R
Here, cos is power factor.
Power factor is defincd as cosine of the angle of lag or lead
(i.e. cos¢). It is also defined as the ratio of resistance and JR'+oL -1/ oC)?
impedance.
P, =V,m
cos True power
Apparent power

It is said to be leading, if curtent leads voltage, lagging, if

current lags voltage. Thus, a power factor of 0.5 lagging Half power points in series L-C-R circuit
means current lags the voltage by 60° (as cos 0.5= 60).
The values of o at which the powet input is half of its
The product of V, and I,m gives the apparent power lor maximumn value are called half power points.
virtual power). While the true power is obtained by At these points,
multiplying the apparent power by the power factor cos¢. P

Thus,
Apparent power = Vxm
and True power = apparent power x power factor

Fig. 7.33 Half power points in series L-C-R circuit

Chapter 07: Alternating current (471

2Ao Example 7.41 A 100 2 resistor is connected to a 220 V, 50 H:

AC supply.
(i) 1$hat is the ms value of current in the circuit?
The amplitude of the current falls by a factor of and (ii) What is the net fvouer consmed ouer a full cyle?

470 of 904
 Chapter 07: Alternating current 471

Example 7.41 A 100 S2 resistor is connected to a 220 V. 50 H:

AC supply.
i) the rms value of current in the circuit?
1What is
The amplitude of the current falls by a factor of and (i) W'hat is the net pouer constned oer a full cyele?
Sol. i) value of current in the circuit.
R,

hence, the power P «goes down by half.

Vrms
The separation between these two half power points is 220 = 2.2 A
R 100
24 o
=, This separation is callet the fi) We know that the ower dissipated in an AC circuit is
given by P =Vim, Lm, cos
1

full-width at half maximum and is th fraction of the where, ¢ is the phase difference between current and voltage
= cos cos = 0 = |
In a
ciuit containing resister only. 0, thus
resonant frequency.
an - 220 x 2.2 = 48I W
Example 7.38 An iron cored coil is conected in series with
electric bulb, with an AC source, as shoun in figure. As the Exomple 7.42 A series L-(-Rciruit is connected across an AC
iron piece is taken out of the coil, how uill the brighness of
Cunent from the spply is
bulb change?
snurce =
l0sin 100nt 6
in
-!
"what is the average pouer dissipated?
12
Sol. Phase difference between voltage and current,

Sol. the iron rod is taken out of the coil, the self-inductance
As
of the coil decreases, the inpedance of circuit decreases, Power fator cos ¢=
hence curtent increases, So, power constutlexd (and hece
brigitnss of bullb) by bulh inctease. Average power dissizated,

Example 7.39 A light luullb has the rating 2001W 220V. Find ()
2
n 10x2,s2w
resistance of the bulb filament (ii) rms vale of current (lowing
inductor and
through the filament. Example 743 An AC cicuit cotaining 800 mnl
are
Sol. (i) Resistance of the bulb, a 60 cuacitor is in seriesACuith 1512 resistance. Theypouer
u

coecteed to 230 50 l: supplv. Obtain averte

V.

v' 220 220 22 x 22g 2420 total poer asorbed.

R transferred cach element
to and
20
200 10, Sol. Reactance of the inducter,
(ii) The rns value of current 11 A0.9A 2x 3.14x 50
x
800 x
10°= 251.3)
220 N, oL= 2*vl
Capacitive rextancc,
.
=
S2. L 1.5 |
Example 7.40 A series L-C-Rcircuit uith R= 20
a 200 AC 33.05SN
and C = 35 uF is coneted to xriuble freguecy equas
Ae rv( 2x3.14 x 50 x 4) x 10
sufply. VWhen the frequency of the supply the natural
.. Impedance.
frequencv of the circuit, what is the aerage ouer transferred
-x 5' (251.3-5305
to the cincuit in one complete cyele? Z- r'x,
Sol When the frequency of the supply eqals the natural Z= 198.8 1)

frequency of the cicuit, the circuit is

said be in resorance.
230
At resonancc. l.!57A
Z =R= 202 198.8
not consume power ower
so
Since, the L-C-R circuit is resistive, the phase
angle Note that the inductor and capacitor do
zero.
betweern the current and voltage is a cycle.
resistor.
Now, average ower dissipated in the
=0° atid m
E200- 10 A
i.e.. 20 -=157x15
P= average power transfered
Em, cos 0°
r
cycle. =
20.07 W
PaL =
=10x 200 2000 W 2.0 kW
=
472 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

=
Example 7.46 A solenoid uith intwtance l 7mll and acti
Total power cotsumed Vm Cos Q
conected to a source direct of

2is first
R 1
resistanre
R swurce of sinzsoidal oltage uith
Ieltage l, and then to
230x.157x1920.07
W
effective valuel'
the
=:A what frequency of the scillator uil
nuer constumned by the olenoid lve n =5.0 times less than
198.8 in the former case?
same as that
Note that the total power consumed always is
o V
a direct voltage,
Sol When a solenoid is connected to snirce
consumed in tesistor.
R42 L7 mI
AC circuit has a resistance of 200S2 ww
Example 7.44 A 60 cycle
and inductor of 100 mll. 7hat is the pouer fuctor? What
cafacitance placed in the circuit will uke the pwer factor
snity?
Sol.
Power consumed. I{
J200) +2n60 x 100 x 10}' =203.52 S2
When it is connected to a sinusoidsl voltage, effective impedanc
comes into role.

200
Power factor, cos -0.983
Z 203.52
Now, for the power factor to be unit. o=0that meas
=
x, =N ot, ol
Now. power consumed will be
x x
o'L 2r 60) 100 10
C=70.36 uF
Example 7.45 An L-C-R series circuit with 100 2 resistance is Given.
n
connected to an AG source of 2000 1 and anglar frequency
300rds. When only the copacitance is temoed. the curTent
(2*fL' =tn -
lags vekid the toltae lv 60°. W7en onlv the inductance is DR
reoed, the current leads the vltage by 60°. Calculate the X=(n- DR'

crret and the pouer dissipated in the L-C-R circuit. :. Frequency of the oscillator fen2rl. -1
Sol. When capacitance is removed.

tano = L or tan 60 5-1=2x 10'H=2 kHz

R R 27*10
Example 7.47 Consider the following R-L.-C ciruit in which
When inductance is removed.
R= 12 2. N, =241 Q. N, = 82. The emf of source is given
=
tan¢= or tan 60e R byl 10sin400n)1.
(0 Find tie energv dissiated in 10 min.
.i) (ii) I/ resistaxe is removd from the circuit and ntue
Fron E. ti) and lii) we see that, Nç. X, inadtc tance is duted, expre urtutioM of curtent with time
So. the L-C-Rcircuit is in tesotLIce. in the rew cicuit.

Heke, Z =R
200
-2A
100
Power dissipatei (P) =lLo CeN
At resonance, curTent and voltasçe are in phase or = 0°
(P) = (20)) (2) ()= 400 W
 Chapter 07: Alternating current 473

Sol. () mpedance,
Now,
2
+24-8 -20 S2

con= R_12_3 and

z 20 5 2

Power corsumed. +v220

(220

I00,31.5W Also,
2 (20) 5
Energy dissijated, E =P= 1.5) 00x 60) = 900J -480
ii)
Subtracting Eqs. (i) and (ii). we get

-(220 -1 80F
=>(80 + R,X80) = (400%40)
Power consumed in coil,
= 48
-8 = 4092
=
Impedance, Z X;
-X
P= R, =|x120 =30W
40
Example 7.49 A current of 4 A fous in a coil when
connected
fo al2V IX sorce. the sme coil is a
f conneted to l12V.
50 radsAC source, a cIrent of 2.4 A flou's in the circuit.
Determine the inductance of the coil. Also find the power
developed in the circuit. if a 25(0 uF capacitor is connected
V in
series urith the coil.
Current Lags Sol. (i) A coil consists of an iductance )and a resistance ().
the voltage by nr2.
In DC, only resistance is effectie. Hence,
I=I, sin (or -n /2) =-sin 00xt - n/ 2) V_12 32
4 R=
Example 7.48 A series circuit consisting of an
intuctance free
resistance R = 0.16 2 and a coil with In AC.
actie resistance is
connected to the mains uith effectie oltacee = 220V.
he heet pouer generated Find
in the cott. ne oltage .
eret
Lulues across the esistance R and the coil are
V, 80V andV, =180V respectivelyv.
Sol.
Coil
R
Ru
Substituting the values, we have

e0V 180 V
L
50 Y\2.4) --0.08 H

When capacitor is connected to the circuit,

the
220V inpedance is,
Current in the circuit,
Herc, R= 312
=
80 = N, ol. = (30) (0.08) = 4Q
x
160 > ,m A

and
I50)(230 x 82
10
 474) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Now,

Siabstituting the valaes, we have P - x3- 17.28 w

tan'= tano
Exomple 7.50 The series and prallel circuits shoun in fiure
have the same impdance and the same power factor. 1f Puting N, = E

R= 32 and N = 4S. fid the uulues of R, and N,. Alo, find K in (i

the impedance and pNUer factor.

9
(23)

(b

Sol. Wattless current

The current which consumes no jxower for its maintainan
in the circuit is called wattless current or idle current.

If the resistance in an AC circuit is zero, its ower factor

will be zeto. Although the crrent flows in the circuit, y
the average power remains zero. i.e., there is no energy
dissipation in the cicuit. Such a circuit is called the
- wattless circuit and the current flowing is called the
lmpedance, 2
R'x'-50 wattless current.
If the circuit contains either inductance or capcitance
Power factor, cos R3 cos0.6) only, then phase difference bKt Ween cutrent and voltage
0r, i.e., = 90°. TIhe average ower in stuch a circit is
tan x Coso
R 3
P
=V Xs,.
= x cos 90°= O
V.
The concept of wattless curent is sinilar to that of a
frictionless pendulum, where the total work done by
gravity upon the pendulum in a cycle is zero.

L-C oscillations
Now, we have. Ug, Ux,o
When a charged capacitor is allowed to discharge throug
a non-resistive induetor. eletrical ocillations of constar
amplitude and frequency are produced. These oscillatior
are calld L-C oscillations.

Working
When a capacitor is supplicd with an AC current,
it gets charged.
 Chapter 07: Alternating current (475

Example 7.52 A radio can tune over the frequency range of a

portion of MW broadcast land (8O0) kH: to 1200 kH2). If iIs
L-C circuit has an effective inductance of 200 ull what must
L be the range of its variable capacitor?
Sol. For tuning, the natural frequency, i.e.. the frequency of
Completely
eiectrical
free oscillations of the LC circuit should be cqual to the
Completely frequency of the radiowave. Now for
erergy magnetic cergy
we get
Fig. 7.34 (u) and (b)

When this charged capacitor is connected with an or

inductor, current flows through inductor. giving rise to 2r L G=
magnetic flus, hence induced emf is produced in the
circuit. Due to this, the charge (or emergv) on the capacitor or
4x 9.87x 2x 10x (8x 10F
decreases and an equivalent amount of energy is stored in = 197.8x
the inductor in the form of magnetic field when the 10-² F 197.8 pF
discharging of the capavilor completes, current and Similarly, C,=
magnetic flux linked with L starts decreasing. Therefore, 4nL{ 4x 9,87x 2x
an inducedemf is proluced which recharges
10x (12x 10')
the capacitor or C, = 87.95x 10F= 87.95 pF
in opposite direction. This process of charging and
discharging of capacitor is repeated and energy taken once Exomple 7.53 In an L-C cicuit L = 33H and C =
840pF. Ar
from source keeps on oscillating between and L. C
t=0 charge on the caucitor is 105C and maximum.
The equation of LCoscillation is given by. Compute the follouring quantities at t =2 ns
(0 The cnergy stored in the capacitor.

da? LG=0 (in The tota! energy in the circuit.

(iin The energy stored in the inductor.
where, q = 4o cos kot + )
And the charge oscillates with a frequency, Also, write the equation for the variation of current in
inductot with time. the
1

Sol. Given, L =3.3 H,C= 840 x 10"F

2r 2rVI.C
The L-Coscillations discussed above are not and 49 =105 x 10C
realistic for the
tuo reasorts. The angular frequency of L-C oscillations is,
() Every inductor has some resistanece. The elfect 1

of
this resistance will introduce a danping effect on
the
charge and curtent in the circuit and the oscillations =1.9x|0 rads-!
finally die away.
Charge stored in the capacitor at time t, would
(iD Even, if the resistance is zero, the total energy be,
system would not remain constant. It is of tbe
away from the system radiated (i) At t= 2x10s
in the form of electromagnetic
waves. In fact, radio and TV q= (105 x |0Icond.9x102x10)
transmitters depend on
this radiation.
-l00.3
x
10 c
Exomple 7.51 charged 30
A
.. Energy stored in the capacitor
27 mH inductor. What is the
F
capacitor is connected to a
x

oscillations of the circuit?

angular frequency of free Uc=9(000.3 10
2 (: 2x810 x \0-2 =f6.0J
Sol. Angular freyuerscy of free oscillations (ii) Total energy in the circuit
of L-C oscillations is
(o= U.!95 (105x10
JLC J27x 10*x 30 x 10 2C 2x840 10-12 b.56J x

(iii) Energy stored in

- 1.1|x 10 rad s
inductor in the given time
= total enetgy
in circuit -enetgy stored in cajacitor
(6.56 -6.0)J =0.56J
476 08JECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Also, I, sin ot Let the charge at that time be q. then

where, I,
=
4, x o 105 x
10x1,9x 10 = 2A

ot
I2A)sin
Also, q- cos o

Exomple 7.54 An L-C cicuit contains 20 mH inductor and a

50 uF cociter with an initial charge of 10 m. The
resistunce of the circuit is negligible. Let the instant the cicuit
is chosed bet=0 Wat is the total enerqy stored initially? At
what times is the total enerqv shared equally betueen the
e i

4CC.
indctor and the copacitor?
Sol. Total energy stored initiallv mcans energy stored in the 4 (2r)

capacitor
o
10x 10
2C 2x 50x 10 -l joule 4o

, 3T
Total etengy is when the total energy is shared equally and so on
S, 8
2:
T 3T 5T
tet ween the caucitor and inductor, the energy stored in the So, energy will be equally shared at t C

8
8

8
capacitor that time will be halí of the total energ

Check point 7.3

1. An electric heater rated 220 V and 550 W is connected to AC 6. The average power dissipated in a pure inductor of
mains The current by it is ram inductance L when an AC current is passing through it, is
(a) 0 8 A (b) 25 A
(d) 125
A
(a) (b) (c) 2L () zero
(c) 0 4 A
2. In an AC cirCuit. V.lo and cos 0 are voltage amplitude. 7. The average pwer dissipated in a pure capacitance AC
current ampitude and power factor respectvely, the power circut is
1

consunption is (a) CV (b) zero

cos 0
(a)v, (b)
an AC circut, the power factor
In
8.
(c) VG, cos 0 (a) is zeto when the circuit contains an ideal resistance oniy
(b) is unty when the citcut contans an ideal resistance ony
3. The pOWer factor of a circuit is (c) is zeO when the crcuit contans an ideal inductance onty
(a) Z/A (b) RIZ (d)is unity hen the crcuit contains an deal inductance onty
(C) RX (d) XR
9. The impedance of a circuit consists ot 32 resistance and
4. In an AC circust, the potential difterence V and current / are 42 reactance The power factor of the circuit is
gven respectrvely by (a) 04 (b) 06 (c) 08 (d) 10
V=100sin (100: V
10. Power disspated in an L-C-R sernes circuit connected to an
AC Source of emf is
1-100sin
and
10mA
The power cdissipated in the circauit wll be (a)
(a) 10 W (b) 10 W (c) 25 W (d) 5 W
5. Power tactor is one for
(a) pue nductor
(b) pure capacitor
(C) (C) -
(c) pure resistor
(d) Either an indUctor ot a capactor
 Chapter 07: Alternating current 477

11. The Si unit of inductance, the henry can be written as 13. In an inductor
inductance L= 100 mH, a current o!
of

(a) weterfamppere l= 10 Is fowing The energy stored in the inductor is

A

(b) volt-second'ampere (a) 5J (b) 10 J (c) 100J (d) 1000J

(c) ouearrpere' 14. In
anL-C circuit
(d) ohrrn-second
stored in L as well as in C is magrnetic energy
(a) the energy
12. The energy stored in an inductor of self-inductance L heny (b)the energy stored in L is magnetic but in C it is electrical
carryng a current of /armpere is (c)the etnergy stored in L is electical but m Cit is magnetic
()the energy stored in L as wefi as C is electricai energy
(c) L
(d) L’
15. The equivalent quantity of mass in an inductot circut is
(a) charge (b) potental (c) inductance (d) cutrent

Theory
4) Choke coil Let us consider a choke coil of large itnductance L and low
resistance R as shown in Fig. 7.36. The power factor for
Choke coil is a device having high inductance and such a coil is given by
negligible resistance. It is used in AC circuits for the
purpose of adjusting current to any required value in such
a way that power loss in a circuit can be minimised. It is
used in fluroscent tubes.

Principle VVo sin ot

Fig. 7.36 AC voltage applied toachoke coil
It is bascd on the principle of wattless current.
= R
coso
Construction
Iron core
where, X, is the inductive reactance or effcctive
opposition of the choke coil. It is given by X, = Lo
Sarter R
cos s (as R << Lo)
Coil od Cu wire Lo
Choke coil
IChoke As R<< La cos¢ is very small. Thus, the power absorbed
coil
by the coil Vmrm Cos¢ is very small.
Fig. 7.35 (a) Choke coil On account of its large impedance, Z = VR +o'L', the
Itconsists of a copper coil wound over a soft iron current passing through the coil is very small. In actual
latninated core. Thick copper wire is used in order to practice choke coil is equivalent to a R-L circuit. For an
reduce the resistance R) of the circuit whereas to improve ideai choke coil R = 0, therefore no electric energy is
the inductance L) of the coil, soft iron is used. The choke wasted i.e., average power, P=0. The only loss of encrgy
coil got its name because it is used to choke or reduce the is due to hysterisis in the iron core, which is much less
current in the circuit. than the loss of energy in the resistance that can also
reduce the current, if placed instead of the choke coil.
Types of choke coil Example 7.55 An AC circuit consists of a 220 Q resistance and
Choke coil for different frequencies are made by using a 0.7 H choke. Find the pouer absorbed from 220 V and 50 Hz
different substances in their core. source connected in this circuit, if the nsitance and choke are
joined,
() To reduce low frequency alternating currents, choke (a) in series (b) in parallel.
coils with laminated soft iron cores are used. These
are called af choke coils. Sol. (a) In series the imped.ance of the circuit is,
(i) To reduce high frequency alternating currents, choke
coils with air cores are uscd. These are called rf
choke coils. =V(220 + (2x 3.14x 50x 0.7 =311 9
478 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

=
220 .0.707A J60 10 (5- R)
311 R'=112
In case of AC, as the choke no resistance, power loss in
hs
choke is zero,
In cae of XC, the lons in adit iotal tfesistanceRis.
P= 'R e(10'u)= 100 W

R
Transformer
and Irom the inpedance diagram drawn above. It is a device which is nsed to change the alternating
R 2200.707 voltage. The transformers are of the following tvpes
Z 311 Step-up transformer
.. The power cos
absorted in the citcuit, P= It is used to ineTease the AC voltages.
220) 0.707) (0.707) W
I10.08
W
Step-down transformer
It is used to dercase the AC voltages.
(b) When the resistance and cioke are in parallel, the
cntie pOwer is atbsorbed in resistance, as the choke
(having zero fesitance) abnorts no power. Principle
(220) is based on the principle of mutual induetion
P=. -220
W
Transformer
R 220 i.e., whenever a amount of magnetic flux linked with a
Example 7.56 A choke coil is needed to erate a arc lamp coil changes, an emf is induced in the neightouring coil.
at l60V (rmsl ani 50 H:. The lamp has an effective resistance
Construction
of52 when runing ut 10 A (rms (alculate the inudctance of
the choke coil. If the same' arc lamp is to le opvrated on It consists of two coils, primary coil ) and secondary coil
1601 WXC, what additional resitance is required? Compre (S), insu.at cd fron cach other wounded on soft iro core.
the pouer loses in lxh caes, often the primary coil is the input coil and secondary coil
5 =
Sol. For larnp, inR)=10x 50V is the output coil. These soft iron cores are laminated to
minimise eddy current loss,
Iaminat ed

chrke

AC
Input Oulput
source ptitnary Mmdary

V lo in ost

In seriCs.
Fig. 7.37 Construction of a transformer

Theory and working

-Jaco -(50 -152 V
The value of the enf induKed in sccondarv coil due to
alternating voltage applied to prinary deends on the
number of turns in the secondary. We consider an ideal
(2nf) , transformer in which the primary has negligible
= 152 resistance ad all the flx in the cote links txoth primary
Substituting the values, I. and secondary windings. Let be the flux in each turn in
(2z)(50 (101
=
the core at tie t due to current in the primarv when a
4.84× 10 H voltage 1, is applil to it. Then, the induced enf or
Now, when the Lamp is npetated at 160 VIC. and itstead of
choke et:an aditioal resistattee voltage E, in the second.ary with N, turns is
Ri pt i series with it then,
I=IR + R) ...E
d
 Chapter 07: Alternating current 479

The alternating lux also induces an cnf, called back i.e.. if the second.ary coil has a greater number of turns,
emf in the primary. This is then the primary (i. e., N, > N,, ). the voltage is steped up
',>l;. This type of arrangement is called a step-up
...(ii)
transformer. However, in this arrangement, there is less
= current in the secondary than in the primary
But E, V,. II this were
not so, the primary curent wOuld
6.N.N.<l and I,< I,). If the seeondarv coil us less
be infinite, since the primary has zero tesistance urns than the primary i.c., N,« N,), we have a
(as consideredh. If the secondary is an open circuit or the
step-down transformer. In this case, l'g < V, and > Ip,
current taken from it is snall. then to a gooxl approximation.
i.e., the voltage is stepped down, (or teduced), and the
current is inereased. The cquations ohtained above apply
where. Vs is the voltage across the secondary. to ideal transformers (without any energy losses).
Therefore, Es. i) and i} can be written as,
Note The tatio = is also known as translormation ratio
N,
K=-N ...(i)

Energy losses in transformers

V, =-N, ...(iv)
In actual transfouLers, small energy losses do ocur duc to
From Eqs. (üi) and (iv), we have the following reasons.
...(v) (a Flux leakage There is always sone leakage of flux
i.e., not all of the flux due to primary passes through
The alkne relation is lsed on three assumptions: the secondary due to poor design of the core or the
(i) The primarv resistance and current are small. ait gaps in the core. It can be reduced by winding
(ii) The same flux links both the prinary and the
the primary and secondary coils one over the other.
secondary as there is very little leakage of magnetic (i) Resistance of the windings The wire tsed for the
flux. windings Ihas soe tesistance and so, enegy is lost
(iii)The secondary current is small. due to heat produced in the wire u'R. In high
Efficiency of a transforner is defined as the ratio of
curent, low volt.age windings, these are minimised
output powcr to the input power. by using thick wire.

Output power (i) Eddy currents Tle altenating magnetic flux induces
i.c.
xddy cuTents in the iron coze and causes hcating. The
Input power effect is reduced by having a laminated core.
If thetransformer is assoned to be 100% efficient
energv losses). the power input is equal to the power
(id Hysteresis The magnetisation of the core is
(no
repeatedlv reversed by an altenating nagnetic field.
vutput, and since P =I|.
The resulting expenditure of energv in the eore
.vi) appears as beat and is kept to a minimum by using a
Althouglh, some eergy is always lost, still tdhis is a goox
magnetic material which has a luw hysteresis loss,
approxination, since a well designed transfonmer may
have an efficiency of more than 95%. (d Magnetostriction It is the uunming oise of a
Combining Eqs, (v) and (vi), we have
transtormer.

IpVs Ns ...(vii)
Uses of transformers
Transformers are used in almost all AC operations. Some of
Since, I and V both oscillate with the same frequency as
them are given below
the AC source, Eq. (vii) also gives the ratio of the
(9 ln thc indution furnaces.
amplitudes or rs
values of corresponding quantities.
Now, we can observe bow a transforner affccts the (i) ln voltage tegul.ators for V, computer, refrigerator etc.
voltage and current. We have (iin A step-down transformer is used for the purpose
of
weldings,
N

...(vii) (id In tlhe transnmission of AC over long distances,

 480 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

=
Exomple 7.57 In a step-doun transformer having primary to (i) Resistance of primary, R, 0.2 2
secondary turn ratio 10: 1, the input woltage applied is 250V Resistance of secondary, R, =2.02
and outzut curret is 10 A. Assuming 100% efficiency, Output pwer =,l, =12.1kW =12100w
calculate the
(0 acruss secordarv cuil
aje :. Current in the secondary, I, - P12100 11A
1100
(ii) current in primary coit
pouer oulprt output power
(iid As, cfficicncy
=
input power
Sol. Given, 250V. I 8A
N, 10 90 12100W
100 Input power
6N » l,x V,=250 =
25V
12100x100-1344x
N. 10 Input power, R = 10°W

,10-1A
10 N, Also, input power,}4
(iii) Power output =V, =25 x 10 =250W .Curtent in the primary,
_13.44x 10
Exomple 7.58 A 10 kW trunsforner has 20 turns ir the
=

61.1A
220
primarv and 100 turns in the secovdary circuit. An AC voltage
V, =
600 sin 314 t is opplied to the primary. Find (i) the Power loss in the primary.
marimum kule of flux and (ii) the muximun vaiue of -K, (61.1 x
0.2=746.61w
secondary volagr.
Power loss in the secondary.
Sol. i) Flux linked with each turn of primary, =
-;R, a1'x 20 =242W
Here.
each tutn
=,
BAcs ot = cos ot
BA = maximum value of flux linked with
Electric generator or dynamo
: -N,N 4, cos or) oN, 4, sin or
=
Electric generator is a device which is used to convert
Peak value of V, mechanical energy to electrical energy. Generator provide
V, oN, 4
nearly all of the pawer for electric power grids.
The reverse conversion of electrical energy to mechanical
energy is done by electric notor.
Given, V, = 600 sin 314t =l sin ot
V, 60X)V, 314 rads! Electric generator are of tuw types

Hence, , =
314
600
x
20
0,0935 Wb
1. ACgenerator

2. DC generator

VN, 1. AC generator or AC dynamo

. Maximum value of sccondary voltage is, used to produce alternating current energy from
It is
Imechanical energy.
1o100 20 600 =3000V (0) Principle
Exomple 7.59 (i) The primary of a transformer has 400 rurns It is hased on the phenomenon of electromagnetic induction
uwhile the secondary has 2000 turns. If the pver oxtput from i.e., whenever amount of maghetic flux linked with a coil
the secondury at 1100 Vis 12.1 kW, calculate the primary changes, an emf is induced in the coil. The direction of
-

oltage. (ii) lf the resistance of the primnary is 0.22 and that of induced current is given by Fleming's right hand rule.
the seconlary is 2.0S2 and the efficiency of the transformer is
(ü) Construction
90 % calculate the heat lovses in the primary and the
secondary coils. AC generator has following parts
Sol. (i Given, N, = 40 N, = 200V, =1100V (a) Armature ABCD is a rectangular armature coil

x -I00 consisting of a large number of turns of insulated

=|100 =220V copper wire wound over a laminated soft iron core.
N, 2000
 Chapter 07: Alternating current 481

(b) Field magnets N and S are the pole pieces of a The variation of E with time in AC generator is shown in
strong electromagnet in which the armature coil is figure below
rotated. Axis of otation is perpendicular to the
magnetic ficld lines.
(c) Slip rings R, and R, are two hollow metallic rings
which is connected by the two ends of armature coil.
These rings rotate with the rotation of the coil.
Axis
Armature Motion Field magnets

Fig. 7.39 ariation of emf in AC generator

Note fAC is produced by à generator haveng a large number of poies, then its
N v Number of poles x fOtatior per secon
frequenxy
2 2
where, P Is the nunber of poies, n is the rotat:oral frequency of the coil

Exomple 7.60 An AC genenator consists of a coil of 1000 turns

Brusbes each of area 100 cm and rotating at an anular speed of 100
rpm in a uniform maynetic field of 3.6 x
10T. Find the peak
and rms tulue of emf induced in the coil.
Sol. Given, numbet of turns N =1000,
R A =
100 cm' =100x 10'm² 10m'
100
FrequenKy, V
100 rpm =

=
Load, R Magnetic fiekd. B 3.6x 10T
Fig. 7.38 Construction of an ACgenerators » Peak value of emf. E, = NARn = NABI2v)
- 1000 x 5
(d) Brushes B, and B, are two flexible metal plates. They
0x3.6x 102x*x3.77
3
V

are fixed and are kept in light contact with R, and Ry or V

respectively. t is used to pass on current fron the E Ey--2.67
armature coil to the exterTna! load resistance R.
(e) Source of energy The armature coil is rotated with Z DCgenerator or dc dnamo
the heip of turbine or any other device connected to It is used for producing direct current energy from
it. The rotational kinetic energy of the turbine is mechanical energy.
rotational kinetic energv of the turbine is converted
into electrical energy by the AC generator.
(ii) Theory and working
As the armature coil is rotated in the magnetic field, angle
O between the field and nornal to the coil changes

continuously. Hence, magnetic flhx linked with the coil

also changes and therefore emf is induced in the coil.
Induced current in the external circuit changes direction
after every half rotation of the coil. Hence., the induced w

ibi
cuTent is of alternating in nature. The emf, so induccd is al

given by the formula, E = Ep sinot. Fig. 7.40 (a) and (b) Constructions of DC gencrator

where, E, = Emr = NABo The principle ad working of DC generator is same as that

0=angular frequency of the coil of AC generator. The only difference is that slip ring
N= number of turns in the coil arrangement of AC generator is replaced by split ring
A= area enclosed by each turn of the coil arrangement or commutator arrangement in DC generator.
B= strength of magnetic field The magnitude of enmf induced in DC generator is also
E E, sinor
482 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

Howevet, the dretion of Eis tK* revetsed in the second half (iii) In AC, energy loss is minimum, so it can be
cycle tecalse after half the rotation of the coil, R, goes in transmitted over large distances.
contaxt with B, and R,gms in contact with B,. The variation (iv) Wide range of voltages are obtained by the use of
of F with time in DC. genNrator is shown in figure bekow. transfoner.
11 (v) AC machines have low maintainance cost.

Disadvantages of AC over DC
Disadivntages ACover
of D
are given below.
() An AC is transmitted from surface of the conductor
Fig. 7.4I lariation of emf in DCgenerator and hence necd several strands of thin wire insulated
from each other.
Advantages of AC over DC (ii) AC shock is more attractive, while D. shock is
repulsive. So, AC is more harmful.
Advuntaes of AConrr ICare given belou
(iii) AC caunot te used in electroplating process because
The generation of AC is casy and economical.
(i) here constant current is nceded which is given by D.
(ü)AC cat casily be converted into DC with the help of
tectifiers.

Check point 7.4

1. Choke coil is a device having 7. In a transformer, the numter of turns in primary and
(a) low inductancCe and kow resistance secondary are 500 and 2000 espectivety. If current in
(b) hgh inductance hugh resistance pimary is 48 A the current n the secondary is
(c) ow nductance and hoh resistance (a) 12 A (b) 24 A
(d) hoçh nductance and low resstance (c) 48 A (di 144 A

2. What Is increased in step-down transformer? 8. The core used in a transformer and other electromagnetic
(a) Voltage (b) Current devices is larninated so that
(C) Power (d) Current density (a) ratio ot voltage in the primary and secondary may
3. A tanstormer works on the principle of be incteased
(a)selt-nducton (b) energy loss due to eddy currents may be mininised
(D) electrcal nertia (c) the vweight ot the transtformer nay be reduced
(c) mutual induction
(d) residua! rnagnetsm n the core may be reduced
() magetc ettect of the electrical current
9. Which of the fotiowing is constructed on the prnciple of
4. Quarntity that remains unchanged in a transformer is
electromaçnetic induction?
(a) voltage (D) Cutent
(a) Gavarometer
(c) frecuency (d) None ot these
(b) Electric rnotor
5. The ratio of secorxtary the prinary turns in a transtormer
to
(c) Generator
is 3 2 If the power output be P, then the input power (d) Voltmeter
neglectirng all losses must be equal to
(a) 5 P (D) 1.5 P (c) P () 2/5) P 10. When speed ot a DC generator decreases, the arrnature
Current
6. The transtomation ratio in the step-up transtorrmer is
(a) incteases
(a) 1

(b) decreases
(b) greater than one
(c) does not change
(c) less than one
(d) increases and decreases continuOusly
(a) the ratio greater o less than one depends on the other
factors
Chapter
exercises
A.) Taking it together
(Assorted questions of the chopter for advanced level proctice)
1. The resistance of a coil for C
is 52. 1n case of AC, 8. Which of the following curves correctly represent
the resistance will the variation of capacitive reactance (N) with
(a) tenain 52 (b)
frequeney ()?
decIease
lcl inctease {d) be zeto
2. In non-resonant circuit, wlhat will be the nature of
the citcuit lor frequecncies higher than the resonant
frequencv?
La) Resistive b) Cipsacitive
Indutive
lc) (d) Nonc of thesc
3. A choke coil has
(a) high
induetance and low tesistance
low indutance atd high rsistace
(b)
lel bigh inhataee and high resistace
(di low inductance and low resistance
4. A circuit contains a capacitor and inductance cach 9. L, Cand R denote inductance, capacitance and
with negligithle resistance. The capacitor is initially resistance tespectively. Pick out the combination
charged and the charging lattery is disconcetcd. At which does not have the dimensions of frequency
subsequent tine, the charge on the capacitor will C
(a) (h) deczeave cxponentially (a) (b)
iktcae exonentially RC WLC
decreae lincatly
lch (d) remin constant
10. An AC source is conncctei to a capacitor. The
5. A choke is pueferred to a tesistance for limiting current in the circuit is 1. Now a dielectric slab
is

Current in AC circuit bocause

inserted into the capacitor, then the new current is
(a) coke is cheap (a) vqual to / (b) more than /
(b} there is o wastage of Kower (c) less than I td) may be more than
or
less than
(c) conupat in size
loke is :
(dh choke is a
god aborber of heat 11. An alternatig voltage connected in series with
is

6. The frequeney for whicha 5 uf capacitor has

a resistance Rand an inductance I.. If the poterntial
across the
drop across the resistance is 200 V and
feactance of 100) 2is given by inductance is 150 V,then the applied voltage is
V
(a) 350 V tb) 250
MIL, (bi tcHz (d) 1000 Hz
= = V,
I000 12. An lL-R circuit has R 10Q and 2H. If 120
L

What will be the approximate resistance offered by a

7. 60 H: AC voltage is applied, then current in the
capacitor of 10 uf and frequency 100 H2? circuit will be
(a) 0.32A (b) 0.16A
(c) 162 (d) None of these (d) 0.80 A
(c) 0,48 A
484 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS VolL 2

which passes through

a
V,

20. An AC supply gives 30

13. A complex current wave is given by power dissijated in it is
i (5+ sin 100 )A. Its average value
5 over one 102 resistance. The
(b) 90 W
time period is given as (a 90/2W
(a) 10 A (b) 5 A
c) 45V2 w ) 45 w
(c V50 A ot is applied
21. An alternating otentialV=, sin
is 5 A, the
14. If the rms current in 50 1l AC circuit across a circuit. As a restult the curtent
a

value of the current 1/300 after its value becones

s
[NCERT Exemplar) I I, sin ot- in it. The power consume
lows
zero is
(a) 5v2 A (b) 54372 A
in the circuit per cycle is
(c) 5 /6A () zero (bi 0.5, I,
of an E givern by ,
15. The peak value alteating enf tc
0.707 V,
22. A direct current of 2 A and an alternating current
is 10 V and frequency is 50 Hz. At tine having a maximun value of 2A flow through two
is
t
=(|/600) s, the instantaneous value of emí identical resistaIces. The ratio of heat prodiuced in
v
la) 10 V (b) 5N3 the two resistances will be
lch5V (a) I:1 (b) ! :2
16. Current and voltage in AC areI
=
l, sin kot - z/ 4) (c) 2: 1 (d) 4:1

and =
l, sin lest + n/4), Then 23. In a heating arrangenent, an alternating current
(b) RO having a jak value of 28A is used. To proluce the
(c) Both afe correct fdi koth are wrong sane leat energy. if the constant curtent is used, its
S mH coil ansd 10 uf capacitor are magnitude must be
17. A 102 resistance, (al atxnut 14A (b) abot 28 A
a
joined in series. When suitable ftequeney (c) atxut 20 A ) Cannot say
alternating cutent soutce is joine to this an AC
conbination, the circuit reonates. If the resistance
is 24. A lamp consumes only 50% of peak power in
circuit. What is the phase difference between the
halved, the reson.tice frequency
b is doutsled applied voltage and circuit current
al is halved
k temains us hangl Id in quLnrupled
18. The resonant frequenCy of a circuit is If the . (a)
6
capacitance made times the
is 4 initial valuIe, then d)
the resonant frequency will becomne 4 2
(a) f2 25. 110 applied across a series circuit having
is
f4 resistance l1 Q and impednce 22 S2. The power
19. An alternating emf is applied across a parallel consumed is
combination of a tesistance R. capacitace Cand an (al 275 W (6) 366 W
inductance L. If 1p. I, and l, are the currents 550 W
(c) (d) 1100 W
through R. L and Crespetively, then the diagrn
26. A 20V AC is applicd to a circuit coIsisting of a
which cotetly reptesents, the phase relationship
among /p. l.le and source emf E is given by resistance and a coil witlh a negligible resistance. II
the voltage actoss the resistance is 12 V, the voltage
actoss the coil is
(a) 16 V (b) 10 V
(b) ()
(c) 8 V 6V
27. To reduce the resonant frequency in an L-CR series
circuit with a generator (NCERT Exemplam
(a) the generator frequency shnuld be reduced
(b) anothet capacitor should le addd in parallel to thbe firs
{c) (d) (c) the iron core of the induKtor shouid be removed
td) dicletric in the capacitoz should be renoved
 Chapter 07: Alternating current 485

28. The output sinusoidal current vrsus time curve ofa 35. Which of the shown graphs may represent the
rectifier is shown in the igure. The average value of reactance of a series L-C combination?
output current in this case is Rextanxe Reatatce

(a) (6)
Freqieny Frequency

Tine Rextance Rextance

(al 0 (c)
Irequccy FTepency
29. An alternating voltage is given by
e=e cos o!
sin ot + e,
Then, thie root mcan square value of voltage 36. Two coils have a mutual inductance 0.005 H. The
is given by alternating current changes in the firstcoil according
to equation = lo sin ot, where lo = 10 A and
lal e
+; o= 100n ras.The maxinum value of enf in the
second coil
V2 2 is (in volt)
30. Voltage and current an AC circuit are given by (a) 2 n (b) 5
(c) n

V=5 sin 100t != 37. Two identical electric heaters each marked 10X0 W,
-and
6)
4 sin 100n +
6 220 Vare connected in series. This conbination is
(al voltage leads the current by :30 connccted to an AC supply of 220 V. What will c
(b) cunent leads the voltage bv 30 their combined rate of heating? (Assune that
(cl current lcads the voltage by 60 resistance of each beater remains constant)
(d) voltage leads the current by 6( la) 2000 W (b) 100 W
lc) 500 W (d) 250 w
31. An alternating voltage E = 20042 sin (1001) is
38. In an L-R circuit, the inductive reactance is equal to
connected to a!
uf capacitor through an AC the resistance Rof the circuit. An emf
ammeter. The reading of the ammeter shall be
(a) 10 mnA (b) 20 mnA (c) 40 mA (d) 80 mA
E E, cs ot) is applied to the circuit. The paower
consunexl in the circuit is
32. A cojl having an inductance of henry is connected (b E (c)
2R 8R
in series with a resistance of 300 2. If 20 V and a
200 Hz source are impressed across the combination, 39. A clhoke coil nd capacitor are connected in series
the value of the tangent of the phase angle letween and the current through the combination is maximum
the voltage and le current is for AC of frequency n. Ifthey are connected in
5 3 parallel, at what frequency is the current through the
lal (b) (c)
4 4 3 combination minimun?
(b) n/2
33. A condenser of cajacity 20 uF is first charged and (e) 2n (dh None
of these
then discharged through a 10 nH inductance. 40. In a transformer, the coefficient mutual inductance
of
Neglecting the resistance of the coil, the frequency of between the primary and the secondary coil is 0.2 11.
the restulting vibratios will b When the current cthanges by 5 A/s in the primary,
(a) 356 cycles's (b) 35.6 cycles/s the induced emf in the secondary will be
(cl 356x 10' cycles/s () 3.56 Cycles/s (al 5 V (b) I V
34. An electric current has thoth DC and AC components. (e) 25 V (d) 10 V
DC conponent of 81 and AC component is given as 41. In a transformer, number of turns in the primary are
I 6siot. So I,ms Value of resultant current is 140 and that in the sccondary are 280. If current in
(a) 8.05 A (b) 9.05 A primary is 4 A, then that in the secondary is
(c) 11.58 A (d) 13.58 A (a) 4 A (b) 2 A (c) 6A (d) 10 A
486 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

42. A circuit contains resistance R and an inductance L 47. An alternating current / in an inductance coil varies
in series. An alternating voltage V V, sin ot is with time according to the graph given below, Which
applied actoss it. The currents in R and L one of the following graphs gives the variation of
respectively will e voltage with time?
R
W

(a) ,
=l, cos ot, =l, cos ot
=-
(b) I,
(c)
I ,
I, sin ot, l; =l, cos
sin ot. , =-l, cos o!
0! (b)

atove
(d) Nonec of the
43. A transformer has 500 primary turns and 10
secondary tus, I the secondary has a resistive load
of 15S2. the currents in the priarv and secondary
respectively. are (d)
(tb) 3.2 x
(a) 0.16 A, 3.2 x 10 A 1o'A, 0.16A
lc) 0.16 A, 0.16 A (d) 3.2 10 A.3.2 x 10 A
x

44. A 50 H. AC source of 20 V is cohected aeOSs R

and G as shown in figure. The voltage across Ris 48. resistor and a capacitor are connected in series
A
12 V. The voltage across C is with an AC sourcc. If the tential drop across the
capacitor is 5 V and that acrOsS resistor is 12 V, then
applied voltage is
(a 13 V (b) 17 V () 3V (d) 12 V
49. When a voltage measuring device is counected to AC
mais, the meter shows the steady input voltage of
220 V. his meaS (NCERT Exemplar]
(a) input voltage cantot be AC voltage, but a DC voltage
(a) 8V (b) maximum input voltage is 220 V
) 16 V lc) tlhe ieter reads not p but <v'> and is calibrated to read
(ct 10 V
dh not possible to determine uunless value of R
(d) the puinter of the meter is tuck by sone mechatical
and C are given
defect
45. In an AC circui, V and I are given by
50. The rns voltage of the wave form shown is
=
V= 150sind 50) V and ! 150 sin 15Or A.
The power dissipated in the circuit is
(a) 1(% w (b) 150 w (c) 5625 W (d) zero

46. In the series L-GR circuit shown, the impedance is

10
V
(a) () 7V
20 uf (d) None of these
(c) 6.37V
51. Using an AC voltmeter, the potent ial difference in
the electrical lie in a house is fotund to be 234 V.
1f

the line frequency is kown to be 50 cycles per second.

the equation for the line voltage is
(a) 163 sin 200a1) (b) 234 sin (100%t)
(a) 2002 fb) 100S2 (c) 300N tdi 300Sn (c) 331sin 100zr) (d) 440 sin 200xt)
 Chapter 07: Alternating current (487

52. The output of a step-down transfotmer is measured 56. An inductance of I mH, a condenser of 10
to be 24V when connected to a 12 W light bulb. uf and a
resistance of 50 2 are connccted in series. The
The value of the peak current is (NCERT Exemplarl reactances of inductor and condensers arc same.
(al! / V2 A (b) 2A The
(c)2 A (d 242 A reactance of either of them will be
53. Thc ns value of an AC of 3O Hz is 10 A. The time (a) 100Q (b) 3092
taken by an alternating current in reaching from zero to (c) 3.22 td) 1092
maximum value and the Jpeak value of current wilI be 57. An AC source of variable freguency fis connected to
(al 2x 10s and 14.14 A (b) x 10s and 7,07 A an L-C-R series circuit. Which one
of the graphs in
(c) 5 x 10s and 7.07 A (d) figure represents the variation of current / in the
5x 10s and 14.14 A
circuit with frequeIcy
54. A constant voltage at different frequencies is applied f?
across a capacitarIce Cas shown in the figurc. Which
of the following graphs correctly depicts the
variation of current with frequency? (b)

Sigal
Geterator

(c)

(a b)
58. The armature of DC motor has 209 resistarnce. It
draws current of 1.5 A when run by 220 V DC.
supply. The value of back emf induced in it will be
(a) 150 V (b) 170 V (c) 180 V (d) 190 V
59. A group of electric Lanps having a total ower
(d) of 1000 W is supplied by an AC
rating
voltage
E = 200 sin 310t+ 60°), tlhen the rns value of
the
to
circuit Current is
55. The voltage across a pure inductor is (a) 10 A (b) 5/2 A
represented in
figure. Which one of the following curves in (c)20 A (di 1042 A
the
figure will represent the current? 60. An alternating voltage V=30 sin 50: + 40 cos 30: is
applied to a resistor of resistance 10 2. The rms
value of current through resistor is
10
V2
(c) 5 A (d) None of these
61. An alternating voltageV= 140 sin
50: is applied to a
resistor of 102. This voltage produces AH heat in
the resistor in timne At. To produce the same heat in
the sarne time, required DC current is
(a) 14 A (b) abotut 20 A
lc) about 10 A (d) None of these
62. In a certain circuit current changes with time
according to i= 2t. Root mean square
value of
Current between t 2 tot= 4swill be
(a) 3A (b) 343 A
(c) 2V3 A (d) v3 A
488 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

63. The power factor of an R-L circuit is If the 70. The figure shows variation of R, X, and Xç with
V2 frequency fin a series L. C. R circuit. Then, for what
frequecy of AC is doubled, wiat will be the power frequency point, the circuit is inductive?
factor?
1

64. When a DC voltage of 20OV is applied to a coil of

self inductance (23 / )H a current of IA flows
through it. But by teplacing DC soutce with AC A
B
source of 200V, the current in the coil is reduced to
(a) A (b) B (c) C (d) All points
0.5A Then the frequency of AC supply is
(a)30 Hz (b) 60 Hz (c) 75 1I: 50 Hz (d) 71. In the given figure, a series L-C-R circuit is
63. One 10 V, 60 W bulb is to be connected to 100 V connectedto a variable frequency source of 230 V.
line. The required self-inductance of indication coil The impedance and amplitude of the current at th
will be (f - 50 Hz) resonating frequency wilI be
la) 0.052H b) 2.42 11 (c) 16.2 H (d) 16.2 mH L
0.5 H C 80 uf R
40 n
66. The reading of amneter in the circuit shown will be

10v(-)
(a) 20Q and 4.2A (b) 30S2 ad 6.9 A
(c) 232 and 5.8 A (d) 402 and 5.75 A
(a) 2A (b) 2.4 A (c) Zero (d) 1.7 A 72. In figure, which voltmeter rcads zero, when o is cqual
67. In series L-C-R circuit voltage drop across resistance to the resonant frequency of series L-C-R circuit?
is 8 V and across inductor is 6 V and across capacitor
is 12 V. Then
(a) voltage of the source will be leading in the circuit
(b) voltage drop across each element will be less than the
appled voltage
w I0 m2

(c) power lactor of the circuit will be 3/4

(d) None of the above

68. In a series L-C-R circuit, resistance R = 102 and the

impedance Z - 10Q. The phase difference between
the current and the voltage is (a) V, (b) V,
(a) 0P (b) 30 (c) 45 (d) 60
(d) None of these
69. For the series L-CR circuit shown in the figure,
73. An R-L-Ccircuit containing a 52 2 resistor, a 230 mH
what is the resonance Írequency and the current at a
inductor, and 8.8 uF capacitor is driven by an
the resonating frequency? AC voltage source that has an amplitude of 150 V
BmH
and frequency f = 80 Hz. How much average power
is dissijated by this circuit?
z20V a
(a) 78.6 W (bi Zero (c) 19.6 W () 24.8 W
20
74. The natural frequency of the circuit shown in the
figure is
(a) 2500 rad s and 5V2 A
(b) 2500 rads and 5 A
(c) 2300 rad s and

(d) 25 rads and 52 A

 Chapter 07: Alternating current489

79. A signal generator supplies a sine wave of 20 V,

5 kliz to the cireuit sown in the figure. Then
choose the wrong statement.
2
2n WLC
(d None of these

76. In tlhe cireuit shown what is the energy stored in the

coil at steady state?
23 V AAAA

5129 102

(a) The cuItent in the resistive branch is 0.2A

25 6) (b) The current in the capacitive brarnch is 0.126 A
lc) Total line current is 0.283 A
(al 21.3J t) 42.6 le) Zero (d) 213 J (d) Current in both the iranches is same
76. A loss-free transtormer having 100 turns in primary 80. An AC source is 120 V-60 1H,. The value of voltage
is used to trausnit 10 kW of ower. The input s
after from start will be
voltage is 200 V and ower is transnitted at 5 kV. 720
The currents in the primary and secondary of tlhe La) 20.2V (b) 42.4V (c) 84.8V () 106.8V
Iransforiner are 81. A pure resistive circuit elementXwhen connected to
(a) 2 A ad 50 A (b) 50 A and 2 A
an AC supply of peak voltage 200 V. gives a peak
(c) 25 A and 4 A id) 12.5 A and 8 A
current of 5A. A second cireuit element ', when
77. For series L-C-RAC circuit shown in figure, the connected to the same AC supply also gives the same
readings of V, and V, ate same and cach equal to value of eak current but the current lags behind by
100 V. Then 90". I| the series combination of N and Y' is
VW connected to the same supply, what will be the rms
value of current?
5 5
(a (b) (d) 5 A

82. A coil, a capacitor and an AC source of rms voltage

24 V are connected in series. By varying the
200 V, 50 H: frequency of the source, a maximum rns current of
6 A is observed. If this coil is connected to a battery
(a) the rexling V, is XX0 V
of emf 12 V and internal resistance 4 2, the
(b) the rexing of V, is 0
(c) the circuit is in resonant mede and resonant frequency
maximum curreit through it will Ix
iv 50 Hz
(al 2.4 A (b) 1.8 A
(c) 1.5 A (d) 1.2 A
(l) the iluctive ad capcitive teactance ate equal 83. In the L-C-R circuit as shown in figure.
78. In the given figure, which voltmeter will read zero N
20 2

voltage at resonant frequency?

R
10)

ww

400 sin eot

(a) Current will lead the voltage

(b) Rrs value of curtent is 20 A
Ey sin ot
(c) Power factor of the citcuit is
(a) V, lc) V
(d) V,
(d) Voltage drop acTOSs resist.ane is 200 V
490) OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol 2

84. In the circuit shown below what will be the reading 88. In the adjoining AC circuit the voltmeter whose
of the voltmeter and atmneter? reading will be zero at resonance is

300 V 300 V
A

220 V, 5) H: (c)V,
(b),
(a) 200 V. I A (b) 800V, 2 A 89. An altermating current generator has an internal
(c) 220 V, 2 A (d) 220 V. 2.2 A resistance R, and an internal reactance X,. It is used
to supplv power to a passive load consisting of a
85. In the circuit shown in figure neglecting source
fesistance, the voltmeter and ammeter readings will resistance and a reactanee X,. For maximmum
R

be respectively JKower to te delivered from the generator to the load,

the value of N, is equal to [NCERT Eemplar]
(a) zero (b)X, tc)-X,, (d) R.
90. Which of the following combinatioIs should be
selected for better tuning of an L-CRcircuit used for
coimnication? [NCERT Exemplar]
=
(a) R 209. L=15 H.C =35 F

(b) R =252, L = 2.5 H.C = 45uF

(c)R=152. I. =3.5 H. C = 3uF
240 \ (d)R =232, L =1.5 H. C =45uF
(a) 0 V,
3A (6) 130 V, 3 A 91. For the circuit as shown in the figure the current
(e) 130 V, 6 A (d) o V.8A through the inductor is 1.6 A, while the current
86. The following series L-C-R circuit, when driven by through the condenser is 0.4 A. Then. the curent
an emf source of angular frequency 70 kilo-radians drawn from the sonitce is
per second, the circuit effectively ctaves like
100 mH I
mF
10 W

(a) purely resistive circuit

(b) serie R-L circuit
(c) serices RCcircuit
(a) I=2V2A (b) = 1.65 A
=0
(d) series L-Cciteuit witlh R
(c) = 1.2 A
l=2.0 A
(d)

. 92. In the citcuit sthown in figure, the supply has a

87. In the circuit shown in the figute the alterhating
constant ms value Vbut variable frequency f. The
currents through inductor and capacitor are 1.2A
frequency at which the voltage drop across R is
and 1.0 A respectively. The current drawn fronn the Inaximum is
geDertor is

AC tetetatot 200 V

(a) 0.4 A (b) 0.2 A lc) L.0 A (d) 1.2A (a) 100 Hz (b) 500 H
(c) 300 i (d) None of these
 Chapter 07: Alternating current (491

93. When an AC voltage, of variable frequency is 98. In the circuit shown, the AC source has voltage
applied to series L-C-R circuit, the current in the V= 20 cos ost) volt with o = 200X0 rads the
circuit is the same at 4 kHz and 9 kHz, The current ampitude of the current will nearest to e
in the circuit is maximum at ww
(a) 5 kH (b) 6.3 kHZ (c) 4.2 kllz (d) 6 kll2
60
94. In the given AC circuit

5
mll,40 50 F

(c) 2/N5A (d) V5A

(a) 2 A (b) 3.3 A

99. In a series L-C-R circuit the voltage across resistance,

capacitance and inductance is 10V each. If the
capacitance is short circuited, the voltage actoSs the
inductance will be
10, (b) 10 V
(c) 1042 Vv
(d) 20 V
(a) current 7, and V are is same phase
(b) current I, leads by 90 100. In the circuit shown, rms current is 11 A. The
(c) current / leadsl, by 0 <
0

potential difference across the inductor is

(d) current / leads I, by 0<90°

95. An ideal resistance R, ideal inductance, L, ideal

capacitarnce Cand AC voltmneters V,.V,.V, and V, are R20 12

connccted to an AC source as shown. AI resonance

(c) 300V (d) 200 V

(a) 220 V
0V (b)
101. An inductor of reactance I2 and a resistor of 22
are connected in series to the terminals of a 6V (rms)
(a) Reading in V, teading in 1, AC source. The power dissipated in the circuit is
(b) Reading in V, = rexling in V, (NCERT Esemplar]
(c) Reading in V, =reading in V, lc) 14.4 W" (d) 18 W

(a) 8 1W (bl 12 W
(d) Reading in V, eading in V, a
102, An AC circuit consists of a resistance and choke
96. An AC voltage source of variable angular frequency
coil in series, The resistance is of 220 S2 and choke
) and fixed amplitude Vconnected in series with a
coils is of 0.7 11. The power alsorbed from 220 V
capacitance Cand an electric bulb of resistance R
and 50 Hz, soure connected with the circuit, is
(inductance zero), When ois increased (a) 55 W (b) 110 W (c) 220 W (d) 440 W
(a) The tbulb glows dimmer
103. In the series L-CR circuit, the voltmeter and
(b) The bulb glows brighter
(c) Total impedance of the circuit is unchanged
atnmeter readings are respectively
(d) Total inpedarxe of the circuit increases
97. The readings of ammeter and voltmeter in the 2XX> V X00V
following circuit are respectively
100 2

) 200 V 200 V t00 V, 50 H:

(b) 1.5A 100V V, (6) V =150 V, I =2A

(a) 2A 200V (a) V=20 I=4 A (d) V =100 V, I=2 A
(c) 27A220V (d) 22A 220V (cV=100 V,I=5A

492 OBJECTIVE PHYSICS Vol. 2

a
109. An L-C-R serics circuit consists of resistance
of
104. Current in resistarnce is
1
A, then a capacitor of reactance 60 S2 and an inductor
102 put across
R coil. The circuit is found to tesonate when
a 300 V. 100 Hz supplv. The inductance of coil is
8V
(take, n= 3)

491 of 904